JP2020108611A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an interest in a game of a player, about application of a privilege.SOLUTION: A game machine can determine a state to any one out of a plurality of states (for example, first to fourth application states) related to application of a privilege (for example, a point). According to the determined state, the game machine can display a plurality of state suggestion displays (for example, first to fourth displays). The state suggestion display can be displayed in a first period including the game, and a second period subsequent to the first period according to the determined state. In addition, if the game state is not controlled to a reporting state (for example, during a non-ART), when a result of the applied privilege becomes a prescribed result (for example, reaching to a regulated point), it is possible to determine whether or not to control a state to a reporting state, and if the game state is controlled to the reporting state (for example, during an AT), it is possible to determine whether or not to extend the reporting state when the applied privilege becomes a prescribed result.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 129

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a game called a pachi-slot provided with a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of symbols on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") after the game value such as medals and coins has been input, and requests the start of rotation of all reels. Output the signal. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers is performed on the program (hereinafter, referred to as “internal lottery process”), and a result of the lottery (hereinafter, “internal winning combination”). That is) and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and the symbol combination (display combination) relating to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of the privilege given to the player, a game value (medal etc.) is given, and a re-game (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game value The operation of a bonus game in which the chances of giving a game value increase can be mentioned.

Further, in such a gaming machine, a function of notifying information of a stop operation advantageous to the player so as to increase the probability of establishment of a specific winning combination (for example, a winning combination relating to the granting of a gaming value), that is, an assist time , "AT"). In addition, when a specific condition such as a specific symbol combination is displayed, the game state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than normal is operated, that is, the replay time (hereinafter, referred to as “RT”) Some have functions. Further, there is also one having a function of assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") in which AT and RT are simultaneously activated.

In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to store a winning history for a predetermined number of games, and when a winning history satisfies a predetermined condition, a predetermined privilege (eg, notification right) can be given There is a known one (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2012-205882, A

However, in such a gaming machine, since the condition for giving a predetermined privilege is predetermined, for example, when the current winning history cannot meet the predetermined condition, the player does not There was a problem that I could not hold my expectations and the interest in the game was diminished.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the player in terms of granting a privilege.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A winning combination determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a first combination (for example, replay combination) and a second combination (for example, bell),
Based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of symbols is provided. A gaming machine,
A first state (e.g., a first awarding state) in which a privilege (e.g., points) can be awarded when the first winning combination is won, and a second state in which the award can be awarded when the second winning combination is won. (For example, a second imparting state), and a state determining unit capable of determining any one of a plurality of states,
A state display means (for example, a state display area (MP)) capable of displaying a state suggestion display including a first display suggesting the first state and a second display suggesting the second state;
When a specific start condition is satisfied (for example, when an AT-winning lottery is won), a notification state control unit (for example, AT) that controls the player to a notification state (for example, AT) in which information of the stop operation can be notified for a specific period. , A main CPU 101),
The state display means displays the state suggestion display according to the determination result by the state determination means for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period,
When not controlled to the notification state, the specific start condition is set when the privilege granted in the first state and the second state has a predetermined result (for example, when a specified point is reached). It is possible to decide whether to establish it,
When controlled to the notification state, it is possible to determine whether to extend the specific period when the privilege granted in the first state and the second state has the predetermined result. A gaming machine characterized by.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the state determining means determines a state in a predetermined game in the second period according to a winning combination in the game.

The state determining means determines the state in the predetermined game of the second period to the first state when the first combination is won in the game, and when the second combination is won in the game, The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the state in a predetermined game of the second period is determined to be the second state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to determine any one of a plurality of states (for example, the first granting state to the fourth granting state) relating to the grant of the privilege (for example, points). Further, it is possible to display a plurality of state suggestion displays (for example, first display to fourth display) according to the determined state. Then, the state suggestion display can be displayed for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period according to the determined state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in giving the privilege.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the informed state is not controlled (for example, during non-ART), when the granted privilege has a predetermined result (for example, a specified point is reached). It is possible to decide whether or not to control to the notification state, and when the notification state is controlled (for example, during AT), the notification state is extended when the granted privilege has a predetermined result. It is possible to decide whether or not. That is, regardless of which state the privilege granting is, the player's great concern is given. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player regarding the grant of the privilege.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to determine the state of the predetermined game in the second period according to the winning combination in the game. That is, according to the game result of the player himself/herself, the advantage degree of the game changes and the advantage degree in the subsequent game is determined. As a result, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, when the first combination is won in the game, the state in the predetermined game in the second period becomes the first state, and when the second combination is won in the game state. Is configured so that the state in the predetermined game in the second period becomes the second state. As a result, since the winning combination in the game becomes a chance combination in the subsequent predetermined game, it is possible to easily understand the game property that the subsequent state is generated according to the game result of the player himself. The interest of the game can be further improved.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player regarding the granting of a privilege.

It is a figure for explaining the functional flow of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the appearance structure of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the internal structure of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the internal structure of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing structure of a selector with which a game machine of one embodiment of the present invention is provided. It is a block diagram showing the whole circuit composition with which a game machine of one embodiment of the present invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the microprocessor in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram of various registers which the main CPU has in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the security mode of the main control circuit in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a transition flow of a game state between a bonus state and a non-bonus state of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the transition flow of the game state in the non-advantageous section, the normal advantageous section, and the advantageous section of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a symbol arrangement table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing a correspondence of an internal winning combination, a stop operation sequence (a batting order), a display combination, etc. in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a correspondence of an internal winning combination, a stop operation sequence (a batting order), a display combination, etc. in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing composition of a hit demand flag storage area and a winning operation flag storage area in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the internal carryover combination storing area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing composition of a game state flag storage area in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the press order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the symbol code storage area in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing a correspondence of an internal winning combination, a lottery number, and a winning combination number in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a correspondence of an internal winning combination, a lottery number, and a winning combination number in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining the flow of the game in the non-advantageous section in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining the flow of the game in the normal advantage section in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining the flow of the game in the line battle state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the various tables referred in the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display device in a line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display device in a line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display device in a line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display device in a line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display device in a line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for explaining the flow of the game in the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining the flow of the game in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining ending production performed in ending 1 state and ending 2 state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a correspondence of each game state, an internal winning combination, and navigation data in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of power-on (reset interruption) processing performed by the main control circuit of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game return processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change confirmation processing in one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change command generation/storage process according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of communication data storage processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of communication data pointer update processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power failure (external) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of checksum generation processing (out of regulation) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the sum check processing (out of regulation) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the sum check processing (out of regulation) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of the main processing (main operation processing) performed by the main control circuit of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal acceptance and start check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal acceptance and start check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal insertion processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal insertion check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal insertion check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of error processing according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of random number acquisition processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of internal lottery processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of design setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of compressed data storage processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a pull-in priority storage processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of design code acquisition processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the logical product operation processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of an acquisition priority acquisition processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of an acquisition priority acquisition processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reel stop control processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of winning a prize search processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of illegal hit check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of winning check and medal payout processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal payout number check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of RT check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the example of the interruption processing which is executed by the main control circuit of the game machine in one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of communication data transmission processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of WDT setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 7 segment LED drive processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 7 segment display data generation processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer update processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart showing an example of an operation at the time of turning on the power of the gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart showing an example of an operation at the time of inserting a medal of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram for explaining a production example (No. 1) of the bonus winning combination notification production of the gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram for explaining a production example (No. 1) of the bonus winning combination notification production of the gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram for explaining a production example (No. 2) of the bonus winning combination notification production of the gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram for explaining a production example (No. 2) of the bonus winning combination notification production of the gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram for explaining a production example (No. 3) of the bonus winning combination notification production of the gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 1) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 1) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 2) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 3) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 4) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 5) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 6) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 6) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing another example of the limiter of the advantageous section of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the control method of the number limiter of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the adjustment batting method of the number limiter of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a transition flow of the game state in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section of the gaming machine in another detailed example (No. 6) of the game property (game specification). It is a figure for explaining each mode in one detailed example of other examples (the 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure showing an example of various tables in a detailed example of other examples (the 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure showing an example of various tables in a detailed example of other examples (the 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in another detailed example (6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in another detailed example (No. 6) of the game property (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in another detailed example (No. 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in another detailed example (No. 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in another detailed example (No. 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in another detailed example (No. 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure showing an internal winning combination, a stop operation sequence (batting order), and a display combination etc. in one detailed example of other examples (the 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure for explaining each limit processing in one detailed example of other examples (the 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a flow chart which shows an example of cherry winning sound determination processing in one detailed example of other examples (the 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure for explaining mode suggestion production (the 1) in one detailed example of other examples (the 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure for explaining mode suggestion production (the 2) in one detailed example of other examples (the 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure for explaining mode suggestion production (the 2) in one detailed example of other examples (the 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a diagram for explaining a pseudo bonus medium music effect in another detailed example (sixth) of the game property (game specification). It is a figure for explaining a state suggestion production in one detailed example of other examples (the 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure for explaining another control example of the stable state and the rough wave state in one detailed example of another example (the 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating another control example (the 2) of the stable state and the rough wave state in one detailed example of another example (the 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of one detailed example of another example (the 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of one detailed example of another example (the 6) of game nature (game specification). It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 7) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 7) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 7) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 7) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 8) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 8) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 8) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 9) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 9) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 10) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 10) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 10) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 10) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention.

A pachi-slot is taken as an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a pachi-slot having a bonus operation function, an AT function, and an ART function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachi-slot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachi-slot of the present embodiment, medals are used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, for example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as the game medium. The game medium may also be referred to as "game value" or "game value".

When a player inserts a medal into a pachi-slot and operates a start lever, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. The internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By the determination of the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed along an activated line (winning determination line) described later is determined in advance. The types of symbol combinations are classified into those related to "winning prizes" in which benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), operation of bonuses, etc. are given to the player, and so-called "outliers". The related items are provided. In the following, the winning combination relating to the payout of medals is referred to as a “small winning combination”, and the winning combination relating to the operation of the replay (replay) is referred to as a “replay winning combination”. In addition, a winning combination (bonus game) is also referred to as a “bonus winning combination”. In addition, a winning combination that can be internally won (that is, a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established) is sometimes simply referred to as a “winning combination”, and an internal winning combination is a “winning combination”, a “predetermined result”, or It is sometimes called "derivation permission condition". Further, the internal lottery means may be referred to as a “winning combination determining means”, a “winning winning combination determining means”, a “preliminary determining means”, or a “derivation permissible condition determining means”.

Further, when the start lever is operated, the plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. To do. The reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. The operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one such as a start lever, and any operation means may be used as long as the player can perform the start operation. .. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to a button shape like a stop button, and any operation means may be used as long as the player can perform the stop operation. ..

In the pachi-slot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the “number of sliding pieces”. Then, in the present embodiment, when the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to four symbols.

The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination permitting the combination display of the symbols relating to the winning is determined, the combination of the symbols is normally placed on the activated line within a prescribed time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to be displayed as much as possible. Further, the reel stop control means uses the stipulated time to stop the rotation of the reel so that a combination of symbols which is not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the activated line. The symbol displayed when the reel rotation is stopped may be referred to as "stop display" or "display result". In addition, displaying a symbol on the activated line when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be expressed as “deriving a stop display” or “deriving a display result”.

Further, the reel stop control means automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed since the reel was rotated, even if the player has not performed a stop operation. You may make it perform stop control. In this case, since the reels will be stopped without the player's stop operation, even if any internal winning combination is determined, any combination of symbols related to winning is effective. It is desirable to stop spinning the reel so that it is not displayed along the line.

In this way, when the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped, the winning determination means determines that the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line is related to winning (or other predetermined one). It is determined whether or not there is. That is, it is determined whether or not a winning symbol combination (or other predetermined symbol combination) has been established. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, the combination of the symbols displayed is the one relating to the winning by the winning determination means (or other predetermined one) (that is, the combination of the symbols relating to the winning (or other predetermined combination of symbols). ) Is established), a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player, or various controls are performed in response to the privilege. In the pachi-slot, the above-described series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

The winning determination means determines whether or not the symbol combination displayed along the activated line corresponds to any symbol combination among a plurality of predetermined symbol combinations. It may be possible to determine whether or not it corresponds to the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means. That is, in the former case, it may be determined whether or not it is a combination of symbols related to winning, separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately controls the stop, the prevention of the false prize can be sufficiently ensured, so that the control load related to the false prize detection can be reduced. On the other hand, in the latter case, it is possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols related to winning is a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. Can be detected, so that it is possible to improve security.

Also, in the pachi-slot, in the sequence of the game operation described above, various effects are displayed by using the display of images by a display device, the output of light by various lamps, the output of sound by the speaker, or a combination of these. Is done.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number value for effect is extracted in addition to the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means randomly determines the effect to be executed this time from among a plurality of kinds of effect content associated with the internal winning combination. The effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later. Further, when the main control circuit described later determines the effect content, the effect content determination means may be one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect executing means responds to each of the triggers such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when the presence or absence of a prize is determined. To execute. As described above, in the pachi-slot, for example, by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination, the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of the symbols to be aimed) is a game. It is provided to the player and the interest of the player can be improved.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an external structure of the pachi-slot 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot 1 includes an exterior body (game machine body) 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet (housing) 2a that accommodates reels, circuit boards, and the like, and a front door (front door) 2b that is attached so that the opening of the cabinet 2a can be opened and closed.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means, display row) are arranged side by side in a row. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (main reels) are also referred to as the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape, and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. Then, on the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction (reel rotation direction). The reels 3L, 3C, 3R may be expressed as "symbol display means", "variable display means", "variable display", or the like. Moreover, there is a case where a symbol display area 4 described later is included as these constituent elements. Further, the “design” may be any information that can be visually identified by the player, and in that sense, it may be expressed as “identification information” or the like.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a waist panel 12, and a pedestal portion 13. The door body 9 is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 2a using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided on the left side end of the door body 9 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachi-slot 1. The cabinet 2a can be simply referred to as a "box", and the front door 2b can be simply referred to as a "door" or a "front door". Further, since the cabinet 2a functions as a frame body that supports or fixes the front door 2b, it may be expressed as "support body", "support frame", or "fixed frame". Further, the front door 2b may be composed of a plurality of door members. For example, it may be configured by an upper door member attached to the upper side of the opening of the cabinet 2a and a lower door member attached to the lower side of the opening of the cabinet 2a, or as seen from the front side of the gaming machine. It may be configured by an inner door member attached to the opening side of the cabinet 2a and an outer door member attached to the front side of the gaming machine.

The front panel 10 is provided above the door body 9. The front panel 10 is composed of a frame-shaped member having an opening 10a. The opening 10a of the front panel 10 is closed by the display device cover 30, and the display device cover 30 is arranged so as to face a display device 11 (described later) arranged inside the cabinet 2a.

The display device cover 30 is formed of black translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, the player can visually recognize a video (image) displayed on the display device 11 described later through the display device cover 30. In addition, in the present embodiment, the display device cover 30 is formed of a black translucent synthetic resin to suppress the entry of external light into the cabinet 2a, and the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 is suppressed. Is clearly visible.

A lamp group 21 is provided on the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, lamps 21a and 21b provided on the upper portion of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side. Each of the lamps included in the lamp group 21 is configured by an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like (see an LED group 85 in FIG. 6 described later), and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the effect contents.

The waist panel 12 is provided at a substantially central portion of the door body 9. The waist panel 12 includes a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source (LED included in an LED group 85 described later) that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

The pedestal portion 13 is provided between the front panel 10 and the waist panel 12. In the pedestal portion 13, the symbol display area 4 and various devices to be operated by the player (medal insertion slot 14, MAX bet button 15a, 1 bet button 15b, start lever 16, three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, a payment button (not shown), etc. are provided.

The symbol display area 4 is an area overlapping with the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position closer to the player than the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the three reels. A predetermined area in 3L, 3C, 3R is made visible. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind it can be visually recognized. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

The reel display window 4 has three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind it, and when the rotations of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, among the plurality of symbols provided on the circumferential surface of each reel, the reels are arranged in succession. Two symbols are configured to be displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, in the frame of the reel display window 4, one symbol is provided in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel (a total of three symbols). ) Is displayed (in the frame of the reel display window 4, symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows×3 columns).

In the present embodiment, in the frame of the reel display window 4, a line (center line) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle region of the right reel 3R, and the left reel 3L. A line (top line) connecting the upper area, the upper area of the middle reel 3C, and the upper area of the right reel 3R, and the lower area of the left reel 3L, the lower area of the middle reel 3C, and the lower area of the right reel 3R. The line (bottom line) connecting the points is defined (defined) as an effective line for determining whether or not a prize is won. The effective line may also be referred to as a “winning line” or a “determination line”.

In the present embodiment, other lines, for example, a line (cross-up line) connecting the lower region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R, and the left reel 3L. A line (crossdown line) connecting the upper area, the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the lower area of the right reel 3R may be further defined as an effective line. Further, in the present embodiment, the effective lines are the above-mentioned three lines (or may be five lines as described here), but the number of lines can be appropriately increased or decreased. For example, only one of the center lines may be the effective line, or only two lines, the top line and the bottom line, may be the effective lines. Further, when defining an effective line, a line in which the symbols are not aligned may be defined as an effective line instead of each line in which the above-mentioned symbols are aligned. That is, as long as it is a line that passes through (any area of) one of the symbols in each column (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, right reel 3R), one or a plurality of lines configured by connecting with straight lines or polygonal lines It can be set as an effective line.

For example, a line (irregular line) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the lower region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R may be defined as an effective line. That is, in the present embodiment, since the symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows×3 columns in the frame of the reel display window 4, 27 effective lines can be defined. At least one of the lines may be defined as an effective line.

The reel display window 4 is formed by the opening of the frame member 31 provided in the pedestal portion 13. Further, below the frame member 31 that defines the reel display window 4, a pedestal region of a substantially horizontal plane is provided. When viewed from the player side, the medal slot 14 is provided on the right side of the pedestal area, and the MAX bet button 15a and the 1 bet button 15b are provided on the left side.

The medal slot 14 is provided to receive medals that are dropped from the outside by the player onto the pachi-slot 1. The medals received from the medal insertion slot 14 are used for one game with a predetermined number (for example, 3) set in advance as an upper limit, and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number is deposited inside the pachi-slot 1. It is possible (a so-called credit function (game medium storing means)).

The MAX bet button 15a and the 1 bet button 15b are provided to determine the number of coins to be used for one game from the medals stored inside the cabinet 2a. A bet button LED (not shown) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided inside the MAX bet button 15a. The payment button is provided for pulling out (discharging) the medals stored inside the pachi-slot 1 to the outside.

When the player presses the MAX bet button 15a, medals corresponding to the number of bets in the unit game (three) are inserted and the activated line is activated. On the other hand, each time the bet button 15b is pressed once, one medal is inserted. When the 1 bet button 15b is operated three times, the number of medals (three) for the unit game is inserted, and the activated line is activated.

In the following, the operation of the MAX bet button 15a, the operation of the 1 bet button 15b, and the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 14 (the operation of inserting a medal for playing a game) are all referred to as "insertion operation".

The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are also referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

In addition, an information display 6 is provided at a substantially central portion of a pedestal area on a substantially horizontal plane below the reel display window 4. The information display 6 is covered with a transparent window cover (not shown).

The information display 6 is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as "payout number") to the player. Information for digitally displaying (notifying) the player (hereinafter, referred to as "7-segment LED") and information such as the number of medals deposited in the pachi-slot 1 (hereinafter referred to as "credit number"). A 2-digit 7-segment LED is provided. In the present embodiment, the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of paid-out medals is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) the error occurrence and error type information to the player. Is also used. Therefore, when an error occurs, the display mode of the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the payout number of medals is switched from the display mode of the payout number to the display mode of the information on the error type.

In addition, the information display 6 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying the information of the stop operation necessary for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the activated line. ing. The instruction monitor (instruction display) is composed of, for example, a 2-digit 7-segment LED. Then, on the instruction monitor, the 2-digit 7-segment LED is turned on, blinked, or turned off in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, thereby informing the player of the necessary stop operation information. To do.

Note that, here, the mode uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified means, for example, when the pressing order “1st (perform the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)” is notified. When the numerical value “1” is displayed on the instruction monitor and the pressing order “2nd (perform the first stop operation to the middle reel 3C)” is notified, the numerical value “2” is displayed on the instruction monitor and the pressing order In the case of notifying "3rd (perform the first stop operation on the right reel 3R)", a numerical value "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor. Note that the notification mode of the stop operation information on the instruction monitor (navi data determined on the main side described later) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

In addition, the information display device 6 includes a status display device (not shown) for notifying that it is an advantageous section advantageous to the player (including a "normal advantageous section" and a "advantageous section" described later. See FIG. 14 described later). Is provided. The status indicator is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED. As a general rule, the status indicator lights up at a predetermined timing during the game when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section (for example, at any timing from the start of the game to the end of the game), and the advantageous section continues. While it is on, the lighting continues. Then, when the advantageous section ends, the lighting ends and the light is turned off. As a result, all players are notified that the advantageous section that is advantageous to the player starts, that the advantageous section is in progress, and that the advantageous section ends, so that the fairness of the game is ensured. ..

The information display 6 is electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the game operation display board 81, as shown in FIG. It is controlled by a main control circuit 90 described later in the control board 71. Further, the control method of the various 7-segment LEDs described above is dynamic lighting control.

In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, another configuration controlled by the sub-control board 72 is used to notify the stop operation information. Specifically, the information of the stop operation is notified by the display device 11 described later, which is configured by the projector mechanism 211 and the display unit 212 (see FIG. 3 and FIG. 6 described later) which will be described later.

When such a configuration is applied, the notification mode in the instruction monitor and the notification mode in the other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be different modes. That is, in the instruction monitor, it is sufficient to inform in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, the numerical value “1” in the instruction monitor). Even if is displayed, there is a possibility that the content of the notification cannot be specified depending on the player, and it cannot be said that it is a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification on the sub side (sub control board side) by other means such as the display device 11 described later, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order “1st” is notified, the numerical value “1” uniquely corresponding to the push order to be notified is displayed on the instruction monitor, but with other means (for example, the display device 11 or the like), the left reel 3L. Alternatively, the instruction information for performing the first stop operation may be directly notified.

In the pachi-slot 1 having such a configuration, not only the control of the sub control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination. Further, the presence or absence of the notification of the information of such a stop operation can be controlled according to the game state. For example, in a gaming state (normal state) in a later-described normal section, information about a stop operation is not notified, but in a gaming state in each of a later-described normal advantageous section and an advantageous section, information about a stop operation can be reported. it can.

A sub display device 18 is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 as viewed from the player side. As shown in FIG. 2, the sub display device 18 is provided so as to stand substantially vertically from the pedestal region of the pedestal portion 13 on the substantially horizontal surface of the front surface portion of the door body 9. The sub display device 18 is composed of a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and displays various information.

Further, a touch sensor 19 is provided on the display surface of the sub display device 18 (see FIG. 6 described later). The touch sensor 19 operates according to a predetermined operation principle such as an electrostatic capacitance method, and when a player's operation is received, it outputs a signal according to the operation as touch input information. The pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment is capable of switching the display of the sub display device 18 in accordance with the player's operation (touch input information output from the touch sensor 19) received via the touch sensor 19. Have. The sub-display device 18 is controlled by a sub-control board 72 described later (see FIG. 6 described later) based on touch input information output from the touch sensor 19.

A medal payout opening 24, a medal receiving tray 25, two speaker holes 20L and 20R, etc. are provided in the lower portion of the door body 9. The medal payout opening 24 guides the medals discharged by driving a hopper device 51 (medal payout device) described later to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores the medals discharged from the medal payout opening 24. In addition, sound effects and voices such as music corresponding to the effect contents are output from the two speaker holes 20L and 20R.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet 2a, FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the back side of the front door 2b, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the selector 66.

As shown in FIG. 3, the cabinet 2a has a top plate 27a, a bottom plate 27b, left and right side plates 27c and 27d, and a back plate 27e. The display device 11 is arranged in the upper part of the cabinet 2a.

The display device 11 includes a projector mechanism 211 and a box-shaped projection target member 212a onto which the image light projected from the projector mechanism 211 is projected, and performs image display by projection mapping. Specifically, in the display device 11, image light is generated based on the position (projection distance, angle, etc.) and shape of the projection target member 212a that is a three-dimensional object, and the video light is generated by the projector mechanism 211. It is projected on the surface of 212a. By providing such an effect function, an advanced and powerful effect can be performed. Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, another projected member having a curved display surface is provided on the back side of the box-shaped projected member 212a, and one of the projected members is provided depending on the game state. , Used as a screen on which video light is projected. Therefore, a function (not shown) for switching the members to be projected is provided in the cabinet 2a according to the game state. Note that the display device 11 may be any other various display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) as long as it is a device capable of displaying an image for the player.

A medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device) 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged in a lower portion of the cabinet 2a.

The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 27b of the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when, for example, the number of stored medals exceeds 50, or when the settlement button is pressed to perform settlement of medals. Then, the medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout opening 24 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores the medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is detachably attached to the bottom plate 27b of the cabinet 2a.

The power supply device 53 has a power switch 53a and a power supply substrate 53b (power supply means) (see FIG. 6 described later). The power supply device 53 is arranged on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side face plate 27c. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V supplied from the sub power supply device (not shown) into the power of the DC voltage required by each unit, and supplies the converted power to each unit.

Further, above the power supply device 53 in the cabinet 2a, a sub control board case 57 that accommodates a sub control board 72 (see FIG. 6 described later) is arranged. A sub-control board 200 housed in the sub-control board case 57 is mounted with a sub-control circuit 200 described later (see FIG. 9 described later). The sub-control circuit 200 is a circuit that controls execution of effects such as display of images. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 200 will be described later.

A sub relay board 61 is arranged above the sub control board case 57 in the cabinet 2a. The sub relay board 61 is a relay board on which a wiring connecting the sub control board 72 and a main control board 71 described later is mounted. Further, the sub relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub control board 72 and the boards arranged around the sub control board 72 and various device parts (units) is mounted.

Although not shown in FIG. 3, a cabinet-side relay board 44 (see FIG. 6 described later) is arranged in the cabinet 2a. The cabinet side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (see FIG. 6 described later), and a medal payout count switch (not shown). It is a relay board on which wiring for connecting to is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 4, a middle door 41 is arranged in the center of the rear surface of the front door 2b, and the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the rear side of the front door 2b so as to be opened and closed. Although not shown in FIG. 4, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are attached to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41, and the main control is provided on the side opposite to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41. A main control board case 55 accommodating a board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later) is attached. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 90 described later (see FIGS. 7 and 8 described later). The main control circuit 90 (main control means) is a circuit for controlling the main flow of the game in the pachi-slot 1, such as determination of internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and determination of whether or not there is a winning. .. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 also controls, for example, processing related to determination regarding AT or ART, display processing of navigation information on an instruction monitor, and transmission processing of various test signals. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 90 will be described later.

Speakers 65L and 65R are disposed below the middle door 41 on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The speakers 65L and 65R are arranged at positions facing the speaker holes 20L and 20R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

A selector 66 and a door open/close monitor switch 67 are arranged above the speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device that detects a medal that has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 and a device that selects whether or not the inserted medal is a proper medal, and is selected as a proper medal. In this case, the medal is guided to the hopper device 51 side and is driven so as to be housed in the hopper device 51, and when the medal is not selected as an appropriate medal, the medal is transferred to the medal payout outlet 24 side. Driven so as to be ejected from the medal payout opening 24. That is, the selector 66 is also a device that distributes the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 to the hopper device 51 side or the medal payout outlet 24 side.

As shown in FIG. 5, the selector 66 includes a base 803 having a medal rail (medal passage) 802 through which medals pass, and a select plate for guiding the inserted medals to the hopper device 51 side or the medal payout outlet 24 side. 804, a medal pusher 805 that pushes out the inserted medal to the medal payout opening 24 side when the inserted medal is not a proper medal, and an upstream medal sensor (first part) that detects the inserted medal on the upstream side of the medal rail 802. A medal sensor) 806 and a downstream medal sensor (second medal sensor) 807 for detecting the inserted medal on the downstream side of the medal rail 802.

Although not shown in FIG. 5, the selector 66 has a medal guide (a medal guide that forms a flow path of medals from the selector 66 to the hopper device 51 when the medals are guided to the hopper device 51 side by the select plate 804). (Not shown) and a cancel chute (not shown) that forms a flow path of medals from the selector 66 to the medal payout opening 24 when the medals are directed to the medal payout opening 24 side by the select plate 804 are removable. It is installed.

The select plate 804 is driven by a solenoid (not shown) included in the selector 66. The select plate 804 moves to a guide position for guiding passing medals to the hopper device 51 side when the solenoid is driven, but does not guide passing medals to the hopper device 51 side when the solenoid is not driven. (That is, it guides to the medal payout outlet 24 side) to the discharge position. Specifically, when the solenoid is driven, the select plate 804 moves in the rearward direction of the pachi-slot 1 to guide the medal above, while when the solenoid is not driven, the select plate 804 moves to the pachi-slot 1 position. It does not move to the front side and guide the upper side of the medal. Note that the medal guide method using the select plate 804 is not limited to this, and for example, a mechanism that can move the pachi-slot 1 in the vertical direction enables movement of the guide position and the ejection position. May be. That is, the select plate 804 moves on the medal rail 802 on the medal rail 802 at a guide position that does not prevent the passing medals from moving to the hopper device 51 side and the passing medals move to the hopper device 51 side. Any mechanism can be adopted as long as it is a mechanism that prevents the movement and moves to and from the ejection position where it is guided to the medal payout opening 24 side.

For example, when the select plate 804 is moving to the guide position, the medal pusher 805 operates so as not to project to the rear side of the pachi-slot 1, and the select plate 804 does not move to the guide position (eject position. When the pachi-slot 1 is moved to the rear side, the pachi-slot 1 operates so as to project in the rearward direction. That is, when the medal pusher 805 is in a position that does not project to the rear side of the pachi-slot 1, it becomes a guide position for guiding the passing medals to the hopper device 51 side, and when it is in a position that projects to the rear side of the pachi-slot 1, The ejecting position is a position where the passing medals are not guided to the hopper device 51 side (that is, they are guided to the medal payout outlet 24 side).

The upstream medal sensor 806 and the downstream medal sensor 807 constitute a game medium detecting means for detecting that a medal has passed. Each medal sensor is composed of, for example, a reflection type sensor composed of a pair or a plurality of pairs of light emitting elements and light receiving elements, and the light emitting elements irradiate the medal with light and reflect light reflected from the medal. When the light receiving element receives the light, the passage of the medal is detected. The configuration of the sensor can be changed as appropriate, and for example, a transmissive sensor or the like can be adopted. Further, the passage of medals may be detected only by the downstream medal sensor 807 without providing the upstream medal sensor 806. Specific control based on the detection result of each medal sensor (medal sensor input state) will be described later.

The door open/close monitor switch 67 is arranged diagonally below and to the left of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The door opening/closing monitor switch 67 outputs a security signal for informing the opening/closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot 1.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is disposed below the reel display window 4 in a region that is opened and closed by the middle door 41 on the back surface of the front door 2b (see a later-described diagram). 6). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub relay board 61, a selector 66, a game operation display board 81, a first interface board 301 for a test machine, and It is a relay board on which wiring for connecting each of the second interface boards 302 for a tester is mounted. The various buttons and switches include, for example, a MAX bet button 15a, a 1 bet button 15b, a door opening/closing monitor switch 67, a BET switch 77, which will be described later, and a start switch 79.

<Control system of pachi-slot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachi-slot 1.

The pachi-slot 1 has a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub-control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. Further, the pachi-slot 1 has a reel relay terminal plate 74, a setting key type switch 54 (setting switch), and a cabinet side relay substrate 44, which are connected to the main control substrate 71. Further, the pachi-slot 1 has an external centralized terminal plate 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, a reset switch 76, and a power supply device 53, which are connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 44. Since the configuration of the hopper device 51 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal board 74 is arranged inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The setting key type switch 54 is provided on the main control board case 55. The setting key type switch 54 is used when changing the set value (setting 1 to setting 6) of the pachi-slot 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1. It should be noted that the set value indicates the degree of advantage of the player regarding the game, and normally, the lower the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 1), the lower the degree of advantage of the player. The higher the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 6), the higher the degree of advantage of the player becomes. In the present embodiment, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the bonus combination described later, so that the degree of advantage of the player can be changed, and the higher the set value, the later-described AT or ART. It is also possible to change the degree of advantage of the player by increasing the winning probability of the lottery.

The cabinet-side relay board 44 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the main control board 71, the external centralized terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, the medal auxiliary storage switch 75, the reset switch 76, and the power supply device 53 is mounted. Is. The external centralized terminal board 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachi-slot 1. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52 and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals. The reset switch 76 is used, for example, when changing the setting of the pachi-slot 1.

The power supply device 53 has a power supply board 53b and a power switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot 1. The power supply board 53 b is connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 44, and is also connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61.

Further, the pachi-slot 1 includes a door relay terminal plate 68, and a selector 66, a door opening/closing monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, which are connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68. It has a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, a sub relay board 61, a first interface board 301 for a test machine, and a second interface board 302 for a test machine. The selector 66, the door open/close monitor switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, and therefore their description is omitted here.

The BET switch 77 (insertion operation detecting means) detects that the player has pressed the MAX bet button 15a or the 1 bet button 15b. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button (not shown) is pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detection means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating main reel and a circuit for displaying the stoppable main reel with an LED or the like. A stop switch (not shown) is provided on the stop switch board 80. The stop switch detects that the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display (7-segment display) 6 and the LED 82. The LED 82 has, for example, three LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals (hereinafter, "first LED" to "LED", which are lit corresponding to the number of medals inserted in the current game (hereinafter, referred to as "inserted number"). LED for turning on a mark for indicating that a medal can be inserted, a mark for indicating a game start, a mark for re-playing, etc. based on a signal input from the game operation display substrate 81. Etc. are included. In the first LED to the third LED (display means), when one medal is inserted, the first LED lights, when two medals are inserted, the first and second LEDs light, and three medals (game) When the number of sheets that can be started is input, the first to third LEDs light up. Since the information display 6 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Both the first interface board 301 for a test machine and the second interface board 302 for a test machine are relay boards used when outputting various signals related to a game to the test machine in the verification test (testing test) of the pachi-slot 1 ( Since these relay boards are not mounted on the pachi-slot 1 as a release product for sale, the main control circuit 90 of the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for test machine and the test machine. Also, various electronic components necessary for connecting to the second interface board 302 are not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling main operations related to the game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via the first interface board 301 for a test machine, and is determined by the main control board 71, for example. The test signal or the like related to the pressed-order navigation performed is output via the second interface board 302 for a tester.

The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub relay board 61. Further, the pachi-slot 1 includes a speaker group 84, an LED group 85, a 24h door open/close monitoring unit 63, a touch sensor 19, and a display unit 212, which are connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61. Since the touch sensor 19 has been described above, its description is omitted here.

The speaker group 84 includes speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown). The LED group 85 includes a lamp group 21 provided on the front panel 10, a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel of the waist panel 12 from the back side, and the like. The 24h door open/close monitoring unit 63 stores history information of opening/closing of the middle door 41. Further, the 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error on the display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 200) when the middle door 41 is opened. The display unit 212 includes, for example, a projected member 212a that configures the display device 11 and another projected member that is provided on the back side of the projected member 212a and has a curved display surface.

Further, the pachi-slot 1 has a ROM cartridge substrate 86 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 87 which are connected to the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are housed in the sub control board case 57 together with the sub control board 72.

The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, and images (video) for presentation, sound (speaker group 84), light (LED group 85), and communication data. .. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays connection wiring between the sub control board 72, the projector mechanism 211 that configures the display device 11, and the sub display device 18. Since the projector mechanism 211 and the sub display device 18 have been described above, their explanations are omitted here.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 90 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 90 of the pachi-slot 1.

The main control circuit 90 functions as a game control unit that controls a game operation, and includes a microprocessor 91, a clock pulse generation circuit 92, a power management circuit 93, a switching regulator 94 (power supply means), and a role ratio monitor ( (Not shown).

The microprocessor 91 is a microprocessor with a security function for gaming machines. The microprocessor 91 of the present embodiment is provided with various instruction codes (hereinafter referred to as "main CPU 101 dedicated instruction code") peculiar to the microprocessor 91 that can be defined on the program. In the present embodiment, by using the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101, the efficiency of processing and the reduction of program capacity are realized. The internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 8 described later, and the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101 provided in the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail in various processes executed by a main control circuit described later. To do.

The clock pulse generation circuit 92 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU, and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the microprocessor 91. The microprocessor 91 executes the control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

The power management circuit 93 manages the fluctuation of the DC 12V power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 53b (see FIG. 6). Then, the power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal to the “XSRST” terminal of the microprocessor 91, for example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the starting voltage value (10V) from 0V). When the power failure occurs (when the power supply voltage drops from 12V to the power failure voltage value (10.5V)), the power failure detection signal is output to the “XINT” terminal of the microprocessor 91. That is, the power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal (starting signal) to the microprocessor 91 when the power is turned on (starting means), and when the power is interrupted, the microprocessor 91 detects the power failure signal (power failure signal). Also serves as a means for outputting (power failure means).

The switching regulator 94 is a DC/DC conversion circuit, generates a DC drive voltage (power supply voltage of DC 5V) of the microprocessor 91, and outputs the generated DC drive voltage to the “VCC” terminal of the microprocessor 91.

The winning ratio monitor (not shown) is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and the arithmetic circuit 107, which will be described later, performs a predetermined ratio calculation on the result of totaling the game information, which is totaled by the main CPU 101, which will be described later. , The result of the ratio calculation is displayed as ratio information. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of ratio calculation are performed, and the combination ratio monitor sequentially displays a plurality of types of ratio information based on the result.

In the upper two digits of the combination ratio monitor, "abbreviation", which is the type information indicating the type of the ratio information, is displayed, and in the lower two digits, "ratio", which is the ratio information corresponding to the type information. It is supposed to be displayed. For example, when “7” is displayed in the first digit (the place of the abbreviation 10) and “U” is displayed in the second digit (the place of the abbreviation 1) of the combination ratio monitor (that is, the abbreviation “7U”). Is displayed), the lower two digits of the winning ratio monitor, as ratio information, occupies a predetermined total number of games (175,000 times), and the ART function is activated (that is, a stop operation advantageous for the player). The ratio of the number of games (of the advantageous section for which the procedure was notified) (the advantageous section ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the effective section ratio is 10%, "1" is displayed in the third digit (the 10th digit of the ratio) and "0" is displayed in the 4th digit (the 1st digit of the ratio). Is displayed. In addition, the advantageous section ratio may display a ratio of the number of games in which the AT function and the ART function are activated.

Further, for example, when "6" is displayed in the first digit (the place of the abbreviation 10) and "Y" is displayed in the second digit (the place of the abbreviation 1) of the winning ratio monitor (that is, the abbreviation " 6Y” is displayed), in the lower two digits of the winning ratio monitor, as ratio information, the winning character continuation occupies in the payout number of game media paid out within a specific total number of games (6000 times). The operating device (BB in the present embodiment, including the accessory continuous operating device (MB) that continuously operates the second type special accessory (CB), including it. The same applies hereinafter). The ratio of the number of paid-out game media that has been activated (middle-time combination ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the medium-time combination ratio is 59%, "5" is displayed in the third digit (the 10th digit of the ratio) and "9" is displayed in the 4th digit (the 1st digit of the ratio). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (the place of the abbreviation 10) and "Y" is displayed in the second digit (the place of the abbreviation 1) of the ratio monitor (that is, the abbreviation " "7Y" is displayed), the lower two digits of the combination ratio monitor show, as ratio information, all combinations of the number of game media paid out within a specific total number of games (6000 times). (In the present embodiment, BB. In addition to the above MB, when the above-described first-class special accessory (RB) is installed alone, the above-mentioned second-class special accessory (CB) is alone. If it is installed, if the normal accessory (SB) is installed, all of them are included. The same applies hereafter) Ratio of the number of paid-out game media (medium-time accessory ratio) ) Is displayed. Specifically, when the medium-time role product ratio is 59%, "5" is displayed in the third digit (the tenth place of the ratio), and "9" is displayed in the fourth digit (the ones place of the ratio). Is displayed.

Also, for example, when "6" is displayed in the first digit (the place of the abbreviation 10) and "A" is displayed in the second digit (the place of the abbreviation 1) of the ratio monitor (that is, the abbreviation " 6A” is displayed), in the lower two digits of the winning ratio monitor, as the ratio information, the winning character continuous in the payout number of game media paid out within a predetermined total number of games (175000 times) The ratio of the number of paid-out game media paid out by the actuation of the actuating device (total combination ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the total combination ratio is 25%, "2" is displayed in the third digit (the 10th place of the ratio) and "5" is displayed in the 4th digit (the 1st place of the ratio). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (the place of the abbreviation 10) and "A" is displayed in the second digit (the place of the abbreviation 1) of the ratio monitor (that is, the abbreviation " 7A” is displayed), the lower two digits of the combination ratio monitor show, as ratio information, all combinations of the number of game media paid out within a predetermined total number of games (175000 times). The ratio of the number of paid-out game media (total prize ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the total accessory ratio is 25%, "2" is displayed in the third digit (the 10th digit of the ratio) and "5" is displayed in the 4th digit (the 1st digit of the ratio). Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 is described as an example in which the role ratio monitor is directly provided, but the display content of the role ratio monitor is controlled by the main control circuit 90. It is sufficient that the display content can be recognized when necessary (for example, when the main control board case 55 is visually recognized), and the main control circuit 90 may not be provided directly. For example, the winning ratio monitor may be connected to the game operation display board 81, and the main control circuit 90 may control the display content via the game operation display board 81. Further, in this case, the role ratio monitor is also used as the information display 6, the LED 82, or the instruction monitor (instruction display), and one or more of them are used to display the predetermined ratio information. You may do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the predetermined ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the advantageous section ratio, the medium-time role combination ratio, the medium-time role ratio, the total role ratio, and the total role ratio are taken as an example. Although described, ratio information other than these may be displayed. For example, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by the ART function operating to the number of game media paid out within a predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) (total advantageous section acquisition ratio) , Ratio of the number of paid-out game media paid out by the ART function to the number of paid-out game media during a specific total number of games (6000 times) (intermediate time advantageous section acquisition ratio) , Ratio of the number of games in which the character continuous operating device has operated (medium-time continuous combination section ratio), occupying in the specific total number of games (6000 times), occupying in the specific total number of games (6000 times), The ratio of the number of games in which all the accessory operated (the middle-time role section ratio), the ratio of the number of games in which the accessory continuous operation device operated among the predetermined total number of games (175000 times) (total combined section) The ratio), the ratio of the number of games in which all the auctions occupy in the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) (total amusement section ratio), and the like can also be displayed by performing a predetermined ratio calculation.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the parameter (denominator) of the predetermined ratio information displayed on the winning ratio monitor, the predetermined total number of games is set to “175,000” and the specific total number of games is set to “6000”. However, the predetermined total number of games and the specific total number of games are not limited to this. For example, as a parameter (denominator) for calculating a part or all of the above-mentioned various ratios, a predetermined total number of games may be set to “17500” and a specific total number of games may be set to “3000”. .. However, since various types of gaming machines are installed and operated in game stores, and the optimal number of games for ratio calculation may differ, the number of games for calculating the various ratios described above is It is not limited to the above and can be changed appropriately. In this case, the number of games that can be a parameter (denominator) and a child number (numerator) for calculating some or all of the various ratios can be arbitrarily set on the game store side. Good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the operation of the ART function is not included in all the targeted effects in the medium-time character ratio and the total character ratio, but the operation of the ART function is not included. It is also possible to calculate the ratio of the medium time character effect ratio and the total character effect ratio, as an operation of. Moreover, it goes without saying that other than the above, as long as it is useful information, it is possible to aggregate two values to perform ratio calculation and display the result of the ratio calculation as ratio information. Absent. Further, in the description of the ratio monitor, the portion described as “the ART function operates” may include the “operation of the AT function” or may be excluded.

<Microprocessor>
Next, the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91.

The microprocessor 91 includes a main CPU 101 (arithmetic processing unit), a main ROM 102 (first storage unit), a main RAM 103 (second storage unit), an external bus interface 104, a clock circuit 105, a reset controller 106, and It has an arithmetic circuit 107, a random number circuit 110, a parallel port 111, an interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 113, a first serial communication circuit 114, and a second serial communication circuit 115. Then, each of these units constituting the microprocessor 91 are connected to each other via a signal bus 116.

The main CPU 101 executes various control programs on the basis of the clock pulse generated by the clock circuit 105, and controls the overall game operation. Here, reel stop control will be described as an example of the control operation of the main CPU 101.

After detecting the reel index, the main CPU 101 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel). As a result, the main CPU 101 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one rotation. The reel index includes, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position of each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each main reel. It is detected by a reel position detector (not shown) provided.

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 103. Then, each time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of pulses necessary for the rotation of one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 103 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detector (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols are rotated after the reel index is detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected.

The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program. The internal configuration (memory map) of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 11 described later.

The external bus interface 104 is for electrically connecting the microprocessor 91 with an external signal bus (not shown) to which various components (eg, reels) provided outside the microprocessor 91 are connected. It is an interface circuit. The clock circuit 105 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown) and the like, and the clock pulse signal for CPU operation input from the clock pulse generation circuit 92 is supplied to other components (for example, the timer circuit 113). Convert to a clock pulse signal of the frequency used. The clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is also output to the reset controller 106.

The reset controller 106 resets an IAT (Illegal Address Trap) or a WDT (watchdog timer) based on the reset signal input from the power management circuit 93. The arithmetic circuit 107 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. For example, when executing the “MUL (multiplication)” instruction on the program, the arithmetic circuit 107 executes the multiplication processing based on the “MUL” instruction.

The random number circuit 110 generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Further, although not shown, the random number circuit 110 obtains a random number register 0 for obtaining a 2-byte hard latch random number, a random number register 1 for obtaining a 2-byte soft latch random number, and a 1-byte soft latch random number. And random number registers 2 to 7. The main CPU 101 extracts one value from the random numbers in the predetermined range generated by the random number circuit 110, for example, as a random number value for internal lottery. The parallel port 111 is a port (memory map I/O) for signals input and output between the microprocessor 91 and various circuits (for example, the power management circuit 93 and the like) provided outside the microprocessor 91. .. The parallel port 111 is also connected to the random number circuit 110 and the interrupt controller 112. The start switch 79 is also connected to one of the input ports PI0 to PI4 of the parallel port 111, and latches from the parallel port 111 to the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 at the timing (on edge) when the start switch 79 is turned on. The signal is output. Then, in the random number circuit 110, the random number register 0 is latched by inputting the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is acquired.

The interrupt controller 112 performs an interrupt process by the main CPU 101 based on a power failure detection signal input from the power management circuit 93 via the parallel port 111 or a time-out signal input from the timer circuit 113 at a 1.1172 ms cycle. Control the execution timing of. When the power failure detection signal is input from the power management circuit 93 or the time-out signal is input from the timer circuit 113, the interrupt controller 112 sends an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the main CPU 101. Output to. The main CPU 101, based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 112 in response to a time-out signal from the timer circuit 113, input port check processing, reel control processing, communication data transmission processing, 7-segment LED drive processing, timer. Various kinds of interrupt processing such as update processing (see FIG. 79 described later) are performed.

The timer circuit 113 (PTC) operates with a clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 (a clock pulse signal having a frequency obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU by a frequency divider (not shown)) ( Count elapsed time). Then, the timer circuit 113 outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 112 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec.

The first serial communication circuit 114 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when transmitting data (various control commands (commands)) from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72. The second serial communication circuit 115 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when data is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the second tester interface board 302.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub control circuit 200 (sub control means) mounted on the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub control circuit 200 of the pachi-slot 1.

The sub control circuit 200 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 90, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The sub control circuit 200 functions as an effect control unit that controls an effect operation, and basically includes a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 202, a rendering processor 203, a drawing RAM 204, and a driver 205.

The sub CPU 201 is connected to the ROM cartridge board 86. The driver 205 is connected to the liquid crystal relay board 87. That is, the driver 205 is connected to the projector mechanism 211 and the sub display device 18 via the liquid crystal relay substrate 87.

The sub CPU 201 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The ROM cartridge board 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 201 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 90 and a random number value for performance are extracted, and performance registration is performed to determine and register performance contents (effect data). It contains various programs to perform tasks. In addition, the control program includes a drawing control task that controls the display of an image on the display device 11 based on the determined effect contents, a lamp control task that controls the output of light from a light source such as the LED group 85, and a sound from the speaker group 84. Various programs for executing a voice control task or the like for controlling the output of are also included.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to image creation. The data storage area also includes a storage area for storing sound data regarding BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data regarding a pattern of turning on/off light, and the like.

The sub RAM 202 is provided with a storage area for storing the determined effect contents and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as a sub flag (internal winning combination) transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

The sub CPU 201, the rendering processor 203, the drawing RAM (including a frame buffer) 204, and the driver 205 create a video according to the animation data specified by the effect contents, and the created video is displayed on the display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and/or. Alternatively, it is displayed on the sub display device 18. The display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and the sub display device 18 are individually controlled by the sub control board 72.

In addition, the sub CPU 201 causes the speaker group 84 to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect contents. In addition, the sub CPU 201 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data specified by the effect contents.

<Various registers of main CPU>
Next, various registers included in the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 10 is a schematic configuration diagram of various registers included in the main CPU 101.

The main CPU 101 has, as main registers, an accumulator A (hereinafter referred to as “A register”), a flag register F (flag register), a general-purpose register B (hereinafter referred to as “B register”), and a general-purpose register C (hereinafter referred to as “ C register”, general register D (hereinafter “D register”), general register E (hereinafter “E register”), general register H (hereinafter “H register”), and general register L (hereinafter “H register”). , "L register"). Further, the main CPU 101, as sub-registers, is an accumulator A′, a flag register F′, a general-purpose register B′, a general-purpose register C′, a general-purpose register D′, a general-purpose register E′, a general-purpose register H′ and a general-purpose register L′. As a general-purpose register. Each register is composed of a 1-byte register.

Further, in this embodiment, the B register and the C register are used as a pair register (hereinafter referred to as “BC register”), and the D register and the E register are used as a pair register (hereinafter referred to as “DE register”). Further, in this embodiment, the H register and the L register are used as a pair register (hereinafter, referred to as “HL register”).

As shown in FIG. 10, predetermined flag information indicating the result of arithmetic processing is set in each bit of the flag registers F and F'. For example, in bit 6 (D6), data (zero flag) indicating whether or not the operation result is “0” in the operation result determination process is set. Specifically, when the operation result is "0", the data "1" is set in the bit 6, and when the operation result is not "0", the data "0" is set in the bit 6. Then, in the determination process of the calculation result, the main CPU 101 refers to the data “0”/“1” of the bit 6 to make the determination (YES/NO).

Further, the main CPU 101 has an extension register Q (hereinafter referred to as “Q register”). The Q register is composed of a 1-byte register. In the present embodiment, various main CPU 101-dedicated instruction codes for addressing using the Q register are provided on the program, as will be described later in various processing flows. By using it, the processing efficiency and the capacity of the main ROM 102 are reduced. Note that in various main CPU 101-dedicated instruction codes that specify addresses using the Q register, the Q register stores address data (address value) on the higher side of the address. Immediately after the main CPU 101 is reset, "F0H" is set in the Q register as an initial value. Further, in the "LDQ,n (8-bit data)" instruction using the Q register, the value of the Q register can be changed by setting an arbitrary 1-byte data in "n" and executing the instruction. You can

Further, the main CPU 101 has an interrupt page address register I and a memory refresh register R each composed of a 1-byte register, and an index register IX and an index register IY composed of a 2-byte register. , And has a stack pointer SP and a program counter PC as dedicated registers.

<Internal configuration of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11A to FIG. 11C, the internal configuration (hereinafter referred to as “memory map”) of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 included in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91) will be described. Note that FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a memory map of the entire memory, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a memory map of the main ROM 102, and FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a memory map of the main RAM 103.

In the memory map of the entire memory included in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91), as shown in FIG. 11A, the memory area of the main ROM 102, the memory area of the main RAM 103, the internal register area, and The XCS decode areas are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order with an unused area in between.

In the memory map of the main ROM 102, as shown in FIG. 11B, from the head (0000H) side of the address of the main ROM 102, a program area, a data area, an unspecified area, a trademark recording area, a program management area, and a security setting area are They are arranged in order at predetermined addresses.

The program area stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the game playability of the game performed by the player. In the data area, various data used by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the game play of the game performed by the player (for example, a data table such as an internal lottery table, various data for the sub control circuit 200). Data for transmitting a control command (command, etc.) is stored. That is, the game ROM area (game storage area) consisting of the program area and the data area is required for control processing (processing relating to game characteristics) related to the game characteristics of the game actually performed by the player at the game store. Various programs and various data are stored.

In the non-regulated area, control programs and data of various processes (processes that do not affect the game play) that are not directly related to the game play of the game performed by the player are stored. For example, programs and data used in the pachi-slot 1 verification test (testing test), control programs and data used in checksum generation processing at the time of power interruption, sum check processing at power restoration, and fraud prevention programs. And the data and the like necessary for it are stored in the non-regulated area.

In the program management area and the security setting area, various settings and management information regarding execution of the control program or security functions are stored. For example, setting and management information of the start address and end address (that is, data range) of the control program stored in the program area, setting and management information of the number of addresses in the readable RAM area, reset setting and management information of WDT, Interrupt setting and management information, setting and management information of permission/non-permission of reading of the control program stored in the program area, setting and management information regarding activation and updating method of the random number circuit 110, and setting of a security mode described later. And management information and the like are stored in the program management area and the security setting area. In this embodiment, the program management area stores other settings and management information not related to the security function, and the security setting area stores settings and management information related to the security function. However, the setting and management information may be stored as a single management area, for example.

In the memory map of the main RAM 103, as shown in FIG. 11C, from the head (F000H) side of the address of the main RAM 103, a game RAM area (predetermined storage area, game temporary storage area) and a non-regular RAM area (non-regular temporary A storage area) is arranged at a predetermined address in this order.

The game RAM area is provided with a work area and a stack area for temporarily storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by the execution of a control program related to the playability of the game executed by the player. .. Then, each of the various data is stored in the work area at a predetermined address in the game RAM area.

In addition, the non-regular RAM area is provided with an non-regular work area and a non-regular stack, which are work areas of various processes not directly related to the game playability of the game performed by the player. In the present embodiment, using this non-regular RAM area, various processes such as a sum check process that are not directly related to the game playability of the game performed by the player are executed.

As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in the main ROM 102, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes not directly related to the game playability of the game executed by the player are stored in the main ROM 102 for game play. The data is stored in a non-standard ROM area (non-standard storage area) arranged at an address different from the ROM area. Further, various kinds of processing not directly related to the game playability of the game performed by such a player are performed by using the non-regular RAM area arranged in the main RAM 103 at an address different from the game RAM area. ..

With such a configuration of the main ROM 102, programs and data unnecessary for the actual game played by the player are arranged in the ROM area (non-regular ROM area) where the conventional rules prohibit the arrangement of programs and the like. can do. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the game ROM area.

<Security mode>
Next, the security mode, which is a part of the security function of the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91), will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the security mode.

The security mode is an operating state in which the microprocessor 91 operates when the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on and a reset signal is input from the power management circuit 93, for example. During this security mode, the activation of the main CPU 101 is delayed for a period according to the setting stored in the security setting area (that is, the main CPU 101 starts execution of processing at power-on (see FIG. 46 described later)). Delay that). By starting the main CPU 101 through this security mode, the security of the microprocessor 91 is ensured, and the main CPU 101 is stably started by securing the time required for the start control when the power is turned on.

In the present embodiment, for example, the reset controller 106 may delay the activation of the main CPU 101 by delaying the reset signal input when the power is turned on for a predetermined period. It is also possible to delay the activation of the main CPU 101 by delaying the interrupt permission of the reset interrupt process (see FIG. 46 described later) at power-on for a predetermined period. Further, the controllers may cooperate with each other to delay the activation of the main CPU 101. Further, for example, a delay circuit may be provided in the microprocessor 91 (or in the reset controller 106 or the interrupt controller 112), and the activation of the main CPU 101 may be delayed by this delay circuit. That is, the configuration (security unit) that executes the security function in the microprocessor 91 can be appropriately modified and applied according to the specifications.

As shown in FIG. 12, a fixed extension time (fixed period) and a random extension time (variable period) can be set as the delay period in the security mode. In the present embodiment, for example, by selecting and setting any one of the modes 1 to 8 in which different fixed extension times are associated, one fixed extension time is selected from a plurality of fixed extension times. The time can be set, and by selecting and setting any one of the modes 1 to 4 in which different ranges of random extension time are associated with each other, a plurality of ranges of random extension time can be set. It is possible to set a range of one random extension time from the middle.

For example, when “mode 4” is selected as the fixed extension time and “mode 4” is selected as the random extension time and these settings are stored in the security setting area, the microprocessor 91 turns on the power of the pachi-slot 1, When the reset signal is input from the power management circuit 93, first, the start of the main CPU 101 is delayed by about 4 seconds (4000 ms) as a fixed extension time, and then from the range of 0 to 500 ms as the random extension time. One extension time is randomly selected, and the activation of the main CPU 101 is delayed by the selected time.

The range of the fixed extension time and the random extension time can be set as appropriate, but in the present embodiment, the range of the random extension time is shortened from the viewpoint of shortening the time until the setting can be changed when the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on. It is desirable to set "mode 1" in which the random extension time is always "0".

<Game state transition flow>
Next, with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, various game states managed by the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) of the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment and transition flows thereof will be described. Note that FIG. 13 is a transition flow diagram of the basic game state of the pachi-slot 1, and FIG. 14 considers whether or not the notification (AT/ART) function is activated (that is, the game section is a normal section and It is a transition flow diagram of a game state (distinguished from an advantageous section).

[Basic game state transition flow]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as “BB”) is provided as the type of bonus game. The BB is an accessory continuous operation device related to a regular bonus (hereinafter, referred to as “RB”) called a first-class special accessory, and continuously operates the RB.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 manages the game state based on the presence/absence of winning/operating (winning) of the bonus combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the main control circuit 90 causes the winning/operation (winning) of a bonus combination (internal winning combination of names “F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4” described later). ), the three types of game states called “non-winning bonus state”, “state between flags” and “bonus state” are managed.

The bonus non-winning state is a state where the bonus is non-winning, the bonus is not activated (winning), and the bonus state is a state where the bonus is activated. Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a state occurs in which the bonus combination is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is won. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, that is, the bonus combination is won and the bonus is not activated.

Whether or not the bonus combination is won is managed based on data stored in a hit request flag storage area (see FIG. 25 described later) and a carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 26 described later) provided in the main RAM 103. To be done. In addition, the presence or absence of a bonus operation (winning) is managed based on data stored in a game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) provided in the main RAM 103.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, in a gaming state in which a bonus is not operated (a bonus non-winning state and a state between flags), the type of the internal winning combination relating to the replay and its winning probability are different from each other. Six kinds of states of RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state (hereinafter, respectively referred to as "RT0 state" to "RT5 state") are provided. The RT1 state and the RT4 state are gaming states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT5 state is the medium probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The game state is as follows. Further, the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT3 state are gaming states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is high. In the present embodiment, the RT state of the bonus non-winning state is any one of the RT0 state to the RT4 state, and the RT state of the inter-flag state is the RT5 state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 is based on the type of the internal winning combination relating to the replay and the winning probability thereof in the gaming state (bonus non-winning state and inter-flag state) in which the bonus is not activated. It also manages six types of states, RT0 state to RT5 state.

The RT0 state to the RT5 state are managed based on data stored in a game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) provided in the main RAM 103, which will be described later. Specifically, the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment is provided with flags indicating six RT states, that is, an RT0 state flag to an RT5 state flag. By controlling the ON/OFF states of these flags by the main RAM 103, the RT state is set. Is managed. Then, the main control circuit 90 specifies the RT state corresponding to the RT state flag in the ON state as the current RT state. Note that the RT0 state flag may not be provided, and when all the RT state flags are in the off state, the main control circuit 90 may specify that the current RT state is the RT0 state.

As shown in FIG. 13, in a bonus non-winning state (RT0 to RT4 state), a bonus combination (internal winning combination of names “F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4” described later) is determined as an internal winning combination. When this is done (“bonus winning” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the bonus non-winning state to the flag state (RT5 state). Further, when the bonus combination is won in the inter-flag state (“bonus established” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

Here, as the bonus state, a BB1 gaming state (BB1 state), a BB2 gaming state (BB2 state), a BB3 gaming state (BB3 state), and a BB4 gaming state (BB4 state) are provided. The main control circuit 90 turns on the BB1 state flag, the BB2 state flag, the BB3 state flag, and the BB4 state flag, which are stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) described later, as in the RT state. / The bonus state is managed by the off state. Further, as will be described later, during the BB1 to BB4 states, it is always in the RB game state (RB state), so this is also the RB stored in the game state flag storage area described later (see FIG. 27 described later). It is managed by the on/off state of the state flag.

In the bonus non-winning state, the name “F_BB1” described later is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the inter-flag state, when the corresponding symbol combination “C_red same color BB” is displayed on the activated line, the main control circuit 90 Shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB1 state. In the BB1 state, it is always in the RB state, and when more than the specified number of medals “240” are paid out in the BB1 state, the BB1 state is ended (“bonus end” in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the game state. Is shifted from the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, the name “F_BB2” described later is determined as an internal winning combination, and in the inter-flag state, the corresponding symbol combination “C_blue same color BB” is displayed on the activated line. The circuit 90 shifts the game state from the inter-flag state to the BB2 state. In the BB2 state, it is always in the RB state, and when more than the specified number of medals “240” are paid out in the BB2 state, the BB2 state is ended (“Bonus end” in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the game state. Is shifted from the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, the name “F_BB3” described later is determined as an internal winning combination, and in the inter-flag state, the corresponding symbol combination “C_red different color BB” is displayed on the activated line. The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB3 state. In the BB3 state, it is always in the RB state, and when more than the specified number of medals “165” are paid out in the BB3 state, the BB3 state is ended (“Bonus end” in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the game state. Is shifted from the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, the name “F_BB4” described later is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the inter-flag state, the corresponding symbol combination “C_blue different color BB” is displayed on the activated line. The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB4 state. In the BB4 state, it is always in the RB state, and when more than the specified number of medals “165” are paid out in the BB4 state, the BB4 state is ended (“bonus end” in FIG. 13) and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. Is shifted from the bonus state to the RT4 state.

In the RT4 state, when the later-described symbol combination “R_RT1 transition” is displayed on the activated line (“RT1 transition is established” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the RT4 state to the RT1 state. Move to. In addition, in the RT4 state, when the later-described symbol combination “S_RT3 transition eye” is displayed on the activated line (“RT3 transition eye establishment” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the RT4 state. Shift to RT3 state.

In the RT1 state, when the later-described symbol combination “S_RT3 transition eye” is displayed on the activated line (“RT3 transition eye is established” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the RT1 state to the RT3 state. Move to. Further, in the RT1 state, when the later-described symbol combination “S_RT0 transition lip” is displayed on the activated line (“RT0 transition lip established” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 shifts the game state from the RT1 state. Move to RT0 state.

In the RT0 state, when a later-described symbol combination "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the activated line (in FIG. 13, "RT3 transition established"), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the RT0 state to the RT3 state. Move to. Further, in the RT0 state, when a later-described symbol combination “R_RT1 transition eye” is displayed on the activated line, or a later-described symbol combination “S_RT1 transition lip” is displayed on the activated line (in FIG. 13, "RT1 shift eye RT1 shift rip established"), the main control circuit 90 shifts the game state from the RT0 state to the RT1 state. In addition, in the RT0 state, when the later-described symbol combination “S_RT2 transition lip” is displayed on the activated line (“RT2 transition lip established” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the RT0 state. Change to RT2 state. In addition, when the setting value is changed, or when the initialization condition such as “RAM abnormality” described later is satisfied (“setting change/initialization condition satisfied” in FIG. 13), the initial state is the game state. Becomes the RT0 state.

In the RT2 state, when the later-described symbol combination “S_RT3 transition eye” is displayed on the activated line (“RT3 transition eye establishment” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the RT2 state to the RT3 state. Move to. Further, in the RT2 state, when a later-described symbol combination “R_RT1 transition eye” is displayed on the activated line, or a later-described symbol combination “S_RT1 transition lip” is displayed on the activated line (in FIG. 13, "RT1 shift eye RT1 shift rip established"), the main control circuit 90 shifts the game state from the RT2 state to the RT1 state.

In the RT3 state, when a game is played for a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, “8” game, that is, during 8 games) (“8 game digestion” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 state to the RT0 state. The period during which the RT3 state continues can be set appropriately. Further, the period during which the RT3 state continues may be not specified. In this case, in the RT3 state, the internal winning combination for which the later-described symbol combination “S_RT0 transition lip” can be displayed on the activated line may be determined with a predetermined probability.

[Game state transition flow considering whether the notification (AT/ART) function is activated]
In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) determines whether or not the function (AT/ART function) for notifying a stop operation advantageous to the player is activated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only the above-mentioned bonus non-winning state, inter-flag state, and bonus state, but also the operating/non-operating state of the AT/ART function is managed as a game state. In the present embodiment, the game section in which the AT function is operating is referred to as a “normal advantage section”, and the game section in which the ART function is operating is referred to as an “advantage section”. A section of the game in which neither is operating is called a "non-advantageous section" or a "normal section".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus state is set in the advantageous section (including the “normal advantageous section” and the “advantageous section”), the bonus state is advantageous as a series of advantageous game sections for the player. It is included in the section and becomes a period during which the above-mentioned status indicator lights up (information period during the advantageous period), and the number of games for forcibly ending the advantageous period (regulation of continuation) is counted. It also becomes a period (regulation monitoring period) (in this embodiment, "1500" games). However, as will be described later, when the bonus state is set in the "non-advantageous section", the bonus state may shift to the "normal advantageous section" or the "advantageous section". The state shall be included in the above-mentioned period. If the player enters the bonus state in the non-advantageous section and does not move to the “normal advantage section” or the “advantageous section” after the bonus state ends (when the “non-advantageous section” continues), It is assumed that the bonus state is not included in the advantageous section and the bonus state is not included in the period described above, as it is not a series of advantageous game sections. However, since the bonus state is a gaming state that is advantageous for the player by itself, the bonus state is always the advantageous zone regardless of whether it is the "normal advantageous zone" or the "advantageous zone" before and after that. It may be included and included in the period described above.

In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the main control circuit 90 has a "normal state" as the game state of the non-advantageous section (normal section) and a "high-precision 1 state" as the game state of the normal advantageous section. ~ "Highly accurate 4 states" and "Preliminary omen state", "Line battle preparation state", "Line battle state", "Right acquisition lottery preparation state", "Right acquisition lottery state", "Right" The acquisition state, the ending preparation state, the ending 1 state, and the ending 2 state are managed.

(Game state of non-advantageous section (normal section))
The normal state, which is the game state of the non-advantageous section (normal section), is a gaming state (non-AT/non-ART) in which the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a disadvantageous gaming state to the player. In the normal state, when it is determined to shift to the normal advantageous zone (in FIG. 14, "normal advantageous zone shift winning"), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state to the normal advantageous zone according to the decision trigger. It shifts to one of the gaming states. The details of the game flow in the normal state will be described later with reference to FIG. 33 described later.

In the present embodiment, in the normal bonus non-winning state, when a specific winning combination other than the bonus winning combination (see FIG. 33 described later) is won, one of the normal advantageous sections is in the gaming state (other than the high-probability state 4). It is usually advantageous to win an internal winning combination (other than “F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2” and “F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2”) including a bonus winning combination in which the same winning probability is set between the set values. If it is decided to shift to the high accuracy 4 state of the section, and if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section after the bonus state based on the bonus combination is finished, the section shifts to the line battle state of the advantageous section. If it is determined that the transition to the advantageous zone has not been determined, the four highly accurate states of the advantageous zone normally continue for a predetermined period (32 games).

Further, in the normal non-bonus winning state, when the internal winning combination (“F_BB3+F_watermelon 2” and “F_BB4+F_watermelon 2”) including the bonus winning combination in which different winning probabilities are set between the setting values is won, It is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and after the bonus state based on the bonus hand ends, the normal state of the non-advantageous section continues. Further, in the normal state between flags, no matter which combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition to the normal advantageous section is not determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state shifts from the normal state of the non-advantageous section to one of the gaming states of the normal advantageous section, the above-mentioned advantageous section during notification period is started (that is, the lighting of the state indicator is started. Along with this, the regulation monitoring period described above is started (that is, counting of the number of games “1500” times, which is the upper limit for continuing a series of advantageous game sections, is started).

(Normally advantageous section game state)
Each gaming state in the normal advantageous section is a gaming state (AT) in which information of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and is a gaming state advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state. In each game state of the normal advantage section, when it is determined to shift to the advantage section (including the case where it is already determined to shift to the advantage section in the normal state), the normal advantage section has ended In this case (in FIG. 14, “normal advantageous section end/advantageous section transition winning”), the main control circuit 90 shifts the game state to one of the advantageous section game states in accordance with the decision trigger. Further, in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, when it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the normal advantageous section ends (in FIG. 14, "normal advantageous section end advantageous section transition non-win") ), the main control circuit 90 shifts the game state to the normal state of the non-advantageous section. The details of the game flow in each game state of the normal advantage section will be described later with reference to FIG. 34 described later.

In each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, the main control circuit 90, push order small winning combination (“F_upper left bell 1”, “F_upper left bell 2”, “F_upper middle bell 1”, “F_upper middle” Bell 2”, “F_upper right/left bell 1”, “F_upper right/left bell 2”, “F_upper right middle bell 1”, “F_upper right middle bell 2”, “F_middle left bell 1”, “F_middle left” Bell 2”, “F_Middle Middle Bell 1”, “F_Middle Middle Bell 2”, “F_Middle Right Left Bell 1”, “F_Middle Right Left Bell 2”, “F_Middle Right Middle Bell 1”, “F_Middle Right Middle Bell” Bell 2", "F_Lower Middle Bell 1", "F_Lower Middle Bell 2", "F_Lower Right Left Bell 1", "F_Lower Right Left Bell 2", "F_Lower Right Middle Bell 1", "F_Lower Right Middle" If any of the "Bell 2" internal winning combinations) is determined as the internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not to notify the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and it is determined to notify. , The information of the stop operation advantageous to the player (that is, the information of the stop operation by which the player can obtain the most medals) is notified (see FIG. 45 described later).

Further, in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, the main control circuit 90, push order replay (“F_RT0 middle replay 1” to “F_RT0 middle replay 6”, “F_RT1 middle replay 1” to “F_RT1 middle replay 6” described later. , "F_RT2 mid-replay 1" to "F_RT2 mid-replay 3") is determined as the internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not to notify the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player. Information of a stop operation advantageous to the player (that is, information of a stop operation capable of shifting to an RT state advantageous to the player or maintaining the advantageous RT state) is not notified (described later). See FIG. 45). In this sense, the RT function does not operate (except when the pressing order is accidentally correct), and only the AT function operates (AT game state).

Here, in the present embodiment, in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, when in the RT3 state or the RT5 state (i.e., during the eight games or the inter-flag state after the RT3 transition to be described later is displayed). ), the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed until the normal advantageous section ends. On the other hand, in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, when the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed only once. Therefore, even in the game state of the same normal advantageous section, if the RT state is different, the number of times the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed also changes, so that the profit of the player based on it also changes. There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state in each of the normal advantageous sections is in the bonus state (more specifically, when the bonus combination is won during the normal advantageous section), the bonus state is in the normal state. As in the above (more specifically, when the bonus combination is won during the non-advantageous section), information on the stop operation advantageous to the player in the bonus state (that is, the player can obtain the most medals) The information of possible stop operation) is not notified (see FIG. 45 described later). Specifically, when any one of the push order small winning combinations in the bonus state (the internal winning combinations of “F_JAC1_1” to “F_JAC1_6” described later) is determined as the internal winning combination, the information on the stop operation advantageous to the player Is not determined.

In the present embodiment, in the bonus non-winning state of each game state of the normal advantage section, when a specific combination other than the bonus combination (see FIG. 34 described later) is won, the game is performed even between the game states of the normal advantage section. The state is changed, and the period (the number of games) during which the normal advantageous section continues is also changed. In addition, when the bonus combination is won, if it is not already decided to shift to the advantageous zone, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous zone, and it is advantageous if it is decided to shift to the advantageous zone. When it is decided to shift to the line battle state of the section and it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, the high-precision 4 state of the advantageous section is usually continued.

Here, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, the bonus winning combination is an internal winning combination (including “F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2” and “F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2”) including a bonus winning combination in which the same winning probability is set between the set values. ) Is won not only based on the fact that the winning combination is won, but also the internal winning combinations (“F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2” and “F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2”) including bonus winning combinations in which different winning probabilities are set between the set values are won. Even if the player wins based on what he has done, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined. That is, in the normal advantageous section, as a common process during the normal advantageous section, regardless of whether or not an internal winning combination including a bonus combination having a setting difference in the winning probability is determined, when the bonus combination is won, Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined. Also in this sense, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section is a more advantageous gaming state than the gaming state of the non-advantageous section.

In addition, in the present embodiment, each game state of the normal advantageous section is in the above-described advantageous section during the notification period (that is, the state indicator is lit) and also during the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period (that is, It is in the state of “1500” times of counting the number of games, which is the upper limit for continuing a series of advantageous games. However, when the normal advantageous period ends without shifting to the advantageous period, the above-described advantageous period notification period ends (that is, the state indicator is turned off and turned off), and The regulated monitoring period is ended (that is, the counting of the number of games “1500” times, which is the upper limit for continuing a series of advantageous games, is ended, and the counting result is initialized (cleared)).

(Game state of advantageous section)
Each gaming state of the advantageous section is a gaming state (ART) in which information of a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and a gaming advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state and each gaming state of the normal advantageous section. It is in a state. In each gaming state of the advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 basically performs a stop operation advantageous for the player when either the above-mentioned push order small combination or push order replay is determined as the internal winning combination. Information (that is, information on a stop operation that allows the player to obtain the most medals and shift to or maintain an advantageous RT state for the player) (described later) See FIG. 45). In this sense, the ART function is activated (ART game state). In each gaming state of the advantageous section, when the advantageous section ends without extension (continuation) (including the case where the later-described advantageous section is forcibly ended) (in FIG. 14, "end of advantageous section") , The main control circuit 90 shifts the game state to the normal state of the non-advantageous section.

Here, in each gaming state of the advantageous section, as a result of the push order notification of the push order small combination and the push order replay described above, the RT2 state corresponds (is maintained) as the basic RT state. ing. Also, except for the RT4 state after the bonus state ends, the RT3 state based on the display of the RT3 transition described later, and the RT0 state after the RT3 state ends, from the normal advantageous zone each gaming state to the advantageous zone each gaming state. When transitioning, in most cases, the RT state in each gaming state of the normal advantage section corresponds to the RT1 state. Therefore, the line battle preparation state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state, and the ending preparation state, which are the game states of the advantageous section, can be shifted to the line battle state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the ending 1 state or the ending 2 state, respectively. If it is determined and the RT state is not the RT2 state, it is positioned as a preparation state for raising the RT state to the RT2 state.

When the RT state shifts to the RT2 state in the line battle preparation state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state, and the ending preparation state, the main control circuit 90 changes the game state to the line battle state, the right acquisition lottery state, respectively. And the state is changed to the ending 1 state or the ending 2 state. The details of the game flow in each game state of the advantageous section will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 to 44 described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the bonus state is set in each gaming state of the advantageous section (more specifically, when the bonus combination is won during the advantageous section), the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section are defined. Differently, in the bonus state, information of the stop operation advantageous to the player (that is, information of the stop operation by which the player can obtain the most medals) is notified (see FIG. 45 described later). Specifically, when any one of the push order small winning combinations in the bonus state (the internal winning combinations of “F_JAC1_1” to “F_JAC1_6” described later) is determined as the internal winning combination, the information on the stop operation advantageous to the player Will be informed. Therefore, when the bonus state is set in the advantageous section, more profit is given to the player than when the bonus state is set in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. In this sense as well, each gaming state of the advantageous section is a gaming state more advantageous than each gaming state of the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section.

Further, in the present embodiment, each gaming state of the advantageous section is in the advantageous section notification period described above (that is, the state indicator is lit), and also in the regulation monitoring period described above (that is, a series). The state of "1500" is being counted, which is the upper limit at which the advantageous game section continues. In addition, when the advantageous period ends without reaching the upper limit of “1500” times of the number of games during the advantageous period (including the bonus state), the above-described advantageous period notification period ends (that is, The status indicator is turned off and then turned off, and the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period is ended (that is, the number of "1500" games is counted, which is the upper limit for continuing a series of advantageous games. The counting result is initialized (cleared) after the end. Further, when the number of games in the advantageous section (including the bonus state) reaches the upper limit of "1500", the advantageous section is forcibly ended (only in the bonus state when in the bonus state). Is continued), and in this case as well, the above-mentioned advantageous period notification period is ended (that is, the state indicator is turned off and turned off), and the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period is ended (that is, , The count of the number of games “1500” times, which is the upper limit for continuing a series of advantageous games, is finished, and the count result is initialized (cleared).

In the present embodiment, when the advantageous section is forcibly ended based on the number of games in the advantageous section (including the bonus state) reaching the upper limit “1500” times, for example, the advantageous section Even if it is decided to continue each gaming state in (the right is given to continue), or if the remaining number of games in each gaming state in the advantageous section remains, After all are initialized (cleared), the normal state of the non-advantageous section is entered. Further, when the advantageous section is forcibly ended while in the bonus section of the advantageous section, the above-mentioned pushing order notification of the pushing order small winning combination in the bonus state is also immediately ended. .. However, in this case, exceptionally, the pushing order notification of the pushing order small winning combination may be performed until the bonus state ends. Further, the number of games played corresponding to the regulation monitoring period is not limited to "1500", and its value can be changed appropriately.

In addition, in the present embodiment, basically, the number of games (the number of games) is defined as a period during which each gaming state corresponding to the above-described normal advantageous section and the advantageous section continues or a period during which each gaming state is extended (continuous period). ), but the method of managing the period of each game state is not limited to this. For example, among the above-mentioned normal advantageous section and each gaming state corresponding to the advantageous section, the period of one or a plurality of gaming states, the payout number of medals paid out during that period, and the number of inserted medals from that period are set. It may be managed by the subtracted number of coins (net increase), or by the number of times (the number of times of notification) the notification that affects the payout of medals (that is, the notification when the above-mentioned small push winning combination wins) is performed. You may.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that various data tables used in various lottery performed in each game state related to the game property described in FIG. 14 will be described later together with the description of each game property.

[Design placement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table, the position of each symbol in the respective rotation directions of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the data specifying the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 15) Refer to the symbol code table))))).

In the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 is defined as "0" when the reel index is detected. Then, in each reel, in the order of advancing in the rotation direction of the reel (the direction from the symbol position "19" to the symbol position "0" in FIG. 15) based on the symbol position "0", the value of the symbol counter corresponds to " "0" to "19" are assigned to each symbol as symbol positions.

That is, by referring to the value (“0” to “19”) of the symbol counter and the symbol arrangement table, the reels are displayed in the upper area, middle area and lower area of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4. It is possible to specify the type of pattern that is present. In addition, in this embodiment, as a design, "red 7", "blue 7", "BAR", "cherry 1", "cherry 2", "bell", "watermelon", "replay" and "blank" Nine kinds of designs are used.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the symbol "red 7" (symbol code 1), and the symbol "blue 7" (symbol code 2), “00000010” is assigned as data. The symbol "BAR" (symbol code 3) is assigned "00000011" as data, the symbol "cherry 1" (symbol code 4) is assigned "00000100" as data, and the symbol "cherry 2" (symbol) “00000101” is assigned as data to the code 5).

The data "0000110" is assigned to the symbol "bell" (symbol code 6). The symbol "watermelon" (symbol code 7) is assigned "00000111" as data, the symbol "Replay" (symbol code 8) is assigned "00001000" as data, and the symbol "blank" (symbol code 9) ) Is assigned "00001001" as data.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16 to FIG. 18, an internal lottery table that is referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described. 16 and 17 are internal lottery tables that are referred to in each of the RT0 state to the RT5 state. Further, FIG. 18 is an internal lottery table referred to in the bonus state.

The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state (see FIG. 13), and defines the correspondence relationship between various internal winning combinations and the lottery value when each internal winning combination is determined. The lottery value is defined for each set value (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the preset expected value of the internal winnings such as a bonus combination and a small combination. This setting is changed using, for example, the reset switch 76 and the setting key type switch 54 (see FIG. 7).

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535) by the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 is associated with each internal winning combination. The specified lottery value is added sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery value+random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result overflows). Then, in the predetermined internal winning combination, if the lottery result exceeds 65535, it is determined that the internal winning combination has been won. In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, an example of performing lottery by adding the lottery value to the extracted random number value has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value. The winning/non-winning of the internal lottery may be determined by determining whether the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than “0” (whether the lottery result underflows).

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability of being determined. The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be represented by “lottery value defined for each winning number/the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)”.

In the internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 state to the RT5 state, as shown in FIG. 16, basically, the type and winning probability of the replay combination determined as the internal winning combination are determined according to the type of the RT state. Changes. For example, the replay combinations associated with the names “Replay 1 in F_RT0 (No. 40)” to “Replay 6 in F_RT0 (No. 45)” are not determined as internal winning combinations other than the RT0 state, and are internally set in the RT0 state. It is decided as a winning combination.

16 and 17, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 1" to "No. 38" is an internal winning combination in which the bonus combination and the replay combination or the small combination overlap. For example, in “F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (No. 1)”, the bonus combination “F_BB1” and the replay combination “F_confirmation rep” are won, and the symbol combination “BB01” corresponding to the bonus combination “F_BB1” is won. (See FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) and the combination of symbols “REP01” to “REP09” (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) corresponding to the replay combination “F_confirmed rep” (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) are allowed to be derived (winning) Is allowed) has become an internal winning combination.

16 and 17, the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 39" to "No. 60" are the internal winning combinations that the replay winning combination wins. For example, “F_maintenance rep (No. 40)” is won by the replay combination “F_maintenance rep”, and the symbol combination “REP02” corresponding to the replay combination “F_maintenance rep” (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later). ) Is allowed to derive (winning is allowed) is an internal winning combination.

16 and 17, the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 98" are the internal winning combinations that the small winning combination wins. For example, “F_chance eye A1 (No. 61)” is won by the small win “F_chance eye A1”, and the symbol combination “NML14”, “NML22”, and “NML22” corresponding to the small win “F_chance eye A1”. It is an internal winning combination that allows derivation of “NML26” and “NML30” (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) (winning is permitted).

Although illustration is omitted, when “F_chance eye A1 (No. 61)” to “F_chance eye B4 (No. 68)” are determined as the internal winning combination, “NZR01” described later (later described. 19 to 22) is permitted (stop display is permitted). Here, "HZR01" is not a combination of symbols related to winning, but a part of a combination of deviating symbols, but as a combination of symbols for shifting the gaming state from another RT state to the RT3 state (RT3 transition eye) It is a combination of defined symbols, and basically, derivation is not permitted except when any of the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68" is determined. Therefore, "NZR01" can be said to be a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68".

Similarly, when “F_upper left bell 1 (No. 77)” to “F_lower right middle bell 2 (No. 98)” are determined as the internal winning combination, “NZR02” (to be described later in FIG. 19 to FIG. 22) is also allowed to be derived (stop display is allowed). Here, "HZR02" is not a combination of symbols related to winning, but a part of a combination of deviating symbols, but as a combination of symbols for shifting the gaming state from another RT state to the RT1 state (RT1 transition eye) It is a combination of defined symbols, and basically, derivation is not permitted except when any of the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 77" to "No. 98" is determined. Therefore, "NZR02" can be said to be a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 77" to "No. 98".

In this embodiment, the bonus combination is not further determined in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), that is, in the state where the bonus combination has already been determined as the internal winning combination (carried over). Therefore, in the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, “0” is set to the lottery value of the internal winning combination indicated by “No. 1” to “No. 38” in the inter-flag state (RT5 state). ing. However, "No. 2" to "No. 10" and "No. 12" are set so that the winning probability of the small winning combination does not change between the inter-flag state (RT5 state) and the bonus non-winning state (RT0 to RT4 state). The lottery values related to the small wins assigned in the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 38" to "No. 38" are "No. 61" to "No. 68" and "No. 68" in the inter-flag state (RT5 state). 72” and “No. 73” are added to the lottery value of the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combinations indicated by “No. 61” to “No. 68”, “No. 72” and “No. 73” do not have a high winning probability in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), but the bonus. It has become the same probability among the game states other than the state.

Further, in FIGS. 16 and 17, “No. 0” indicates “off” in which derivation of any defined combination of symbols (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) is not allowed. The higher the allocation (lottery value) of “out”, the more disadvantageous to the player. It should be noted that in the RT0 state and the RT2 state, there is no case where “out” is determined. Further, in the RT5 state, the probability that the “out” is determined is described as “22289/65536”, but in reality, one of the bonus combinations has already been determined as the internal winning combination (carried over). Since it is in a state of being), “out” is not determined in that sense.

16 and 17, the internal lottery table when the setting value is "1" (setting 1) is described as an example, but "No. 21", "No. 30", "No" .39” and “No. 74”, internal lottery combinations other than the internal winning combinations shown in FIG. That is, they have the same winning probability. On the other hand, regarding the internal winning combinations shown in “No. 21,” “No. 30,” “No. 39,” and “No. 74,” between each set value (or between a predetermined set value and a specific set value). Different lottery values have been set. That is, the winning probabilities are different (see (*1), (*2) and (*3) in FIGS. 16 and 17).

Specifically, for example, in the case of the internal winning combinations shown in “No. 21” and “No. 30”, when the set value is “1”, the lottery value of “22” is set, respectively. When the set value is "6", a lottery value of "77" is set respectively (that is, as the set value becomes higher, the lottery results in the internal winning combinations shown in "No. 21" and "No. 30"). The value is increasing by "11"). Although illustration is omitted, in the flag-to-flag state (RT5 state), as the lottery value set for the internal winning combination shown in “No. 21” and “No. 30” increases, “ The lottery value set for the internal winning combination shown in No. 72” also increases.

Further, for example, the internal winning combination shown in “No. 74” has setting values of “2”, “4” and “6” more than the setting values of “1”, “3” and “5”. In this case, the lottery value is set to be relatively high, and the lottery value is set to increase as the set value increases.

In addition, for example, the internal winning combination shown in “No. 39” has setting values “2”, “4” and “6” rather than setting values “1”, “3” and “5”. In this case, the lottery value is set to be relatively low, and the lottery value is set to decrease as the set value increases. This is for adjusting the increment of the lottery value of the internal winning combination shown in “No. 21”, “No. 30” and “No. 74”. Therefore, for example, in the RT0 state and the RT2 state, “0” is maintained without changing the probability that “off” is determined. Note that these are examples of different winning probabilities of a specific internal winning combination between the set values.

In FIG. 18, the internal winning combination indicated by “No. 1” to “No. 7” is an internal winning combination in which the small winning combination is won, and in the case of winning, the corresponding symbols shown in FIG. Derivation of combinations is allowed (winning is allowed). In the present embodiment, in the RB state (that is, the BB1 to BB4 states), the replay combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, but one of the replay combinations shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. Alternatively, a plurality of replay combinations may be determined as internal winning combinations.

[Design combination table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19 to FIG. 22, a symbol combination table that defines symbol combinations relating to winning and the like in the present embodiment will be described. In addition, in the present embodiment, as an example of providing a symbol combination table as the data that predefines a combination of a plurality of symbols, the symbol combination displayed on the main control circuit 90 side is identified. If possible, the data can be defined by other methods. For example, a combination of symbol codes may be set, and the symbol combination displayed thereby may be identified.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the symbol combination table predefines a combination of a plurality of symbols, and defines data indicating the type of the symbol combination as a display combination (winning operation flag). There is. Further, the symbol combination table is composed of 9-byte data so as to correspond to the hit request flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25 described later), and the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30 described later). In addition, data indicating different display combinations (winning action flags) is defined in each bit of each storage area.

It should be noted that in FIGS. 19 to 22, there is a portion marked with "/" in the prescribed symbol combination, but this constitutes the symbol combination in any of the symbols shown. Indicates that. For example, the combination of “HZR01” is a combination of symbols in which the symbol of the left reel is “cherry 1”, the symbol of the middle reel is “cherry 1”, and the symbol of the right reel is “cherry 1” (that is, “cherry 1- Cherry 1-cherry 1") and the symbol of the left reel is "cherry 2", the symbol of the middle reel is "cherry 1", and the symbol of the right reel is "cherry 1" (that is, "cherry 2-"). "Cherry 1-Cherry 1") is a combination of corresponding symbols.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "HZR01" is an outlying symbol combination, but when the symbol combination is displayed on the activated line, the RT state is shifted from another RT state to the RT3 state. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination (“RT3 transition”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "HZR02" is an outlying symbol combination, but when the symbol combination is displayed on the activated line, the RT state is shifted from another RT state to the RT1 state. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination (“RT1 transition”).

Display combinations (winning operation flags) "BB01", "BB02", "BB03" and "BB04" are combinations of symbols related to the bonus combination, and when each combination of symbols is displayed on the display effective line. , Activate the corresponding bonus state.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP01" to "REP06" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when any one of these symbols is displayed on the activated line, the replay is performed. Activate. The combination of symbols "REP01" can be referred to as "parallel lip" or "straight line lip", and the combination of symbols "REP02" can be referred to as "normal lip" and symbol "REP03". The combination of symbols can be referred to as "bullied lip", the symbol combination of "REP04" can be referred to as "special lip", and the symbol combination of "REP05" can be referred to as "fake lip". , The combination of symbols of "REP06" can be referred to as "BAR matching lip".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP07" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the activated line, the re-game is activated and the RT state is set to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a symbol combination (“RT0 transition rip”) to be shifted from the state (for example, RT1 state) to the RT0 state.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP08" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the activated line, the replay is activated and the RT state is set to another RT. The state (for example, RT0 state and RT2 state) is a symbol combination defined as a symbol combination (“RT1 transition lip”) to be shifted from the RT1 state.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP09" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the activated line, the re-game is activated and the RT state is set to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination of symbols (“RT2 transition lip”) to be shifted from the state (for example, RT0 state) to the RT2 state.

The display combination (winning action flag) "NML01" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the activated line, eight medals are paid out. The combination of symbols "NML01" can be referred to as the combination of symbols "bell".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML02" to "NML13" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when one of these symbols is displayed on the activated line, one of the symbols is displayed. Medals will be paid out. The symbol combinations of "NML02" to "NML13" can be collectively referred to as the symbol combinations of "batting order combination".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML14" to "NML30" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when one of these symbols is displayed on the activated line, one of the symbols is displayed. Medals will be paid out. The symbol combinations of "NML14" to "NML30" can be collectively referred to as the symbol combinations of "chance combination".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML31" to "NML33" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any one of these symbols is displayed on the activated line, five symbols are displayed. Medals will be paid out. The combination of symbols "NML31" to "NML33" can be collectively referred to as the combination of symbols "special combination".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML34" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the activated line, eight medals are paid out. The symbol combination of "NML34" can be referred to as a symbol combination of "cross down bell".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML35" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the activated line, five medals are paid out. The symbol combination of “NML35” can be referred to as the symbol combination of “watermelon”.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML36" and "NML37" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any one of these symbols is displayed on the activated line, eight pieces are displayed. Medals will be paid out. The combination of symbols "NML36" and "NML37" can be collectively referred to as the symbol combination "JACA".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML38" to "NML40" is a combination of symbols relating to a small combination, and when any one of these symbols is displayed on the activated line, two symbols are displayed. Medals will be paid out. The symbol combinations of “NML38” to “NML40” can be collectively referred to as the symbol combinations of “JACB”.

In the present embodiment, an example in which data indicating one display combination (winning operation flag) to which a combination (combination) of a plurality of symbols is assigned is described, but one display combination (winning prize) The data indicating the operation flag) may be configured such that only one symbol combination (combination) is assigned.

[Correspondence between internal winning combination, stop operation sequence (batting order), display combination, etc.]
Next, with reference to FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation sequence (batting order), the display combination and the like will be described.

In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a symbol combination displayed in a different manner depending on the player's stop operation order (push order), a so-called "push order combination" (for example, the above-mentioned "push order small combination" or "push order combination") Order replay”). Since the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided, there are a maximum of six stop operation sequences (pushing sequences).

In FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, the stop operation order (pushing order) is “left, middle, right” as “batting order 1”, and the stop operation order (pushing order) is “left, right, middle”. It is shown as "Batting Order 2", and that the stopping operation order (pushing order) is "Center, Left, Right" is shown as "Batting Order 3", and the stopping operation order (pushing order) is The order of "middle, right, left" is shown as "batting order 4", and the stop operation order (push order) is "right, left, middle" as "batting order 5", and the stopping operation is shown. The order (pushing order) is “right, middle, left” is shown as “batting order 6”.

As shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, “F_confirmed lip” is won regardless of the stop operation sequence and the timing of the stop operation when it is determined as an internal winning combination instead of the push order combination. "Special Lip" is established. Depending on the timing of the stop operation, one of the other winning replay combinations may be established.

Here, "regardless of the timing of the stop operation" means that when the effective line is three lines of "center line", "top line" and "bottom line" and the maximum number of sliding pieces is "4", It means that the corresponding symbols are arranged so that they can be stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, they are arranged within the range of 5 symbols). To do. Note that, for example, on the left reel 3L, the symbol "cherry 1" is not stopped and displayed within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, the stop operation is performed at a timing when the symbol positions "10" to "12" are in the middle row). However, when the stop operation is performed at that location, the symbol "cherry 2" is placed at the symbol position "13" so that the symbol "cherry 2" can be stopped and displayed. ing. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is determined, for example, the symbols "cherry 1" and "cherry 2" are redundantly permitted to be stopped and displayed as the symbols forming the combination of the symbols corresponding thereto. As a result, within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces as a whole, even when the corresponding symbol can be stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines, the combination of the symbols is "regardless of the timing of the stop operation". It can be said that it holds. The same applies to other display combinations (winning operation flag) and the like. However, in the push order, since the combination of symbols that are controlled to be stopped preferentially based on the stop operation sequence varies, even if the symbols are arranged as described above, the type of the stop operation sequence Depending on the design, it may not be stopped and displayed on the activated line.

If "F_Maintain Lip" is determined as an internal winning combination instead of a push order combination, one of the winning "normal Lip" is established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. To do.

"F_RT0 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 1", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, "Transition to RT2" is performed. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “batting order 1”, the “RT1 transition rep” is established and the RT state is changed to the RT1 state regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

“F_RT0 middle replay 2” is a push order combination, and if the stop operation sequence is “bat order 2” when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, “RT2 transition” is performed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batt order 2", the "RT1 transition rep" is satisfied and the RT state is changed to the RT1 state regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

"F_RT0 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 3", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, "Transition to RT2" is performed. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than “batting order 3”, the “RT1 shift rep” is established and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

“F_RT0 middle replay 4” is a push order combination, and if the stop operation sequence is “batting order 4” when it is determined as the internal winning combination in the RT0 state, “RT2 shift” is performed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “batting order 4”, the “RT1 shift rep” is established and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

"F_RT0 middle replay 5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 5", "RT2 transition" is performed regardless of the stop operation timing. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “batting order 5”, the “RT1 transition rep” is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 6" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 6", "RT2 transition" is performed regardless of the stop operation timing. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “batting order 6”, the “RT1 transition rep” is established and the RT state is shifted to the RT1 state regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

"F_RT1 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state and the stop operation order is "bat order 1", "RT0 transition" is performed regardless of the stop operation timing. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "bat order 1", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition rep" is established, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The transition is not made and the RT1 state is maintained (maintenance lip). It should be noted that when the stop operation sequence is “Batting Order 5” and “Batting Order 6”, the stop control is performed so that the “fake lip” is preferentially stopped over the other “maintenance lip”. That is, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing, the "fake lip" is established, and if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate timing, another "maintenance lip" is established. The same applies to "replay 2 during F_RT1" and "replay 3 during F_RT1".

"F_RT1 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 2", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, "Transition to RT0" is performed. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than “batting order 2”, regardless of the stop operation timing, one of the replay combinations other than the winning “RT0 transition rep” is established, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The transition is not made and the RT1 state is maintained (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 3", "RT0 transition" is performed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than “batting order 3”, one of the replay combinations other than the winning “RT0 transition rep” is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The transition is not made and the RT1 state is maintained (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 4" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 4", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, "Transition to RT0" is performed. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "Batting Order 4", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition rep" is established, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The transition is not made and the RT1 state is maintained (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state and the stop operation sequence is "batting order 5", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "Batting order 5", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition rep" is established, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The transition is not made and the RT1 state is maintained (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 6" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state and the stop operation sequence is "batt order 6", "RT0 transition" is performed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batt order 6," regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition rep" is established, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The transition is not made and the RT1 state is maintained (maintenance lip).

In the present embodiment, when the “RT0 transition lip” is established, the “RT1 transition lip” may be established at the same time, but in this case, the main control circuit 90 determines that the “RT0 transition lip” is established by “RT1 transition lip”. Judgment is given priority over the establishment of "Transition Lip". That is, when "RT0 transition lip" and "RT1 transition lip" are established at the same time, it is determined that "RT0 transition lip" is established and the RT state is shifted to the RT0 state, and "RT1 transition lip" is established. I do not judge.

"F_RT2 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation sequence is "Batting order 1" and "Batting order 2", the timing of the stop operation is irrelevant. Instead, a replay combination (for example, “normal lip”) other than the winning “RT1 transition lip” is established, the RT state does not transition to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance lip). On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "bat order 1" and "bat order 2", the "RT1 transition rep" is satisfied and the RT state is shifted to the RT1 state regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

"F_RT2 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 3" and "batter order 4", the stop operation timing is irrelevant. Instead, a replay combination (for example, “normal lip”) other than the winning “RT1 transition lip” is established, the RT state does not transition to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance lip). On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "bat order 3" and "bat order 4", the "RT1 transition rep" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state is shifted to the RT1 state.

"F_RT2 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 5" and "batter order 6", the stop operation timing is irrelevant. Instead, a replay combination (for example, “normal lip”) other than the winning “RT1 transition lip” is established, the RT state does not transition to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance lip). On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "Batting Order 5" and "Batting Order 6", the "RT1 transition rep" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state is shifted to the RT1 state.

When the "F_upper lip" is determined as the internal winning combination instead of the push winning combination, the "parallel lip" is established at the top line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, " The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel, which is "Upper Lip".

When "F_Middle-stage Lip 1" is determined as an internal winning combination rather than a push order combination, a "parallel lip" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, The "replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle row of each reel, and becomes the "middle row lip").

"F_Middle stage rip 2" is a push order combination, and when determined as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 1" to "batter order 4", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, " If "middle rip" is established, the stop operation sequence is other than "bat order 1" to "bat order 4", and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing, "fake lip" is established and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing. If not, the "middle stage lip" is established. It should be noted that, since no game state transition is made regardless of which replay combination is established, "F_Middle stage rip 2" is a push order combination, but the profit of the player does not change depending on the stop operation sequence. It is a role.

"F_Middle stage rip 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation sequence is "bat order 1" and "bat order 2", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, " "Middle-stage rip" is established, the stop operation order is other than "bat order 1" and "bat order 2", and if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing, "BAR complete rep" is established and the stop operation timing is appropriate. If it is not the correct timing, the "middle stage rip" will be established. It should be noted that, since the game state is not changed regardless of which replay combination is achieved, "F_middle rep 3" is a push order combination, but the profit of the player does not change depending on the stop operation sequence. It is a role.

When "F_lower lip" is determined as an internal winning combination rather than a push order combination, a "parallel lip" is established at the bottom line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, " The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel, which is "Lower Lip".

When "F_Bullet Lip" is determined as an internal winning combination rather than a push order combination, the "Bullet Lip" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation sequence and the timing of the stop operation (that is, " The symbol "replay" is displayed in a straight line in the middle row of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, but is not displayed in the middle row of the right reel 3R).

"F_JAC1_1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 1", the "bell" and the winning combination are performed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. One of the existing “JACA” is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "Batting Order 1", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2", and "S_JACB3" respectively). Are simultaneously displayed on the activated line), and 6 medals are paid out.

Since "bell" and "JACA" are combinations of symbols in which eight medals are paid out, if they are simultaneously established as described above, originally "8+8=16 medals" will be paid out. However, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of medals that can be paid out in one game is set to "15", and even if a prize for more than 15 coins is generated, 15 medals are paid out. I'm trying to put it out. The same applies to "F_JAC1_2" to "F_JAC1_6".

"F_JAC1_2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 2", the "bell" and the winning combination are executed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. One of the existing “JACA” is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “batt order 2”, all the winning “JACB” are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, “S_JACB1”, “C_JACB2” and “S_JACB3” respectively). Are simultaneously displayed on the activated line), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 3", the "bell" and the winning combination are executed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. One of the existing “JACA” is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “batt order 3”, all winning “JACB” are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, “S_JACB1”, “C_JACB2” and “S_JACB3” respectively). Are simultaneously displayed on the activated line), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_4" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 4", the "bell" and the winning combination are performed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. One of the existing “JACA” is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "Batting Order 4", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively). Are simultaneously displayed on the activated line), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 5", the "bell" and the winning combination are performed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. One of the existing “JACA” is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "Batting order 5", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively). Are simultaneously displayed on the activated line), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_6" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 6", the "bell" and the winning combination are performed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. One of the existing “JACA” is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “batt order 6”, all the winning “JACB” are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, “S_JACB1”, “C_JACB2” and “S_JACB3” respectively). Are simultaneously displayed on the activated line), and 6 medals are paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the RB state, when the pressing order is correct (when the stop operation is performed according to the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player), the “bell” and the “JACA” are overlapped and the prize is won. By doing so, 15 medals are paid out, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the payout number of "JACA" medals is set to "15" and the pushing order is correct, it is won. If one of the existing “JACA” is established, 15 medals may be paid out.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the RB state, when the pressing order is not correct (when the stop operation is not performed in the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player), a plurality of “JACB” are duplicated. Although 6 medals are paid out by winning (2 lines x 3 lines), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the payout number of "JACB" medals is set to "6", and the pushing order is If the correct answer is not obtained, six medals may be paid out by establishing one of the winning "JACB".

If "F_JAC2" is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state instead of the pushing order combination, either "bell" or winning "JACA" is irrespective of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. Is established, and 15 medals are paid out. Note that similarly, for example, the payout number of medals of "JACA" is set to "15", and if any of the winning "JACA" is established, 15 medals are paid out. You may

When the “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and the “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4” are determined as the internal winning combination instead of the push winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is If the timing is appropriate, the "chance part" is missed and "RT3 transition" is displayed on the activated line. In this case, the medal is not paid out, but the RT state may shift to the RT3 state. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to perform the stop operation in which the “chance hand” is dropped and the “RT3 shift eye” is displayed. Is likely to be. Here, in that sense, it is explained that it is the "appropriate" timing of the stop operation that the "chance part" is missed. On the other hand, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one of the winning "chance combinations" is established and one medal is paid out, but the RT state does not shift to the RT3 state. ..

Here, when any one of “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4” is determined as the internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. Whether or not this timing is determined based on, for example, the timing of the stop operation during the third stop operation. Specifically, 3/4 of the timings of all the stop operations at the time of the third stop operation is determined as an appropriate timing, and when the stop operation is performed at the timing, the “RT3 transition” is performed. When it is satisfied and the stop operation is performed at the remaining 1/4 timing, the "chance hand" is established because the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate. In addition, as a general rule, the timing of such a stop operation should be at least partially different among the “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and the “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4”. It includes what has become. Therefore, it is possible to change the appropriate timing depending on which internal winning combination is won, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game regarding the stop operation.

In the present embodiment, when the “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and the “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4” are determined as the internal winning combination, depending on the timing of the stop operation. Thus, the "RT3 transition point" or the "chance role" is established, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the "RT3 transition" is established when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, and the "chance hand" is established when the stop operation is not performed in the correct pressing order. Good. In addition, the “RT3 transition point” may be established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. In this case, the “RT3 shift” may be defined as a combination of symbols with which medals are paid out (for example, one medal is paid out).

"F_weak rare combination A" and "F_weak rare combination B" are won regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing when it is determined as the internal winning combination instead of the push order combination. One of the "chance roles" is established and one medal is paid out. As in the case of “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4”, the “chance hand” may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation. You may do it. In this case, the "RT3 shift" may not be displayed. In the present embodiment, the timing of the stop operation is appropriate when the winning of any of “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4” is successful. There is a case where the "chance part" is displayed without a case, and a case where the "F_weak rare part A" or "F_weak rare part B" is won and the "chance part" is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to change the expectation of the bonus winning combination winning combination and the expectation of the transition to RT3 depending on the internal winning combination and the stop operation mode, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

When “F_watermelon 1” and “F_watermelon 2” are determined as the internal winning combination instead of the push winning combination, the “watermelon” is established regardless of the stop operation sequence and the timing of the stop operation. One medal will be paid out. The “watermelon” may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation.

When the "F_determination winning combination" is determined as the internal winning combination instead of the push winning combination, all the winning "special winning combinations" are established regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation (that is, , "S_special winning combination 1", "C_special winning combination 2" and "S_special winning combination 3" are simultaneously displayed on the activated line), and 15 medals are paid out. Note that, for example, even if the payout number of medals for the "special combination" is set to "15" and one of the winning "special combinations" is established, 15 medals can be paid out. Good.

When the "F_Special Bell" is determined as the internal winning combination instead of the push order combination, the "cross down bell" is established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing, and eight medals are won. Be paid out.

When the "F_upper common bell" is determined as the internal winning combination rather than the push order combination, the "bell" is established at the top line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, " The "Bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel and becomes the "upper bell"), and 8 medals are paid out.

When the "F_middle-stage common bell" is determined as the internal winning combination instead of the push order combination, the "bell" is established on the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, " The "Bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line on the middle row of each reel, and becomes the "middle bell"), and 8 medals are paid out.

In the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination is determined, the "bell" is established at the bottom line regardless of the stop operation sequence and the timing of the stop operation (that is, the "bell" symbol is applied to each reel). It becomes a "lower bell" displayed in a straight line in the lower row), and 8 medals are paid out. For example, although there is no internal winning combination of "F_lower common bell", the inside of this "F_lower common bell" It is also possible to provide a winning combination and to win with a predetermined probability in a game state other than the bonus state.

“F_upper left bell 1” and “F_upper left bell 2” are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is “batter order 1” and “batter order 2” when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" will be established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol will be the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the top of each reel), and 8 medals will be paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "bat order 1" and "bat order 2" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "bat order combinations" is established and If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not an appropriate timing, the "RT1 transition eye" is established (RT1 transition), and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

"F_upper middle bell 1" and "F_upper middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batter order 3" and "batter order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" will be established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol will be the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the top of each reel), and 8 medals will be paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than “bat order 3” and “bat order 4” and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning “bat order combinations” is established and one If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not an appropriate timing, the "RT1 transition eye" is established (RT1 transition), and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

"F_upper right/left bell 1" and "F_upper right/left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation sequence is "batting order 5" when determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation timing is set. Regardless, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "Batting Order 5" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "Batting Order Combinations" will be established and one medal will be paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition eye" is established (RT1 transition), and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

"F_upper right middle bell 1" and "F_upper right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation sequence is "bat order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established on the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “Batting Order 6” and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing, one of the winning “Batting combination combinations” will be established and one medal will be paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition eye" is established (RT1 transition), and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the press order small win that becomes the “upper bell” when the press order is correct, “Batting order 1” and “Batting order 2” (that is, the first left stop) is the correct answer, “F_upper row”. Left bell 1" and "F_upper left bell 2", and "Batting order 3" and "Batting order 4" (that is, middle first stop) are correct answers "F_upper middle bell 1" and "F_upper middle bell 2" And "F_upper right middle bell 1" and "F_upper right left bell 2" where "batting order 5" is the correct answer, and "F_upper right middle bell 1" and "F_upper right middle bell" where "batting order 6" is the correct answer. 2” is provided. That is, among the maximum of 6 push orders (6 choices), the correct push order is specified to be 4 (4 choices). This is an example of the order, and the push order pattern (selection number) that is the correct answer is not limited to this.

For example, the correct pressing order may be defined to be 6 ways (6 options) or 3 ways (3 options). When there are three ways (three choices), the left first stop ("Batting order 1" and "Batting order 2"), the first middle stop ("Batting order 3" and "Batting order 4"), and the right first stop ( The internal winning combination relating to the “upper bell” may be configured such that one of the “batting order 5” and the “batting order 6”) is the correct pushing order. The same applies to the internal winning combinations related to the “RT0 transition lip” to the “RT2 transition lip”, the internal winning combinations relating to the “middle bell”, and the internal winning combinations relating to the “lower bell” described below. That is, in the push order combination, the push order pattern (selection number) that is the correct answer can be set as appropriate, and the pattern (selection number) is not limited to the one described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

"F_middle-stage left bell 1" and "F_middle-stage left bell 2" are push order combinations, and when determined to be an internal winning combination, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 1" and "batter order 2", Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established on the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is a "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and 8 medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "bat order 1" and "bat order 2" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "bat order combinations" is established and If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not an appropriate timing, the "RT1 transition eye" is established (RT1 transition), and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

“F_middle-stage middle bell 1” and “F_middle-stage middle bell 2” are push order combinations, and if the stop operation sequence is “batter order 3” and “batter order 4” when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established on the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is a "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and 8 medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than “bat order 3” and “bat order 4” and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning “bat order combinations” is established and one If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not an appropriate timing, the "RT1 transition eye" is established (RT1 transition), and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

"F_middle-stage right/left bell 1" and "F_middle-stage right/left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation sequence is "batting order 5" when determined as an internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is determined. Regardless, the "bell" is established on the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is a "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "Batting Order 5" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "Batting Order Combinations" will be established and one medal will be paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition eye" is established (RT1 transition), and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

"F_middle-stage right middle bell 1" and "F_middle-stage right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation sequence is "bat order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established on the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “Batting Order 6” and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing, one of the winning “Batting combination combinations” will be established and one medal will be paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition eye" is established (RT1 transition), and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

“F_lower-stage bell 1” and “F_lower-stage bell 2” are push order combinations, and when determined as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation sequence is “bat order 3” and “bat order 4”, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and 8 medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than “bat order 3” and “bat order 4” and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning “bat order combinations” is established and one If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not an appropriate timing, the "RT1 transition eye" is established (RT1 transition), and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

"F_lower row right/left bell 1" and "F_lower row right/left bell 2" are push order combinations, and when determined as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 5", the timing of the stop operation is determined. Regardless, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "Batting Order 5" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "Batting Order Combinations" will be established and one medal will be paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition eye" is established (RT1 transition), and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

"F_lower right middle bell 1" and "F_lower right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established on the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and 8 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “Batting Order 6” and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing, one of the winning “Batting combination combinations” will be established and one medal will be paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition eye" is established (RT1 transition), and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

In the present embodiment, when any of “F_upper left bell 1” to “F_lower right middle bell 2” is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed in the pushing order that is the correct answer. If not, whether or not the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing is determined based on the timing of the stop operation during the third stop operation, for example. Specifically, half the timing of all the stop operations at the time of the third stop operation is determined as an appropriate timing, and when the stop operation is performed at the timing, the winning is performed. If one of the "battle order combinations" is established and the stop operation is performed at the remaining 1/2 timing, the "RT1 transition" is established because the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when any of the “F_upper left bell 1” to the “F_upper right middle bell 2” is determined as the internal winning combination and the state is the inter-flag state (RT5 state), Regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established on the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed as "upper bell" on the upper row of each reel), and 8 pieces Will be paid out. In the case where any of “F_middle stage left bell 1” to “F_middle stage right middle bell 2” is determined as the internal winning combination and the state is the inter-flag state (RT5 state), the stop operation order, and Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established on the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is a "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and 8 medals are paid out. .. Further, in the case where any one of “F_lower middle bell 1” to “F_lower right bell 2” is determined as the internal winning combination and is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), the stop operation order, and Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and 8 medals are paid out. ..

That is, in the flag-to-flag state (RT5 state), the push-order small winning combination is no longer the push-down winning combination (the push-down winning combination is unquestioned). However, it is not always necessary to configure in this way, and even in the flag-to-flag state (RT5 state), as described above, if the pushing order is the correct answer, eight medals will be paid out. "Bell", "middle bell" or "lower bell") is displayed as a stop, and if it is not the correct pressing order, one medal is paid out if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate "Stop batting" is displayed Therefore, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the omission may be generated. In this case, since the game state does not shift to the RT1 state even if the "RT1 shift" is displayed, the "RT1 shift" may not be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the replay combination or the small combination and the bonus combination are overlapped and determined as the internal winning combination (including the case where the bonus combination is carried over), the replay combination or the small combination is more preferable than the bonus combination. However, the stop control for preferentially establishing the bonus combination over the replay combination or the small combination may be performed.

Here, the reel stop control (stop symbol position determination method) in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be briefly described. In this embodiment, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the reel stop control is performed so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped within 190 msec. Specifically, the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected is added with any one of the number of sliding symbols “0” to “4”, and corresponds to the obtained value. The symbol position is determined as the symbol position where the rotation of the reel stops (hereinafter, referred to as “scheduled stop position”). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position where the rotation of the reel starts to be stopped (hereinafter referred to as “stop start position”).

That is, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch until the rotation of the corresponding reel stops. In other words, it is the number of symbols that pass through the middle region of the reel of the reel display window 4 in the period from when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch to when the rotation of the reel is stopped. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch.

By referring to a stop table (not shown), the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative, and the obtained number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the scheduled stop position of the reel. In the present embodiment, when there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces (hereinafter referred to as “slip piece number determination data”) acquired based on the stop table, a pull-in priority table (not shown) is referred to. Change the number of sliding pieces. Then, the number-of-slip-pieces determination data is referred to in order to determine the search order when comparing the priorities of the respective symbols from the stop start position to the symbol position which is the maximum number of four slides ahead.

In the reel stop control of the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on a stop table (not shown). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces other than this number of sliding pieces based on the priority, the number of sliding pieces is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. That is, in the present embodiment, the more appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined based on the priority of the symbol combination that allows the stop display by the internal winning combination, regardless of the number of sliding pieces acquired by the stop table.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30, the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 103 will be described.

[Hit request flag storage area and winning action flag storage area]
First, the configurations of the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area) and the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storage area) will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage area (flag data storage area, winning flag data storage area) and the winning operation flag storage area (winning flag data storage area) have the same configuration.

In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage areas are made up of hit request storage areas 1 to 9 each represented by 1-byte data, and the winning operation flag storage areas are each prize operation represented by 1-byte data. It is composed of storage areas 1-9. Note that the data stored in each of the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area is only the 1-byte data in the “data” column in FIG. 25. However, in FIG. A “combination” (in the figure, the symbols of the left reel 3L, the symbols of the middle reel 3C, and the symbols of the right reel 3R, which are associated with the bits of the storage area, and indicate the symbol combinations of the reels), and Contents (see FIGS. 19 to 22) are also described.

In each of the hit request flag storage areas 1 to 9, when "1" is stored in a predetermined bit, it indicates that the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit has been internally won. Further, in each of the winning operation storage areas 1 to 9, when "1" is stored in a predetermined bit, it indicates that the display combination (winning operation flag) corresponding to the predetermined bit has won. That is, when "1" is stored in a predetermined bit, it indicates that various symbol combinations of the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit are displayed on the activated line.

In addition, in the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area, one bit (flag) in each storage area includes one in which a combination of a plurality of symbols is assigned, but as described above. Alternatively, one symbol (flag) in each storage area may be assigned to one symbol combination (combination).

[Carryover storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the configuration of the carryover combination storing area will be described. In this embodiment, the internal carryover combination storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area.

As a result of the internal lottery, when the internal winning combination "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" or "F_BB4" is determined, the internal winning combination (BB combination) is stored in the carryover combination storing area as a carryover combination. .. The internal carryover combination stored in the internal carryover combination storage area is held without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. Further, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storing area, the carry-over combination is stored in the hit request storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described. The game state flag storage area is composed of a 2-byte data storage area. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage area.

When "1" is stored in the predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area, it indicates that the bonus state or the RT state corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, it indicates that the game state is the BB1 state. Further, for example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 2, it indicates that the game state is the RT3 state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The operation stop button storage area is configured by a 1-byte data storage area and stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not been pressed yet, that is, a valid stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 discriminates the stop button pressed this time and the stop button not pressed yet based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Pressing order storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described. The pressing order storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area and stores a pressing order flag of 1 byte.

In the press order flag, the type of the stop button press order is assigned to each bit. For example, if the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left, center, right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the symbol code storage areas are composed of symbol code storage areas 1 to 9 each represented by 1-byte data. The symbol code storage area has the same structure as the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25).

In the symbol code storage area, "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the symbol combination (combination) that can be stopped on the activated line. In addition, after all reels are stopped, the symbol codes corresponding to the display combination (winning operation flag) are stored in the symbol code storage areas 1 to 9.

[Relationship between internal winning combination, lottery number and winning combination number]
In the above-mentioned various game states related to game play, various data tables are referred to in various lottery by the main control circuit 90. In this embodiment, not only the internal winning combination but also the internal winning combination is used as a parameter used at this time. Each parameter with a different name (hereinafter referred to as “lottery number”) is also used. The lottery numbers are grouped by assigning the same lottery number to the internal lottery combinations that play a similar role (whether the winning combination is a lottery target, the winning probability, etc.) in various types of lottery related to the game by the main control circuit 90. Is information for making it possible to identify. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination (for example, for each of “No. 0” to “No. 98” shown in FIGS. 16 and 17,) and the lottery number Since it is sufficient to provide various data tables for each, it is possible to compress the amount of data and avoid the pressure on the capacity of the game ROM area.

Further, in the present embodiment, with respect to the internal winning combination, each parameter of another name (hereinafter, referred to as “winning combination number”) for identifying the internal winning combination in the unit game of this time on the side of the sub-control circuit 200 is also used. The winning combination number is obtained by grouping at least some internal winning combinations among the internal winning combinations according to the gaming state (more specifically, whether it is a non-advantageous section, or a normal advantageous section and an advantageous section). This is information for making the group recognizable by assigning the same winning combination number. As a result, in the present embodiment, unique information for identifying each internal winning combination (for example, for each of “No. 0” to “No. 98” shown in FIGS. 16 and 17) is provided. Since it is not necessary to transmit to the sub control circuit 200 side, the data amount can be compressed, the control load can be reduced, and appropriate information can be transmitted according to the gaming state.

Here, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. 31 and 32 are diagrams showing an example of a basic correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination, a lottery number, and a winning combination number.

As shown in FIG. 31, an internal winning combination (including a bonus combination) in which a bonus combination and a replay combination or a small combination are simultaneously won (“No. 1” to “No. 38” shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are The lottery number “13” is assigned to the internal winning combination shown) except for “F_BB3+F_watermelon 2” and “F_BB4+F_watermelon 2”, which have different winning probabilities between the set values. A lottery number “0” is assigned to “F_BB3+F_watermelon 2” and “F_BB4+F_watermelon 2”.

In the present embodiment, a non-advantageous section (“normal” in FIGS. 31 and 32, the same applies hereinafter), a normal advantageous section and an advantageous section (“advantage” in FIGS. 31 and 32, the same applies below), Although the lottery numbers are not made different in, for example, different lottery numbers can be assigned to “normal” and “advantageous” when different lottery or processing is performed for “normal” and “advantageous”. For example, in the non-advantageous section, when the winnings of “F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2” and “F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2” are won, the ART lottery is not performed and it is not decided to shift to the normal advantageous section, but in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section. , "F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2" and "F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2" are also won, the lottery similar to the internal lottery combination including other bonus combinations is performed. Therefore, in the "normal", the lottery numbers are assigned as described above. A common lottery number “13” may be assigned to “advantageous”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31, in the internal winning combination including the bonus combination, the winning combination numbers “28” to “41” are assigned according to the type of the bonus combination and the type of the replay combination or the small combination to be won. One of the winning combination numbers is assigned. As a result, on the side of the sub-control circuit 200, it is possible to execute different effects depending on the type of the winning bonus combination and the type of the winning replay combination or small combination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the internal winning combination of the replay or the small winning combination (the internal winning combination shown by “No. 39” to “No. 98” shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17) and the “No winning shown by FIG. .1” to “No. 7”), a lottery number of any of “0” to “12” is assigned.

Here, for example, "Replay 1 during F_RT0" to "Replay 6 during F_RT0" and "F_RT2 during F_RT2" that are won in the RT0 state and the RT2 state, which are game states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is high The same lottery number “1” is assigned to “replay 1” to “replay 3 in F_RT2”. Further, for example, in an RT state other than the RT5 state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT3 state, and also shifting from the non-advantageous section to the normal advantageous section "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye B4". The same lottery number “6” is assigned to each.

Further, for example, the same lottery number “10” is assigned to “F_upper common bell” and “F_upper left bell 1” to “F_upper right middle bell 2” where the same “upper bell” may be displayed. The same lottery number “11” is assigned to “F_middle common bell” and “F_middle left bell 1” to “F_middle right middle bell 2” that may be assigned and the same “middle bell” may be displayed. The same lottery number “12” is assigned to “F_lower middle bell 1” to “F_lower right middle bell 2” that may display the same “lower bell”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the internal winning combination of the replay or the small winning combination (the internal winning combination shown by “No. 39” to “No. 98” shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17) and the “No winning shown by FIG. .1” to “No. 7”), a winning combination number of “0” to “27” is assigned to “normal” or “advantageous”, respectively.

Here, focusing on the winning combination numbers assigned to “F_upper left bell 1” to “F_lower right middle bell 2”, the same winning combination number “22” is assigned to each of “normal”. On the other hand, in “advantage”, the winning combination number “23” is assigned to “F_upper left bell 1” to “F_upper right bell 2” and “F_middle left bell 1” to “F_middle right bell 2”. The winning combination number "24" is assigned to "2" and the winning combination number "25" is assigned to "F_lower middle bell 1" to "F_lower right bell 2".

That is, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section (see FIG. 35 described later), when these internal winning combinations are won, when the symbols of “bell” are lined up in the middle of each reel (“middle bell”) When the "bel" symbols are lined up in the upper row of each reel (when the "upper bell" is established), and when the "bell" symbols are lined up in the lower row of each reel ("lower bell") However, since the number of medals paid out is the same in both cases, the degree of continuation of the line battle state may fluctuate. , "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_upper right middle bell 2", "F_middle left bell 1" to "F_middle right bell 2", "F_lower middle bell 1" to "F_lower right middle" By assigning different winning numbers to "Bell 2", on the side of the sub-control circuit 200, before the stop display of the symbol (before the stop operation), there is a possibility that the symbols of "Bell" will be lined up on any effective line. It is possible to recognize whether or not, and in the line battle state, it is possible to perform effects with different expectations based on the receipt of this winning combination number. An example of the effect in the line battle state will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41 described later.

From the same viewpoint, for example, the same winning combination number is assigned to each of “F_upper lip”, “F_middle lip 1” to “F_middle lip 3” and “F_lower lip” in “normal”. , "Advantageous", different winning combination numbers may be assigned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 sets the winning combination number as the communication parameter of the start command as the information on the internal winning combination, and is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. Information corresponding to navigation data (see FIG. 45 described later) is set in the communication parameter of the start command (or another command may be used), and is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. However, the mode in which the sub-control circuit 200 side transmits the information capable of recognizing the internal winning combination or the navigation data is not limited to this.

For example, regarding “F_RT0 mid-replay 1” to “F_RT0 mid-replay 6”, the same winning combination number is assigned to the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned to the advantageous section. May be. Further, regarding “F_RT1 replay 1” to “F_RT1 replay 6”, the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned in the advantageous section. May be. Further, regarding “F_RT2 mid-replay 1” to “F_RT2 mid-replay 3”, the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are respectively assigned in the advantageous sections. May be. That is, in the push-order replay, in each gaming state (advantageous section) in which the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, the winning symbol number is transmitted as the information capable of identifying the internal winning symbol, which is advantageous to the player. In each gaming state (non-advantageous section and normal advantageous section) in which the information of the special stop operation cannot be notified, the winning symbol combination number may be transmitted as the information in which the internal winning symbol cannot be specified.

This is the same for the push order small win. In this case, the same winning combination number may be assigned to the non-advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers may be assigned to the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section. And about the allocation of the winning combination number in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, for example, on which effective line the symbol of "bell" may be displayed, and the type of the stop operation advantageous to the player, The winning combination number may be further subdivided and assigned so that both parties can be identified.

Thus, for example, for each push-order small combination or push-order replay, in each gaming state in which the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be informed, the internal winning combination is transmitted as a winning combination number that can be specified, In each gaming state in which the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player cannot be notified, if the winning combination number is transmitted as the information in which the internal winning combination cannot be specified, the navigation data described later (see FIG. 45 described later). It may not be necessary to send information corresponding to the reference) to the sub control circuit 200. In this case, it is possible to omit the process of transmitting information corresponding to navigation data described later (see FIG. 45 described later) to the sub control circuit 200, and it is possible to reduce the control load.

Note that, in FIG. 32, as an example of the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number, it is described that the presence/absence of the winning (carrying over) of the bonus combination is not taken into consideration, but the bonus combination is carried over. Depending on whether or not the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number may be changed. For example, in the flag-to-flag state, various lottery related to game characteristics is basically not performed. Therefore, in the flag-to-flag state, all lottery numbers may be assigned to “0”.

<Game play during non-advantageous section (normal state)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the flow of the game in the non-advantageous section (normal state) will be described. In addition, in FIG. 33, in the normal state, an outline of the game state to be transitioned to when each of the internal winning combinations shown in the figure is won is shown.

(When winning a rare role)
In the non-advantageous section, when the bonus rare winning state is reached, when the weak rare combination (“F_weak rare combination A” and “F_weak rare combination B”) is won, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the highly accurate 1 While shifting to the state (normal advantageous section), the "9" game is set in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, the high-accuracy 1 state is controlled from the next game for at least 9 games from the next game.

(At the chance of winning)
In the non-advantageous section and when the bonus is not won, the chance chance (“F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4”) is won. , The main CPU 101 shifts the game state to the highly accurate 2 state (normal advantageous section), and sets the game "9" in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, the high precision 2 state is controlled for at least 9 games from the next game.

At this time, as a result of the player's stop operation, the "RT3 shift eye" is displayed and the RT state shifts to the RT3 state, and the "RT3 shift eye" is not displayed and the RT state does not shift to the RT3 state ( That is, there is a case where RT states other than the RT3 state continue). Although there is no change in shifting to the highly accurate 2 state, it is more advantageous for the player that the RT state is the RT3 state. This point will be described in detail later.

It should be noted that the chance chance is an internal winning combination that can be won in combination with the bonus combination. However, in the case where the winning combination is won in combination with the bonus combination, the processing relating to that bonus combination (see "When winning bonus combination" below). ) Is given priority, so control for shifting to the high-precision 2 state is not performed.

(At the time of winning one watermelon)
When the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”) is won in the non-advantageous section and in the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 performs ART lottery. Specifically, for example, with a probability of 8/256, it is determined to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous zone via the normal precursory state of the normal advantage zone (that is, the ART winning is determined). With a probability of 256, it is determined that the normal advantageous zone is shifted to the three highly accurate states, but not shifted to the advantageous zone (that is, ART non-winning is determined). In this case, it may be possible to determine, with a predetermined probability, to shift to the line battle state of the advantageous section via the normal sign state of the normal advantageous section.

In either case when the ART winning is determined and when the ART non-winning is determined, the main CPU 101 determines the game period (precursor period) of the normal advantageous section to be transferred based on the watermelon 1 winning. Lottery. Specifically, for example, any one of the precursor periods “9” to “16” in the precursor period is randomly determined. In this case, for example, when the precursory period "9" game is determined, the game period "9" is set in the normal advantageous period, and when the precursory period "16" game is determined, the normal advantageous period gaming period is set. "16" game is set. In this case, the number of games to be played may be determined with different probabilities depending on whether the transition destination is the present omen state or the highly accurate 3 state. For example, the lottery probability can be set so that a relatively long precursory period can be more easily determined when shifting to the present precursory state than when transitioning to the highly accurate three states.

In this way, if the winning of the watermelon 1 is determined, if the ART winning is determined, during the number of times of the number of times determined by lottery from the next game for at least the number of times of the omen period, it is controlled to the omen state of the normal advantageous section, and the omen state After the above, the control is controlled to the ending preparatory state of the advantageous section (see FIG. 34 described later). Further, if ART non-winning is determined, during the number of games determined by lottery from the next game for at least the precursory period, it is controlled to the high-probability 3 state of the normal advantageous section.

(When winning the bonus role)
When the bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3” and “F_BB4”) is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 performs the ART lottery. If “F_BB3+F_watermelon 2” or “F_BB4+F_watermelon 2” having different winning probabilities among the set values is determined as the internal winning combination, the ART lottery is not performed. That is, when "F_BB3+F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4+F_watermelon 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the non-advantageous section (normal state) between flags without shifting to each gaming state of the normal advantageous section. After that, the bonus state of the non-advantageous section (normal state) is entered, and when the bonus state ends, the bonus non-winning state of the non-advantageous section (normal state) is returned to.

In the ART lottery at the time of winning the bonus role, specifically, for example, with the probability of 64/256, it is possible to shift to the line battle state of the advantageous section via the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section after the bonus state ends. It is determined (that is, ART winning is determined), and with a probability of 192/256, it is determined to shift to the high-precision 4 state of the normal advantageous zone, but not to shift to the advantageous zone (that is, ART non-winning is determined). To). In this case, it may be possible to determine, with a predetermined probability, to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section via the ending preparation state of the advantageous section after the bonus state ends.

In either case when the ART winning is determined and when the ART non-winning is determined, the main CPU 101 first shifts the gaming state to the high-precision 4 state (normal advantageous section). As a result, the next game is controlled to the highly accurate 4 states. The period during which the high-precision 4 state continues in the inter-flag state may be until the transition from the inter-flag state to the bonus state (until the carried-over bonus combination is established). It may be during the “9” game (that is, similar to the high-precision 1 state and the high-precision 2 state). Further, when the ART winning is determined, the inter-flag state may be shifted to the present predictive state (usually advantageous section) instead of the highly accurate 4 state. In addition, in the flag-to-flag state, various lottery is not actually performed as the high-accuracy 4 state. Therefore, the flag-to-flag state is usually an advantageous section, but the high-precision 1 to high-precision 4 states and the main sign It may be defined as a state different from the state (for example, “inter-flag normal advantageous state”), and during bonus winning, the flag may be shifted to the normal advantageous state between flags (normal advantageous section).

When the bonus state ends after the bonus state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section if the ART winning is determined, and if the ART non-winning is determined. , The high-precision 4 state of the normal advantageous section is continued, and the "32" game is set in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, the high-precision 4 state is controlled for at least 32 games after the bonus ends.

<Game play during normal advantage section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the flow of the game in the normal advantage section will be described. In addition, in FIG. 34, the outline of the flow of the game in the normal advantageous section is shown. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, the high-probability 1 state is transferred based on winning the weak rare combination, and the high-probability transition is performed based on winning the chance. It is decided to shift to 2 states, high-precision 3 states that are shifted based on winning the watermelon 1, high-precision 4 states that are shifted based on winning the bonus combination, and advantageous zone (ART). You have a warning sign.

First, the main CPU 101 is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state) or in the bonus state, and in the bonus non-winning state and in the omen state (that is, when it is already determined to shift to the advantageous section). ) Except, the ART transferable state lottery is performed for each unit game. In this ART transferable state lottery, it is determined whether or not it is a state (ART transferable state) in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when the bonus combination is won in the normal advantageous section. In this ART transferable state lottery, when it is determined to be in the ART transferable state (when the ART transferable state lottery is won), if the bonus combination is won, it is based on the bonus combination. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state, and it is not decided to be in the ART shiftable state (when the ART shiftable state lottery is not won), when the bonus combination is won. Does not shift to the advantageous section after the bonus state based on the bonus combination is finished, and it is determined that the normal advantageous section (more specifically, the high-precision 4 state) continues.

In the ART transferable state lottery, specifically, for example, in the case of the highly accurate 1 state and the highly accurate 2 state, the ART transferable state is set with a probability of 64/256 (the ART transferable state is won). , With a probability of 192/256, do not set the ART transferable state (not win the ART transferable state). Further, for example, if there are 3 highly accurate states and 4 highly accurate states, the ART transferable state is set with a probability of 128/256 (the ART transferable state is won), and the ART transfer is performed with a probability of 128/256. Do not set the possible state (not win to the ART transferable state). The winning probability of the ART transferable state is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the winning probability to increase sequentially in the order of high-accuracy 1 state, high-accuracy 2 state, high-accuracy 3 state, and high-accuracy 4 state, or the winning probability may be different in each gaming state. It can also be set to.

Also, the ART transferable state lottery is performed for each unit game, but if the ART transferable state is set once in the normal advantageous section, until the normal advantageous section ends, The ART transferable state can be maintained. In this case, once the ART transferable state is set, it is not necessary to perform the ART transferable state lottery thereafter until the normal advantageous section ends. On the other hand, in the case of playing for each unit game, at the start of the unit game and before determining whether or not the bonus combination is won, first, whether or not the unit game can be set to the ART transferable state is determined. It may be determined by lottery, and then whether or not the bonus combination is won in the unit game.

In addition, in the non-advantageous section, if “F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2” or “F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2” having different winning probabilities between the set values is determined as the internal winning combination, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is not determined. However, even if "F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2" or "F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2" is determined as the internal winning combination in the normal advantageous section, if it is in the ART transferable state, it is based on the bonus combination. After the bonus state ends, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs control processing such as transition between states. In this state transition control process, etc., based on the internal winning combination, while performing the transition control of each game state in the normal advantage section, such as resetting the game period of the normal advantage section according to a predetermined condition To do. The details of the control process such as transition between states will be described in detail below.

(At the chance of winning)
When it is a normal advantageous section and the bonus is not won, the chance chance (“F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4”) is won. , The main CPU 101 sets the high-precision 2 state if the current state is the high-precision 1 state or the high-precision 2 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, and plays the "9" game in the game period of the normal advantageous section. Reset it. For example, in the highly accurate 1 state (9 games), if a player wins a game five times and wins a chance, the "9" game is reset, and thus the normal advantageous interval is substantially achieved. The game period will be extended by 5 games.

If the current state is the highly accurate 3 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, the "9" game is reset in the game period of the normal advantageous section. In addition, if the current state is the high-precision 4 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, if the remaining number of games in the game period of the current normal advantageous section is 8 games or less, " 9” Reset the game. That is, the game period of the normal advantageous section is appropriately extended based on the fact that the winning opportunity is won.

In addition, in the above, when the RT state is the RT3 state, the game period of the normal advantageous section is not reset even if the chance is won. The RT3 state sets the winning probability of the replay combination advantageous to the player. Although it is a game state that has been played, it is basically a game state that continues only for 8 games, and as will be described later, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section, like the flag state (RT5 state), Since the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is made without any limitation, the end of the normal advantage section and the end of the RT3 state are linked, and the expectation for the bonus winning of the player even in the RT3 state. This is so as not to impair the feeling.

However, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section, the game period of the normal advantageous section is set such that the end of the normal advantageous section is always one game later than the end of the RT3 state. That is, the game period of the normal advantage section is set to be a period longer than at least the game period (8 games) in the RT3 state. In the present embodiment, the lighting of the status indicator is started when the normal advantageous section is started, and when the normal advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section, the lighting is continued, while the normal advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section. If not, the lighting is normally terminated when the advantageous zone ends.

Therefore, for example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section or the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, when performing the same expected feeling effect (a bonus winning combination or an effect that makes the player expect the ART winning), the normal advantageous section and RT3 When the game is finished in the same state as the state, the lighting of the state indicator may be finished while the expectation effect is being executed. In this case, the player will recognize that the winning is non-winning before the result is finally notified by the expected feeling production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section and the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, the same expected feeling effect is executed over eight games, and by this expected effect effect, the final feeling is given to the eighth game. While the normal advantageous section is continued for one game after that, it is not possible to recognize whether it is right or wrong depending on the lighting mode of the status indicator, and the interest of the player is maintained. Is possible.

Further, even if the RT3 state is ended in the normal advantageous section, the remaining period (for example, one game) is still the normal advantageous section, and therefore, depending on the type of the internal winning combination here, the normal advantageous section is usually advantageous. Since the section may be extended, for example, even when it is informed that the bonus combination is not won in the expected effect production, the player normally hopes to extend the advantageous section and continues the game. I think. In this sense, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player.

The expectation effect that can be executed may be, for example, a continuous effect by the image displayed on the display device 11 or a continuous effect performed by another effect device (for example, the speaker group 84 or the LED group 85). It may be. Further, it is not necessarily a continuous effect, and any effect may be used as long as it is an effect performed to increase the player's expectation. For example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section or in the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, the result may be notified in a predetermined number of games (for example, the eighth game). In this case, the number of games to be played for a predetermined number of times may be determined arbitrarily within a range not exceeding eight games or by lottery.

In addition, regardless of the RT state, the above-described expectation effect may be performed in the normal sign section of the normal advantageous section. In this case, the period in which the expectation effect can be executed may be the same as the RT3 state or the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, or may be executed for a longer period than that.

Further, when the current state is this omen state and the RT state shifts to the RT3 state (that is, when the “RT3 shift eye” is displayed), the “8” game is normally played during the game period of the advantageous section. Reset it. In this case, since the normal advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section when the normal advantageous section ends, by completely interlocking the end of the RT3 state and the end of the normal advantageous section, the advantageous section which is more advantageous to the player (without leaving the normal advantageous section) Is prioritized. Further, in this case, when the above-described expected feeling effect has already been performed, the expected feeling effect may be continuously performed until the end, or a new expected feeling effect is performed again for eight games. You may want to be told. Further, the anticipation effect may be extended based on the transition from the RT state to the RT3 state.

(At the time of winning one watermelon)
When the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”) is won in the normal advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 is not in the omen state (that is, the ART winning has not been determined yet). For example, the ART lottery is performed in the same manner as the non-advantageous section.

Then, the main CPU 101 sets the high-precision 3 state if the current state is one of the high-precision 1 to high-precision 3 states, the RT state is the RT3 state, and if the ART is unwinned, Normally, the game period in the advantageous section is not reset. If the current state is any one of the high-precision 1 to high-precision 4 states, the RT state is the RT3 state, and the ART wins, the present omen state is set and the number of remaining games in the RT3 state is set. The number of games is reset to the game period of the normal advantageous section.

If the current state is the high-accuracy 1 or the high-accuracy 2 state, and the RT state is not the RT3 state and the ART is not winning, the high-precision 3 state is set and the above-mentioned lottery period lottery is performed again to re-execute. The game period of the set normal advantage section is determined. If the current state is any one of the high-precision 1 to high-precision 4 states, and the RT state is not the RT3 state but an ART winning, the warning sign state is set, and the high-precision 1 state, high-precision state is set. In the case of 2 states or 4 states of high accuracy, the above-mentioned lottery period lottery is performed again to determine the game period of the normal advantageous section to be reset. In the case of the highly accurate 3 states, the game period of the normal advantageous section is not reset.

(When winning the bonus role)
When the bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4”) is won in the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 determines that the current normal advantageous period is ART. If it is not in the shiftable state, the high-precision 4 state is set, and the "32" game is reset during the game period of the normal advantageous section in the high-precision 4 state after the bonus state ends. Further, if the current normal advantageous section is in the ART shiftable state, the main warning state is set, and the "0" game is reset during the normal advantageous section game period in the main warning state after the bonus state ends (that is, Immediately after the end of the bonus state, transition to the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section).

When it is a normal advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state and the state between the flags are achieved and the winning combination of the pressing order is won, the main CPU 101 notifies the pressing order of the winning combination of the pressing order. Specifically, on the instruction monitor, a numerical value corresponding to the navigation data is displayed, and a command including information corresponding to the navigation data is transmitted so that the sub-control circuit 200 can notify the pushing order.

Here, in the present embodiment, if the RT state is the RT3 state or the RT5 state, the push order notification is performed each time the push order small winning combination is won until the normal advantageous section ends, while the RT state is RT3. If it is other than the state and the RT5 state, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed only once in the normal advantageous section. It should be noted that the upper limit of the push order notification when the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state is not limited to one, and can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be “twice” or “three times”.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the RT state is the RT3 state, the push order notification is performed each time the push order small winning combination is won until the normal advantageous section ends, but for example, the RT state is After 8 games have been exhausted in the RT3 state, the RT3 state ends, but the normal advantageous section may continue in some cases. In this case, after the RT3 state is once entered, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination may be continued until the normal advantageous section ends even after the RT3 state ends, or the RT3 state. It may be configured such that the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is also terminated in association with the completion of the above, and only the normal advantageous section continues. That is, the push order notification may be performed only during the period when the RT state is the RT3 state.

Further, for example, when the RT state is not the RT3 state, the normal advantageous section may be shifted to, and the RT state may become the RT3 state in the normal advantageous section. In this case, if the push order notification has already been performed once, the upper limit number may be valid in the subsequent RT3 state and the push order notification may not be performed. In the subsequent RT3 state, the upper limit number may be set. May be invalidated and the push order notification may be performed. Further, in this case, if the push order notification is not performed even once, the upper limit number may be valid even in the subsequent RT3 state, and the push order notification may be performed only once. In the RT3 state, the upper limit number of times may be invalidated and the push order notification may be performed. The same applies when the RT state is not the RT5 state and the normal advantageous section is entered, and the RT state becomes the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section.

When the upper limit number of push order notifications when the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state is 1, and when the push order notification is normally performed twice or more in the advantageous section, the RT state is the RT3 state or The RT5 state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the chances can be won in the same manner as the bonus combination. Therefore, for example, in the non-advantageous section, the chance is won, and the RT3 transition is not displayed, and the normal advantageous section is moved to. In this case, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the bonus combination is won (that is, whether or not the state is the RT5 state between the flags) when the first push order notification is performed. When the second push order notification is performed, it is determined that the player is not in the RT3 state, and as a result, it is possible to recognize that the bonus combination is won.

On the other hand, for example, when the transition to the third RT3 is displayed and the normal advantageous section is transitioned, whether or not the bonus combination is won in the number of push order notifications (that is, whether the RT5 state is the inter-flag state or not). Whether or not) is difficult to recognize, and for example, it is possible to recognize that the bonus combination is won based on the final effect contents of the above-described expected feeling effect.

That is, the RT3 state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is high, and for example, the RT state does not change even when the RT1 transition eye or the RT1 transition lip is displayed. Since there is no limit to the notification of the pushing order of the small pushing order, it is possible to advance the game in the normal advantageous section more advantageously than the game in the normal advantageous section in other RT states, but on the other hand, In the advantageous section, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the winning combination is won.

In the present embodiment, when the bonus combination is won during the advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination is activated, the information (stop order) of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified in the bonus state. On the other hand, when the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination is activated, in the bonus state, the stop operation advantageous to the player is performed. Information (pushing order) is not notified. This is the same even when the bonus combination is won when the ART transition is possible in the normal advantage section. In this case, after the bonus state ends, the advantageous section is shifted to, but during the bonus state, information (stop order) of the advantageous stop operation is not notified to the player. The specific content of the push order notification will be described later with reference to FIG. 45 described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 24, when the push order small winning combination is won in the inter-flag state, unlike the bonus non-winning state, the “upper bell” and the “middle row” are irrespective of the stop operation order. The "bell" or "lower bell" is established, and eight medals are paid out. Even in this premise, the normal advantage section ends in the flag state (RT5 state) of the normal advantage section. Up to, the push order notification similar to the bonus non-winning state is made. That is, in the RT5 state of the normal advantage section, when the push order winning is won, the same push order notification as in the RT3 state of the normal advantage section is issued regardless of whether the profit actually given by the push order changes. It is supposed to be done. As described above, this is done from the viewpoint of making it difficult to recognize whether or not the bonus combination is won, and to further maintain the expectation.

Note that, as described above, in the case of winning the small winning combination in the pressing order in the inter-flag state, the number of medals to be paid out can be changed according to the stop operation order, as in the bonus non-winning state. In this case, it is likely that the profit to be given by the push order notification is also increased during the flag-to-flag state (RT5 state) of the normal advantageous section. Not only can the expectations about whether or not to be raised be raised, but also the expectations regarding the profits to be granted can be increased.

In addition, in the normal advantageous section and in the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 updates the game period of the normal advantageous section for each unit game. Specifically, the number of games in the game period of the normal advantage section is decremented by "1", and subsequently, whether the game period of the normal advantage section is exhausted (that is, whether the subtraction result becomes "0") or not. To judge. In addition, in the update of the game period of the normal advantageous section, the number of games is incremented by "1" for each unit game, and subsequently, whether the addition result has reached the number of games of the game period of the normal advantageous section or not. It may be possible to determine whether or not the game period of the normal advantage section has been exhausted by the determination.

As a result of the update of the game period of the normal advantageous section, if the game period of the normal advantageous section has not been exhausted (in FIG. 34, “period not yet exhausted”), the normal advantageous section is continued and the bonus non-winning of the normal advantageous section. The game in the state will be repeated.

Further, as a result of the game period update of the normal advantageous section, when the game period of the normal advantageous section has been exhausted and it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, “period exhaustion ART non-winning) )), the normal advantageous section is ended and the bonus non-winning state of the non-advantageous section is entered.

In addition, even if the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted as a result of the update of the game period of the normal advantageous section, if the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is not performed even once in the normal advantageous section ( That is, in the case of not winning the push order small winning combination), the normal advantageous section may be continued until the push order small winning combination is notified once. By so doing, it is possible not only to guarantee that the player obtains the minimum profit in the normal advantage section, but also before the push order notification of the push order small winning combination after the period is exhausted, for example, , If it is possible to win the bonus combination in the ART transitionable state, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section after the bonus state ends, so that the amusement of games can be made more diverse and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. You can

Further, when the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted as a result of the update of the game period of the normal advantageous section, and it is determined to shift to the line battle state of the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, “period”). In the "digest line battle winning", the normal advantageous section is ended, and the line battle preparation state (bonus non-winning state) of the advantageous section is entered. Since the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state, in the present embodiment, before the transition to the line battle state of the advantageous section, the line battle preparation state is set as a preparation period until the RT2 state is set. However, if the RT2 state is accidentally set at the end of the normal advantageous section, the line battle state may be directly entered without going through the line battle preparation state. Further, since the RT0 state and the RT2 state are both game states in which the winning probability of the replay combination is the highest (see FIGS. 16 and 17), the RT0 state is accidentally set to the RT0 state when the normal advantageous section ends. If so (or if the RT0 state is entered based on the termination of the RT3 state), the line battle state may be directly entered without going through the line battle preparation state.

Further, as a result of the game period update of the normal advantageous section, when the game period of the normal advantageous section has been exhausted and it is determined to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, “period”). In the "digest ending 1 win", the normal advantageous section is ended and the ending section of the advantageous section is shifted to the ending preparation state (bonus non-winning state). Note that when the normal advantageous section ends, the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, before the transition to the RT2 state is performed before the transition to the advantageous 1 ending 1 state. Although it is arranged to shift to the ending preparation state as a preparation period, if it is accidentally in the RT2 state when the normal advantageous section ends, it is arranged to directly shift to the ending 1 state without going through the ending preparation state. May be. Further, since the RT0 state and the RT2 state are both game states in which the winning probability of the replay combination is the highest (see FIGS. 16 and 17), the RT0 state is accidentally set to the RT0 state when the normal advantageous section ends. If so (or if the RT0 state is entered based on the termination of the RT3 state), the ending 1 state may be directly entered without going through the ending preparation state.

<Summary of game characteristics of non-advantageous section and normal advantageous section>
In the following, with regard to the game characteristics in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantage section (including a part of the game characteristics in the advantage section), the main parts thereof will be briefly summarized.

(1) The “chance eye” can be determined as an internal winning combination as well as a bonus combination.
(2) If the "winning chance" is won and the bonus combination is also determined as an internal winning combination, the RT state becomes the RT5 state. In this case, if it is a non-advantageous section, it is shifted to a normal advantageous section (for example, “high-precision 4 state” or “normal inter-flag advantageous state”).
(3) If the winning combination is a “chance eye”, the bonus winning combination is not determined as an internal winning combination at the same time, and the “RT3 transition eye” is displayed based on that the stop operation is performed in a specific mode. If so, the RT state becomes the RT3 state. In this case, regardless of whether or not the “RT3 shift eye” is displayed, if it is a non-advantageous section, it is shifted to a normal advantageous section (for example, “high accuracy 2 state”).
(4) The normal advantageous section (e.g., "high accuracy 2 state") that has won and moved to the "chance eye" is at least longer than the period (e.g., 8 games) during which the RT3 state continues (e.g., 9 games). It is possible to continue).

(5) When the bonus winning combination based on the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, and the ART winning is determined, the section is shifted to the advantageous section (for example, “line battle preparation state”).
(6) When the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, if the ART winning is not determined (if the ART non-winning is determined), a specific period (for example, During 32 games), a normal advantageous section (for example, “high-precision 4 state”) is entered.
(7) Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART) when the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and when the bonus combination has the same winning probability among a plurality of setting values However, in the case of a bonus combination having different winning probabilities among a plurality of setting values, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART).
(8) When a bonus combination is won in a normal advantageous section, the bonus combination is a bonus combination having a same winning probability among a plurality of setting values, and a bonus combination having a different winning probability between a plurality of setting values In either case, it is determined whether to shift to the advantageous section (ART).

(9) When the RT state is the RT3 state in the normal advantage section, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed until the normal advantage section ends.
(10) When the RT state is the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed until the normal advantageous section ends.
(11) In the normal advantageous section, when the RT state is not the RT3 state or the RT5 state, the pushing order notification of the pushing order small winning combination is performed only a predetermined number of times (for example, once).
(12) When the winning combination is won in the advantageous section, in the bonus state based on the bonus combination, the pushing order notification of the small pushing order is performed, but when the winning combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. In the bonus state based on the bonus hand, the push order notification of the push order small combination is not performed regardless of whether it is determined to shift to the advantageous section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the “chance eye” is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to control the normal advantageous section for at least nine games, and when the ART winning is determined, the advantageous section is obtained. When the "RT3 transition" is displayed, the RT state can be changed to the RT3 state, and when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT state is changed to RT5. It is possible to change to a state. In addition, it is possible to determine the "chance eye" and the bonus combination at the same time as an internal winning combination. Then, when the normal advantageous section is in the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player for the small push order combination is informed.

As a result, in the normal advantage section, the number of medals to be given increases as compared with the non-advantageous section, and the expectation whether or not to shift to the bonus state also increases. It is possible to improve interest in the transition of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the normal advantageous period can be continued (9 games) is set to be longer than the period during which the RT3 state can be continued (8 games).

As a result, the player's expectation can be maintained regardless of whether or not the specific game state (RT3 state) ends, and thus the interest in transition to a state more advantageous to the player can be further improved. Can be planned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the “opportunity” is displayed when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, appropriate timing), and is not performed in the specific mode. In the case of an internal winning combination in which the "RT3 transition eye" is not displayed, and the normal advantageous section is in the RT3 state and the RT5 state, it is advantageous to the player about the pushing order small combination until the normal advantageous section ends. The procedure of the stop operation is notified, and when the normal advantageous section is not in the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player for the small pushing order is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, once). Is notified.

As a result, when the "chance eye" is won, whether or not the bonus combination is also determined as an internal winning combination at the same time and whether or not the "RT3 transition" is displayed, the advantage degree and contents of the normal advantage section are determined. Since it can be changed, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the transition to a state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the bonus state based on the bonus combination that has been won in the non-advantageous section is ended, if the ART winning is determined, it is shifted to the advantageous section, and if the ART winning is not determined. Is designed to shift to a normal advantageous section (for example, high-precision 4 states) for a specific period (for example, for 32 games).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state of any of the normal advantageous sections, whichever of the bonus combinations the winning probability is the same among the plurality of setting values and the winning probability which is different among the plurality of setting values. Even if the winning combination is won, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, but when it is a non-advantageous section, it is advantageous when winning a bonus combination having different winning probabilities among a plurality of set values. It is not decided whether or not to shift to the section.

As a result, the transition of the subsequent game state (game section) can be made more diverse depending on the game state when the bonus combination is won and the type thereof. Can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, it is possible to inform the player of the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the small pushing order combination, and the pushing order is small even when the bonus state is controlled in the advantageous section. It is possible to inform the player of the stop operation procedure that is advantageous for the winning combination, but when the bonus state is controlled in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantage section, the procedure of the stopping operation that is advantageous for the player for the small pushing order combination is displayed. Notification is not possible.

As a result, it is possible to provide a normal advantageous section, which is a game section in which the degree of expectation of shifting to the advantageous section is increased and the possibility of increasing the number of medals to be given is increased. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game, and even when such a game section is provided, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessive, and to excessively encourage the player's ambition. It can also be suppressed.

<Playability during line battle>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 41, the flow of the game during the line battle state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 35 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the line battle state of the advantageous section. Further, FIG. 36 shows an example of various data tables stored in the main ROM 102, which are various tables referred to in at least the advantageous section line battle preparation state and line battle state. 37 to 41, a display example of the display device 11 is shown in order to describe a mode in which the continuation degree of whether or not to continue the line battle state varies. In this embodiment, the line battle state has an interval state, a battle state, and a continuous lottery state. In addition, in the present embodiment, the line battle state is basically a game state that is transferred via the line battle preparation state.

(Line battle preparation state)
When the ART winning is determined based on the winning of the bonus combination in the non-advantageous section or the normal advantageous section, the main CPU 101 shifts to the line battle preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends. .. In addition, in the line battle preparation state and the line battle state in the advantageous section, the bonus combination is won, and when the bonus state based on the bonus combination is finished, the state is shifted to the line battle preparation state (that is, returned to the line battle state). ). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the line battle preparation state is maintained until the RT state shifts to the RT2 state.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order notification regarding the push sequence small win and the push sequence replay is not performed until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification of the push order small combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 shift eye" is displayed in the RT4 state and the state shifts to the RT3 state, the push order notification regarding the push order minor combination and the push order replay is started. The line battle preparation state may be terminated and the line battle state may be set when the RT3 state is entered.

In addition, as described above, for example, when the ART lottery is performed based on the fact that a specific combination other than the bonus combination (for example, “Watermelon 1”) is won in the non-advantageous section or the normal advantageous section, the winning result is obtained. When it is possible to decide to shift to the line battle state, the state shifts to the line battle preparation state when the normal advantageous section ends. Also in this case, the line battle preparation state is maintained until the RT state shifts to the RT2 state.

However, for example, in the case where the RT state is the RT0 state, although the push order notification about the push order minor combination and the push order replay was performed, the stop operation was performed without following the push order notification. As a result, “RT1 transition eye” or “RT1 transition lip” is displayed, and when the RT state is transited to the RT1 state, the line battle state may be transited even if the RT state is not the RT2 state. .. The same applies to the right acquisition lottery preparation state and the ending preparation state. That is, when a pressing order error occurs in each preparation state, even if the RT state is not the RT2 state, the game state may be shifted to the corresponding gaming state.

In the line battle preparation state, the enemy selection table lottery, the ally selection table lottery, and the ally acquisition lottery are performed. Note that the lottery related to these game characteristics is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the line battle preparation state. In addition, the lottery regarding these game characteristics can be performed even in each game state of the normal advantageous section. In this case, when the normal advantageous zone is shifted to the advantageous zone, the lottery result in the normal advantageous zone is reflected in the line battle state, and when the normal advantageous zone is not shifted to the advantageous zone, the lottery in the normal advantageous zone is drawn. The result should be discarded (cleared).

In the enemy selection table lottery, an enemy selection table for selecting information corresponding to an enemy character to be a battle target in a later-described battle state is determined. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the enemy selection table lottery table shown in FIG. 36A, and selects any one of the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 based on the number of times the enemy has been destroyed and the lottery value. Here, the number of times the enemy is destroyed is the number of times the enemy HP has become “0” in the battle state to be described later and the right acquisition state has been reached, and the number of times the line battle state has been determined to be continued in the continuous lottery state to be described later. The cumulative number of times (that is, the number of times the line battle state has continued) is the number of times stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 103.

In the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 36A, each information is assigned so that the degree of continuation of the line battle state can be changed according to the number of times the enemy is destroyed. In the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 36A, "Low" indicates that the player's advantage degree is relatively low with respect to the continuation degree of the line battle state, and "Medium" indicates the continuation degree of the line battle state. Indicates that the degree of advantage of the player is moderate, and “high” indicates that the degree of advantage of the player is high regarding the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the present embodiment, as information corresponding to the enemy character that is the target of the battle, "A" (enemy character A), "B" (enemy character B), "C" (enemy character C), and "D" ( Enemy character D) is set, and one of them is determined in the lottery for enemy type at the time of entering a battle, which will be described later. Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the degree of expectation that the line battle state will continue in the order of “A”, “B”, “C”, and “D” gradually increases. That is, the advantage degree of the player is sequentially increased in the order of “A”, “B”, “C”, and “D”.

Then, in the later-described battle entry type lottery, if the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is "low", an enemy character (for example, "A") with a relatively low player's advantage is determined. The enemy character (for example, “D”) that is easy to be played and the player's advantage degree is relatively high is hard to be determined, and if the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is “high”, the player's advantage level is high. An enemy character (for example, "A") having a relatively low advantage degree is difficult to be determined, and an enemy character (for example, "D") having a relatively high advantage degree for the player is easily determined. Further, if the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is "medium", the probability is in the meantime. In this way, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player regarding the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the ally selection table lottery, a ally selection table for selecting information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle in an advantageous manner in the later-described battle state is determined. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the ally selection table lottery table shown in FIG. 36B, and selects one of the ally selection tables 1 to 8 based on the number of times the enemy has been destroyed and the lottery value. Since the number of times the enemy has been destroyed has already been described, a description thereof will be omitted here.

In the present embodiment, as information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle advantageously, "1" (ally character 1), "2" (ally character 2), "3" (ally character 3), and "4". (Allied character 4) is set, and it is determined in the later-described battle entry ally type lottery whether one or a plurality of ally characters are given or not. Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the greater the number of assigned ally characters, the higher the degree of expectation that the line battle state will continue will be successively increased. That is, as the number of alliance characters provided increases, the degree of advantage of the player gradually increases.

Then, in the later-described battle ally type lottery, if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is "extremely low", the ally character is rarely given and the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is displayed. Is low, the ally character is hard to be given, and even if it is given, if the information shown in the decided ally selection table is "medium", the ally character is easily given. However, it is difficult to attach a plurality of ally characters, and if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is “high”, the ally character is likely to be attached and the plurality of ally characters are likely to be attached. In this way, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player regarding the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the ally acquisition lottery, in addition to the ally type lottery at the time of entering a battle, which will be described later, whether or not to grant a right to previously acquire an ally character is determined. For example, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to acquire a teammate character with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2 probability) based on winning a specific combination (for example, “chance eye” or “watermelon 1”). decide. Note that the tables referred to in the ally acquisition lottery are not shown.

Here, if it is decided as a result of the ally acquisition lottery to grant the right, at the time of entering the battle state, among the numbers of the ally characters not given as the result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, the number is the most. A ally character with a small number is added. For example, in the case of a ally type lottery at the time of entering a battle to be described later, when the ally character “2” is given, if the right is acquired, the ally character “1” is further given. That is, in the later-described battle entry ally type lottery, it is determined whether or not the specific ally character type is included, whereas in the ally acquisition lottery, at least one ally character is provided. Whether or not to decide is decided.

The right decided to be granted as a result of the ally acquisition lottery basically disappears when the subsequent battle state ends, and it is necessary to win the ally acquisition lottery again in order to obtain the right again. .. In this sense, the right can be said to be a “limited right” different from the “perpetual right” described later.

(Interval state)
As described above, when the line battle preparation state ends, the main CPU 101 first shifts to the interval state at the time of starting the line battle state. The interval state is a state in which it continues for 3 games, and when the game period in the interval state has passed 3 games, it shifts to the battle state. In the interval state, the team acquisition lottery described above is performed.

When the interval state ends, the lottery type for enemies at the time of battle entry and the lottery type for allies at the time of battle entry are performed.

In the enemies type lottery at the time of battle entry, based on the enemy selection table (any one of 1 to 8) determined as a result of the above-mentioned lottery of the enemy selection table, information on the degree of expectation according to the current number of defeated enemies (“low” The information (one of “A” to “D”) corresponding to the enemy character that is the target of the battle is determined by referring to “one of “high”). It should be noted that the tables referred to in the lottery on the enemy type at the time of entering the battle are not shown.

In the ally type lottery at the time of battle entry, based on the ally selection table (any one of 1 to 8) determined as a result of the ally selection table lottery described above, information on the degree of expectation according to the current number of enemy defeats (“extremely low”) ~ "High") is referred to, and information corresponding to the teammate character for advancing the battle is determined. In addition, in the ally type lottery at the time of battle entry, for example, ““1” is won”, ““2” is won”, “3” is won”, “4” is won”, “1.2”. While it is possible to determine that a plurality of ally characters are given, such as “winning winning”,... “Winning “1 to 4””, a permanent right (or a limited right) described later is “ When "1" is given and "win" is determined, the lottery result is discarded (not reflected). Further, in this case, when “winning for “1.2” is decided, only the part of “winning for “1”” is discarded (not reflected) and “winning for “2””. The part of is reflected. Therefore, if no other right is given in the team acquisition lottery, the teammate characters in this case are “1” and “2”. The tables referred to in the ally type lottery at the time of battle entry are not shown.

Further, when the interval state ends, the initial value “32” is set to the enemy HP and the friend HP. Then, the enemy type according to the result of the lottery type at the time of entering the battle is set, and the result of the lottery type at the time of entering the battle, the presence or absence of the limited right granted based on the result of the lottery for obtaining the ally, and the permanence described later. Based on the result of the right acquisition lottery, the ally type according to the presence or absence of the permanent right granted is set.

(Battle state)
As described above, when the interval state ends, the main CPU 101 next shifts to the line battle state. The battle state lasts for at least 31 games. During this time, if the ally side attacks, the enemy HP is reduced by the amount of the damage of the attack, and if the enemy side attacks, the amount of the damage of the attack is ally. It has a playability that HP decreases. Then, when the enemy HP becomes "0" or less before the end of the battle state, the state is shifted to the right acquisition lottery state, and when the enemy HP does not become "0" or less before the end of the battle state. , A continuous lottery state described later is entered.

In the battle state, when a "weak rare role" or "chance eye" is won, the winning game is not included in the count of the game period in the battle state. That is, the game period in the battle state is extended by the number of times of winning the “weak rare role” or the “chance eye”. In addition, in the battle state, if the “chance eye” is won and the “RT3 transition eye” is displayed and the RT state becomes the RT3 state, the eight games in the RT3 state will be counted during the game period in the battle state. Is not included in. That is, the game period in the battle state is extended by the number of games in which the RT3 state continues.

In a battle state, a counter lottery for hitting rep, a lottery damage for countering lottery, a defense lottery for hitting lip, a damage lottery for hitting lip, and a damage lottery for hitting can be performed. Note that the lottery related to these game characteristics is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the battle state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41, the relationship between the lottery related to various game properties performed in the battle state and the information corresponding to the teammate character will be described.

FIG. 37 is a case where there is no ally in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) (that is, when neither “1” to “4” is given as the information corresponding to the ally character). 6 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the display device 11. FIG.

First, the display device 11 displays the current “status” of the self-side character (“self” in FIGS. 37 to 41) corresponding to the player himself as the basic display content during the battle state. At the same time, the enemy character on the enemy side determined as a result of the lottery on the enemy type at the time of entering the battle (“enemy A” in FIGS. 37 to 41. In this case, it is assumed that the enemy type “A” is selected). Display the current "status" of.

The status is information corresponding to the remaining numerical range of the friendly HP and the enemy HP set at the time of entering the battle state. In the present embodiment, the remaining numerical range of each of the friendly HP and the enemy HP is “32 to When the status is "25", the status "normal" is set, when the remaining numerical value range is "24 to 17", the status "small break" is set, and when the remaining numerical value range is "16 to 9" , When the status "Medium damage" is set and the remaining numerical value range is "8 to 1", the status "Great damage" is set, and when the remaining numerical value range is "0" or less, the status "Destroyed" Is set. Although the status "destroy" may be set for the enemy HP, the status "defeat" may not be set for the ally HP, and when the remaining numerical range of the ally HP is "1" or less, The ally HP is fixed at "1" and cannot be subtracted below it.

Then, the display device 11 displays "effective middle line attack" when there is no ally. This relates to the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the line battle state only for the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) when no ally character of “1” to “4” is given in the battle state. It means to function as a judgment line.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when there is no ally, when the above-mentioned "middle-level lip" or "middle-level bell" is displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "middle-level lip" or "middle-level bell" can be displayed is determined. When it is done), it becomes an attack on the ally side, and the damage damage lottery described later is performed, while the above-mentioned "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" is not displayed (that is, "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell"). If the internal winning combination that can be displayed is not determined), and if you win the “Billed Lip” (“F_Billed Lip”), it becomes an attack on the enemy side and the damage damage lottery described below is not performed The damage damage lottery is now performed.

FIG. 38 shows the display device 11 when the ally "1" is acquired in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) (that is, when "1" is added as the information corresponding to the ally character). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of. Note that the basic display contents are the same as those shown in FIG. 37, so description thereof is omitted here.

When the ally "1" is acquired, the display device 11 displays "Middle-stage line attack effective" and "Upper-stage line attack effective". This is because when the ally character "1" is given in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41) are line battles. It means that it functions as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the ally "1" is acquired, when the above-mentioned "middle lip" or "middle bell" is displayed (that is, the "middle lip" or "middle bell" may be displayed, the internal winnings may be displayed). When the winning combination is determined), and when the above-mentioned “upper lip” or “upper bell” is displayed (that is, when the internal winning combination that can display the “upper lip” or “upper bell” is determined) Will be an attack on the ally side, and the damage damage lottery described below will be performed, while the above-mentioned "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" is not displayed (that is, "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" may be displayed. The internal winning combination is not determined), the above-mentioned “upper lip” or “upper bell” is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination for which “upper lip” or “upper bell” can be displayed is not determined), “ In the case where the hit bullet "(F_ bullet hit)" is won, it becomes an attack on the enemy side and the damage damage lottery described below is not performed, but the damage damage lottery described below is performed.

In FIG. 39, in the line battle state (more specifically, in the battle state), when the teammates “1” and “2” are acquired (that is, “1” and “2” are added as the information corresponding to the teammate character). FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the display device 11 in the case of (when present). Note that the basic display contents are the same as those shown in FIG. 37, so description thereof is omitted here.

When the teammates “1” and “2” are acquired, the display device 11 displays “middle line attack effective”, “upper line attack effective”, and “lower line attack effective”. This is because when the ally characters “1” and “2” are given in the battle state, the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line (“DL2” in FIGS. 38 to 41). ), and the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) function as a determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the line battle state.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the teammates “1” and “2” are acquired, when the above-mentioned “middle-stage lip” or “middle-stage bell” is displayed (that is, “middle-stage lip” or “middle-stage bell” is displayed). When an internal winning combination that can be performed is determined), when the above-mentioned “upper lip” or “upper bell” is displayed (that is, an internal winning combination that can display “upper lip” or “upper bell” is determined). When the above-mentioned “lower lip” or “lower bell” is displayed (that is, when the internal winning combination for which “lower lip” or “lower bell” can be displayed is determined), While the damage damage lottery described below is performed, the above-mentioned "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" can be displayed is determined. No), the above "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination for which "upper lip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the above "lower lip" Or, if the “lower bell” is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination for which the “lower lip” or the “lower bell” can be displayed is not determined), and if the winning hit is “Billed Lip” (“F_Billed Lip”) Is an attack on the enemy side, and the damage damage lottery described below is not performed, but the damage damage lottery during the bullet-received lip described below is performed.

In FIG. 40, in the line battle state (more specifically, in the battle state), when the teammates “1” to “3” are acquired (that is, “1” to “3” are added as information corresponding to the teammate character). FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the display device 11 in the case of (when present). Note that the basic display contents are the same as those shown in FIG. 37, so description thereof is omitted here.

When the teammates “1” to “3” are acquired, the display device 11 displays “middle line attack effective”, “upper line attack effective”, “lower line attack effective”, and “with counter”. This is because when the teammate characters “1” to “3” are given in the battle state, the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line (“DL2” in FIGS. 38 to 41). ), and the bottom line (“DL3” in FIG. 39 to FIG. 41) function as a determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the line battle state, and when the “hit bullet” (“F_ bullet hit”) is won. , It means that a lottery for countering hits and a lottery for damage given during counters can be performed later.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a mode in which when the teammates “1” to “3” are acquired, when the teammates “1” and “2” are acquired, and the damage damage lottery described later and the damage-received lottery at the time of a hit lip described below are performed Is the same, but in addition, the above-mentioned "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination for which "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" can be displayed is not determined), and The “upper lip” or “upper bell” is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination for which the “upper lip” or “upper bell” can be displayed is not determined), and the “lower lip” or “lower bell” described above is not determined. Is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination for which “lower lip” or “lower bell” can be displayed is not determined), and if the winning hit is “Billed Lip” (“F_Billed Lip”), Before the damage damage lottery is performed, a hit lottery counter lottery is performed to determine whether to activate a counter attack, and if you win this, it becomes an ally's attack and the counter damage damage lottery described later. Is performed, and damage damage lottery will not be performed at the time of hitting rips described later.

In FIG. 41, in the line battle state (more specifically, in the battle state), when the teammates “1” to “4” are acquired (that is, “1” to “4” are added as information corresponding to the teammate character). FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the display device 11 in the case of (when present). Note that the basic display contents are the same as those shown in FIG. 37, so description thereof is omitted here.

When the allies "1" to "4" are acquired, the display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective", "upper line attack effective", "lower line attack effective", "with counter", and "defense present". doing. This is because when the teammate characters “1” to “4” are given in the battle state, the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line (“DL2” in FIGS. 38 to 41). ), and the bottom line (“DL3” in FIG. 39 to FIG. 41) function as a determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the line battle state, and when the “hit bullet” (“F_ bullet hit”) is won. , It means that the counter lottery at the time of hitting rips and the damage damage lottery at the time of counters described below can be performed, and even if you do not win the counter lottery at the time of hitting bullets described below, the defense lottery at the time of hitting rep below can be performed ing.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the teammates “1” to “4” are acquired, when the teammates “1” and “2” are acquired, and the damage damage lottery described later, the damage damage lottery at the time of hitting a lip described later, and the hit damage later described The counter lottery at the time of rip and the damage damage lottery at the time of counter are performed in the same way, but in addition to that, the above-mentioned "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" is not displayed (that is, "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell"). Is not determined), the above-mentioned “upper lip” or “upper bell” is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which “upper lip” or “upper bell” can be displayed is determined) No), the above-mentioned “lower lip” or “lower bell” is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination for which “lower lip” or “lower bell” can be displayed is not determined), “bounced lip” (“ F_Billed Lip”), if a lottery for hitting a rep is performed, a lottery for hitting a ripping is performed to determine whether to activate a counter attack before the damage lottery during a ripping hit is described later. If you do not do it, the defense lottery at the time of hitting rip is performed, and if you win this, it will be an attack on the enemy side, but it will be a defense success and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rep will not be performed. ..

In the present embodiment, the damage determination lottery described below is performed only when the “replay” symbol and the “bell” symbol are actually aligned on the line set as the determination line, and for example, the pushing order small winning combination. Despite the fact that the push order is informed about, the player may not be allowed to perform the damage damage lottery described below if the "bell" symbols are not actually aligned due to the player's mistake in the push order. , If the internal winning combination in which the “Replay” symbol and the “Bell” symbol can be aligned (can be displayed) is determined on the line set as the judgment line, the “Replay” symbol or the “Bell symbol” is actually determined. The damage damage lottery described below may be performed regardless of whether or not the symbols of “” are aligned. Any of these methods can be adopted. In the case of adopting the latter method, the "judgment line" is not the line on which the "judgment" itself is actually performed, but it has the meaning of being able to inform the player that the damage lottery will be performed, for example. It will still be important to the player as it becomes a thing.

37 to 41, an example in which the teammate characters "1" to "4" are sequentially increased is described, but the teammate character may be, for example, " There may be a case where only "2", "3" only, "4" only, or "2" and "3", "3" and "4" are given. Therefore, in the following, the functions of the information “1” to “4” corresponding to the teammate character will be briefly described again.

When the information “1” corresponding to the ally character is set, the top line (“DL2” in FIGS. 38 to 41) in addition to the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) is in the line battle state. It will function as a judgment line regarding the variation of the continuation degree.

When the information “2” corresponding to the teammate character is set, the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) in addition to the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) is in the line battle state. It will function as a judgment line regarding the variation of the continuation degree.

When the information “3” corresponding to the ally character is set, even if the ally HP is originally reduced by the enemy side attack, the ally side attack is reduced and the enemy HP is reduced. There will be cases where

When the information “4” corresponding to the ally character is set, even if the ally HP is originally reduced as an attack on the enemy side, the ally HP may not be reduced in some cases.

Here, regardless of whether the information “1” or “2” corresponding to the teammate character is set, the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). When the winning combination number “7”, “8” or “24” is transmitted (see FIG. 32), the sub CPU 201 blinks, for example, on the display device 11 a portion where “middle line attack effective” is displayed. Processing such as displaying or emphasizing is performed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that expects the ally side to attack.

Also, when the information “1” corresponding to the teammate character is set, the winning combination number “6” is sent from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). Alternatively, when “23” is transmitted (see FIG. 32 ), the sub CPU 201 performs processing such as blinking or highlighting a portion where “upper line attack effective” is displayed on the display device 11, for example. I do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that expects the ally side to attack.

In the case where the information “2” corresponding to the teammate character is set, the winning combination number “10” is sent from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). Alternatively, when “25” is transmitted (see FIG. 32 ), the sub CPU 201 blinks, or emphasizes, for example, a portion of the display device 11 where “Lower line attack effective” is displayed. Process. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that expects the ally side to attack.

However, the aspect of the effect that the ally side expects to attack is not limited to this. For example, it may be an effect performed by another effect device (for example, the speaker group 84 or the LED group 85). Further, even when the winning combination number of the internal winning combination that does not have the above-described correspondence relationship is transmitted, one of the effects described above may be performed with a predetermined probability.

The type and function of information corresponding to the teammate character are not limited to those described above. For example, when information (for example, “5”) corresponding to a specific ally character is set, the amount of damage determined in the damage damage lottery described later increases (for example, the amount of damage determined is doubled). ) May have a function like this. Further, for example, when the information (for example, “6”) corresponding to a specific ally character is set, the damage received determined in the damage received lottery at the time of the bullet-received rip described below decreases (for example, the determined damage received). May be reduced to 1/2).

The line functioning as the determination line is not limited to the valid line. For example, when the information corresponding to a specific ally character is set, even if it is a line different from the effective line, it may be set as a special line and this special line may be made to function as a determination line. Specifically, for example, when information (for example, “5”) corresponding to a specific ally character is set, the cross-down line functions as a determination line related to the variation of the continuation degree of the line battle state in addition to the center line. You may do so. Further, for example, when information (for example, “6”) corresponding to a specific ally character is set, the cross-up line functions as a determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the line battle state in addition to the center line. May be.

In such a case, the symbol displayed on the actual activated line is not the "Replay" symbol group or the "Bell" symbol group, but the symbol displayed on such a special line is "Replay". If it is configured so as to be the same as the "Bell" symbol arrangement, the player can recognize that the degree of advantage changes similarly to the activated line, so that the actual number of activated lines is not affected. Instead, it becomes possible to provide the same playability. From this point of view, the determination line regarding the variation in the continuation degree of the line battle state does not necessarily include the effective line. For example, when the effective line is one cross-up line, the line battle The determination line regarding the variation of the degree of continuation of the state may be composed of a maximum of three lines of a center line, a top line and a bottom line. That is, it is possible to configure the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the line battle state from only a special line different from the effective line.

Further, when defining the determination line, similarly to the above-mentioned effective line, instead of each line in which the symbols are arranged in a straight line, or together with this, a line in which the symbols are not in a straight line can be defined as an effective line. .. That is, as long as it is a line that passes through (any area of) one of the symbols in each column (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, right reel 3R), one or a plurality of lines configured by connecting with straight lines or polygonal lines It can be set as a judgment line.

For example, a line (an irregular line at V time) connecting the upper region of the left reel 3L, the lower region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R may be defined as the determination line. That is, in the present embodiment, since the symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows×3 columns in the frame of the reel display window 4, it is possible to define 27 determination lines. At least one of the lines may be defined as the determination line.

Here, let us return to the explanation of the battle state again. As described above, when the information “3” corresponding to the teammate character is set, when the “ball hit rep” (“F_ball hit rep”) is won, the ball hit rep counter lottery is performed. In the hit lottery counter lottery, the main CPU 101 determines, with a predetermined probability, whether to activate a counter attack (winning) or not to activate a counter attack (non-winning). It should be noted that the tables referred to in the counter lottery at the time of bullet rep are not shown.

If you win the counter lottery at the time of a hit rip, the damage damage lottery at the time of the counter is subsequently performed. In the counter-time given damage lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the counter-time given damage lottery table shown in FIG. 36C and determines any one of the given damage values based on the lottery value. When the value of damage done is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the enemy HP, and the value of the enemy HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the enemy is appropriately updated. In addition, in this case, damage damage lottery is not carried out at the time of hitting a rip.

On the other hand, when the player does not win the counter lottery at the time of hitting a rip, the information “4” corresponding to the ally character is set, and the information “3” corresponding to the ally character is not set. When "4" is set, defense lottery is performed at the time of ripping a bullet. In the hit lot counter at random, the main CPU 101 determines, with a predetermined probability, whether to activate the defense (win) or not to activate the defense (non-win). Note that illustrations of tables referred to in the defense lottery at the time of hitting a rip are omitted.

If you win the lottery for defensive defense during hit rep, the damage lottery for hit rep will not be performed. On the other hand, if the player does not win the defensive lottery at the time of hitting rep, and the information “4” corresponding to the ally character is not set but “3” is set, the counter lottery at the time of hitting rep is won. If there is not, or if the information “3” and “4” corresponding to the teammate character is not set and the player has won the “Bullet Lip” (“F_Bullet Lip”), the player will receive The damage lottery is performed.

In the lottery for damage received during bullet ripping, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for damage during bullet ripping shown in FIG. 36D, and determines any one damage value based on the enemy type and the lottery value. .. When the damage value is determined, the value is subtracted from the teammate HP value, and the teammate HP value is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the ally is appropriately updated.

When the information "1" and "2" corresponding to the teammate character is not set, and when an internal winning combination that can display "middle lip" or "middle bell" is determined, and watermelon (in this case) , “F_Watermelon 1” may be included, or “F_Watermelon 2” may be included. In the following, the same applies in this section), the damage damage lottery is performed. Be seen.

In the case where the information “1” corresponding to the ally character is set, the “intermediate lip” or “middle bell”, or the internal winning combination in which the “upper lip” or the “upper bell” can be displayed is determined. In the case, and when the watermelon is determined as the internal winning combination, the damage damage lottery is performed.

In the case where the information “2” corresponding to the ally character is set, the internal winning combination in which “middle lip” or “middle bell” or “lower lip” or “lower bell” can be displayed is determined. In the case, and when the watermelon is determined as the internal winning combination, the damage damage lottery is performed.

When the information "1" and "2" corresponding to the teammate character is set, "middle lip" or "middle bell", "upper lip" or "upper bell", or "lower lip" or " When the internal winning combination that can display “lower bell” is determined, and when the watermelon is determined as the internal winning combination, the damage damage lottery is performed.

In the damage damage lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the damage damage lottery table shown in FIG. 36E, and determines one of the damage damage values based on the internal winning combination and the lottery value. When the value of damage done is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the enemy HP, and the value of the enemy HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the enemy is appropriately updated.

Here, paying attention to the RT state, the line battle state of the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state, but when the “RT3 transition eye” is displayed, it can be the RT3 state. Referring to FIG. 16, in the RT2 state, the lottery value of “F_middle stage rep 1” is “5000”, the lottery values of “F_upper stage rep” and “F_lower stage rep” are “2450”, and “F_shot hit” The lottery value of “Lip” is “8970”, whereas in the RT3 state, the lottery value of “F_middle stage rip 2” is “32768”, and the lottery value of “F_ballistic rep” is “0”.

That is, in the line battle state of the advantageous section (more specifically, the battle state), if it is possible to shift to the RT3 state, it may be determined whether the information “1” or “2” corresponding to the ally character is set. Instead, the internal winning combination that can display "middle rip" is determined with a high probability, and as a result, the damage lottery can be performed with a high probability, and the internal winning combination that can display "hit rep" is displayed. As a result of not being determined, it is possible to prevent the damage lottery from taking place when the bullet is ripped. Therefore, in the line battle state of the advantageous section (more specifically, the battle state), the RT3 state is the most advantageous RT state.

In the battle state, when the enemy HP becomes "0" or less (that is, "destroy" as the status) before the battle state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts from the next game to the privilege grant lottery state of the advantageous section. If the enemy HP is not below "0" and the game period in the battle state has not ended, the battle state is continued. Further, when the enemy HP is not equal to or lower than "0" and the game period in the battle state is over, the game is shifted from the next game to the continuous lottery state in the line battle state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "bullet hit lip" ("F_ bullet hit lip") is won, it is assumed that the ball lottery counter lottery, the bullet hit rep defense lottery, and the bullet hit damage damage lottery are performed. The lottery method in the battle state is not limited to this. For example, if an internal winning combination that is not subject to the damage damage lottery (however, except for the “weak rare combination”, the “chance eye”, and the bonus combination) has been determined, the “ball hit lip” (“F_ball hit lip”) In the same manner as when the winning lottery) is won, a random lottery during a bullet-hit rip, a defense lottery during a bullet-hit rip, and a damage-hit lottery during a bullet-hist rip may be performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the winning ball is hit, the combination of the symbols of the “hits lip” is displayed on the center line. It is configured as a different internal winning combination, or is configured as a push order replay of "Bullet Lip" ("F_Bullet Lip"), and a combination of symbols of "Bullet Lip" is displayed on the top line according to the procedure of the stop operation. Alternatively, it may be displayed on the bottom line. In this case, if the top line or the bottom line is the judgment line, it may be possible to perform counter lottery at the time of hitting rep, lottery for defense at hitting rep, and damage lottery at hitting rep The lottery may not be performed. Also, if the top line or bottom line is the judgment line, even if the procedure of the stop operation is notified so that the combination of the symbols of “shot bullets” is not displayed on the top line or bottom line Good.

(Continuous lottery status)
As described above, when the enemy HP is not "0" or less and the game period in the battle state ends, the main CPU 101 next shifts to the continuous lottery state in the line battle state. The continuous lottery state is a state in which it continues for 4 games or 7 games, and if it is finally decided to shift from the line battle state to the right acquisition lottery state, shift to the right acquisition lottery state If it is decided to continue the line battle state, the line battle state is moved to the interval state in the line battle state again, and if neither of these decisions is made, the line battle state ends ( That is, the advantageous section ends) and the normal state of the non-advantageous section is entered.

In the continuous lottery state, continuous lottery and continuous lottery result rewriting lottery can be performed according to the enemy type and the damage state. It should be noted that the lottery relating to these game characteristics is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the continuous lottery state.

First, when shifting from the battle state to the continuous lottery state, the main CPU 101 performs continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state. In the continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state, the main CPU 101 refers to the continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 36F, and the enemy type, the damage state (that is, the same as the “status” described above), and the lottery value. Based on the above, the game period in the continuous lottery state is 4 games, but it is neither decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state nor to continue the line battle state (“4G defeat”), and the game period in the continuous lottery state. Is 7 games, but it is not decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state or to continue the line battle state (“7G defeat”), the game period of the continuous lottery state is 4 games, and the line battle state is changed. It is decided to continue (“4G continuation”), the game period in the continuous lottery state is 7 games, it is decided to continue the line battle state (“7G continuation”), continuous lottery state The game period is 4 games, it is decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state (“4G promotion”), and the game period in the continuous lottery state is 7 games, and it is possible to shift to the right acquisition lottery state. One of the determinations (“7G promotion”) is determined.

In the continuous lottery depending on the enemy type and the damage state, the lottery result (“4G continuation”, “7G continuation”, “4G promotion”, and “7G promotion” described above) in which at least the advantageous zone is not ended is determined. As a general rule, the probability of enemies increases in the order of “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, and the ally status is “major”, “medium”, “small”. The order is to gradually increase in the order of “break” and “normal”, and the enemy statuses are sequentially increased in the order of “normal”, “small break”, “medium break”, and “major break”. That is, the three parameters of the enemy type, the ally status, and the enemy status are referred to and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section continues.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when entering the battle state, information corresponding to which enemy character is set, how the ally status changes during the battle state, and which enemy status is determined during the battle state. It is possible to change the continuation degree in which the line battle state continues depending on the transition. In addition, when the ally status and the enemy status change, the type of information corresponding to the ally character (for example, the number of determination lines) becomes important, whereby the degree of continuation of the line battle state is advantageous to the player. The probability of changing the value to a certain degree or changing the degree to a disadvantage to the player is also changed.

Note that, in the continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 36F, when the ally status is “defeat” and the enemy status is “defeat”, it is decided that the lottery result in which at least the advantageous zone is not ended is exceptionally determined. It has become. In this way, when the ally status is a specific status and the enemy status is a specific status, the probability that the advantageous section continues will be increased or the probability that the advantageous section will continue will be reduced, contrary to the principle described above. You can also

Further, when the main CPU 101 shifts from the battle state to the continuous lottery state, the lottery result of the continuous lottery depending on the enemy type and the damage state is the lottery result in which the advantageous section is ended (the above-described “4G defeat” and “defeat”). 7G defeat”), the continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed in the continuous lottery state. Specifically, in the continuous lottery state, when a "chance eye" or a bonus combination is won, if "4G defeat" is determined as the lottery result of the continuous lottery, it is rewritten as "4G continuous", for example. If "7G defeat" has been decided, rewrite as "7G continuation". In addition, when the watermelon (in this case, only “F_watermelon 1” or “F_watermelon 2” may be included) is won, the continuous lottery is performed with a predetermined probability (eg, 1/2). Decide to rewrite the lottery result of. When it is decided to rewrite the lottery result of the continuous lottery, the lottery result of the continuous lottery is appropriately rewritten as in the above.

In the present embodiment, the continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed after the continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state is performed, but the lottery method in the continuous lottery state is not limited to this. For example, in the continuous lottery state, first, the continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed (that is, the lottery is performed to determine whether to keep the line battle state for each game based on the internal winning combination), and the relevant lottery is performed. When it is not determined to continue the line battle state, the continuous lottery may be performed according to the enemy type and the damage state when the continuous lottery state ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section, whether one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether the line is an effective line) is set as the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous section is determined. It is possible to decide, and in the battle state during the line battle state, when the symbols of "Replay" or "Bell" are displayed side by side on the determined judgment line, the degree of continuation of the advantageous section is set to the degree advantageous to the player. It is possible to change, and in the continuous lottery state during the line battle state, it is possible to decide whether or not to continue the advantageous section based on the determined degree of continuation of the advantageous section.

As a result, the degree of continuation of the advantageous section can be changed according to the determination result of the determination line, so that it is possible to improve the interest in continuing the advantageous state for the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the battle state during the line battle state, for example, when the combination of the symbols “shot bullets” is displayed on the determined determination line, the degree of continuation of the advantageous section is disadvantageous to the player. It can be changed to any degree.

As a result, it is possible to increase the tension in the advantageous section (for example, during the battle state in the line battle state), the game in the advantageous section is not monotonous, and there is an interest in continuing the state advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve.

Further, in the present embodiment, the RT state in the line battle state of the advantageous section can be changed to the RT2 state, and when the “RT3 transition eye” is displayed, the RT state in the line battle state of the advantageous section is displayed. Can be changed to the RT3 state, and a specific internal winning combination (for example, "F_middle stage rep 1" and "F_middle stage" in which a combination of symbols of "middle stage rep" can be displayed on the determined determination line is displayed. The probability of deciding any one of “lip 2” is higher in the RT3 state than in the RT2 state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the RT2 state, it is possible to determine a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, “F_ball hit lip”) in which a combination of symbols of “ball hit lip” can be displayed, and in the RT3 state, the predetermined internal winning combination can be determined. The internal winning combination of is not allowed to be decided.

As a result, during the advantageous section (for example, during the battle state during the line battle state), the degree of advantage of the player is further changed depending on which RT state, so that the game during the advantageous section is performed. Can be made more diversified, and the interest in continuing a state advantageous to the player can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the stop operation is performed in the "bat order 1", "F_upper left bell 1" and "bat order 1" in which the combination of symbols "bell" is displayed on the top line. When the stop operation is performed at, the center line displays the combination of the symbols "Bell" and "F_Middle-stage left bell 1", and when the stop operation is performed at "Batting order 3", at the top line "F_upper bell 1" where the combination of symbols "Bell" is displayed and "F_ where the combination of symbols "Bell" is displayed on the center line when the stop operation is performed in "bat order 3" 32 can be determined as at least an internal winning combination, and as shown in FIG. 32, for example, “F_upper left bell 1” or “F_upper middle bell 1” is determined in the advantageous section. In case of winning, “23” is transmitted as the winning combination number, and when “F_middle stage left bell 1” or “F_middle stage bell 1” is determined, “24” is transmitted as the winning combination number. It has become. Then, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute different effects depending on the transmitted winning combination number.

Thereby, for example, in the case where the player has a playability in which the degree of the advantage of the player changes depending on the line on which the symbol is displayed, such as the line battle state of the advantageous section, the effect associated with the combination of the symbols displayed Since it is possible to perform, it is possible to perform a more appropriate effect without increasing the control load.

<Right acquisition lottery state and game play in right acquisition state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the flow of the game during the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 42 shows an outline of a game flow in the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state.

(Right acquisition lottery preparation state)
The main CPU 101 wins the bonus combination in the right acquisition lottery preparation state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the right acquisition state of the advantageous section, and when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, shifts to the right acquisition lottery preparation state. (Ie, return to these states). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the right acquisition lottery preparation state is maintained until the RT state shifts from the RT4 state to the RT2 state. When the RT state shifts to the RT2 state, the bonus winning combination is transferred to the right acquisition state if it is a rights acquisition state, and the bonus winning combination is transferred to the rights acquisition lottery state if it is a rights acquisition lottery state. Let

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order notification regarding the push sequence small win and the push sequence replay is not performed until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification of the push order small combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 shift eye" is displayed in the RT4 state and the state shifts to the RT3 state, the push order notification regarding the push order minor combination and the push order replay is started. When the state shifts to the RT3 state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state is ended, the right acquisition state is returned to the right acquisition state, and the right acquisition lottery state is returned to the right acquisition lottery state. You may make it return.

(Right acquisition lottery status)
As described above, when the right acquisition lottery preparation state is completed and when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right acquisition lottery state. The right acquisition lottery state is a state in which it continues for 20 games, and during this period, information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is of course notified. Even if the right acquisition state is not entered, the line battle state is restored. Therefore, this right acquisition lottery state is a gaming state in which the gaming period of the advantageous section can be extended by itself. In the right acquisition lottery state, the right acquisition state transition lottery is performed.

In the right acquisition lottery, the main CPU 101, for example, in the right acquisition lottery, may have only “chance eyes” or watermelons (in this case, only “F_watermelon 1” or “F_watermelon 2”). If you win), it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state from the next game. If the common bell (“F_upper common bell” and “F_middle common bell”) is won, it is determined with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4) to shift from the next game to the right acquisition state. Even if it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state, the right acquisition state may be shifted when the game period (20 games) in the right acquisition lottery state is finished. Further, when it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state, a precursory period is determined within the range of the number of games remaining in the game period in the right acquisition lottery state, and when the precursory period elapses, the precursor is transferred to the right acquisition state. You may do it. Also, when the number of remaining games in the game period in the right acquisition lottery state occurs when shifting from the right acquisition lottery state to the right acquisition state, the remaining number of games is added to the right acquisition state game period. Alternatively, it may be added to the game period of the next right acquisition lottery state (when the right acquisition lot is returned to the right acquisition lottery state).

(Right acquisition status)
As described above, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right acquisition state when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition state in the right acquisition lottery state and when the right acquisition lottery preparation state returns. The right acquisition state is a state in which it continues for 10 games, and during this period, information of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is of course notified. Then, regardless of whether the permanent right is acquired or not, the right acquisition lottery state is returned to. Therefore, the right acquisition state itself is a gaming state in which the gaming period of the advantageous section can be extended. In the right acquisition state, the permanent right acquisition lottery is performed.

In the permanent right acquisition lottery, it is determined whether or not to grant the right to permanently acquire the ally character (until the advantageous section ends) in advance, separately from the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. It For example, the main CPU 101 determines to grant the permanent right when the bonus combination is won in the right acquisition state. Note that, for example, based on the winning of the specific combination (for example, “Watermelon 1”), it may be determined to grant the permanent right with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4).

Here, if it is determined as a result of the permanent right lottery that the permanent right is given, the number of the ally characters that are not given as a result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle is the most A ally character with a small number is added. For example, when the teammate character “2” is given in the team-type lottery at the time of battle entry described later, if the permanent right is acquired, the teammate character “1” is further provided. The function of the granted permanent right is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined as a result of the permanent right lottery that the permanent right is given, the ally character having the smallest number among the numbers of the ally characters to which the permanent right is not given is fixedly given. May be. For example, when the permanent right is first granted, the ally character "1" is given as the right content of this permanent right, and when the permanent right is given next, the ally character "2" is given as the right content of this permanent right. May be added.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, whether or not a permanent right is granted is determined in the right acquisition state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the limited right described above is granted in the right acquisition state. It may be determined whether or not to execute. In this case, for example, a lottery similar to the ally acquisition lottery described above may be performed, or the limited right described above may be provided so that the probability that the limited right is granted is higher than the ally acquisition lottery described above. It may be determined whether or not it is given. Further, for example, in the right acquisition state, whether or not the above-described limited right is granted is determined for each unit game with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10) regardless of the internal winning combination. Good. If a permanent right or a limited right is granted by a trigger other than the bonus winning, a plurality of rights can be acquired in the right acquisition state.

In this case, as described above, for example, when two rights are granted (when the information "1" and "2" corresponding to the teammate character are set), the determination line has the upper limit number in the battle state. (DL1 to DL3) will be set. Further, for example, when three rights are granted (when information “1” to “3” corresponding to the teammate character is set), in addition to this, the counter may be activated in the battle state. Like Further, for example, when four rights are granted (when information “1” to “4” corresponding to the teammate character is set), in addition to this, defense may be activated in the battle state. Like Here, for example, when 5 or more rights are granted in the right acquisition state, the rights of more than 4 may be carried over to the next battle state, or discarded (cleared). It may be done. Further, for example, when five or more rights are granted in the right acquisition state, it may be determined that the advantageous section is always continued in the continuous lottery state after the end of the next battle state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the right acquisition state, it is determined whether or not the permanent right that allows the line battle state of the advantageous section to be advantageously advanced (the information corresponding to the ally character can be set) is granted. However, the content of rights that can be granted in the right acquisition state is not limited to this. For example, in the continuous lottery state of the line battle state, the continuation right that the line battle state is forcibly continued regardless of the lottery result (that is, the right to extend the advantageous section. “stock” or “number of sets”) It may be determined whether or not the right acquisition lottery state is forcibly continued regardless of the lottery result in the right acquisition lottery state. It may be determined whether or not a continuous right (that is, a right to extend the advantageous section, which may be referred to as “stock” or “number of sets”) is granted. That is, in the right acquisition state, the content of the right that can be granted can be appropriately set as long as it gives the player a privilege.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section, whether one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether the line is an effective line) is set as the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous section is determined. It is possible to make a decision, and the decision result changes depending on whether or not the right is granted in the right acquisition state. That is, it is possible to determine the determination line based on the right granted in the right acquisition state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of rights equal to or more than the upper limit number of the determination lines is given in the right acquisition state, the upper limit number of determination lines are first determined using the upper right number of rights. Then, in the battle state during the line battle state, for example, when the combination of the symbols “Bullet Lip” is displayed on the determined determination line, if the granted right does not remain, the advantageous section is continued. It is possible to change the degree to a degree unfavorable to the player and not to change the degree of continuation of the advantageous section to a degree unfavorable to the player as long as the granted right remains.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the permanent right is granted, a plurality of determination lines are always determined, and when the permanent right is not granted, one or a plurality of determination lines are determined when determining the determination line. Either line is set as the determination line.

This makes it possible to diversify the role of each gaming state in the advantageous section, and to vary the continuation degree of the advantageous section in various ways, thereby improving the interest in continuing the advantageous state for the player. be able to.

<Playability during ending 1 state and ending 2 state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, the flow of the game during the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 43 shows an outline of the flow of the game in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state. Further, FIG. 44 shows an outline of the ending effect performed in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state.

(Ending preparation state)
The main CPU 101 wins the bonus combination in the ending preparation state, the ending 1 state, and the ending 2 state of the advantageous section, and shifts to the ending preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends (that is, these). Return to the state of). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the ending state is maintained until the RT state shifts from the RT4 state to the RT2 state. When the RT state shifts to the RT2 state, the bonus winning combination is shifted to the ending 1 state if the winning combination is the ending 1 state, and the bonus winning combination is shifted to the ending 2 state if the winning combination is the ending 2 state.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order notification regarding the push sequence small win and the push sequence replay is not performed until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification of the push order small combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 shift eye" is displayed in the RT4 state and the state shifts to the RT3 state, the push order notification regarding the push order minor combination and the push order replay is started. At the time of transition to the RT3 state, the ending preparation state is ended, and when returning to the ending 1 state, the ending 1 state is restored, and when returning to the ending 2 state, the ending 2 state is restored. May be.

Further, in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, for example, when it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state by the ART lottery when the watermelon 1 is won, the game period of the normal advantageous section is consumed. Then, the state shifts to the ending preparation state (that is, the state shifts to the ending 1 state until the state shifts to the RT2 state).

(Ending 1 state)
As described above, when the ending preparation state is completed and the state is changed (returned) to the ending 1 state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the ending 1 state. The ending 1 state is a state in which it continues for 100 games, and during this period, information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is of course notified. When the ending 1 state is completed, the line battle state is entered. The game state is the same as the line battle state in that it is in the game state of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section which shifts from the normal advantageous section, but the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the line battle state. In the ending 1 state, the permanent right acquisition lottery is performed as in the right acquisition state.

As in the case of lottery in the right acquisition state, in the ending 1 state, it may be determined whether or not the limited right described above is granted, or the continuation right for extending the advantageous section is granted. Whether or not it may be determined

Further, for example, in the ending 1 state, when the bonus combination is won, the bonus state based on the bonus combination is finished, and the ending 1 state is returned to via the ending preparation state, the game period of 100 games is again performed. It may be counted from the beginning, or may be counted by taking over the game period in the game in which the winning combination is won. In the latter case, for example, in the 10th game in the ending 1 state (90 games remaining), a bonus combination is won, the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, and the ending 1 state is restored via the ending preparation state. In this case, the game period in the ending 1 state may be 90 games.

Further, the game period in the bonus state may be included in the game period in the ending 1 state. For example, a winning combination is won in the 10th game in the ending 1 state (90 games remaining), the game period of the bonus state based on the bonus combination is 17 games, the bonus state ends, and the ending preparation state is passed. Then, when the game is returned to the ending 1 state, the game period of the ending 1 state may be 73 games.

(Ending 2 state)
When the number of games in the advantageous section is “1200” times or more, and when the interval state of the line battle state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts to the ending 2 state. The ending 2 state is a state in which it continues for 131 games, and during this period, information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is of course notified. Then, when the ending 2 state ends, the advantageous section itself ends, and the non-advantageous section is entered.

In this case, the game may be moved to the ending 2 state when the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period reaches "1200" times (or more times than that, for example, "1369" times). Good. Further, in this case, even in the other gaming state of the advantageous section, the gaming state may be shifted to the ending 2 state. Further, the mode of counting the game period in the ending 2 state is the same as the mode of counting the game period in the ending 1 state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the ending 2 state ends, the advantageous section itself ends and the non-advantageous section is entered, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the ending 2 state ends, if the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period has not reached “1500” times, the line battle state may be re-entered. Alternatively, the ending 2 state may be continued until the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period reaches “1500” times.

(Ending production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, an ending effect that can be performed in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state will be described.

The ending effect is basically an effect that suggests that the advantageous section will soon end when the period controlled by the advantageous section becomes “1200” times or more, as the phrase indicates. Has become. Further, considering the probability that the period controlled in the advantageous section is “1200” times or more, the special effect has a lower probability of being executed than other effects.

The ending effect is configured as a series of story effects including, for example, the first to eighth episodes and the final episode, and as the game period in the ending 2 state progresses, the content of the story also progresses. There is. As described above, in the case where the ending 2 state is configured to be able to continue until the regulation monitoring period becomes “1500” times after the period controlled to the advantageous section becomes “1200” times, The content of the story may be advanced according to the game period until the regulation monitoring period reaches "1500" times.

Here, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the ending 1 state when the advantageous section is started, the ending 1 state is set although the advantageous section is just started. The ending production is executed inside.

However, in the ending 1 state, part of the series of story effects described above is executed, and not all of them are executed. Specifically, the first to eighth episodes of the first to eighth episodes and the final episode are executed, but the final episode is not executed. Note that, in this case also, basically, as in the ending 2 state, the content of the story progresses as the game period in the ending 1 state progresses.

A specific example in which a part of the series of story effects described above is executed in the ending 1 state will be described with reference to FIG. For example, in the ending preparation state, the introduction effect of the ending effect is performed. Then, when the ending 1 state is started (ART start), the ending effect is started, and the story sequentially progresses like the first episode, the second episode,... The eighth episode. Then, when the eighth episode ends, a character such as "continue" is displayed on the display device 11 to indicate that the story is not completed.

On the other hand, in the ending 2 state, when the ending 2 state is started (advantageous interval ≧1200 interval state end), the ending effect is started, and the first, second,... The story progresses. Then, when the eighth episode ends, the story of the final episode is developed next, and when the story of the final episode ends, characters such as “THE END” are displayed on the display device 11 to indicate that the story is completed. ..

In addition, the above-mentioned ending production effect contents show one example of the ending effect production contents that can be executed over a plurality of times of games, and the ending production effect contents are not limited to this. Any production content may be used as long as it is production content that is valuable to the player.

For example, if there is an animation or a character used as the motif of the pachi-slot 1, in the ending effect in the ending 2 state, the special video of the animation or the special video of the character that cannot be normally seen is displayed on the display device 11. It should be one. In this case, in the ending effect in the ending 1 state, the contents of these images are displayed on the display device 11 with a shorter content than those in the ending 2 state (for example, summarized, halfway or as another content). It should be one. However, instead of or in addition to these, each ending effect can be performed by the music or voice output from the speaker group 84 and the light emission mode by the LED group 85.

Further, the ending effect may be one in which the effect content proceeds regardless of the number of remaining games. For example, the time required for the unit game is temporarily set to "6 seconds" (this value is arbitrary), and the ending effect in the ending 2 state is set as a series of effects of "6 seconds x 131 times game = 786 seconds", This series of effects is started at the timing controlled to the ending 2 state, and the ending effects in the ending 1 state are part of the series of effects of "6 seconds x 100 games = 600 seconds". As a result, a part of the series of effects may be started at the timing controlled to the ending 1 state. By doing so, it is not necessary to advance the ending effect according to the number of games, so that the control load related to the effect can be reduced. Further, in this case, when the execution of the series of effects described above is finished at a timing before the end of the advantageous section, the screen at the end is displayed as it is until the end of the advantageous section. Alternatively, the series of effects described above may be started again from the beginning (or from the middle) (that is, may be executed in a loop). Further, in this case, when the advantageous section ends at the timing before the execution of the series of effects described above ends, the series of effects described above may be forcibly ended even in the middle thereof. However, the series of effects described above may be executed until the end.

Although not shown in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, in the advantageous section, until the game period in the advantageous section becomes "1200" games (or until the ending 1 state is entered). , It is decided to continue the advantageous section (for example, it is decided to continue the line battle state in the continuous lottery state of the line battle state, or the right acquisition lottery state ends, and then shifts to the interval state. ) Each time, the display device 11 is configured to execute a suggestion effect that suggests a guideline for the period controlled in the advantageous section.

Specifically, for example, a progress bar or a map divided into 12 squares is displayed in a predetermined area in the display device 11, and 1 square is generated every 100 games during the game period in the advantageous section. A suggestive effect is performed such that the display mode is changed each time. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the approximate number of game periods in the advantageous section. It should be noted that, for example, a section such as a progress bar or a map may be set to 15 squares and the degree of exhaustion of the regulation monitoring period may be displayed. Further, these are examples of the display contents of the suggestive effect, and the display contents are not limited to this. For example, the actual number of games in the game period in the advantageous section may be displayed.

Further, the suggestive effect may be displayed only during the first game in the interval state, or may be displayed over the interval state (between three games). Further, it may be displayed only in a line battle state in which the advantageous section may end, or may be always displayed in each game state in the advantageous section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ending effect (special effect) can be executed when the ending 2 state is entered, and the ending 1 When it is determined to shift to the state, in the ending 1 state, a part of the ending effect (special effect) can be executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the special execution, which is a part of the special effect that can be normally executed at the end of the game in the advantageous state for the player, satisfies the predetermined execution condition, , Can be executed in the early stage of the game in a state advantageous to the player. As a result, the player comes to play the game while wanting to see all the special effects, so that the player's motivation for the game can be increased and the interest of the effect can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the regulation monitoring period becomes “1500” times from the time the game enters the ending 2 state to the end of the advantageous section after 131 games have passed, or from the time the game enters the ending 2 state to “1500” times. The ending effect (special effect) can be executed until the section ends. As a result, even if the acquisition of the game medium is restricted, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the advantageous period is controlled every time it is determined that the advantageous period is continued until the game period in the advantageous period becomes “1200” games or until the ending 1 state is entered. It is possible to execute suggestive production that suggests a guide for the period of time. This makes it possible for the player to generally understand the time when the execution of the special effect starts, the time when the advantageous section ends, etc. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with appropriate information while enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

(Other example of ending control)
In the present embodiment, when, for example, 1500 G is started after the advantageous section is started, limit processing for ending the advantageous section is executed even if the number of remaining games remains, but it is decided that the limit processing will be performed in the future. (For example, when the total value of the number of completed games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes equal to or more than the specified value), the main control board 71 sets the payout state to “ending” (for example, ending 2 state). Transition. On the other hand, even if the sub-control board 72 shifts the payout state to “ending” on the main side, the sub-control board 72 does not immediately shift the effect state on the sub side to “ending (END)”, The production state is changed to "ending" by the condition. In the following, particularly, details of the control in which the sub control board 72 shifts the effect state to “ending” will be described. In the present embodiment, the advantageous section may include a "normal advantageous section" or the like, but in this example, the "advantageous section" and the "ART" will be described as being in exactly the same game state.

In this example, a main-side counter that counts on the main (main control board 71) side and a sub-side counter that counts on the sub (main control board 71) side are provided in association with the advantageous section. The main control board 71 uses the first counter to count the number of games (the number of completed games) that have passed during the advantageous period, and uses the second counter to continue the advantageous period (the number of remaining games). ) Is counted. The main control board 71 performs limit processing when the value of the first counter reaches "1500", ends the advantageous period regardless of the value of the second counter, and sets the value of the first counter to "1500". When the value of the second counter reaches “0” before reaching, the advantageous period ends.

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 uses the third counter to count the number of games (the number of completed games) that have passed during the advantageous period, and uses the fourth counter to continue the advantageous period ( A game of the period (remaining number of games) in which the advantageous period can be continued by counting the period (the number of notified games) informed to the player of the remaining number of games) and using the fifth counter. An unannounced period (the number of unannounced games (=the number of hidden additional games)) is counted. When the sub-control board 72 reports the number of hidden additional games, the sub-control board 72 adds the reported number of games and subtracts the unreported game number by the notified number of games.

Since the number of consumed games counted in both main and sub basically match, the value of the first counter on the main side matches the value of the third counter on the sub side (note that the advantageous interval is If the value and "ART" do not match, the limit process is not performed on the sub side, so it is not necessary for the sub side to count the number of completed games in the advantageous section, and the number of completed games in "ART" must be counted. Therefore, the values of both counters do not completely match, but are not related to the control described below).

Further, on the sub-side, since the number of notified remaining games and the number of remaining games held unreported are individually counted, the value of the second counter on the main side and the fourth counter on the sub-side are counted. Does not match, and the value of the second counter on the main side does not match the value of the fifth counter on the sub side. However, since the sum of the number of remaining games that has been notified and the number of remaining games that have not been notified matches the number of remaining games that is counted on the main side, the value of the second counter on the main side and The sum of the value of the fourth counter and the value of the fifth counter on the side matches.

The main control board 71 controls the transition to the "ending" based on the sum of the number of completed games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. For example, as a result of adding the number of games, the advantageous section When the total value of the number of completed games and the number of remaining games reaches or exceeds the specified value, the payout state is changed to “ending”.

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 “ends” the effect state of the sub side according to the total value of the number of completed games and the number of notified games of the advantageous section (that is, the total value excluding the number of unreported games). END)”. Here, the sub control board 72 shifts the effect state to "ending" by referring to, for example, a sub_ending transition lottery table (not shown).

For example, the sub_ending transition lottery table defines a total value of the consumed game number and the notified game number as a reference item, and a lottery result (non-winning lottery, whether or not to shift to “ending” for each total value). Information on the lottery value for winning is defined. According to such a sub_ending transition lottery table, for example, when the total value of the number of consumed games and the number of notified games is “1000 to 1199G”, there is a probability of 24576/32768 to “ending”. Win the transition lottery without winning the transition lottery and have a probability of 8192/32768.

Further, for example, the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to “ending” with a higher probability as the sum of the number of consumed games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section increases. Then, when the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to "ending", the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect stage to a dedicated "ending stage" and maintains the "ending stage" until the advantageous section ends. When the payout state on the main side has not transitioned to “ending”, it is not necessary to perform the lottery for shifting to the “ending” on the sub side. Only when the number shifts to "Ending" (that is, when the sum of the number of completed games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified value in the counter managed by the main side) A lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to shift the state to “ending”.

In this way, by shifting to the special effect stage when shifting to "ending", the player can know in advance that the limit process will be performed. Since it is determined that the limit process will be performed after shifting to the “ending stage”, it is meaningless to perform the additional notification effect of the number of games. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 does not perform the additional notification effect after shifting to the “ending stage”.

Further, the transition to the "ending stage" is performed with a higher probability as the summed value on the sub side (excluding the number of uninformed games) becomes larger in a state where the summed value on the main side reaches or exceeds the specified value. Therefore, the probability of transition to the "ending stage" is higher as the number of additional games (unannounced games) held unannounced is higher, and the number of additional games held unannounced is higher. It has a low probability.

In addition, after the transition to the "ending stage", as a general rule, the production of the "ending stage" is continued until the end of the advantageous section, and the production of the "ending stage" is finished in the game in which the advantageous section ends and the game ends. Time or at the start of the next game, the stage is shifted to the production stage corresponding to the normal section.

In addition, it is desirable to maintain the "ending stage" during the stay of the "ending stage", since the limit processing will still be performed soon even if the bonus is activated. Here, in a game immediately before the end of the advantageous period (for example, a game in which the value of the first counter is “1499”), a bonus such as BB1 to BB4 required to consume a predetermined number of games is won and the bonus is activated. In this case, the first counter reaches “1500” during the bonus operation, the limit process is performed, and the advantageous period ends. At this time, if the "ending stage" is ended and the production stage is changed to another production stage (the production stage corresponding to the normal section or the production stage in bonus operation), even though the bonus operation, which is a state in which the payout increases, , There is a risk that the player feels uncomfortable. Therefore, if the advantageous section ends due to the limit process during the bonus operation, the sub-control board 72 continues the effect stage as the “ending stage” until the end of the bonus, and at the end of the bonus (the advantageous section It is also possible to shift to the production stage corresponding to the normal section (by performing an end notification, displaying a slip-in prevention, etc.).

Further, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination immediately before the limit process is activated such as the value of the first counter is “1498” to “1500” and the bonus winning combination is carried over without winning, the sub control board 72 It is preferable to perform a delay process for ending the ending state, by continuing the “ending stage”, waiting for the end of the bonus operated by the bonus role being carried over, and ending the “ending stage”. In this case, the sub-control board 72 is temporarily stopped because the "ending stage" is temporarily continued even when the advantageous section ends due to the limit process and the situation such as the pushing order is not notified (normal section). In such an "ending stage" of the non-advantageous section, it is preferable to make the player different from the "ending stage" in the advantageous section so as to clearly indicate to the player that the machine is not a malfunction. In addition, the sub-control board 72, in the "ending stage" of the non-advantageous section, a bonus combination is won in a game in which a bonus combination can be won (a game in which a winning combination of a bonus combination such as replay is not won). It is also possible to notify the player of the situation in an easy-to-understand manner by notifying that the situation is urgent, or that the "ending stage" has ended after the bonus has ended and the instruction function has ended. Further, if the advantageous section ends during the bonus operation due to the limit processing, or if there is a high possibility that the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation, the sub-control board 72 is different from that during other bonus operations. The effect (for example, an effect of celebrating a large number of acquisitions or an effect including some advantageous information such as setting suggestion information) may be performed at the start, the operation, or the end of the bonus.

In addition, when the advantageous section ends, the main control board 71 performs a game operation (for example, a medal insertion operation for the next game or an automatic re-insertion operation by a re-game operation for a predetermined time after the stop of all reels). It is also possible to perform freeze processing at the end of the advantageous section that does not accept (for example). At this time, the sub-control board 72 uses the freeze time at the end of the advantageous section to display information on the advantageous section such as the number of medals, the number of games played, or the number of sets acquired during the advantageous section. It is also possible to display, and it is also possible to display the sticking-in prevention display in accordance with these. Further, as described above, when the end of the advantageous section due to the limit processing occurs during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 causes a freeze at the end of the advantageous section due to the limit processing so as not to obstruct the digestion of the bonus. Instead, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section may be performed at the end of the bonus. It should be noted that, regardless of the end of the advantageous section, a predetermined time is set at the end of the bonus for the purpose of securing a display time for displaying information about the advantageous section such as the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section at the end of the bonus. If the freeze of the advantageous section occurs during the bonus operation, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section is not performed at the end of the advantageous section or at the end of the bonus, and the main control board 71 It is also possible that only the freeze at the end of the bonus is performed at the end of the bonus, and during the freeze at the end of the bonus, the sub-control board 72 displays information regarding the advantageous section, a depressing prevention display, and the like. It is possible to prevent the tempo of the game from becoming worse by suppressing the occurrence of a plurality of game delays due to freezes. The contents described so far may be applied even when the advantageous section ends during the bonus operation by the limit process of another example described later, and the specification designer may change the above depending on the type of the limiter to be activated. Whether the process is applied or not applied can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the flow of the effect.

(Variable limiter)
Up to this point, the conditions for executing the limit process for ending the advantageous period have been described on the premise that the limit process execution condition is constant, for example, 1500 G has been reached after the advantageous period was started. However, the execution condition of the limit processing by the main control board 71 does not necessarily have to be constant, and if the advantageous section is not continued beyond at least the upper limit value (for example, 1500 G from the start of the advantageous section), the excessive gambling property is sufficiently high. The effect of suppressing can be exhibited. Therefore, when the first counter (the number of consumed games) satisfies a predetermined ending condition, the main control board 71 sets the advantageous section before the first counter (the number of consumed games) exceeds the upper limit value. It is also possible to perform limit processing to be ended.

For example, in a pachi-slot of a set number management type in which "ART" is fixed at 50 G per set, a timing that is halfway to the number of games in one set (due to the period of the "normal advantage section" or the bonus in "ART" ( For example, the “ART” of the current set may end when the remaining upper limit value is 20 G (1480 G). In such a case, the entire "ART" of the next set cannot be performed (50G), and the limit process is performed during the set. Even if the "ART" of the next set is started, if it is forcibly ended immediately, the player may feel dissatisfied. Therefore, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing of the advantageous section at the end of the “ART” of the current set, which has a good break, even before the upper limit is reached. As a result, the advantageous section (“ART”) is surely ended at a timing with a good break, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player feels dissatisfied.

In addition, depending on the pachi-slot, it may be possible to perform a predetermined ending control when performing the limit processing, so a case of performing such ending control will also be described. For example, in a pachi-slot of a set number management type in which "ART" is fixed at 50 G per set, the total value of the number of completed games and the number of remaining games from the start of the advantageous section is in the range of 1400 to 1450 G (the predetermined end condition is satisfied). When the setting range) is reached, the main control board 71 sets an advantageous section (“ART”) of 50 G as one set for ending regardless of the number of remaining undigested sets, and the one set for ending is set. The limit process may be executed when the predetermined end condition is satisfied when the end is completed, and the advantageous section may be ended. That is, the limit process is reserved at the time of 1400 to 1450G from the start of the advantageous section and is executed at 1450 to 1500G. By allowing the execution timing of the limit processing to have a certain range in this way, it is possible to appropriately suppress gambling while preventing the advantageous section from ending at an unnatural timing and making the player feel uncomfortable. .. Also, even if the number of games per "ART" set is fixed, the timing of deciding one set for ending is due to the addition of bonuses and the addition of specialization states that are different from the basic set Since the number of games is not exactly 1400, which is a multiple of 50, it is preferable that a predetermined end condition setting range (a period during which limit processing can be reserved) be wide.

Note that, as will be described later, the limit process can be performed not only on the number of games but also on the basis of the number of medals obtained by the player during the advantageous section and the number of times the navigation occurs (number limiter, payout number limiter described later, Navi count limiter). The above description of the variable limiter can be applied regardless of the type of limit processing. That is, the main control board 71 does not limit the execution timing of the limit process not only when the limit process activation counters (game number counter, payout number counter, navigation number counter, etc.) reach the limiter activation threshold value (upper limit value). If a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the limit process may be performed before the limiter activation threshold is reached. Note that the predetermined end condition is arbitrary, but as an example, if the "ART" of the set number management type starts the "ART" of the next set, the limiter is activated during the "ART" of the next set. It is possible to adopt that it is predicted that it will happen (in Pachi-slot, since the increase amount of medals per game in "ART" and the winning probability of each role can be grasped from the design specifications Even if a number limiter, a payout number limiter or a navigation number limiter described later is used, it is possible to predict that the limiter will be activated during the "ART" of the next set).

The technical ideas regarding this point are summarized as follows.
The second numerical value (remaining number of games that can continue the advantageous period, difference number, number of times of navigation) that indicates the remaining period in which the specific game state (advantageous period) can be continued is set as the end threshold (0 games remaining, 0 sheets, 0 times) When it reaches, the specific game state is ended, and at least the first numerical value (the number of completed games, etc.) counted by the counting means is a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section 1500 game digestion in which limit processing is executed). Alternatively, as in the modified example, when the width of the execution timing of the limit process is allowed, if the set number of games from 1450 to 1500 is reached), the value of the second numerical value is the end value. Specific state ending means (main control board 71) for ending the specific game state even when the threshold value is not reached.
Note that the specific state ending means collectively describes both the process of ending the advantageous period based on the fact that the right of the advantageous period such as “ART” has become zero, and the case of ending the advantageous period by the limit process. The program may be provided as another process.

In the present embodiment, in the lottery using the various data tables described above (including those not shown) (including lottery not particularly described as the lottery using the table), the random number circuit 110 is used. The random number registers 2 to 7 sequentially subtract random number values for random determination (random number values for production) extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 255) by the specified random number value, and the result of the subtraction is negative. Internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not (whether a so-called “carry” has occurred). That is, the lottery value is subtracted from the random number for lottery to determine winning/non-winning.However, the lottery method is not limited to this, and the lottery value is added to the extracted random number for random determination, and the addition result is It may be determined whether or not the number exceeds 256 (whether or not a so-called “overflow” has occurred), and the winning/non-winning may be determined.

<Notification function by main control>
In the conventional pachi-slot, the sub-(sub-control board 72) side determines whether or not to inform the player of advantageous stop operation information (pushing order, etc.). However, since the presence or absence of this notification affects the profit of the player (so-called payout), in recent years, the main (main control board 71) side that manages the profit of the player is required to control. .. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the information display 6 controlled on the main side is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying the information of the stop operation, and by the control on the main side, A function of notifying (instructing) information of the reel stop operation is provided.

Here, in FIG. 45, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the correspondence relationship between each game state controlled on the main side, the internal winning combination, and the navigation data is shown. The navigation data “1” to “6” shown in FIG. 45 represent the numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor and the content of notification of the stop operation information. Further, the navigation data “0” shown in FIG. 45 indicates that the information of the stop operation is not notified. Further, in FIG. 45, only the push order small combination and the push order replay are described. However, for internal winning combinations other than the push order small combination and the push order replay, the navigation data is basically “0”.

In each gaming state of the non-advantageous section, no matter which internal winning combination shown in FIG. 45 is determined, the navigation data “0” is set and the information of the stop operation is not notified. Note that when the navigation data “0” is set, in the present embodiment, no numerical value is displayed on the instruction monitor, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a numerical value “0” is displayed on the instruction monitor. You may do it. Further, when the navigation data “0” is set, in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to this is not transmitted to the sub side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to this is transmitted to the sub side. You may do so.

When the internal winning combination of either "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_middle left bell 1" is decided in the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state of the normal advantageous section, the navigation data "1" is set. It The navigation data “1” corresponds to “bat order 1”. If the internal winning combination of either "F_upper left bell 2" or "F_middle left bell 2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set. The navigation data “2” corresponds to “bat order 2”.

Further, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper middle bell 1", "F_middle bell 1" and "F_lower middle bell 1" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set. The navigation data "3" corresponds to "bat order 3". Further, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper middle bell 2", "F_middle bell 2", and "F_lower middle bell 2" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set. The navigation data "4" corresponds to "bat order 4".

Also, "F_upper right left bell 1", "F_upper right left bell 2", "F_middle right left bell 1", "F_middle right left bell 2", "F_lower right right bell 1", and "F_lower right left bell 2". If the internal winning combination of any of the above is determined, the navigation data “5” is set. The navigation data "5" corresponds to "bat order 5". Also, “F_upper right middle bell 1”, “F_upper right middle bell 2”, “F_middle right middle bell 1”, “F_middle right middle bell 2”, “F_lower right middle bell 1”, and “F_ When the internal winning combination of any one of the lower right bell 2" and the internal winning combination of any of the above is determined, the navigation data "6" is set. The navigation data "6" corresponds to "bat order 6".

In the present embodiment, for example, in the case where an internal winning combination of either “F_upper left bell 1” or “F_upper left bell 2” is determined, if “batt order 1” or “batt order 2”, Since the push order is correct, the navigation data can be common navigation data. However, in the present embodiment, due to the structure of the internal winning combination, the push order small combination, which can originally set a maximum of 6 choices of the pushing order, is set as the four-choice pressing order. In order not to feel uncomfortable, the navigation data “1” is set when the internal winning combination of “F_upper left bell 1” is determined, and the internal winning combination of “F_upper left bell 2” is determined. In this case, the navigation data “2” is set. The same applies to other push-order small roles.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state of the normal advantageous section, when any internal winning combination of the push order replay is determined, the navigation data “0” is set. That is, in the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state of the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order replay is not performed. In addition, in the bonus state of the normal advantageous section, if any internal winning combination of the pushing order small combination is determined, the navigation data “0” is set. That is, in the bonus state of the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small win is not performed.

In each gaming state of the advantageous section, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 replay 1" or "F_RT1 replay 1" is determined, the navigation data "1" is set. The navigation data “1” corresponds to “bat order 1”. In addition, when the internal winning combination of "Replay 1 in F_RT2" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "1" is set by lottery (1/2 probability), the navigation data " 1” is set. The mode in which the navigation data “1” is set in the small push order combination (non-bonus state and state between flags) is the same as in the normal advantage section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_1" is determined, the navigation data "1" is set.

If the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 replay 2" or "F_RT1 replay 2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set. The navigation data “2” corresponds to “bat order 2”. Also, when the internal winning combination of "Replay 1 in F_RT2" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "2" is set by the lottery (1/2 probability), the navigation data " 2” is set. The mode in which the navigation data “2” is set in the small push order combination (non-winning bonus state and state between flags) is the same as that in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 replay 3" or "F_RT1 replay 3" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set. The navigation data "3" corresponds to "bat order 3". In addition, when the internal winning combination of “Replay 2 in F_RT2” is determined and it is determined that the navigation data “3” is set by lottery (1/2 probability), the navigation data “ 3” is set. The mode in which the navigation data “3” is set in the small push order combination (non-winning bonus state and state between flags) is the same as that in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_3" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set.

If the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 replay 4" or "F_RT1 replay 4" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set. The navigation data "4" corresponds to "bat order 4". In addition, when the internal winning combination of “F_RT2 replay 2” is determined and it is determined that the navigation data “4” is set by lottery (1/2 probability), the navigation data “ 4” is set. The mode in which the navigation data “4” is set in the small push order combination (non-winning bonus state and state between flags) is the same as that in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_4" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set.

When the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 replay 5" or "F_RT1 replay 5" is determined, the navigation data "5" is set. The navigation data "5" corresponds to "bat order 5". In addition, when the internal winning combination of “F_RT2 Replay 3” is determined and it is determined that the navigation data “5” is set by the lottery (1/2 probability), the navigation data “ 5” is set. The mode in which the navigation data “5” is set in the small push order combination (non-winning bonus state and inter-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantage section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_5" is determined, the navigation data "5" is set.

If the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 replay 6" or "F_RT1 replay 6" is determined, the navigation data "6" is set. The navigation data "6" corresponds to "bat order 6". In addition, when the internal winning combination of “F_RT2 replay 3” is determined and it is determined that the navigation data “6” is set by lottery (1/2 probability), the navigation data “ 6” is set. The mode in which the navigation data “6” is set in the small push order combination (non-winning bonus state and inter-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantage section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_6" is determined, the navigation data "6" is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main (main control board 71) side notifies the information of the reel stop operation by displaying the numerical values of “1” to “6” on the instruction monitor. Further, the numerical values of "1" to "6" displayed on the instruction monitor uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each.

Although the numbers "1" to "6" notified on the main side (instruction monitor) uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation to be notified, all the players are clear based on the values. It is not always possible to understand the content of the notification. For example, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to comprehend the content of the notification just by displaying the numerical value "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the notification on the main side, information on the stop operation of the stop button is also notified on the sub side. Specifically, the display device 11 (the projector mechanism 211 and the display unit 212) controlled by the sub side is used to notify the information of the stop operation by the control of the sub side.

For example, when notifying the pressing order "middle, left, right" (stroke order 3), the numerical value "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side and the middle reel 3C in the display screen of the display device 11 on the sub side. The numerical value "1" is displayed above, the numerical value "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L, and the numerical value "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R. By this display, the pushing order is "middle, left, Notify that the order is "right".

The timing of notification on the main side can be set to any timing as long as it is at least one game period for notification. For example, the main side may be notified at the timing when the player's start operation is detected (accepted), the main side may be notified when the reel starts rotating, or the first stop operation to the third stop operation. The main side may be notified at the timing of detecting any one of the stop operations. On the other hand, it is preferable that the timing at which the notification is given on the sub side is at least a timing before the first stop operation. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in the game of notifying the information of the stop operation during the advantageous section, after the internal lottery process (see S204 of FIG. 56 described later), the reel stop control process (FIG. 56 described later). Before S213) is started, a command including this navigation data (or information corresponding thereto) as a parameter is transmitted from the main (main control board 71) side to the sub (sub control board 72) side. You can do this. In this case, an existing command (for example, a start command or a reel rotation start command) may include a parameter of navigation data (or information corresponding thereto), or the navigation data (or equivalent information) may be included. Information) to send a dedicated command. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the information of the stop operation on both the main-side instruction monitor and the sub-side display device 11.

Further, as another method, in the game in which the information of the stop operation in the advantageous section is notified, as described above, the winning combination number may be transmitted from the main side to the sub side as the information for identifying the internal winning combination. Good. According to this method, the sub side can specify the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player without sending information corresponding to the navigation data, so that the amount of data to be transmitted can be reduced.

<Description of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 90 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 84.

[Process at power-on (reset interrupt)]
First, the power-on (reset interrupt) process of the pachi-slot 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing at power-on (reset interrupt). In the power-on (reset interrupt) process shown in FIG. 46, when the power management circuit 93 detects that the supply of the power supply voltage to the microprocessor 91 is started, a reset signal is sent to the microprocessor 91. The signal is output to the "XSRST" terminal, the delay operation is performed in the security mode, and then the interrupt request signal output from the interrupt controller 112 of the microprocessor 91 to the main CPU 101 is executed.

First, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of the timer circuit 113 (PTC) (S1). In this process, the main CPU 101 initializes the timer circuit 113. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets a dividing ratio in a timer prescaler register (not shown), sets interrupts in a timer control register (not shown), and sets a timer counter (not shown). Set the initial count value.

Next, the main CPU 101 initializes the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1) for the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200, and the second serial communication circuit 115 (SCU2) for the second interface board. Initialization processing is performed (S2). Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of the random number circuit 110 (RDG) (S3). Next, the main CPU 101 conducts a write test of the main RAM 103 (S4).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the writing to the main RAM 103 has been normally performed as a result of the writing test (S5).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S5 that the writing to the main RAM 103 was not normally performed (NO in S5), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S5 that the writing to the main RAM 103 is normally performed (YES in S5), the main CPU 101 determines the state of the timer control register (not shown) of the timer circuit 113. Is acquired (S6).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the timing at which interrupt processing occurs based on the obtained state of the timer control register (S7). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines, based on the acquired state of the timer control register, whether or not 1.1172 ms has elapsed after the timer count was started.

In the present embodiment, when the timer time of 1.1172 ms is set by the initialization process of the timer circuit 113 in S2, the count process of the CPU built-in timer is started. After that, the status of the timer circuit 113 can be obtained by reading the information in the timer control register (not shown). In the present embodiment, the timer control register is provided with a bit (discrimination bit) capable of discriminating (reference) whether or not the current state is the timing at which interrupt processing occurs (whether or not the timer is in the interrupt state). ) Is provided.

Therefore, in the process of S6, the main CPU 101 reads the information of the timer control register (not shown), and in the process of S7, the main CPU 101 turns the discrimination bit in the timer control register on/off ( By referring to "1"/"0"), it is determined whether or not the current state is the interrupt processing generation timing. When 1.1172 ms have elapsed since the timer circuit 113 started counting (when the count value of the timer circuit 113 is 0), the determination bit is turned on.

In S7, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is not the timing at which the interrupt process occurs (NO in S7), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S6 and repeats the processes of S6 and subsequent steps.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S7 that the current state is the timing at which the interrupt process occurs (YES in S7), the main CPU 101 sets the command transmission start timer (S8). The command transmission start timer is a timer for managing a startup delay period (see FIG. 85 described later) which will be described later, and the main control circuit 90 (when the command transmission start timer is set to 0) is set. Command data is not transmitted from the main control board 71) to the sub control circuit 200 (sub control board 72) (see FIG. 80 described later). As a result, when the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on, the time required for the activation control of the sub CPU 201 (time until the command can be received) is secured. That is, by setting the command transmission start timer, the transmission of communication data (command data) by the communication data transmission process is delayed for a period corresponding thereto. In the present embodiment, in S8, "21801" (21801 x 1.1172 ms = about 24.3561 seconds) is set as the value of the command transmission start timer. However, the value of the command transmission start timer can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the sub control circuit 200 mounted at the same time.

The command transmission start timer is a software timer allocated in 2 bytes in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103, and is arranged at an address that is not erased by the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum check process (out of regulation) (S9). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the sum check process of the main RAM 103, and the work of this process is performed in the non-regular work area (see FIG. 11C) in the main RAM 103. The program used in the sum check process is stored in the non-regulated area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 11B). The details of the sum check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55 described later.

After the processing of S9, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (S10).

In S10, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (YES in S10), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S15 described below. On the other hand, in S10, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the ON state (NO in S10), the main CPU 101 determines the sum check determination based on the result of the sum check process in S9. It is determined whether or not the result is normal (S11).

In S11, when the main CPU 101 determines that the sum check determination result is not normal (when S11 is NO determination), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described below. On the other hand, in S11, when the main CPU 101 determines that the sum check determination result is normal (YES in S11), the main CPU 101 performs game return processing (S12). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of returning the game state to the state before the detection of the power failure. The details of the game return processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 47 described later.

If NO is determined in S5 or S11, the main CPU 101 displays the character string "88" meaning an error occurrence on the information display 6 (7-segment LED display) (S13). After that, the main CPU 101 repeats the WDT clearing process (S14).

Here, returning to the process of S10 again, when the determination of S10 is YES, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change confirmation process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of generating and storing a setting change command at the start of setting change. The details of the setting change confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address of "at the time of RAM abnormality or setting change start" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. The information up to the final address in the RAM area for use is erased (cleared). Then, after the processing of S16, the main CPU 101 starts the main processing described later (see FIG. 56 described later).

[Game return processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the game return processing performed in S12 during the power-on (reset interrupt) processing (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game return processing.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the stack pointer at the time of power failure in the stack pointer (SP) (S21). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the command transmission start timer has counted up (S22). In S22, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer is not counting up (when S22 is NO determination), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S22.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the command transmission start timer has counted up (in the case of YES determination in S22), the main CPU 101 determines the on-edge data before the interrupt processing of the input port and the current The set on-edge data is cleared (turned off) (S23). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the backup data of the output port from the output port backup storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 and sets it in the output port (S24). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data of the input port, and saves the data in the data storage area (input port storage area 1 and input port storage area 2) of the current input port and before the interrupt processing (S25). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the drum control data storage area (S26). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of reels to be checked (“3” in this embodiment) (S27).

Next, the main CPU 101 obtains reel control management information (data relating to fluctuation control of the display row at the time of power interruption) of a predetermined reel based on the address of the set spinning drum control data storage area (S28). The reel control management information (variation control management information on the display row) is information regarding the control state (rotational state) of each reel, and is backed up and saved when the power is cut off.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel control management information is information corresponding to the rotation state during reel acceleration, constant speed waiting, or constant speed (S29).

In S29, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition of S29 is not satisfied (NO in S29), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S32 described below. On the other hand, in S29, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition of S29 is satisfied (YES in S29), the main CPU 101 clears the spinning cylinder control data (reel control management information) (S30). By this processing, after the game is returned, the reel rotation control is started from the acceleration processing. Next, the main CPU 101 sets a reel operation timing value (execution start timing “1” of the spinning cylinder control data) (S31). When the reel operation timing is set to "1", the excitation change timing comes within the reel control processing (see S903 in FIG. 79 described later), so the main CPU 101 accelerates the reel rotation control. Start from.

After the processing of S31 or when the determination of S29 is NO, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reels (S32). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the number of reels after subtraction is “0” (S33).

In S33, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of reels after subtraction is not “0” (NO in S33), the main CPU 101 changes the reel to be checked and shifts the processing to S28. The process is returned, and the processes from S28 are repeated.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S33 that the value of the number of reels after subtraction is "0" (YES in S33), the main CPU 101 performs the RAM initialization process (S34). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at power recovery" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and from the start address to the end of the game RAM area. Erase (clear) the information up to the address.

Next, the main CPU 101 restores the data of all the registers saved at the time of the power failure detection to all the registers (S35). Then, after the processing of S35, the main CPU 101 ends the game return processing, and returns the processing to the processing at the time of power failure detection.

In the present embodiment, the game return processing is performed as described above. In the game return processing of the present embodiment, as described above, the input/output state of each port at the time of power failure is secured at the time of power recovery, and if the reel is rotating at the time of power failure, reel control management at power recovery The processing required to acquire the information and start the re-rotation of the reel is also performed (see the processing of S26 to S33). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reel re-rotation control can be stably performed even when the power is restored from the power interruption during the rotation of the spinning drum, and the player does not feel uncomfortable.

[Setting change confirmation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the setting change confirmation process performed in S15 during the power-on (reset interrupt) process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting change confirmation process. In addition, when the setting key type switch 54 is turned on after the power of the gaming machine is turned on (that is, in the case of “setting confirmation” for confirming the current setting value), this setting change confirmation is performed from S44 described later. The processing may be started.

First, the main CPU 101 initializes the non-regular RAM area in the main RAM 103 (S41). Next, the main CPU 101 executes one interrupt waiting process (S42). In this process, when the command transmission start timer is counting up, the non-operation command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process (see FIG. 80) described later. If the command transmission start timer is not counting up, neither command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. Therefore, if the command transmission starting timer is not counting up, this process should be omitted. May be.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S43). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address of "at the time of RAM abnormality or setting change start" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of initialization start, and the game is started from the start address. The information up to the final address in the RAM area for use is erased (cleared).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (S44). A setting key (not shown) inserted into the setting key type switch 54 is an operation key for setting the set values (settings 1 to 6) of the pachi-slot 1, and when the setting key is turned on, the setting key is set. The key type switch 54 is turned on.

In S44, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the ON state (NO in S44), the main CPU 101 terminates the setting change confirmation process and powers on the process (reset interrupt). ) Step S16 of the time processing (see FIG. 46) is performed. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S44 that the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (YES in S44), the main CPU 101 performs the medal acceptance prohibition process (S45). By this processing, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven, and the inserted medal is ejected from the medal payout opening 24 (see FIG. 2).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets information (005H: first value) of the setting change start or the setting confirmation start in the L register, and performs the generation/storing process of the setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation start) (S46). .. In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates setting change command data (first command data) transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 at the start of the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, and outputs the command data. It is saved in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the setting change command generation/storing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 described later. Further, the setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation start) stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the error count relay to the ON state (S47). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment display setting process of the set value (S48). By this processing, the current set value can be displayed on the 7-segment LED in the information display 6.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines which of the setting change and the setting confirmation has been performed (S49). When the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the setting has not been changed (the setting has been confirmed) (NO in S49), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S54 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the setting has been changed (the setting has not been confirmed) (YES in S49), the main CPU 101 determines whether the reset switch 76 is in the ON state. It is determined whether or not (S50).

In S50, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reset switch 76 is in the ON state (YES in S50), the main CPU 101 updates the set value (S51). That is, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the set value within the range of “1” to “6” each time the reset switch 76 is operated. After the processing of S51, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S48 and repeats the processing of S48 and thereafter. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S50 that the reset switch 76 is not in the ON state (NO in S50), the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 79 is in the ON state (S52). ..

In S52, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 79 is not in the ON state (NO in S52), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S48 and repeats the processes from S48. On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 79 is in the ON state (YES in S52), the main CPU 101 sets the setting value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The value is stored (S53).

When the determination in S49 is NO or after the processing in S53, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the off state (S54).

In S54, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the OFF state (NO in S54), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S54. On the other hand, in S54, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the OFF state (YES in S54), the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change or the setting confirmation is performed. Is determined (S55).

In S55, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has not been changed (the setting has been confirmed) (NO in S55), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S57 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S55 that the setting has been changed (the setting has not been confirmed) (YES in S55), the main CPU 101 performs the RAM initialization process (S56). .. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets an address (at the end of setting change storage) (not shown) in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. The information from the top address to the last address of the game RAM area is erased (cleared).

After the processing of S56 or when the determination of S55 is NO, the main CPU 101 sets information (004H: second value) of the setting change end or the setting confirmation end in the L register, and the setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation end). ) Is generated and stored (S57). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates setting change command data (second command data) transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 at the end of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, and outputs the command data. It is saved in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the setting change command generation/storing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 described later. Further, the setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation end) stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S57, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change confirmation processing, and moves the processing to the processing of S16 of the power-on (reset interrupt) processing (see FIG. 46).

[Setting change command generation and storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the setting change command generation/storing process performed in S46 and S57 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. Note that FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting change command generation/storage process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets information of set values (1 to 6) in the E register (S61). Next, the main CPU 101 sets RT state information in the C register (S62). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the command type information (02H) of the setting change command in the A register (S63).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs communication data storage processing (S64). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the information set in each register in S61 to S63 and the information set in the L register in S46 or S58 (see FIG. 48) (setting change start/setting change end/setting change status/ Setting confirmation start/setting confirmation end) is used to generate setting change command data, and the generated command data is stored in the communication data storage area. The details of the communication data storage processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S64, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change command generation/storage processing. When ending the setting change command generation/storing process performed in S46 of the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48), the main CPU 101 executes the process of the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) after the process of S64. The process moves to S47. Further, when ending the setting change command generation/storing process performed in S57 during the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48), the main CPU 101 terminates the setting change command generation/storing process after the process of S64 and sets the settings. The change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) also ends.

[Communication data storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, for example, the communication data storage processing performed in S64 of the setting change command generation storage processing (see FIG. 49) will be described. The communication data storage process is executed not only when the setting change command is generated, but also when another command is generated. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of communication data storage processing.

First, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the A register as communication command type data in a communication data temporary storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S71). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the H register and the L register in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 as parameters 1 and 2 of the communication command, respectively (S72).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the D register and the E register in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 as the parameters 3 and 4 of the communication command, respectively (S73). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the B register and the C register in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 as the parameter 5 and the RT state data of the communication command, respectively (S74).

Next, the main CPU 101 generates BCC data (sum value) of the communication command from the data values set in the A register to the L register (S75). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the generated BCC data in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 (S76).

After the processing of S76, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a free space in the communication data storage area in the main RAM 103 (S77). In this embodiment, a maximum of 9 command data can be stored in the communication data storage area.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S77 that there is no free space in the communication data storage area (NO in S77), the main CPU 101 terminates the communication data storage processing, and, for example, the setting change command generation storage processing ( (See FIG. 49) also ends.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S77 that there is a free space in the communication data storage area (YES in S77), the main CPU 101 is stored in the communication data temporary storage area by the above-described processing of S71 to S76. The respective data are stored (registered) in the communication data storage area as communication data (command data) (S78).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes communication data pointer update processing (S79). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of updating the communication data pointer indicating the storage address of the communication data in the communication data storage area. The details of the communication data pointer update processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 51 described later.

Then, after the processing of S79, the main CPU 101 terminates the communication data storage processing, and also terminates the setting change command generation storage processing (see FIG. 49), for example.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when one packet (8 bytes) of communication data (command data) is created, various parameters are transferred from the register and stored in the communication data temporary storage area (communication buffer). In such a method of creating command data, the data stored in each register at the time of command generation is stored as it is in the communication data temporary storage area as various parameters of the command data. Therefore, when the command data including the unused parameter is created, the value of the unused parameter becomes an undefined value every time it is created. This makes it difficult to analyze the communication data and suppress fraudulent acts such as goto, and since it is not necessary to add unnecessary goto countermeasure processing, the program of the main control circuit 90 by adding the goto countermeasure processing is not necessary. It is possible to suppress pressure on the capacity.

[Communication data pointer update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the communication data pointer updating process performed in S79 in the communication data storing process (see FIG. 50) will be described. Note that FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the communication data pointer update processing.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the communication data pointer currently set (S81).

Next, the main CPU 101 adds and updates the value of the communication data pointer for one packet (8 bytes) (S82). In this process, if the value of the updated communication data pointer is equal to or larger than the upper limit size of the communication data storage area, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the updated communication data pointer to "0", As a result, all command data stored in the communication data storage area is invalidated (the same state as the discarded state).

In this embodiment, the amount of data (one packet) transmitted in one transmission operation is 8 bytes. That is, in this embodiment, one command data can be transmitted by one transmission operation. Further, in the present embodiment, since a maximum of 9 command data can be stored in the communication data storage area, the upper limit size of the communication data storage area is 72 bytes (=8 bytes×9). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the range of the communication data pointer is set to “0” to “71”, and the value of the communication data pointer after updating (when the communication data pointer is updated by +8) is “71 ( Upper limit value)”, set the value of the updated communication data pointer to “0” (return the communication data storage address to the start address) and store the communication data. Invalidates all command data stored in the area (sets the same state as the discarded state). If the value of the communication data pointer is set to "0", the next time command data is stored in the communication data storage area, it will be stored from the start address of the communication data storage area. The new command data will be overwritten by the new command data. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to initialize (clear) the communication data storage area when the value of the communication data pointer exceeds "71 (upper limit value)".

Then, after the processing of S82, the main CPU 101 finishes the communication data pointer updating processing and also finishes the communication data storing processing (see FIG. 50).

[Disconnect (external) processing]
Next, the power-off (external) processing of the pachi-slot 1 performed by the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process at the time of power failure (external). In the power interruption (external) process shown in FIG. 52, when the power management circuit 93 detects a decrease (power interruption) in the power supply voltage supplied to the microprocessor 91, a power interruption detection signal is sent to the microprocessor 91. Is output to the "XINT" terminal of the microprocessor 91, whereby the interrupt request signal output from the interrupt controller 112 of the microprocessor 91 to the main CPU 101 is executed.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the data set in all the registers (S91). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data set in the power failure detection port (S92).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection port is on (S93).

In S93, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection port is not in the ON state (NO in S93), the main CPU 101 sets the interrupt process permission (S94). Then, after the processing of S94, the main CPU 101 ends the power-off (external) processing. Note that these processes performed when S93 is NO determination correspond to the process of the countermeasure against the instantaneous blackout that occurs when the power management circuit 93 momentarily detects the power interruption.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S93 that the power failure detection port is in the ON state (YES in S93), the main CPU 101 sets the medal insertion disabled and the hopper device 51 to stop. (S95).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the currently set stack pointer (SP) value in the stack area of the game RAM area in the main RAM 103 (S96).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a checksum generation process for the main RAM 103 (S97). It should be noted that this process is performed in the non-regular work area (see FIG. 11C) in the main RAM 103. The program used in this checksum generation process is stored in the non-regulated area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 11B). The details of the checksum generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets access prohibition to the main RAM 103 (S98). Then, after the processing of S98, the infinite loop processing is performed until the power supply is stopped (the power supply voltage reaches a voltage at which the main CPU 101 cannot operate).

[Checksum generation processing (non-standard)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the checksum generation process performed in S97 during the power interruption (external) process (see FIG. 52) will be described. Note that FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum generation process.

First, the main CPU 101 stores the current value of the stack pointer (SP) (in-use address of the stack area of the game RAM area) in the non-specified stack area of the non-specified RAM area of the main RAM 103 (S101). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the non-specified stack area in the stack pointer (S102). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the upper address value (F0H) of the RAM address (address of the non-standard stack area) in the Q register (S103). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the power failure occurrence flag (S104).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the stack pointer to the calculation start address of the sum value in the game RAM area, and sets the sum calculation counter to the value obtained by dividing the number of bytes in the sum value calculation target storage area by “2”. Set (S105). The sum calculation counter is a counter for determining the trigger for ending the sum value calculation, and is provided in the main RAM 103. Then, when the sum calculation counter set in S105 becomes "0", the sum value calculation process of the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 ends.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the HL register to 0 (sets the value "0") (S106). By this processing, the initial value "0" of the sum value is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes an instruction code called a "POP instruction", and stores the data (saved value) of 2 bytes in the DE register from the address of the storage area of the main RAM 103 set in the stack pointer (SP). Read out (S107).

When the "POP" instruction is executed, the data (memory contents) saved in the 1-byte area of the address specified by the stack pointer is loaded into the lower register of the pair register and specified by the stack pointer. The data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the address obtained by updating the created address by 1 is loaded into the register on the upper side of the pair register. When the "POP" instruction is executed, an address update process (process of adding "2" to the address) for 2 bytes is performed on the address set in the stack pointer (SP).

Therefore, in the process of S107, the data (memory content) saved at the address designated by the stack pointer is loaded into the E register and is saved at the address obtained by adding "1" to the address designated by the stack pointer. Data (memory contents) being loaded into the D register.

After the process of S107, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation process (S108). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the value stored in the DE register to the value stored in the HL register, and stores the added value as a sum value in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S109). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S110).

In S110, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not “0” (NO in S110), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S107 and repeats the processes of S107 and subsequent steps. That is, the processes of S107 to S110 are repeated until the sum value calculation process of the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 is completed.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S110 that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (YES in S110), the main CPU 101 sets the DE register in the non-specified RAM area in the main RAM 103. The calculation start address of the sum value is set, and the non-standard sum count value is set in the sum calculation counter (S111). The non-prescribed sum count value is the number of bytes in the non-prescribed storage area. Therefore, when the sum calculation counter set in S111 becomes “0”, the sum value calculation process of the non-specified RAM area of the main RAM 103, that is, the sum value calculation process of the entire main RAM 103 ends.

Next, the main CPU 101 reads data of 1 byte area (saved value) from the address of the non-regular RAM area set in the DE register to the A register (S112).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation process (S113). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the value stored in the A register to the value stored in the HL register, and stores the added value in the HL register as a sum value.

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address stored in the DE register and subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S114). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S115).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S115 that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (NO in S115), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S112 and repeats the processes of S112 and thereafter. That is, the processes of S112 to S115 are repeated until the process of adding the sum value of the non-regulated RAM area of the main RAM 103 to the sum value of the game RAM area is completed.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S115 that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (YES in S115), the main CPU 101 determines that the value stored in the HL register is in the event of power failure. The sum value is stored in a sum value storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S116). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the stack pointer (SP) saved in the non-standard stack area in S101 in the stack pointer (S117). Then, after the processing of S117, the main CPU 101 ends the checksum generation processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S98 of the power interruption (external) processing (see FIG. 52).

[Sum check processing (non-standard)]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, the sum check process performed in S9 of the power-on process (see FIG. 46) will be described. 54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the sum check process.

First, the main CPU 101 stores the current stack pointer (SP) value in the non-standard stack area (S121). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the stack pointer to the address of the sum value storage area, and sets the sum calculation counter to a value obtained by dividing the number of bytes of the sum value calculation target storage area by “2” (S122). The sum calculation counter that is set here is a counter for determining the end timing of sum value calculation (sum value subtraction processing), and is provided in the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a sum value (checksum) from the sum value storage area (S123). By this processing, the checksum (initial value before subtraction) generated when the power failure occurs is stored in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the “POP” instruction, and reads the data (saved value) of the 2-byte area from the address of the storage area of the main RAM 103 set in the stack pointer (SP) to the DE register (S124). .. At this time, by executing the "POP" instruction, the data (memory contents) saved in the 1-byte area of the address designated by the stack pointer is loaded into the E register and the address designated by the stack pointer is loaded. The data (memory content) stored in the 1-byte area of the 1-updated address is loaded into the D register. When the "POP" instruction is executed, an address update process (process of adding 2 to the address) for 2 bytes is performed on the address set in the stack pointer (SP).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation (subtraction) process (S125). Specifically, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value stored in the DE register from the value stored in the HL register (the initial sum value or the sum value after the previous subtraction processing), and the subtracted value is obtained. The value is stored in the HL register as a sum value.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S126). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S127).

In S127, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not “0” (NO in S127), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S124 and repeats the processes of S124 and subsequent steps. That is, the processing of S124 to S127 is repeated until the sum value subtraction processing is completed over the entire game RAM area of the main RAM 103.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S127 that the value of the sum calculation counter is “0” (YES in S127), the main CPU 101 sets the DE register in the non-specified RAM area in the main RAM 103. The calculation start address of the sum value is set, and the non-standard sum count value is set in the sum calculation counter (S128). The non-standard thumb count value is the number of bytes in the non-standard RAM area.

Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data (saved value) of the 1-byte area from the address of the non-regular RAM area set in the DE register to the A register (S129).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation (subtraction) process (S130). Specifically, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value stored in the A register from the value stored in the HL register, and stores the subtracted value in the HL register as a sum value.

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address stored in the DE register and subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S131). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S132).

In S132, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not “0” (NO in S132), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S129 and repeats the processes from S129. That is, the processes of S129 to S132 are repeated until the sum value subtraction process is completed over the entire non-regulated RAM area of the main RAM 103.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (YES in S132), the main CPU 101 sets "sum abnormality" in the determination result of the sum check process. Yes (S133). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the calculated sum value is "0" (S134).

In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the state (1/0) of the zero flag (bit 6) of the flag register F to determine whether or not the sum value is "0". In the present embodiment, the sum value is "0" at the time when the value of the sum calculation counter set in S128 becomes "0", that is, when the sum value subtraction process is completed over the entire main RAM 103. , The zero flag of the flag register F is set to "1", and when the sum value is not "0", the zero flag of the flag register F is set to "0". Therefore, at the time of the processing of S134, if "1 (on state)" is set in the zero flag of the flag register F, the main CPU 101 determines that the sum value is "0".

When the main CPU 101 determines in S134 that the calculated sum value is not “0” (NO in S134), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S139 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S134 that the calculated sum value is "0" (YES in S134), the main CPU 101 sets "abnormal power interruption" in the determination result (S135). ).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the power failure occurrence flag (S136). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure occurrence flag is a status without power failure (off state) (S137).

In S137, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure occurrence flag indicates that there is no power failure (YES in S137), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S139 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S137 that the power failure occurrence flag is not in the state of no power failure (NO in S137), the main CPU 101 sets “normal” in the determination result (S138).

After the processing of S138, if S134 is NO, or if S137 is YES, the main CPU 101 saves the determination result in the sum check determination result and clears (turns off) the power failure occurrence flag (S139). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the stack pointer (SP) stored in the non-standard stack area in S121 to the stack pointer (S140). Then, after the processing of S140, the main CPU 101 ends the sum check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S10 of the power-on processing (see FIG. 46).

[Main processing of pachi-slot by control of main CPU]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the main processing (main operation processing) of the pachi-slot 1 executed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described. Note that FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of main processing (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S201). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the end of one game" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and from the start address to the game RAM area. Erase (clear) the information up to the final address. The storage area in this range is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes medal acceptance/start check processing (S202). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an input check process for the medal sensors (see FIG. 5) and the start switch 79. The details of the medal acceptance/start check processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random value acquisition process (S203). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the random number value for the internal winning combination lottery (0 to 65535: the value of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes the hard latch random number) and the random number value for effect used in various lottery related to the game property ( 0-65535: the value of the random number register 1 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes the soft latch random number, 0-255: each value of the random number register 2-7 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes the soft latch random number), and the various extracted The random number value is stored in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the random value acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out an internal lottery process (S204). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an internal winning combination determination process by lottery based on the random number value (hard latch random number) extracted in S203. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 64 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol setting process (S205). In this process, the main CPU 101, for example, a process of generating an internal winning combination from the hit request flag status (flag status information), a process of expanding the hit request flag data, and a process of storing the hit request flag data in the hit request flag storage area. And so on. The details of the symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a start command generation/storage process (S206). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates start command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The start command is configured to include a parameter (a winning combination number or the like) for specifying an internal winning combination or the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a second interface board control process (S207). It should be noted that the second interface board control process is executed in the non-specified work area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for outputting a test signal related to the push-order navigation determined by the main control board 71 via the second interface for testing machine 302.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a game start state-based control process (S208). In this processing, the main CPU 101, at the time of starting the game, among the various controls in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, and each gaming state of the advantageous section described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44, Performs various processes for performing various controls that need to be performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes reel stop initialization processing (S209). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to a reel stop initial setting table (not shown), and acquires a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, and a stop table number based on the internal winning combination and the game state. And the process of storing "3" in the stop button non-operation counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes reel rotation start processing (S210). In this process, the main CPU 101 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the rotation start of all reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 79 to be described later) described later that is executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). The rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is controlled and started. Then, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed thereof reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes reel rotation start command generation/storage processing (S211). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates the data of the reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The reel rotation start command includes a parameter indicating that the reel rotation start operation has started.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S212). In this process, the main CPU 101 acquires the attraction-in priority data and stores it in the attraction-in priority data storage area. Details of the pull-in priority storage processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 67 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes reel stop control processing (S213). In this processing, the main CPU 101 controls the rotation stop of the corresponding reel based on the timing of pressing the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a winning search process (S214). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the data in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) in the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25). Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the activated line, and sets the payout number of medals based on the determination result. The details of the prize search processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes illegal hit check processing (S215). In this process, the main CPU 101 combines the winning request flag (internal winning combination) and the winning operation flag (display combination), and determines whether or not there is an illegal hit error based on the combined result. The details of the illegal hit check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 described later. Further, as long as each reel is stopped by the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 72 described later) without causing a wrong winning, the illegal hit check processing can be omitted from the viewpoint of reducing the control load.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a prize check/medal payout process (S216). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation command generation process. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 drives the hopper device 51 and updates the credit number based on the payout number of the display combination determined in S214, and performs the medal payout process. The details of the winning check/medal payout processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 75 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a BB check process (S217). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the operation and the end of the bonus state. The details of the BB check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs RT check processing (S218). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the transition of the RT state based on the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the activated line. The details of the RT check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a state-based control process at the end of the game (S219). In this processing, the main CPU 101, at the end of the game, among the various controls in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, and each gaming state of the advantageous section described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44. Performs various processes for performing various controls that need to be performed. After the processing of S219 (after the end of one game), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S201.

[Medal reception/start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58, the medal acceptance/start check processing performed in S202 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. 57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the procedure of medal acceptance/start check processing.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is “0” (whether or not there is an automatic insertion request) (S221). In this process, when the automatic insertion medal counter is “1” or more, the main CPU 101 determines that there is an automatic insertion request. The automatic insertion medal counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination relating to the replay (replay) has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination relating to the replay is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion medal counter.

In S221, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is “0” (YES in S221), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S225 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S221 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (NO in S221), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion process (S222). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation/storage process, an LED lighting control process for the number of inserted medals, and the like. The details of the medal insertion process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value of the automatic insertion medal counter (S223). In this process, the main CPU 101 may subtract the value of the automatic-insertion medal counter at once (for example, “3”) or may subtract by “1”. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the automatically inserted medal counter after subtraction is "0" (S224).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S224 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (NO in S224), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S222 and repeats the processes from S222.

On the other hand, in S224, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic-insertion medal counter is “0” (YES in S224) or in S221, the main CPU 101 determines that the medal auxiliary storage is being performed. Warehouse switch check processing is performed (S225). In this processing, the main CPU 101 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals based on the ON/OFF state of the medal auxiliary storage switch 75.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes medal insertion state check processing (S226). Next, the main CPU 101 determines, based on the result of the medal insertion state check processing, whether or not the medal can be inserted (S227).

In S227, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not in a state in which medals can be inserted (NO in S227), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S231 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S227 that the medal can be inserted (YES in S227), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion check process (S228). In this processing, the main CPU 101, for example, determines whether or not a medal has normally passed based on the medal sensor input state, and credits the medal when a specified number of medals have been inserted. Perform processing, etc. The details of the medal insertion check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted or credited based on the result of the medal insertion check process (S229).

In S229, when the main CPU 101 determines that a medal can be inserted or credit is possible (YES in S229), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S231 described below. On the other hand, in S229, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not in a state in which medals can be inserted or credited (NO in S229), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S230). By this processing, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is no longer driven (the excited solenoid is demagnetized), and the select plate 804 shifts from the guide position to the discharge position, so that the inserted medals are It will be discharged from the medal payout opening 24.

After the process of S230, if the determination of S227 is NO, or if the determination of S229 is YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current number of inserted medals is the game start number (S231). In this embodiment, the number of games that can be started is three regardless of the game state (that is, the game can be started only when three cards are inserted).

In S231, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current number of inserted medals is the playable start number (YES in S231), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S234 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S231 that the current number of inserted medals is not the playable start number (when the determination in S231 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not medals have been inserted (S232). ).

In S232, when the main CPU 101 determines that a medal has been inserted (YES in S232), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes from S226. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S232 that no medal has been inserted (NO in S232), the main CPU 101 performs the setting change confirmation process described in FIG. 48 (S233). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of generating and storing a setting change command at the start of setting confirmation. This allows setting values and hole menus (various history data (errors, interruption history, etc.)) to be confirmed regardless of whether the gaming state is the bonus state (special prize operation state) or not. It is possible to suppress cheating. It should be noted that in the setting change confirmation process performed in S233, even if the setting key type switch 54 is in the OFF state, the generation and storage process of the setting change command (setting confirmation start) including at least the information of the current setting value is performed. Alternatively, the command data may be stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Thereby, it may be possible to check whether or not the set value is appropriate (is within the range of the settings 1 to 6) for each game.

After the processing of S233 or when the determination of S231 is YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is in the ON state (S234).

In S234, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 79 is not in the ON state (NO in S234), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226, and repeats the processes from S226.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S234 that the start switch 79 is in the on state (YES in S234), the main CPU 101 performs the medal acceptance prohibition process (S235). By this processing, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is no longer driven (the excited solenoid is demagnetized), and the select plate 804 shifts from the guide position to the discharge position, so that the inserted medals are It will be discharged from the medal payout opening 24.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the medal monitoring timer to a timer value (“72” in this embodiment) (S236). The medal monitoring timer is a timer for monitoring, in the selector 66, a period until the magnetized solenoid is completely demagnetized (that is, a period until the select plate 804 moves from the guide position to the ejection position). (See FIG. 86 to be described later), for example, when a period until demagnetization of the energized solenoid is 80 ms, a timer value for measuring at least a period (“about 80.44 ms”) longer than that. Is set. That is, the medal monitoring timer is actually operated after the start lever 16 is operated (the start switch 79 is in the ON state) and the medal acceptance prohibition control is started when the number of medals that can be played is inserted. To monitor a specific period until the medal acceptance is (physically) banned. As a result, in combination with a start lever ON flag described later and a medal insertion check 2 process described later, when a medal is inserted during the specific period, the medal is swallowed by mistake (that is, the medal is inserted). However, it is prevented from being stored in the hopper device 51 without being counted. The value of the medal monitoring timer can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the selector 66 (mainly solenoid). Further, as long as it is ensured that the swallowing of medals is ensured, it may be set to a period shorter than the period until the demagnetization of the energized solenoid is completed.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the start lever ON flag to the ON state (S237). The start lever ON flag is information for identifying whether or not the start lever 16 has been operated (the start switch 79 has been turned on) when the number of medals that can be played is inserted. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a medal insertion check 2 process (S238). In this process, the main CPU 101 basically performs the same process as the medal insertion check process. The details of the medal insertion check process and the medal insertion check 2 process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever ON flag is in the off state (S239). When the main CPU 101 determines in S239 that the start lever ON flag is in the OFF state (YES in S239), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to S226 and repeats the processing of S226 and thereafter.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S239 that the start lever ON flag is not in the OFF state (that is, it is in the ON state) (NO in S239), the main CPU 101 sets the medal monitoring timer to “0”. It is determined whether there is any (S240). In S239, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal monitoring timer is not “0” (that is, “1” or more) (NO in S240), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S238, and after S238. The process of is repeated.

On the other hand, in S240, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal monitoring timer is “0” (YES in S240), the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance/start check process and executes the process in the main flow ( 56) (see FIG. 56).

[Medal insertion process]
Next, referring to FIG. 59, the medal insertion performed in S222 during the medal acceptance/start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) and the later-described medal insertion check process (see FIGS. 60 and 61) performed in S265. The processing will be described. Note that FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the medal insertion process.

First, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the medal counter (S241). The medal counter is a counter for counting the number of inserted medals, and is provided in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes medal insertion command generation/storage processing (S242). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of the medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. That is, the medal insertion command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 each time one medal is inserted. The medal insertion command includes a parameter for specifying the number of inserted medals and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 turns off the first to third LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals, which are included in the LED 82 (see FIG. 6) (S243). Next, the main CPU 101 calculates LED lighting data (lighting control data) corresponding to the number of inserted medals based on the number of inserted medals (value of the medal counter) (S244). In this process, for example, when the number of inserted medals is one, LED lighting data for illuminating only the first LED for displaying the number of inserted medals is calculated, and when the number of inserted medals is three, for example. For, LED lighting data for lighting all of the first to third LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals is calculated. The method of calculating the LED lighting data will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 101 uses the calculated LED lighting data to light the corresponding LED for displaying the number of inserted medals (S245). Then, after the processing of S245, the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion processing, and the processing is S223 of the medal acceptance/start check processing (see FIGS. 57 and 58), or the medal insertion check processing described later (FIGS. 60 and 61). (See) S253.

[Medal insertion check processing]
Next, referring to FIGS. 60 and 61, the medal insertion check process and the medal acceptance/start check process (FIGS. 57 and 58) performed in S228 of the medal acceptance/start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58). The medal insertion check 2 process performed in S238 in (see) will be described. 60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the medal insertion check process. Note that the medal insertion check 2 process is started from S253 of the medal insertion check process, and the processes of S253 to S268 are the same as those in the medal insertion check process. The procedure of the input check process will be described.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a replay is in progress (S251).

In S251, when the main CPU 101 determines that the game is being replayed (YES in S251), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process, and performs the medal acceptance/start check process (FIG. 57 and FIG. 57). (See 58)) to S229.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S251 that the game is not being played again (NO in S251), the main CPU 101 permits medal acceptance (S252). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is driven (the demagnetized solenoid is excited), and the select plate 804 shifts from the ejection position to the guide position, so that the medal insertion slot 14 is inserted. The medals thus obtained are counted and stored in the hopper device 51.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a bet button check process (S253). In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet button (MAX bet button 15a or 1 bet button 15b) is operated based on the ON/OFF state of the BET switch 77. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet operation is completed based on the result of the bet button check process of S253 (S254).

In S254, when the main CPU 101 determines that the betting operation is completed (YES in S254), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process (or the medal insertion check 2 process) and accepts the process. The process proceeds to S229 of the start check process (see 57 and FIG. 58) (or S239 of the medal acceptance/start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)).

On the other hand, in S254, when the main CPU 101 determines that the betting operation is not completed (NO in S254), the main CPU 101 determines the medal sensor input state (game medium acceptance state) during the current process, The medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing is acquired (S255). The medal sensor input state is information indicating the passage status of the medals received in the medal insertion slot 14 in the selector 66, and is generated by the detection result of each medal sensor (see FIG. 5) of the selector 66.

In the present embodiment, the medal sensor input state is represented by 1-byte (8-bit) data, and the detection result of the upstream first medal sensor 806 provided side by side in the medal passing direction at the exit of the selector 66 is It corresponds to the information of bit 0 (“0” or “1”), and the detection result of the second medal sensor 807 on the downstream side corresponds to the information of bit 1 (“0” or “1”). If the passage of the medal is detected by the first medal sensor, the bit 0 is set to "1", and if the passage of the medal is detected by the second medal sensor, the bit 1 is set to "1". To be done. Therefore, the medal sensor input state “00000000B” indicates a state before or after the passage of a medal (at the time of passage), the medal sensor input state “00000001B” indicates a state at the start of passing a medal, and the medal sensor input state “ "00000011B" indicates a state during passage of a medal, and "000010B" input state of the medal sensor indicates a state immediately before completion of passage of a medal.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal sensor input state during the current process has changed from the medal sensor input state during the previous process (S256).

In S256, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state during the current process has not changed from the medal sensor input state during the previous process (when S256 is NO determination), the main CPU 101 determines that the state of S262 described below is satisfied. Perform processing.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S256 that the medal sensor input state during the current process has changed from the medal sensor input state during the previous process (YES determination in S256), the main CPU 101 determines that the start lever ON flag is set. If is on, the start lever ON flag is set to off (S257). That is, in this process, the main CPU 101 inserts medals in a specific period from when the start operation is performed and the control for prohibiting medal reception is started to when the reception of medals is actually (physically) prohibited. When it is detected, processing for invalidating the start operation is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 generates a normal value (normal change value) of the medal sensor input state obtained in the current process by an arithmetic process based on the medal sensor input state in the previous process (S258).

In this process, when the medal sensor input state at the previous process is “00000000B” (when both the first and second medal sensors have not detected medals), the normal change value of the medal sensor input state is determined. "00000001B" (when the first medal sensor detects medals and the second medal sensor does not detect medals) is generated, and the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing is "00000001B", the medal sensor As a normal change value of the input state, "00000011B" (when both the first and second medal sensors detect medals) is generated. In this process, when the medal sensor input state at the previous process is "00000011B", the normal change value of the medal sensor input state is "00000010B" (the first medal sensor has not detected the medal, If the medal sensor is for medal detection) and the medal sensor input state during the previous processing is "00000010B", the normal change value of the medal sensor input state is "00000000B" (first and second medals). (When both sensors have not detected medals).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal sensor input state during the current process is the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (S259). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not a medal backward error has occurred, and if the determination condition of S259 is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 determines that a medal backward error has occurred.

In S259, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is not the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (NO in S259), the main CPU 101 executes the processing of S263 described below. To do.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S259 that the medal sensor input state during the current process is the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (when YES is determined in S259), the main CPU 101 determines that the current process is in progress. It is determined whether or not the medal sensor input state is the state when the medal has passed (“00000000B”) (S260). In S260, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state in the current process is the state of passing medals (YES in S260), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S264 described below.

In S260, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state in the current process is not the state of passing medals (NO in S260), the main CPU 101 sets the medal passage check timer (S261). The time set in the medal passage check timer in this process can be set to any time as long as it is possible to determine whether or not the medal has passed through the selector 66. Further, the timer value set in this process may be changed according to the medal sensor input state in the current process, for example.

After the processing of S261 or when the determination of S256 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is a passing medal state (“00000011B”) and the medal passing check timer is stopped. It is determined (S262). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not a medal passing error (inserted medal passing time error) has occurred, and when the determination condition of S262 is satisfied, the main CPU 101 determines that a medal passing error has occurred.

In S262, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination condition of S262 is not satisfied (NO in S262), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S253 and repeats the processes from S253.

On the other hand, in S262, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination condition of S262 is satisfied (YES in S262) or NO in S259, that is, a medal passing error or a medal backward error has occurred. When it is determined that the main CPU 101 performs error processing (S263). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs various processes when an error occurs, such as an error command generation/storage process. The details of the error processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 62 described later. Then, after the processing of S263, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S253, and repeats the processing of S253 and thereafter.

Here, returning to the process of S260 again, when the determination of S260 is YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a prescribed number (three in the present embodiment) of medals have been inserted (S264). ..

When the main CPU 101 determines in S264 that the specified number of medals have not been inserted (NO in S264), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion process described in FIG. 59 (S265). Then, after the processing of S265, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S253, and repeats the processing of S253 and thereafter.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S264 that the specified number of medals have already been inserted (YES in S264), the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the credit counter (S266). ). Next, the main CPU 101 executes a medal insertion command generation/storage process (S267). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of the medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of credits of medals is the upper limit value (50 in the present embodiment) based on the value of the credit counter (S268).

In S268, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits of medals is not the upper limit value (NO in S268), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S253, and repeats the processes of S253 and thereafter. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S268 that the number of credits of medals is the upper limit value (YES in S268), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process (or the medal insertion check 2 process). The process is moved to S229 of the medal acceptance/start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) (or S239 of the medal acceptance/start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)).

[Error handling]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, for example, the error processing performed in S263 in the medal insertion check processing (see FIGS. 60 and 61) will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of error processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a medal solenoid off process (S271). Specifically, the main CPU 101 stops driving the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a saving process of the payout amount display data of medals (S272). Next, the main CPU 101 executes error table setting processing (S273).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires an error factor (S274). The error factor acquired in this process changes according to the process of reading the error process that is currently being processed. The error factors targeted in the present embodiment include "hopper empty error", "hopper jam error", "inserted medal passage count error", "inserted medal passage check error", "inserted medal passage check error", The "insertion medal passage time error", "insertion medal backward error", "insertion medal auxiliary storage full error", and "illegal hit error" are defined. For example, when the error process is read after the process of S259 during the medal insertion check process, "insertion medal reverse error (Cr)" is acquired as the error factor in this process. Further, for example, when the error process is read after the process of S262 during the medal insertion check process, "inserted medal passing time error (CE)" is acquired as an error factor in this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires error display data from the error table and the error factor (S275). For example, when the error factor is "inserted medal reverse error (Cr)", in this process, 1-byte data "01001110B" is output as error display data to be output to the 7-segment LED of the upper digit of the 2-segment 7-segment LED. Is acquired, and 1-byte data “00001001B” is acquired as error display data to be output to the 7-segment LED of the lower digit. In this case, two characters "Cr" are displayed as error information on the 2-digit 7-segment LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error command (occurrence) generation/storage process (S276). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of an error command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 when an error occurs, and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The error command stored in the communication data storage area when an error occurs is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. The error command when an error occurs is configured to include a parameter indicating the error occurrence.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting process for one interrupt time (1.1172 ms) (S277). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the error has been canceled (S278).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S278 that the error has not been cleared (NO in S278), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S277 and repeats the processes of S277 and thereafter.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S278 that the error has been released (YES in S278), the main CPU 101 performs the error factor clearing process (S279). It should be noted that this process is performed in the non-regular work area of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a restoration process of the payout amount display data of the medals that have been saved in S272 (S280).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error command (cancel) generation/storage process (S281). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of an error command at the time of error cancellation, which is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The error command at the time of releasing the error, which is stored in the communication data storage area, is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The error command at the time of error cancellation is configured to include a parameter indicating error cancellation. Then, after the processing of S281, the main CPU 101 ends the error processing, and moves the processing to S253 in the medal insertion check processing (see FIGS. 60 and 61), for example. In the error cancellation, the error factor that has occurred is canceled and the reset switch 76 is pressed to cancel the error state.

[Random value acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the random value acquisition processing performed in S203 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random value acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires the hard latch random number (0 to 65535) of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit, and uses the acquired random number value as a random number value for the internal winning combination lottery (random value storage area in the main RAM 103 (S291).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a soft latch random number acquisition register setting process for generating soft latch random numbers (0 to 65535 or 0 to 255) of the random number registers 1 to 7 of the random number circuit (S292). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of soft latch random numbers to be acquired (for example, 7) (S293). The acquired number can be set by appropriately increasing or decreasing according to the number of lotteries that can be performed in one game.

Next, the main CPU 101 collectively acquires the acquired number of soft latch random numbers, and stores the acquired number of soft latch random numbers in the random number storage area (S294). At this time, the soft latch random numbers (random number values for effect) acquired from the random number registers 1 to 7 of the random number circuit 110 are hard latch random numbers (obtained from the random number register 0 of the random number circuit in the random number value storage area. It is saved in an area different from the area in which the random number for the internal winning combination lottery) is stored. Then, after the processing of S294, the main CPU 101 terminates the random value acquisition processing, and moves the processing to S204 of the main flow (see FIG. 56). In the present embodiment, in order to store one 2-byte random number (random number for internal winning combination lottery) and six 1-byte random numbers (random number for effect), the main RAM 103 has an 8-byte storage area. Allocated as a random number storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, the soft latch random number of 2-byte random number is not used.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the internal lottery process performed in S204 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a set value/medal insertion number check process (S301). In this processing, the main CPU 101 checks the set value of the current game (any one of 1 to 6) and the number of inserted medals (three in the present embodiment).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the internal lottery table for the normal game (see the internal lottery table in the “RT0” state shown in FIGS. 16 and 17) and the number of lottery (98 times in this embodiment) (S302). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RB is operating (S303). In S303, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RB is not operating (NO in S303), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S305 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S303 that the RB is operating (YES in S303), the main CPU 101 determines that the internal lottery table for RB (see the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 18) and The number of lotteries (7 times in this embodiment) is set (S304). In this processing, the internal lottery table for general game and the lottery number set in S302 are overwritten with the internal lottery table for RB and the lottery number.

After the process of S304 or when the determination of S303 is NO, the main CPU 101 acquires the determination data (data about the address) of the lottery target winning combination from the set internal lottery table, and updates the lottery table address (S305).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination data is RT state-specific data (S306). In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently-winning lottery target winning combination is an internal winning combination in which the lottery value changes according to the RT state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address defined in the determination data of the currently obtained lottery target combination is the address in the lottery value selection table for RT states (not shown). ..

In S306, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is not the RT state-specific data (NO in S306), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S308 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S306 that the determination data is the RT state-specific data (YES in S306), the main CPU 101 selects the selection data from the RT state lottery value selection table based on the determination data. Is acquired, and the acquired selection data is set as determination data (S307).

After the processing of S307 or when the determination of S306 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination data of the lottery target combination is the data for each setting (S308). In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lottery target combination currently acquired is an internal winning combination in which the lottery value changes according to the set value. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address defined in the determination data of the currently-selected lottery target combination is an address in the setting-based internal lottery value table (not shown).

In S308, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is not the data for each setting (NO in S308), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S310 described below. On the other hand, in S308, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is the data for each setting (YES in S308), the main CPU 101 adds the setting value data (any one of 0 to 5) to the determination data. Then, the added value is set as the determination data (S309). Note that the setting value data added to the determination data in this process is data associated with the setting value, but the setting value data “0” to “5” is not This is data corresponding to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6".

After the process of S309 or when the determination of S308 is NO, the main CPU 101 calculates the address of the area in which the lottery value of the lottery target combination is stored, based on the set determination data (address data), The stored lottery value is acquired (S310).

For example, in the case of an internal winning combination in which the lottery value changes according to both the RT state and the set value, both the RT state lottery value selection table and the internal lottery value table for each setting are referred to to determine the lottery value. Is obtained. That is, for example, in the internal lottery table for the normal gaming state (see FIG. 16 and FIG. 17), the internal lottery combination (for example, “F_maintenance lip”) in which the lottery value changes when the RT state is different with the RT0 state as a reference Etc.), the lottery value is changed according to the game state (RT1 to RT5 state), and the lottery value is changed when the set value is different, for the internal winning combination (for example, “F_maintenance lip”, etc.), The lottery value is changed according to the set value (settings 1 to 6).

Next, the main CPU 101 obtains the random number value (any of 0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery stored in the random number storage area (S311).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes lottery execution processing (S312). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds the random number value acquired in S311 to the lottery value acquired in S310, and sets the addition result as a lottery result (winning/non-winning of the lottery target combination). In addition, in this lottery execution process, when the sum of the lottery value and the random number value exceeds 65535 (when it overflows), it is determined that the lottery target winning combination has been won (the lottery target winning combination has been determined as an internal winning combination). It

Next, the main CPU 101 stores a value obtained by adding the random number value to the random number value (the random number value after the random determination has been performed) as a new random number value in the random number storage area (S313). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a lottery has been executed in the lottery execution process (whether or not an overflow has occurred) (S314).

In S314, when the main CPU 101 determines that the lottery execution process has been won (YES in S314), the main CPU 101 refers to the internal lottery table and outputs the winning request flag status corresponding to the winning internal winning combination. For example, corresponding to “No.” in FIGS. 16 to 18, the prize winning number (that is, information that can identify the type of the winning bonus combination) and the small winning number (that is, the winning small win or the replay winning combination). The value) of (information that can identify the type) is acquired (S315). Then, after the processing of S315, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery processing, and moves the processing to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S314, when the main CPU 101 determines that the lottery execution process has not been won (NO in S314), the main CPU 101 updates the lottery target combination to the next combination in the internal lottery table, and the lottery is performed. The number of times is subtracted by 1 (S316). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of lotteries after subtraction is “0” (S317).

In S317, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of lotteries after subtraction is not “0” (NO in S317), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S305, and repeats the processes of S305 and thereafter.

On the other hand, in S317, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of lotteries after subtraction is “0” (YES in S317), that is, when the internal winning combination is “out”, the main CPU 101 determines The lost status is set (S318). The “miss status” corresponds to a hit request flag status in which both the special winning number and the small winning number are “0”. Then, after the processing of S318, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery processing, and moves the processing to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Design setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the symbol setting process performed in S205 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol setting process.

First, the main CPU 101 extracts the prize winning number and the small winning combination number based on the hit request flag status acquired in the internal lottery process, and stores the extracted special winning number and the small winning combination number in the main RAM 103. It is saved in a winning number storage area (not shown) (S321).

In this embodiment, the internal winning combinations “F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4” are associated with the special winning numbers “1” to “4”, respectively. In addition, the internal winning combinations “F_confirmed rep” to “F_ballistic rep” are respectively associated with the small winning combinations “1” to “23” (see FIG. 23), and the small winning combinations “24” to. “61” is associated with the internal winning combination “F_chance eye A1” to “F_lower right middle bell 2” (see FIG. 24), and the small winning combination numbers “62” to “68” are associated with each other. The internal winning combinations “F_JAC1_1” to “F_JAC2” are associated with each other (see FIG. 23). Then, the value of the hit request flag status is configured by a value obtained by multiplying the prize number indicating these values by the value of the prize winning number and adding the small winning number. Therefore, in the processing of S321, in order to extract the prize winning number and the small winning combination number from the value of the hit request flag status, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 divides the value of the hit request flag status by the prize number. It should be noted that this is an example of data compression for identifying the internal winning combination, and other data configurations can be appropriately adopted as long as the special winning number and the small winning combination number can be extracted.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small winning combination (or the replay winning combination) has been won based on the extracted small winning combination winning number (S322). In this processing, if the small winning combination number is any of 1 to 68, the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay combination) has been won, and if the small winning combination number is 0. The main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or the replay winning combination) has not been won.

In S322, when the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or the replay winning combination) has not been won (NO in S322), the main CPU 101 performs the processing of S331 described below. On the other hand, in S322, when the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or the replay winning combination) is won (in the case of YES determination in S322), the main CPU 101 sets the small winning combination winning number as the initial value of the subtraction result ( S323).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a hit request flag table (not shown) (S324). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the subtraction result and updates the subtraction result (S325). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the subtraction result is less than "0" (S326).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S<b>326 that the subtraction result is not less than “0” (NO in S<b>326 ), the main CPU 101 performs the bit number calculation process (S<b>327 ). In the bit number calculation process of S327, the number of blocks in the storage area of the hit request flag data corresponding to the small winning number defined in the hit request flag table is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a bit number calculation process (S328). In the bit number calculation process of S328, the number of bytes of the hit request flag data in block units defined in the hit request flag table is calculated.

Note that the above-described processing of S325 to S328 is repeated for the number of small winning combinations. Further, when the processes of S325 to S328 are repeated a plurality of times, the number of blocks and the number of bytes of the hit request flag data in block units respectively acquired in the bit number calculation process of S327 and S328 are saved in another storage area. To be done. Also, the number of blocks and the number of bytes of the hit request flag data in block units obtained by the above-described processing of S325 to S328 are information (on-bit information) that specifies the storage destination of the hit request flag data.

Here, returning again to the processing of S326, when the main CPU 101 determines in S326 that the subtraction result is less than “0” (when YES is determined in S326), the main CPU 101 determines that the hit request flag storage area ( Set processing of the internal winning combination storing area) is performed (S329). At this time, the main CPU 101 determines the hit request flag to be checked (updated) based on the number of blocks and the number of bytes (on-bit information) of the hit request flag data in block units obtained by the processing of S325 to S328 described above. Set only the storage area. Specifically, the address of the hit request flag storage area to be checked (updated) is stored in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a compressed data storage process (S330). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of transferring (developing) the hit request flag data to a predetermined storage area in the hit request flag storage area to be checked (updated). Details of the compressed data storage processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 66 described later.

After the processing of S330 or when the determination of S322 is NO, the main CPU 101 refers to the carryover combination storing area (see FIG. 26) and determines whether or not there is a carryover combination (S331). When the main CPU 101 determines in S331 that there is a carryover combination (when YES is determined in S331), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S334 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S331 that there is no carryover combination (NO in S331), the main CPU 101 determines a bonus combination (BB1 to BB4) based on the special winning number extracted in the process of S321. ) Is determined whether or not it is won (S332).

In S332, when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus combination is not won (NO in S332), the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting process, and the process proceeds to S206 of the main flow (see FIG. 56). Transfer.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S332 that the bonus combination is won (YES in S332), the main CPU 101 stores the winning special prize number in the carryover combination storing area (S333).

After the processing of S333 or when the determination of S331 is NO, the main CPU 101 sets the prize winning number in the winning number storage area (not shown), sets the hit request flag data in the hit request flag storage area, and sets the RT state to RT5. The state is set (S334). Then, after the processing of S334, the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting processing, and moves the processing to S206 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Compressed data storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, for example, the compressed data processing performed in S330 in the symbol setting processing (see FIG. 65) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the compressed data storage processing.

The compressed data storage processing shown in FIG. 66 is executed not only in S330 during the symbol setting processing (see FIG. 65) but also in S649 during the later-described symbol code acquisition processing (see later-described FIG. 68). In the compressed data storage process executed in S330 of the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65), the flag data to be processed becomes the hit request flag data (flag data related to the winning combination), but the symbol code acquisition process described later. In the compressed data storage processing executed in S649 in (see FIG. 68 described later), the flag data to be processed is winning operation flag data (flag data relating to winning combinations). Then, both processes are the same except that the types of flag data to be processed are different.

Therefore, in the flowchart of FIG. 66, the flag data to be processed is referred to as “processing target flag data”, and the flag table to be processed is referred to as “processing target flag table”. In addition, in accordance with this description, in the following description of the compressed data storage processing, the hit request flag data or the winning operation flag data is referred to as "processing target flag data", and the hit request flag table or the symbol corresponding winning operation table described later. (Not shown) is referred to as a "processing target flag table".

First, the main CPU 101 sets the storage destination check bit (S341). In this process, the storage destination check bit is stored in a register other than the A register.

The storage destination check bit is 1-byte data for designating a block as a storage destination (transfer destination) of the processing target flag data. In this embodiment, both the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area are composed of two blocks (a storage area 1 to 8 block and a storage area 9 block). Then, for example, when the internal winning combination “F_JAC1_1” is determined, the number of blocks of the storage destination is “2”, and thus in the process of S341, “00000011B” is set as the storage destination check bit. The value of bit 0 (1/0) of this 1-byte data corresponds to the presence or absence of the storage destination in the blocks of storage areas 1 to 8, and the value of bit 1 (1/0) is the block of storage area 9 It corresponds to the presence or absence of the storage destination in.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the byte-by-byte transfer counter to "8" (S342). In the present embodiment, the number of bytes of at least one block is "8", so "8" is set as the initial value of the transfer counter.

Next, the value of the transfer instruction bit is extracted from the storage destination check bit (S343). Note that the transfer instruction bit corresponds to the data of bit 0 in the storage destination check bit, and in the processing of S343, the storage destination check bit stored in the 1-byte register is right-shifted once (one bit). As a result, the transfer instruction bit is extracted. Specifically, when a 1-byte register (a register other than the A register) in which the storage destination check bit is stored is right-shifted once, the data stored in bits 7 to 1 is changed to bits 6 to 0, respectively. While moving, the data of bit 0 before shift is output. Then, the data output by this shift processing becomes the value of the transfer instruction bit.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a transfer instruction based on the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit (S344). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction when the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit is “1”. For example, when "00000011B" is set as the storage destination check bit, the transfer is performed in the determination processing of S344 of the first time (corresponding to the first block of the storage area) and the second time (corresponding to the second block of the storage area). It is determined that there is an instruction.

In S344, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no transfer instruction (NO in S344), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S354 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S344 that there is a transfer instruction (YES in S344), the main CPU 101 acquires the byte unit storage destination designation information from the processing target flag table (S345). In this process, as the byte-unit storage destination designation information, 1 indicating the transfer destination is stored in the head address of the area in which the flag data of the processing target winning combination (winning combination or winning combination) in the processing target flag table is stored. Bytes of data are retrieved.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an updating process (a process of adding 1 to the address) of the address referred to in the process target flag table (S346). Further, in this processing, the main CPU 101 sets, as an initial address, an address designating the top storage area of the block that is the storage (transfer) destination of the processing target flag data. For example, in the processing of the first block, the address of the storage area 1 is set as the initial address in the processing of S346, and in the processing of the second block, the address of the storage area 9 is set as the initial address in the processing of S346. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 extracts the value of the transfer instruction bit from the byte unit storage destination designation information (S347). Note that the transfer instruction bit here corresponds to bit 0 of the byte unit storage destination designation information, and in the process of S347, the byte unit storage destination designation information stored in the 1-byte register is shifted to the right once. Thus, the value of the transfer instruction bit is extracted (the data of bit 0 is output).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a transfer instruction based on the value of the transfer instruction bit extracted in the process of S347 (S348). In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction when the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit is “1”. For example, when “00000001B” is set as the byte-unit storage destination designation information, the data “1” of bit 1 is processed in S347 of the first time (storage area 1 of the first block or storage area 9 of the second block). Is output as the value of the transfer instruction bit and it is determined that there is a transfer instruction, but in the processing of S347 of the second to eighth times, it is determined that there is no transfer instruction.

In S348, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no transfer instruction (NO in S348), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S351 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S348 that there is a transfer instruction (YES in S348), the main CPU 101 determines that the processing target flag stored in the address in the currently set processing target flag table is set. The data (winning request flag data or winning action flag data) is transferred (copied) to the designated storage area (S349).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an update process (a process of adding 1 to the address) of the address referred to in the process target flag table (S350).

After the process of S350 or when the determination of S348 is NO, the main CPU 101 performs an address update process (a process of adding 1 to the address) that specifies the storage area that is the storage destination of the process target flag data (S351). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the transfer counter (S352).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the transfer counter is "0" (S353). When the main CPU 101 determines in S353 that the value of the transfer counter is not "0" (NO in S353), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S347 and repeats the processes from S347.

On the other hand, in S353, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the transfer counter is “0” (YES in S353), the main CPU 101 determines whether the transfer instruction target remains in the current storage destination check bit. It is determined whether or not (S354). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a bit storing "1" in the storage destination check bits at the time of the current process. Then, the main CPU 101 issues a transfer instruction to the current storage destination check bit when there is still a bit storing "1" in the storage destination check bit, that is, when there is a block to be processed. It is determined that the target remains.

In S354, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transfer instruction target remains in the current storage destination check bit (YES in S354), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S342, and the processes of S342 and subsequent processes. repeat. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S354 that the transfer instruction target does not remain in the current storage destination check bit (NO in S354), the main CPU 101 terminates the compressed data storage process and executes the process. For example, the process proceeds to S331 in the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65).

[Import priority storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the attraction-in priority storage processing performed in S212 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the attraction-in priority storage processing.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the number of search reels to "3" (S621). Next, the main CPU 101 executes a pull-in priority table selection process (S622). In this process, a pull-in priority table (not shown) is selected based on the internal winning combination and the operation stop button.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage area selection process (S623). In this process, the pull-in priority data storage area of the reel to be searched is selected. Next, the main CPU 101 sets "20" as the number (number of times) of symbol checks (S624).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol code acquisition process (S625). In this process, the symbol code is acquired by referring to the winning operation flag storage area and the symbol code storage area corresponding to the number of symbol checks. The details of the symbol code acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical product calculation process (S626). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation flag data generation process. Details of the logical product operation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 69 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority order acquisition process (S627). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the bit to "1" in the winning operation flag (winning combination) storage area (see FIG. 25), and sets the bit to "1" in the hit request flag storage area. For the winning combination, the attraction priority data is acquired by referring to the attraction priority table (not shown). The details of the acquisition priority order acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S628). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area such that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other.

The pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a storage area for priority data for each type of main reel. In each attraction priority data storage area, attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position “0” to “19” of the corresponding main reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to this attraction-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the stop table.

The contents of the priority attraction-in data stored in the attraction-in priority data storage area differ depending on the type of attraction-in priority table number in the attraction-in priority table referred to when determining the attraction-in priority data. The larger the value of the attraction-in priority data, the higher the priority. By referring to the attraction-in priority data, it is possible to make a relative evaluation of the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the main reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the attraction-in priority data is the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the attraction-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the main reel. If there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the attraction-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the attraction-in priority storage area (S629). In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets the attraction-in priority data storage area for the next check symbol. Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of symbol checks (S630). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is "0" (S631).

In S631, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of symbol checks is not “0” (NO in S631), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S625 and repeats the processes from S625. On the other hand, in S631, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of symbol checks is “0” (YES in S631), the main CPU 101 performs the process of changing the reel to be searched (S632).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of search reels (S633). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of search reels is “0”, that is, whether or not the series of processes described above has been performed for all the main reels (S634).

In S634, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of search reels is not “0” (NO in S634), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S622 and repeats the processes of S622 and thereafter. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S634 that the number of search reels is “0” (YES in S634), the main CPU 101 ends the pull-in priority storage process and executes the process in the main flow (FIG. (See 56)) to S213.

[Design code acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the symbol code acquisition processing performed in S625 during the attraction-in priority storage processing (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol code acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a clearing process of the winning operation flag storage area (S641). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets “0” in all the storage areas in the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25). Next, the main CPU 101 sets a first reel symbol arrangement table (not shown) (S642).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first reel (the left reel 3L) is stopped (S643).

In S643, when the main CPU 101 determines that the first reel (the left reel 3L) is stopped (YES in S643), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S647 described below. On the other hand, in S643, when the main CPU 101 determines that the first reel (the left reel 3L) is not stopped (NO in S643), the main CPU 101 sets the second reel symbol arrangement table (not shown). Yes (S644). In this process, the first reel symbol arrangement table set in the process of S642 is overwritten with the second reel symbol arrangement table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second reel (middle reel 3C) is stopped (S645).

In S645, when the main CPU 101 determines that the second reel (middle reel 3C) is stopped (YES in S645), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S647 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S645 that the second reel (middle reel 3C) is not stopped (NO in S645), the main CPU 101 sets the third reel symbol arrangement table (not shown). Yes (S646). In this processing, the second reel symbol arrangement table set in S644 is overwritten with the third reel symbol arrangement table.

After the processing of S646, or when YES is determined in S643 or S645, the main CPU 101 performs the symbol check process at the time of executing the stop operation for the reel to be stop-controlled, and the symbol corresponding to the symbol acquired by the symbol check process. A winning operation table (not shown) is acquired (S647). The symbol-corresponding winning operation table is a table for making it possible to identify the types of winning combinations (symbol combinations) that can be won if the corresponding symbols are stopped on the activated line on the reels subject to stop control.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the winning action flag storage area (S648). Next, the main CPU 101 executes the compressed data storage process described in FIG. 66 (S649). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of transferring (developing) the winning operation flag data that can be won stored in the symbol corresponding winning operation table to the corresponding storage area in the winning operation flag storage area.

For example, when the first reel (the left reel 3L) is stopped and the symbol located on the activated line at the time of the stop operation is “blank”, the winning symbol combinations (combinations) are as shown in FIGS. As shown in, “S_XD lip”, “S_bar lip 2”, “S_RT1 transition lip”, and “S_special combination 1”.

After the processing of S649, the main CPU 101 sets the winning operation flag storage area updated by the compressed data storage processing, sets the symbol code storage area, and the data length of the winning operation flag storage area (9 bytes in this embodiment). Is set (S650). Then, after the processing of S650, the main CPU 101 terminates the symbol code acquisition processing, and moves the processing to S626 of the attraction-in priority storage processing (see FIG. 67).

[AND operation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, for example, the AND operation process performed in S626 during the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the AND operation processing. Note that the logical product arithmetic processing shown in FIG. 69 is performed not only in S626 in the attraction priority order storage processing (see FIG. 67) but also in S686 in the attraction priority order acquisition processing (see FIGS. 70 and 71 below). Is also executed.

In the logical product calculation process executed in S626 of the attraction-in priority storage process (see FIG. 67), the two data items that are logical product calculated are the winning operation flag storage set in S650 in the above-mentioned symbol code acquisition process. It is the data of the area and the data of the symbol code storage area. The former data corresponds to "logical product destination data" described later, and the latter data corresponds to "logical product source data" described later. Further, in this case, the number of bytes "9" of the data length (9 bytes) set in S650 during the above-described symbol code acquisition processing corresponds to the "number of logical product" described later.

On the other hand, in the AND operation processing executed in S686 of the attraction priority acquisition processing (see FIGS. 70 and 71 to be described later) described later, the two pieces of data to be ANDed are the hit (attraction) request flag storage area. And the data of the winning operation flag storage area. The former data corresponds to "logical product destination data" described later, and the latter data corresponds to "logical product source data" described later. Further, in this case, the number of bytes “1” of the data length (1 byte) of the RT operation combination display flag described later corresponds to the “number of logical product” described later.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires the logical product source data (for example, data in the symbol code storage area) (S661). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical product operation of the logical product source data and the logical product destination data (for example, the data of the winning operation flag storage area), and stores the calculation result as the logical product destination data (S662).

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the logical product source data to be acquired (S663). Next, the main CPU 101 increments the address of the logical product destination data to be referenced by 1 (S664).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of logical products (S665). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of times of logical product is “0” (S666).

In S666, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of logical multiplications is not “0” (NO in S666), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S661 and repeats the processes from S661. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S666 that the number of times of logical product is “0” (YES in S666), the main CPU 101 ends the logical product calculation process and stores the process, for example, in the attraction priority order storage. The process moves to S627 (see FIG. 67).

[Acquisition priority acquisition processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71, the attraction-in priority order acquisition processing performed in S627 in the attraction-in priority order storage processing (see FIG. 67) will be described. 70 and 71 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the attraction-in priority order acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is time to check the right reel 3R (specific display row) (S671).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S671 that the right reel 3R is not being checked (NO in S671), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S674 described below. On the other hand, in S671, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is time to check the right reel 3R (YES in S671), the main CPU 101 sets “ANY combination” as the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination. It is determined whether or not (a combination of predetermined symbols) is included (S672). The “ANY winning combination” here means a winning combination in which the winning is fixed regardless of at least the stop symbol of the right reel 3R (at least a winning combination in which the stopping symbol of the right reel 3R is an arbitrary symbol). However, in this embodiment, the "ANY role" is not defined.

In S672, when the main CPU 101 determines that the “ANY winning combination” is not included in the symbol combination related to the internal winning combination (when S672 is NO determination), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S674 described later. On the other hand, in S672, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the internal winning combination includes “ANY winning combination” (YES in S672), the main CPU 101 determines that “ANY” in the winning operation flag storage area. The storage area corresponding to the "role" is masked (S673). Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets "1" to the bit corresponding to the "ANY combination" in the winning operation flag storage area. In addition, when "ANY combination" is not defined in the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination, the processes of S671 to S673 may be unnecessary. Further, when the "ANY combination" defines the stop symbol of the left reel 3L or the middle reel 3C as an arbitrary symbol, the processes of S672 and S673 are performed even when the left reel 3L or the middle reel 3C is checked. This may be performed (the same applies to the processing of S681 to S683 described below).

After the processing of S673, or when the determination of S671 or S672 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines the address of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) by adding "1" to the address of the rearmost storage area. Is set, stop prohibition data is set, and the winning operation flag data length (the data length of the winning operation flag storage area: 9 bytes in this embodiment) is set (S674). Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the stock button operation counter and the stop button operation state (S675). The stop button operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons whose stop operation has been detected. The operation state of the stop button is acquired by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 28).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the address of the winning operation flag storage area that has been set (updates -1) (S676). Next, the main CPU 101 generates hit request flag data from the set winning operation flag storage area and the hit request flag storage area corresponding thereto (see FIG. 25), and based on the created hit request flag data. A prohibited winning operation position is generated (S677).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop operation position is the prohibited winning operation position (S678).

In S678, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation position is not the prohibited winning operation position (NO in S678), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S678 that the stop operation position is the prohibited winning operation position (YES in S678), the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is the third stop value. It is determined whether or not (S679).

In S679, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button actuation counter is the value of the third stop (YES in S679), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S705 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S679 that the value of the stop button actuation counter is not the value of the third stop (in the case of NO determination in S679), the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button actuation counter is the second stop. It is determined whether it is a value (S680).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S680 that the value of the stop button actuation counter is not the second stop value (NO in S680), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S680 that the value of the stop button actuation counter is the second stop value (YES in S680), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the right reel 3R has been stopped. It is determined (S681).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S681 that the right reel 3R has been stopped (YES in S681), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S681 that the right reel 3R is not stopped (NO in S681), the main CPU 101 determines that the hit request flag may be interfered with by the "ANY winning combination". It is determined whether or not (whether or not “ANY combination” is included in the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination) (S682).

In S682, when the main CPU 101 determines that the hit request flag is not a flag that may interfere with the “ANY winning combination” (YES in S682), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S682 that the hit request flag is a flag that may possibly interfere with the "ANY winning combination" (when NO in S682), the main CPU 101 determines that the current check is "ANY." It is determined whether or not it is time to check the hit request flag including “win” (S683).

In S683, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current check is at the time of checking the hit request flag including the “ANY winning combination” (YES in S683), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S705 described below.

On the other hand, in S683, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current check is not at the time of checking the hit request flag including the “ANY winning combination” (when S683 is NO determination), when S678 or S680 is NO determination, or S681. Alternatively, if the determination in S682 is YES, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the winning operation flag data length (S684). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the winning operation flag data length is “0” (S685).

In S685, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data length is not “0” (NO in S685), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S676 and repeats the processes from S676.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S685 that the winning operation flag data length is "0" (YES in S685), the main CPU 101 performs the stop control pull-in request flag setting process (S686). .. In this process, for example, the main CPU 101 performs the logical product calculation process described in FIG. In the logical product operation process executed in the process of S686, as described above, the data in the hit (withdrawal) request flag storage area is set to the "logical product destination data", and the data in the winning operation flag storage area is set. It is set to "logical product original data", and the number of bytes of the data length (1 byte) of the RT operation combination display flag is set to "logical product number". The RT operation combination display flag is a storage area in which a symbol combination related to RT transition is defined in the winning operation flag storage area, and in the present embodiment, only the storage area 1 is provided as shown in FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the attraction-in priority table address storage area to obtain the attraction-in priority table (S687). In this process, the initial value "1 (001H)" of the attraction priority data is set to the currently set address, and any attraction priority table is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data in the attraction priority table stored at the currently set address is the end code (000H) (S688).

In S688, when the main CPU 101 determines that the data of the pull-in priority table stored at the currently set address is the end code (YES in S688), the main CPU 101 proceeds to S705, which will be described later. Process. On the other hand, in S688, when the main CPU 101 determines that the data of the attraction priority table stored at the currently set address is not the end code (NO in S688), the main CPU 101 determines the winning operation. The flag storage area is set (S689).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the attraction-in priority data based on the attraction-in priority table stored in the currently set address (S690). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the block counter of the attraction-in priority table (S691).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of checks in the attraction-in priority table and adds 1 (+1 update) to the address of the attraction-in priority table to be referenced (S692).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the check data based on the updated address of the attraction-in priority table, and extracts the check bit from the check data (S693).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the extracted check bit is “1” (S694).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S694 that the value of the extracted check bit is not "1" (NO in S694), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S699 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S694 that the value of the extracted check bit is "1" (YES in S694), the main CPU 101 increments the address of the attraction-in priority table to be referenced by one. (+1 update), and the determination data is acquired from the pull-in priority table based on the updated address (S695).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently obtained winning operation flag data is a determination target based on the determination data acquired in S695 (S696). In this processing, the main CPU 101 compares the currently obtained winning operation flag data with the determination data, determines whether the former corresponds to the latter, and the former corresponds to the latter. In this case, it is determined that the currently-acquired winning operation flag data is the determination target.

In S696, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data is not the determination target (NO in S696), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S699 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S696 that the winning operation flag data is the determination target (YES in S696), the main CPU 101 updates the attraction-in priority data (S697). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates (overwrites) the currently set attraction-in priority data with the attraction-in priority data associated with the determination data acquired in S697.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes check data update processing (S698). In this processing, the main CPU 101 shifts the check data by 1 bit in the right direction (direction from bit 7 to bit 0). In this process, "0" is set in bit 7 of the check data after the shift.

After the processing of S698, or when S694 or S696 makes a NO determination, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a check target bit (a bit for which "1" is set) in the check data (S699).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S699 that there is no bit to be checked in the check data (NO in S699), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S702 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S699 that there is a check target bit in the check data (YES in S699), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the winning operation flag storage area to be checked (+1 update). ), and 1 is subtracted from the number of checks (S700).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of checks is “0” (S701). In S701, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of checks is not “0” (NO in S701), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S698 and repeats the processes from S698.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S701 that the number of checks is "0" (YES in S701), the main CPU 101 sets the number of checks in the address of the winning operation flag storage area currently referred to. The address of the winning operation flag storage area is updated by addition, and the value of the block counter is decremented by 1 (S702). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the block counter is "0" (S703).

In S703, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the block counter is not “0” (NO in S703), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S692 and repeats the processes of S692 and subsequent steps.

On the other hand, in S703, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the block counter is “0” (YES in S703), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the attraction priority table to be referenced (+1 update). () (S704). Then, after the processing of S704, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S688 and repeats the processing of S688 and thereafter.

Here, again returning to the processing of S679, S683 or S688, when S679, S683 or S688 is YES, the main CPU 101 uses the attraction-in priority data set at this time as the final attraction-in priority data. Set (S705). When S679 or S683 is YES, the main CPU 101 sets "0 (00H)" as the final attraction priority data. In this case, since the end code is assigned to the pull-in priority data “0 (00H)”, no pull-in data (stop prohibited) is set. Then, after the processing of S705, the main CPU 101 ends the attraction-in priority order acquisition processing, and moves the processing to S628 of the attraction-in priority storage processing (see FIG. 67).

[Reel stop control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the reel stop control process performed in S213 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reel stop control processing.

First, the main CPU 101 executes reel stop enable signal OFF processing (S711). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a port output process of reel stop enable signal OFF data. Further, this processing is performed using the non-regular work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (whether or not they have become “constant speed”) (S712). In S712, when the main CPU 101 determines that the rotation speeds of all reels are not “constant speed” (NO in S712), the main CPU 101 repeats the processing of S712.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S712 that the rotation speeds of all reels have reached the "constant speed" (YES in S712), the main CPU 101 carries out a reel stoppable signal ON process (S713). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a port output process of the reel stoppable signal ON data. Further, this processing is performed using the non-regular work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S714).

In S714, when the main CPU 101 determines that the valid stop button is not pressed (NO in S714), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S713 and repeats the processes of S713 and thereafter. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S714 that the valid stop button has been pressed (YES in S714), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 28) and indicates that the stop button has not been pressed. The value of the operation counter is decremented by 1 (S715).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S716). In addition, in this process, an address (start address) setting process of the spinning control data storage area in which the reel control management information of the search target reel is stored is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes reel stop enable signal OFF processing (S717). This processing is performed using the non-regular work area of the main RAM 103, as in S711. Next, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 103 based on the value of the symbol counter (S718).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes reel stop selection processing (S719). Although detailed description is omitted, in this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process for selecting the number of sliding symbols.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S719, and stores the determined scheduled stop position in the main RAM 103 (S720). In this processing, the main CPU 101 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position and sets the addition result as the planned stop position.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a symbol code storage process (S721). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the planned stop position is stored in the symbol code storage area. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled is the last stopped reel (third stopped reel) (S722). In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled is the final stopped (third stopped) reel based on the value of the stop button inoperative counter, and the value of the stop button inoperative counter is When it is “0”, it is determined that the reel to be controlled is the reel that is finally stopped.

In S<b>722, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reel to be controlled is not the final stopped reel (NO in S<b>722 ), the main CPU 101 performs control change processing (S<b>723 ). In this process, the stop information group used to stop the reels is updated when the reel is at the specific stop position. Next, the main CPU 101 executes the attraction-in priority order storing process described in FIG. 67 (S724).

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a standby processing for the remaining time of the stop interval (S725). In this process, the main CPU 101 executes a standby process until a preset predetermined reel stop interval time elapses. Then, after the processing of S725, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S711, and repeats the processing of S711 and thereafter.

Here, returning again to the processing of S722, when the main CPU 101 determines in S722 that the reel to be controlled is the reel that is the final stop (when YES is determined in S722), the main CPU 101 causes all reels to be excited. It is determined whether or not is in the stopped state (S726). In S726, when the main CPU 101 determines that the excitation of all reels is not stopped (NO in S726), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S726.

On the other hand, in S726, when the main CPU 101 determines that the excitation of all reels is in a stopped state (YES in S726), the main CPU 101 keeps the third stop-operated stop button in the ON state. It is determined whether or not (the stop button has not been released) (S727). In S727, when the main CPU 101 determines that the third stop-operated stop button is still in the ON state (YES in S727), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S727. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S727 that the third stop-operated stop button is not still in the ON state (NO in S727), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process and executes the process. The process moves to S214 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Prize search processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the winning combination search process performed in S214 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. It should be noted that FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prize winning search process.

First, the main CPU 101 transfers and stores the data in each storage area stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) to the corresponding storage area in the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) (S761). .. Then, at the end of this processing, the last address of the winning operation flag storage area is set in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the payout amount data table (not shown) that defines the payout amount (see FIG. 19 to FIG. 22) of the winning combination (symbol combination) in the HL register (S762). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the payout number table number (for example, “4” in the present embodiment) as an initial value of the prize search counter, and sets the initial value in the B register (S763).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the payout number of medals (either one, two, five, or eight in this embodiment) in the C register based on the address set in the HL register. , The judgment target data is set in the A register, and “2” is added to the address set in the HL register (+2 is updated) (S764). In the payout amount data table, the payout amount data of medals is defined as, for example, “payout amount (1, 2, 5 or 8)*2+0”. Further, hereinafter, the data “0” in the data “Payout number (1, 2, 5, or 8)*2+0” of the payout number of medals set in the C register is referred to as “determination bit”. This determination bit is information indicating whether or not the block is a determination target block for a winning search.

Next, the main CPU 101 extracts the value of the determination bit from the data of the number of paid-out medals set in the C register (S765). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a determination target block based on the value of the extracted determination bit (S766). In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines that the block is the determination target block when the value of the extracted determination bit is “1”. Note that, in the present embodiment, the value of the determination bit is always set to "0" regardless of the number of paid-out medals, and therefore the process of S766 is always a NO determination.

In S766, when the main CPU 101 determines that the block is not the determination target block (NO in S766), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S768 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S766 that the block is the determination target block (YES in S766), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the address of the winning operation flag storage area set in the DE register (- 1 update) (S767).

After the processing of S767 or when the determination of S766 is NO, the main CPU 101 extracts the data of the storage area designated by the address of the winning operation flag storage area set in the DE register as the determination data (S768).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the determination is a win based on the determination target data set in the A register in S764 and the determination data extracted in S768 (S769). In this process, if the determination target data set in the A register in S764 is the same as the determination data extracted in S768, the main CPU 101 determines that the determination result is a win.

In S769, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the determination is not a win (in the case of NO determination in S769), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S776 described later. On the other hand, in S769, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the determination is a win (in the case of YES determination in S769), the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is a three-game game (a game in which the number of medals is three). ) Is determined (S770).

In S770, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is the three-card game (YES in S770), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S772 described below. On the other hand, in S770, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is not the three-card game (NO in S770), the main CPU101 pays out the two-card game (the game in which the bet number of medals is two). The number of sheets is set in the C register (S771). In this embodiment, since there is no two-game game, the processes of S770 and S771 are unnecessary.

After the processing of S771 or in the case of YES determination in S770, the main CPU 101 carries out update processing of the payout number (S772). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the payout number of medals set in the C register to the value of the current prize number counter, and sets the value after the addition as the payout number.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the payout number is less than the maximum payout number “15” (S773).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S773 that the value of the payout number is less than the maximum payout number "15" (YES in S773), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S775 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S773 that the value of the payout number is not less than the maximum payout number "15" (NO in S773), the main CPU 101 sets the maximum payout number "15" to the payout number. Yes (S774).

After the processing of S774 or when the determination in S773 is YES, the main CPU 101 stores the payout number in the winning number counter (S775).

After the processing of S775 or if NO in S769, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is another winning (S776). In S776, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is another winning (in the case of YES determination in S776), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S769 and repeats the processes of S769 and thereafter.

On the other hand, in S776, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no other winning (NO in S776), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 (-1 update) from the value of the winning search counter (S777). Note that, for example, when the number of active lines is one, a plurality of small wins are not won in duplicate, and therefore the determination process of S776 is always a NO determination.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the prize search counter is “0” (S778).

In S778, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the prize search counter is not “0” (NO in S778), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S764 and repeats the processes from S764. On the other hand, in S778, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the prize search counter is “0” (YES in S778), the main CPU 101 ends the prize search process and executes the process in the main flow (FIG. (See 56)).

[Illegal hit check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the illegal hit check processing performed in S215 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of illegal hit check processing. It should be noted that the illegal hit is the special lottery number and the small winning combination number (internal winning combination) that is randomly selected in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 64) and is stored in the winning number storage area in the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65). Based on this, the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are terms indicating that they are stopped on the activated line with a symbol combination that cannot be established (symbol combination is not established).

First, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) (S781). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the size of the winning action flag storage area (the number of bytes, “9” in this embodiment) to the value of the check counter (S782).

Next, the main CPU 101, based on the address of the winning action flag storage area that is currently set, the internal winning combination stored in the storage area in the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area) corresponding to the address. Data (hit request flag data) is acquired (S783). Next, the main CPU 101 combines the data of the winning combination (winning operation flag data) stored in the address of the currently set winning operation flag storage area and the data of the internal winning combination (winning request flag data) ( S784).

In this synthesizing process, the main CPU 101 first obtains the exclusive OR of the data of the winning combination (winning operation flag data) and the data of the internal winning combination (winning request flag data). Next, the main CPU 101 obtains a logical product of the calculated exclusive OR sum calculation result and the winning combination data (prize operation flag data), and sets the logical product calculation result as a combination result. When the illegal hit error has not occurred, the value of this combined result is "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an illegal hit error has occurred based on the result of the combining process of S784 (S785).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S785 that an illegal hit error has not occurred (NO in S785), the main CPU 101 updates the address of the winning operation flag storage area to be referenced by +1 (S786). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the check counter (S787). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the check counter is "0" (S788).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S788 that the value of the check counter is not "0" (NO in S788), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S783 and repeats the processes from S783. On the other hand, in S788, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the check counter is “0” (YES in S788), the main CPU 101 ends the illegal hit check process and executes the process in the main flow (FIG. (See 56)).

Here, returning again to the processing of S785, when the main CPU 101 determines in S785 that an illegal hit error has occurred (when YES is determined in S785), the main CPU 101 performs the error processing described in FIG. Is performed (S789). By this processing, the 2-digit 7-segment LED (for both the payout number display and the error display) included in the information display 6 displays the two characters "EE" indicating the occurrence of the illegal hit error as error information. Error display data is output. The occurrence state of the illegal hit error (error state) is released by pressing the reset switch 76 (see FIG. 6).

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the winning number counter and the data in the hit request flag storage area (S790). Then, after the processing of S790, the main CPU 101 ends the illegal hit check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S216 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storing area) has the same structure as that of the hit request flag storing area (internal winning combination storing area). The winning request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area, which are arranged in the main RAM 103 during the process of combining the combination of the storage area and the internal winning combination, can have the same configuration. Therefore, the calculation result of S784 in the illegal hit check processing of the present embodiment (combined result of the data of the winning combination and the data of the internal winning combination) is simply the logical product of the data of the winning combination and the data of the internal winning combination. (For example, executed by "AND" instruction). As a result, in the present embodiment, the illegal hit check processing can be made efficient and simplified, the free space of the main control program can be secured (increased), and the increased free space is used to improve the game playability. It becomes possible to raise.

[Prize check/medal payout processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the winning check/medal payout processing performed in S216 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning check/medal payout processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation command generation process (S801). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates the type data and various communication parameters included in the winning operation command transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. The winning operation command is configured to include parameters for specifying a winning operation flag (display combination) and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the communication data storage process described in FIG. 50 (S802). By this processing, the winning operation command data is saved in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The winning operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is "0" (S803). In S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is “0” (YES in S803), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check/medal payout process, and the process is the main flow ( The process proceeds to S217 in (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is not “0” (NO in S803), the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits (the number of stored coins) of the medal is the upper limit (the number of coins). In the embodiment, it is determined whether the number is 50 or more (S804).

In S804, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits of medals is not equal to or more than the upper limit (NO in S804), the main CPU 101 adds “1” to the value of the credit counter (+1 update) ( S805). The added credit counter value is displayed by a 2-digit 7-segment LED (not shown) for displaying the number of stored sheets, which is included in the information display 6. Next, the main CPU 101 executes a medal payout number check process (S806). The details of the medal payout number check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the payout of medals has been completed (S807). When the main CPU 101 determines in S807 that the payout of medals has been completed (YES in S807), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check/medal payout process, and the process is in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Then, the process proceeds to S217.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S807 that the payout of medals has not been completed (NO in S807), the main CPU 101 performs payout interval standby processing (S808). In this process, the main CPU 101 waits until a preset medal payout interval time (60.33 msec in this embodiment: 54 cycles of an interrupt process (1.1172 msec cycle) described later with reference to FIG. 79) elapses. Wait. Then, after the processing of S808, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S803, and repeats the processing of S803 and thereafter.

Here, again returning to the processing of S804, when the main CPU 101 determines in S804 that the number of credits of medals is equal to or more than the upper limit number (50) (YES in S804), the main CPU 101 determines A medal payout process is performed (S809). By this process, medals that have not been accumulated as the number of credits are paid out. Even in the process of S809, the processes of S806 to 806 may be repeated each time one medal is paid out until the medal payout is completed. After the processing of S809, the main CPU 101 terminates the winning check/medal payout processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Medal payout number check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the medal payout number check process performed in S806 of the prize check/medal payout process (see FIG. 75) will be described. Note that FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the medal payout number check processing.

First, the main CPU 101 adds “1” to the value of the medal OUT counter (+1 update) (S811). The medal OUT counter is a counter for counting the number of payouts of medals. Next, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the payout number counter (+1 update) (S812). The payout number counter is a counter for counting the payout number of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a payout number 7SEG display process (S813). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a control process of displaying the value of the payout amount counter by a 2-digit 7-segment LED (not shown) for displaying the payout amount included in the information display 6.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the combination end number counter (S814). In addition, the combination winning end number counter, a bonus combination is won (the combination "C_red same color BB", "C_blue same color BB", "C_red different color BB" or "C_blue different color BB" is available) Then, when the bonus game starts, the number of payouts that can be paid out in the bonus game is set (see FIG. 77 described later), the remaining number of payouts of medals during the bonus game is counted, and the bonus game is finished. This is a counter for making a determination (see S822 in FIG. 77 described later). In this processing, the main CPU 101 compares the value of the combination end number counter with the lower limit value “0”, and when the value of the combination end number counter is larger than the lower limit value “0”, the combination end number. The value of the counter is decremented by 1 (updated by -1), and when the value of the winning combination ending number counter is less than or equal to the lower limit value "0", the value of the winning combination ending number counter is held at "0". Note that the payout number set in the combination end number counter is not the number actually paid out to the player. For example, the combination end number counter is set to 240, and the combination end number counter is set to 240. When 15 medals are paid out in this state, the actual payout number is 255. The winning combination end number counter becomes “0” after paying out 240 pieces, and thereafter, the lower limit value “0” of the value of the winning combination end number counter is maintained.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 (-1 update) from the value of the winning number counter (S815).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes credit information command generation processing (S816). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates type data and various communication parameters included in the credit information command transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. The credit information command is configured to include a parameter that specifies the number of medals credited.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the communication data storage process described in FIG. 50 (S817). By this processing, the credit information command data is saved in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. Then, after the processing of S817, the main CPU 101 ends the medal payout number check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S807 in the prize check/medal payout processing (see FIG. 75).

[BB check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the BB check process performed in S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the BB check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current game state is the bonus state (S821). In S821, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is not the bonus state (NO in S821), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S831 described later.

On the other hand, in S821, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is the bonus state (YES in S821), the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the combination end number counter is “0” or less. It is determined whether or not (S822). When the main CPU 101 determines in S822 that the value of the combination end number counter is not equal to or less than "0" (NO in S822), the main CPU 101 ends the BB check process and executes the process in the main flow (Fig. (See 56)).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S822 that the value of the combination end number counter is equal to or less than "0" (YES in S822), the main CPU 101 performs the bonus end process (S823). In this processing, the main CPU 101 clears various information in the bonus state. Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT4 state flag to the ON state (S824). In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets the RT state after the bonus state ends to the RT4 state. After the processing of S824, the main CPU 101 ends the BB check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

Here, again returning to the processing of S821, when the determination of S821 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the BB combination (combination “C_red same color BB”, “C_blue same color BB”, “C_red different color BB”). Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the "C_blue different color BB" symbol combination) is displayed (S825). In S825, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the BB combination is not displayed (NO in S825), the main CPU 101 ends the BB check process and executes the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). The process moves to S218 in the process.

On the other hand, in S825, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the BB combination is displayed (YES in S825), the main CPU 101 performs the bonus operation time process (S826). In this process, various processes necessary for starting the operation of the bonus such as setting a bonus state in the game state of the next game are performed. Next, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (the number of payouts that triggers the end of bonus: “240” in BB1 and BB2, “165” in BB3 and BB4) to the value of the combination end number counter (in this embodiment) ( S827). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT5 state flag to the off state (S828). In this process, the main CPU 101 clears the RT state before the start of the bonus state. Then, after the processing of S828, the main CPU 101 ends the BB check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[RT check processing]
Next, the RT check processing performed in S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the RT check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the bonus state (S831). In S831, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game state is the bonus state (YES in S831), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process, and the process is the main flow (see FIG. 56). The process moves to S219 in the process.

On the other hand, in S831, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game state is not the bonus state (NO in S831), the main CPU 101 determines whether the RT state is the RT5 state (inter-flag state). Is determined (S832). In S832, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is the RT5 state (YES in S832), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process, and the process proceeds to S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to processing.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S832 that the RT state is not the RT5 state (NO in S832), the main CPU 101 determines whether the RT state is the RT3 state (S833). When the main CPU 101 determines in S833 that the RT state is not the RT3 state (NO in S833), the main CPU 101 shifts to the process of S837.

On the other hand, in S833, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is the RT3 state (YES in S833), the main CPU 101 decrements the RT game number counter by 1 (S834). That is, the main CPU 101 manages the game period in the RT3 state. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the RT game number counter has become 0 (S835). In S835, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT game number counter is not 0 (NO in S835), the main CPU 101 terminates the RT check process and executes the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). The process moves to S219 in the process.

On the other hand, in S835, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT game number counter has become 0 (YES in S835), the main CPU 101 sets the RT0 state flag to the ON state and the RT3 state flag to the OFF state. Is set (cleared) to (S836). By this processing, the RT state becomes the RT0 state. Then, after the processing of S836, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

In S833, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is not the RT3 state (NO in S833), the main CPU 101 displays the symbol combination relating to the transition to RT3 (combination “S_RT3 transition”). It is determined whether or not (S837). In S837, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols relating to the transition to RT3 is displayed (YES in S837), the main CPU 101 sets the RT3 state flag to the ON state, and the RT game number counter. 8 is set (S838). In this case, the other RT state flags are set to the off state. By this processing, the RT state becomes the RT3 state. Then, after the processing of S838, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S837, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination relating to the transition to RT3 has not been displayed (NO in S837), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols relating to the transition to RT1 (combination “R_RT1 It is determined whether or not a "combination pattern" is displayed (S839). In S839, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols relating to the transition to RT1 is not displayed (NO in S839), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols relating to the RT1 transition rep (combination “S_RT1 transition rep It is determined whether or not the "combination of symbols" is displayed (S840).

In S839, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols relating to the transition to RT1 is displayed (YES in S839), and in S840, the main CPU 101 displays the combination of symbols relating to the RT1 transition lip. If it is determined that the answer is YES (YES in S840), the main CPU 101 sets the RT1 state flag to the ON state (S841). In this case, the other RT state flags are set to the off state. By this processing, the RT state becomes the RT1 state. Then, after the processing of S841, the main CPU 101 terminates the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S840, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols relating to the RT1 transition rep is not displayed (NO in S840), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols relating to the RT2 transition rep (combination “S_RT2”). It is determined whether or not a “combination of symbols” is displayed (S842). When the main CPU 101 determines in S842 that the combination of symbols relating to the RT2 shift lip is displayed (YES in S842), the main CPU 101 sets the RT2 state flag to the ON state (S843). In this case, the other RT state flags are set to the off state. By this processing, the RT state becomes the RT2 state. Then, after the processing of S843, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and moves the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S842, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination relating to the RT2 transition rep is not displayed (NO in S842), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols relating to the RT0 transition rep (combination “S_RT0”). It is determined whether or not the “combination lip” symbol combination) is displayed (S844). In S844, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols relating to the RT0 shift rep is displayed (YES in S844), the main CPU 101 sets the RT0 state flag to the ON state (S845). In this case, the other RT state flags are set to the off state. By this processing, the RT state becomes the RT0 state. Then, after the processing of S845, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). On the other hand, in S844, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols relating to the RT0 transition rep is not displayed (NO in S844), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and executes the process in the main flow ( The process proceeds to S219 in (see FIG. 56).

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, an interrupt process performed by the main CPU 101 in a 1.1172 msec cycle will be described. Note that FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the interrupt processing. The interrupt process that is repeatedly executed at a cycle of 1.1172 msec occurs based on the output timing of the timeout signal of the timer circuit 113 set in the initialization process of the timer circuit 113 (PTC) (see S2 in FIG. 46). This is a process executed when an interrupt request signal from the interrupt controller 112 is input to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S901). Next, the main CPU 101 executes an input port check process (S902). In this processing, various switches such as a start switch 79 and a stop switch connected via the external bus interface 104, index sensors (not shown) provided on each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, etc. The signals input from the various sensors are checked. In the present embodiment, these various switches and various sensors are passed through the cabinet side relay board 44, the door relay terminal board 68, the reel relay terminal board 74, etc., and the input port IC (not It is connected to the input terminal of the input IC connected to the output terminal of (shown). In the main RAM 103, the main CPU 101 stores an input port storage area (not shown) for storing the state of the input port IC (in the present embodiment, simply referred to as “input port”) connected to the external bus interface 104. ) Is assigned. Here, the input port storage area includes, for example, an input port storage area 1 for storing the current state of the input port, and an input port storage area 2 for storing the state of the input port before the interrupt processing. Composed of. Then, in this process, the main CPU 101 first saves various information stored in the input port storage area 1 in the input port storage area 2, and then stores various information read from the input port in the input port storage area 1. To do. The connection configuration of various switches and various sensors and the configuration of the input port storage area are not limited to those described above. That is, the main CPU 101 may have a configuration in which the on/off states of various switches and various sensors can be recognized.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes reel control processing (S903). In this process, the main CPU 101 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the rotation start of all reels is requested, and thereafter, the respective reels rotate at a constant speed. Drives and controls three stepping motors. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 101 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 101 waits until the updated symbol counter coincides with the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window), and then the corresponding reel. The corresponding stepping motor is drive-controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes communication data transmission processing (S904). In this process, mainly, various commands stored in the communication data storage area are transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 via the first serial communication circuit 114 (see FIG. 8) of the main control circuit 90. The details of the communication data transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the inserted medal passage check process (S905). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of checking whether or not the inserted medal has passed through the selector 66, based on the detection result (medal sensor input state) of each medal sensor (see FIG. 5).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment LED drive processing (S906). In this process, the main CPU 101 drives and controls various 7-segment LEDs included in the information display device 6 to display, for example, the number of paid-out medals, the number of credits, and the stop button press order data. The details of the 7-segment LED drive processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes timer update processing (S907). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a count (subtraction) process for the various timers that have been set. The details of the timer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs error detection processing (S908). Next, the main CPU 101 performs door open/close check processing (S909). In the door open/close check process, the main CPU 101 checks the open/closed state of the front door 2b (see FIG. 2) by checking the on (door closed)/off (door open) state of the door open/close monitor switch 67.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a test-shooting test signal control process (S910). In this process, a control process for outputting various test signals to the tester via the second interface boat or the like is performed. Further, this processing is executed using the non-regular work area of the main RAM 103 (see FIG. 11C). In addition, in this embodiment, this process is performed also at the time other than the trial shooting test (after the pachi-slot 1 is installed in the game shop), but at this time, the main control board 71 passes through the second interface boat or the like. Since various test signals are generated, they are not output because they are not connected to the tester.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes register restoration processing (S911). Then, after the processing of S912, the main CPU 101 ends the interrupt processing.

[Communication data transmission process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the communication data transmission process performed in S904 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the communication data transmission process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs WDT setting processing (S961). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs processing such as restarting the WDT in the reset controller 106. The details of the WDT setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the command transmission start timer has counted up (S962). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission of communication data is being delayed. In S962, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has not counted up (when S962 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission process and interrupts the process (FIG. 79). (Refer)) to the processing of S905.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S962 that the command transmission start timer has counted up (YES in S962), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission of the communication data is completed (S963). .. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the data stored in the command status register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1), and if the data indicating the completion of transmission is stored, the communication data Determines that the transmission has been completed, and if the data indicating that the transmission has been completed is not stored, it determines that the communication data has not been transmitted.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S963 that the communication data has not been completely transmitted (NO in S963), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission process and interrupts the process (see FIG. 79). Then, the process proceeds to S905. On the other hand, in S963, when the main CPU 101 determines that the communication data has been transmitted (YES in S963), the main CPU 101 performs the communication data acquisition process (S964). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of acquiring communication data (command data) from the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (S965). In S965, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (YES in S965), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S969 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S965 that there is no untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (NO in S965), the main CPU 101 sets non-operation command data in each register (S966). ). The no-operation command data is information (for example, that these operations have been performed) related to a game operation of the player (for example, a throw-in operation, a start operation, and a stop operation as an operation for advancing the game). Each parameter is set so as not to include the information indicating "," or the information indicating the internal winning combination determined based on the start operation, for example. The parameters of the non-operation command data include, for example, a parameter indicating the on/off state of each switch in the pachi-slot 1, and a parameter indicating the on/off state of each sensor (for example, the input port storage area 1 And information stored in the input port storage area 2). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 side may determine the possibility of malfunction or failure of these switches or sensors.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes communication data storage processing (see FIG. 50) (S967). That is, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing the no-operation command data generated in S966 in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 executes communication data acquisition processing (S968). That is, the main CPU 101 performs a process of acquiring the no-operation command data stored in the communication data storage area in S967.

As described above, in this embodiment, at least a non-operation command is transmitted for each interrupt process (see FIG. 79) even when there is no communication data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. It is like this. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized communication data from being transmitted from the outside due to the absence of communication data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. From this point of view, the non-operation command data does not include information related to the game operation of the player, but the content of each parameter to be set is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. Is.

After the processing of S968 or if the determination of S965 is YES, the main CPU 101 sets the buffer size for one packet in the transmission counter (S969). In this embodiment, since the transmission data for one packet is 8 bytes, the buffer size for one packet is also composed of 8 bytes. In addition, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of communication data (command data) is stored in the communication data storage area, they are transmitted in the order in which they are stored (oldest stored first) (FIFO format). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the transmission data from the communication buffer and sets it in the transmission data register (S970). Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets transmission data in 1-byte units in a transmission data register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1). As a result, the set transmission data is transferred to the transmission shift register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1) and transmitted for each packet.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates (+1) the address of the communication buffer by "1" (S971). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the transmission counter (S972). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the transmission counter is “0” (S973). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission of the transmission data for one packet is completed. In S973, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transmission counter is not “0” (NO in S973), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S970 and repeats the processes of S970 and subsequent steps.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S973 that the transmission counter is "0" (YES in S973), the main CPU 101 performs communication data pointer update processing (see, for example, FIG. 51) (S974). ). After the processing of S974, the main CPU 101 terminates the communication data transmission processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S905 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

[WDT setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the WDT setting process performed in S961 during the communication data transmission process (see FIG. 80) will be described. Note that FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the WDT setting process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the WDT clear register (not shown) in the WDT in the reset controller 106 (S981). Next, the main CPU 101 sets clear data (for example, “55H”) at the set address (S982). Next, the main CPU 101 sets restart data (for example, "AAH") at the set address (S983).

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the command transmission start timer with the lower limit value “0”, and when the command transmission start timer is larger than the lower limit value “0”, subtracts 1 from the command transmission start timer (-1 update). If the command transmission start timer is equal to or lower than the lower limit value "0", the command transmission start timer is held at "0" (S984). Then, after the processing of S984, the main CPU 101 ends the WDT setting processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S962 of the communication data transmission processing (see FIG. 80).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the WDT reset setting and management information (WDT enable/disable, reference clock, timeout time (for example, 419.4 ms), etc.) are stored in the program management area, and S982 and By performing the processing in S983, the set timeout time is remeasured. When the reset signal is output due to the timeout and the main CPU 101 is restarted, the main CPU 101 is restarted without the power-off (external) process (see FIG. 52) being executed. The sum value calculated by (53) is not stored in the main RAM 103 (sum value storage area). Therefore, in this case, the result of the sum check determination in the power-on process (see S11 of FIG. 46) is not normal (that is, "RAM abnormality"), and the information display 6 (7-segment LED display) displays an error. The character string "88" meaning occurrence is displayed.

[7-segment LED drive processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the 7-segment LED drive process performed in S906 in the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 7-segment LED drive processing.

First, the main CPU 101 adds “1” to the value of the interrupt counter (+1 update) (S921). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the interrupt counter is an odd number (S922).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S922 that the value of the interrupt counter is not an odd number (NO in S922), the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment LED drive process and interrupts the process (see FIG. 79). ) To S907. That is, in the present embodiment, the 7-segment LED driving process is performed every two interrupt cycles. In the present embodiment, an example in which the 7-segment LED drive processing is executed when the value of the interrupt counter is an even number has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 7-segment LED drive processing is performed when the value of the interrupt counter is an odd number. The LED drive processing may be executed, or the execution timing of the 7-segment LED drive processing may be determined using the quotient or the remainder when the value of the interrupt counter is divided by an arbitrary integer.

On the other hand, in S922, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the interrupt counter is an odd number (YES in S922), the main CPU 101 acquires navigation data from the navigation data storage area (S923). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the push order display data storage area for storing the push order display data output to each cathode of the 7-segment LED (S924).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment display data generation processing (S925). In this processing, the main CPU 101 creates push order display data (7-segment display data) based on the navigation data, and stores the generated push order display data in the push order display data storage area. The details of the 7-segment display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the credit counter (S926). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the credit display data storage area for storing the credit display data output to each cathode of the 7-segment LED (S927).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment display data generation processing (S928). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates credit display data (7-segment display data) based on the value of the credit counter, and stores the generated credit display data in the credit display data storage area. The details of the 7-segment display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the 7-segment common counter storage area for storing the value of the 7-segment common counter described below (S929). Next, the main CPU 101 adds “1” to the value of the 7-segment common counter (+1 update) (S930). In this process, when the updated value of the 7-segment common counter becomes "8", the main CPU 101 sets the value of the 7-segment common counter to "0". In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is dynamically controlled, the value of the 7-segment common counter is updated every eight cycles.

Next, the main CPU 101 creates common selection data based on the value of the 7-segment common counter, and outputs the address of the target cathode data storage area (the push order display data storage area or the target storage area in the credit display data storage area). Is set (S931). Next, the main CPU 101 outputs clear data to the cathode of the 7-segment LED (S932). This process is performed to turn off the 7-segment LED once to eliminate the influence of the afterimage.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires and sets 7-segment cathode output data from the target cathode data storage area (S933). Next, the main CPU 101 generates 7-segment common output data from the 7-segment common backup data and the common selection data (S934).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the 7-segment common output data and the 7-segment cathode output data in the 7-segment common backup data and the 7-segment cathode backup data, respectively (S935). Next, the main CPU 101 outputs 7-segment cathode output data and 7-segment common output data (S936). Then, after the processing of S936, the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment LED driving processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S907 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

[7-segment display data generation process]
Next, the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S925 and S928 in the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82) will be described with reference to FIG. 83. Note that FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 7-segment display data generation process.

The "display data" described below, which is generated in the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S925 of the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), corresponds to the push-order display data, and the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. “Display data”, which will be described later, generated by the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S928 of (see 82) corresponds to the credit display data.

First, the main CPU 101 divides the display data set in the cathode data storage area by “10”, obtains the quotient value of the division result as the display data of the upper digit of the 2-digit 7-segment LED, and performs the division. The residual value of the result is acquired as the display data of the lower digit (S941). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether to display the upper digit based on the acquired display data of the upper digit (S942).

In S942, when the main CPU 101 determines that high-order digit display is to be performed (YES in S942), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S944 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S942 that the upper digit is not displayed (NO in S942), the main CPU 101 sets no upper digit display (S943).

After the processing of S943 or when the determination of S942 is YES, the main CPU 101 refers to the 7-segment cathode table (not shown) and acquires the display data of the higher digit (S944). Next, the main CPU 101 saves the acquired upper-digit display data in the upper-digit display data storage area (not shown) (S945).

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to a 7-segment cathode table (not shown) to acquire display data of lower digits (S946). Next, the main CPU 101 saves the acquired lower-order digit display data in the lower-order digit display data storage area (not shown) (S947).

Then, after the processing of S947, the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment display data generation processing. At this time, if the executed 7-segment display data generation process is the process of S925 in the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to the process of S926 in the 7-segment LED drive process. Transfer. On the other hand, when the executed 7-segment display data generation process is the process of S928 in the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to the process of S929 in the 7-segment LED drive process. ..

[Timer update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the timer updating process performed in S907 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the timer updating process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the update start address of the 2-byte timer storage area (not shown) in the HL register, and sets the 2-byte timer number in the B register (S951). The 2-byte timer storage area is used to manage a time of 286 ms (256×1.1172 ms) or more (that is, a timer value exceeding 1 byte).

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the 2-byte timer number with the lower limit value "0", and if the 2-byte timer number is larger than the lower limit value "0", subtracts 1 from the 2-byte timer number (-1 update). If the 2-byte timer number is less than or equal to the lower limit value "0", the 2-byte timer number is held at "0" (S952). Further, in the processing of S952, the main CPU 101 subtracts 2 (-2 updates) from the update start address of the 2-byte timer storage area set in the HL register. Note that, for example, since the command transmission start timer is also a 2-byte timer, the update may be performed in this processing (see FIG. 81).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the 2-byte timer number set in the B register (-1 update) (S953). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the 2-byte timer number set in the B register is "0" (S954).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S954 that the 2-byte timer number set in the B register is not "0" (NO in S954), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S952, Repeat the process.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S954 that the 2-byte timer number set in the B register is “0” (YES in S954), the main CPU 101 sets the 1-byte timer storage area in the HL register. The update start address is set, and the 1-byte timer number is set in the B register (S955). The 1-byte timer storage area is used to manage a time period less than 286 ms (256×1.1172 ms) (that is, a timer value that does not exceed 1 byte). For example, a medal monitoring timer or the like is updated as a 1-byte timer.

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the 1-byte timer number with the lower limit value "0", and if the 1-byte timer number is larger than the lower limit value "0", subtracts 1 from the 1-byte timer number (-1 update). If the 1-byte timer number is less than or equal to the lower limit value "0", the 1-byte timer number is held at "0" (S956). Further, in the processing of S956, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 (-1 update) from the update start address of the 1-byte timer storage area set in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the 1-byte timer number set in the B register (updates -1) (S957). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the 1-byte timer number set in the B register is "0" (S958).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S958 that the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is not "0" (NO in S958), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S956, Repeat the process.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S958 that the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (YES in S958), the main CPU 101 performs electromagnetic counter control processing (S959). ). In this processing, output control processing is performed when outputting a signal indicating IN/OUT of the medal to the external centralized terminal board 47. Then, after the processing of S959, the main CPU 101 ends the timer updating processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S908 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

<Explanation of operation when power is turned on>
Next, the operation of the pachi-slot according to the embodiment of the present invention when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the pachi-slot 1 when the power is turned on.

In FIG. 85, “MainCPU” indicates the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90), and “SubCPU” indicates the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200).

Further, in FIG. 85, the operation state "security mode" of "MainCPU" indicates the above-described security mode, and the operation state "start delay period" of "MainCPU" is as described above after the end of the security mode. The command transmission start timer is set, and the period until the set command transmission start timer becomes "0" (that is, the period during which the setting can be changed but the transmission of communication data is delayed) is shown. The operation state “normal operation period” of “MainCPU” indicates a state in which the delay of the transmission of the communication data is completed and the communication data can be transmitted to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200).

Further, in FIG. 85, the operation state “initialization” of the “SubCPU” is the initialization (startup) process (hardware start-up time, BIOS (driver) initialization, kernel) when the sub-CPU 201 (sub-control circuit 200) is powered on. (OS) startup (that is, a state in which communication data transmitted from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90) cannot be received), and the operating state “normal operating period” of “SubCPU” is This shows a state in which the initialization (startup) processing at the time of turning on the power is completed and the communication data transmitted from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90) can be received.

Further, in FIG. 85, in the “setting operation A”, the setting change is started in the “start delay period” (for example, the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state and the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on), and then the “normal operation” is performed. The operation when the setting change is completed in the “operation period”, and the “transmission mode A” is the setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting change in the case of “setting operation A”. The transmission timing of the command (setting change/setting confirmation end) (COM2) is shown. Further, in the “MainCPU setting change process” under the “transmission mode A”, the setting change command is the communication of the main RAM 103 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) by the main CPU 101 in the case of “transmission mode A”. The timing at which the data is stored (registered) in the data storage area (see also the setting change command generation and storage processing of FIG. 49 and the communication data storage processing of FIG. 50) is shown.

Also, in FIG. 85, in the “setting operation B”, the setting change is started in the “start delay period” (for example, the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state and the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on), and then the “setting operation B” is performed. The operation when the setting change is completed in the "startup delay period" is shown, and the "transmission mode B" is the setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting in the case of "setting operation B". The transmission timing of a change command (setting change/end of setting confirmation) (COM2) is shown. Further, in the “MainCPU setting change process” under the “transmission mode B”, the setting change command is the communication of the main RAM 103 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) by the main CPU 101 in the case of “transmission mode B”. The timing at which the data is stored (registered) in the data storage area (see also the setting change command generation and storage processing of FIG. 49 and the communication data storage processing of FIG. 50) is shown.

When the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on and the reset signal is input, the security section (not shown) of the microprocessor 91 controls the operation mode to the security mode. In the security mode, the activation of the main CPU 101 is delayed for a period according to the setting stored in the security setting area. When the security mode ends, the main CPU 101 delays the transmission of communication data for a predetermined period. The main CPU 101 can change the setting even when the transmission of communication data is delayed.

Here, as shown in "setting operation A", when the setting change is started during the delay of the transmission of the communication data and the setting change is ended after the delay of the transmission of the communication data is ended, the main CPU 101 determines that the communication When the delay of data transmission ends, a setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation start) (COM1) is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and when the setting change ends, the setting change command (setting Change/setting confirmation end) (COM2) is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

On the other hand, as shown in “setting operation B”, when the setting change is started during the delay of transmission of communication data and the setting change is ended during the delay of transmission of communication data as well, the main CPU 101 determines When the transmission delay ends, a setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation start) (COM1) and a setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation end) (COM2) are sequentially transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. .. That is, when the delay of transmission of communication data ends, a setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation start) (COM1) and a setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation end) (COM2) are stored in the communication data storage area. If registered, these communication data are transmitted in the order of registration.

As described above, according to the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, by delaying the activation of the main CPU 101 when the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on, the main control circuit 90 can be activated stably and the activation of the main CPU 101 can be performed. After the delay ends, by delaying the transmission of communication data, it is possible to secure the time required to activate the sub-control circuit 200 and stably activate the sub-control circuit 200.

After the delay of the start of the main CPU 101 is completed, the setting can be changed even before the delay of the transmission of the communication data is completed. Therefore, for example, when performing the opening operation in the game shop, the pachislot When the power of No. 1 is turned on (that is, when the reset signal is input accordingly), the setting can be changed in advance without waiting for the completion of the activation of the sub control circuit 200. It is possible to improve work efficiency in.

Furthermore, if the settings are changed before the delay of the transmission of communication data ends, the communication data indicating these are registered at the start of the setting change or at the end of the setting change, and the delay of the transmission of communication data will be delayed. Since these communication data are transmitted in the order in which they are registered when they are completed, even if the setting is changed in advance without waiting for the completion of the activation of the sub control circuit 200, Thereby, it is possible to prevent the information held between the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200 from being inconsistent. Further, for example, even in the case where the sub-control circuit 200 is configured to determine fraudulent acts or errors according to the order of communication data transmitted from the main control circuit 90, the result of such determination It is possible to make an accurate determination without affecting the.

Further, according to the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the communication data transmission process is performed, at least the non-operation command data is transmitted even if the communication data is not registered. For example, it is possible to prevent communication data from being transmitted from the outside by an unauthorized means such as unauthorized access to the connection line between the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. Further, since the non-operation command data is not registered and transmitted before the delay of the transmission of the communication data ends, it is possible to reduce the control load when the pachi-slot 1 is powered on. It should be noted that, from the viewpoint of mainly preventing fraud, the non-operation command data may not include information related to the game operation of the player.

According to the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the delay period for starting the main CPU 101 is composed of a fixed period and a variable period, and these periods (or their ranges) can be appropriately selected and set. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate delay time according to the specifications of the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. From the viewpoint of shortening the period until the setting can be changed, it is possible to set a predetermined period range in which 0 is always determined as the variable period (for example, “no setting” in the random extension period). In that case, the range of the predetermined period may be set.

Note that, in the present embodiment, an example will be described in which after the security mode ends, the setting value setting operation (setting change operation) is possible during the period in which the transmission of communication data is delayed (“start delay period”). However, the operation that can be executed during the period in which the transmission of the communication data is delayed (“activation delay period”) is not limited to this. For example, the setting key type switch 54 is turned on, the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on, and the setting key type switch 54 is turned on during the period in which the transmission of communication data is delayed (“start delay period”). In this case, the setting value confirmation operation (setting confirmation operation) may be enabled during the period. As a result, for example, when opening a work in a game shop, if the setting is not changed but the user wants to confirm the current set value, the setting can be confirmed in advance without waiting for the completion of the activation of the sub control circuit 200. Since it can be performed, it is possible to improve work efficiency when the power is turned on.

<Explanation of operation when inserting medals>
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, an operation of the pachi-slot according to the embodiment of the present invention at the time of inserting a medal will be described. FIG. 86 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the pachi-slot 1 at the time of inserting a medal.

In FIG. 86, a “start switch” indicates the start switch 79, and a “medal sensor” indicates a detection state of the upstream medal sensor (first medal sensor) 806 and the downstream medal sensor (second medal sensor) 807. "Medal sensor input state" indicates that the "medal acceptance signal" indicates that the on state ("ON") is permitted to accept medals (medal acceptance permission), and the off state ("OFF") is the medal. Shows a state in which the reception of is prohibited (medal reception is prohibited) (see FIGS. 57 and 58).

Further, in FIG. 86, “solenoid” indicates the solenoid of the selector 66 (driving source that shifts the select plate 804 to the guide position or the ejection position), and “monitoring timer” indicates the medal monitoring timer (FIG. 57 and FIG. 57). 58), "operating state", a state in the pachi-slot 1 that allows the progress of the game after the start operation ("during game") and a state that does not allow the progress of the game after the start operation ("wait for game" )), is shown.

When the number of medals that can be started in the game (three in the present embodiment) is inserted, the main CPU 101 can accept a start operation for the start lever 16. As shown in FIG. 86, in this state, if medals can be stored as the number of credits (if the number of credits is less than 50), the start lever 16 is started (started by the start switch 79). Until the operation is detected), the state where the medal acceptance is permitted (the state where the medal acceptance signal is “ON”) continues. Although illustration is omitted, in this state, if the medals cannot be stored as the number of credits (if the number of credits is 50), acceptance of medals is prohibited (the medal acceptance signal is “OFF”). It is a state).

The main CPU 101 performs a start operation by the start switch 79 (a first start on the left side in FIG. 86) in a state where the number of medals that can be started in the game (three in the present embodiment) has been inserted and the medals can be stored as the number of credits. When the operation (transition of the start switch 79 from “OFF” to “ON” is referred to as “start operation A”) is detected, a state in which the medal acceptance is permitted (the medal acceptance signal is “ON”) From a certain state) to a state in which the acceptance of medals is prohibited (the state where the medal acceptance signal is “OFF”), the solenoid of the selector 66 is started to be demagnetized, and the medal monitoring timer monitors ( Measurement). At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is turned on.

When the medal is inserted (that is, before the solenoid of the selector 66 completes the transition from the energized state to the demagnetized state) during the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the main CPU 101 inputs the medal sensor input of each medal sensor. In the case where it is determined that a medal has been inserted based on the state), the inserted medal is counted so that the solenoid of the selector 66, which was in the process of changing from the excited state to the demagnetized state, is changed to the excited state again, Guided in the hopper device 51. Further, in this case, the "start operation A" is detected by the start switch 79, but based on the detection, the operation state is changed to a state in which the game can be advanced after the start operation ("during game"). Do not move. At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is turned off. That is, in this case, the "start operation A" is invalidated.

It should be noted that the main CPU 101, when a medal is thrown during the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the solenoid of the selector 66 completes the transition from the excited state to the demagnetized state) (the medal of each medal sensor). If it is determined that a medal has been inserted based on the sensor input state), the medal acceptance is further permitted from the state where the medal acceptance is prohibited (the state where the medal acceptance signal is “OFF”). You may make it change to a state (state where the medal acceptance signal is "ON").

Thereafter, the main CPU 101 again designates the start operation with the start switch 79 (the second start operation on the right side in FIG. 86 (transition of the start switch 79 from “OFF” to “ON”) as “start operation B”). Is detected, the solenoid of the selector 66 is changed from the excited state to the demagnetized state again, and the medal monitoring timer starts monitoring (measurement) again. At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is turned on again.

Then, the main CPU 101 does not insert a medal during the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the solenoid of the selector 66 completes the transition from the excited state to the demagnetized state) (of each medal sensor). When it is not determined that a medal has been inserted based on the medal sensor input state), the operating state is set after the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is completed (that is, after the solenoid of the selector 66 is completely changed from the excited state to the demagnetized state). Is changed to a state in which the game can be advanced after the start operation (“during game”), and the game can be advanced (that is, medal acceptance/start check processing (see FIGS. 57 and 58)). Process can be executed).

Although illustration is omitted, the main CPU 101 shifts from the state where the “start operation A” is detected by the start switch 79 and the medal acceptance is permitted (the medal acceptance signal is “ON”). To the state where the reception of the token is prohibited (the state where the medal acceptance signal is “OFF”), the solenoid of the selector 66 is started to be demagnetized, and the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is started. After that, during the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the solenoid of the selector 66 completes the transition from the energized state to the demagnetized state), if no medals are inserted (the medal sensor input state of each medal sensor). Even when it is not determined that a medal has been inserted based on the above, similarly to the case where the "start operation B" is detected by the start switch 79, after the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is completed (that is, the solenoid of the selector 66 is excited). After the transition from the state to the demagnetized state is completed), the operating state is changed to a state in which the game can proceed after the start operation (“in game”), and the game can be advanced (that is, medal reception The processing after the start check processing (see FIGS. 57 and 58) can be executed).

As described above, according to the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is started with the player's start operation, for example, a medal monitoring timer for preventing occurrence of “swallow” of medals is provided. Set. With this medal monitoring timer, in the selector 66, the inserted medals are discharged from the state where the inserted medals are stored inside the gaming machine (the selection plate 804 is in the guide position because the solenoid is in the excited state) to the outside of the gaming machine. The time required to physically change to the state (the state where the select plate 804 is in the discharge position due to the demagnetization state of the solenoid) is secured.

Then, when a medal is inserted during the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the starting operation which is the basis of the medal is invalidated, and in the selector 66, the inserted medal is placed inside the gaming machine. Return to the stored state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of "swallowing" of medals and appropriately process the inserted medals.

Further, according to the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, even if a medal is inserted during the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the medal is counted, so that the number of inserted medals is reduced. It is possible to prevent counting omissions and to process the inserted medals more appropriately.

Further, according to the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the timer value (for example, “72”) of the medal monitoring timer is changed from the state where the inserted medals are stored inside the gaming machine to the state where the medals are discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. Since it is set to a period (for example, “72”×1.1172 ms) longer than the period until physically changing (for example, 80 ms), the occurrence of “swallow” of medals can be reliably prevented. Thus, the inserted medals can be processed more appropriately. In addition, when the drive unit is a solenoid as in the present embodiment, such an effect becomes more remarkable.

<Other effects that can be executed in this embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91, examples of other effects that can be executed in the present embodiment will be described in addition to the effects described above. In the following, as an example of other effects, it is explained that a bonus winning combination winning notification effect for notifying whether or not a bonus winning combination is won can be executed, but its use is a bonus winning combination. The present invention is not limited to the one for notifying whether or not the winning has been won.

For example, in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, it may be executed to notify whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, or in the line battle state of the advantageous section, the advantageous section. May be executed to notify whether or not is decided to continue. Further, in the right acquisition lottery state of the advantageous section, it may be executed to inform whether or not it is determined to shift to the right acquisition state, or in the right acquisition state of the advantageous section, It may be executed to inform whether or not it has been decided to grant the right. That is, it can be used as an effect executed to inform the player whether or not the privilege is awarded.

(Example of a bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 1))
First, with reference to FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, an example of the bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 1) will be described. 87 and 88 show, for example, a bonus winning combination that can be displayed on the display device 11 with a predetermined probability when an internal winning combination (for example, a “chance eye”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus winning combination is determined. The production example (the 1) of information production is shown. It should be noted that FIG. 87 shows a display example when the bonus combination is not won (when the bonus combination is not won), and FIG. 88 is a display example when the bonus combination is won (when the bonus combination is won). Is shown.

As shown in FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, in the example of the bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 1), an effect entitled “Find Mistakes Effect” is performed. For example, if there is an original work such as a manga, animation, or game that is used as a motif of Pachi-slot 1, this "error-finding effect" is based on an image that is the same as or close to the specified image in the original work. As an image, it is an effect that allows the player to search whether there is a difference (that is, a mistake) from the base image. In this case, the predetermined image may be the original image (that is, the same image), or the original image may be A/D converted, the aspect ratio changed, and the resolution changed. Or may be a remastered (ie, approximate) image. Although the image is based on the original work, it may be an image newly created for use in the production of the pachi-slot 1.

The base image is not limited to the one described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, even when there is no original work (for example, when it is an original motif), an image that is the same as or close to the image that can be displayed in another effect in the pachi-slot 1 may be set. Further, for example, an image that is the same as or similar to the image printed in the booklet distributed at the game shop for explaining the specifications of the pachi-slot 1 may be set. Further, for example, the base image does not have to be a still image, may be a moving image, and still images may be sequentially displayed in a slide format.

In the upper part of FIG. 87, an image in which five characters are displayed is displayed together with the characters “all together!”. The image is the same as the base image. Also, below the image, a message and a cursor prompting you to point out the points that are different from the base image, such as "Please set the cursor if there is a part that is different from the image you know!" And are displayed.

At this time, the player moves the cursor to a desired position (by performing a selection operation) by tracing a predetermined area on the display surface of the sub display device 18 provided with the touch sensor 19 with a finger, and the sub display is also performed. A decision button (not shown) displayed on the display surface of the device 18 is touch-operated (decision operation is performed), and a portion which the user thinks is wrong is designated.

It should be noted that the means for detecting various operations related to the production such as the player's selection operation and determination operation is not limited to the sub-display device 18. For example, when the display device 11 is a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, a touch sensor is provided in at least a part of the display device 11 (for example, a portion where the upper display of FIG. 87 is performed). When the touch sensor detects the movement of the player's finger (when a selection operation is performed), the cursor is moved accordingly, and an enter button displayed at the place where the touch sensor is provided. When (not shown) is pressed (when a determination operation is performed), an effect of notifying the result may be performed accordingly. Further, for example, when a physical operation means (for example, a cross key and an effect button, a jog dial, etc.) capable of detecting various operations related to effects such as selection operation and decision operation is provided, such physical operation means is used. The selection operation or the determination operation may be detected by. That is, any means can be applied as long as it can detect various operations related to the player's effect.

Here, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 87, it is assumed that the player designates the portion where the character at the right end is displayed. Then, since the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 87 has no difference from the base image, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 87, the fact that the error search result in the “error search effect” has failed is notified. "I'm sorry ~ sorry" message is displayed.

On the other hand, in the upper part of FIG. 88, an image in which four characters are displayed is displayed together with the characters “all gathering!”. The image is different from the base image in the portion where the rightmost character is not displayed. Also, similar to FIG. 87, a point different from the base image should be pointed out as in the case of FIG. 87, such as “If there is a part different from the image you know, move the cursor to make a decision!”. A message prompting the user and a cursor are displayed.

Here, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 88, it is assumed that the player designates a portion where the rightmost character is not displayed. In this case, since the designated portion is a portion different from the base image, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 88, a message “Notification of mistake” indicates that the result of the error search is successful. Along with the message "around", a message "bonus confirmed!" for notifying that the bonus combination has been won is displayed.

On the other hand, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 88, it is assumed that the player designates the portion where the character at the left end is displayed. In this case, since the designated part is not a part different from the base image, as in the lower part of FIG. 87, “off” for notifying that the result of the error search in the “error search effect” is a failure has occurred. A message "~ sorry" is displayed, and even if the winning combination is won, it is not notified that the winning combination is won.

It should be noted that the effect modes shown in FIGS. 87 and 88 are examples of the effect modes in the “error search effect”, and, for example, the following effect modes can also be adopted.

For example, the base image is based on a predetermined theme in the original work (for example, the first episode in the original work), and a plurality of (for example, five) images (for example, digest images) are displayed in a slide format. It is assumed to be a thing. Then, when the bonus combination is not won, the slide images are sequentially displayed as they are, and then each image of the slide is displayed in a thumbnail shape. On the other hand, when the bonus combination is won, slide images in which some of the slide images are different are sequentially displayed, and then each image of the slide is displayed in a thumbnail shape.

The player searches each image displayed in a thumbnail form for a theme based on a theme different from the predetermined theme (for example, the number of stories different from the first story in the original work), and determines whether or not the predetermined theme is included. The selection operation and the determination operation are performed for an image that is thought to be an image of a theme different from that of. Then, when an image of a theme different from the predetermined theme is included and the player specifies the image, the result of the error search in the “error search effect” should be successful. Good. Specifically, for example, in the first episode of the original work, although only the characters A and B appear, in the slide images displayed when the winning combination is won, the third and subsequent episodes of the original work are shown. It suffices to include an image in which the character C that appears only in is displayed. By doing so, for example, a player who is attached to the original work can perform the “error search performance” with particular feelings, and thus it is possible to further enhance the interest in the performance.

Further, as described above, in the case of displaying an image at least partially different from the base image in the “error search effect”, the portion different from the base image does not have to be only one location, and a plurality of locations may be different. .. In this case, for example, the number of different parts may be different depending on the type of winning combination. For example, if there is one part different from the base image, it is highly likely that BB3 or BB4 is won, and if there are multiple parts different from the base image, there is a possibility that BB1 or BB2 is won. It may be higher. By doing this, it is possible to suggest even the type of bonus combination that has been won.

In addition, when notifying that the result of the error search in the “error search production” was a failure, for example, a message such as “???” is displayed to clearly indicate that the error search result was a failure. You may not.

In addition, if a plurality of types of base images are provided and, for example, if the "chance eye" is won, one of the plurality of types of base images is determined, and thereafter, whether or not the bonus combination is won. Depending on whether to display the base image as it is, or to display as an image having a different portion at least in part, it may be determined. Further, in this case, the difficulty level for finding an error may be different depending on the type of the determined base image.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to notify whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition (for example, winning a bonus combination) that enables control to a bonus state advantageous to the player is established, the predetermined advantageous condition is given. Is satisfied, the first specific image (for example, an image partially different from the base image) is displayed, and when the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied, the second specific image (for example, the base image) is displayed. The same image) can be displayed, and when the player performs an operation of designating a part different from the second specific image when the first specific image is displayed, It is possible to display a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") for informing that the advantageous condition is established.

With this, it is possible to inform whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied by the new effect mode in which the predetermined operation of the player is also involved, so that the interest for the transition to the advantageous state for the player is improved. Can be planned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second specific image is the same as or similar to the predetermined image in the original work used as the motif of the game machine. As a result, a player who is attached to the original work can easily recognize whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition is established, and thus, it is possible to increase the motivation for the game and further increase the interest in the production.

(Example of a bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 2))
Next, with reference to FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, a description will be given of an example (No. 2) of the bonus winning combination notification effect. FIG. 89 shows a bonus winning combination notification effect that can be displayed on the display device 11 with a predetermined probability when, for example, an internal winning combination (for example, a “chance eye”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus winning combination is determined. FIG. 90 shows a timing chart of an effect example (No. 2), and FIG. 90 shows a display example of an effect example (No. 2) of the bonus winning combination notification effect. In the example of the bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 2), the example in which the effect is performed by the display device 11 is described, but the example is not limited to this, and other effect devices (such as the speaker group 84 and The effect can be executed by the LED group 85).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in the example of the bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 2), an effect entitled “long press effect” is performed. In this "long press effect", for example, when the stop operation in the third stop operation is long pressed in the following manner, a different effect from that in the case where it is not long pressed is performed. is there.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the operation means that is the target of the "long press" is the stop button in the third stop operation (any one of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R). It is not limited to. For example, the stop button in the first stop operation (any one of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R) may be used, or the stop button in the second stop operation (the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C). Or the right stop button 17R). Further, the stop button may be operated at a timing not directly related to the stop operation. That is, when any of the stop buttons is operated, the "long press effect" can be performed.

Further, for example, the operation means that is the target of the “long press” may be the bet button (MAX bet button 15a or 1 bet button 15b) or the start lever 16. In this case, when the bet button is operated at the timing of the medal insertion operation, the “long press” can be set as the target of “long pressing”, or the bet button is operated at the timing different from the timing of the medal insertion operation. It can also be the target of “push”. Further, in this case, when the start lever 16 is operated at the timing of the start operation, the target of the “long press” can be set. It can also be the target of.

Further, for example, the operating means that is the target of "long pressing" is not limited to the operating means for performing the above-described game-related operation, and may be an operating means for performing an effect-related operation. For example, it may be the sub-display device 18 provided with the touch sensor 19, the display device 11 provided with the touch sensor in at least a part of the above, or the physical operation means described above.

As shown in FIG. 89, for example, when it is determined that the “long press effect” is to be executed, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is started, and the stop switch is turned on (on edge). When 3 seconds have passed (long press) in this state, "effect 1" is executed, after that, when the stop button is pressed in the third stop operation and the stop switch is turned off (off edge), The “effect 2” is executed. That is, when the stop button in the third stop operation is pressed for a predetermined period (3 seconds), "effect 1" and "effect 2" are executed. When the stop switch is turned off (off edge) during execution of "effect 1", the execution of "effect 1" is ended and the execution of "effect 2" is started even in the middle.

On the other hand, for example, when it is determined that the "long press effect" is to be executed, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is started, but the stop switch is in the on state (on edge). Before 3 seconds have elapsed, when the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is completed and the stop switch is in the off state (off edge) (short press), "effect 1" is not executed and " Only production 2” is executed.

The effect pattern of "long press effect" is not limited to the one described above. For example, when pressing the stop button in the third stop operation is started and the stop switch is in the on state (on edge) for 3 seconds (long press), "production 1" and then "production 2" May be included. That is, when the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation, and the stop switch is in the on state (on edge) for 3 seconds (long press), the stop switch is in the off state (off edge). Regardless of whether or not it is, it may have an effect pattern in which "effect 1" and "effect 2" are executed. In addition, for example, when pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is started and three seconds have elapsed (long press) while the stop switch is in the on state (on edge), only “effect 2” is executed. You may have a production pattern.

Further, for example, although the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is started, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation ends before 3 seconds elapse with the stop switch in the on state (on edge). However, when the stop switch is in the off state (off edge) (short press), there may be an effect pattern that is executed as "effect 1" and subsequently "effect 2". That is, even before the stop switch is in the on state (on edge) for 3 seconds, if the stop switch is in the off state (off edge), "effect 1" and "effect 2" are displayed. It may have an effect pattern to be executed. In addition, for example, even before 3 seconds have elapsed in the state where the stop switch is in the on state (on edge), when the stop switch is in the off state (off edge), only “effect 1” is executed. It may have an effect pattern.

When a plurality of effect patterns are provided in this way, for example, one of these effect patterns is selected with different selection probabilities depending on whether or not the bonus combination is won. You can do this. Further, in such a case, even when the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation and the stop switch is in the on state (on edge) for 3 seconds, the “effect 2” is already executed. If so, "effect 1" may not be executed.

An example of a mode in which the “effect 1” and the “effect 2” shown in FIG. 89 are executed will be described with reference to FIG. 90. In addition, in FIG. 90, a display example at the time of long press and short press when the bonus combination is won will be described.

First, when it is determined that the "long press effect" is to be executed, first, at least at a predetermined timing before the stop operation of the third stop operation is performed, such as "hold and hold ~" A message is displayed, and an effect is urged that the stop button should be held down during the stop operation of the third stop operation.

Then, at the time of the stop operation of the third stop operation, if the player continues to press the stop button for 3 seconds or more, for example, "STEP 1" to "STEP 3" are sequentially displayed "production 1". Is executed. Then, when the player finishes pressing the stock button, for example, “effect 2” for notifying that the bonus combination is won by executing a display such as “WIN!” is executed. In addition, when the bonus combination is not won, it is possible to display in the “effect 2” that the bonus combination is not won, for example, “LOSE” is displayed. Further, in the “production 1”, for example, the degree of expectation of winning the bonus combination may be notified. In this case, for example, in the case of having the effect pattern displayed up to "STEP 1", the effect pattern displayed up to "STEP 2", and the effect pattern displayed up to "STEP 3", and winning the bonus combination For example, the effect pattern displayed up to “STEP 3” is likely to be selected, and when the bonus combination is not won, it may be difficult to select the effect pattern displayed up to “STEP 3”. By doing so, the degree of expectation of winning the bonus combination is informed by long-pressing, so that it is possible to further improve the interest in the production in which the content changes according to the operation of the player. You can

On the other hand, at the time of the stop operation of the third stop operation, if the player does not continue to press the stop button for 3 seconds or more, for example, the degree of expectation of winning the bonus combination as described above is notified. "Production 1" is not executed, but only "Production 2" that is informed of whether or not the winning combination is won.

It should be noted that various methods can be adopted for the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side) to recognize the pressing time of the stop button. For example, in the reel stop control process (see FIG. 72), when the main CPU 101 transmits a reel stop command every time the stop switch detects that the valid stop button is pressed, the sub CPU 201 When the reel stop command based on the pressing of the stop button of the 3 stop operation is received, the time measurement is started, and when the time measurement time is 3 seconds, "effect 1" is executed, and the third stop operation is performed. When the stop button is completely pressed and the winning operation command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is received, “effect 2” may be executed. Further, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute "effect 1" and "effect 2" based on the parameter indicating the on/off state of the stop switch included in the no-operation command transmitted from the main CPU 101. The execution timing may be controlled. In this way, the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) does not need to measure the pressing time of the stop button, which reduces the control load related to the effect of changing the contents according to the operation of the player. be able to.

Note that when the "long press effect" is controlled by the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side), for example, by the operation time for the above-described touch panel or physical operation means, the sub CPU 201 independently. It is possible to measure the time during which the operation means is operated and control the effect contents in accordance with the time measurement result. Here, in the gaming machine as described in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 side has a capacity limit, but the sub control circuit 200 side generally has no special restriction, and thus at least the capacity is limited. If the sub CPU 201 controls such an effect, the control load related to the effect can be reduced.

Further, the predetermined condition for performing the control for executing the "production 2" is not limited to the end of the operation on the operation unit, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the predetermined condition can be that an operation on an operation means different from the target operation means is performed, or if the number of operations on the target operation means is less than the predetermined number of times, the 1” and “effect 2” are generated in this order, and when the number of operations on the target operation means reaches a predetermined number of times, a predetermined condition is satisfied, and “effect 1” is not generated. 2” may be generated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the operation (for example, the on-edge) of the specific operation unit is detected, the time counting is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the time counting, Before performing a control for executing “production 1” and performing a control for executing “production 2” when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an off edge is detected), a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of timing. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible not to perform the control for executing "effect 1".

Accordingly, even when the effect is changed according to the operation mode of the specific operation means, it is possible to reduce the control load related to the effect.

(Example of a bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 3))
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, an example (part 3) of the bonus winning combination notification effect will be described. FIG. 90 shows a display device with a predetermined probability when, for example, an internal winning combination (for example, “watermelon 2”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus combination is determined and the bonus combination is also won. 11 shows a display example of a bonus winning combination notification effect that can be displayed in (11). In the example of the bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 3), the example in which the effect is performed by the display device 11 is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other effect devices (for example, the information display 6). , The LED 82, or the instruction monitor (instruction display) may be used to execute the effect.

For example, the game value display unit (VL) shown in FIG. 91 may be displayed on the display device 11 in a predetermined area (payout number display unit) where the number of payouts can be displayed when a small winning combination is established. If it is an advantageous section, it may be displayed in a predetermined area (acquired number display section) in which the cumulative number of payout numbers in the advantageous section can be displayed, or an area different from these payout number display section and acquired number display section. May be displayed in a predetermined area. Further, as described above, the 7-segment display device such as the information display device 6 controlled by the main control circuit 90 side may function as the game value display unit (VL) when the effect is executed. Good.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the example of the bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 3), an effect entitled "number-of-firsts display effect" is performed. In this "number-of-numbers display effect", for example, the number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (the expected number of medals) is notified before the operation in the bonus state is started, so that the player wins the bonus role. It is a performance that informs you that you have done it.

In the following, an example in which the value of the combination end number counter is displayed as the expected number of sheets to be notified in the "number destination display effect" is described, but it is notified in the "number destination display effect". The mode of the expected number of sheets to be acquired is not limited to this. For example, in the BB3 state or the BB4 state, the value of the combination end number counter is "165", but if all the "15" medals are paid out in each game in the bonus state, the BB3 state Alternatively, in the BB4 state, the game can be played "12 times", and the actual payout number is "180". Therefore, "180", which is the actual payout number, may be displayed as the scheduled acquisition number. Further, even in the BB3 state or the BB4 state, it is necessary to insert three medals to play a game. Therefore, if the value of the combination end number counter is "165", all the games in the bonus state are assumed. If "15" medals are paid out, the net additional number of each game is "15-3=12". Therefore, the cumulative total number of the net increase number is set to “12”ד11 times”=“132” in accordance with the value of the combination end number counter, and this “132” is displayed as the expected number of acquisitions. You may do it. In addition, as described above, since the game can be actually played “12 times”, the cumulative total number of net increase is “12 sheets”ד12 times”=“according to the number of times the game can be actually played”. The number of 144 sheets may be set, and this “144” sheet may be displayed as the scheduled acquisition number.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the BB1 to BB4 states, since the push order small winning combination is won, the medals to be paid out for each game depending on whether or not the pushing order is correct when the push order small winning combination is won. The number of sheets also changes ("15 sheets" or "6 sheets", see FIG. 23). In addition, when the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, the pushing order is not notified in the bonus state based on the bonus combination, and when the bonus combination is won in the advantageous section, the bonus combination is won. In the bonus state based on, the push order notification is performed.

Therefore, for example, when a bonus combination (for example, “F_BB3”) is won in the advantageous section, the above-mentioned “144” sheets (“180” sheets when the number of thrown-in sheets is not considered) are displayed as the expected number of times of acquisition. However, when a bonus combination (for example, “F_BB3”) is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and the probability that “15 coins” will be paid out when the push order notification is not performed in the bonus state, If it is set to 50%, ("12 sheets" x "8 times" = 96 sheets) + ("3 sheets" x "8 times" = 24 sheets) = "120" sheets (when the number of inserted sheets is not considered May be displayed as (15 sheets)ד8 times”=120 sheets+(“6 sheets”ד8 times”=48 sheets)=“168” sheets” as the planned acquisition number. .. That is, the expected number of coins to be notified in the "number of coins display effect" may be an expected value of the number of coins to be paid out (or a net increase in coins) in the bonus state.

As shown in FIG. 91, for example, when a predetermined internal winning combination including a bonus combination (for example, “F_BB3+F_watermelon 2”) is determined, it is determined that the “number-of-numbers display effect” is executed. In this case, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped (that is, after the third stop), the expected acquisition number “165” is displayed on the game value display unit (VL). As a result, the player is notified that the bonus combination (“F_BB3” or “F_BB4” in the example shown in FIG. 91) has been won. In addition, in the present embodiment, the combination of the symbols related to the small winning combination and the replay combination is preferentially controlled to be stopped more than the combination of the symbols related to the bonus winning combination, so basically, the game won for this bonus winning (the bonus winning combination). In the winning game), a combination of symbols related to a small combination or a replay combination (“C_watermelon” in the example shown in FIG. 91) is displayed, and a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination (“C_red” in the example shown in FIG. 91). Different color BB") is not displayed. Of course, in the bonus winning combination game, it is possible to display a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, but in this case, the “number-of-numbers display effect” may not be executed, and will be described later. As described above, the "value-front display effect" is used as the game value display unit (VL) for displaying the remaining number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (or the actual number of medals actually paid out). It can also be executed.

After that, until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed (until the bonus combination is established), the display of the planned acquisition number “165” on the game value display unit (VL) is continued. Then, even when the operation of the bonus state is started, the display of the expected number of purchases “165” on the game value display portion (VL) continues, and for example, the combination of symbols relating to the small winning combination in the bonus state (the example shown in FIG. 91). Then, when "Bell+JACA: 15" is displayed (the winning in the bonus state occurs), the number displayed on the game value display unit (VL) is appropriately subtracted and updated to be displayed. That is, the game value display unit (VL) displays the expected number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state before the bonus state is started, and in the bonus state, the number of medals actually paid out. In accordance with the above, the remaining number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (or the actual number of medals actually paid out) is displayed.

In the present embodiment, when the bonus combination is won, it may be decided to shift to the advantageous section. Therefore, for example, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section when the bonus combination is won, the expected number of sheets to be acquired in this advantageous section (a general expected value is sufficient. If 40 games continue, and if one game averages 1 medals net increase in the line battle state, "40" pieces are added to the bonus number to be acquired (added), and the game is played. You may make it display on a value display part (VL).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the right to allow the generation of the advantageous state (for example, the bonus state) is given (for example, the bonus combination is won), the determination is made. It is possible to execute a specific notification effect to be notified (for example, “number-first display effect”), and in this specific notification effect, a predetermined value related to a game value that can be acquired in an advantageous state that is generated based on the right that is decided to be granted. It is possible to display the value (for example, the value of the combination end number counter as the expected acquisition number).

As a result, since it is possible to perform an effect that specifically notifies the value of the right (winning content) obtained by the player, it is possible to increase the interest in the effect and the interest in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined value is displayed in the specific notification effect, the display of the predetermined value is continued at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and when the game value is obtained in the advantageous state, it is acquired. The display of the predetermined value is updated based on the value of the game value.

With this, a series of effects for notifying the value can be appropriately performed before and after the occurrence of the advantageous state, so that interest in the effects can be further enhanced.

<Modifications, etc.>
Heretofore, the configuration and operation of the gaming machine of the invention according to the present embodiment have been described, including the operational effects thereof. However, the invention according to this embodiment is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made without departing from the gist of the invention according to this embodiment.

[Modification]
In the present embodiment, at least in the non-advantageous section, when "F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2" and "F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2" having different winning probabilities between the set values are won, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined. It was set not to decide (does not perform ART lottery), but even if "F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2" and "F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2" that have different winning probabilities between the respective set values win, there is a gap between the respective set values. In the same manner as in other internal winning combinations including bonus combinations having the same winning probability, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART lottery is performed). In this case, in the ART lottery, the probability of being determined to shift to the advantageous section may be the same winning probability among the set values. That is, by defining a bonus winning combination having different winning probabilities between the set values, the probability that the transition to the advantageous section is determined may be changed between the set values.

Further, in the present embodiment, the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified even in the normal advantage section, but the probability that the normal advantage section is determined to shift to the advantage section is determined. Is favored over the non-advantageous section, but it may be configured as a section in which the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified. In this case, when the non-advantageous section is shifted to the normal advantageous section, the state indicator is not started to be lit, and the lighting of the state indicator is started only when it is shifted to the advantageous section. Good.

It should be noted that the normal advantageous section is a period in which the player's medals are reduced as a whole (that is, the payout rate is less than “1”), regardless of whether or not the information of the advantageous stop operation is notified to the player. Period), and the advantageous section may be a period in which the medals of the player increase as a whole (that is, a period in which the payout rate exceeds "1"). Further, even if there is a period (for example, each of the above-mentioned preparation states) in which the medals of some players decrease in the advantageous section, the period may be included in the advantageous section.

That is, when the game section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, the advantageous section enhances the player's expectation, but cannot expect an increase in the number of balls (for example, "normal It may be configured to include an "advantageous section") and an increase section (for example, the "advantageous section" of the present embodiment) in which an increase in the number of payouts is actually expected.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the RT2 state during the advantageous section, even if the push order is informed, the player shifts (falls) to the RT1 state due to a mistake in the push order. , It is supposed that the game period of the advantageous section progresses (is updated), but in this case, the game period of the advantageous section does not progress (is not updated) until it shifts (returns) to the RT2 state. Can also Further, in this case, for example, a part of the number of games required from the fall to the RT1 state to the return to the RT2 state (for example, the game required to fall from the RT1 state to the RT2 state) If the number of games is 10, the game is 1/2 of 5 games, or 2 games are uniformly played regardless of the number of games required from returning to RT1 state to returning to RT2 state). The period may be advanced (updated).

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the “chance eye” is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not directly determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (the ART lottery is not performed). However, the internal winning combination and the condition for performing the ART lottery can be appropriately modified and set. For example, when the “chance eye” is determined as the internal winning combination, the ART lottery is not performed when the “chance hand” is established, but the “chance hand” is dropped and the “RT3 transition eye” is established (this In this case, ART lottery may be performed regardless of whether the RT3 state is entered or not. That is, when a specific internal winning combination is won, the ART lottery may not be performed when a winning is generated, and the ART lottery may be performed when a winning is not generated due to being missed.

In addition, for example, a small winning combination that pays out medals equal to or less than the number of inserted medals (for example, 3) is determined as an internal winning combination with a high probability, and as a general rule, a bonus winning combination is not established in a state between flags, and It is also possible to adopt a specification in which a basic game state is set as a state between flags to allow a game to be played. Further, in this case, the bonus state may be configured such that the acquired medals are reduced or maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period is set to "1500 times", but the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period may be less than or more than that. Good. Further, the regulation monitoring period may be changed according to the game situation. For example, the regulation monitoring period is determined by the net increase number (or payout number) of medals, and the net decrease number (that is, the player inserts the medals) in a predetermined pachi-slot 1 during a predetermined business day of the game store. However, if the number of medals that are not returned to the player by payout and are profitable to the game store side (or simply the number of inserted medals) is “500”, medals corresponding to the predetermined regulation monitoring period. It is also possible to add "500" to the number of "1500" and to forcibly end the advantageous section until a medal of "2000" is obtained in a series of advantageous sections.

[Another example of playability (game specification) mountable in the present embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92 to FIG. 99, another example of the playability (that is, game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as the gaming state, a bonus state (special gaming state) becomes a gaming period that is advantageous to the player when the bonus is activated, and a gaming period that is relatively disadvantageous to the player because it is not the bonus state. There will be a non-bonus state (normal game state), and further, there will be a plurality of RT states having different winning probabilities of the re-play (replay) role in the non-bonus state, which will change the advantage degree of the player. (See FIG. 13). In addition, in the present embodiment, as a game section, an advantageous section (an advantageous state) that is a game section that is advantageous to the player when the information of the stop operation is notified to the player, and the advantage section is relatively relatively It has been described that there is a non-advantageous section (normal state) that is a disadvantageous game section for the player (see FIG. 14). Then, various modifications can be made to the various conditions such as the game state and the start/continuation/end of the game section and the contents thereof. In addition, unless otherwise indicated, in other examples (1 to 6) of the game property (game specification) shown below, the game state, the game section, the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols, etc. in the present embodiment. A game element can be used as appropriate.

[Another example of playability (game specification) (1)]
First, with reference to FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, another example (No. 1) of the playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram conceptually explaining a game flow in another example (1) of the game property (game specification), and FIG. 93 is another example (1) of the game property (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the provision expected value of the game value in.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the player usually starts the game from the (A) non-advantageous section. (A) In the non-advantageous section, the game value amount is decreased due to the fact that the player is not notified of the stop operation information. That is, the expected value-added value (gradient value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes a negative value and becomes a downward slope.

In the (A) non-advantageous section, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the (A) non-advantageous section is shifted to the (B) advantageous section. (B) In the advantageous section, the game value amount increases (at least does not decrease) due to the fact that the player is informed of the stop operation information. That is, the expected value (gradient value) of the gaming value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes a positive value (at least not a negative value) and becomes an upward slope (not at least a downward slope). It should be noted that, for convenience of explanation, in this example, the expected grant value in the ready state and the expected grant value in the bonus state are not considered.

Note that the expected value to be given can be calculated (designed) as follows. For example, if the pushing order (for example, 5 choices) is correct, 15 medals are paid out, and if the pushing order (for example, 5 choices) is incorrect, no medals are paid out. In the case of (32768/65536) and it is necessary to bet three medals for one game in principle, 30 medals are required for ten games. In the case of (A) non-advantageous section, when the player wins the push order small win during 10 games, the push order becomes the correct answer and the payout of 15 medals is 1/10. Since it is (1/2×1/5), if the probability is met, the amount of medals will be -15 (15-30) during 10 games, so the expected value of grant is 1 time. It becomes "-1.5 pieces" per game. On the other hand, in the case of (B) advantageous section, if the information of the stop operation is notified for all the push order small wins and the player performs the stop operation accordingly, the push order small win is won during 10 games. Since it is 1/2 that the player can receive the payout of 15 medals at the correct pressing order, if the probability is the same, the amount of medals will be +45 (75 Since it is -30), the expected value of grant is "+4.5" per game. However, these are examples for convenience of explanation, and it is also possible to calculate (design) the expected grant value by taking into consideration the winning probability of the replay role and the winning probability of the bonus role (and expected grant value in the bonus state). Is.

In this example, the expected value (gradient value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value (expected value α) in the advantageous section (B) (B-1) advantageous section 1 Then, the expected value (gradient value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the second expected value (expected value β) different from the first expected value (expected value α) (B-2). ) Advantageous section 2 is provided, and when (2) the expected value variation condition is satisfied, the transition from (B-1) advantageous section 1 to (B-2) advantageous section 2 is made. In this example, (1) when the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, first, (A) the non-advantageous section is shifted to (B-1) the advantageous section 1, and (B-1) in the advantageous section 1 (2). When the expected value change condition is satisfied, the transition to (B-2) advantageous section 2 is made, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, if (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (A) non-advantageous. It may be configured such that the section shifts to the (B-2) advantageous section 2 and (B-1) the advantageous section 2 when (2) the expected value variation condition is satisfied in the (B-2) advantageous section 2. ..

In addition, for example, when the condition for starting (1) the advantageous section is satisfied, it may be determined which of (B-1) the advantageous section 1 and (B-2) the advantageous section 2 are to be moved. , (1) with respect to the start condition of the advantageous section, (B-1) the start condition (1-1) of the advantageous section 1 and (B-2) the start condition (1-2) of the advantageous section 2, respectively, (A) In the non-advantageous section, depending on which start condition (1-1 or 1-2) is satisfied, the transition to (B-1) advantageous section 1 or (B-2) advantageous section 2 is made. You may

Then, in (B) the advantageous section ((B-1) the advantageous section 1 and (B-2) the advantageous section 2), when (3) the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (B) the advantageous section becomes (A) non-existent. Transition to the advantageous zone (that is, the advantageous zone ends). In this example, the transition control of the (A) non-advantageous section and the (B) advantageous section is performed in this way.

Here, in this example, the expected value α in the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is configured to be larger than the expected value β in the (B-2) advantageous section 2 (that is, (B- 2) The expected value β in the advantageous section 2 is configured to be smaller than the expected value α in (B-1) the advantageous section 1). Specifically, for example, in the case of using the above example, in (B-1) the advantageous zone 1, the probability that the information of the stop operation is notified at the time of the winning of the push order small combination (notification probability) is 100% (that is, By making the notification 5 times during the winning of 5 times), the expected value α is set to “+4.5 pieces”, while (B-2) in the advantageous zone 2, the information of the stop operation is given when the winning of the small push combination is won. The expected value β is set to “+−0 sheets” by setting the probability of notification (notification probability) to 40% (that is, notification twice in five times of winning).

The expected value α and the expected value β can be set arbitrarily. For example, if (B-1) the advantageous section 1 is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than at least (A) the non-advantageous section, the notification probability in the advantageous section 1 is 1 to 100%. It can be set to any notification probability. Further, for example, (B-2) advantageous section 2 is in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player over at least (A) non-advantageous section, and has a lower notification probability than (B-1) advantageous section 1. If so, the notification probability in the advantageous section 2 can be set to any notification probability from 1 to 100%.

Further, each of the notification probability in the advantageous section 1 and the notification probability in the advantageous section 2 may be a predetermined probability, or may be changed according to the status of providing the game value. For example, when the expected value α and the expected value β are set to “+3.0 sheets” and “+1.0 sheets”, respectively, (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 In each of the above, the expected pay value is calculated for each predetermined number of games (for example, 10 times), and the calculated expected pay value is a predetermined threshold value (for example, plus or minus) than the expected value α and the expected value β. 1)), the notification probability is changed as appropriate in the subsequent game, in each period of (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. The final assigned expected value may be (approximated to) the expected value α and the expected value β.

Further, the method of setting the expected value α and the expected value β is not limited to the method of changing the notification probability described above. For example, (B-1) advantageous section 1 is a state where the winning probability of the replay combination is high (high RT state), and (B-2) advantageous section 2 is a state where the winning probability of the replay combination is low (low RT state), The expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α by changing the winning probability (winning probability) of the replay role (in this case, the expected winning value is added to the winning probability of the replay role). Also, the notification probability may or may not be changed). That is, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by controlling the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 in different RT states.

Further, for example, (B-1) the advantageous section 1 is set to a state where it is not difficult for the bonus (bonus state) to operate, and (B-2) the advantageous section 2 is a state where it is difficult to operate the bonus, The expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α by changing the bonus operation probability (winning probability) (in this case, the expected expected value is the bonus operation probability and the award in the bonus state). The expected value is taken into consideration, and the notification probability may or may not be changed). That is, regarding the bonus operation, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by controlling the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 in different control states. .. In addition, the state that does not make it difficult to operate the bonus, or the state that makes it difficult, the type of internal winning combination (including carryover combination), the type of game state, the control content of the stop control according to them, or the stop operation It is possible to appropriately create the information contents of the above in combination with the information contents (see an explanation of FIGS. 94 to 99 described later for an example).

Further, for example, in the case of the pressing order small winning combination of the above example, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode, 15 medals are paid out, and the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode. If it is performed, 6 medals shall be paid out, and (B-1) When the pushing order small winning combination is won in the advantageous zone 1, the information of the stop operation showing the above-mentioned predetermined mode shall be notified, (B-2) When the pushing small winning combination is won in the advantageous zone 2, the information of the stop operation indicating the above-described specific mode is notified, and the expected value β is made larger than the expected value α by changing the payout number. May be set to be smaller (in this case, the notification probability may be changed or may not be changed).

Further, for example, a plurality of types of the pushing order small winning combination of the above example (for example, the pushing order small winning combination A and the pushing order small winning combination B) are provided, and the winning probability of the pushing order small winning combination B is the winning of the pushing order small winning combination A. (B-1) When the push order small winning combination A is won in the advantageous section 1, the information of the stop operation is notified, while when the push order small winning combination B is won, the stop operation is performed. The information is not notified (though the information of the stop operation may be notified). (B-2) When the push order small winning combination B is won in the advantageous section 2, the information of the stop operation is notified. The expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α by not notifying the information of the stop operation when the push order small winning combination A is won. That is, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by making the notification target winning combination different between (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. It should be noted that the winning probabilities of the small pushing order A and the small pushing order B are the same (or substantially the same), but the payout number at the time of the correct answer of the pushing order is different from 15 to 6 as described above. Then, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed.

Further, for example, as an internal winning combination, a push order small combination (for example, 6 choices) and a push order replay (for example, 6 choices) are provided, and a high RT state and a low RT state are provided as game states, When the press order replay is won, if the press order is correct, the low RT state shifts to the high RT state, and the high RT state maintains the high RT state. A combination of symbols is displayed. On the other hand, if the pushing order is incorrect, the low RT state is maintained in the low RT state, and the low RT state is transitioned in the high RT state (see, for example, FIG. 23), (B -1) In the advantageous zone 1, the push order that is the correct answer is notified when both the push order small win and the push order replay are won. When the push-order replay is won, the expected value α is set such that the state shifts to the high RT state or is maintained in the high RT state. (B-2) In the advantageous section 2, the correct answer is given for either of these. The expected value β may be set by not notifying the pressing order that results in.

In this case, (B-2) When the advantageous section 2 is set to a state where the correct push order is notified for the push order small win and the correct push order is not notified for the push order replay, a high RT is set. It is difficult to shift to the state or maintain the high RT state (the stay rate in the low RT state becomes high), but it is easy to increase the medals when the winning push small win is won. Can be created. Further, in the case where (B-2) the advantageous section 2 is in a state where the correct pushing order is notified for the pushing order replay and the correct pushing order is not notified for the pushing order small win, the high RT state is set. It is easy to shift to or to maintain the high RT state (the stay rate in the high RT state is high), but it is difficult to increase medals when winning the push order small win. can do. That is, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by differentiating the type of the internal winning combination to be notified in (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. Good (in this case, the notification probability may be changed or may not be changed). In (B-2) advantageous zone 2, the expected value β is set by not notifying the correct push order regardless of whether the push order small combination or the push order replay is won. You can also do so.

Further, for example, for the small push order combination (for example, 6 choices), in the (B-1) advantageous section 1, at least the pushing order that is the correct answer for the first stop operation and the second stop operation (that is, the correct answer push). The expected value α is set by being notified of all the orders, and in (B-2) the advantageous section 2, the pushing order that is the correct answer only for the first stop operation (that is, a part of the correct pushing order). ), the expected value β may be set. More specifically, for example, when the first stop operation is “left”, the second stop operation is “middle”, and the third stop operation is “right”, the push order small winning combination that is the correct push order is won, (B-1) In the advantageous zone 1, the pushing order "left → middle → right" is notified, and if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, the medals can be increased with a probability of 100%. (B-2) If it is in the advantageous zone 2, the pushing order of "left →? →?" is notified, and even if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, the remaining two options must be correctly answered by the player himself. Therefore, it is only possible to increase medals with a probability of 50%. That is, the expected value α and the expected value β are changed by differentiating the notification content (selection number) of the stop operation information between (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. (In this case, the notification probability may be changed or may not be changed).

Further, for example, (B) the advantageous section is informed of the stop operation without fail, and the expected value is a high net increase of “+10.0 sheets”, but the duration of one time is relatively short (for example, between 8 games). ) It is configured as an increased section (special advantageous section), and (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 are not notified of stop operation information (or are notified with a predetermined probability smaller than the special advantageous section). However, it may be configured as a production section (normal advantage section) having different expected values with respect to the transition to the special advantage section, and the special advantage section and the normal advantage section can be changed to each other. To do. Then, (B-1) in the advantageous zone 1, the transition lottery (AT lottery) to the special advantage zone is performed, and in the lottery, for example, it is determined that there is a probability of about 1/5 to shift to the special advantage zone. On the other hand, the transition probability is set so as to win (win the AT lottery) (that is, the expected value α is set by the increase rate of the game medium in the increase section and the transition probability to the increase section), while (B- 2) AT lottery is also performed in the advantageous section 2, but in the lottery, for example, the transition probability is set so as to win the AT lottery with a probability of about 1/20 (that is, the increase of the game medium in the increase section). The expected value β smaller than the expected value α may be set depending on the rate and the transition probability to the increase section.

That is, the expected value α and the expected value β are changed by making the transition probabilities to the increased section (special advantageous section) different between (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. May be. The transition probability described above can be set appropriately. Further, AT lottery may not be performed in (B-2) advantageous section 2, and in this case, in (B-2) advantageous section 2, for example, with a probability of about 1/20, (B- 1) Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section 1 is randomly determined, and when the lottery is won, the (B-2) advantageous section 2 may be shifted to the (B-1) advantageous section 1. Further, the conditions for shifting from (B-1) advantageous section 1 to (B-2) advantageous section 2 can be set appropriately. In this case, for example, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, a game is played for a predetermined period (for example, 5 games) without winning the AT lottery, and a fall occurs when the AT lottery is non-win The lottery is won, the number of continuous transitions to the increased section (special advantageous section) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), and the number of cards acquired in the increased section (special advantageous section) is a predetermined number (for example, 400). Beyond the number), it can be adopted. As described above, the game characteristics can be further diversified by the transition specifications of (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2.

In this example, as a state in which different expected grant values are set, the expected value α is set (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the expected value β is set (B-2) advantageous section 2 Although the description is given by taking an example of having two states, three or more states in which different expected application values are set may be set as appropriate. For example, it may further have an advantageous section 3 in which the expected value γ is set (B-3). In this case, the expected addition value can be set so that α≧γ≧β or α≧β≧γ. That is, between (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2, an intermediate (B-3) advantageous section 3 having an expected expected value is set, or (B-2) advantageous section. By setting the advantageous section 3 in which the grant expected value is smaller than 2 (B-3), and by varying the grant expected value stepwise every time the sequentially changing condition is satisfied, it is possible to further divide the grant expected value. Adjustment may be possible.

(First Mode in Other Example (Part 1) of Gaming (Game Specifications))
Next, the first aspect of the game specification based on the other example (No. 1) of the game property (game specification) described above will be described. In the first mode, for example, the expected value α is set to “+3.0 sheets” and the expected value β is set to “+2.0 sheets”. However, as described above, the expected value of grant can be set arbitrarily.

In the first aspect, in (A) the non-advantageous section, when (1) the condition for starting the advantageous section is satisfied, the process moves to (B-1) the advantageous section 1. It should be noted that (1) as the start condition of the advantageous zone, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, a condition that determines to shift to ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transfer lottery based on the type (or dedicated not based).

(B-1) When it shifts to the advantageous section 1, at least a predetermined period (a predetermined game period can be set, for example, for 50 games), the expected expected value is the expected value α (for example, “+3”). (B-1) Advantageous section 1 continues. Further, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section. As conditions for determining to continue the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, conditions for determining to continue ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on the type of (or not based on).

(B-1) When it is decided to continue the advantageous section when the game is played in the advantageous section 1 for the predetermined period, (2) the expected value changing condition is satisfied, and (B-2) ) Move to Advantage Zone 2. (B-2) When shifting to the advantageous section 2, at least a specific period (a predetermined game period can be set, for example, for 100 games), an expected expected value β is an expected value β (for example, “+2”). (B-2) Advantageous section 2 continues. In addition, in (B-2) the advantageous section 2, it is not further determined whether the advantageous section is continued. (B-2) When the game is played in the advantageous section 2 for the specific period, (3) the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, and (A) the non-advantageous section is entered.

On the other hand, (B-1) when the game is played in the advantageous period 1 for the predetermined period, even if it is not decided to continue the advantageous period, (3) the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, ( A) Shift to the non-advantageous section.

In addition, (B-1) When the game is played in the above-described predetermined period in the advantageous section 1, and when it is determined to continue the advantageous section, (2) the expected value variation condition is satisfied. In this case, once (B-1) the advantageous section 1 is shifted to the (A) non-advantageous section, and a predetermined waiting period (for example, any omen state between 4 and 32 games) has passed in the (A) non- advantageous section. After that, the (A) non-advantageous section may be shifted to the (B-2) advantageous section 2 and the advantageous section may be continued.

In addition, in the first aspect, (B-2) the advantageous section 2 is assumed to continue for the specific period, but the specific period is not set to an arbitrary game period set in advance, for example, (B-1) In the entire (B) advantageous section including the advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2, it may be a period until the provision expected value reaches the expected value β (for example, “+2.0 sheets”). That is, in the beginning of the advantageous section (B-1), the expected grant value is increased by the expected value α, and in the subsequent advantageous section (B-2), the expected grant value is adjusted (smaller) by the expected value β. May be. In this case, the predetermined waiting period may be included in the entire (B) advantageous section or included in the (B) entire advantageous section when the expected value to be granted is adjusted by the expected value β. It may be not.

Specifically, for example, in the case where (B-1) the advantageous value 1 is provided with the game value of the expected value α, the amount of the game value provided in the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is 3 cards×50 games. It becomes "150 sheets". After that, in (B-2) the advantageous section 2, a fixed reference (for example, 50 games may be used, a game longer than that, or a game shorter than that, or the actual game time may be used). In addition, other notification criteria can be appropriately adopted), and the notification probability is adjusted as appropriate so that (B) the expected expected value of the entire advantageous section becomes the expected value β. For example, if the entire (B) advantageous section is 100 games, (B-1) the advantageous value 1 is given a game value of "150 cards", so the remaining advantageous section is (B-2) advantageous. In section 2, the notification probability is adjusted so that a game value of “50 cards” is given between 50 games, and (B) a game value of “200 cards” is given to the entire advantageous section. ..

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, in a predetermined period after the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) is started, the state in which the expected value of the game value is relatively high (the expected value α is set). (B-1) It becomes possible to play the game in the advantageous section 1), and the expected value of the game value is relatively low (expected value β is set for a specific period after the advantageous state is continued). B-2) It becomes possible to play a game in the advantageous section 2). Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while maintaining the moderate gambling property.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible not to decide to continue the advantageous state for a specific period ((B-2) advantageous section 2) after the advantageous state is continued. By doing so, the payout rate can be managed more appropriately.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the first aspect, even when it is decided to continue the advantageous state during the advantageous state, the advantageous state is temporarily ended, and after the predetermined waiting period has elapsed, the advantageous state May be continued (restarted). In this way, not only the payout rate can be managed more appropriately, but also the interest of the game can be improved regarding whether or not the advantageous state continues.

(Second Mode in Another Example (1) of Gaming (Game Specifications))
Next, a second aspect of the game specification based on the other example (1) of the above-mentioned game property (game specification) will be described. In the second mode, for example, the expected value α is set to "+7.5 sheets" and the expected value β is set to "+-0 sheets". However, as described above, the expected value of grant can be set arbitrarily.

In this second mode, in (A) non-advantageous section, if (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (B-1) the advantageous section 1 is entered. It should be noted that (1) as the start condition of the advantageous zone, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, a condition that determines to shift to ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transfer lottery based on the type (or dedicated not based).

(B-1) When shifting to the advantageous section 1, the expected addition value is the expected value α (for example, “+7” for at least a predetermined period (a predetermined arbitrary game period, for example, 100 games)). (B-1) Advantageous section 1 continues. It should be noted that this predetermined period may be, for example, a period from the start of (B-1) advantageous section 1 until the given game value reaches (or exceeds) a predetermined amount (for example, 1000 cards). However, (B-1) the game time from the start of the advantageous section 1 may be a period until the game time reaches (or exceeds) a predetermined time (for example, 0.25 hours).

(B-1) When the game is played in the advantageous section 1 for the predetermined period, (2) the expected value changing condition is satisfied, and (B-2) the advantageous section 2 is entered. (B-2) When shifting to the advantageous section 2, the (3) advantageous value becomes the expected value β (for example, "+-0") until the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (B-2) advantage Section 2 continues. In the second aspect, (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is, for example, (B) that the game has been played for a specific period (for example, 1500 games) since the beginning of the advantageous section, or ( B) It can be defined as that the game value provided since the start of the advantageous section has become a specific amount (for example, a net increase of 3000 cards) (this end processing of the advantageous section is the limit described above or later). See processing). Further, even before the ending condition determined in this way is satisfied (for example, before the limit process is executed), a winning combination (a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed and the bonus state is activated) in the bonus combination. )), regardless of whether it is (B-1) advantageous section 1 or (B-2) advantageous section 2, (B) the advantageous section ends, and (B) from the advantageous section to (A). Move to the non-advantageous section. That is, in (B) the advantageous section, displaying the combination of symbols relating to the bonus combination that enables the shift to the bonus state is one of the conditions for ending the (3) advantageous section.

It should be noted that (3) as the ending condition of the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, a condition that is decided to be ended by ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transfer lottery based on the type (or dedicated not based). Further, in (B-2) the advantageous section 2, for example, until the condition for ending the (3) advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section ((B-2 ) It is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section 2), and when it is determined to continue the advantageous section, the advantageous section is continued for this predetermined unit, and when it is not decided to continue the advantageous section. May end the advantageous section even before (3) the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. In this case, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, conditions under which it is determined to continue ART) can be adopted as the condition for determining to continue the advantageous section, and It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on the type of internal winning combination (or dedicated not based).

Further, in the second aspect, in the (B) advantageous section, for example, the specific notification can be executed using the display device 11 or the like. The specific notification is a notification effect for informing the player that the bonus combination has been won (carried over). However, in the second aspect, the advantageous section ends when the combination of symbols relating to the bonus combination is displayed, so this specific notification is (display the combination of symbols relating to the bonus combination. Suggesting information that allows the player to select either ()) ending the advantageous period, or continuing the advantageous period (avoiding the combination of symbols relating to the bonus combination being displayed) It can be said that it is a notification effect for performing. Further, it may be a notification effect simply to indicate that it is possible to shift to the bonus state by displaying a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, or that a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. It may be a notification effect for suggesting that the advantageous section can be continued by avoiding.

For example, in the second mode, in (B) the advantageous section, when the bonus combination is won (or when the bonus combination is carried over), the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be displayed. In the case of a game, the specific notification can be executed. In the present embodiment, since the stop control for establishing the replay combination or the small combination preferentially over the bonus combination is performed, when the bonus combination and the replay combination or the small combination are won in succession (or the bonus combination is In the case where the replay combination or the small combination is won in the case of being carried over), in principle, the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is not displayed. That is, the "game in which the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be displayed" is not such a situation, and if the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination is It means that the game can be displayed.

When the specific notification is configured to be executed as described above, the player plays the game period until (3) the advantageous period ending condition is satisfied (for example, the advantageous period limit process is executed). Within the range, the advantageous section can be continued by avoiding the transition to the bonus state. From this viewpoint, it is not always necessary to divide the (B) advantageous section into the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 (that is, the granted expected value is the expected value α). And the expected value β need not be different), and (B) the expected expected value in the advantageous section may be a constant expected expected value (for example, “+1.5 sheets”).

Further, for example, in the second mode, (B-1) in the advantageous section 1, when the bonus combination is won (or when the bonus combination is carried over), (2) when the expected value change condition is satisfied. Can be configured such that (2) the specific notification is executed when the expected value change condition is satisfied. In this case, in the same manner as above, in the game after the specific notification becomes executable, the specific notification is given when the game is a “game in which a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination can be displayed”. It may be configured to be executed. Further, in the case where the bonus combination is won in (B-2) the advantageous section 2 after (2) the expected value changing condition is satisfied and before (3) the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, at this time, The specific notification may be configured to be executed. In this case, in the same manner as above, in the game after the specific notification becomes executable, the specific notification is given when the game is a “game in which a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination can be displayed”. It may be configured to be executed. In addition, in the case where the bonus combination is won (or carried over) in the advantageous section 1 (B-1), the "combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed". If it is a “playable game”, the specific notification may be executed.

When configured to execute the specific notification as described above, the player plays the game period until (3) the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied (for example, until the limit process for the advantageous period is executed). Within the range of (B-1), for example, in the game period of the advantageous section 1, the game value is dramatically increased by setting the expected value α, so that the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. In the game period of (B-2) the advantageous section 2, the expected value β is set and the game value does not dramatically increase, so that the bonus combination is avoided. It is also possible to display the combination of symbols and end the advantageous section, and then in the subsequent game (1) establish the condition for starting the advantageous section again (B-1) and select to move to the advantageous section 1. It is possible to choose, and if there is not enough time, it is possible to choose to end the game as it is. On the other hand, in the game period of (B-2) advantageous section 2, the expected value β is set, so that the game value does not dramatically increase, but (A) it is more advantageous to the player than the non-advantageous section. Since there is nothing wrong with this, in order to enjoy the game, it is possible to avoid displaying the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination and select to continue the advantageous section.

In addition, in the second aspect, when the combination of symbols relating to the bonus combination is displayed and (B) the advantageous section is ended, for example, the special privilege can be given using the display device 11 or the like. ing. This special privilege is a privilege that is not related to the granting of the game value (that is, does not affect the payout rate) among the various privileges granted to the player. In addition, the special privilege is related to the addition of the game value (that is, it affects the payout rate) (for example, the right to establish the transition condition of the advantageous section, or the information of the stop operation during the bonus state The right to be informed, etc.), but from the perspective of optimizing gambling, it should be a privilege that is not related to the addition of game value (that is, does not affect the payout rate). Is desirable.

As a specific example of the special privilege, for example, execution of a special effect (for example, various ending effects described above and other premier effects) that is not normally executed, and special notification that informs useful information to the player ( For example, notification of setting value suggestion, notification of expectation for each effect content, execution of history notification of winning probability of bonus combination, transition probability of advantageous zone, etc.), information provided via the Internet using the portable terminal of the player Examples include giving points on the provided services and releasing specific conditions.

In the case where the special privilege is configured as described above, the player does not enjoy a direct privilege such as giving a game value, but an indirect privilege with high interest in enjoying the game is provided. In particular, as in (B-2) Advantageous section 2, the advantageous value is set early, especially in a state where the game value is not dramatically increased by setting the expected value β. You can also give incentives to terminate.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) is satisfied when a predetermined end condition ((3) end condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied or a predetermined end condition is satisfied. The process ends when the special game state (bonus state) is entered before. Then, in the advantageous state, when it is possible to shift to the special game state, a specific notification indicating that effect is executed. Therefore, the player can continue the advantageous state by avoiding the transition to the special game state if it is within the range of the prescribed predetermined ending condition. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while maintaining the moderate gambling property.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the second aspect, the predetermined ending condition is when a certain privilege is given to the player (or when it is assumed that the certain privilege is given) (for example, the limit process described above or later). May be terminated. With this configuration, it is possible to more appropriately manage the payout rate with a simple configuration.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the second aspect, from the start of the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) until the specific variation condition ((2) expected value variation condition) is satisfied, the game is played. It becomes possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of value addition is relatively high (expected value α is set ((B-1) advantageous section 1), and the advantageous state ends after a specific variation condition is satisfied. Until that time, the game can be played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low (the expected value β is set ((B-2) advantageous section 2)). Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special game state as a trigger even before the predetermined ending condition is satisfied. That is, for example, when playing a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while maintaining the moderate gambling property.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the second aspect, from the start of the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) until the specific variation condition ((2) expected value variation condition) is satisfied, the game is played. It becomes possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of value addition is relatively high (expected value α is set ((B-1) advantageous section 1), and the advantageous state ends after a specific variation condition is satisfied. Until that time, the game can be played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low (the expected value β is set ((B-2) advantageous section 2)). Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special game state as a trigger even before the predetermined ending condition is satisfied. Furthermore, when the advantageous state ends with the transition to the special game state, it is possible to give a special privilege that is not related to the giving of a game value. That is, for example, when playing a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Further, in the case of shifting to the special game state and ending the advantageous state, a special privilege which is not given when the predetermined ending condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended, is given to the player. It is also possible to give an incentive to end the task early. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while maintaining the moderate gambling property.

In the gaming machine of the second aspect, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, if the shift to the special gaming state is possible, this is indicated. The specific notification may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game when the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to maintain the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the second aspect, the expected value of the gaming value in the advantageous state is adjusted by the probability (information probability) of being notified of the information regarding the stop operation of the player in the advantageous state. May be. With this configuration, it is possible to more appropriately manage the payout rate with a simple configuration.

[Another example of playability (game specifications) (Part 2)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, another example (2) of the playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram conceptually illustrating a game flow in another example (2) of the game property (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 94, in this example, there are general game state (CZ state), (A) BB1 state, (B) BB2 state, and (C) BB3 state game state. The general gaming state (CZ state) is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is low, and the transition to the advantageous section does not occur. This gaming state itself is not a gaming state advantageous to the player, It is positioned as a gaming state (chance zone. Special prize extended state) which is more advantageous than (A) BB1 state in that it can be shifted to (B) BB2 state or (C) BB3 state. In addition, the general gaming state (CZ state), the (B)BB2 state, and the (C)BB3 state are positioned as a series of increase sections described later. Even in the general gaming state (CZ), as in the case of (A) BB1 state, the advantageous section may be configured to occur for a specific period when a specific notification condition is satisfied.

In the general gaming state (CZ state), when BB1 (for example, BB1 and BB2 in the present embodiment) is won and the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, (1) BB1 start condition is satisfied. Then, the general game state (CZ state) shifts to the (A) BB1 state. As will be described later, this is positioned as a transition of a game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player. Further, in the general game state (CZ state), if BB2 (for example, BB3 in the present embodiment) is won and the symbol combination related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, (3) BB2 start condition is satisfied. Then, the general game state (CZ state) shifts to the (B) BB2 state. Further, in the general game state (CZ state), if BB3 (for example, BB4 in the present embodiment) is won and the symbol combination related to BB3 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, (5) BB3 start condition is satisfied. Then, the general game state (CZ state) shifts to the (C)BB2 state. As will be described later, these are positioned as relatively advantageous game state transitions for the player.

Here, in the general game state (CZ state), once the BB1 is won, the BB1 is carried over until the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the activated line (the display of the combination of symbols related to BB1 is permitted. Since the BB1 permission state is continued), in the general game state (CZ state), BB2 and BB3 are not won. Further, in the general game state (CZ state), once the BB2 or BB3 is won, the BB2 or BB3 is carried over until the combination of symbols related to BB2 or BB3 is stopped and displayed on the activated line (related to BB2 or BB3). Since the BB2 permission state or the BB3 permission state in which the display of the combination of symbols is permitted continues), the BB1 is never won in the general game state (CZ state). That is, in the general game state (CZ state), if any of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) is won, the bonus state corresponding to the winning bonus combination is ended and the general game state (CZ state) is not returned again. As long as it does not win other bonus roles.

In this example, the symbol combination related to BB2 is configured as a symbol combination such as "red 7-red 7-red 7", and the symbol combination related to BB3 is, for example, "blue 7-blue 7-blue". It is configured as a combination of symbols such as "7". The symbol combination related to BB1 is configured as a symbol combination such as "red 7-red 7-cherry 1" and "blue 7-blue 7-cherry 1" (see FIG. 15). In this example, in the case of being configured in this way, if any one of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) is won in the general game state (CZ state), the winning notification indicating that the bonus combination is won is performed. You may be allowed to. Specifically, a display such as "Aim for 7!" may be displayed to indicate to the player that the "red 7" symbol or the "blue 7" symbol should be aimed. In this case, for example, when the player aims at the "red 7" symbol and hits BB2, if the player wins BB2, "red 7" becomes a complete set and shifts to the BB2 state, and wins BB3. In that case, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 is not displayed, and the combination of symbols related to BB1 is not displayed. It is recognized that BB3 is won, and when the winning is awarded to BB1, the combination of symbols related to BB1 is Is displayed and the state shifts to the BB1 state. By doing so, it becomes possible to further improve the interest of the notification in the game of this example. In addition, the winning notification as described above may be performed unconditionally when one of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) is won in the general game state (CZ state), for example, the general game. When the advantageous section can be generated in the state (CZ state), it may be performed only during the advantageous section.

The (A)BB1 state is composed of (A-1)BB1 general, (A-2)BB1RB flag in-between, and (A-3)BB1RB in-between. In addition, in the (A) BB1 state, BB1 to BB3 are not newly drawn, and so long as the (A) BB1 state continues, the general gaming state (CZ state), the (B) BB2 state, and (C) There is no case of shifting to the BB3 state.

(A-1) BB1 In general, the winning probability of the re-play (replay) combination is low (or the winning probability of the re-play (replay) combination is “0” (that is, the re-play (replay) is not randomly selected). )) is set. In addition, a small push order combination (for example, 6 correct push order correct payouts of 9 medals, incorrect push order, but one medal payout if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, and stop operation timing due to incorrect push order. If it is inappropriate, there is no medal payout, etc.), RB for operating the RB state in which the winning probability of one of the small wins is improved compared to the non-operating state, and whether (A) BB1 state is set as an advantageous section. The advantageous section lottery combination for which the determination is made is set so as to win each with a predetermined probability.

(A-2) During the BB1RB flag, the winning probability of the re-play (replay) combination is low (or the winning probability of the re-play (replay) combination is "0" (that is, the re-play (replay) is not randomly selected). So)) set. Further, the push order small winning combination, the advantageous section lottery winning combination, and the like are set so as to be won with arbitrary predetermined probabilities. In addition, the basic configuration of the push order small winning combination (the push order is correct in 1/6 and the push order is incorrect in 5/6) is the same as in (A-1)BB1 general. Further, since the RB has been carried over, it is not newly drawn, but the winning state (permitted state) continues. Further, the winning probabilities of the replay (replay) combination may be the same or different between (A-1) BB1 general and (A-2) BB1RB flag.

(A-3) In BB1RB, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is low (or the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is "0" (that is, the replay (replay) is not randomly selected). )) Set. Further, the push order small winning combination, the advantageous section lottery winning combination, and the like are set so as to be won with arbitrary predetermined probabilities. In addition, the basic configuration of the push order small winning combination (the push order is correct in 1/6 and the push order is incorrect in 5/6) is the same as in (A-1)BB1 general. In addition, in (A-1) BB1 general medium and (A-2) BB1RB flag middle and (A-3) BB1RB middle, the respective winning probabilities of the pushing order small combination and the advantageous zone lottery combination are the same. It can be different or different. Alternatively, in (A-3) BB1RB, as the internal winning combination of a type different from the above-mentioned pushing order small winning combination and the above-mentioned advantageous section lottery, the pushing order small winning combination and the advantageous section lottery winning the same role are won. You may do it. In addition, in (A-1) BB1 general middle, (A-2) BB1RB flag middle and (A-3) BB1RB middle, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination may be the same, It may be different.

In the general game state (CZ state), when (1) BB1 start condition is satisfied, first, the process shifts to (A-1) BB1 general state. (A-1) In the BB1 general, when the RB is determined as an internal winning combination, (A-2) the BB1RB flag is shifted to, and (A-2) BB1RB flag is shifted to a symbol relating to the RB. Continues until the combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line (the permitted state in which the display of the combination of symbols related to RB is permitted continues). (A-2) When the combination of symbols related to RB is stopped and displayed on the activated line during the BB1RB flag, (A-3) the process shifts to BB1RB. (A-3) In the BB1RB, an ending condition of the RB state (for example, winning a predetermined number of times less than or equal to 8 times, or playing a predetermined number of times less than or equal to 12 times) When it is established, the process shifts to (A-1)BB1 general. In addition, during the (A-2) BB1RB flag, the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination rather than the bonus combination (RB) is performed, so that the combination of symbols related to RB is on the activated line. The stop display may be made difficult (or the stop display may not be made), and as a result, it may be difficult (or not) to shift to (A-3) BB1RB.

In any of (A-1) BB1 general state, (A-2) BB1RB flag state, and (A-3) BB1RB state, the payout number of medals in the (A) BB1 state is the specified number. In the case (for example, when the number exceeds 285), the ending condition of (2) BB1 is satisfied, and the state shifts from the (A) BB1 state to the general gaming state (CZ state).

In any state of (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) during BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, if the winning combination is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether to shift to the advantageous zone, and if it is the advantageous zone, it is determined whether to extend the advantageous zone. In this case, a single winning will give or extend an advantageous section of 30 games, for example. Note that the trigger and the period for determining the grant or extension of the advantageous section are not limited to those described above. For example, according to not only the result of the lottery winning when winning the advantageous zone lottery, but also the result of the lottery winning when winning the other internal lottery, the result of the lottery not based on the internal winning, etc. It may be possible to determine whether to give or extend the advantageous section. Further, when the granting or extension of the advantageous section is determined, the duration of the advantageous section may be separately determined by lottery or the like. Further, (A) at an arbitrary timing before the BB1 state is started (for example, when winning BB1 or when winning the advantageous zone lottery in the general gaming state (CZ state) after winning BB1), It may be possible to determine whether or not the entire period (or part of the period) of the BB1 state is set as the advantageous section.

In any state of (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, in the case of an advantageous section, for example, the above-mentioned pushing order sub-role Information of the stop operation (which is the correct answer in the push order) is notified in the winning game, and as a result of the stop operation being performed according to the notification, the advantageous section becomes an increase period in which the game value increases (or at least does not decrease). .. On the other hand, if it is a non-advantageous section, for example, as a result of not being notified of the stop operation (which is the correct push order) in the game in which the above-mentioned push order small win is won, the game value of the non-advantageous section decreases. It will be a period.

As described above, in this example, the (A) BB1 state is not completed until the payout number of medals in the BB1 state exceeds “285 coins”. Therefore, for example, the total winning probability of the above-mentioned pushing order small wins is not taken into consideration without considering the case of winning a replay role or other small wins, or the case where there is one payout in the above-mentioned pushing order small wins. When the value is about 1/2 (32768/65536), the number of payouts of 9 sheets required to end the (A) BB1 state is “32 times” (32 times×9 sheets=288 sheets), If the small winning combination wins according to the probability, the shortest number of games that can end the (A) BB1 state is "64 times" (32 times 1/2). Therefore, if all of the (A)BB1 state is an advantageous section, if you play the game "64 times", the (A)BB1 state is ended early while the game value increases during the game period. It is possible to shift to the gaming state (CZ state). On the other hand, if (A) BB1 state is all in the non-advantageous section, the probability that 9 coins will be paid out in the game in which the above-mentioned push order small win is basically lowered to 1/6, (A) The standard number of games that can end the BB1 state is "384 times" (64 times ÷ 1/6), and the game value will decrease during the game period.

The (B)BB2 state is composed of (B-1)BB2 general, (B-2)BB2RB flag in-between, and (B-3)BB2RB in-between. In addition, in the (B)BB2 state, BB1 to BB3 are not newly drawn, and so long as the (B)BB2 state continues, the general gaming state (CZ state), the (A)BB1 state, and (C) There is no case of shifting to the BB3 state.

(B-1) BB2 In general, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is low (or the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is relatively high, but (B-2) BB2RB flag Lower than). In addition, a small push order combination (for example, 6 correct push order correct payouts of 9 medals, incorrect push order, but one medal payout if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, and stop operation timing due to incorrect push order. If it is inappropriate, there is no medal payout, etc.), RB for operating the RB state in which the winning probability of any small win is improved compared to the non-operating state, and (B) BB2 state after the general game state (CZ state) ), the (A) BB1 state is determined to be the advantageous section when the state shifts to the (A) BB1 state. Is set to.

(B-2) During the BB2RB flag, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is set to be high. Further, the push order small winning combination, the advantageous section lottery winning combination, and the like are set so as to be won with arbitrary predetermined probabilities. In addition, the basic configuration of the push-order small winning combination is different from that in (B-1) BB2 general, so that no matter which push order the stop operation is performed, nine pieces are paid out (that is, an incorrect answer is given). The control is changed so that there is no push order. Further, since the RB has been carried over, it is not newly drawn, but the winning state (permitted state) continues.

(B-3) In BB2RB, replay (replay) is set so as not to be randomly selected. In addition, the push order small winning combination is set to be won with a high probability, and the advantageous zone lottery combination is set to be won with an arbitrary predetermined probability. In addition, the basic configuration of the push-order small winning combination is different from that in (B-1) BB2 general, so that no matter which push order the stop operation is performed, nine pieces are paid out (that is, an incorrect answer is given). The control is changed so that there is no push order. Alternatively, in (B-3) BB2RB, as the internal winning combination of a type different from the above-mentioned pushing order small combination and the above-mentioned advantageous section lottery, the RB medium and small combination and the advantageous section lottery which respectively play the same role are won. You may

However, in the (B)BB2 state, the basic configuration of the pushing order small winning combination is (B-1)BB2 in (B-3)BB2RB so that (B-2)BB2RB flag is most advantageous. The configuration may be the same as that in the general case (1/6 is the correct pressing order and 5/6 is the incorrect pressing order). That is, in the (B) BB2 state, assuming that the information of the stop operation is not notified, (B-1) BB2 general and (B-3) BB2RB are relatively disadvantageous periods (reduction periods), (B-2) The middle of the BB2RB flag may be configured as an advantageous period (increase period). In this way, in (B-1)BB2 general, the RB is won early to shift to (B-2)BB2RB flag interval, and then to (B-3)BB2RB stop so as not to shift. By performing an operation (or by performing such a stop control), the player can play the game in the most advantageous state, and thus further diversify the playability in the state advantageous to the player, The entertainment can be improved without the game becoming monotonous. In addition, by not increasing the game state in which the increase period is longer than necessary, the payout design can be simplified and the gambling performance can be made moderate.

In addition, as described above, in the (B)BB2 state, (B-2)BB2 When the RB flag is configured to be the most advantageous, the game in which the RB is won, and the combination of the symbols related to the RB after that. In the game that can be displayed, it may be notified that the RB has won or that the combination of symbols related to the RB can be displayed. The notification allows the player to perform a stop operation so as not to display the symbol combination related to RB. The notification may be an instruction or suggestion that the combination of symbols related to RB should not be displayed.

In this way, in a special game state in which a special combination (for example, BB, which is a character continuous operation device related to a first-class special combination) is won, and a special combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is activated, Corresponding to the first gaming state, which is the non-winning state of the combination (for example, RB which is the first class special character), the second gaming state, which is the winning state (carry-over state) of the specific combination, and the specific combination. It has a third game state (specific game state) that is activated by the display of a combination of symbols, and in the second game state, the stop control of a predetermined winning combination (for example, a small pushing order combination) is advantageous for the player. The specifications that the control is changed and the second game state can be maintained by the player's stop operation or internal control are, of course, other game characteristics (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example. It can also be applied to the bonus state described in the example (or other increase period (increase section)). In the following, for convenience of description, such a bonus state specification is referred to as a “special bonus state”.

In the general game state (CZ state), if (3) BB2 start condition is satisfied, first, the state shifts to (B-1) BB2 general state. (B-1) In BB2 general, when the RB is determined as an internal winning combination, (B-2) transitions between BB2RB flags, and (B-2) during BB2RB flags, symbols related to RB Continues until the combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line (the permitted state in which the display of the combination of symbols related to RB is permitted continues). (B-2) When the symbol combination related to RB is stopped and displayed on the activated line during the BB2RB flag, the process moves to (B-3) BB2RB. (B-3) In the BB2RB, an ending condition of the RB state (for example, winning a predetermined number of times less than or equal to 8 times, or playing a predetermined number of times less than or equal to 12 times) When it is established, the state shifts to (B-1)BB2 general. In addition, during the (B-2) BB2RB flag, stop control is performed to preferentially establish the replay combination or the small combination rather than the bonus combination (RB), so that the combination of symbols related to RB is on the activated line. The stop display may be made difficult (or the stop display may not be performed), and as a result, it may be difficult (or not) to shift to (B-3)BB2RB.

In any state of (B-1) BB2 general, (B-2) BB2RB flag, and (B-3) BB2RB, the number of medals paid out in the (B) BB2 state is the specified number. In the case (for example, when the number exceeds 150), the ending condition of (4) BB2 is satisfied, and the state shifts from the (B) BB2 state to the general gaming state (CZ state).

In this example, the RB that is won in the general (A-1)BB1 and the RB that is won in the general (B-1)BB2 are not separately described, but, for example, (A-1) ) In BB1 general, the RB to be won is set to "RB1" (corresponding symbol combination is "symbol combination relating to RB1", corresponding RB state (A-3) is "RB1 state"), and (B-1) In BB2 general, the RB that is won in the general is "RB2" (the corresponding symbol combination is "the symbol combination relating to RB2", the corresponding RB state (B-3) is the "RB2 state"), and different RB combinations can be won. In the middle of the (A-2) BB1RB flag (“RB1 permission state”), the basic configuration of the push-order small winning combination is the same as that of the (A-1) BB1 general medium. In the middle of the (B-2) BB2RB flag (“RB2 permission state”), the basic structure of the push-order small winning combination may be different from that of the (B-1) BB2 general medium.

During (B-2) BB2RB flag interval, and (B-3) BB2RB, even if the stop operation is performed in any of the pressing orders in the game in which the above-mentioned pressing order small winning combination is won, 9 payouts are paid out. As a result, the game value is increased (or at least not decreased) during the period. On the other hand, in general (B-1) BB2, when the stop operation is performed in the push order that is the correct answer in the game in which the above-mentioned push order small combination is won, 9 pieces are paid out, while the push that is not the correct answer is pushed. When the stop operation is performed in order, as a result of not paying out 9 coins, the period becomes a reduction period in which the game value decreases. However, since the transition from (B-1) BB2 general to (B-2) BB2RB flag transition occurs with the winning of RB, if the (B) BB2 state as a whole is seen, the relevant period is an increase period in which the game value increases. Positioned as.

It should be noted that the method of setting the entire (B) BB2 state as an advantageous period (increase period) for the player is not limited to the above. For example, (3) BB2 start condition is satisfied until (4) BB2 end condition is satisfied, and it is assumed that the RB state is always controlled. In the RB state, the stop operation is performed in any pressing order. Also, the RB medium and small combination that pays out 9 (or more if it is up to 15) may be won with a very high probability. Alternatively, without changing the basic configuration of the push order small winning combination, the control is always performed in the advantageous section from (3) when the BB2 start condition is satisfied until (4) the BB2 end condition is satisfied, and the push order The winning period may be increased at all times when the small winning combination is won, or at least at a predetermined probability that the expected grant value becomes positive, by notifying the correct answer pushing order.

In any of (B-1) BB2 general state, (B-2) BB2RB flag state, and (B-3) BB2RB state, when the above advantageous zone lottery combination is won, (4) BB2 end condition The right to win BB1 in the general game state (CZ state) that has been established and (1) BB1 start condition is established and transitioned to (A) BB1 state as an advantageous section (for example, the number of sets or stock) ) Is determined. In this case, with one win, for example, the right to make 30 games an advantageous section is given. The trigger and the period for which the grant of the right is determined are not limited to those described above. For example, according to not only the result of the lottery winning when winning the advantageous zone lottery, but also the result of the lottery winning when winning the other internal lottery, the result of the lottery not based on the internal winning, etc. The grant of the right may be determined. Further, when the granting of the right is determined, the duration of the advantageous section may be separately determined by lottery or the like. In addition, at any timing from (3) when the BB2 start condition is satisfied to (4) when the BB2 end condition is satisfied (for example, when BB2 wins or when BB2 ends), the BB1 state It may be possible to determine whether or not to grant the right to use the entire period (or part of the period) as the advantageous section.

The (C)BB3 state is made up of (C-1)BB3 general, (C-2)BB3RB flag in-between, and (C-3)BB3RB in-between. In addition, in (C-1)BB3 general, (C-2)BB3RB flag, (C-3)BB3RB, and (5)BB3 start conditions, if BB2 is replaced with BB3, (B- The description is omitted here because it is the same as each of the start conditions of 1) BB2 general, (B-2) BB2RB flag, (B-3) BB2RB, and (3) BB2. Further, (6) the ending condition of BB2 is satisfied when the number of paid-out medals in the state of (C) BB3 becomes the specified number (for example, when the number exceeds 60).

Under such a premise, the flow of the game in this example will be described. In this example, since the (A)BB1 state, which is the non-advantageous section, is positioned as a normal game that is not advantageous to the player, the player normally starts the game from the (A)BB1 state, which is the non-advantageous section. ..

In the (A) BB1 state, there is no transition to another gaming state until the ending condition of (2) BB1 is satisfied. Here, if the (A) BB1 state is an advantageous section, the section functions as an increase period, so that not only can the game value be increased, but also the opportunity to receive the payout increases, which leads to early ( 2) It becomes possible to satisfy the ending condition of BB1 (that is, it is possible to shorten the game period until shifting to the general game state (CZ state)). On the other hand, if the (A) BB1 state is a non-advantageous section, the section functions as a reduction period, so the game value is decreasing, and the chance of receiving the payout does not increase (2) It is not possible to satisfy the ending condition of BB1 (that is, it is not possible to shorten the game period until shifting to the general game state (CZ state)).

In the (A) BB1 state, if the ending condition of (2) BB1 is satisfied, the game state shifts to the general game state (CZ state). General game state (CZ state), if you can win BB2 or BB3 before winning BB1, general game state (CZ state) → (B) BB2 state (or (C)BB3 state) → general game state (CZ state)→(B)BB2 state (or (C)BB3 state), etc., and is configured as a state (a series of increasing sections) in which a bonus state advantageous to the player can be repeatedly activated. However, if the player wins BB1 before winning BB2 or BB3, it is impossible to repeatedly activate the bonus state advantageous to the player, and the series of increase sections ends. In order to shift to a series of increasing sections again, it is necessary to end the (A) BB1 state, which is a decreasing period if it is not an advantageous section.

That is, in the (A) BB1 state, the player desires to shift to the advantageous zone or continue the advantageous zone, and if the player actually shifts to the advantageous zone or continues the advantageous zone, the game value increases. While doing, it is possible to shorten the game period until shifting to the general game state (CZ state). In the general game state (CZ state), if it is desired to win BB2 or BB3 before winning BB1, and if it is possible to actually win BB2 or BB3, (B) BB2 state or (C) It is possible to increase the game value in the BB3 state. The same applies when these gaming states are over and the general gaming state (CZ state) is resumed. In addition, in the (B)BB2 state or the (C)BB3 state, it is desired that the right to grant the (A)BB1 state as an advantageous section is given. In this example, for example, in the combined probability of winning the bonus combination (BB1 to BB3), the winning probability of BB1 is about 50%, the winning probability of BB2 is about 25%, and the winning probability of BB3 is about 25%. Therefore, BB2 or BB3 does not always continue to win in the normal gaming state (CZ state). However, if the right to (A) BB1 state as the advantageous section is given in advance, even if the BB1 is won before the BB2 or BB3 is won, if the (A) BB1 state is in the increasing period, The game value increases, and moreover, it is possible to return to the general game state (CZ state) at an early stage. In this example, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game due to such playability.

According to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal game state (general game state (CZ state)), if the second special combination (BB2 or BB3) is won before the first special combination (BB1) is won, The state shifts to the 2 special game state ((B)BB2 state or (C)BB3 state), and the second special game state functions as an increasing period during which the game value increases. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, when the first special winning combination is won before the second special winning combination is won, the first special gaming state ((A)BB1 state) is entered, and the stop operation is performed in the first special gaming state. When the operation information regarding is not notified (when it is a non-advantageous section), the first special game state functions as a reduction period during which the game value decreases.

Therefore, in the normal game state, the player can continue an advantageous game period by repeating the shift to the second special game state without shifting to the first special game state, but the first special game state. When the game state is entered, the player cannot continue the advantageous game period unless the first special game state is ended and the normal game state is entered.

Here, according to the gaming machine of the present example, when a specific notification condition is satisfied (for example, when it is determined to shift to an advantageous section, or it is determined that a right to be an advantageous section is granted). In the first special game state, when the predetermined winning combination (pushing order small winning combination) is won, a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces) of game value is given to the operation information about the stop operation. Become. Since the first special game state ends when a prescribed number (for example, more than 285) of game values are given, the first special game state ends by being notified of such information. The time can be advanced. That is, it is possible to change the period until the normal game state in which the second special game state can be entered is changed depending on whether or not the operation information regarding the stop operation is notified in the first special game state. Therefore, by making it possible to change the period until the state shifts to the advantageous state, it is possible to make the game rich in variety.

In the gaming machine of this example, the period in which the operation information regarding the stop operation is notified in the first special game state may also be made to function as the increase period. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even during the period until the state shifts to the advantageous state.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, in the first special game state, it is possible to further shift to the first specific permission state (during (A-2)BB1RB flag), and in the second special game state, further second specific permission. It is possible to shift to a state (between (B-2) BB2RB flag or (C-2) BB3RB flag), and in the first special game state, stop operation is performed regardless of whether or not it is the first specific permission state. You may make it function as a decrease period the period when the operation information regarding is not notified, and make it function as the increase period in the second special game state. By doing so, the playability can be further varied and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Another example of playability (game specifications) (3)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, another example (No. 3) of the playability (game specification) mountable in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a diagram conceptually explaining a game flow in another example (3) of the game property (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 95, in this example, there are (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state game state. The (A) RT0 state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is lower than that of the (C) RT1 state, and it is possible to shift to any of the (B) BB state and the (C) RT1 state. (A) In the RT0 state, when not controlled to the advantageous section, (A-1) becomes a normal (non-advantageous section), which is a reduction period in which the game value decreases, and when the advantageous section is controlled. Is an (A-2) advantageous period, which is an increasing period during which the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example can be adopted.

(A) When the BB (bonus combination) is won in the RT0 state, the BB flag is carried over (BB permitted state) until the BB is carried over until the symbol combination relating to the BB is stopped and displayed on the activated line. Between the BB flags, the state (C) RT1 does not shift even if a bell spilled eye, which will be described later, is stopped and displayed on the activated line. In this example, the BB is won with any of the small winning combinations (for example, a winning combination called a rare winning combination, which has a relatively low winning probability, and may be a replay winning combination), and does not win alone. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination is performed, the combination of the symbols related to the BB is displayed in the game in which the BB is won. There will be no BB, and the BB will be carried over after the next game. Then, the combination of symbols related to BB is a stop operation in a game in which the result of the internal lottery between the BB flags is “miss” (that is, a game in which no other replay and small wins are won). It is possible to display (win) if the timing is appropriate. In this example, the probability of "missing" in the (A) RT0 state is set to about "1/12". However, as long as “miss” can occur, this “miss” probability can be any value. In addition, there may be a case where the BB wins independently, and in this case, it is assumed that a combination of symbols related to the BB can be displayed in the game in which the BB is won.

(A) In the RT0 state, between the BB flags, and in the game in which the internal lottery result is “miss”, when a combination of symbols related to BB is displayed, (1) BB start condition is satisfied, (A) Transition from the RT0 state to the (B)BB state. (B) BB state is a gaming state that does not shift to (C) RT1 state, and is a gaming state that is an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. Note that (B) the method of setting the BB state as the increase period is, for example, the various methods described in other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than the present embodiment and this example, such as the above-mentioned “special bonus state”. Can be adopted. In the (B) BB state, when a prescribed number (for example, more than 140) of game values are given, the game value is given as an upper limit, (2) BB end condition is satisfied, and (B) BB state is changed to (A) ) Transition to RT0 state.

(A) In the RT0 state, before the BB flag is reached (that is, when it is between the BB non-flags), (3) When the bell-eye drops are stopped and displayed on the activated line, the (C) RT1 state is set. Transition. The bell spill is, for example, a combination of symbols similar to the "R_RT1 transition" in the present embodiment. In a game in which a small push order wins, the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate. It is a combination of symbols displayed in the case. Therefore, if the (A) RT0 state is the (A-2) advantageous section, the correct pressing order is notified, so that it is not displayed as long as the stop operation is performed according to the notification, ( A-1) In the normal case (non-advantageous section), since the correct pressing order is not notified, the possibility of being displayed is high. In this example, if the winning probability of the BB is about 1/20 (3276/65536), the combined winning probability of the pushing order small win is about 1/3 (21845/65536) higher than that. Should be designed to. For the push order small winning combination, various specifications described in other examples of game characteristics (gaming specifications) other than this embodiment and this example can be adopted, for example, in the push order (for example, 6 options). If the correct answer is given, 9 pieces are paid out, and the spilled bells are not displayed. If the answer is not correct in the order of pressing, one piece is paid out if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, the spilled bells are not displayed, and the stop operation If the timing is not appropriate, 0 sheets will be paid out, and it is possible to adopt a specification in which a bell spill is displayed.

The (C) RT1 state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is higher than that of the (A) RT0 state, and (B) does not shift to the BB state. In the (C)RT1 state as well, as in the (A)RT0 state, when the advantageous period is not controlled, (C-1) becomes a normal (non-advantageous period) and the game value is reduced. If the game is controlled to the advantageous section, (C-2) it becomes the advantageous section, which is an increasing period in which the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example can be adopted.

Even in the (C) RT1 state, when the BB (bonus combination) is won, the state is controlled between the BB flags (BB permitted state) as in the (A) RT0 state. However, in the (C) RT1 state, the winning probability of the re-play (replay) role is increased by the amount of the “miss” probability “1/12” in the (A) RT0 state, and the “miss” probability is “0”. (That is, "loss" does not occur). Therefore, even if it is between BB flags, there is no case where the combination of symbols related to BB can be displayed in the (C)RT1 state. However, even if the "miss" occurs at an extremely low probability (for example, 1/8192), and in the game where the "miss" occurs between the BB flags, it is possible to display a combination of symbols related to BB. Good (that is, the (C)RT1 state may be configured as a state in which it is more difficult to display the combination of symbols related to BB than the (A)RT0 state).

In addition, in the case of (C)RT1 state, if the "miss" can be generated, if the combination of symbols related to BB cannot be displayed in the unit game in which the "miss" occurs, the (B)BB state is set. Since the state cannot be changed and the (C)RT1 state continues after the next game, if the stop operation is performed in a mode in which the combination of symbols related to BB cannot be displayed in the unit game in which the “miss” has occurred, the game Person's loss will be extremely large. Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a loss, (C) in the unit game in which the "miss" has occurred in the RT1 state, after the start operation until the stop operation becomes effective, the combination of symbols related to BB The effect that suggests that the display is allowed, the effect that the combination of symbols related to BB should be aimed at, the freeze effect that delays the start of rotation of each reel after the start operation, and the time required for the stop operation to be effective It is desirable to make it possible to execute any one or a plurality of effects such as a stop operation invalidation effect that takes a longer time than usual so that the player can easily display a combination of symbols related to BB.

In the (C) RT1 state, when (4) a prescribed number of games (for example, 500 games) are exhausted, the (C) RT1 state is shifted to the (A) RT0 state. That is, when the (C) RT1 state is finished and the BB flag is in between, it is possible to display a combination of symbols related to BB when a "loss" occurs. Even when the state (C) RT1 is changed to the state (A) RT0, there is a possibility that the state will fall again to the state (C) RT1 while the BB is not in the flag state. Therefore, in such a case, (A) in the RT0 state, until the BB flag is reached (that is, until BB is won), (A-2) the advantageous section is continued, and the player is rescued. You may do it.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the special combination (BB) is won, the special permission state (BB permission state) is set, and when the normal game state ((A) RT0 state), the combination of special symbols (BB) It is possible to shift to a special game state ((B)BB state) by displaying a combination of symbols related to), while the specific game state ends if the specific game state ((C)RT1 state) Until it does, it is not possible to display the combination of special symbols and shift to the special game state. In addition, in the specific game state, when the specific combination (pushing order small combination) is won in the normal game state which is not the special permission state, the specific symbol without the stop operation in a specific mode (mode in which the pressing order is the correct answer) A transition is made based on the display of the combination (bell spill). Then, when the specific notification condition is satisfied, during the specific period (advantageous section) in the normal game state and the specific game state, operation information regarding a specific aspect is notified when a specific winning combination is won, and a stop operation is performed according to the notification. If done, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9) of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of the present example, in the normal gaming state, when the specific period during which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified is given, the shift to the special gaming state is performed without shifting to the specific gaming state. It is possible not only to repeat the game (that is, to continue the game period advantageous to the player), but also to increase the game value given when the specific combination is won. Also, in the specific game state, when it becomes a specific period in which operation information regarding a specific mode is notified, it is not possible to shift to the special game state unless the specific game state ends, but when a specific winning combination is won. The game value given to the player will increase. In addition, even in a case where the normal game state is not in a specific period in which operation information related to a specific mode is notified, it may be possible to repeat the transition to the special game state without shifting to the specific game state. ..

That is, according to the gaming machine of the present example, whether it is the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state, or whether it is the specific period during which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or the specific gaming state is specified. It is possible to change the advantage degree of the player in various ways in accordance with whether or not it is a specific period in which the operation information regarding the mode is notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game motivation and interest.

In the gaming machine of this example, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the specific game state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the game value increases. By doing so, the game value may increase even in the specific game state, so that the interest of the game can be maintained even during the specific game state in which the special game state is not entered.

(Modification of this example)
In this example, there are (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state game state, and in the (A) RT0 state, BB as a special role is a pressing order small win as a specific role. If the winning is made before that, (C) it shifts to the BB state without shifting to the RT1 state, and such a transition can be repeated, thereby creating a series of increase intervals. Made it possible. Further, in the (A) RT0 state, if the push order small combination as the specific combination is won before the BB as the special combination, and if the player's stop operation is appropriate, the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state. However, if the player's stop operation is not appropriate, the state shifts to (C) RT1 and the series of increase sections ends. Then, in (C) RT1 state, unless a certain transition condition (in this example, digestion of a specified number of games) is satisfied, (A) RT0 state is not transitioned. However, the method of starting, continuing, and ending such a series of increasing sections is considered to have further room for modification, and will be described below.

The modified example is the same as this example in that it has (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state gaming state, but MB (related to the second-class special character) as a specific role. If the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the character state continuous operating device) is used to shift to (D) MB state. The winning probability of BB is set to about 1/10 (6553/65536), and the winning probability of MB is set to about the same. The MB is a bonus combination, and once it is won, it is carried over until the combination of symbols related to the MB is displayed (between MB flags, MB permitted state). It is assumed that the MB always wins the special winning combination group with any one of the special small winning groups (for example, the special small winning groups 1 to 3), and does not win by itself.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the MB+special small winning group 1 wins overlappingly, the stop operation has a predetermined correct mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation on the reel 3L is the second range below or the third range below). When it is performed in a mode that is a first range different from the range, or a mode in which the stop operation is performed by the left first stop, etc.), the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the activated line, ( D) Transition to MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in a predetermined correct manner, the combination of symbols related to MB is not stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small combination (specific (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the activated line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C)RT1 state between the MB flags.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the MB+special small winning group 2 is won in duplicate, the stop operation is defined in a correct answer mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation for the reel 3L is the first range or the third range below). When it is performed in a mode that is a second range different from the range, or a mode in which the stop operation is performed in the middle first stop), a combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the activated line, ( D) Transition to MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in a predetermined correct manner, the combination of symbols related to MB is not stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small combination (specific (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the activated line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C)RT1 state between the MB flags.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the MB+special small winning combination group 3 wins a duplicate, the stop operation has a predetermined correct mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation for the reel 3L is the first range or the second range). When it is performed in a mode that is a third range different from the range, or a mode in which the stop operation is performed by the first stop on the right), the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the activated line, ( D) Transition to MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in a predetermined correct manner, the combination of symbols related to MB is not stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small combination (specific (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the activated line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C)RT1 state between the MB flags.

In this modified example, when a plurality of MBs (for example, MB1, MB2, and MB3) are used as the specific combination, and a combination of symbols related to any of the MBs is stopped and displayed on the activated line (D). It may be possible to shift to the MB state. In this case, the total winning probability of MB may be set to be approximately the same as the winning probability of BB. In addition, MB1, MB2, and MB3 may be the same as the special winning combination group, and may be won without fail. Then, when the MB1+special small winning group is a double winning, the same control as the MB+special small winning group 1 is performed, and when the MB2+special small winning group is a double winning, the same as the MB+special small winning group 2. When the control is performed and the MB3+special small winning combination group is won, the same control as the MB+special small winning combination group 3 may be performed.

That is, in the (A) RT0 state, if the MB is won, if the mode of the stop operation is appropriate in the game in which the MB is won (for example, if the above three options are correctly answered), the (D) MB state Move to. (D) The MB state is, for example, a bonus state in which two medals are always paid out with two bets, and when a prescribed number (more than two) of game values are given, an upper limit of the game value is given. Then, the MB end condition is satisfied, and the state shifts from the (D) MB state to the (A) RT0 state. Here, the (D)MB state itself is not an increasing period in which the game value increases (however, it is not a decreasing period but a non-increasing period), but after the end, it shifts to the (A)RT0 state, so that (D)MB state. The transition to the state is positioned as the transition to the series of increment sections described above or the continuation of the series of increment sections.

On the other hand, in the (A) RT0 state, if the MB is won, if the mode of the stop operation is not appropriate in the game in which the MB is won (for example, if the above three options are not correctly answered), (C) Transition to the RT1 state. In this modification, the (C)RT1 state, which is between the MB flags, does not end until the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. Then, (C) the “miss” probability in the RT1 state is set to about “1/300”. That is, in order to end the (C)RT1 state and shift to the (A)RT0 state, in the game in which the "miss" has occurred in the (C)RT1 state, a combination of symbols relating to MB is displayed (D). ) It is necessary to shift to the MB state and digest the game in the (D) MB state. In addition, when the special small winning group described above is won in the (C) RT1 state, it may be possible to display the combination of symbols related to the MB even when the correct answer is given to the above-mentioned three options.

(Game flow of a modified example of this example)
In this modification, the (C)RT1 state between the MB flags is positioned as a normal game that is not advantageous to the player, so the player usually starts the game from the (C)RT1 state between the MB flags. To do.

In the (C) RT1 state, the transition to the (A) RT0 state does not occur unless the transition to the (D) MB state is performed. The player plays the game after waiting for the "loss" to occur. If a combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the game in which the "loss" has occurred, the state shifts to (D)MB state, and after finishing the (D)MB state, shifts to (A)RT0 state.

(A) When the bonus combination is won in the RT0 state, the probability that the bonus combination is BB is 1/2 (50%), and the probability that it is MB is 1/2 (50%). When the bonus combination initially won after the transition from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state is BB, a series of increasing sections is started. After winning the BB, the MB is not won (that is, without shifting to the (C)RT1 state), and the combination of symbols relating to the BB is displayed (the B) transitions to the BB state. It is possible to increase the game value in the BB state. The (B) BB state is configured as, for example, the above-mentioned “special bonus state”. (B) When the BB state is completed, the state returns to the (A) RT0 state again, and if the BB can be won before the MB is won again with a probability of 50%, a series of increment sections continues. That is, a series of increase sections are game sections that can be looped with a probability of 50% (loop rate of 50%). Note that this loop rate is an example, and can be set to an arbitrary value by appropriately changing the lottery value (winning probability) of the bonus combination.

In the (A) RT0 state, which is a series of increasing sections, if the MB is won before the BB is won, the combination of the symbols related to the MB can be displayed in the game won to the MB, ( D) It is possible to return to the (A) RT0 state again through the transition to the MB state. In this case as well, a series of increasing sections continues. On the other hand, when the combination of symbols related to MB cannot be displayed in the game won to MB, (C) RT1 state is entered. In this case, a series of increasing sections ends.

Further, when the (C)RT1 state is shifted to the (A)RT0 state and the first winning combination is MB, a series of increasing sections is not started. However, as described above, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the game won in MB, it is possible to return to (A) RT0 state again through the transition to (D) MB state. it can. In this case, it may be possible to start a series of increasing sections in the returned (A) RT0 state. On the other hand, when the combination of symbols related to MB cannot be displayed in the game won to MB, (C) RT1 state is entered. In this case, there is no case where a series of increasing sections can be started. In addition, in the above description, the start of the series of increasing sections is the case where the first winning combination is BB after shifting from the (C)RT1 state to the (A)RT0 state, but the (C)RT1 state is set. The transition from (A) to RT0 state may be the start of a series of increasing sections, or (B) is the first bonus combination won after transition from (C) RT1 state to (A) RT0 state. The time when the combination of symbols relating to (3) is displayed and the state shifts to the (B) BB state may be the start of a series of increasing sections.

(First Mode of Advantageous Interval Specification in Modification of this Example)
Next, the first mode of the advantageous zone specification when the game characteristic (game specification) of the modified example of the present example described so far is adopted will be described. The first mode is a specification in which no advantageous section is provided.

As described above, in the game property (game specification) of the modified example of this example, (A) RT0 state → (B) BB state → (A) RT0 state → (B) BB state... By repeating the A) RT0 state and the (B) BB state, it is possible to create a series of increasing intervals, so that even if the player is not informed of the stop operation, the game is highly entertaining. It is possible to do. Therefore, as in the case of the first aspect, the advantageous section may not be provided.

Also in this first mode, for example, when (B) BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, notification or suggestion to that effect can be made, and (B) RB is won in the BB state. If you do, you can make an announcement or suggestion to that effect. On the other hand, (A) When the MB is won in the RT0 state, and (C) When the symbol combination related to the MB can be displayed in the RT1 state, at least a game method in which the symbol combination related to the MB is displayed is estimated. It is desirable not to make such announcements or suggestions. Here, "announcement or suggestion that a game method in which a combination of symbols relating to MB is displayed is inferred" is, for example, directly announcing or suggesting that a combination of symbols relating to MB can be displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, but includes a notice or suggestion that the above-mentioned special small winning group has won or a combination of symbols related to the special small winning group that has won. This is because if such a notification or suggestion substantially increases the probability that the (C)RT1 state will end, the gambling performance of the game may become excessively high. However, since the (C)RT1 state is not included in the series of increasing sections at least, when the (C)RT1 state can display the MB-related symbol combination, “the MB-related symbol combination is displayed. "Announcement or suggestion" such that the game method to be performed can be guessed.

(Second Mode of Advantageous Interval Specification in Modification of this Example)
Next, a second mode of the advantageous zone specification when the game characteristic (game specification) of the modified example of the present example described so far is adopted will be described. The second mode is (B) a specification in which transition to the advantageous section is possible only during the BB state.

As described above, in the game property (game specification) of the modified example of the present example, in (B) BB state, the game value provided according to the mode of the stop operation of the player, such as the push order small win, can be changed. Since the internal winning combination can be determined, if the player is informed of the stop operation with the (B) BB state as an advantageous section, the (B) expected value of the game value given in the BB state is set. It can be maximized and contributes not only to the interest of the player, but also to guaranteeing the fairness of the game and the manageability of the payout rate. Therefore, as in the second mode, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section only during the (B) BB state. In this case, the advantageous section may be started when the (B)BB state is started, and the advantageous section may be ended when the (B)BB state is ended.

In the second mode, as in the case of the first mode, for example, when (B) BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. On the other hand, (A) When the MB is won in the RT0 state, and (C) When the combination of symbols relating to the MB can be displayed in the RT1 state, at least the combination of symbols relating to the MB is similar to the first aspect. It is desirable not to make announcements or suggestions that would infer the game method in which is displayed.

(Third Mode of Advantageous Interval Specification in Modification of this Example)
Next, a third mode of the advantageous zone specification when the game characteristic (game specification) of the modified example of the present example described so far is adopted will be described. The third mode is a specification in which it is possible to shift to the advantageous section during (A) RT0 state and (C) RT1 state.

The third mode is basically the same as that described in this example, and in the (A) RT0 state, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, (A-1) normal (non- (A-2) advantageous zone, and when the condition for ending the advantageous zone is satisfied, shift from (A-2) advantageous zone to (A-1) normal (non- advantageous zone), Further, in the (C) RT1 state, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, the (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section) is shifted to the (C-2) advantageous section, and the advantageous section When the termination condition is satisfied, the (C-2) advantageous section is shifted to the (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section).

However, in the present example, when the (A-2) advantageous section is reached in the (A) RT0 state, the pushing order that is the correct answer for the pushing order small winning combination is informed, so that (C) RT1 is substantially achieved. Although the information that can avoid the transition to the state is also notified, in the third aspect, the information that can avoid the transition to the (C)RT1 state is not notified. That is, in the (A-2) advantageous section, when a small winning combination in the pushing order is won, the pushing order that is the correct answer is notified, so that (A-1) more than in the normal (non-advantageous section). A game value is given, but if the MB is won, the "announcement or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols relating to the MB is displayed is guessed" is not made, and the player voluntarily changes to the MB. When the combination of such symbols can be displayed (A), the RT0 state is maintained, but when the player cannot display the combination of symbols relating to MB by himself/herself (C). It is adapted to shift to the RT1 state.

However, for example, in the case of (A) RT0 state, the advantageous section becomes (A-2), and when 50 games are given as the duration of the advantageous section, 10 games later (that is, the remaining 40 games of the advantage section remain). In the case where the MB is won and the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed (C) and the state is shifted to the RT1 state, the duration may be set to 40 games (C-2), and it may be shifted to the advantageous section. .. That is, the duration of the given advantageous section may be taken over from the (A) RT0 state to the (C) RT1 state or from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state (note that in the latter case, In (D) MB, the game period may or may not be included in the advantageous period).

In addition, (A) RT0 state is a game period included in a series of increase sections, so (A) RT0 state does not include (A-2) advantageous section, and is not included in a series of increase sections. It is a period, and the (C-2) advantageous section may be provided only in the (C) RT1 state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. That is, in the third mode, it is advantageous for the purpose of relieving the player who plays the game in the game period ((C)RT1 state) relatively disadvantageous to the player and preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. A section ((C-2) advantageous section) may be provided.

In the third mode, as in the first mode, for example, when (A) RT0 is won, BB can be notified or suggested. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. However, as in the case of the third mode, when the advantageous section is positioned as a game section that facilitates winning of the internal winning combination (eg, small winning combination) related to the winning, (A) RT0 state is changed to BB. When there is a mode of the stop operation (pushing order or timing of the stop operation) that facilitates the display of the symbol combination related to BB when the winning is won, the stop operation of the stop operation is performed based on the advantageous section. Although it is not desirable to directly notify the mode, such notification may be performed.

In this modification, the second aspect and the third aspect are described as different aspects, but an advantageous section aspect in which the second aspect and the third aspect are combined is adopted. You can also In this case, if the (A) RT0 state winning the BB is the (A-2) advantageous section, the information of the stop operation is notified even in the (B) BB state, and (A-1) the normal (non-advantageous section). In this case, the information of the stop operation may not be notified even in the (B) BB state. Further, in this case, in (B) BB state, which is shifted from (A-2) advantageous zone, the duration of the advantageous zone is sequentially updated as the game progresses (that is, the duration of the given advantageous zone is changed). The duration of the advantageous section may not be updated (that is, the duration of the given advantageous section may not be reduced).

(Fourth Mode of Advantageous Interval Specification in Modification of this Example)
Next, a fourth mode of the advantageous zone specification when the game characteristic (game specification) of the modified example of the present example described so far is adopted will be described. The fourth mode is a specification in which (A) the RT0 state can be shifted to the advantageous section.

In the fourth aspect, contrary to the above-described third aspect, (A) in the RT0 state (A-2) in the advantageous section, when the MB is won, “a combination of symbols related to MB is By making an announcement or suggestion that the displayed game method is guessed, (C) information that avoids the transition to the RT1 state is informed, but when the push order small win is won, it is a correct answer. The pushing order is not notified. Further, in the case of (C-2) advantageous section in the (C) RT1 state, when a combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed, "a game method in which a combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is inferred. "Announcement or suggestion" is performed, but (A) the information that enables the transition to the RT0 state is notified, but when the winning order is a small winning combination, the correct pressing order is not notified. It is a thing.

In the fourth aspect, for example, only the advantageous section (A-2) is provided as the advantageous section, and the (C-2) advantageous section may not be provided. That is, the advantageous section is configured to have a function of continuing a series of increasing sections ((A) continuing the RT0 state), and (C) not having a function of ending the RT1 state. You may.

Further, in the fourth aspect, a method of managing the advantageous section by the number of times (the number of times of navigation) the "announcement or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is estimated" is performed. Is preferred. For example, in (C) RT1 state, a combination of symbols relating to MBs is displayed, (D) transitions to MB state, and (D) MB state ends and (A) transitions to RT0 state. At any timing, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the number of times of navigation to be given is determined. Then, in the transitioned (A) RT0 state ((A-2) advantageous section), the number of times of navigation determined is "notification or suggestion such that a game method in which a combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is inferred". Should be done. However, in the (A) RT0 state, for example, a winning combination for BB is displayed, a combination of symbols relating to BB is displayed, and the state shifts to (B) BB state, and (B) BB state ends and (A) RT0 state. At any one of the transition timings, it is decided whether or not to shift (extend) to the advantageous zone, and when it is decided to shift (extend) to the advantageous zone, the number of times of navigation to be given is determined. May be. Although the management based on the number of times of navigation has been described as preferable, it does not prevent the adoption of other management methods (for example, management based on the number of games).

In the fourth mode, as in the case of the first mode, for example, when (B) BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. However, in the case where the advantageous section is positioned as the game section for facilitating the continuation of the series of increasing sections as in the case of the fourth mode, (A) when the BB is won in the RT0 state, the BB is related. When there is a mode of the stop operation (pushing order or timing of the stop operation) that facilitates the display of the symbol combination, the mode of the stop operation is directly notified based on the advantageous section. This is not desirable, but such notification may be performed.

In this modification, the third aspect and the fourth aspect are described as different aspects, but an advantageous section aspect in which the third aspect and the fourth aspect are combined is adopted. You can also In this case, in the case of (A-2) the advantageous section, since the pushing order that is the correct answer when the small winning combination of the pushing order is won is informed, (A-1) more than the normal (non-advantageous section) When the gaming value is given and the MB is won, the "Announcement or suggestion that the gaming method in which the combination of symbols relating to the MB is displayed is inferred" is performed, and (C) the transition to the RT1 state is avoided. All that is necessary is to be notified of possible information. In addition, (C-2) If it is an advantageous section, the pushing order that will be the correct answer when the winning combination is won is notified, so that (C-1) more games than normal (non-advantageous section). When a value is added and the symbol combination relating to MB can be displayed, "Announcement or suggestion that the game method in which the symbol combination relating to MB is displayed is inferred" is performed, and (A) RT0 Information that enables the transition to the state may be notified. As described above, even in the (C-2) advantageous section, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed, "a game method in which a combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is inferred. "No announcement or suggestion" may be prohibited.

(Advantageous section limiter in the modification of this example)
Subsequently, the game characteristic (game specification) of the modified example of the present embodiment described so far is adopted, and the advantageous section specification includes at least the third aspect or the fourth aspect as the advantageous section specification. A description will be given of the limit processing of the advantageous section in the case of adopting.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the above-described or later-described limit processing in order to prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing for too long. For example, if the number of games limiter is 1,500 advantageous games continue in the advantageous section, and if the number of games limiter is 2400 medal in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is still in the advantageous section. Even if the number of games, the number of sets, the number of stocks, the number of times of navigation, the number of differences, etc. remain, the limit processing is forcibly ended and the advantageous section is shifted to the non-advantageous section.

However, according to the game characteristic (game specification) of the modified example of the present example, a series of increasing sections may continue even after the advantageous section ends by the execution of such limit processing. That is, there is a problem in that a series of increasing sections may lose the significance of providing a certain limitation on the continuation of the advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in order to provide a gaming machine capable of limiting an advantageous section in consideration of a series of increasing sections, it is desirable to take the following measures.

For example, in the game characteristic (game specification) of the modified example of the present example, the advantageous section is started at the same time as the series of increasing sections starts or before the series of increasing sections starts. As one specific example, when it is determined that a series of increasing intervals starts when (A) RT0 state wins BB, (A) at the same time when winning BB in RT0 state, or (A) The advantageous section is started when the RT0 state is entered. Further, as another specific example, when it is determined that the series of increase intervals starts when the state shifts to the (A) RT0 state, the (A) RT0 state shifts at the same time, or the (D) MB state shifts. The advantageous section is started when, for example, shifting to. It should be noted that the start of the advantageous section here means the start of the advantageous section on the limit process (for control), and is not necessarily the substantial duration of the advantageous section (the number of games, the number of sets, the stock, It does not mean that the number of navigations, the number of differences, etc.) is added. Therefore, for the duration of the advantageous section, for example, various conditions explained in other examples of the game property (game specification) other than this embodiment and this example are adopted, and granted (or extended) in each game state. It is only necessary to decide whether or not to be given, and to give (or extend) according to the result of the decision. However, whether or not to grant (or extend) the duration of the advantageous section may be determined at the start point.

Here, in the case of the "game number limiter", the upper limit number of games is, for example, "1500 games", but from "1500", a bonus state (for example, (B) BB state. If there is a bonus state, the expected number of games (which may continue for the longest number of them) (average number of games), the threshold according to the loop rate (convert the loop rate to the number of games The value multiplied by the variable defined as the multiplication rate for doing) is subtracted, and it is calculated as the instruction stop game number (or is defined in advance). For example, in the modified example of this example, when the expected number of games in the bonus state is "20 games" and the threshold value corresponding to the loop rate of 50% is "6", the number of instruction stop games is "1500 games-20 games". ×6=1380 games”.

Here, in the case of the “number of sheets limiter”, the upper limit of the number of sheets to be acquired is, for example, “2400 sheets”, but from this “2400”, a bonus state (for example, (B) BB state. If there is a bonus status, the expected acquisition number (average acquisition number) of the ones that may be awarded the most medals among them is converted into a threshold value corresponding to the loop rate (the loop rate is converted to the acquisition number). The value multiplied by a variable defined as a multiplication factor) is subtracted, and the value is calculated as an instruction stop acquisition number (or specified in advance). For example, in the modified example of this example, when the expected number of bonuses to be acquired is "120" and the threshold value corresponding to the loop rate of 50% is "6", the number of instruction stop acquisitions is "2400-120". ×6=1680 sheets”.

When the limit process is performed by the "game number limiter", when the advantageous period started at the start point continues and the number of games reaches "1380 games" (number of instructions stop games) , If the duration of the advantageous section remains (in terms of control), the advantageous section will continue, but in subsequent games, the information of the stop operation will not be notified (that is, the instruction function will stop). ).

Further, in the case where the limit process is performed by the “number limiter”, when the advantageous period started at the start time is continued as it is and the acquired number reaches “1680” (instruction stop acquisition number) , If the duration of the advantageous section remains (in terms of control), the advantageous section will continue, but in subsequent games, the information of the stop operation will not be notified (that is, the instruction function will stop) ..

In addition, it is the processing after the instruction function is stopped based on reaching the instruction stop game number or the instruction stop acquisition number, but if a series of increase sections are finished before the limit processing is executed, At the same time or after that, the advantageous section is ended. As one specific example, when it is determined that a series of increase sections wins the MB in the (A) RT0 state, and ends when the (C) RT1 state shifts without the combination of symbols related to the MB being displayed, , (C) The transition to the RT1 state is performed at the same time, or the advantageous section is ended when the next game of the game that has transitioned to the (C) RT1 state is started. In addition, in the (A) RT0 state and the (B) BB state, a series of increasing sections may still continue. Therefore, at least (C) RT1 is the process of terminating the advantageous section (for control). It is desirable to be in the state. However, this is not the case when the advantageous section is ended by executing the limit process. That is, in (A) RT0 state and (B) BB state, when "1500 games" is reached in the case of "game number limiter" and "2400 sheets" is reached in the case of "number of sheets limiter", It may be possible to end the advantageous section by executing the limit process.

It should be noted that when the advantageous section continues to reach the instruction stop game number or the instruction stop acquisition number, the instruction function is stopped, which is substantially synonymous with the end of the advantageous section. Therefore, the “1500 games” of the “game number limiter” and the “2400 sheets” of the “number of sheets limiter” are set to the values set as the regulation values of the gaming machines that can be installed in the game store, and the modification example of this example In a gaming machine equipped with a series of increased intervals such as the game playability (gaming specification), the instruction stop game number or the instruction stop acquisition number is calculated from the regulation value as described above, and the calculated instruction stop is calculated. The value of the number of games or the number of instructions stop acquisition number may be determined in advance as the value of the “game number limiter” or the “number limiter”, and the limit process may be executed. In other words, when a series of increase sections are installed, the increase period in which the game value increases may greatly exceed the planned payout design or the range of the predetermined regulation value. Any method can be adopted as long as it is possible to regulate the advantageous section (forwardly) after taking into consideration the portion that is lost.

Further, the game characteristics (game specifications) described in the modified example of the present example, the first to fourth aspects of the advantageous interval specification in the modified example of the present example, and the technical idea regarding the advantageous interval limiter in the modified example of the present example are The game machine according to the modified example is described as an example, and the present invention is not limited to the game machine according to the modified example of this example. That is, the game machine described in this embodiment, this example, and other examples of game play (game specification) other than this example can be appropriately modified and applied.

[Another example of playability (game specifications) (Part 4)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, another example (No. 4) of the playability (game specification) mountable in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram conceptually illustrating a game flow in another example (4) of the game property (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 96, in this example, (A) RT0 state, (B) RT1 state non-flag, (C) RT1 state MB flag, (D) RT2 state BB flag, (E) BB state, And (F) There is a game state of MB state. The (A) RT0 state and the (E) BB state are positioned as the above-described series of increasing sections.

In (A) RT0 state, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is at least lower than (B) (C) RT1 state, (B) RT1 state non-flag, (D) RT2 state BB flag, and ( F) It is a game state in which it is possible to shift to the MB state. In addition, since BB, MB, push order small win, bell spill, etc. are the same as those described in the other example (part 3) (including modified examples) of the game property (game specification), here. The description of is omitted. However, in this example, MB is a small winning combination or replay winning combination (for example, the above-mentioned rare winning combination), so as not to win alone, in the game in which MB is won, the combination of symbols related to MB is In the game where the internal lottery result is “missed” between the MB flags without being displayed, the MB related symbol is always displayed regardless of the pushing order or the timing of the stop operation (that is, the mode of the stop operation). Although the combination is configured to be displayed, in the same manner as described in the modified example of the other example (3) of the game property (game specification), the MB is changed according to the mode of the stop operation of the player. It is also possible to configure so that a combination of symbols related to MB may be displayed in the game that is won.

(A) In the RT0 state, when not controlled to the advantageous section, (A-1) becomes a normal (non-advantageous section), which is a reduction period in which the game value decreases, and when the advantageous section is controlled. Is an (A-2) advantageous period, which is an increasing period during which the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example can be adopted.

When (1) BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, the state shifts between the (D) RT2 state BB flags as the BB permission state. Further, in (A) RT0 state, if the MB is won, the state shifts between the MB flags as the MB permitted state, but the RT state does not change. Further, between the (A) RT0 state MB flags, even if the bell-eye drops are stopped and displayed on the activated line, the (C) RT1 state MB flags do not shift. Further, in (A) RT0 state, the "miss" probability is set to be higher than at least (B) (C) RT1 state (for example, to "1/6"), so the symbol combination related to MB is displayed. As a result, the condition (4) MB start condition is easily established. Further, in (A) RT0 state, before (D) RT2 state before transition between BB flags or before between MB flags (that is, when between non-flags), (5) Bell spill is effective. When the display is stopped on the line, the state shifts to (C) RT1 state non-flag.

During (B) RT1 state non-flag, the winning probability of the re-play (replay) combination is higher than at least (A) RT0 state, (A) RT0 state, (C) RT1 state between MB flags, and (D) RT2. It is a game state that can be transferred between state BB flags. (B) Between the RT1 state non-flags, when not controlled in the advantageous section, (B-1) becomes a normal (non-advantageous section), which is a reduction period in which the game value decreases, and is controlled in the advantageous section. If so, (B-2) it becomes an advantageous section, which is an increase period during which the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example can be adopted.

When (1) BB is won during the (B) RT1 state non-flag, the state shifts to the (D) RT2 state BB flag as the BB permission state. In addition, when (6) MB is won while (B) RT1 state non-flag, the state shifts to (C) RT1 state MB flag as the MB permitted state (RT state does not change). In this example, since the combination of symbols related to MB is not displayed in the game won in MB, (B) RT1 state does not shift from the non-flag state to (F) MB state However, as described above, it may be configured such that there is a case where the transition is made between the (B) RT1 state non-flag and the (F) MB state. The (B) RT1 state non-flag state and the (C) RT1 state MB flag state are basically the same RT state (RT1 state), and (B) (C) any RT1 state, (9) When the number of games in the RT1 state reaches the specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) (that is, when 1500 games are exhausted), the state shifts to (A) RT0. At this time, if it is between (B) RT1 state non-flag, it shifts between (A) RT0 state non-flags, and if it is between (C) RT1 state MB flag, it shifts between (A) RT0 state MB flags. ..

Between the (C) RT1 state MB flags, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is higher than at least the (A) RT0 state, and it is a gaming state in which the state can shift to the (A) RT0 state and (F) MB state. .. (C) Between the RT1 state MB flags, when not controlled to the advantageous section, (C-1) becomes a normal (non-advantageous section), which is a decrease period in which the game value decreases, and is controlled to the advantageous section. If there is, (C-2) it becomes an advantageous section, which is an increase period during which the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example can be adopted.

(C) Between the RT1 state MB flags, the "miss" probability is set to be extremely lower than at least the (A) RT0 state (for example, to "1/8192"), so that the symbol combination related to MB is displayed. Therefore, it is difficult to satisfy the condition (7) MB start. During the (C) RT1 state MB flag, since the MB is in the MB permitted state, there is no case of newly winning the MB or winning the BB.

Between the (D) RT2 state BB flags, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is at least lower than that of the (B) (C) RT1 state, and the (E) BB state is a gaming state in which the winning probability can be shifted. (D) When a combination of symbols related to BB is displayed between the RT2 state BB flags, (2) BB start condition is satisfied, and the state shifts to (E) BB state. In addition, between the (D)RT2 state BB flags, the "miss" probability is set to be higher than at least the (B)(C)RT1 state (for example, to "1/12"), so that the symbol relating to BB It is easy for the combination to be displayed and (2) BB start condition to be satisfied. During the (C) RT2 state BB flag, since the BB is in the permitted state, there is no case of newly winning the BB or winning the MB.

The (E)BB state is, for example, a gaming state that is configured by the above-mentioned “special bonus state” and has an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. In the (E)BB state, when a prescribed number of game values (for example, more than 140) are given, the game value is given as an upper limit, and the (3)BB end condition is satisfied, and the (B)BB state is changed to (A). ) Transition to RT0 state.

The (F) MB state is a gaming state that is configured as a normal bonus state and has an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. It should be noted that, as in the case of the modified example of the other example (3) of the game property (game specification), it may be configured as a no increase/decrease period. (F) In the MB state, when a prescribed number (for example, more than 13) of game values are given, the game value is given as an upper limit, (8) MB end condition is satisfied, and (A) RT0 state is entered. If (F)MB state is changed to (A)RT0 state, (C)RT1 state is between MB flags, (F)MB state is (B)RT1 state is between non-flags Move to.

That is, in the (F)MB state, the RT state does not change due to its operation or termination (more specifically, the (B)(C)RT1 state operates through the (F)MB state). ing. Here, the (B) and (C) RT1 states do not end for a prescribed number of games (for example, 1500 games) from the start. Therefore, the operation or termination of the (F)MB state does not affect the specified number of games. However, the period in the (F)MB state may be included in the counting target of the specified number of games, or the counting of the specified number of games may be interrupted (not included).

The transition control between the (F)MB state and the (B)(C)RT1 state is not limited to that described above. For example, when the (F)MB state is ended, even if the state has been changed between the (C)RT1 state MB flags, the state may be changed to the (A)RT0 state. That is, the RT1 state may be ended when the MB state is activated or ended. In this example, when the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state MB flag, the specified number of games is consumed to shift to the (A) RT0 state MB flag, and the (F) MB state is activated to (A) RT0. If the state is shifted between non-flags, or (F) MB state is activated to shift between (B) RT1 state non-flags, and BB is not won there, the series of increase intervals does not occur. Therefore, when the (F)MB state is completed, if the transition is made between the non-flags of the (A)RT0 state, the frequency of transition to a series of increase sections can be increased. This may be appropriately selected according to the intended payout rate and its content.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the special combination (BB) is won, the special permission state (BB permission state) is entered and the second specific game state ((D)RT2 state) is entered, and the special symbol While it is not difficult to display the combination (combination of symbols related to BB) and shift to the special game state ((E)BB state), if the special combination (MB) is won, the special permission state (MB permission) State) but the game state does not shift, if the first specific game state (between (C) RT1 state MB flag), the combination of special symbols (symbols related to MB) until the first specific game state ends It is difficult to shift to the special game state ((F)MB state) by displaying the combination), and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the normal game state ((A)RT0 state). In addition, in the first specific game state, when the special combination (push order small combination) is won in the special permission state and the normal game state that is not the special permission state, the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (a mode in which the press order is the correct answer). Is performed and a transition is made based on the display of a combination of specific symbols (bell-shaped eyes). Then, when the specific notification condition is satisfied, during the specific period (advantageous section) in the normal game state and the first specific game state, operation information regarding a specific mode is notified when a specific winning combination is won, and the operation is stopped according to the notification. If the operation is performed, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9) of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of the present example, in the normal game state, when a specific combination is won, a combination of specific symbols is displayed and the special combination or the special combination is won before the first specific game state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permitted state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game in the normal game state again via the special game state.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, when a special combination (BB) is won, a special permission state (BB permission state) is set and a transition is made to a second specific game state ((D)RT2 state). While it is not difficult to display a combination of symbols (combination of symbols related to BB) and shift to the special game state ((E)BB state), when the special combination (MB) is won, the special permission state ( If the first specific game state (between (C) RT1 state MB flag), the game state does not shift but becomes a prescribed number (for example, 1500 games) of the game and the first It is difficult to display a special symbol combination (combination of symbols relating to MB) and move to the special gaming state ((F)MB state) until the specific gaming state ends, and as a result, the normal gaming state ((A ) It is difficult to shift to the RT0 state). In addition, in the first specific game state, when the special combination (push order small combination) is won in the special permission state and the normal game state that is not the special permission state, the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (a mode in which the press order is the correct answer). Is performed and a transition is made based on the display of a combination of specific symbols (bell-shaped eyes). Then, when the specific notification condition is satisfied, during the specific period (advantageous section) in the normal game state and the first specific game state, operation information regarding a specific mode is notified when a specific winning combination is won, and the operation is stopped according to the notification. If the operation is performed, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9) of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of the present example, in the normal game state, when a specific combination is won, a combination of specific symbols is displayed and the special combination or the special combination is won before the first specific game state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game in the normal game state again via the special game state until the specified number of games are played.

Under such a game property, in the normal game state, when a specific period during which operation information related to a specific mode is notified is given, the special game state (or the special game state) is entered without shifting to the first specific game state. It is possible not only to repeat the shift (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also to increase the game value given when the specific combination is won. Further, in the first specific game state, when the specific period during which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified is given, for example, in the case of the special permission state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state via the special game state. Although difficult, the game value given when a specific combination is won is increased. In addition, even in the normal game state, even if it is not a specific period in which operation information related to a specific mode is notified, a transition to the special game state (or a special game state) without transition to the first specific game state May be repeated.

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, it is in the normal game state or the first specific game state, in which order the special combination, the special combination or the specific combination is won in the normal game state, the first specific game. In a state in which the special combination or special combination is won, whether or not it is a specific period during which operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal game state, or related to a specific mode in the first specific game state It is possible to variably change the degree of advantage of the player according to whether or not it is a specific period in which the operation information is notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game motivation and interest.

In the gaming machine of this example, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the first specific game state may be made to function as an increase period in which the game value increases. By doing so, the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, so that the interest of the game is maintained even during the specific game state in which it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made

[Another example of playability (game specifications) (Part 5)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, another example (No. 5) of the playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a diagram conceptually explaining a game flow in another example (No. 5) of the game property (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 97, in this example, (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state), (B) BB1 state, (C) BB1 flag interval, (D) BB2 state, (E) BB2 flag interval, ( There is a game state between F)BB3 state and (G)BB3 flag. In this example, the type of bonus combination won in the normal game state (normal game state), and whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning game in the bonus combination is displayed, is made to have different playability. is there.

The combination of symbols related to BB1 is configured in the same manner as, for example, “C_red same color BB” (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment. The combination of symbols related to BB2 is configured in the same manner as, for example, “C_blue same color BB” (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment. The symbol combination related to BB3 is configured as, for example, "BAR-BAR-BAR" (see FIG. 15). At this time, the "red 7" symbol, the "blue 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol are arranged at equal intervals (or substantially equal intervals) on at least one reel (all reels may be), When the stop operation is performed on the reel, the timing at which the "red 7" symbol is displayed, the timing at which the "blue 7" symbol is displayed, and the timing at which the "BAR" symbol is displayed overlap. Configure not to. That is, when the "red 7" symbol is aimed and pressed, the "blue 7" and "BAR" symbols are not displayed, and when the "blue 7" symbol is aimed and pressed, " There is no case where the "red 7" and "BAR" symbols are displayed, and when the "BAR" symbol is pressed to aim, the "red 7" and "blue 7" symbols are not displayed To do. The combination of symbols related to BB3 may be configured in the same manner as, for example, the “C_red different color BB” or the “C_blue different color BB” (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment.

(A) In the general game state (non-bonus state), for example, when a bonus combination (one of BB1 to BB3) can be won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/45 in total), the winning bonus combination is BB1. A certain probability is “45%” (the winning probability is “1/100”), and the probability that the winning bonus combination is BB2 is “45%” (the winning probability is “1/100”). The probability that the bonus combination is BB3 is “10%” (the winning probability is “1/450”). The bonus winning ratio is an example, and BB1 to BB3 may be won with the same winning probability (winning ratio), or may be won with a ratio different from the above. Further, in the (A) general game state (non-bonus state), BB1, BB2, and BB3 are not won as overlapping with other replay combinations and small combinations, and are individually won. It should be noted that, as long as a combination of corresponding symbols can be displayed in the winning game, it may be configured to win the winning overlapping with other small winning combinations.

(A) In the general game state (non-bonus state), if (1-1) BB1 is won, (2-1) BB2 is won, or (3-1) BB3 is won Also, the bonus winning notification is given in the game that has been won. This bonus winning notification can be configured to notify that any one of BB1 to BB3 is determined as the internal winning combination, but is configured as a predetermined notification that does not allow the type to be notified. The predetermined notification is, for example, that a character such as "big hit!" is displayed, or that the win lamp is turned on to win the bonus combination. However, whether BB1 is won or BB2 is won. It is not possible to feel whether or not BB3 is won.

(A) In the general game state (non-bonus state), if (1-1) BB1 is won, the player succeeds in pushing the "red 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and BB1 When the symbol combination related to (1) can be stopped and displayed on the activated line, (1-2) BB1 is established, and (A) general game state (non-bonus state) shifts to (B) BB1 state. (B) In the BB1 state, as in the other examples, the game value increases for an increasing period, and in the (B) BB1 state, when a prescribed number (for example, more than 140) of game values are given, It becomes the upper limit of grant, and (1-4) BB1 ends, and the state shifts from (B) BB1 state to (A) general game state (non-bonus state).

On the other hand, if the player fails to press the "red 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the symbol combination related to BB1 cannot be stopped and displayed on the activated line, (1- 3) BB1 is not established and the state shifts from (A) the general game state (non-bonus state) to (C) the BB1 flag.

In this example, similar to the present embodiment and other examples, there are push order small wins, which will be described as 6 choices of push order small wins 1 to 6. In the normal stop control, the push-order small win 1 has a correct push-order in the left, middle and right, and pays out 9 coins regardless of the timing of the stop operation. 1 piece is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout), push order small win 2 is the correct push order in the left and right middle and 9 pieces are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the other push order is the wrong push order, If the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one piece will be paid out, if it is not appropriate, it will be missed (no payout), and the pushing order small win 3 will be the correct answer for the middle left and right, and 9 pieces will be paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Is an incorrect push order, and if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one piece is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout). Discharge of one piece, other push order is wrong order of push order, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one piece is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout) 9 pieces are paid out regardless of the operation timing, the other pushing order is the wrong pushing order, and 1 piece is paid out if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, otherwise it is dropped (no payout), and the pushing order small win 6 is right The middle left is the correct answer to the pushing order and 9 cards are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. The other pressing order is the wrong answer to the pressing order, and 1 card is paid out if the timing of the stopping operation is appropriate, and it is dropped (no payout) if not appropriate. Become.

(C) Between the BB1 flags, the winning probability of the replay (replay) hand is higher than that of the (A) general game state (non-bonus state), and the “miss” probability is set to, for example, about “1/4000”. As described in other examples, also in this example, between the (C) BB1 flags, it is possible to display the combination of symbols related to BB1 only in the game in which "miss". If the combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed in the game that is "missed", (1-2) BB1 is established, and the state shifts from (C) BB1 flags to (B) BB1 state. Further, between (C) BB1 flags, a bonus type notification is made to notify that the winning combination that was won is BB1 (that is, the type of bonus combination). This bonus type notification is configured as a specific notification for notifying that BB1 has been won (displaying of a combination of symbols related to BB1 is permitted) between BB1 flags. This specific notification can be felt to indicate that the BB1 has been won by, for example, displaying a character such as “red 7 inside hit” or lighting a lamp corresponding to “red 7”. ing. It should be noted that this specific notification can be made to be always performed during the period between the (C)BB1 flags, or in the game in which the combination of symbols related to the BB1 can be displayed between the (C)BB1 flags. You can choose to be invited.

Further, between the (C) BB1 flags, the stop control is changed for the push order small wins 1 to 6. Specifically, if you win the push order small win 1, the push order small win 3, and the push order small win 5, regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (without considering these factors), 9 cards are paid out. Therefore, if you win the push order small win 2, the push order small win 4, and the push order small win 6, you will get one payout regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (without considering these factors). Stop control is changed to. Here, since the same winning probability for each of the push order small wins 1 to 6, assuming that the push order is not notified, normal stop control is performed (A) general game The return rate to the player is configured to be higher between the state (non-bonus state) and between (G) BB3 flags described later than between (C) BB1 flags. The (C) BB1 flag interval may be configured as a reduction period (however, the reduction rate is low in view of (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) and (G-1) non-advantageous section described later). Alternatively, it may be configured as an increase period (however, the increase rate is low when viewed from an advantageous section (G-2) described later). Further, in terms of the expected value to be given, it may be configured as a no increase/decrease period. Further, although it has almost no effect on the expected addition value, even between the (C) BB1 flags, for example, between the (C-1) non-advantageous section and the (C-2) advantageous section according to a specific notification condition. Alternatively, the shift control may be performed.

(A) In the general gaming state (non-bonus state), if the player wins (2-1) BB2, the player succeeds in pushing the "blue 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and BB2 When the symbol combination related to (1) can be stopped and displayed on the activated line, (2-2) BB2 is established, and (A) general game state (non-bonus state) shifts to (D) BB2 state. In the (D)BB2 state, as in other examples, the game value increases for an increasing period, and in the (D)BB2 state, when a prescribed number of game values (for example, more than 140) are given, the game value becomes It becomes the upper limit of grant, and (2-4) BB2 ends, and the state shifts from the (D) BB2 state to the (A) general game state (non-bonus state).

On the other hand, if the player fails to push the "blue 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the symbol combination related to BB2 cannot be stopped and displayed on the activated line, (2- 3) BB2 is not established and the state shifts from (A) the general game state (non-bonus state) to (E) the BB2 flag. In addition, if (BB)1 is replaced with BB2 and “red 7” is replaced with “blue 7” between (E)BB2 flags, the description is basically the same as between (C)BB1 flags. To do. The same applies to bonus type notification and the like.

(A) In the general game state (non-bonus state), if (3-1) BB3 is won, the player successfully pushes the "BAR" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and BB3 When the combination of such symbols can be stopped and displayed on the activated line, (3-2) BB3 is established, and (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) shifts to (F) BB3 state. In the (F)BB3 state, as in other examples, the game value increases for an increasing period, and in the (F)BB3 state, when a prescribed number of game values (for example, more than 140) are given, the game value becomes It becomes the upper limit of grant, and (3-4) BB3 ends, and the state shifts from (F) BB3 state to (A) general game state (non-bonus state). Note that the (F)BB3 state can be configured as a decreasing period or a non-increasing period.

On the other hand, if the player fails to push the "BAR" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the symbol combination related to BB3 cannot be stopped and displayed on the activated line, (3-3 ) BB3 is not established, and the state shifts from the (A) general game state (non-bonus state) to the (G) BB3 flag.

The (G)BB3 flags have a higher winning probability of the replay (replay) role than the (C)BB1 flags and the (E)BB2 flags, and the "miss" probability is, for example, about "1/65536" or " It is set to "0". That is, between the (G)BB3 flags, the probability that the symbol combination related to BB3 is displayed is extremely low, or the symbol combination related to BB3 is not displayed. The setting of the “miss” probability is not limited to this, and may be set to the same level as between the (C) BB1 flags and between the (E) BB2 flags, or may be set to a higher probability than these. This may be appropriately selected according to the intended payout rate and its content. (G) Similarly between the BB3 flags, the combination of symbols related to BB3 can be displayed only in the game in which "missing". If the combination of symbols related to BB3 can be displayed in the game that is "missed", (3-2) BB3 is established, and the state shifts from (G) BB3 flags to (F) BB3 state. Note that the bonus type notification is basically the same as between the (C) BB1 flags if “red 7” is replaced with “BAR”, and therefore the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, between the (G)BB3 flags, the stop control is not changed for the push order small winning combinations 1 to 6, and the normal stop control is performed. Therefore, assuming that the notification of the pushing order is not performed, the return rate to the player is higher between the (C) BB1 flags and between the (E) BB2 flags, but between the (G) BB3 flags, If it is not controlled to the advantageous section, (G-1) it becomes a non-advantageous section and the game value decreases, but it is a reduction period, but if it is controlled to the advantageous section, (G-2) advantage. In the (G-2) advantageous section, as a result of being informed of the push order that is the correct answer at the time of winning the push order small winning combinations 1 to 6, as a result of (C) between BB1 flags. And (E) the BB2 flag is configured to have a higher return rate to the player (a higher expected expected value). As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example can be adopted.

That is, if (1-1) BB1 is won and (1-2) BB1 is established, the game value is increased to (B) BB1 state, and if (1-3) BB1 is not established, (C) Between the BB1 flags, the game value gradually increases or gradually decreases. Between (C) BB1 flags, it is configured to continue until (1-2) BB1 is established. If (2-1) BB2 is won and (2-2) BB2 is established, the game value is increased to (D) BB2 state, and if (2-3) BB2 is not established, (E) Between the BB2 flags, the game value gradually increases or gradually decreases. Between (E)BB2 flags, it is configured to continue until (2-2)BB2 is established.

Also, if (3-1) BB3 is won, and (3-2) BB3 is established, the state becomes (F) BB3 state and the game value increases, and if (3-3) BB3 is not established, (G) Between BB3 flags, the game value sharply decreases in the (G-1) non-advantageous section, while the game value sharply increases in the (G-2) advantageous section. The (G) BB3 flag is configured to continue with an extremely low probability until (3-2) BB3 is satisfied, or basically not to end once the transition is made. Since BB1 and BB2 have a higher winning probability than BB3, it is possible to sufficiently secure a period in which the gambling property can be suppressed. In addition, usually, when the game machine is installed in a game store, the former game property is provided, and after a while, the latter game property is likely to be provided. However, it is possible to ensure that the game playability can be changed by the following initialization operation.

For example, when the setting change operation (initialization operation for initializing the game state) is performed when the flag is between (C)BB1 flag, between (E)BB2 flag, or between (G)BB3 flag, carryover combination By clearing BB1, BB2, or BB3 as (1), (A) the normal game state (non-bonus state) is entered. That is, when the (G) BB3 flags are not ended, the BB3 as the carryover combination is cleared based on the setting change operation being performed (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) ). However, when the setting change operation is performed, if (C) between BB1 flags or between (E) BB2 flags, BB1 or BB2 as a carryover combination is cleared (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state). ), but if it is between (G) BB3 flags, BB3 as the carryover combination is not cleared and (A) the normal gaming state (non-bonus state) may not be shifted. Further, it is also possible to configure such that none of BB1, BB2 or BB3 as the carryover combination is cleared even if the setting change operation is performed.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the first special winning combination (BB1) or the second special winning combination (BB3) is won, the game concerned, or the first special permission state (between BB1 flags) or the second winning combination is won. Other internal winning combination has not been determined in the special permission state (BB3 flag) (so-called, lost) If it is not a game, the combination of the first special symbol (the combination of symbols related to BB1) or the second special symbol Cannot be displayed (combination of symbols relating to BB3). Further, in the first special permission state, when the first predetermined winning combination (pushing order small winning combination 1, 3, 5) is won, a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game values are given regardless of the pushing order, and the second When a predetermined winning combination (pushing order small winning combination 2, 4, 6) is won, a predetermined number of game values are not given regardless of the pushing order. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given if the pushing order is correct and a predetermined number of games are given if the pushing order is incorrect. No value is given. Then, at least during the specific period of the second special permission state, it is possible to control to the advantageous state ((G-2) advantageous section) in which the information of the stop operation of the player is notified.

That is, if the first special combination is won and the combination of the first special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the first special permission state is finished. The profits do not fluctuate due to this, and the player can receive a certain amount of profits, but the profits do not increase dramatically, so even if it becomes advantageous, it shows the amount of increase in the game value. The slope value will be relatively low. On the other hand, if the second special combination is won, and the combination of the second special symbols is not displayed in the game, then the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the second special permission state ends. As a result, profits fluctuate, and the player may suffer a disadvantage more than in the first special permission state, but when the advantageous state is reached, the profit is dramatically increased. The slope value indicating the increase in value is relatively high. Therefore, by making it possible to change the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value during the advantageous state, it is possible to make the game play rich in variety.

In the gaming machine of this example, the winning probability of the first special combination is made higher than the winning probability of the second special combination, and the probability that the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state is the second. In the special permission state, the combination of the second special symbols may be set higher than the displayable probability. That is, the first special permission state may be set to a state in which it is easier to transition than the second special permission state and to be finished, and the second special permission state may be set to a state in which transition is less likely to occur and termination is more difficult than in the first special permission state. In this way, the enjoyment of the game can be maintained while the gambling property is moderate.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, the combination of the first special symbol relating to the first special combination and the second special symbol relating to the second special symbol cannot be aimed at the same time when the player makes a push. You may comprise so that it may be arrange|positioned at intervals. By doing so, the playability can be further varied and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present example, when the first special winning combination or the second special winning combination is won, the fact that the winning is won is notified to one of them, but the type is not notified (bonus winning notification), In the first special permission state and the second special permission state, the type thereof may be notified (bonus type notification). By doing so, it is possible to notify the information desired by the player while further enhancing the playability.

[Another example of playability (game specifications) (6)]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99, another example (No. 6) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram conceptually explaining the game flow in another example (six) of the game property (game specification), and FIG. 99 is another example (six) of the game property (game specification). It is the figure which showed an example of the internal lottery table used in.

As shown in FIG. 98 and FIG. 99, in this example, there are roughly classified a gaming state of a general gaming state (normal gaming state) and a BB state, and in the general gaming state (normal gaming state), either BB1 or BB2. The state in which the bonus combination is not won is defined as (A) general gaming state (between non-flags), and the state in which BB1 is won (BB1 allowed state where BB1 is carried over) is 3 pieces. The state in which the medals are bet (hanged) and the game is played is defined as (B) three-bet state between BB1 flags, and in the state where BB2 is won (BB2 permission state where BB2 is carried over). Therefore, the state in which three medals are bet and the game is played is defined as (C) three-bet state between BB2 flags. In the BB1 permitted state, two medals are bet and the game is played. The state is defined as a (D) two-bet state between BB1 flags, and the BB2 permitted state where two medals are bet and a game is played is defined as (E) two-bet state between BB2 flags. .. Further, a bonus state in which the symbol combination related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the activated line is defined as (F)BB1 state, and the symbol combination related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the activated line to be started. The bonus state is defined as the (G)BB2 state. That is, it is intended to make the game play different according to the type of bonus combination that is won (or won) in the normal game state (normal game state) and the number of bets (multiplying the game value).

In the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 99, for convenience of explanation, each lottery value used in the (A) three-bet state of the normal gaming state (between non-flags) (see the column of "three bets between non-flags"). , (A) each lottery value used in the two-bet state of the normal gaming state (between non-flags) (see the column of “two bets between non-flags”), (B) three-bet state between BB1 flags, and (C ) In each lottery value used in the three-bet state between BB2 flags (see the column “3 bets between flags”), and in (D) two-bet state between BB1 flags and (E) two-bet state between BB2 flags Each lottery value used (see the column of "two bets between flags") is described in each column, but this does not mean that the gaming state (RT state) is different. That is, the RT state can be controlled as a common RT state. However, it can also be controlled as another RT state. In addition, at least the internal winning combination that is the target of the determination of the advantageous section grant, which will be described later, has a common lottery value among the set values.

(A) In the normal game state (between non-flags), when three bets are made, winning of BB1 is possible, and winning of BB2 is not possible (see the column of “3 bets between non-flags” in FIG. 99). On the other hand, in the case of 2 bets, the winning of BB2 is possible, and the winning of BB1 is not possible (see the column of “2 bets between non-flags” in FIG. 99). In this example, the player can start the game (perform a start operation) in the case of betting two medals and in the case of betting three medals. There is. The term "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal insertion slot 14 for use in the game, and the player operates the bet button to obtain two or three credits. It includes both of playing medals and automatically playing two or three medals by winning a replay.

(A) In the normal gaming state (between non-flags), when three bets are won, if BB1 is won (may be a case where the winning game is carried over without displaying the combination of symbols relating to BB1) Shifts between BB1 flags. (1-1) When a game is played with 3 bets between BB1 flags, the state becomes (3) bet between BB1 flags (see the column of "3 bets between flags" in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when a game is played with two bets between (2) BB1 flags, a (2) bet between two flags between BB1 flags state (see the column "2 bets between flags" in FIG. 99).

(B) In the three-bet state between BB1 flags, a combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed in the game that has "missed", as has already been described in another example (BB1 can be established). .. The “miss” probability can be set as appropriate, but is set to, for example, about “1/8.5”. In addition, the state is a BB1 permission state, and BB1 does not newly win or wins BB2 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). Further, when the push order bell A (refer to the internal winning combination of No. “20” to “31” in FIG. 99) is won, if the push order is correct (the push order displayed by “abbreviation” respectively), it is 9 If one sheet is paid out, the pressing order is incorrect, and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (“○”), one sheet is paid out, the pressing order is incorrect, and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (“×”). ) 0 cards will be paid out. Further, when the push order bell B (refer to the internal winning combination of No. “21” to “43” in FIG. 99) is won, 9 coins are paid out regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation. That is, (B) BB1 three-bet state between flags, since the pressing order of the pushing order bell B is irrelevant, unless considering the advantageous section, (A) three-bet state in the normal gaming state (between non-flags) The return rate is higher than the state or the three bet state between the (C)BB2 flags, which is a state advantageous to the player.

Further, in the (B) three bet state between the BB1 flags, when the winning is achieved at the chance (see the internal winning combination of No. “7” to “16” in FIG. 99) (or the combination of the symbols related to the chance is It may be displayed), or when the strong bell (see the internal winning combination of No. “17” and “18” in FIG. 99) is won, the fixed winning combination (No. “19” of FIG. 99) is displayed. When the internal winning combination is won, when the cherry (see No. “44” internal winning combination in FIG. 99) is won and when the watermelon (No. “45” internal winning combination in FIG. 99 is referred to) ), the advantageous section grant determination (beneficial section grant lottery) is performed with a probability (100% probability for a fixed winning combination) corresponding to each internal winning combination. If it is determined as a result of the advantageous section grant determination, for example, one set of 50 games is provided with an advantage section (if one advantage section is already in use, one set is extended by 50 games). It should be noted that the mode of giving the advantageous section is an example, and various modes described in the present embodiment and other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

Further, in the (3) bet state between (B) BB1 flags, when the symbol combination related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, (1-2) BB1 is established and the state shifts to (F) BB1. (F) The BB1 state is, for example, a gaming state that is configured as a "special bonus state" and has an increasing period in which the gaming value increases, and an arbitrary prescribed number (for example, the same as already described in another example. , 140 pieces) of game value is given, (1-3) BB1 ends, and the state shifts from (F) BB1 state to (A) general gaming state (between non-flags).

(D) In the two-bet state between BB1 flags, although it is between BB1 flags, the number of bets is different from the game in which BB1 is won, so even if the game is "missed", the combination of symbols related to BB1 Cannot be displayed (BB1 cannot be established). In addition, the state is a BB1 permission state, and BB1 does not newly win or wins BB2 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). That is, the state is configured as a gaming state in which neither a winning combination nor a winning combination is won. However, in view of the fact that it is between the BB1 flags, a combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed in the game in which the game is “missed”.

Further, in the (D) 2 bet state between the BB1 flags, when either the pushing order bell A or the pushing order bell B is won, if the pushing order is correct, 2 pieces are paid out, and the pushing order is incorrect and the operation is stopped. If the operation timing is appropriate, 1 sheet is paid out, and if the pressing order is incorrect and the stop operation timing is not appropriate, 0 sheet is paid out. However, either or both of the pushing order bell A and the pushing order bell B can be configured so that two pieces are paid out regardless of the pushing order, and the expected expected value is (B) three bets between BB1 flags. The lottery value may be appropriately reduced so as to be similar to the state, and the same payout as in the (B) BB1 flag three-bet state may be performed. In the two-bet state of (D) BB1 flag, the above-described advantageous section grant determination is not performed.

(A) In the general game state (between non-flags), when two bets are won, if BB2 is won (may be a case where a combination of symbols related to BB2 is carried over without being displayed in the winning game) Shifts between BB2 flags. (2) When a game is played with 3 bets between BB2 flags, (C) 3 bets between BB2 flags are entered (see the "3 bets between flags" column in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when a game is played with two bets between (4-1) BB2 flags, a (2) bet state between (E) BB2 flags is entered (see the column "2 bets between flags" in FIG. 99).

(C) In the three-bet state between BB2 flags, although it is between BB2 flags, the number of bets is different from the game that BB2 wins, so even if the game is a "miss" game, a combination of symbols related to BB2 Cannot be displayed (BB2 cannot be established). Further, the state is a BB2 permission state, and BB2 does not newly win or wins BB1 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). That is, the state is configured as a gaming state in which neither a winning combination nor a winning combination is won. However, in view of the fact that it is between the BB2 flags, a combination of symbols related to BB2 can be displayed in the game that is "missed".

Further, in the (C) BB2 flag three-bet state, when either the push order bell A or the push order bell B is won, 9 pieces are paid out if the push order is correct and the push order is incorrect and the operation is stopped. If the operation timing is appropriate, 1 sheet is paid out, and if the pressing order is incorrect and the stop operation timing is not appropriate, 0 sheet is paid out. That is, (C) the three-bet state between the BB2 flags does not matter as long as the pushing order of the pushing order bell B does not matter. It is low and disadvantageous to the player.

In the (C) BB2 flag three-bet state, as in the case of (B) BB1 flag three-bet state, the advantageous section grant determination (beneficial section grant lottery) is performed. Here, No. Focusing on “F_REP B” of “4”, in the (B) three-bet state between BB1 flags, “normal lip” is won regardless of the mode of the stop operation, and the advantageous section award is not made. (C) In the three-bet state between the BB2 flags, the "probability of chance" is won and the advantageous section award determination is made regardless of the mode of the stop operation. That is, in the (C) three-bet state between the BB2 flags, the internal winning combination of “F_REP B” is promoted (converted) to the internal winning combination of “chance eye”, so there are many opportunities to determine the advantageous section award. Since it can be obtained, if the advantageous section is taken into consideration, the probability of giving the advantageous section is higher than that in the (B) BB1 flag three-bet state, and the player is in an advantageous state.

(E) In the two-bet state between the BB2 flags, the combination of symbols related to BB2 can be displayed in the game which has been "missed", as has already been described in the other examples (BB2 can be established). .. The “miss” probability can be set as appropriate, but is set to, for example, about “1/8.5”. Further, the state is a BB2 permission state, and BB2 does not newly win or wins BB1 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win).

Also, in the (E) BB2 flag two bet state, when the push order bell A or the push order bell B is won, if the push order is correct, 2 pieces are paid out, and the push order is incorrect and the operation is stopped. If the operation timing is appropriate, 1 sheet is paid out, and if the pressing order is incorrect and the stop operation timing is not appropriate, 0 sheet is paid out. However, either or both of the pushing order bell A and the pushing order bell B may be configured to be paid out in two ways regardless of the pushing order, and the expected payout value is (C) 3 bets between BB2 flags. The lottery value may be appropriately reduced so as to be the same as the state, and then the same payout as in the (C) BB2 flag three bet state may be performed. In the (2) bet state between (E) BB2 flags, the above-described advantageous section grant determination is not performed.

Further, in the two bet state between (E)BB2 flags, when the symbol combination related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, (4-2)BB2 is established and the state shifts to (G)BB2. (F) The BB2 state is, for example, a gaming state that is configured as a "special bonus state" and has an increasing period in which the gaming value increases, and is an arbitrary prescribed number (for example, the same as already described in another example. , 60 cards), the game is finished (4-3) BB1 and the state changes from the (G) BB2 state to the (A) general game state (between non-flags). Note that the (F)BB2 state may be configured as a non-increasing/decreasing period.

In this example, when the (B) three-bet state between the BB1 flags and the (C) three-bet state between the BB2 flags are compared, in the (B) three-bet state between the BB1 flags, the pressing order for the pressing order bell B is In addition, since it is possible to shift to the (F)BB1 state, basically, the (B)BB3 three-bet flag state is the return rate (in other words, the base value and the payout rate). Is good). On the other hand, in the (C) three-bet state between the BB2 flags, there are many opportunities to decide the advantageous section award, and the expected expected value at the time of the advantageous section also becomes high. By appropriately adjusting the winning probability of the internal winning combination of “”, the probability of determining the advantageous section when the chance is won, and the duration of the advantageous section that is awarded when the advantageous section is determined, the (C) BB2 flag It is also possible to configure the return rate in the three-bet state with the three-bet state to be about the same as or higher than the return rate in the three-bet state with the (B) BB1 flag.

Further, in this example, when the (E)BB2 flag two bet state and the (D)BB1 flag two bet state are compared, the (E)BB2 flag two bet state changes to the (G)BB2 state. As a result, the return rate is basically higher in the two bet state between the (E)BB2 flags as much as the change is possible. As in the case of (B) three-bet between BB1 flags state, the control of making the pushing order of the pushing-order bell B unquestionable is performed also in the (B) two-bet state between BB2 flags state, so that the return rate is high. You may make it comprised so that it may become.

For example, when the player starts the game from (A) the normal game state (between non-flags), the player can first select whether to make a three bet or a two bet. If you win BB1 as a 3 bet and do not shift to (F) BB1 state in the winning game, (D) BB1 state 2 bet state has no merit, so (B) 3 bet between BB1 flags Advance the game. (B) In the three-bet state between the BB1 flags, the return rate is relatively high, so the player should shift to the (F)BB1 state to increase the game value without sharply decreasing the game value. Alternatively, it is possible to select whether to increase the game value by obtaining an opportunity to determine the provision of an advantageous section and shifting to the advantageous section (the result of being notified of the pushing order that is the correct answer for the pushing order bell A). In the three-bet state between (B) BB1 flags, as compared with the three-bet state between (C) BB2 flags, the game value does not increase so drastically even if it shifts to the advantageous section.

On the other hand, when the player wins BB2 as a two-bet and does not shift to the (G)BB2 state in the winning game, the player advances the game in a three-bet state between (C)BB2 flags or (E)BB2. It is possible to select whether to proceed with the game in the two-bet state between flags. (C) In the three-bet state between the BB2 flags, the return rate is relatively low and the bonus state is not entered, so there is a possibility that the game value will suddenly decrease, but there is an opportunity to decide the advantageous section award. The probability of gaining is increasing, and if it is further shifted to the advantageous section (the result of being notified of the correct push order for push order bell A and push order bell B), the game value can be rapidly increased. there is a possibility. Further, in the (2) bet state between the (E) BB2 flag, although the increase in the game value in the small win cannot be expected, the return rate is relatively high, and the game value is shifted to the (G) BB2 state. Can be increased. In this example, it is possible to provide such a game property (game specification).

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the bet game value is the first amount (3 pieces), the first special combination (BB1) can be won, while the second special combination (BB2) is won. Not possible. When the bet game value is the second amount (2 pieces), the second special combination can be won, while the first special combination cannot be won. In addition, when the specific combination (“F_REP B”) is won, if the first special permission state (between BB1 flags), the combination of specific symbols (the chance eye) cannot be displayed, and the second special permission state (BB2). (Between flags) makes it possible to display a combination of specific symbols. Then, when the bet game value is the first amount, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, an advantageous state (advantageous section) is given. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform (advantageous section grant determination), and when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, when the bet game value is the first amount, the first special symbol combination (the symbol combination relating to BB1) can be displayed, while the second special symbol is displayed. The combination (the combination of symbols relating to BB2) cannot be displayed. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount, the combination of the second special symbols may be displayed, while the combination of the first special symbols may not be displayed.

That is, according to the gaming machine of the present example, as a state in which the game is played, for example, a state in which the game value is bet with a first amount of gaming value in the first special permission state ((B) BB1 flag) 3 bet state), a second special permission state in which a first amount of game value is bet and a game is played ((C) BB2 flag 3 bet state), first special permission state There is a second amount of game value bet and the game is played ((D) BB1 flag two bet state), and a second special allowance state where the second amount game value is bet. It is possible to create a plurality of states such as a state in which a game is played ((2) bet state between (E)BB2 flags).

Then, according to the gaming machine of the present example, for example, a state in which the game is played by betting the first amount of the game value in the second special permission state is a state in which the giving of the advantageous state is preferentially treated, and A state where the game value of 2 is bet and the game is played is a state where the advantageous state is not given. That is, regarding the provision of the advantageous state, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player depending on which amount of game value is bet, which special combination is won, and the like. Therefore, by making it possible to change the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value during the advantageous state, it is possible to make the game play rich in variety.

In the gaming machine of the present example, when the first predetermined winning combination (pushing order bell A) is won, regardless of which state, for example, a predetermined number of hitting correct answers (for example, 9 (2) a game value is given, and a predetermined number of game values are not given if the pushing order is an incorrect answer. If the second predetermined hand (the pushing order bell B) is won, it is in the first special permission state. In the state where the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played, for example, a predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the pushing order, while in other states, the first predetermined value is given. The same control as that of the winning combination may be performed. In this way, the state in which the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played in the first special permission state can be set to the state where the giving of the game value is preferentially given in the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, the game play can be made more varied.

As described above, with reference to FIG. 92 to FIG. 99, other examples (No. 1 to No. 6) of the game playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment have been described. The main points of (gaming specifications) are mainly described, and the description thereof is omitted or briefly described in the configuration described in the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and the modified examples. Applicable by supplementing appropriately. Further, it is possible to combine the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and part or all of the configurations described in the modified examples to form the present invention.

[Another example of an advantageous interval limiter (sheet limiter)]
Subsequently, another example of the limiter used for the limit process of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. Up to now, the limiter of the advantageous section has been described as a limiter using the number of games consumed in the advantageous section (hereinafter, “game number limiter”), but the type of the limiter of the advantageous section is not limited to the number-of-games limiter. Absent. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2400) or more. The limiter using the number of medals paid out during such an advantageous section will be referred to as a “number limiter” below.

FIG. 100(A) is a diagram showing an outline of the number limiter. In the figure, the vertical axis is the difference number (=payout number-inserted number), which is also called a net increase number. The plus and minus of the difference number are the values seen by the player, and when there are more medals paid out to the player than the inserted medals (plus on the player's side), the reverse In the case of, it becomes negative. Further, the horizontal axis represents the number of games, and the more to the right, the more games have been consumed since the start of the advantageous section. The number limiter forcibly ends the advantageous section when a positive difference of 2400 is obtained, starting from the point when the number of medals decreases the most so that the player does not win an extremely large number of medals at one time. It is what makes me.

In the figure, after the start of the advantageous section, about 100 medals have been reduced. This means that, for example, if the start of the advantageous zone is the start of the normal advantageous zone described above, the number of medals is reduced during the game period or in the preparation state during the advantageous zone described above. The number of medals continues to increase from the start of the advantageous zone to -100, and finally the number of medals increases to about +2300. At this point, at least 2400 medals are at hand from the player's point of view. Therefore, the main control board 71 activates the number limiter to forcibly end the advantageous section. Thereby, the gambling property can be appropriately suppressed.

The main control board 71 may perform limit processing of the advantageous section using only the game number limiter, or may perform limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number-of-games limiter. Both the limiter and the limiter may be used for limit processing of the advantageous section. When both limiters are used, it is desirable that the main control board 71 end the advantageous period when either of the limiter activation conditions is satisfied after the advantageous period starts. In the present description, the number of games limiter is 1500 games and the number of games limiter is 2400. However, this is an example. It may be controlled to.

Here, a case where both the game number limiter and the game number limiter are used will be described. More specifically, the gradient value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section (ART, AT, etc.) (expected net increase value per game, expected net increase value including increase by bonus operation) and the condition for activating the game number limiter are set. The relationship between the number of games B and the difference number C which is the condition for activating the number limiter will be described.
In the following, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the inclination value A for increasing medals in the advantageous section is "3" and the number of games B which is a condition for activating the number of games limiter is "100 games".

In the first specification, the specification of the relationship of the inclination value A×the number of games of the number-of-games limiter B=the difference number C of the number of limiters (eg: A (3 pieces)×B (100 games)=C (300 pieces)) is Conceivable. Such specifications are the most basic specifications, and the advantageous section can be stably controlled, and the gambling property can be appropriately suppressed.

In the second specification, the specification of the relationship of the inclination value A×the number of games B of the number-of-games limiter<the difference number C of the number of limiters (eg: A (3 pieces)×B (100 games)<C (400 pieces)) is Conceivable. In the case of such specifications, the case where the limiter is activated is as follows.

When more than 400 medals are paid out before 100 games are exhausted, the number limiter is activated, and when 100 games are exhausted before more than 400 medals are paid out, the number of games The limiter is activated. If the bonus is pulled more than the expected value, or if the number of push forwards with a large number of net additions is much more than the expected value, the number limiter operates and the game progresses at a value close to the expected value. The limiter is more likely to be activated. Since the inclination value is "3", as a result, when the limiter is activated, the number-of-games limiter for reaching 100G is easier to activate than the number-of-games limiter, and the player's consciousness is that the game is more important than the difference number of games. It will be inclined to the number.

That is, since the inclination value is "3", 400 medals are paid out in 133.3 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number-of-games limiter will be reached before that. Therefore, the ease of activation is as follows: game number limiter> number of sheets limiter. If you do not want to worry about the activation of the number limiter due to the difference in number of sheets, it is recommended to use such a specification. For example, in the case of a type in which the termination condition (not the limiter) is managed by the difference number, such as ending the ART with a net increase of 100 sheets, if such a limiter specification is used, the frequency of activation of the limiter can be suppressed, and the player can It is possible to reduce the frequency at which the advantageous section is discontinued by the limiter, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the third specification, the specification of the relationship of the inclination value A×the number of games B of the number-of-games limiter>the difference number C of the number of limiters (eg: A (3 pieces)×B (100 games)>C (200 pieces)) is Conceivable. In the case of such specifications, the case where the limiter is activated is as follows.

If more than 200 medals are paid out before 100 games are exhausted, the number limiter is activated, and if 100 games are exhausted before more than 200 medals are paid out, the number of games The limiter is activated. Since the inclination value is “3”, 200 medals are paid out in about 66.6 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number limiter will be reached before 100 games are exhausted. Therefore, the ease of activation is game number limiter<number limiter. If you do not want to worry about the activation of the game number limiter due to the consumption of the number of games, it is recommended to use such a specification. For example, if the specification is such that the number of games to be played is relatively low, such as a net increase of 0.1 to 1 per game, but the number of games continues for a long time, the frequency of activation of the limiter can be suppressed, and the player can limit the frequency. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the advantageous section is terminated, and to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Regardless of the specifications, the end condition of the advantageous section other than the limiter rather than the ratio of the limiter reaching the end (for example, ART continuable period (the number of ART games), the number of sets and the stock become zero, etc.) Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the right to consume the advantageous section is erased by the limiter activation, as a payout design in which the ratio of the advantageous section ending is high.

Next, the playability that can be realized when a plurality of limiters are provided will be described.

(Direction at the end of the advantageous section according to the type of limiter)
The sub-control board 72 may be able to execute different advantageous section end effects by using the display device 11 or the like depending on whether the number-of-games limiter is activated or when the number-of-games limiter is activated. If each of them is a special effect, it will lead to a game motivation to see each effect once. Further, the sub control board 72 may change the distribution of the effects performed at the end of the advantageous section according to the type of the limiter. For example, the number limiter may be more accurate in suggesting the setting than when the number-of-games limiter is activated (the difference between the coefficients for each setting is large, or an effect in which a specific setting is fixed is likely to occur). By obtaining specific information such as a setting suggestion or by seeing a special effect, it is possible to reduce the discomfort that the advantageous section is cut off by the limiter. Further, the distribution of the effects performed at the end of the advantageous section may be set based on the specifications of the limiter described above. For example, if the limiter that is hard to activate is activated more easily than the limiter that is easy to activate due to the specifications, the sub-control board 72 is more likely to determine an effect preferable for the player (for example, the precision of setting suggestion is high). Good.

(Ending effect according to the type of limiter)
Further, the sub control board 72 uses the ending effect A when the number of limiters is activated, and the ending effect B when the number of games limiter is activated. There is no big difference in the occurrence rate, but when at least one of the occurrences becomes rich, an ending effect C (may be an effect having a branch to the ending effect A or B) is performed. An advantageous period end suggestive production period (ending) may be provided before the limiter is activated so that the player does not suddenly end at the end of the advantageous period and feel uncomfortable. It should be noted that the "situation in which the number of limiters is activated" means, for example, when the ART is managed based on information other than the difference number, the difference number calculated so far and the difference calculated from the remaining ART period. The sum of the number (for example, in the case of ART for managing the number of games “the number of remaining games×inclination value”) becomes the threshold value (for example, the difference number at which the number limiter is activated or a value slightly smaller than the difference number). In addition, when the ART is managed based on the difference number, the sum of the difference number up to now and the remaining number reaches the threshold value. Further, "a situation in which the number-of-games limiter is activated" means, for example, when the ART is managed based on information other than the number of games, it is calculated from the number of games that have passed so far and the remaining ART period. The sum of the number of games to be played (for example, "remaining remaining number/inclination value in the case of ART for difference number management") is a threshold value (for example, the number of games in which the game number limiter is activated, or slightly smaller than the number of games). When the ART is managed based on the number of games, the sum of the number of games that has passed so far and the number of remaining games has reached a threshold value.

(Notification or suggestion on the history screen of the type of limiter that was activated)
Further, the sub-control board 72 displays on the game history screen that the player can browse on the menu screen, for the type of limiter that has been activated or the type of limiter type (such as the type of ending effect) that is generated. Is also good. In this case, since many payouts have been obtained in the first place, it is possible to motivate the player to expect a high setting.

(Outputs an external signal according to the limiter type)
Further, the main control board 71 may output an external signal of a type corresponding to the activated limiter so that the hall computer can grasp which one of the number limiter and the game number limiter is activated. At this time, the main control board 71 may output an external signal for activating the limiter from different pins of the external terminal board. For example, if the original payout specification is used, the game number limiter is mainly activated, but the number limiter is not activated often.If the number limiter is activated frequently, some kind of goto action is being performed The hall clerk can detect the possibility of a connection error between the machine and the hall computer.

In the same game, when the number limiter activation condition and the game number limiter activation condition are satisfied, the main control board 71 may output either one of the predetermined signals, or two types of signals. You may output in a predetermined order. In the case of outputting in order, it is advisable to wait for a predetermined time from the completion of the output of the signal to be output first to the output of the next signal so that the signal can be reliably received. In the same game, when the condition for activating the number limiter and the condition for activating the game number limiter are satisfied, only one of the limit processes is performed, and the other process is not performed. In this case, unnecessary processing may not be generated. In this case, the main control board 71 outputs an external signal according to the limiter of the type performed.

(Outputs one external signal regardless of limiter type)
If the capacity of the main (main control board 71) and the number of pins of the terminal board for external signal output have a margin, they may be different as described above, but the same external signal may be used regardless of the type of the limiter. May be output. The capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be saved.

(The same external signal is output at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the end by the limiter)
Further, the main control board 71 may output the same external signal at the end of the advantageous period other than the limiter and at the end by the limiter, and may detect that the advantageous period has ended by a hall computer or the like. In this case, the capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be further saved.

(Example of external signal output when the limiter is activated during bonus operation (output immediately))
Further, when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal in the game or immediately after the end of the game. By doing this, for example, even if the number of shots acquired in one shot exceeds the number of number limiters, it does not mean that the limiter function was not defective, but by chance the bonus actuated near the number limit of the number of hits Can be confirmed on the hall side.

(External signal output when limiter is activated during bonus operation (at end of bonus))
In addition, when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal at the end of the bonus or immediately after the end of the bonus. When it is desired to accurately grasp the end of the game state in which the number of coins actually increased, such a specification may be adopted.

(Direction when a player drops a small role in a game in which the number limiter may be activated)
For example, in a game of playing 3 cards with a remaining number of 6 until the number limiter is activated, you win a push order small win in which 9 medals are paid out at the time of correct answer, and the notification of the push order of the correct answer is also given. Regardless, if the player makes a mistake in the pressing order, assuming that the number limiter is activated in the game by looking at the situation at the start of the game, the production at the time the number limiter is activated may be started from the start of the game. .. In such a case, although the number limiter is not activated as a result of the wrong pressing order, the sub-control board 72 produces an effect when the number limiter is activated from the start of the game (for example, activation of the number limiter is scheduled. The effect) may be continuously executed as it is, or the effect may be temporarily terminated or interrupted by determining that the number-of-sheets limiter is not activated.

(Direction when the limiter to be activated is changed by the player's operation)
Also, the type of limiter activated may be different due to a player's operation error or the like. For example, in a situation in which the number of remaining games until the number of games limiter is activated is 6 and the number of games remaining until the number of games limiter is activated is 2 games, 9 medals are paid out when the correct answer is given in a game of 3 games. The case where the winning combination is won and the pushing order of the correct answer is notified is applicable. In such a case, when the player performs a stop operation according to the notification, the number-of-games limiter is activated in the game, but when the player makes a mistake in the pushing order without following the notification, the number-of-games limiter is activated in the next game. (Note that the number of games limiter may be activated in the next game, but here, it is assumed that the number of games limiter is activated when a plurality of limiter activation conditions are satisfied).

In such a case, the sub-control board 72 starts the effect when the number limiter is activated in the game in which the winning order is a small winning combination, and the timing when the number limiter is not activated is determined (first stop operation ~ Of all reels stopped, at any timing after the display of the missing or small number of symbol combinations is confirmed), switch to the effect when the game number limiter is activated, or to the effect that does not correspond to any limiter activation suggestion It is preferable to perform processing for returning once and control so as to avoid a contradiction between the activated limiter and the effect.

(During the bonus operation, delaying the end effect due to the activation of the limiter inside and extending the ending effect)
As for the effects and control performed in connection with the limit process described above, if the limit process is performed during the bonus operation described above, the bonus generation ends with the timing of the effect according to the end of the advantageous section due to the limit process. It is possible to reduce the player's discomfort by using a method of delaying the time or immediately after the end and extending the effect during the advantageous section such as the ending effect until then.

[How to control the number of sheets limiter]
Subsequently, a method for controlling the number limiter will be described with reference to FIG. In the number-of-sheets limiter, the point where the absolute value of medals has decreased most from the start of the advantageous zone is set as the lowest point (starting point), and the positive amount from the latest lowest point is used as the difference number of sheets which triggers the number of sheets limiter. .. The figure shows an example in which the game progresses with the start of the advantageous section as the first game, and the number of medals is repeatedly increased and decreased in 1 to 8 games, and then increases to reach the number limiter (the pushing order Small roles are described as "Battle Order Bell").

In the figure, since the point where the absolute value of the medal has decreased the most since the start of the advantageous section is "-9", the number limiter is activated at the timing when the difference number is "+2391" in the Nth game. ing. The counter for the limiter is reset to 0 with the activation of the number limiter. After that, as a result of the correct answers being pressed in the N+2th game and the bells being aligned, the difference from the starting point exceeds "+2400", but the number limiter has already been activated and the advantage section (ART) has ended. , It's only temporary and there is no problem.

Although the figure shows the absolute difference number from the start of the advantageous section at the end of payout of the game, it is a value for explanation, and the corresponding counter does not need to be mounted on the gaming machine. Of course, a corresponding counter may be mounted and used to show the player the number of coins acquired.

The starting point flag is information indicating that the current game situation is the lowest point after the start of the advantageous section. It may be recognized as the lowest point by simply having the value of the counter (number of sheets counter) used for the limiter as 0 without having the starting point flag, but whether or not subtraction of the number of difference sheets before the activation of the number of limiters has started In the case of producing on the sub (sub control board 72) side, the main (main control board 72) is produced by referring to the starting point flag that can be determined only by ON/OFF judgment and not transmitting the value of the number counter to the sub side. The processing load of 71) can be reduced. In that case, the sub-side receives the information about the number of inserted sheets and the number of paid-out sheets transmitted from the main, performs the same process as the number of sheets counter on the side of the sub-side, and produces the status as the number of sheets counter (notification of the number of sheets until the number of sheets limiter is activated). Etc.) may be performed.

The lowest point (starting point) may be updated with either the same value as the latest lowest point or a smaller value. The absolute difference number becomes "-3" at the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, and then increases once, and becomes "-3" again at the end of the fourth game. Therefore, the main control board 71 sets the starting point flag again at the end of the fourth game. In reality, since the number of medals has decreased after that, the absolute difference number at the end of the eighth game after the start of the advantageous section is "-9", which is the starting point for the number limiter.

In the figure, the first lowest point is the end time of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, but the time before the end of one game at the start of the advantageous section (the absolute difference number is 0) Set as the first lowest point, the second lowest point at the end of one game, the third lowest point when the number of games becomes -9, and the number limiter is activated when 2400 more points are added from the third lowest point. May be Further, in the figure, when the replay is won, the number counter is updated so that the inserted number is 0 and the paid out number is 0. As a result, it is not necessary to update the difference in the number of replays, and the processing load can be reduced. On the other hand, the payout number corresponding to the inserted number may be performed at the time of winning the replay, and the number counter may be updated with the inserted number being 3 in the next game. By doing this, it is possible to match the value of the number counter from the time the replay is won until the next game start operation is performed with the actual difference behaviour. With reference to FIG.

The sub-control board 72 may notify the value of the number counter on the display device 11 (liquid crystal screen) or the like so that the player can recognize or suggest the remaining number until the number limiter is activated. Further, the sub-control board 72 does not directly display the remaining number of sheets until the number of sheets limiter is activated. If the number of remaining sheets is 2000 or more until the number of sheets limiter is activated, the first production stage, if the remaining number of 1000 to 1999 sheets is the second production stage, the remaining production of 999. If the number of sheets is equal to or less than the number of sheets, the production stage such as the background may be suggested by changing according to the number range until the number of sheets limiter is activated like the third production stage.

Further, the main control board 71 may output the value of the number counter as an external signal so that it can be displayed on a hall computer or a data display for viewing game data installed on the top of a pachi-slot or the like. The main control board 71 preferably maintains the values of the starting point flag and the number of sheets counter without erasing even when the power is cut off. On the other hand, the main control board 71 may delete the values of the starting point flag and the number counter when changing the settings.

[Adjusting the number of sheets limiter]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102(C), an adjustment hitting method of the number limiter will be described. In the specification in which the advantageous period is forcibly ended by using the number limiter, a method in which the number limiter is activated by adjusting the increase/decrease of medals immediately before the number limiter is activated can also be considered. For example, when the pressing order small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, "9 coins" are paid out, and the stopping operation is performed in the incorrect pressing order. With the specification that the payout of medals is "0", three medals are required for one game, so if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order when the push order wins, the number counter If "+6" is given and the stop operation is performed in the wrong order of pushing at the time of winning the push order, the number counter is set to "-3". For this reason, for example, when the player presses the push combination combination three times, if the answer is incorrect twice in the pressing order and correct once, the value of the number counter is maintained, and as a result, the number limiter is not activated.

By adjusting the number limiter in this way, it is possible to wait for a bonus winning as an ART (advantageous section) immediately before the number limiter is activated. In the example shown in the figure, such an adjustment batting method starts from the M-th game, and the adjustment batting method is performed until the X-th game which wins the BB (bonus). As a result, in the X+10th game, +2512 medals, which exceeds +2400 for which the number limiter is activated, have been obtained (note that the small win in BB (15) is described as "BB in bell"). ).

In the pachi-slot 1, a hitting method (a stop different from the batting order navigation that stops the batting order navigation) can be performed by performing an effect that suggests or informs that it is advantageous to intentionally oppose the notification of the pushing order. Operation). Note that such an effect may be performed by the sub control board 72 via the display device 11 or the like, or may be performed by the main control board 71.

In addition, if there are multiple types of bonus combinations, such as a mini bonus with a net increase of about 15 and a relatively high winning probability (15 bonus roles during bonus operation cannot be missed or difficult), and a bonus limit of 120 additional bonus, there is a limiter. The above-described adjustment batting method may be recommended on a line in which the remaining difference until reaching the maximum bonus is larger than the net increase in the mini bonus. In addition, for small wins other than the push forward win, the payout numbers may be easily adjusted (for example, the payout number is 3) without increasing the payout number to be more than 3. In this way, the interest of the game is enhanced by making it possible to improve the payout rate by devising the way of hitting.

In addition, when placing importance on the disadvantages such as the complexity of game play being shunned by beginners, instead of adding only the actual net additional number to the number counter, adding only the net additional number when playing as instructed It may be done. For example, in a three-seat game, when a winning combination of the pushing order in which nine medals are paid out at the time of a correct answer is won, the main control board 71 notifies the operation mode of the player on the condition that the pushing order of the correct answer is notified. The number counter is incremented by +6 regardless of the winning result. As such a specification, a specification for closing such an adjustment striking method may be adopted.

[Gameplay with specifications that regulate the adjustment method]
Next, the playability that can be realized with the specifications that enclose such an adjustment hitting method will be described.

(Without bonus)
In the first place, if the internal winning combination is constituted only by the small winning combination and the re-play without mounting the bonus combination, the player will not be required to perform the complicated batting method as described above, and the playability will be easy to understand.

(Bonus with no increase or decrease)
Also, as another example of the specification that suppresses the above batting method, the bonus may be a non-increased/decreased bonus in which only a small role in which the same number of coins as the number of coins inserted during operation is paid is awarded. The bonus may be reduced so that only a small role in which a smaller number of coins than the number of coins is paid out is won. In this case, the bonus may be such that advantageous processing in lottery of the advantageous section may be performed during the bonus operation or during the bonus operation instead of increasing the number of medals. As long as a normal game is played, the bonus winning may be hindered by the reel control, and the bonus may be difficult to win.

(The number of net additions during bonus operation is 3 or less)
Since there is no payout at the time of bonus winning, assuming a three-player game, the difference in the bonus winning game is minus three. Assuming that the bonus ends in one game with three cards, the maximum number of prizes that can be generated during bonus operation is six or less. By doing this, the difference number of sheets from the bonus operation to the end of the bonus does not become a positive value, so that the value of the number counter does not increase due to the bonus operation, and the complicated striking as described above is performed. The player does not have to practice the law.

[Gameplay with specifications that allow adjustment batting]
Next, the playability that can be realized with the specifications that allow such an adjustment batting method will be described.

(Remove a small role during bonus operation or reduce the number of acquisitions)
In addition to the above-mentioned batting method specifications, if the number limiter is activated during bonus operation, dare to reduce the number of bonuses acquired, end the bonus, and after the bonus, use the above batting method. Sometimes it is most advantageous to wait for the next bonus while extending the life of the advantage section. Therefore, during the bonus operation, it is possible to lose the small winning combination at the timing of pressing and the order of pressing, or to make the winning combination with a small payout number. In this case, it is desirable that the combination with a small number of payouts is smaller than the number of inserted coins during the bonus operation. A certain effect can be obtained even by providing a role that allows fine adjustment, such as reception.

(Only normal re-plays or combinations with less than the number of cards inserted are normal combinations other than the push order combination)
For example, it is assumed that the bonus is not activated and the number of coins is three. The number of push-order small wins is 9, but other wins, such as so-called watermelon, cherry, and bell without the concept of push-order, are configured as re-playing wins or payouts of 3 or less. By doing so, even if another small win is drawn in a situation where the number limiter is activated by a net increase of the remaining number, the number limiter does not operate and the difficulty level of the percussion batting is reduced, making it easier to play.

(If you perform a stop operation different from the push-and-play combination navigation, the player can intervene at the frequency of winning a specific number (1 to 2 combinations))
If the stop operation is different from the push-and-play navigation, there is a specification that one piece is paid out or dropped. In this case, there are two types of increase/decrease of the game, that is, minus two and minus three, so it is difficult to calculate and may be confused when playing. Compared to such specifications, if the number of sheets is fixed, such as when 1 to 2 sheets are always aligned when ignoring navigation, the negative value when ignoring navigation when the number of sheets is barely fixed is fixed to, for example, minus 2. Therefore, the calculation is easy, and the careless mistake that the player misses the calculation and hits the place where the navigation should be ignored once more as the navigation and takes the batting order bell is reduced.

It should be noted that some effects can be exhibited even if it is made to be stable, for example, one sheet is dispensed at a high frequency, or it is missed at a high frequency. Further, the payout number may be stable depending on the pattern of ignoring navigation. For example, when a batting order navigation occurs for "1, 2, 3" (correct batting order for left, middle, and right), the winning ratio for one player is 3 for the relationship of "medium 1st"> "right 1st". If the player wants to reduce the number, the player can select the right first stop and the player can select the middle first stop if the player wants to reduce the number of cards. Also, if you miss the second stop after the correct answer in the first stop in the game, if you stop in the order of "1.3.2", there is a higher probability than other navigation neglected batting order, or one winning role is always won It is recommended that the player be able to select the reduction method by the batting method.

(Change navigation mode when navigation should be ignored)
When it is optimal to play according to the navigation, the sub-control board 72 displays the pushing order in the first mode (blue numbers etc.), and when it is optimal to play against the navigation, the sub-control board 72 is displayed. Displays the push order in the second mode (red numbers, etc.).

(Navi changes depending on the situation or performance)
The main control board 71 or the sub-control board 72 may be different in a situation in which a mode such as BGM, an image, and a lamp follows the navigation and a situation in which the navigation is countered. It is desirable to be able to know in advance, before navigation occurs, whether or not the navigation should be countered if navigation occurs in the next game.

(Lock and reel freeze when navigation should be ignored)
The main control board 71 may provide a reel rotation start delay (freeze or reel action) immediately after the lever is turned on, after the reel rotation starts, or a stop button temporary operation acceptance invalidation period. As a result, the player can be alerted, and it is possible to prevent a case where the advantageous section is erroneously ended. Further, it is desirable that the main control board 71 or the sub-control board 72 also calls attention to sound or images.

[Another example of advantageous zone limiter (Payout amount limiter)]
Here, in the above-described number limiter, based on the difference number (=payout number-insertion number), that is, a value obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out to the player. The limit process is to be performed, but not limited to this. The main control board 71 may perform limit processing by using the number of medals paid out to the player, and such a limiter is called a payout number limiter. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing for terminating the advantageous period when a predetermined number (for example, 2400) of medals are paid out during the advantageous period.

In the above-mentioned number limiter, limit processing is performed based on the difference number obtained by subtracting the inserted number from the paid number, but in the paid number limiter, without subtracting the inserted number from the paid number, the payout number is directly referred to. Limit processing is performed when the number of paid-out sheets reaches the specified value. In such a payout number limiter, the main control board 71 causes the advantageous section (in this case, for example, including the above-mentioned "normal advantage section") or the increase section (that is, a game section in which medals actually increase. In this case, for example, The payout number counter is initialized at the start of the above-mentioned "normal advantageous section"), and the payout number counter is updated every time a payout occurs due to winning of a small winning combination. Then, the main control board 71, when the value of the payout number counter reaches a prescribed value for performing limit processing, ends the advantageous section, and also performs limit processing of initializing various kinds of processing and values relating to the advantageous section.

Also in such a payout number limiter, the method of updating the payout number counter when a winning combination relating to replay is won is arbitrary, and may be counted as three payouts, or may be counted as zero payout. However, it is preferable that the main control board 71 counts as 0 payout when a winning combination related to replay is won. By doing so, for example, in the game of 3BET, a payout number counter is set depending on whether a combination of three cards (a combination of three medals to be paid out when a prize is won) is won or a combination of replays is won. The change in the value of can be different. In other words, the payout number counter does not advance when the winning combination of the replay is won rather than when the winning combination of three coins is won, which makes the player feel more profitable. It is possible to make a difference in the value between the three-card combination, which is the value, and the combination relating to the replay.

[Another example of an advantageous interval limiter (navigation limiter)]
Further, as the type of limiter used for limit processing of the advantageous section, a navigation number limiter described below can also be used. In the case of using the navigation frequency limiter, the main control board 71 triggers the notification (navigation) of a predetermined number (for example, 400 times) to the player during the advantageous section (that is, the navigation frequency is a specified value). When it reaches (), limit processing of the advantageous section is performed. Here, in the navigation performed for the player during the advantageous section such as ART, in addition to the navigation for increasing the medals during the advantageous section, maintaining the medals or decreasing the medals during the advantageous section is the normal section. There is a navigation to suppress compared to the inside. In the former navigation, for example, in the case of a stop operation of the correct answer in a 3BET game (for example, when the correct answer is in the push order), more than three medals (for example, 9 medals) are paid out when the correct answer is won. It means notifying the mode of the stop operation, the latter navigation is, for example, a navigation for maintaining the RT state at a high RT, or 3 pieces in the case of the correct stop operation mode in the 3BET game, or When the number of medals is less than three when the answer is correct, but more than when the answer is incorrect (for example, when the pushing order is incorrect) This means notifying the mode. The former target of the navigation can be called an increasing combination that increases medals during the advantageous section (ART) from that role. In the pachi-slot, which of the plurality of winning combinations is to be increased can be arbitrarily designed from the viewpoint of game specifications.

When using the navigation frequency limiter, the main control board 71 counts the number of times of navigation performed when the winning combination is won, while the number of times of navigation that is the condition for the limit process to occur by the navigation frequency limiter is counted, while the non-increasing role is counted. The number of times of navigation performed at the time of winning of may be excluded from the count of the number of times of navigation concerned, and the number of times of navigation performed at the time of winning of a non-increasing winning role may be included in the count of the number of times of navigation concerned. Good. By excluding the number of times of navigation performed when a non-increasing hand was won from counting, the number of medals increased by a large amount, as in the case where a large number of non-increasing roles were established after the start of the advantageous section (ART). If there is not, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending due to an event unrelated to the purpose of the limiter, which is to suppress excessive payout, and not to dissatisfy the player.

In such a navigation frequency limiter, the main control board 71 initializes a navigation frequency counter (navigation frequency counter) that is a condition for the limit process at the start of the advantageous section or the increase section, and the navigation to be counted is generated. Each time the navigation is performed, the value of the navigation counter is updated. Then, when the value of the navigation counter reaches a specified value for performing limit processing, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section, and also performs limit processing of initializing various kinds of processing and values relating to the advantageous section. Note that the counter updating method in each of the various limiters described so far may be an addition method or a subtraction method.

[Another example of limiter period]
Further, in the above description, an example of using the limiters such as the game number limiter, the number limiter, the payout number limiter, and the navigation number limiter only during the advantageous section has been described, but such a limiter is not in the advantageous section, It can be adopted in any period. For example, if you continue to hit the advantageous zone by accident, the maximum number of coins will be paid out at most once in the advantageous zone, but as a result of multiple transitions to the advantageous zone, In that case, many medals may be paid out, and there is a risk that the euphoria will be excessively fueled. Therefore, apart from the limiter in the advantageous zone, a value (for example, a payout rate or a difference number) indicating the increase status of a period for the latest predetermined number of games (for example, the latest 6000 games) is a predetermined value set in advance. A special limiter may be provided to end the advantageous section when exceeding (for example, 170% or +10,000 sheets from the player's perspective). According to such a special limiter, when the condition for activating the special limiter is satisfied during the advantageous section, the main control board 71 just starts the advantageous section and activates the game number limiter or the number limiter at all. Even if it is not possible, the advantageous section is forcibly ended.

In the control of the advantageous section on the main control board 71, the right regarding the advantageous section currently acquired (for example, the duration of ART (the number of ART games), the number of sets, the stock, the number of obtainable differences, etc.) is output. When the special limiter is likely to be activated with reference to the ball rate, the main control board 71 determines whether or not the special limiter is activated, for example, by lowering the additional incidence before reaching the specified value. It is also possible to perform control so that the right of the increase section (ART) to be lowered or to be erased when the special limiter is activated is reduced.

Further, the predetermined period used for determining the activation of the special limiter based on the value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate or the number of remaining coins) may be based on a value other than the number of games, for example, for a predetermined time (for example, 10 Determining a predetermined period for activating the special limiter by using information such as a time) or a predetermined number of inserted coins (eg, 18,000 inserted coins) that can be used to determine that the player has played a game for a predetermined period. May be

The structure of a pachi-slot using such a special limiter is shown below.
A gaming machine that can be played using a gaming value,
The right to set the gaming state as an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous for the player (for example, it may be an advantageous section in a pachi-slot, an increase section (AT, ART), or a probability change state or a shortened state in a pachinko). AT stock, the number of AT games, etc., and may be a right to shift to a pachinko machine's probability change state, time saving state, etc.) (right control means 71, for example) When,
Based on the right, game state control means (for example, main control board 71) for controlling the game state to the advantageous game state until the end condition is satisfied,
Advantageous game state continuation means for continuing the advantageous game state when there is the right (for example, the main control board 71 (the AT state may be continued when there is the AT stock number on the pachislot, etc., and pachinko It may be a continuation of a sudden change state or a shortened state in))),
Increasing status storage means (for example, the main control board 71 used to determine the activation condition of the special limiter, which stores the value indicating the increasing status of the game value until the elapse of a predetermined period from a predetermined unit game) Counter for monitoring the payout rate),
A gaming machine comprising: a special ending means (special limiter) for ending the advantageous state even when the right is granted when the value of the increase status storage means reaches a predetermined specified value.

Further, the above-mentioned special limiter is not limited to the latest predetermined period, but may be, for example, a limiter for each day, or both may be used in combination. The method by which the main control board 71 grasps the unit of one day is arbitrary. As an example, when the main control board 71 has a power failure longer than a predetermined time (a time value that can be distinguished from a temporary power failure during business hours such as 2 hours and 4 hours, and can be estimated to be a power failure during closing due to business closing) , Or a value indicating the increase status of medals from the starting point (that is, resetting the information for the previous day) when the power is turned on after the power is cut off for a predetermined time or more (starting point) (for example, It controls the special limiter by monitoring the payout rate and the difference in number. Further, the main control board 71 sets the time when a predetermined time (one hour or the like) elapses in the power-on state as the start time (starting point) of the day from the starting point (that is, resets the information for the previous day). ), the value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate and the number of remaining coins) may be monitored to control the special limiter. In any case, the time measuring method can be realized by mounting a time measuring means such as RTC on the main control board 71.

[Penalty for Navimis]
Further, in the pachi-slot 1, the main control board 71 may give a predetermined penalty when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player during the advantageous section. For example, in the case of waiting for the transition to the high RT such as during the ART preparation (each of the above-mentioned preparation states), in the case of the specification that the additional lottery of the ART is performed, the transition to the high RT is avoided and the ART preparation is performed. By extending it, you can receive a lot of lottery during the preparation for ART. Therefore, the main control board 71 may not perform such an additional lottery when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player. Since it is not possible to determine whether it is an accidental mistake or an intentional mistake, for example, the main control board 71 changes the degree of the penalty according to the number of times the stop operation is performed not according to the notification. May be

<Detailed example of another example (6) of game play (game specification)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 103 to FIG. 122, a detailed example of another example (No. 6) of the playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. Note that another example (sixth) of the game property (game specification) has already been described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99, but in this detailed example, a more specific example of the game machine will be described. Further, among the inventions described in this detailed example, those which do not require the specifications of other examples (No. 6) of game characteristics (game specifications) can be appropriately applied to other game characteristics (game specifications). There is. Further, in this detailed example, in the frame of the reel display window 4, a line (center line) that connects the middle region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle region of the right reel 3R is defined as an effective line. To do.

[Playability of this detailed example]
First, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 106, a game flow in the present detailed example will be described. 103 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the game state in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section in this detailed example, and FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining each mode in this detailed example, and FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of various tables in this detailed example.

As shown in FIG. 103, in this detailed example, a state in which a player plays a game is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section further includes a production section (advantageous section/normal game) and an increase section. (Advantageous section/pseudo bonus) is provided. The non-advantageous section is a gaming state (non-AT/non-ART) in which the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state unfavorable to the player. The production section is a gaming state (non-AT/non-ART) in which the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and the gaming state is disadvantageous to the player, which is similar to the non-advantageous section, but will be described later. As described above, the mode transition is different from the non-advantageous section.

That is, the non-advantageous section is an initial state that is controlled when the game in the advantageous section is finished, when the setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are satisfied, or when the factory is shipped. The effect section is a control state as a normal state in which the player can change the expectation degree of the increase section transition (grant) by mode transition or the like, and the player performs a normal game.

On the other hand, the increased section is a gaming state (AT/ART) in which information of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, the increase section is a control state as an advantageous state in which the player can increase the game value. It should be noted that the production section and the increase section are both advantageous sections, and are configured as a series of advantageous sections by mutually shifting these sections.

In the detailed example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 105, in the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section sub-flag as the secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 108 described later) is determined. To be done. This is information set with the same meaning as the “lottery number” described in the present embodiment, and in the non-advantageous section, the lottery is performed using this non-advantageous section sub-flag.

The non-advantageous section sub-flag “Ripbell” has an internal winning combination of “F_Replay A” (No. “3”), “F_Replay B” (No. “4”), and “F_Bell 123A1” to “F_Bell 321B2”. (No. “10” to No. “33”). The non-advantageous section sub-flag “weak Che” is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_cherry” (No. “5”). The non-advantageous section subflag “watermelon” is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_watermelon” (No. “9”). The non-advantageous section sub-flag “determined winning combination” is determined when the internal winning combination is either “F_determined cherry” (No. “6”) or “F_reach eye” (No. “8”). The non-advantageous section sub-flag “Middle Che” is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_middle tier cherry” (No. “7”). Note that in the non-advantageous section, the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag may be determined as in the advantageous section. Further, the correspondence relationship between them is not limited to the above.

Further, in the present detailed example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 105, the advantageous section winning sub-flag as the secondary information (sub flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 108 described later) is determined in the advantageous section. To be done. Furthermore, in the advantageous section, the advantageous section winning time sub-flag is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the combination of the displayed symbols. These are information set with the same meaning as the “lottery number” described in the present embodiment, and in the advantageous section, the lottery is performed using the advantageous section winning subflag and the advantageous section winning subflag.

The advantageous section winning subflag “bell” is determined when the internal winning combination is any of “F_bell 123A1” to “F_bell 321B2” (No. “10” to No. “33”). The advantageous section winning sub-flag “weak choi” is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_cherry” (No. “5”). The advantageous section winning subflag “watermelon” is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_watermelon” (No. “9”). The sub-flag “determined winning combination” at the time of winning the advantageous zone is determined when the internal winning combination is either “F_determined cherry” (No. “6”) or “F_reach eye” (No. “8”). .. The sub-flag “Medium Choi” at the time of winning the advantageous zone is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_middle tier cherry” (No. “7”).

When the internal winning combination is either “F_Replay A” (No. “3”) or “F_Replay B” (No. “4”), the sub-flag “Private Rep 1” at the time of winning the advantageous zone is “Right”. It is determined when the combination of symbols of "Rising Lip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "Rip toward the right"). When the internal winning combination is either “F_Replay A” (No. “3”) or “F_Replay B” (No. “4”), the sub-flag “Private Rep 2” at the time of winning the advantageous zone is “parallel”. It is determined when a combination of symbols of "REP" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "parallel Lip").

Here, in the present detailed example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is “F_replay A” (No. “3”), between 3BB flags (that is, “F_3BB” (No. “2”)). In the state where the internal winning combination is determined and carried over, a combination of symbols of “upward-rise lip” is displayed, and between the 2BB flags (that is, “F_2BB” (No. “1”) is an internal winning combination). And the non-flag state (that is, neither "F_2BB" (No. "1") or "F_3BB" (No. "2") has been carried over). In, a combination of symbols of "parallel lip" is displayed.

Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “F_Replay A” (No. “3”), “Through Rep 1” is determined as the sub-flag for winning the advantageous section between the 3BB flags, and between the 2BB flags and between the non-flags. "Communication rep 2" is set as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone. In this detailed example, when the advantageous section winning sub-flags thus differ, various types of lottery described later (for example, a pseudo bonus transfer lottery using the pseudo bonus transfer lottery table shown in (c) of FIG. 105 and FIG. 106 ( The advantage degree in the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in f) is changed.

In this detailed example, "F_Replay A" (No. "3") is used as a part in which the advantageous section winning subflag changes depending on whether it is between 3BB flags or between 2BB flags. Although described as an example, the manner in which the advantageous-zone winning sub-flag fluctuates is not limited to this. For example, as described later, when the internal winning combination is “F_bell 123B1” (No. “12”), the stop control is made different between the 3BB flags and the 2BB flags. Therefore, when such a winning combination is won, the game value may not be changed, and the combination of symbols displayed may be different, so that a different advantageous section winning time sub-flag may be determined. Then, according to the fact that the sub-flags for winning the advantageous section are different, the degree of advantage in various lottery described below may be changed.

Further, for example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is “F_watermelon” (No. “9”), the pressed position (timing of the stop operation) is appropriate regardless of which of the flags. If there is a combination of symbols of "watermelon" is displayed, and if the pressed position is not appropriate, a dropout occurs and the combination of symbols of "watermelon spilled" is displayed. In this case, different advantageous section winning time sub-flags may be determined depending on whether a winning can be achieved without a missing item and a missing item. Then, according to the fact that the sub-flags for winning the advantageous section are different, the degree of advantage in various lottery described below may be changed.

Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is “F_replay A” (No. “3”), the stop operation is in a specific mode between the 3BB flags (in this specific mode, for example, the stop operation is predefined. When the batting order (correct answer pressing order) is performed, the pressed position (timing of the stop operation) is appropriate, and a combination of these, any mode may be used. A combination of symbols of "parallel lip" is displayed, and a combination of symbols of "upward-right lip" is displayed when it is not performed in a specific manner, whereby different advantageous section winning time sub-flags are determined. You may do it. Then, according to the fact that the sub-flags for winning the advantageous section are different, the degree of advantage in various lottery described below may be changed.

That is, in this detailed example, regarding the specific combination, it is possible that the final stop display mode may be different depending on the number of bets, the game state, the mode of the stop operation, or any combination thereof, which is different. It is possible to apply all the modes in which different secondary information can be determined according to the stop display mode, and thereby the advantage degree can be changed.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of this detailed example. In the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in (b) of FIG. 105 is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and the non-advantageous section sub-flag is determined in accordance with the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing, the transfer destination mode and the like are determined according to the non-game section sub-flag. In this determination, when only the type of the mode at the time of shifting to the advantageous zone is determined (“start of advantageous zone” in FIG. 103), not only the type of the mode but also the pseudo bonus may be shifted. There is a case where it is determined (in FIG. 103, “start of advantageous section+start of pseudo bonus”). However, in the non-advantageous section, the specification may not be decided to shift to the pseudo bonus.

Here, each mode in this detailed example will be described with reference to FIG. In this detailed example, the mode is control information (may be paraphrased as a game state or a control state) for varying the degree of expectation of the increase section (pseudo bonus) transition (grant) in the effect section (normal game), In the production section (normal game), according to this mode, the presence or absence of the transition to the pseudo bonus is determined, the advantageous section is maintained, or the advantageous section is ended and transitioned to the non-advantageous section. It has become.

The start mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay when moving from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (production section), and the degree of expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low (see the figure below). (See (c) of 105), and the degree of expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 106 described later). Although not shown, in the start mode, the number of ceiling games is set to “965 games”. The ceiling game number is used to forcibly shift to the pseudo bonus when the period during which the shift to the pseudo bonus is not performed becomes a certain period. Therefore, the smaller the number of ceiling games, the more advantageous to the player, and the larger the number of ceiling games, the more disadvantageous to the player.

The normal A mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode in which the player is most likely to stay when playing a game, and the degree of expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low ((c) in FIG. 105 described later). Also, the degree of expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 106 described later). In the normal A mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games". Further, in FIG. 104, “after the pseudo bonus, about 999 G” means that after the pseudo bonus ends, the game shifts to the end A mode or the end B mode, which will be described later, and the 32 bonus games are executed without shifting to the pseudo bonus in the mode. If the normal A mode is selected when a game is played and once the game shifts to the non-advantageous section and then shifts from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, the apparent number of ceiling games is “965 games”+end A This is a representation of the game period "32 games" in the mode or the end B mode+the number of games required to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. Hereinafter, the same applies to the normal B mode, the heaven preparation mode, and the chance mode.

The normal B mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode for the player to stay relatively while playing a game, but is a more advantageous mode than the normal A mode, and the degree of expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is high. It is relatively low (see (c) of FIG. 105 described later), and the degree of expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 106 described later). In the normal A mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games".

In the heaven preparation mode, the degree of expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) of FIG. 105 described later), but the number of ceiling games is set to “466 games” and when shifting to the pseudo bonus. After that, it is determined that the mode will shift to the heaven mode (see (f) of FIG. 106 described later), and therefore the mode is relatively advantageous in that sense.

In the chance mode, the degree of expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) of FIG. 105 described later) and the number of ceiling games is set to “222 games”, which is relatively advantageous in that sense. It is in a mode. However, the degree of expectation of shifting to the heaven mode is not high (see (f) of FIG. 106 described later).

The ending A mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay when the game shifts to the pseudo bonus and does not shift to the heaven mode (including the heaven preparation mode) after it ends, and it is expected to shift to the pseudo bonus. The degree is the lowest (see (c) of FIG. 105 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 106 described later). In the ending A mode, when 32 games are played without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the pseudo bonus ends, the advantageous section itself ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section.

The end B mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay when the pseudo bonus is transferred and the heaven mode (including the heaven preparation mode) is not transferred after the end of the pseudo bonus, but it is more advantageous than the end A mode. Mode, the degree of expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) of FIG. 105 described later), and the degree of expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 106 (f)). In the end B mode, as in the end A mode, when 32 games are played without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section. The end A mode and the end B mode can be collectively referred to as “end mode”.

The guarantee mode is a mode in which the player stays when the heaven C mode ends, the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) of FIG. 105 described later), and the number of ceiling games is “32 games”. Since it is set to, the mode is relatively advantageous in that sense. However, the degree of expectation of shifting to the heaven mode is not high (see (f) of FIG. 106 described later). That is, when the heaven C mode ends, it is positioned as a mode in which a relatively advantageous state is maintained (guaranteed) for a certain period in order to prevent a decrease in interest due to it.

The heaven A mode is a mode in which the pseudo bonus can be expected to be a so-called condominium, the degree of expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) of FIG. 105 described later), and the number of ceiling games is “32”. The mode is set to "game" and the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to a medium level, which is a relatively advantageous mode. Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 104, for example, a setting difference can be set for the ceiling mode loop rate. For example, when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set value is an even number (2, 4, 6), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%. It is possible to set the lottery value so that, or the lottery value can be set such that the higher the set value, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate. The same applies to the Heaven B mode and the Heaven C mode, which will be described later, and it is possible to provide a setting difference in the ceiling mode loop rate.

The heaven B mode is a mode in which the pseudo bonus can be expected to be a so-called condominium, the degree of expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) of FIG. 105 described later), and the number of ceiling games is “32”. This is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to be high, which is set to "game". In other words, the ceiling mode loop rate is more advantageous than the heaven A mode.

The heaven C mode is a mode in which the pseudo bonus can be expected to be a so-called condominium, the degree of expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) of FIG. 105 described later), and the number of ceiling games is “32”. It is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to be considerably high, which is set to "game". That is, the ceiling mode loop rate is more advantageous than the heaven A mode and the heaven B mode. The heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as the “heaven mode”.

It should be noted that each mode described above is merely an example, and the mode configuration is not limited to this. It is possible to set a mode other than the above-mentioned modes, or it is possible not to set some of the above-mentioned modes.

Further, although the non-advantageous section has been described as a state in which the degree of advantage is relatively lower than that of the advantageous section, the relationship between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the case of the non-advantageous section, the transition ratio to the increase section is higher than in the case where at least one mode is set in the advantage section, or the average number of games required for the transition to the increase section is shorter. It is also possible to set the specifications such as, or the specification in which the non-advantageous section is most likely to be the increasing section. By doing so, an incentive to play the game is created even in a non-advantageous section such as after the setting is changed, so that the game is motivated even when the store is opened. Also, when 32 games have passed after the end of the pseudo bonus, for example, even if the lighting of an advantageous zone lamp described later has ended, it is not determined that the most disadvantageous state is reached, so even in such a case the game is Motivation to continue. Up to this point, the explanation section has been described as a game state in which the information of the stop operation, which is advantageous to the player, is not notified, but it is a disadvantageous mode as compared to the increase section (for example, the frequency of notification or the notification target). If the winning combination is changed, etc.), it is possible to enter the gaming state in which the information of the stop operation is notified.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of this detailed example. In the effect section (normal game), first, the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the advantageous section winning subflag for each game. Specifically, the pseudo bonus transfer lottery table shown in (c) of FIG. 105 is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and the advantageous period winning sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination, during the game. At a predetermined timing of, whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus is determined according to the sub-flag when the advantageous section is won. In addition, in (c) of FIG. 105, "non-win" means not to shift to the pseudo bonus, "win (current game)" means to shift from the current game to the pseudo bonus, and " "Winning (next game)" means shifting from the next game to the pseudo bonus.

In the detailed example, when the “win (current game)” is determined, the game operation is performed at the start of the current game, and when the “win (next game)” is determined, at the start of the next game, the game operation ( The stop operation) is invalidated for a certain period, and in the invalid period, after the reel effect (“Red 7 set” effect) in which the “red 7” symbols are displayed together in the symbol display area 4 is performed, the pseudo In the game in which the bonus is started and the "red 7 set" effect is performed, when it is necessary to notify the information of the stop operation, at least the invalid period ends and the game operation (stop operation) becomes effective. At this time (before that), information of the stop operation is notified.

In the production section (normal game), if the result of the pseudo bonus shift lottery (at the time of winning) is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus, the mode shift lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transfer lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 106 is referred to, and the transfer destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous zone winning sub-flag. In addition, as a result of the pseudo bonus shift lottery (at the time of winning), it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus, and when the mode shift lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the pseudo bonus shift lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode shift lottery described later. (At the time of winning) and lottery for mode transition (at the time of ceiling).

In the production section (normal game), if the result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) is not determined to be transferred to the pseudo bonus, each game (more specifically, “F_replay A” or “F_replay”). In the game in which “B” is won), the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. Specifically, the pseudo bonus transfer lottery table shown in (c) of FIG. 105 is referred to, the winning combination is determined, and the advantageous section winning time sub-flag is determined according to the winning combination. At a predetermined timing (before the game starts), whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus is determined according to the advantageous section winning time sub flag.

In the pseudo bonus transfer lottery table shown in (c) of FIG. 105, “through lip 2” is determined as the advantageous zone winning sub-flag as compared with the case where “through lip 1” is determined as the advantageous zone winning sub-flag. In that case, the rate of deciding to transfer to the pseudo bonus is higher. However, the mode of giving preferential treatment to "communication lip 2" over "communication lip 1" is not limited to this. For example, similar to the one already described in the other example (sixth) of the game property (gaming specification), when "through lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, the pseudo bonus with a predetermined probability. However, it may be determined that the pseudo bonus should not be switched to when the “come rep 1” is determined as the advantageous-zone winning sub-flag.

In the production section (normal game), if the result of the pseudo bonus shift lottery (at the time of winning) is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus, the mode shift lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transfer lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 106 is referred to, and the transfer destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. As a result of the pseudo bonus shift lottery (at the time of winning), it is determined to shift to the pseudo bonus, and when the mode shift lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the mode shift lottery (at the time of ceiling) described later is not performed.

In addition, in the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 106, “through lip 2” is determined as the advantageous zone winning subflag, as compared to the case where “through lip 1” is determined as the advantageous zone winning subflag. In this case, the rate at which it is decided to shift to a mode relatively advantageous to the player is higher. However, the mode of giving preferential treatment to "communication lip 2" over "communication lip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "communication lip 2" is determined as the advantageous section winning subflag, it may be determined to shift to a mode relatively advantageous to the player with a predetermined probability, but as the advantageous section winning subflag " When the communication lip 1” is determined, it may not be possible to determine to shift to a mode relatively advantageous to the player.

In the production section (normal game), when the result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) is not determined to be transferred to the pseudo bonus, the ceiling game number is updated (the addition method or the subtraction method may be used), and the ceiling game When the number reaches the ceiling game number associated with the current mode, it is determined to shift to the pseudo bonus. In this case, the "win (current game)" can be determined without fail, or the "win (next game)" can be guaranteed without fail. Further, either of these can be determined by lottery.

In the production section (normal game), when the number of ceiling games is reached and it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus, the mode shift lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed. Specifically, the mode transfer lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 106 is referred to, and the transfer destination mode is determined according to the current mode.

The process related to the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) and the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) is the same process content except that the type of sub-flag is different, and the same lottery table and control flow. Can be controlled using. In addition, since the process related to the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is different only in the type of the sub-flag and the same processing contents after that, the same lottery table and the control flow are used. Can be controlled.

Further, if "winning (current game)" is not provided as the type of winning of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section winning sub-flag is already determined at the timing when the advantageous section winning sub-flag is determined, and Since the number of ceiling games can also be updated, the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), and the pseudo bonus transfer process at the time of reaching the ceiling can be collectively performed in one process. it can. Further, similarly, the mode shift lottery (at the time of winning), the mode shift lottery (at the time of winning), and the mode shift lottery (at the time of ceiling) can be collectively performed in one process.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of this detailed example. As described above, in the production section (normal game), when it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus and the pseudo bonus is started (“pseudo bonus start” in FIG. 103 ), shift to the increase section (pseudo bonus). To do. Further, as described above, in the effect section (normal game), when the game is controlled to the end A mode or the end B mode and 32 games are played without shifting to the pseudo bonus (in FIG. 103, “advantageous section”). End (via end A/B)”), and shift to the non-advantageous section. Further, when the condition of the limit processing shown in FIG. 114 described later is satisfied, the advantageous section is forcibly ended (“end of advantageous section (limit processing)” in FIG. 103), and as a result, Move to the non-advantageous section.

In the increased section (pseudo bonus), the ceiling shortening lottery is performed when the pseudo bonus is started. Specifically, the ceiling reduction lottery table shown in (e) of FIG. 106 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to reduce the number of ceiling games after the end of the pseudo bonus according to the current mode. In addition, in (e) of FIG. 106, "non-winning" means that the ceiling game number is not shortened, and "winning (ceiling game number=0 update)" means regardless of the mode after the pseudo bonus ends. , Means that the number of ceiling games to be set is “0” (shortened). Note that the ceiling reduction lottery can be performed not only when the pseudo bonus is started but also during each pseudo bonus.

If it is decided that the number of ceiling games will not be shortened as a result of the ceiling reduction lottery, and when the pseudo bonus ends, and if you also do not have the 1G consecutive stock to be described later, the number of ceiling games will be changed according to the current mode. Is set (in the case of the end A mode and the end B mode, the ceiling game number “965 games” may be provisionally set, or the advantageous section ends and the non-advantageous section is passed again to shift to the advantageous section. It may be set at any time), the pseudo bonus ends (“pseudo bonus end” in FIG. 103), and the production section (normal game) starts. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of ceiling games is to be shortened as a result of the lottery for shortening the ceiling, when the pseudo bonus ends, "0 game" is set as the number of ceiling games. As a result, the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the end of the pseudo bonus. In this case, since the pseudo bonus is started when the number of ceiling games is reached, the above-described mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed.

In the increased section (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in a game in which "determined hand" or "medium choi" is determined as an advantageous section winning sub-flag). .. Specifically, the mode transfer lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 106 is referred to, and the transfer destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous zone winning sub-flag. It should be noted that the transition destination mode may be determined even when the advantageous section winning sub-flag other than the above is determined, but in this case, as a general rule, a mode which is relatively disadvantageous to the current mode is shifted. In order not to be determined as the previous mode, another mode transfer lottery table having a different lottery value from the mode transfer lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 106 may be referred to.

In the increased section (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in a game in which “F_Replay A” or “F_Replay B” is won). Specifically, the mode transfer lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 106 is referred to, and the transfer destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. In this case, in the same manner as described above, in principle, in order to prevent the mode relatively disadvantageous to the current mode from being determined as the transfer destination mode, the mode transfer lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. You may make it refer to another mode transfer lottery table with different.

In the increased section (pseudo bonus), 1G consecutive lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in (d) of FIG. 105 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not 1G consecutive is generated according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning subflag or the advantageous section winning subflag. To be done. In addition, in (d) of FIG. 106, "non-winning" means not generating 1G continuous, and "winning (1G continuous +1)" has one right to generate 1G continuous (1G continuous stock). It means that it is given (1G stock counter is incremented by 1). It should be noted that it is possible to store (store) a plurality of 1G stocks (up to 255 stocks) by the 1G stock stock counter. Therefore, a plurality of 1G continuous stocks may be awarded during one pseudo bonus. Further, the 1G continuous lottery table can be configured so that a plurality of 1G continuous lottery stocks can be given by one 1G continuous lottery.

When the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is 1 or more when the pseudo bonus ends (that is, when the 1G consecutive stock counter is held), one 1G consecutive stock is consumed (the 1G consecutive stock counter is 1 is subtracted), and the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the end of the pseudo bonus. In this case, since the pseudo bonus is started according to the right of 1G continuous stock, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery is not performed. On the other hand, when the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is not 1 or more when the pseudo bonus ends (that is, when the 1G consecutive stock is not held), and when the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery is not won, The ceiling game number is set according to the current mode (in the case of the end A mode and the end B mode, the ceiling game number “965 games” may be provisionally set, or the advantageous section ends and the ceiling game number ends again. It may be set when shifting to the advantageous section via the advantageous section), the pseudo bonus ends ("pseudo bonus end" in FIG. 103), and the effect section (normal game) starts.

If you win the lottery for shortening the ceiling and also have 1G consecutive stock, the result of lottery for shortening the ceiling will be given priority, and after the pseudo bonus according to the shortening of the ceiling is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the 1G consecutive stock will be given. The 1G continuous stock may be prioritized and the pseudo bonus according to the 1G continuous stock may be executed, and then the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening may be executed. In the latter case, it is only necessary to separately store the information that can be carried over because the ceiling is shortened.

In this detailed example, as the configuration of the increased section (pseudo bonus), the configuration in which the game is continued for “55 games” and a maximum of 275 pieces can be acquired is given as an example, but the configuration of the pseudo bonus is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo bonus is configured as a “pseudo BB (big bonus)”, and a “pseudo RB (regular bonus)” that is a pseudo bonus that can continue for “22 games” and obtain a maximum of 110 coins is mounted. You may do it. In this case, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus is to be transferred (the right is given) in the above-described pseudo bonus transfer lottery, when reaching the ceiling, in the 1G consecutive lottery, the type thereof (for example, "pseudo BB" is set. , Or “pseudo RB”) may be determined with a predetermined probability (for example, 50% each). Since the “pseudo RB” may have a different value from the “pseudo BB” (more specifically, a value lower than that of the “pseudo BB”), for example, the number of continuous games is “pseudo RB”. Although it is the same as “BB”, the value can be made different by making the maximum obtainable number different by setting the Bellnavi rate (probability of notifying information of the stop operation) to be low. Further, when the "pseudo RB" is started, a reel effect in which the "BAR" symbols are displayed together in the symbol display area 4 or a reel effect in which "red 7-red 7-BAR" is displayed is performed. You can do it like this. Further, the increase section is not limited to the one configured as a pseudo bonus. For example, the number of games to be continued (game period) can be changed to an AT state or an ART state.

Further, during the pseudo bonus, if the execution condition of the limit process shown in FIG. 114 described later is satisfied, the advantageous section is forcibly ended (in FIG. 103, “end of advantageous section by limit processing”). ), as a result, shifts to the non-advantageous section.

In the detailed example, the flow of the game described above is based on the premise that the game is basically played in the three-bet state. Therefore, when the game is played in the two bet state, various lottery using the above-described (a) to (d) of FIG. 105, (e) and (f) of FIG. 106 is not performed, and the ceiling The number of games is not updated either. In addition, when the two-bet state is set during the pseudo bonus, the duration of the pseudo bonus does not proceed. However, since the game value does not increase in the two-bet state, it does not increase during the pseudo bonus in the two-bet state. That is, the detailed example and another example (6) of the game property (game specification) described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99 are between 2BB flags or between 3BB flags. Although the specifications are different according to each other, the three-bet state is a state in which a normal game is performed, and the two-bet state causes a player to be disadvantageous at all times. ..

Further, in the present detailed example, the above-described flow of the game is basically based on the premise that the game is played in the non-bonus state. Therefore, when the game is played in the bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), various lottery using the above-described (a) to (d) of FIG. 105 and (e) and (f) of FIG. 106 is performed. And the number of ceiling games is not updated. However, if the bonus state is set during the pseudo bonus, the duration of the pseudo bonus proceeds. That is, the detailed example and the other example (sixth) of the game property (game specification) described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99 are the winning combination of the winning combination and the winning combination according to the bet number. It is common that the specifications are different by changing the bonus combination (shiftable bonus state), but when the bonus state is activated, it may be disadvantageous to the player. There is.

(Invention 1 related to the detailed example)
As described above, in this detailed example, the ceiling shortening lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the ceiling reduction lottery table shown in (e) of FIG. 106, when the current mode is any one of the guarantee mode, the heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode, 1 With the probability of /8 (32/256), the ceiling shortening lottery is won, while the ceiling shortening lottery is not won in other modes. That is, in a mode in which the number of ceiling games is “32 games”, the “32 games” may be shortened to “0 games”, and in a mode in which the number of ceiling games is more than that, The number of ceiling games will not be shortened.

Even in a mode in which the number of ceiling games is more than "32 games", the number of ceiling games is less likely than in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games" (for example, 1/64). May be determined to be shortened.

Further, the mode of reducing the number of ceiling games is not limited to the above. For example, if "32 games" is shortened to a smaller number of predetermined games (0 to 31 games), the same effect can be exhibited. Alternatively, the number of games to be shortened in the ceiling shortening lottery may be determined in advance.

In addition, the trigger for performing the ceiling reduction lottery is not limited to the above. For example, during the pseudo bonus, the ceiling shortening lottery may be performed for each game. Also, in the advantageous section (normal game), when the current mode is any one of the guarantee mode, the heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode, the ceiling shortening lottery is performed for each game. You may In these cases, the advantageous section winning sub-flag and the advantageous section winning sub-flag may be referred to to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

Further, as described above, in this detailed example, 1G consecutive lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the 1G continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 105(d), the 1G continuous stock may be given regardless of the current mode. That is, the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be granted regardless of whether or not the mode is a mode in which the number of ceiling games is “32 games”.

The mode of granting the right is not limited to the above. For example, in a mode in which the number of ceiling games is “32 games”, the 1G consecutive lottery is prevented from being performed in consideration of the ceiling shortening lottery, and the mode in which the number of ceiling games is larger than “32 games” By making the 1G consecutive lottery take place at the time of, it may be possible to suppress excessive gambling of the game.

In addition, the trigger for the 1G continuous lottery is not limited to the above. For example, 1G consecutive lottery may be performed also in an advantageous section (production section) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G consecutive lot stocked as a result may be consumed in the next pseudo bonus.

Although not shown in FIGS. 103 to 106, in the present detailed example, when the current mode is the heaven mode at the start of the pseudo bonus or during the pseudo bonus, the normal probability has a predetermined probability. A special bonus mid-stage production is performed in which different songs are output or a character lamp is turned on to indicate that it is in an advantageous state. Therefore, when the special bonus medium effect is executed, it can be expected that the ceiling shortening lottery will be executed. Further, this special bonus medium effect may be executed with a probability of 100% when the lottery for shortening the ceiling is won. By doing this, for example, if the special bonus mid-stage production is executed at the start of the pseudo bonus, it is suggested that at least you are staying in heaven mode, and you may have won the ceiling shortening lottery as well. It can make you feel. In addition, this special bonus effect may be executed with a predetermined probability or with a probability of 100% even when the 1G consecutive lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, (1) Heaven mode only, (2) Heaven mode + Ceiling reduction win, (3) Heaven mode + 1G consecutive winning, (4) Heaven mode + Ceiling reduction winning + 1G consecutive winning, (5) 1G consecutive winning It is possible to suggest various possibilities such as winning only, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, when it is determined that the advantageous state (for example, the pseudo bonus) is controlled to the advantageous state again within a predetermined period (32 games) after the end (for example, Even if the duration of a series of advantageous intervals is limited (for example, when limit processing is executed), the player should try as much as possible because the period can be further shortened in heaven mode). It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered by allowing the game to be played in a state where the degree of advantage is high.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the present detailed example, even when it is not determined that the advantageous state will be controlled again within the predetermined period after the advantageous state ends (for example, in the end mode), Since the advantageous state may be started again by granting the right (for example, 1G stock), it is possible to enhance the player's expectation and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the present detailed example, since the continuation of the advantageous section of the series is limited by the continued game period or the given game value amount, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high. However, the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

(Invention 2 related to the detailed example)
Although not shown in FIG. 103 to FIG. 106, in the present detailed example, when “determined hand” is determined as the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone (that is, “F_determined cherry” or “F_reach eye” is selected). If it is decided as an internal winning combination), and if it is decided as a result of the above-mentioned mode shift lottery to shift to the heaven C mode, there is a 1/2 probability (this probability is arbitrary). Special freeze production can be executed. It should be noted that the player, even when the advantageous section winning sub-flag “Medium Choi” is decided (that is, when “F_middle-tier cherry” is decided as the internal winning combination), the advantageous section winning sub-flag is “determined hand”. Since it is possible to receive the same benefits as the case where "the decision is made", when the advantageous section winning sub-flag "Medium Choi" is decided, it is possible to determine when the "determined hand" is decided as the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Similarly, the special freeze effect may be executable.

Here, since the "determined winning combination" is a role that also determines the pseudo bonus transfer (see (c) of FIG. 105), when the player performs the special freeze effect, the pseudo bonus transfer and the heaven C mode transfer are performed. It has become possible to recognize that there was such a problem, and it has become very interesting for the player. The special freeze effect is configured, for example, as an effect in which the game operation (stop operation) is invalidated for about 20 seconds at the start of the game. It should be noted that during this period, a special reel effect in which each reel vibrates or rotates in the reverse direction may be performed, or the display device 11 may display a special image that is not normally displayed. Good. Moreover, you may make it output the special music which is not normally output. Of course, it is also possible to produce an effect by combining these. Further, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects can be performed until the player performs the next game operation (that is, the effect is executed to the end or canceled midway). It is also possible to leave it to the player to decide whether to proceed with the game).

However, in this detailed example, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 114, for example, even if the user stays in the heaven C mode, the advantageous section may be forcibly ended by execution of the limit process. In some cases, it may not be desirable to repeatedly execute the special freeze effect described above.

Therefore, in this detailed example, the special freeze effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous sections. Specifically, in a series of advantageous intervals, if it is decided to execute the special freeze effect first, the special freeze effect is executed, but thereafter, within the same series of advantageous intervals, the same condition is applied. Even if is established, control is performed so that the special freeze effect is not executed. As a method, if a special freeze effect is once executed, information indicating that is stored, and if the information is stored in the same series of advantageous intervals thereafter, the special The determination as to whether or not to execute the freeze effect may not be performed, but the determination is performed, but if the information is stored, the determination result indicates that it is executed. However, it may be rewritten to indicate that it is not executed. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous section ends.

The mode in which the execution of the special freeze effect is limited is not limited to that described above. For example, the upper limit number of times the execution of the special freeze effect is limited may be set to “2 times” or “3 times” instead of “1 time”. That is, the execution of the special freeze effect is limited, but the upper limit may be set as a plurality of times. This can be appropriately set according to the expected value of the payout per special freezing effect.

Further, the conditions for determining whether or not the special freeze effect is executed are not limited to those described above. That is, in the above description, the mode transition is triggered by the winning of the "determined winning combination", and it is determined whether or not the special freeze effect is executed, provided that the mode is the heaven C mode. However, for example, since there may be a case where the mode is shifted to the heaven C mode due to a trigger other than the winning of the "determined hand" (see (f) of FIG. 106), the special freeze effect is also executed in these cases. Whether or not to make a decision is made, and the special freeze effect is executed with a predetermined probability (the probability may be the same as when the winning of the “determined hand” is triggered or may be a different probability). It may be decided to be performed.

In addition, for example, with the winning of the “determined winning combination” as a trigger, first, it is assumed that a determination is made as to whether or not the special freeze effect is executed, and if it is determined that the special freeze effect is executed, the heaven You may make it transfer to C mode. That is, the special freeze effect may be executed in response to the decision to shift to the heaven C mode, or the heaven C mode may be executed in accordance with the decision to execute the special freeze effect. You may make it shift to.

Further, for example, the degree of progress of the game in the advantageous section may be adopted as a condition for determining whether or not the special freeze effect is executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later is less than “750”, or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter or the control payout number counter described below is less than “1201”. As described above, it is determined whether or not the special freeze effect is executed, and when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later becomes “750” or more, or the advantage described later When the value of the section payout number counter or the control payout number counter is equal to or greater than "1201", it is prevented that the special freeze effect is executed in the same advantageous series thereafter. You can also

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, the duration of the series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period (see FIG. 114 described later). Then, in the same series of advantageous sections, even if the control information having a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, heaven C mode) is set a plurality of times, special effects (for example, special freeze effects) each time. Is controlled so that it does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the game from being excessively increased and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the duration of the series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period (see FIG. 114 described later). In addition, within a series of advantageous sections, it is confirmed that the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) is controlled by the winning of a specific winning combination (for example, “determined winning combination”), and the degree of advantage for the player is determined. High control information (for example, heaven C mode) may be set. Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if such a case occurs a plurality of times, the special effect (for example, special freeze effect) is controlled so as not to be performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the game from being excessively increased and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Invention 3 related to the detailed example)
As described above, in this detailed example, it is possible to determine the secondary information according to the determined internal winning combination (for example, the advantageous section winning subflag), and the secondary information according to the combination of the symbols displayed. Whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information (for example, advantageous section winning sub-flag) can be determined and information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified according to the determined secondary information Can be determined.

In this way, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, it is possible to give an expectation regarding the giving of the advantageous state not only when the internal winning combination is determined but also when the combination of symbols is displayed, so that the advantageous state It is possible to diversify the game property regarding the grant of.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, both the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the combination of the displayed symbols are managed as common secondary information, which is in an advantageous state. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the assignment of.

Further, as described above or as will be described later, in this detailed example, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, 3 cards), the first special combination (for example, “F_3BB”) is given. While the winning is possible, the second special combination (for example, "F_2BB") is not winning. When the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special winning combination can be won, while the first special winning combination is not winable. In addition, when a specific combination (for example, “F_Replay A”) is won, a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, “Right-up Lip”) is displayed if the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). If it is the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags), a combination of specific symbols (for example, “parallel lip”) can be displayed. Then, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, different secondary information can be determined depending on whether a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed or a combination of specific symbols is displayed.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, it is possible to change the determination content regarding the provision of the advantageous state, even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is in effect. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information relating to the provision of the advantageous state.

(Invention 4 related to the detailed example)
As described above or as will be described later, in this detailed example, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, 3 cards), the first special combination (for example, “F_3BB”) can be won. On the other hand, the second special combination (for example, "F_2BB") cannot be won. When the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special winning combination can be won, while the first special winning combination is not winable. In addition, when a specific combination (for example, “F_Replay A”) is won, a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, “Right-up Lip”) is displayed if the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). If it is the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags), a combination of specific symbols (for example, “parallel lip”) can be displayed. Further, it is possible to determine whether or not to give the advantageous state (pseudo bonus) at least when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed when the specific combination is won.

Here, in the present detailed example, a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, "upward-right lip") and a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") are both combinations of symbols relating to re-game, Whichever is displayed, the same privilege that the re-game is activated will be given.

In addition, the aspect which gives the same privilege is not restricted to what was mentioned above. For example, the specific winning combination is configured as a specific small winning combination relating to the addition of the game value. When the specific small winning combination is won, for example, in the case of the first special permission state, one piece (this value is arbitrary and may be another value equal to or less than the bet game value, or bet is made). Displayed is a combination of predetermined symbols to which a game value of (may be a value exceeding the game value) (a combination of symbols relating to the grant of a game value corresponding to “upward-rise lip”) is displayed, and the second special permission is given. If it is in a state, a combination of specific symbols to which the same number of game values as those displayed when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed (a combination of symbols related to imparting a game value corresponding to "parallel lip") is displayed. May be.

In addition, the combination of the predetermined symbols and the combination of the specific symbols are both the combination of the symbols “off” (though it is possible to determine whether or not to give the advantageous state, so the symbol different from the case of the pure “off”) It may be configured as a combination of identifiable symbols). Even in this case, the value remains the same.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, it is possible to change the determination content regarding the granting of the advantageous state, even if the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is in effect. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information relating to the provision of the advantageous state. In addition, in the game in which the specific role is decided, the same privilege is given regardless of which special permission state is set, so even if the playability is changed, the player is directly disadvantaged. It can be prevented from being covered.

(Invention 5 related to the detailed example)
As described above or as will be described later, in this detailed example, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, 3 cards), the first special combination (for example, “F_3BB”) can be won. On the other hand, the second special combination (for example, "F_2BB") cannot be won. When the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special winning combination can be won, while the first special winning combination is not winable. Also, when a specific winning combination (for example, “F_replay A”) is won, in the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags), when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, a combination of specific symbols ( For example, “parallel lip”) can be displayed, and it may not be possible to display a combination of specific symbols when the stop operation is not performed in a specific mode.

Then, at least when the specific combination is won and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, it may be possible to determine whether or not to give the advantageous state (for example, the pseudo bonus).

Alternatively, when the specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and when the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed, it is possible to make the degree of advantage regarding the giving of the advantageous state different. It may be possible.

In addition, when the specific combination is won, in the case of the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags), a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, “upward-right lip”) is displayed, and the second special permission state ( For example, between 2BB flags), when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, a combination of specific symbols (for example, “parallel lip”) is displayed, and when the stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, a predetermined symbol You may make it display the combination of.

In this case, the specific combination displays the combination of specific symbols when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (hereinafter, this may be described as “press position ○”), and the stop operation is performed. When the timing is not appropriate (this may be described as "pressed position x" hereinafter), a combination of predetermined symbols can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to change the degree of advantage relating to the giving of the advantageous state due to (the timing of) the stop operation of the player, so that the player can concentrate more on the game and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

In addition, the specific winning combination can be configured as a specific winning combination as described above, and in this case, in at least one reel, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (when the pressed position is ○), the specific symbol A combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game values are given, and when the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (when the pressed position is ×), a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and a certain number of game values are given can do. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Further, a predetermined number may be given a greater gaming value than a specific number. Further, a predetermined number may be given a game value less than a specific number. Further, at least one of the combination of the specific symbols and the combination of the predetermined symbols may be the combination of the symbols when the dropout occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the degree of advantage relating to the giving of the advantageous state caused by (the timing of) the stop operation of the player be changed, but also the contents of the direct benefit can be changed, so that the player can It is possible to concentrate more on the game and further diversify the playability, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, if there is only one specific winning combination, the timing at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate is also limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific winning combinations with different timings at which the timing of the stopping operation is appropriate. For example, in one reel, when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the timing is other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed. If the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed and the timing of the stop operation is the second timing different from the first timing, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation. When the timing is other than the second timing, the second specific winning combination in which the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed without the appropriate stop operation and the timing of the stop operation is the first timing and the second timing When it is a different third timing, a combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when it is a timing other than the third timing, a combination of specific symbols is not displayed without an appropriate stop operation. The third specific winning combination is provided, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

Further, in this case, the specific combination, if the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct answer pressing order), the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, and if the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of the incorrect pressing order), the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed. It can be configured as displayed. As a result, it is possible to change the degree of advantage related to the giving of the advantageous state due to the stop operation (procedure) of the player, so that the player can concentrate more on the game and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

Further, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination as described above, and in this case, when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct answer pressing order), a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of games are played. Value can be added, and when the batting order is not appropriate (in case of incorrect pressing order), a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values can be given. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Further, a predetermined number may be given a greater gaming value than a specific number. Further, a predetermined number may be given a game value less than a specific number. Further, at least one of the combination of the specific symbols and the combination of the predetermined symbols may be the combination of the symbols when the dropout occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the degree of advantage relating to the giving of the advantageous state caused by the player's stop operation (procedure) be changed, but also the contents of the direct benefit can be changed, so that the player can It is possible to concentrate more on the game and further diversify the playability, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, if there is only one type of specific winning combination, the appropriate batting order is also limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific winning combinations having different appropriate batting orders. For example, when it is the left first stop, a combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when it is the first middle/right stop, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed without an appropriate stop operation. When the first specific combination and the middle first stop, a combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the left/right first stop is a specific symbol without being an appropriate stop operation. The combination is not displayed, and when the right first stop, the combination of specific symbols is displayed as a proper stop operation when the first stop is right, and when the left/middle first stop is not a proper stop operation. The third specific winning combination in which the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed is provided, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

(Penalty affecting the next game and beyond)
Up to this point, in the unit game that wins the specific combination, due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing and batting order of the stop operation), the transition determination process to the advantageous section in the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section The change processing (including the processing for changing the advantage of the game situation in the advantageous zone in the pseudo bonus shift lottery, the mode shift lottery, and the other advantageous zone) is changed. The unit game after the unit game that wins the specific combination may be influenced. For example, the above-described first specific combination (internal winning, which is a (appropriate) stop operation mode in which it is recommended that the stop operation is performed at the first timing, or that the stop operation is performed in the batting order of the left first stop is recommended. If the stop operation is not performed in an appropriate stop operation mode in a unit game that has been won as a winning combination), the game is related to the above-described advantageous section over the game and a predetermined game after the next game (for example, between 5 games). It may be possible to set a disadvantageous state (penalty state) such as reducing the winning probability in the determination process, or that the determination process regarding the advantageous section described above is not performed. If it is not appropriate, the game may not be affected and the disadvantageous state may be set only between predetermined games after the next game.

(Termination conditions for penalty status)
Further, the disadvantageous state is not limited to the one that ends when the predetermined game is exhausted, and may end when the predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied. Here, the predetermined release condition is, for example, consumption of a predetermined number of game values, winning a predetermined number of times of a predetermined winning combination such as a re-play combination, that a combination of a specific symbol has stopped a predetermined number of times or more (stop operation in the correct pressing order). The number of games played has reached a predetermined number or more). Further, in this case, if the disadvantageous state is protracted for an extremely long time, the player who created the cause of the transition to the disadvantageous state stops the game there, and the loss is passed on to another player who later plays the game. In some cases, for example, the predetermined number is about 10, and the predetermined number is 1 to 3 so that it is relatively easy to achieve. Further, a plurality of cancellation conditions may be provided so that the disadvantageous state ends when any of the conditions is achieved.

(Premium role during penalty)
In addition, with regard to internal winning combinations (premium winning combinations) such as "determined winning combination" and "medium choi", which have a low winning probability but a great benefit to the player, even if the winning is made during a disadvantageous state, It may be handled in the same manner as when the winning is won in a situation, and it may be possible to prevent the loss. However, it is possible to prevent the benefit from being given as a disadvantage. Further, in any case, if a premium combination is won during a disadvantageous state, a special notification to be described later may be performed.

(Warning against penalty transfer)
Also, when a stop operation is performed in a stop operation mode in which a transition to a disadvantageous state may occur, or when a predetermined combination of symbols that causes a transition to a disadvantageous state is stopped and displayed, an image, a sound, or a light emission of a lamp It may be configured to be able to generate an arbitrary effect (warning notification) for calling attention such as generation of a light-off pattern or a lock for temporarily invalidating a game operation.

(Penalties other than lottery cold treatment)
Further, when it is in a disadvantageous state, not only the determination process regarding the advantageous section becomes disadvantageous (cool treatment) as described above, but also the digestion time per unit game is prolonged, which is disadvantageous in the time efficiency of the game. You may do it. For example, in the disadvantageous state, the lock may be generated for each game for a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds) in the period from the start operation to the start of rotation of the reel. Further, in the disadvantageous state, only such a time disadvantage may be given, or such a time disadvantage and the above-mentioned payout disadvantage may be given.

(Disadvantageous state is treated as part of the advantageous section)
Further, for example, in the non-advantageous section, it is not possible to have a plurality of states (for example, non-advantageous section A, non-advantageous section B, etc.) regarding the transition to the advantageous section, and therefore the disadvantageous state is the advantageous section (rendering section). You may make it control as one of the states in. For example, in addition to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104, a unique mode (disadvantageous state mode) corresponding to a disadvantageous state is provided, and when the disadvantageous state is entered, the disadvantageous state is continued until the disadvantageous state ends. The mode may be set. For example, when the transition condition of the disadvantageous state is satisfied in the non-advantageous section, the state is shifted to the advantageous section (production section) and the disadvantageous mode. Here, the destination of the transition when the disadvantageous state has ended is arbitrary, but in view of the provision of a temporary cold treatment state (disadvantageous state), it is desirable to restore the state before the transition to the disadvantageous state. The disadvantageous state may be one type, but a plurality of types may be provided to shift to any one of the disadvantageous states according to the type of the transition to the disadvantageous state, for example, the player displays a predetermined symbol combination. If the profit (eg, the number of game values granted or the transition destination of the RT state) that is given at the time of playing is large, if the state is one in which the degree of disadvantage is relatively high among the disadvantage states, , Is desirable from the viewpoint of balancing the game.

(Penalty for increasing section)
Further, it is also possible to shift to the disadvantageous state even when the conditions for transitioning to the disadvantageous state are satisfied during the increase section (during the pseudo bonus). In this case, in the disadvantageous state, it may be that the instruction regarding the impartation of the game value (such as the navigation of the correct pushing order when the pushing order bell is won) is generated, but the determination process regarding the advantageous state is treated coldly, It is also possible that the instruction regarding the provision of the game value is not temporarily generated. The disadvantageous state may be notified by a change in the lighting pattern of the advantageous zone lamp described later. For example, the advantageous section lamp may emit white light during the normal increasing section, but the advantageous section lamp may emit red light during the disadvantageous section when a disadvantageous state shifts during the increasing section.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, the advantageous state is given even if the same specific combination is determined according to which special permission state is in effect and the mode of the stop operation of the player. Since it is possible to change the contents of the decision regarding, it is possible to diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding the provision of the advantageous state.

(Invention 6 related to the detailed example)
Further, as described above or as will be described later, in the detailed example, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination (for example, “F_3BB”) is given. While the winning is possible, the second special combination (for example, "F_2BB") is not winning. When the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special winning combination can be won, while the first special winning combination is not winable. In addition, when a specific combination (for example, “F_Replay A”) is won, a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, “Right-up Lip”) is displayed if the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). If it is the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags), a combination of specific symbols (for example, “parallel lip”) can be displayed.

Further, in this detailed example, when a specific winning combination is won, an advantageous state is more likely to be given when a combination of specific symbols is displayed than when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. There is. That is, assuming that three bets are made, the second special permission state (between 2BB flags) is a state in which the giving of an advantageous state is preferentially given to the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). ..

In the detailed example, when a predetermined winning combination (for example, “push order bell B” shown in FIG. 98, “push order bell B” shown in the description of FIG. 113 to be described later) is won, the first special permission state ( For example, if between 3BB flags), the combination of assigned symbols (for example, a combination of symbols to which a game value of 9 or 8 is imparted) is displayed regardless of the batting order, while the second special permission state (for example, 2BB). (Between flags), if the batting order is a predefined correct answer pressing order, a combination of assigned symbols is displayed, but if the batting order is not a predefined correct answer pressing order, the assigned symbol The combination is not displayed, and the game value is not given, or the combination of symbols is given only a smaller amount of the game value than when the combination of the given symbols is displayed (for example, a symbol corresponding to one winning combination). Combination) will be displayed. That is, if the operation in the advantageous state is not taken into consideration, the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags) is a state where the giving of the game value is preferentially given to the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags). is there.

In other words, if the player wins 3BB with 3 bets and carries 3BB (between 3BB flags/first special permission state) and plays with 3 bets, the advantageous state is given Although it is not preferentially treated, the probability of giving the game medium when the advantageous state is not activated is preferentially treated, so that the difference in inclination value between when the advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated is relatively small. You can proceed with the game. As described above, a state in which the player is unlikely to rapidly increase the game value but the game value of the player is hard to decrease can be defined as, for example, a “stable state”.

On the other hand, if the player wins 2BB with 2 bets and then carries over 2BB (between 2BB flags/second special permission state) and plays with 3 bets, the probability of being granted the advantageous state is Although the preferential treatment is given, the probability of giving the game medium when the advantageous state is not activated is not favored, and therefore the difference in the inclination value between when the advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated is relatively large. You can proceed with the game. As described above, a state in which the player is likely to rapidly increase the game value but the game value of the player is likely to decrease can be defined as, for example, a “rough wave state”.

Here, the method of creating the two states of the stable state and the rough wave state is not limited to the above. For example, in the "stable state", in the pseudo bonus transition lottery described above, the transition probability of the pseudo bonus is higher than in the "rough wave state", while in the mode transition lottery described above, the transition probability of the heaven mode is higher than in the "rough wave state". Lower. In the "rough wave state", in the pseudo bonus transition lottery described above, the transition probability of the pseudo bonus is lower than that in the "stable state", while in the mode transition lottery described above, the transition probability of the heaven mode is lower than that in the "stable state". Increase. By doing this, in the "stable state", it is easy to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time, but it is possible to create a state in which it is difficult to play consecutively, and in the "rough wave state" it is difficult to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time, but easy to play It can create the situation. Note that the stop control of the predetermined winning combination may be changed between the 2BB flags and the 3BB flags as described above, or may be different (that is, no preferential treatment is applied between the 3BB flags). ..

When such a method is applied to this detailed example, for example, a “stable state” and a “rough wave state” are further provided as a normal state control state (may be paraphrased as a game state or a mode). Then, in a state where neither control state is set, when a combination of predetermined symbols (“upward rising lip”) is displayed, “stable state” is set, and a combination of specific symbols (“parallel lip”) If is displayed, set the "rough wave condition". Then, each set control state may be maintained until the pseudo bonus shift is determined (that is, the control state ends when the pseudo bonus shift is determined). If a combination of specific symbols ("parallel lip") is displayed while "Stable state" is set, the control state is updated to "Rough wave state" and "Rough wave state" is set. When a combination of predetermined symbols (“upward-right rising”) is displayed in the state of being displayed, the control state may be updated to the “stable state”. That is, each time a combination of predetermined symbols or a combination of specific symbols is displayed, it may be updated to the corresponding control state.

Then, when the "stable state" is set, for example, in the above-mentioned pseudo bonus transfer lottery, the lottery table for which the lottery value for which the winning is determined is set to be high is used to perform the lottery. In the above-mentioned mode shift lottery, the lottery may be performed using the mode shift lottery table in which the lottery value determined to shift to the heaven mode is set low. When the "rough wave state" is set, for example, in the above-described pseudo bonus transfer lottery, the lottery table is set by using the pseudo bonus transfer lottery table in which the lottery value for which the winning is determined is set low. In the above-described mode shift lottery, the lottery may be performed by using the mode shift lottery table in which the lottery value determined to shift to the heaven mode is set high.

That is, in this detailed example, when a predetermined symbol combination (“upward right lip”) is displayed, the first given state (“stable state”) is controlled, and a specific symbol combination (“parallel lip”) is displayed. When it is done, it controls to the 2nd grant state (the "rough wave state"), the controlled grant state is continued until the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state (pseudo bonus) is set according to the controlled grant state. It may be possible to determine whether or not to give.

The condition (predetermined end condition) for ending the set “stable state” or “rough wave state” is not limited to the determination of the pseudo bonus transfer. For example, it may be a transition to a non-advantageous section, a limit process may have been executed, a setting change operation may have been performed, or the power may have been turned off and then on again. Alternatively, a predetermined time (for example, 12 hours after the power is turned on, a time during which the non-gaming state is continued for 2 hours, or the like) may be elapsed. Various conditions other than these can be adopted.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, the stop display mode can be made different depending on which special permission state is set, even when the same specific combination is determined. Since it is possible to change the imparted state of the advantageous state, it is possible to diversify the game play while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information relating to the impartation of the advantageous state.

[Design layout of this detailed example]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the symbol arrangement configuration of this detailed example will be described. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol arrangement table of this detailed example. Since the description of the symbol arrangement table and the symbol code table itself has already been given with reference to FIG. 15, the description thereof is omitted here.

In this detailed example, as a design, "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "red blank", "yellow blank", "white blank 1" and " White blank 2" is used. Further, in this detailed example, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[Internal winning combination configuration of this detailed example]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108 to FIG. 113, the internal winning combination configuration of this detailed example will be described. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of the internal lottery table of this detailed example. Note that the internal lottery table itself has already been described with reference to FIG. 16 to FIG. 18 or FIG. 99, so description thereof will be omitted here. Further, FIGS. 109 to 112 are diagrams showing an example of the symbol combination table of the detailed example. Since the description of the symbol combination table itself has already been given with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, the description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination, a stop operation mode (for example, a stop operation sequence or a stop operation timing), a display combination, and the like in this detailed example. That is, in this section, any combination of symbols (display combination, winning combination, stop display) according to the type of internal winning combination that is randomly selected in this detailed example and the stop operation mode when each internal winning combination is won. Mode, display result, etc.) can be displayed.

First, in this detailed example, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 64 ), each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 108 is won with the probability (lottery value/probability denominator: 65536) shown in FIG. 108. Note that the symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in “Corresponding symbol combinations” in FIG. 108. In addition, in FIGS. 109 to 112, “BB” indicates a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, “REP” indicates a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and “FRU” indicates a combination of symbols related to the small combination. Indicates.

“F — 2BB” can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a two bet in a non-bonus state (more specifically, a non-flag state), while a game is performed with a three bet. If it is, it is configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. The basic role is the same as that of "F_2BB" described in FIG. In a game in which "F_2BB" is won in a two-bet state or a game in which "off" occurs between 2BB flags, "BB01" is displayed if the pressed position is ○ for each reel and the 2BB state (based on 2BB Shift to the bonus state). On the other hand, even between the 2BB flags, "BB01" is not displayed in the 3-bet state.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is performed with three bets in the non-bonus state (more specifically, a non-flag state), while a game is performed with two bets. If it is, it is configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. The basic role is the same as that of "F_3BB" described in FIG. In a game in which "F_3BB" is won in the three-bet state or a game in which "off" occurs between the 3BB flags, "BB02" is displayed if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, and the 3BB state (based on 3BB Shift to the bonus state). On the other hand, even between the 3BB flags, "BB02" is not displayed in the two bet state.

In the 2BB state and the 3BB state, the lottery value in the column of “bonus state” in FIG. 108 is referred to, and the internal winning combination is determined (the available number of games is only 3 bets). During the 2BB state and the 3BB state, the RB that is the first-class special accessory is always controlled to be in the operating state (RB state). In the RB state, the control is repeated such that once the game has been operated, two winnings have occurred or two games have been played, the game is once ended and then operated again. In this detailed example, the ending condition of the 2BB state is defined as the game value of more than one piece being provided in the 2BB state, and the ending condition of the 3BB state is provided with the game value of more than 176 pieces in the 3BB state. It is prescribed that it was done.

Here, when the 2BB state or the 3BB state ends, the special mode transition processing is performed. For example, if the mode has changed to the bonus state (the same as when the bonus state ends because the mode is not changed during the bonus state), that is, if the current mode is “start mode”, the transition destination is The mode is "start mode". Further, if the current mode is any one of the "normal A mode", the "normal B mode", the "heaven preparation mode", and the "chance mode", the destination mode is the "normal A mode". If the current mode is either “end A mode” or “end B mode”, the destination mode is “end A mode”. If the current mode is one of the "guarantee mode", "heaven A mode", "heaven B mode", and "heaven C mode", the destination mode is the "guaranteed mode".

In the non-bonus state, “F_replay A” can be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the bet number. The basic role is the same as that of the "F_lip B" described in FIG. When determined as an internal winning combination, between the non-flags and between the 2BB flags, any one of "REP64" to "REP72" regardless of the stop operation mode (these are the "Replay" symbol in the lower straight line or the middle straight line). Since they are displayed, they can be collectively referred to as “parallel rep.” Further, “REP64” to “REP71” can be collectively referred to as “lower rep”, and “REP72” is “middle rep”. (Which can be referred to as a “rip”) is displayed, and a replay game is given. On the other hand, between the 3BB flags, "REP73" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode (since this is for displaying the "Replay" symbol in an upward direction to the right, this can be referred to as a "upward right lip"). It is displayed and a replay is given.

In the non-bonus state, “F_replay B” can be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the bet number. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the three bet state, but it can be configured not to be determined as the internal winning combination in the two bet state. When it is determined as the internal winning combination, "parallel lip" is displayed regardless of the state of the stop operation in any state, and the re-game is given.

In the non-bonus state, “F_cherry” can be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the three bet state, but it can be configured not to be determined as the internal winning combination in the two bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the two-bet state, "middle-stage rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and the re-game is given. In the three bet state, if at least the pressed position ◯ for the left reel 3L, one of “REP28” and “REP60” to “REP63” (these are the ones for displaying the “cherry” symbol on the lower reel 3L. Therefore, these can be collectively referred to as “cherry lip”) are displayed, and a replay game is given. On the other hand, if the pressed position is ×, other rep (for example, “REP57” to “REP59”) is displayed, and a replay game is given.

In the non-bonus state, "F_determined cherry" can be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the bet number. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the three bet state, but it can be configured not to be determined as the internal winning combination in the two bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the two-bet state, "middle-stage rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and the re-game is given. In the three-bet state, when the pressing order is any one of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and at least the pressing position of the left reel 3L is "REP 42" to "REP 56" (these are In the left reel 3L, the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the lower row, and, for example, since a symbol that the player can expect in another symbol display area such as "REP42" is also displayed, These can be collectively referred to as "confirmed cherry rep") are displayed, and a replay game is given. On the other hand, if the pressed position is ×, other rep (for example, the above-mentioned “cherry rep” or “REP29” to “REP41”) is displayed, and a replay is given. When the pressing order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle-stage rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is given.

In the non-bonus state, “F_middle cherry” can be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the bet number. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the three bet state, but it can be configured not to be determined as the internal winning combination in the two bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the two-bet state, "middle-stage rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and the re-game is given. In the three-bet state, when the pressing order is any one of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", at least the pressing position of the left reel 3L is "REP15" to "REP19" (these are Since the "cherry" symbols are displayed in the middle row on the left reel 3L, these can be collectively referred to as "middle cherry rep") are displayed, and the re-game is given. On the other hand, if the pressed position is ×, other rep (eg, “REP20” to “REP27”) is displayed, and a replay is given. When the pressing order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle-stage rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is given.

In the non-bonus state, “F_reach” can be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the bet number. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the three bet state, but it can be configured not to be determined as the internal winning combination in the two bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the two-bet state, "middle-stage rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and the re-game is given. In the three-bet state, when the pressing order is any one of "bat order 1" to "bat order 4", any one of "REP01" to "REP14" regardless of the stop operation mode (by convention, these are players. It is configured as a combination of symbols that can be definitely notified (or suggest) of a transition to an advantageous state for, and these can be collectively referred to as "reach eye lip") are displayed, and the re-game is Granted. When the pressing order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle-stage rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is given.

In the non-bonus state, “F_watermelon” can be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the bet number. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, if it is the pressed position ◯ for each reel, one of “FRU10” to “FRU12” (these are the ones displaying the “watermelon” symbols side by side. "Can be collectively referred to as "watermelon") is displayed, three game values are given in the three bet state, and two game values are given in the two bet state. On the other hand, if the pressed position is ×, either “FRU08” or “FRU09” (these are not the ones in which the “watermelon” symbols are displayed side by side, so these can be collectively referred to as “watermelon spill”) Is displayed and one game value is added. In addition, in the case of the pressed position x, it may be configured such that the game value that is given by dropping the game is 0.

"F_bell 123A1", "F_bell 123A2", "F_bell 132A1", "F_bell 132A2", "F_bell 213A1", "F_bell 213A2", "F_bell 231A1", "F_bell 231A2", "F_" The “bell 312A1”, the “F_bell 312A2”, the “F_bell 321A1”, and the “F_bell 321A2” can be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the bet number in the non-bonus state. Note that the basic role is the same as that of the “F_middle-right bell A01” to “F_middle-left bell A12” described in FIG. In this detailed example as well, it is generically referred to as "push order bell A".

As shown in FIG. 113, the “push order bell A” is a push order subcommittee with 6 options (one of the “bat order 1” to “bat order 6” is the correct push order). If it is determined as an internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct answer push order, the “downward bell” (“FRU03”), the “upper bell” (“FRU01” and “FRU02”) ), "middle bell" ("FRU04"), "rightward bell" ("FRU05"), "Koyama bell" ("FRU06"), and "lower bell" ("FRU07") Is displayed, eight game values are given in the three bet state, and two game values are given in the two bet state. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct answer pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operation has a 1/2 probability that the pressing position is ○ and the pressing position is ○. If there is any, one of the winning “one-card combination” (“FRU13” to “FRU116”) is displayed, and one game value is given. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, the game value is not given and the game value is not given. If the first stop operation is not correct, there is a 1/8 probability that the rest position will be the pressed position ◯, and if the pressed position is ◯, one of the winning “single hand combinations” will be displayed. One game value is given. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, the game value is not given and the game value is not given.

"F_bell 123B1", "F_bell 123B2", "F_bell 132B1", "F_bell 132B2", "F_bell 213B1", "F_bell 213B2", "F_bell 231B1", "F_bell 231B2", "F_" The “bell 312B1”, the “F_bell 312B2”, the “F_bell 321B1”, and the “F_bell 321B2” can be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the bet number in the non-bonus state. The basic role is the same as that of the “F_middle-right bell B01” to “F_middle-left bell B12” described in FIG. Also in this detailed example, they are collectively referred to as "push order bell B".

As shown in FIG. 113, the “push order bell B” is not a small push order combination between the 3BB flags in the two bet state and the three bet state. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, any of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a game value of 8 is given in the 3-betting state, and a 2-betting state is given. Two game values are added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113, the “push order bell B” is a small push order combination in a state other than between the 3BB flags of the three bet state (between the non-flags and between the 2BB flags), and the internal winning. In the case where the winning combination is determined, and when the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct-pressing order, one of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed, and in the case of the three-bet state, eight gaming values are awarded. In the case of the two bet state, two game values are given. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct answer pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operation has a 1/2 probability that the pressing position is ○ and the pressing position is ○. If so, which one of the winning "one-card combination" is displayed and one game value is given. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, the game value is not given and the game value is not given. If the first stop operation is not correct, there is a 1/8 probability that the rest position will be the pressed position ◯, and if the pressed position is ◯, one of the winning “single hand combinations” will be displayed. One game value is given. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, the game value is not given and the game value is not given.

In the bonus state, "F_RB combination 8 pieces" can be determined as an internal winning combination. When the internal winning combination is determined, any of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and eight game values are given.

In the bonus state, "one F_RB combination" can be determined as an internal winning combination. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, any one of the above-mentioned "one-piece combination" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one piece is displayed. The game value of is added.

The internal lottery table shown in FIG. 108, the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, and the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the display combination shown in FIG. 113 are merely examples, and the detailed example The invention according to is not limited to this.

For example, in this detailed example, in the case of a pure “fallout”, in a 2-bet state in which “BB01” can be displayed, when “BB01” is missed and becomes “fallout”, a 3-bet in which “BB02” can be displayed In the state, when "BB02" is missed and becomes "out of bounds", when it is "out of bounds" due to being in a 3-bet state between 2BB flags, it means that it is in a 2-bet state between 3BB flags. As a result, there is a case where "disengagement" occurs in various situations, such as when "disengagement" occurs, and when "pushing order small win" is missed and "disengagement" occurs. In order to make the combination of the symbols displayed as “off” different in all cases, the combination of these different symbols is defined in advance in the symbol combination table, and these are also “corresponding to” in accordance with the determined internal winning combination. By allowing the display as “combination of symbols”, the combination of symbols relating to “off” displayed according to the state or the like can be made different.

[Limit processing configuration of this detailed example]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 114, the limit processing configuration of the detailed example will be described. FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining each limit process in this detailed example. As shown in FIG. 114, in this detailed example, the normal limit process (the number of games), the normal limit process (the number of payouts), the special limit process (the number of games), the special limit process (the number of payouts), the semi-limit process (the number of games) ), and each limit process of the semi-limit process (the number of payouts). Note that this is an example of limit processing that can be executed, and limit processing other than each of these limit processing can be executed, and some of the limit processing can be executed. You can choose not to be done.

The normal limit process (the number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes “1500” or more (that is, when the game in the advantageous section is continuously performed 1500 times). The advantageous section game number counter starts counting the number of games when the advantageous section (including the effect section) is started, and when the advantageous section is ended (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The counting is completed and then cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section game number counter counts the bet number regardless of whether the bet number is two or three. The advantageous section game number counter also counts in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

When the normal limit process (the number of games) is executed (actuated), the advantageous section is forcibly ended and the non-advantageous section is irrespective of whether it is in the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus). Move to. Further, at this time, information about the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling to the effect section or the increase section, information about the current mode, information about the duration of the pseudo bonus, information about whether or not the ceiling is shortened, 1G continuous). The values of the stock counter etc.) are all cleared (initialized).

The normal limit process (the number of payouts) is executed when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes “2401” or more (that is, when the game value given during the advantageous section exceeds 2400). In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter starts counting the number of granted game values (here, for example, "net increase (different number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the effect section) is started, and the advantageous section. When is ended (including the end due to the operation of the limit process), the counting is ended and cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section payout number counter counts the bet number regardless of whether the bet number is two or three. The advantageous section payout number counter also counts in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter appropriately counts according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-2 sheets" or "-3 sheets", etc.) when, for example, "off" or "missing" occurs during the advantageous section. The value to be subtracted. Therefore, in the case where the game value has decreased without increasing since the start of the advantageous section, it may be a negative value. That is, the advantageous period payout number counter can count from the lowest point of the number of granted game values in the advantageous period to the highest point defined (difference number: 2400) (see FIG. 101). ).

When the normal limit process (the number of payouts) is executed (actuated), the advantageous section is forcibly ended and the non-advantageous section is irrespective of whether it is in the production section or in the increase section (pseudo bonus). Move to. Further, at this time, information about the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling to the effect section or the increase section, information about the current mode, information about the duration of the pseudo bonus, information about whether or not the ceiling is shortened, 1G continuous). The values of the stock counter etc.) are all cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (the number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes “1445” or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are continuously played 1445 times). The control game number counter starts counting the number of games when the advantageous section (including the effect section) is started, and when the advantageous section is ended (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The counting is completed and then cleared (initialized). The control game number counter counts when the number of bets is three, and does not count when the number of bets is two. Further, the control game number counter counts when it is in the non-bonus state, and does not count when it is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. However, the control game number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section game number counter.

When the special limit process (the number of games) is executed (actuated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, if it is in the increasing section), the pseudo bonus will not be forcibly ended midway. When the is ended, the advantageous section is forcibly ended accordingly and the non-advantageous section is shifted. Further, at this time, information about the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling to the effect section or the increase section, information about the current mode, information about the duration of the pseudo bonus, information about whether or not the ceiling is shortened, 1G continuous). The values of the stock counter etc.) are all cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not in the pseudo bonus (that is, in the production section), first, the pseudo bonus is forcibly shifted. That is, even if the pseudo bonus shift lottery is not won, the pseudo bonus is shifted by executing this special limit process (the number of games). Then, when the transferred pseudo bonus is ended, the advantageous section is forcibly ended in accordance with it, and the non-advantageous section is moved to. Further, at this time, information about the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling to the effect section or the increase section, information about the current mode, information about the duration of the pseudo bonus, information about whether or not the ceiling is shortened, 1G continuous). The values of the stock counter etc.) are all cleared (initialized).

Here, while the value of the advantageous section game number counter in which the normal limit process (the number of games) is executed (operates) is “1500”, the special limit process (the number of games) is executed (operates). Focusing on the fact that the value of the control game number counter is “1445”, in this detailed example, the maximum number of games (sustainable period) in the pseudo bonus is “55 games” (see FIG. 103). ), this difference takes into consideration the playable period during the pseudo bonus.

That is, the normal limit process (the number of games) is executed when the game is played for a predetermined regulation period in the advantageous section in order to prevent the gambling property of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if the normal limit process (number of games) is executed immediately after or during the pseudo bonus, the player feels distrust or loss and reduces the interest of the game. There are cases. Therefore, in this detailed example, the special limit process (the number of games) is executed in the game before the continuation period (55 games) per one increase section from the game in which the normal limit process (the number of games) is executed. This prevents the player from feeling a sense of distrust or a feeling of loss due to the end of the pseudo bonus.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit processing (the number of games) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit process (the number of games) is executed in the game before the game in which the normal limit process (the number of games) is executed, by the continuation period (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) for each of the two increased sections. It may be done. In addition, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, a continuation period (55 games) + grace period (2 games) minutes before each increase section is given before the game in which the normal limit process (the number of games) is executed. The special limit process (the number of games) may be executed in the game. Further, for example, in the case of a specification such as passing through a precursory state before shifting to the pseudo bonus, and when the maximum number of games in this precursory state is “4 games”, normal limit processing (the number of games) is executed. The special limit process (the number of games) may be executed in a game before the continuous game period (55 games)+the maximum precursory period (4 games) per increased section once than the played game. That is, the timing at which the special limit process (the number of games) is executed (acts) may be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit process (the number of games) is executed. It can be set as appropriate according to the game specification and the like.

The special limit process (the number of payouts) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter becomes “2126” or more (that is, when the game value given to the advantageous section exceeds 2125). The payout counter for control starts counting the number of game values provided (here, for example, “net increase (difference)”) when the advantageous section (including the effect section) is started, and the advantageous section. When is ended (including the end due to the operation of the limit process), the counting is ended and cleared (initialized). Further, the control payout number counter counts when the bet number is three, and does not count when the bet number is two. The control payout number counter counts when it is in the non-bonus state, and does not count when it is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

Further, the control payout number counter appropriately subtracts a value to be counted according to the actual payout number (for example, "-3 sheets") when "disappearance" occurs during the advantageous section. However, the payout number counter for control causes a “missing” (or a difference) when a “missing” occurs during the advantageous section (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum value of the number of game values provided). As a result, the number of game value grants is counted. Specifically, for example, in a game in which a "push order bell A" is won with a bet of three cards, the number of game value awards (maximum value) is "8 cards" (as the difference number) when the batting order is appropriate. On the other hand, if the batting order is not appropriate, if the pressing position is appropriate, the number of game values provided is "1" (the difference is "-2"), and the pressing position is appropriate. If not, the game value will be dropped and the number of game values will be "0" (the difference is "-3"), but the payout counter for control does not matter in any case in the game. The difference number “+5” is counted.

Further, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes larger than the value of the control payout number counter due to the operation of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, for example, the value of the control payout number counter is advantageous. It is corrected to the value of the section payout counter. The control payout number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous period payout number counter.

When the special limit process (the number of payouts) is executed (acts), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, if it is in the increasing section), the pseudo bonus will not be forcibly ended midway. When the is ended, the advantageous section is forcibly ended accordingly and the non-advantageous section is shifted. Further, at this time, information about the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling to the effect section or the increase section, information about the current mode, information about the duration of the pseudo bonus, information about whether or not the ceiling is shortened, 1G continuous). The values of the stock counter etc.) are all cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not in the pseudo bonus (that is, in the production section), first, the pseudo bonus is forcibly shifted. That is, even if the pseudo bonus shift lottery is not won, the pseudo bonus is shifted by executing this special limit process (the number of payouts). Then, when the transferred pseudo bonus is ended, the advantageous section is forcibly ended in accordance with it, and the non-advantageous section is moved to. Further, at this time, information about the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling to the effect section or the increase section, information about the current mode, information about the duration of the pseudo bonus, information about whether or not the ceiling is shortened, 1G continuous). The values of the stock counter etc.) are all cleared (initialized).

Here, while the value of the advantageous section payout number counter in which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed (operates) is “2401”, the special limit process (payout number) is executed (operates). Focusing on the fact that the value of the control game number counter is “2126”, in the present detailed example, the maximum number of coins to be acquired (amount of available game value) in the pseudo bonus is “275” (FIG. (See 103), this difference takes into consideration the amount of game value that can be awarded in the pseudo bonus.

That is, the normal limit process (the number of payouts) is executed when a game value of a predetermined regulated game value amount is given in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling property of the game to become excessively high. However, for example, if the normal limit process (the number of payouts) is executed immediately after the pseudo bonus is started or during the process, the player feels distrust and loss, and the interest of the game decreases. It may happen. Therefore, in this detailed example, when a game value amount less than the game value amount for which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed is given by the assignable game value amount (275 pieces) per increase section is given. By executing the special limit process (the number of payouts), it is possible to prevent the pseudo bonus from ending midway and causing the player to feel distrust or loss.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (the number of payouts) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, when a game value amount less than the game value amount for which the normal limit process (the number of payouts) is executed is given by the available game value amount (275 pieces x 2 sets = 550 pieces) per two increase sections The special limit process (the number of payouts) may be executed. Further, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, it is equivalent to the awardable game value amount (275 coins) per increase section + the grace period, rather than the game value amount for which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed. The special limit process (the number of games) may be executed when a game value amount less than the game value amount (8 pieces) to be played is given. That is, the timing at which the special limit process (the number of payouts) is executed (actuated) may be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit process (the number of payouts) is executed, and may be any timing. It can be set as appropriate according to the game specification and the like.

In the quasi-limit process (the number of games), the value of the control game number counter is further incremented by "1" when the value of the 1G consecutive counter (ceiling shortening lottery is won and "ceiling shortened"). ) Is multiplied by "55" (that is, the pseudo bonus continuation period), and the result is executed when the addition result is "1390" or more. For example, when the value of the 1G continuous counter is “1” and “with ceiling shortening”, the latter value is “55×2=110”, and thus the value of the control game number counter is “1280. When, the semi-limit process (the number of games) is executed (operated).

In the quasi-limit process (the number of payouts), the value of the control payout number counter is further incremented by "1" when the value of the 1G consecutive counter (ceiling shortening lottery is "with ceiling shortening"). ) Is multiplied by "275" (that is, the amount of game value that can be given to the pseudo bonus) is added, and when the addition result is "1851" or more, it is executed. For example, when the value of the 1G continuous counter is “1” and “with ceiling shortening”, the latter value is “275×2=550”, and thus the value of the control payout number counter is “1301”. ”, the quasi-limit process (the number of payouts) is executed (operated). Since the semi-limit process (the number of games) and the semi-limit process (the number of payouts) both regulate the same contents, after one operating condition is satisfied and the other operating condition is satisfied, Even if is established, it does not need to operate in duplicate.

When the semi-limit process (the number of games) or the preparatory limit process (the number of payouts) is executed (acts), the 1G continuous lottery and the ceiling shortening lottery described above are executed during the pseudo bonus during a series of advantageous intervals thereafter. It will not be done. That is, the extension of the game period in the increased section is suppressed. The method of suppressing the extension of the game period in the increased section is not limited to this. For example, in the above-described 1G consecutive lottery, the winning probability of the 1G consecutive lottery may be lower than usual, or in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the winning probability of ceiling shortening may be lower than usual. .. That is, although the 1G continuous lottery and the ceiling shortening lottery described above are executed, it is possible to make it difficult to win the lottery. Further, for example, in the effect section after the execution of the quasi-limit process (the number of games), the lottery value that is won in the pseudo bonus transfer lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to shift to the pseudo bonus. Alternatively, the lottery value for determining the mode transition that is advantageous to the player in the mode transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult for the pseudo bonus to run together.

Further, when the semi-limit process (the number of games) or the semi-limit process (the number of payouts) is executed (acts), the "determining hand" (( of FIG. 105, in the FIG. 105 ( Special processing is performed at the time of winning in (a)). Hereinafter, this special process will be described by taking as an example the case where the “determined hand” is “F_determined cherry” (hereinafter, simply “determined cherry”).

If neither the quasi-limit process (number of games) nor the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is working, if the "confirmed cherry" is won during the production section (may be during the increasing section), the pseudo bonus transfer lottery In "the winning (next game)" is determined (see (c) of FIG. 105). Further, in this detailed example, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol with high expectations for the player, so in a game in which the information of the stop operation is not notified, the player stops at the left first stop. And, it is a general procedure to carry out the stop operation aiming at the "cherry" symbol (aiming at the "BAR" symbol as a guide). Therefore, when a game is played by a general procedure, at the time of winning the "confirmed cherry", first, the "cherry" symbol is stopped at the lower stage of the left reel 3L at the first left stop. In addition, when neither the semi-limit process (the number of games) nor the semi-limit process (the number of payouts) is activated, if the “determined cherry” is won, the left first stop (“bat order 1” and “bat order 2”). ]) may be notified. The "winning (next game)" is not limited to the pseudo bonus starting from the next game, and may be the pseudo bonus starting from the game after the next game.

Here, in order to determine whether the player with skill is "weak choi" or "confirmed cherry", for example, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R also aim at the "BAR" symbol and stop. Do the operation. As a result, it is recognized that the "BAR" symbols are aligned in the middle of each reel and that the "determined cherry" is won (for example, see "REP42" in FIG. 109). On the other hand, a player with no skill, for example, does not perform a stop operation aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, or cannot perform the stop operation, so is it "weak choi" from the stop display mode? It may not be possible to determine whether or not it is a “confirmed cherry” (for example, refer to “REP28” in FIG. 109).

In addition, in this detailed example, when neither the semi-limit process (the number of games) nor the semi-limit process (the number of payouts) is operating, it is a case of winning the "confirmed cherry", and the symbol of the "confirmed cherry lip". When the combination is displayed, the special winning sound is output. In addition, when the winning combination is "Definite Cherry", the symbol combination of "Definite Cherry Rep" was not displayed, but even when the symbol combination of "Cherry Rep" is displayed, the special winning sound is displayed. It is supposed to be output. The special winning sound may be output with a probability of 100%, or may be output with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is working, if you win the "confirmed cherry", at the start of the next game, "Red 7 complete" It is notified that the effect is performed and the pseudo bonus is started, and the pseudo bonus is started.

On the other hand, if either the semi-limit process (the number of games) or the semi-limit process (the number of payouts) is activated and the "confirmed cherry" is won in the production section (may be in the increasing section), the pseudo bonus shifts. In the lottery, although the “win (next game)” is once decided (see (c) in FIG. 105), the result of this decision is rewritten to “win (current game)” by executing special processing. Then, at the start of the game this time, it is informed that the "red 7 set" effect is performed and the pseudo bonus is started, and the pseudo bonus is started.

At this time, in the current game, the combination of the symbols of "confirmed cherry lip" (including the combination of the symbols of "cherry lip") is not displayed, but the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of "middle stage lip" Information notification (special notification) is performed. For example, in this detailed example, a special notification that the right first stop (“batter order 5” and “batter order 6”) should be made is given (see FIG. 113). As a result, when neither the semi-limit process (the number of games) nor the semi-limit process (the number of payouts) is operating, the flow of the game such as "confirmed cherry rep" display → pseudo bonus start from the next game, After either the semi-limit process (the number of games) or the semi-limit process (the number of payouts) is activated, a pseudo bonus start from this game → a stop operation is performed in accordance with a special notification to display a "middle-stage rip" game. Is changed to the flow of. The special notification may be performed by the control on the main (main control board 71) side, and as a result, the player is not disadvantaged regardless of shifting to the pseudo bonus. The control may be performed only on the sub (sub control board 72) side.

It should be noted that if either of the semi-limit processing (the number of games) or the semi-limit processing (the number of payouts) is activated and the “definite cherry” is won, and the special notification is given, When the combination of the symbols "Cherry Lip" is displayed, the special winning sound is not output.

Further, in this detailed example, when “F_replay A” or “F_replay B” is determined as the internal winning combination, the procedure of the stop operation is basically not notified. Therefore, if the procedure of the stop operation is informed and the "middle rep" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, when such a state occurs, one of There is a possibility that the player clearly recognizes that the quasi-limit process is activated, and as a result, the interest of the game is reduced. Therefore, regardless of whether or not any of the quasi-limit processes is operating during the advantageous section (or even after the operation of any of the quasi-limit processes), "F_replay A" or When “F_Replay B” is determined as the internal winning combination, the notification similar to the special notification may be performed with a predetermined probability. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural with respect to performing the special notification. Further, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the notification similar to the special notification may be performed when the pseudo bonus transfer lottery is won. Further, in this case, in the pseudo bonus transfer lottery when "F_replay A" or "F_replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, "winning (current game)" may be determined with a predetermined probability. Good.

Here, with reference to FIG. 115, the cherry winning sound determination process performed in this detailed example will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the cherry winning award sound determination process executed by the sub CPU 201.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning is a confirmed cherry (S2001). That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the symbol combination of “confirmed cherry lip” is displayed.

In S2001, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the winning is the confirmed cherry (when S2001 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S2005 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines in S2001 that the winning is not the confirmed cherry (when S2001 is NO), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the winning is cherry (S2002). That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the symbol combination of “cherry lip” is displayed.

When the sub CPU 201 determines in S2002 that the winning is not cherry (when S2002 is NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the cherry winning sound determination process. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines in S2002 that the winning is cherry (when S2002 is YES), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning flag is confirmed cherry (S2003). That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the advantageous section winning subflag (or the non-advantageous section subflag) is the “determined hand”. The sub CPU 201 may determine in S2003 whether or not the internal winning combination is “F_confirmed cherry”.

When the sub CPU 201 determines in S2003 that the winning flag is the confirmed cherry (when YES is determined in S2003), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S2005 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines in S2003 that the winning flag is not the confirmed cherry (when S2003 is NO), the sub CPU 201 sets the sound number to "cherry" (S2004). That is, the sub CPU 201 sets data for outputting a normal winning sound different from the special winning sound. After the processing of S2004, the sub CPU 201 ends the cherry winning sound determination processing.

If S2001 is YES, or if S2003 is YES, the sub CPU 201 sets the sound number to “confirmed cherry” (S2005). That is, the sub CPU 201 sets data for outputting the special winning sound. Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a navigation mistake has occurred (S2006). That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the stop operation according to the special notification has been performed even though the special notification has been performed. Note that the sub CPU 201 may determine in S2006 whether or not the semi-limit process has been performed.

When the sub CPU 201 determines in S2006 that the navigation error has not occurred (NO in S2006), the sub CPU 201 ends the cherry winning sound determination process. That is, the sub CPU 201 can output the special winning sound when the advantageous section winning subflag (or the non-advantageous section subflag) is the “determined hand” and the special notification is not made. In S2006, the sub CPU 201 determines that the advantageous section winning subflag (or non-advantageous section subflag) is the “determined hand”, no special notification is given, and further, the symbol combination of the “determined cherry lip” is displayed. If so, S2006 may be determined to be NO. That is, when the advantageous section winning sub-flag (or the non-advantageous section sub-flag) is the “determined hand” and no special notification is given, when the symbol combination of the “determined cherry lip” is displayed, the special combination is displayed. While it is possible to output the winning sound, the special winning sound may not be output when the combination of the symbols “confirmed cherry lip” is not displayed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines in S2006 that a navigation error has occurred (YES in S2006), the sub CPU 201 clears the sound number (S2007). After the processing of S2007, the sub CPU 201 ends the cherry winning sound determination processing. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines that the special flag is given when the advantageous section winning sub-flag (or the non-advantageous section sub-flag) is the “determined hand”, but if the special notification is made and the stop operation according to the special notification is not performed, the special CPU The winning sound cannot be output.

As described above, the advantageous section winning sub-flag (or the non-advantageous section sub-flag) “determining hand” (more specifically, “F_determined cherry”), and the advantageous section winning sub-flag (or the non-advantageous section sub-flag) ) "Medium Che" means that the "cherry" symbol is displayed on the left reel, and the player's benefit is the same. Therefore, in the cherry winning sound determination process, the "confirmed cherry" part is "middle cherry". Can be read instead and the same processing can be performed. Therefore, when the advantageous section winning sub-flag "medium choi" is determined after the operation of each of the above-described quasi-limit processing, special notification can be performed.

The above-described cherry winning sound determination process is a process for determining the type of winning sound (or whether or not to output a specific winning sound) when an internal winning combination regarding “cherry” is determined. This is an example. Then, in the cherry winning sound determination process described above, the elements of the internal winning combination, the type of combination of the displayed symbols, and whether or not the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop operation procedure are combined. It is possible to determine the type of winning sound (or whether or not to output a particular winning sound). However, for internal winning combinations other than the internal winning combination related to "cherry", such elements are combined to generate the winning sound. The type (or whether or not to output a specific winning sound) can be determined.

Up to this point, in order to operate the normal limit process, the special limit process, and the quasi-limit process, it has been described as an example to monitor the duration of the advantageous section using the "number of games" and "the number of payouts", The conditions for executing each limit process are not limited to those described above, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, and the value of the 1G consecutive counter, in which each limit process is executed. Whether or not the ceiling is shortened (that is, a variable for operating the quasi-limit process) can be appropriately changed according to the game specification, the market trend, and the like.

Further, the method for monitoring the duration of the advantageous section is not limited to the above. For example, if "navigation times" are used to monitor the duration of the advantageous section, then, as in the above, normal limit processing (navigation times), special limit processing (navigation times), or semi-limit processing (navigation times) (Number of times) may be executed. In other words, any element (parameter) can be used as long as it can count the value in order to monitor the duration of the advantageous section, and the value for which the normal limit processing is executed for the adopted element. By defining a value for executing the special limit process and a value for executing the semi-limit process, each limit process can be executed in the same manner as described above.

(Invention 7 related to the detailed example)
As described above, in the present detailed example, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) and the specific state (for example, effect section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game period in the series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example, When the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more) or the game value amount given in this series of advantageous section is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more). When it becomes, the series of advantageous intervals is forcibly ended, but the game period in the series of advantageous intervals is shorter than the predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more). ), or when the game value amount given in this series of advantageous intervals becomes a specific amount smaller than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the payout counter for control is “2126” or more), it is advantageous In the case of the state, the series of advantageous sections is ended when shifting to the specific state.

That is, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is set within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing excessive gambling, so it is possible to consider the emotion of the player. I am trying.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the continuous period of the advantageous state (for example, “55 games”) or the awardable game value amount (for example, “275 pieces”). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game value amount given to the player from being extremely restricted, while considering the player's feelings.

(Invention 8 related to the detailed example)
As described above, in the present detailed example, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) and the specific state (for example, effect section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game period in the series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example, When the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more) or the game value amount given in this series of advantageous section is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more). When it becomes, the series of advantageous intervals is forcibly ended, but the game period in the series of advantageous intervals is shorter than the predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more). ), or when the game value amount given in this series of advantageous intervals becomes a specific amount smaller than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the payout counter for control is “2126” or more), it is advantageous When it is not in a state, it shifts to the advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to the specific state, a series of advantageous sections are ended.

That is, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is set within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it. In addition, when a series of advantageous sections is ended in this way, if it is not in an advantageous state, it is made to transition to an advantageous state and then finished. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing excessive gambling, so it is possible to consider the emotion of the player. I am trying.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the continuous period of the advantageous state (for example, “55 games”) or the awardable game value amount (for example, “275 pieces”). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game value amount given to the player from being extremely restricted, while considering the player's feelings.

(Invention 9 related to the detailed example)
In addition, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in addition to those described in Invention 7 of the present detailed example or Invention 8 of the present detailed example, an advantageous state is granted a right (for example, "1G stock" and " However, the game period in a series of advantageous intervals is shorter than the specific period, and a special period (for example, a control game number counter) set according to the number of granted rights is set. When the value becomes a value at which the quasi-limit process (the number of games) is executed), or the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous intervals is less than the specified amount, and is set according to the number of rights granted. When the specified special amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes a value at which the quasi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the granting of the right is suppressed in the subsequent advantageous intervals. Is becoming As a result, for example, a right is given to the player such that the player cannot fully consume it, and as a result, a series of advantageous intervals are forcibly ended in such a state, and the player feels distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the emotion of the player while suppressing an increase in gambling.

(Invention 10 related to the detailed example)
In addition, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in addition to those described in Inventions 7 to 9 according to the present detailed example, at least a second amount (the above-mentioned "specific amount") and a third amount (the above-mentioned "special In calculating the "amount"), for example, between the game value amount that was originally supposed to be given and the game value amount that was actually given due to an operation error by the player or ignoring instructions. Even when a difference occurs, the difference is not taken into consideration, and the game value amount originally supposed to be given is used as a reference for counting. As a result, a series of advantageous intervals may be unnecessarily extended by such a player's action, and inequity may occur between the player who has performed such an action and the player who has not performed such action. Since it is possible to prevent the player from losing, it is possible to consider the emotion of the player while suppressing the gambling property from becoming excessively high.

(Invention 11 related to the detailed example)
Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in addition to those described in the inventions 7 to 10 according to the present detailed example, an advantageous state in a state in which the grant of the right is suppressed (for example, a state after the quasi-limit processing operation) When you win a fixed winning combination (for example, “Definite Cherry”) that is confirmed to be transferred to, a special combination for not displaying a special symbol combination that clearly recognizes the winning of this fixed winning combination (for example, “Definite Cherry Lip”) Notification is made. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from having an emotion that the winning of the final winning combination is a wasteful winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger for starting the advantageous state in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game can be prevented from becoming excessively gambling while the game is being played. It is possible to consider the emotion of the person.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the present detailed example, when the special notification is performed, the advantageous state that originally should have been started from the next game is started from the current game. This allows the player to perform a stop operation according to the special notification in a natural manner, and thus prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable even if such special notification is performed. it can.

Note that any means may be used as the means for performing the special notification. For example, the above-mentioned instruction monitor, or other effect device controlled by the main side, the above-mentioned display device 11, the speaker group, the LED group 85, or other effect device controlled by the sub side, or a combination thereof, etc. as necessary. Therefore, various performance devices (notifying means) can be adopted.

(Invention 12 related to the detailed example)
In addition, in the gaming machine of the detailed example, in addition to those described in the inventions 7 to 11 according to the detailed example, an advantageous state in a state where the grant of the right is suppressed (for example, a state after the semi-limit processing operation) When winning a fixed winning combination (for example, "Definite Cherry") that is confirmed to be transitioned to, a special symbol combination that does not display a special symbol combination that clearly recognizes the winning of this fixed winning combination (for example, "Definite Cherry Lip") Notification is made. Further, in a state where the grant of rights is not suppressed, it is possible to perform a special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound) when a combination of special symbols is displayed as a winning combination is won. In the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, when the winning combination is won and the combination of the special symbols is displayed, it is not possible to give the special notification. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from having an emotion that the winning of the final winning combination is a wasteful winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger for starting the advantageous state in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game can be prevented from becoming excessively gambling while the game is being played. It is possible to consider the emotion of the person.

According to the gaming machine of the detailed example, whether to give a special notification depending on whether a winning combination is won, whether a combination of special symbols is displayed, and whether a special notification is given I am trying to decide whether or not. This makes it possible to more appropriately manage the situation in which the special notification is performed.

Any means may be used as the means for making the special notification. For example, the above-mentioned instruction monitor, or other effect device controlled by the main side, the above-mentioned display device 11, the speaker group, the LED group 85, or other effect device controlled by the sub side, or a combination thereof, etc. as necessary. Therefore, various performance devices (notifying means) can be adopted.

(Invention 13 related to the detailed example)
As described above, in the detailed example, the advantageous section game number counter and the advantageous section payout number counter count regardless of the bet game value amount, and as a result, not only in the three bet state but also in the two bet state. The normal limit process (the number of games) and the normal limit process (the number of payouts) can be executed.

Further, as described above, in this detailed example, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter count in the three bet state, but do not count in the two bet state. Therefore, the special limit process (the number of games) and the special limit process (the number of payouts) can be executed in the three bet state, but the special limit process (the number of games) and the special limit are executed in the two bet state. It does not allow processing (number of payouts) to be performed. Therefore, in the two bet state, a series of advantageous intervals may be forcibly ended by executing the normal limit process (the number of games) or the normal limit process (the number of payouts) even during the pseudo bonus.

In the detailed example, in the three-bet state and the two-bet state, for example, the winning probability of the small combination and the number of game values provided are different (see FIGS. 108 to 113), and the three-bet state is The player is more disadvantageous when playing a game with two bets than when playing a game. Of course, the method in which the player is more disadvantageous in the case of playing the game in the two-bet state is not limited to this. For example, when a game is played in a two-bet state during the pseudo bonus, the player may be disadvantaged by not being notified of the procedure of the stop operation.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present detail, when the game is played with the first amount (for example, "3") of the betting value being betted, a series of advantageous intervals is set in the advantageous state. Is not forcibly ended, and it is possible to end a series of advantageous sections within a certain period by a natural flow that accompanies the end of the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing excessive gambling, so it is possible to consider the emotion of the player. I am trying. On the other hand, when a game value is bet by betting a second amount of game value (for example, “two cards”), a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state. From this, it is possible to make the player realize that the game has not been performed by the intended game method, and thus it is possible to encourage the player to perform the game by the intended game method.

In addition, in a series of advantageous intervals, it is more disadvantageous to the player when the second amount of game value is bet and the game is performed than when the first amount of game value is bet and the game is performed. Therefore, by enabling such a warning, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in an advantageous state, and to play the game in a game method that the player does not intend. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being deteriorated due to.

[Mode suggestion production in this detailed example (1)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, a mode suggesting effect (No. 1) that can be executed in this detailed example will be described. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining an example of the mode suggesting effect (No. 1).

In the present embodiment, the status indicator constituted by the 7-segment LED has a predetermined timing during the game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section (for example, any timing from the start of the game to the end of the game). The lighting is continued during the duration of the advantageous section, and the lighting is finished when the advantage section ends, so that the advantage section starts, and the advantage section is in the relevant section. , And an example in which it is possible to notify all players that the advantageous section is over. Note that such a status indicator is also referred to as, for example, an "advantageous zone lamp" and the like, so in this section, it will be simply described as a "lamp".

In this detailed example, this lamp does not light only when it is decided to shift from the non-advantageous section to the production section, and when it is decided to shift to the increase section (pseudo bonus) for the first time from the production section, Lighting is started at a predetermined timing before the game is started (or the stop operation is permitted) in the increased section. The lighting is continued during the increasing section. When the increase section ends, it will return to the effect section unless it is ended by executing the limit process, but the lighting is continued in the returned effect section. In addition, in both the production section and the increase section, when a series of advantageous sections ends due to the execution of the limit process, the lighting ends with the end thereof.

Here, when returning from the increase section to the effect section, the returned effect section can be roughly divided into three patterns. First, for example, as in the above-mentioned heaven mode, the first pattern is determined in which it is decided to shift to the increase section again within 32 games. In this case, the lamp that has continued to be lit in the returned production section will remain lit at least until it shifts to the increased section at a predetermined time within 32 games.

Next, for example, as in the end mode described above, if it is not determined that the increase section will be moved again within 32 games, and if the increase section is not changed again within 32 games, a series of advantageous sections ends. This is the second pattern in which the selected pattern is shifted to the non-advantageous section. In this case, when the 32 games have been exhausted, the lamp that has been continuously lit in the returned effect section will end its illuminating with the end of a series of advantageous sections.

In the end, for example, unlike the above-mentioned heaven preparation mode, it is not certain that the player will move to the increase section again within 32 games, but even if the increase section is not changed within 32 games, a series of advantages It is a third pattern in which the section does not end. The heaven preparation mode, which is the third pattern, is a mode that is more advantageous to the player than the end mode, which is the second pattern (see FIG. 104).

Here, in FIG. 116, (a) shows the lighting pattern of the lamp of the second pattern (in the end mode), and (b) shows the lamp of the third pattern (in the heaven preparation mode). The lighting mode of is shown.

As shown in (a) of FIG. 116, first, when it is decided to first shift to the pseudo bonus in the effect section (in FIG. 116, “pseudo bonus (first time) start”), the lighting of the lamp is started. .. The lamp continues to light during the pseudo bonus. Next, when the pseudo bonus has ended (“pseudo bonus end” in FIG. 116), even if the pseudo bonus is shifted to the effect section (end mode), the lighting of the lamp does not end and continues. As a result, even if the pseudo bonus is ended and the mode is shifted to the end mode, the player does not recognize it at this point, so the player's expectation is not lost. Even in the end mode, the pseudo bonus may actually be transferred again within 32 games (see (c) of FIG. 105). Next, in the end mode, when 32 games are consumed without shifting to the pseudo bonus within 32 games (“32 G after the pseudo bonus ends” in FIG. 116 ), the lamp is changed as the non-advantageous section is shifted. Lighting ends. At this point, the player can recognize that it was in the end mode. When the mode is not shifted to the heaven mode, the lighting mode is almost like this.

As shown in (b) of FIG. 116, first, when it is decided to first shift to the pseudo bonus in the effect section (in FIG. 116, “pseudo bonus (first time) start”), lighting of the lamp is started. .. The lamp continues to light during the pseudo bonus. Next, when the pseudo bonus ends (“pseudo bonus end” in FIG. 116), even if the pseudo bonus is shifted to the effect section (heaven preparation mode), the lighting of the lamp does not end and continues. As a result, even if the pseudo bonus has ended and the game mode has shifted to the heaven preparation mode, it is not recognized by the player at this point. Next, in the heaven preparation mode, when 32 games are consumed without shifting to the pseudo bonus within 32 games ("32G after the pseudo bonus ends" in FIG. 116), the heaven preparation is performed without shifting to the non-advantageous section. Since the mode continues, the lamp will continue to light up without ending. At this point, the player can recognize that it was not in the end mode.

That is, the lighting mode of the lamp is not recognized as to which mode the player stays in within 32 games after the pseudo bonus ends, and is turned on when 32 games are exhausted after the pseudo bonus ends. When it is finished, it is recognized that the mode is the termination mode, and when the lighting is continued, it is recognized that the mode is the heaven preparation mode.

The means for making such notification is not limited to the "advantageous zone lamp", and any means may be used. For example, the above-mentioned instruction monitor, or other effect device controlled by the main side, the above-mentioned display device 11, the speaker group, the LED group 85, or other effect device controlled by the sub side, or a combination thereof, etc. as necessary. Therefore, various performance devices (notifying means) can be adopted.

Further, even when the pseudo bonus ends and the mode is shifted to the end mode, the lamp may continue to be turned on for more than 32 games, or the pseudo bonus ends and the heaven preparation mode is set. Even when the game has been transferred, the lamp may be turned off when 32 games are exhausted. For example, the number of games in which the lamp continues to be lit may be determined by lottery according to the current mode. In this case, the probability that it will be determined that the lamp will continue to light beyond 32 games is higher in the case of shifting to the heaven preparation mode than in the case of shifting to the end mode. The probability that the lighting of the lamp is sometimes determined to be terminated may be lower in the case of shifting to the heaven preparation mode than in the case of shifting to the termination mode.

Further, whether or not the lamp continues to be turned on for more than 32 games may be determined according to the pseudo bonus transition probability in the mode transitioned after the pseudo bonus ends. For example, looking at (c) of FIG. 105, the probability of shifting to the pseudo bonus again is the lowest when the mode shifts to the end A mode after the pseudo bonus ends, and the pseudo bonus returns again when the mode shifts to another mode after the pseudo bonus ends. The probability of shifting to A is higher than that in shifting to the end A mode. Therefore, in the end A mode in which the pseudo bonus transition probability is low, the lighting of the lamp is terminated when 32 games have passed after the pseudo bonus is over, and in the other modes in which the pseudo bonus transition probability is higher than that, The lamp may be kept lit even after 32 games have elapsed after the bonus ends. In the detailed example, the end A mode and the end B mode end 32 games after the end of the pseudo bonus and shift to the non-advantageous section. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and 32 games after the end of the pseudo bonus. It may be configured such that the processing is not finished with and the shift is not made to the non-advantageous section. Further, in this case, the predetermined period during which the lamp can be continuously turned on may not be limited to 32 games, which is the number of ceiling games in the heaven mode. For example, after the end of the pseudo bonus, it is assumed that the lamp continues to light for at least 100 games (or 10 games less than 32 games), and 100 games (10 games if 10 games) When the time elapses, the lighting of the lamp may be ended in the end A mode, and the lighting of the lamp may be continued in other modes. That is, the predetermined period in which the lamp can be continuously turned on can be set as an arbitrary period. Further, in this detailed example, if the mode shifts to the heaven preparation mode after the end of the pseudo bonus, when the mode shifts to the pseudo bonus again, the mode shifts to the heaven mode after the end, but is not limited to this. For example, when the pseudo bonus is controlled from the heaven preparation mode and the pseudo bonus ends, there is a higher probability than at least when the pseudo bonus is controlled and the pseudo bonus ends from the end mode (or the normal mode). Anything that shifts to heaven mode will do. Moreover, the privilege of the heaven preparation mode is not limited to this. For example, the privilege may be that the pseudo bonus transition probability is higher than that in the end mode, or that the number of ceiling games is smaller than that in the end mode. That is, at a predetermined time after the end of the pseudo bonus, the content of the privilege suggested to the player depending on whether or not the lamp continues to light may be any privilege as long as it is beneficial to the player. ..

(Invention 14 related to the detailed example)
As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present detailed example, when the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) ends, the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the advantageous state ends. A specific state (e.g., heaven mode) that is determined to be determined, a first predetermined state (e.g., end mode) in which it is not determined that the advantageous state is controlled to the advantageous state again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, and an advantageous state Although it is not certain that the control will be controlled to the advantageous state again within a predetermined period after completion of the above, it is possible to control to any state of the second predetermined state (for example, the heaven preparation mode) which is more advantageous than the first predetermined state. ..

Then, from the start of the advantageous state to the same notification in any state during the predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, when the predetermined period has elapsed, the first predetermined state If so, the notification is ended, and if the second predetermined state, the notification may be continued. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state changes, it is possible to maintain the game motivation and interest.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the present detailed example, if the notification continues after the end of the advantageous state even after the lapse of a predetermined period, if the advantageous state is started next, the state becomes the specific state after the end. Since there is a high possibility of transition, even if the transition to the specific state is not made after the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to keep the motivation and interest in the game and play the game.

In the gaming machine of the present detailed example, when the advantageous state (eg, pseudo bonus) ends, the probability that the advantageous state is controlled again to the advantageous state is the first predetermined state (eg, end A mode), and again. It is possible to control to any state of the second predetermined state (for example, the heaven preparation mode) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is a specific probability higher than the predetermined probability, and the advantageous state is started when the advantageous state is started. During the predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the state ends, the same notification is given in any state, and when the predetermined period elapses, if the first predetermined state, the notification ends. However, the notification may be continued in the second predetermined state. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state changes, it is possible to maintain the game motivation and interest.

[Mode suggestion production of this detailed example (2)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, a mode suggestive effect (No. 2) that can be executed in this detailed example will be described. FIG. 117 shows an example of the bet lamp change lottery table referred to in the mode suggesting effect (No. 2), and FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining an example of the mode suggesting effect (No. 2). is there.

In this detailed example, a bet lamp display section (BL) shown in FIG. 118 is provided in a predetermined area on the display device 11, a predetermined area on the sub display device 18, or another predetermined area near the symbol display area 4. .. The bet lamp display unit (BL) is configured as a part of the display screen when provided on the display device 11 or the sub display device 18, for example, when provided near the symbol display device 4. Is configured as an LED. The basic function of the bet lamp display unit (BL) is to display the current bet number. Therefore, for example, in the two-bet bet state, BL1 and BL2 are lit, and BL3 is not lit, which indicates that the bet game value is two. In addition, for example, in the three bet state, BL1 to BL3 are lit to inform that the bet game value is three.

In this detailed example, further, the bet lamp display portion (BL) is used, and a mode suggesting effect capable of suggesting the current mode is performed by the display mode of the bet lamp display portion (BL).

First, with reference to FIG. 118(a), a display mode of the bet lamp display portion (BL) at the normal time (the original bet number display) will be described.

For example, when the previous game was in the three bet state, the bet lamp display portion (BL) has the display mode of (4). In the display mode of (4), when the replay is not activated in the previous game, the same display mode is maintained until the player bets a game value in the current game. Then, when the player bets a game value in the game this time, first, the display mode of (4) is changed to the display mode of (1). That is, the state in which each of BL1 to BL3 is lit in the basic color (blue, green, red) is changed to the all-off state. Here, if the bet gaming value is one, the display mode of (1) is changed to the display mode of (2). If the bet game value is 2, the display mode of (1) changes to the display mode of (3). If the bet game value is 3, the display mode of (1) changes to the display mode of (4). That is, the display mode changes according to the bet number of the player (the bet number recognized on the gaming machine side).

Note that, for example, if the bet game value is one, the display mode of (1) is changed to the display mode of (2), and if the bet game value is two, the display of (1) is displayed. After the mode is changed to the mode (2), the mode is further changed to the mode (3), and if the bet game value is three, the mode (1) is changed to the mode (2). After the change, the display mode of (3) may be changed next, and finally the display mode of (4) may be changed. That is, even when the re-game is not operated in the previous game, the display mode of BL1 to BL3 may be sequentially changed, as in the case where the re-game is operated.

Further, for example, when the game was in the state of three bets last time, the bet lamp display portion (BL) has the display mode of (4). The display mode of this (4), when the re-game is operated in the previous game, the same display mode is maintained until the operation of the re-game is started in the current game. Then, when the operation of the replay is started in the game this time, first, the display mode of (4) is changed to the display mode of (1). That is, each of the BL1 to BL3 is turned on from the basic color (blue, green, red) lighting state to the all-off state. Then, according to the operation of the re-game, after changing from the display mode of (1) to the display mode of (2), the display mode of (3) is changed next, and finally the display mode of (4) is changed. To do. That is, the display mode is sequentially changed according to the operation of the replay game on the gaming machine side.

In the detailed example, the "replay" symbols are displayed side by side, such as "F_replay A" and "F_replay B", so that it is easy to recognize that the re-gaming combination has won. A normal replay combination in which the combination (normal replay display mode) is displayed, and an appropriate stop operation (for example, "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L, such as "F_confirmed cherry" or "F_middle cherry" If a "cherry" symbol is displayed on the lower or middle row of the left reel 3L, it is possible to recognize that a winning combination (for example, a small winning combination) other than the replay game has been won. While a combination of symbols (special re-game display mode) is displayed, if an appropriate stop operation is not performed, so-called "bare pattern" (that is, it is difficult to recognize which winning combination is a symbol) There is a rare replay combination in which a combination (special replay display mode) is displayed. Further, when the rare replay combination is won, when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (right first stop), the normal replay display mode may be displayed (see FIG. 113).

Therefore, in this detailed example, at least a different bet effect is performed depending on whether the normal replay display mode is displayed and the replay is activated or the special replay display mode is displayed and the replay is activated. I have to. Specifically, when the normal replay display mode is displayed and the replay is activated, the display mode on the bet lamp display part (BL) is changed from (1) to (2) and (2) as described above. As in (3) and (3) to (4), bet effects that are sequentially changed are performed, whereas when the special replay display mode is displayed and the replay is activated, as described above (1) From () to (4), a bet effect that is suddenly changed is performed.

In addition, when the special re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is operated, any bet effect may be performed. Alternatively, when the special replay display mode is displayed and the replay is activated, (1) to (4), (4) to (3), (3) to (2), and (2) to (1 ), the bet effect of changing from (1) to (4) may be performed. That is, the normal re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is operated, the special re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is operated, and the special re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is operated. Different bet effects may be performed depending on the case.

Returning to the explanation of the mode suggesting effect (No. 2). In the detailed example, in the effect section, the bet lamp change lottery table shown in FIG. 117 is referred to, and the bet lamp change according to the number of games, the advantageous section winning subflag, the advantageous section winning subflag, and the current mode. The lottery will be held. Note that, in FIG. 117, the “number of games” indicates the number of games after the end of the pseudo bonus. For example, “1 to 500” indicates that it is within 500 games after the end of the pseudo bonus, and “501 to” indicates that it exceeds 500 games after the end of the pseudo bonus. Here, in this detailed example, since the number of ceiling games in the heaven preparation mode is set to about 500 games, even if the pseudo bonus is not transferred again within 32 games after the pseudo bonus ends, In the heaven preparation mode, it is confirmed that the pseudo bonus will be transferred within 500 games at the latest. Therefore, in the bet lamp change lottery table shown in FIG. 117, in the case of within 500 games after the end of the pseudo bonus, the probability of winning the bet lamp change lottery is increased as compared with the case of exceeding 500 games after the end of the pseudo bonus. It is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play and interest.

Further, in the bet lamp change lottery table shown in FIG. 117, when the current mode is the normal B mode and the heaven preparation mode, the probability of winning the bet lamp change lottery is higher than in other modes. ing. As described above, the heaven preparation mode is an advantageous mode, but since the normal B mode is also an advantageous mode at least as compared with the normal A mode (see FIG. 104), the bet lamp change lottery is frequently won. In this case, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that a relatively advantageous mode has been determined. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play and interest.

Note that, in FIG. 117, the "off" is a pure "off" (when the "off" occurs due to the 3-bet state between the 2BB flags, the 2-bet state occurs between the 3BB flags. When the result is “out”, it includes), and does not include the case of “out” as a result of occurrence of “missing”. Even in such a case, the bet lamp change lottery may be performed.

Further, even when an internal winning combination other than the one shown in FIG. 117 is won, the bet lamp lottery can be appropriately performed. In this case, the bet lamp change mode may be changed according to the type of the internal winning combination. For example, when the bet lamp change lottery is won in the case of “out”, “white” is used as a special color described later, and the bet lamp change lottery is won in the cases of “through lip 1” and “through lip 2”. In this case, "Blue" is used as the special color described below, "Yellow" is used as the special color described below when the bet lamp change lottery is won when the result is "Bell", and the bet lamp change lottery is selected when the result is "Weak Che". If you win, you will use "Red" as the special color to be described later, and if you win "Bet ramp change lottery" when you are using "Watermelon", you will use "Green" as the special color to be described later, and you will be given a choice If the bet lamp change lottery is won in the case of “Che”, “rainbow” may be used as a special color described later. Further, for example, the mode of bet lamp change can be changed depending on the blinking speed or the like.

By the way, when the effect (bet ramp change effect) whose occurrence frequency changes with the lapse of the number of games is installed as in this detailed example, the player who starts the game immediately after the opening of the game shop is set in the pachi-slot 1. It is possible to see if changes have been made or not (ie deferred settings).

Specifically, for example, when the number of games at the end of the previous day is 300 and 1 to 200 games (that is, 301 to 500 games in the case of setting and deferring) are played from the opening of the day, Since the bet lamp change lottery table for the number of games “1 to 500” shown in FIG. 117 is referenced between games, the frequency of occurrence of the effect becomes relatively high. On the other hand, when a game of 201 games or later (that is, 501 games or more in the case of setting and deferring) is played from the time of opening the game at the time of winning, if the setting is changed, the state continues to FIG. 117. Since the bet lamp change lottery table of the number of games “1 to 500” shown is referred to, the frequency of occurrence of the effect does not change, while in the case of setting and setting, the number of games “501 to” shown in FIG. 117 is changed. Since the bet lamp change lottery table is referred to, the frequency of occurrence of the effect decreases. That is, if the frequency of occurrence of the effect drops below a certain number of games, it is likely that the setting has not been changed (that is, the setting has been left unchanged) immediately after opening the store. There is. Then, if the operation data of the previous day, which can be confirmed on the data display or the like in the game store, is such that the set value is estimated to be low (low setting), the player “delays the low setting”. The impression that the setting value is high (high setting) will be lost soon.

Therefore, at the time of restoration from power failure with setting deferred (especially, at the time of restoration when power can be estimated to have been restored due to opening and opening due to electricity failure due to closing, such as 2 hours or more after restoration after interruption) At the time of changing the setting, the following specifications may be used to make it difficult to detect whether or not the setting is changed, depending on the occurrence frequency of the bet lamp change effect.

For example, in the first specification example, the current mode is referred to after the power is restored and after the setting is changed. However, regardless of the current number of games, the bet lamp change of the number of games “501 to” shown in FIG. 117 is performed. It is assumed that the lottery table is open and the store is open. In this case, the state at the time of opening may be canceled with the first pseudo bonus winning as a trigger. By doing this, even if the player plays the game immediately after opening the store, the occurrence frequency of the bet lamp change effect does not change after a specific number of games, so the number of games at the end of the previous day and the number of games of the day are considered. Also, it is possible to prevent the fact that the setting is changed from being overlooked. The first specification example can also be adopted in a reel side lamp effect described later. For example, in the opening state, the reel side lamp effect described later can be performed in an effect mode in which the bet lamp change effect is always executed 0 times.

Further, for example, in the second specification example, after the power is restored and the setting is changed, the bet lamp change lottery is prohibited at all until the first pseudo bonus winning. With this configuration, it is possible not only to prevent the detection of whether or not the setting is changed but also to reduce the processing load of the effect control. The second specification example can also be adopted in the reel side lamp effect described later. For example, in the prohibited state, it is possible to prevent the reel side lamp effect described below from being performed.

In addition, it is difficult to detect the difference in the effect frequency between the setting change and the setting deferral, and a certain number of games (that is, in the above example, the total of the number of games at the end of the previous day and the number of games of the current day is 500 games). Specifications other than the above specification examples can be adopted as long as the specifications do not change the effect frequency with the passage of time or the degree of change is small.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118B, a display mode of the bet lamp display unit (BL) in the bet lamp change effect executed when the bet lamp change lottery is won will be described. It should be noted that FIG. 118(b) shows an example of a bet lamp change effect when the bet lamp change lottery is won and the re-play is not activated in the previous game.

As described above, for example, when the previous game was in the three bet state, the bet lamp display portion (BL) has the display mode of (4). In the display mode of (4), when the replay is not activated in the previous game, the same display mode is maintained until the player bets a game value in the current game. Then, when the player bets a game value in the game this time, first, the display mode of (4) is changed to the display mode of (1). That is, the state in which each of BL1 to BL3 is lit in the basic color (blue, green, red) is changed to the all-off state. At this time, if the bet lamp change lottery is won, the display mode of (1) is changed to the display mode of (5). That is, BL1 to BL3 are suddenly turned on with a special color (yellow) different from the basic color. This allows the player to recognize that the display mode is different from that in the normal time.

Note that, as shown in (b) of FIG. 118, the mode of the bet lamp display unit when the bet lamp change lottery is won is not limited to this. For example, when the player bets a game value in the game this time, the display mode of (4) is changed to the display mode of (5) without changing from the display mode of (4) to the display mode of (1). You may do so. Further, for example, after the third stop of the previous game (when the pressing of the stop button at the time of the third stop is released), after changing from the display mode of (4) to the display mode of (1), (1) The display mode of (5) may be changed to the display mode of (5). Further, for example, after the third stop of the game last time (when the pressing of the stop button at the time of the third stop is released), the display mode of (4) may be changed to the display mode of (5). .. Further, for example, when the player bets a game value in the game this time, or after the third stop of the previous game (when the pressing of the stop button at the time of the third stop is released), from the display mode of (4) After changing to the display mode of (1), the display mode of (4) may be changed once, and then the display mode of (4) may be changed to the display mode of (5).

Subsequently, a display mode of the bet lamp display unit (BL) in the bet lamp change effect executed when the bet lamp change lottery is won will be described with reference to FIG. 118(c). It should be noted that FIG. 118(c) shows an example of a bet lamp change effect when the re-game is activated in the previous game when the bet lamp change lottery is won.

As described above, for example, when the previous game was in the three bet state, the bet lamp display portion (BL) has the display mode of (4). The display mode of this (4), when the re-game is operated in the previous game, the same display mode is maintained until the operation of the re-game is started in the current game. Then, when the operation of the replay is started in the game this time, first, the display mode of (4) is changed to the display mode of (1). That is, each of the BL1 to BL3 is turned on from the basic color (blue, green, red) lighting state to the all-off state. At this time, if the bet lamp change lottery is won, the display mode of (1) is changed to the display mode of (6) according to the operation of the re-game, and then the display mode of (7) is changed. At the end, however, the display mode changes to (8). That is, that is, BL1 to BL3 are sequentially turned on with a special color (yellow) different from the basic color. This allows the player to recognize that the display mode is different from that in the normal time.

Note that, as shown in (c) of FIG. 118, the mode of the bet lamp display portion when the bet lamp change lottery is won is not limited to this. For example, when the operation of the replay is started in the game this time, the display modes of (4) to (6) to (8) are displayed without changing from the display mode of (4) to the display mode of (1). The mode may be changed sequentially. Further, for example, when the operation of the replay is started in the game this time, after changing from the display mode of (4) to the display mode of (1), the display modes of (2) to (4) are sequentially changed. After that, the display form of (4) may be changed to the display form of (8).

Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a medal insertion command each time a game value is inserted, when the player makes a bet and when performing a re-game operation (automatic insertion) (see FIGS. 57 and 58). Each time the sub CPU 201 receives this medal insertion command, the sub CPU 201 makes a lighting request request so that the above-described change of the display mode is performed. When the bet is made by operating the MAX bet button 15a and when the re-game is operated (automatic insertion), the main CPU 101 outputs information indicating that three game values have been inserted for one medal. You may make it transmit to the sub CPU201 by a throw-in command. In this case, the sub CPU 201 delays at each request request timing when, for example, performing a replay operation (automatic insertion) and changing the display mode of (a) and (c) of FIG. 118. By multiplying by (setting the delay time), control may be performed so that the display mode is sequentially changed.

Further, the sub CPU 201 causes an error (including door opening) when sequentially changing the display mode described above, or while sequentially changing the display mode described above, and an error command is transmitted from the main CPU 101. If so, during the error, the control for sequentially changing the display mode described above is not executed, but the control for displaying the final display mode is performed.

For example, when changing the display mode shown in (c) of FIG. 118, the sub CPU 201 (a) a request request for turning on BL1 in yellow, (b) a request request for turning on BL2 in yellow, and (c) ) By sequentially making a request request for turning on BL3 in yellow, the display mode is controlled to be sequentially changed as shown in (6) to (8). By performing only the request request for turning on BL3 in yellow, control is performed so that the display mode is suddenly displayed in (8).

For example, the sub CPU 201 performs a display during the error to notify that the error is occurring. Such an indication is requested in an exclusive processing during an error. On the other hand, the request request for sequentially changing the display mode described above is requested within normal processing. Therefore, in order to sequentially change the display mode even during an error, it is necessary to enable the request request for sequentially changing the display mode by determining the state even in the processing dedicated to the error. There is a high possibility that the process becomes complicated and an important error display is not performed, or the bet lamp display unit (BL) does not light at all. Therefore, during the error, the above-mentioned display modes are not sequentially changed, but the final display mode is still displayed so that the player does not have a difference in the obtained information.

Returning to the explanation of the mode suggesting effect (No. 2). In this detailed example, the bet lamp change effect itself described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 is also an effect that suggests a mode. Thus, it is possible to perform a mode suggesting effect using the reel side lamp display section (SL) during non-game.

In this detailed example, a reel side lamp display portion (SL) shown in FIG. 118 is provided on the side surface of each reel (3L, 3C, 3R). For example, SL1 is provided on the left side surface of the reel 3L, SL2 is provided between the reels 3L and 3C, SL3 is provided between the reels 3C and 3R, and SL4 is provided on the right side surface of the reel 3R. Is provided. The reel side lamp display section (SL) is provided by, for example, providing a structure in which light from a back lamp (not shown) for illuminating each reel from the back side is visible from the side surface of each reel. Alternatively, a plurality of LEDs may be installed on the side surface of each reel, or a liquid crystal display device or an EL may be installed on the side surface of each reel. .. Further, for example, when the liquid crystal display device is provided on the front surface side of each reel, the window frame of the portion where the reel display window is formed in the liquid crystal display device is used as the reel side lamp display portion (SL). Good.

In this detailed example, for example, when the game value is neither input nor stored, and the game operation is not performed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), the game value is input next, or the game operation is performed. Until it is performed, it is determined to be in the non-gaming state. Then, in the non-gaming state, the demonstration effect is performed at regular intervals. In the demonstration effect, the number of times the bet lamp change effect between the pseudo bonuses is executed is referred to, the effect mode of the reel side lamp display section (SL) is determined according to the number of times of execution, and the reel side according to the determined effect mode. Lamp production is performed.

For example, when the number of times the bet lamp change effect between pseudo bonuses is executed is 0, the first effect mode is determined, and the number of times the bet lamp change effect between pseudo bonuses is executed is 1 to 3 times. The second effect mode is determined, and when the bet lamp change effect between pseudo bonuses is executed four times or more, the third effect mode is determined. The number of times the bet lamp change effect is executed is started when the pseudo bonus ends, and is cleared when it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus again.

The first effect mode is, for example, an effect mode in which the reel side lamp display section (SL) blinks all at once in the demonstration effect, and the second effect mode is, for example, in the demonstration effect, reel side lamps. The display section (SL) is a production mode in which the display section (SL) sequentially flashes from left to right, and the second production mode is, for example, in the demonstration production, the reel side lamp display section (SL) is directed from right to left. It is an effect mode such as sequentially blinking. Note that the method of changing the first to third rendering modes is not limited to this. For example, the effect mode may be changed depending on the emission color of the reel side lamp display section (SL), or the effect mode may be changed depending on the length of the effect to be executed.

Moreover, you may determine the 1st-3rd representation mode by lottery. In this case, when the number of times the bet lamp change effect between pseudo bonuses is executed is 0, the probability that the first effect mode is determined is “high”, and the probability that the second effect mode is determined is “high”. "Low", the probability that the third effect mode is determined is "low", and when the number of times the bet lamp change effect between pseudo bonuses is executed is 1 to 3, the first effect mode is determined. The probability is “low”, the probability that the second effect mode is determined is “high”, the probability that the third effect mode is determined is “low”, and the number of times the bet lamp change effect is executed between pseudo bonuses is 4 When the number of times is equal to or more than one, the probability that the first effect mode is determined is “low”, the probability that the second effect mode is determined is “low”, and the probability that the third effect mode is determined is “low”. "High".

Further, the effects according to the first to third effect modes may be performed not during the non-gaming state but during the game. In this case, for example, in the production section, when the result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery is non-win, the production execution lottery is performed, and when the lottery is won, depending on the number of executions of the bet lamp change production between the pseudo bonuses. You may make it perform the production.

The bet lamp display unit (BL) and the reel side lamp display unit (SL) are examples of effect devices, and other effect devices can be used. For example, a predetermined area in the display device 11 is bet. Each effect may be performed by assuming that it corresponds to the lamp display unit (BL) and the specific area in the display device 11 corresponds to the reel side lamp display unit (SL). That is, the effect means used in the mode suggestion effect (No. 2) may be any effect means.

(Invention 15 of the Detailed Example)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in the normal state (for example, the production section), the first effect (for example, the mode) is generated with a different probability depending on the expected degree (for example, the mode) of giving the advantageous state (for example, the pseudo bonus). It is possible to perform the bet lamp change effect) and to perform the second effect (for example, reel side lamp effect) in a different effect mode according to the number of times the first effect is executed. That is, for example, even if the game is not played from the beginning in the normal state, it may be possible to infer the degree of expectation of the advantageous state by using the execution frequency of the first effect and the effect mode of the second effect as a clue. Has become. As a result, even if the transition probability to the advantageous state changes, it is possible to maintain the motivation and interest in the game.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, the second effect is performed in the non-gaming state, so the effect mode of the second effect can be an effective index for the player who is going to play the game. As a result, the motivation for the game can be increased and the operation of the game machine can be improved.

(Invention 16 related to the detailed example)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in the normal state (for example, the effect section), the specific effect (for example, for example, with a different probability depending on the expectation level (for example, the mode) of giving the advantageous state (for example, the pseudo bonus) Bet lamp change effect) can be performed. That is, there are cases where it is possible to infer the degree of expectation of giving an advantageous state, using the execution frequency of the specific effect as a clue. As a result, even if the transition probability to the advantageous state changes, it is possible to maintain the motivation and interest in the game. In the gaming machine of this detailed example, the specific effect is performed by changing the display mode of the bet number display. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect device or the like for performing the specific effect, and the specific effect can be performed in the natural flow of the game. As a result, with a general-purpose configuration, it is possible to perform an effect that enhances the game motivation and interest.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, a pseudo bet effect (for example, the effect shown in (a) of FIG. 118) is performed when the re-game is activated, but the specific effect follows the flow of such bet effect. It is performed in a different manner. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that enhances the game motivation and interest in a manner that is more comfortable.

(Invention 17 related to the detailed example)
Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in addition to the one described in Invention 16 according to the present detailed example, when the specific effect is performed while an error occurs, the bet effect is not followed and the final Only the display content is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect and prevent the player from making a difference in the obtained information even when an error occurs.

(Invention 18 related to the detailed example)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, any combination of the first stop display mode (for example, the normal re-game display mode) that makes it easy for the player to recognize that the replay combination is a prize Between the third stop display mode (for example, a special re-game display mode) that makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not it is a prize, or the player recognizes that it is a prize for a re-game combination. A second stop display mode (for example, a special re-game display mode) that allows the player to recognize that the winning combination is different from the first stop display mode that facilitates It is possible to change the presentation mode of the bet production between the third stop display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize which winning combination is won. This can prevent the player from being confused even when there are a plurality of stop display modes of the re-play combination.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, when a specific re-game combination (for example, “F_confirmed cherry”) is won, a first stop display mode, a second stop display mode, and a third stop display mode Any of the above may be displayed, and for example, it is possible to change the playability by the difference in the stop display mode, but even in such a case, it is possible to make an appropriate bet effect. Becomes Further, the playability can be suggested by the bet production.

[Pseudo bonus medium music production in this detailed example]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the pseudo bonus medium music effect executable in this detailed example will be described. FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect of the pseudo bonus medium music effect.

First, in this detailed example, when the pseudo bonus is started, if the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery is won, the result is “with ceiling shortening”, or if the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery is won, the 1G stock is won. When the number is 1 or more, the musical composition effect is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, the probability may be 100%, or an arbitrary probability may be 1 to 99%). .. This informs the player that the pseudo bonus will be extended.

Further, in this detailed example, when the 1G stock is 1 or more due to winning the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery during the pseudo bonus, a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 100%, or 1 to 99 is possible. The musical composition effect may be executed with an arbitrary probability of %).

The manner in which the musical performance is executed is not limited to this. For example, in order to enhance the interest in the pseudo bonus, the musical performance may be executed with a predetermined probability regardless of whether or not it is determined that the pseudo bonus is extended.

Further, for example, when it is determined that the effect section after the end of the pseudo bonus is the heaven mode (or only the heaven C mode), the music effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. Further, the musical effect may be executed with a predetermined probability depending on whether or not it is determined that the pseudo bonus is extended and the effect section after the end of the pseudo bonus. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus is extended, and the effect section after the end of the pseudo bonus is the heaven mode, the music effect is executed with a probability of 100% and the pseudo bonus is extended. However, if the effect section after the end of the pseudo bonus is not in the heaven mode, the music effect is executed with a probability of 50%, and it is not determined that the pseudo bonus is extended. When the effect section after the end is in the heaven mode, the music effect may be executed with a probability of 50%.

Music effect data 1 shown in (a) of FIG. 119 is a music pattern in which the music effect is started at an arbitrary timing after the pseudo bonus is started (for example, when the pseudo bonus is started). It is a music pattern composed of an A (unique part) and a music loop part (common part). The intro section A is a flow-out portion in the musical piece effect, and may be musical piece data (or data including a character's dialogue or sound effect.) that is configured so as not to be repeatedly (looped) reproduced. B and intro section C are also the same), and the music loop section is music data configured such that a music piece of a predetermined length is repeatedly (looped) reproduced after the flow-out portion until the pseudo bonus ends.

The musical piece effect data 2 shown in (b) of FIG. 119 is at any timing after the pseudo bonus is started (for example, when a special sound is output at the start of the pseudo bonus, or after the start of the pseudo bonus (for example, This is a music pattern in which the musical effect is started from (when a special sound is output at the time of starting the next game)), and is composed of an intro part B (unique part) and a music loop part (common part). is there. The intro section B is a flow-out portion in the music effect, and is music data configured so as not to be repeatedly (looped) reproduced. The music loop section is the same as that in the music effect data 1.

The music effect data 3 shown in (c) of FIG. 119 is determined in advance at an arbitrary timing after the pseudo bonus is started (for example, to be notified in the game of the tenth game after the start of the pseudo bonus. When the game of the 10th game is started, or when it is decided that the 1G consecutive stock becomes 1 or more after the start of the pseudo bonus (for example, when the game won in the 1G consecutive lottery is started). ) Is a music pattern in which the music production is started from ), and is a music pattern including an introduction part C (unique part) and a music loop part (common part). The intro section C is a flow-out portion in the music effect, and is music data configured so as not to be repeatedly (looped) reproduced. The music loop section is the same as that in the music effect data 1.

Here, the intro section A, the intro section B, and the intro section C have, for example, the same content, but different character presence/absence, or different character content, different sound effect presence, or The music data can be configured as different music data such that the contents of the sound effect are different, the tone is different, or the tempo is different. Further, for example, the music can be simply composed as different music. Further, the time from the start of output to the end of output may be the same (or substantially the same) or may be different. Further, the timing at which the musical performance is started is not limited to the start of the game, and any timing within the unit game (for example, when the start lever is operated, when a specific stop button is operated, when all reels are stopped, etc.) Can be

In the following, as an example, the intro section A has the longest time from the output start to the end, the intro section C has the shortest time from the output start to the end, and the intro section B outputs the output. It is assumed that the time from the start to the end is in the middle.

In the detailed example, regardless of which one of the music effect data 1 to 3 is being used during the pseudo bonus, for example, the occurrence of power failure, the occurrence of an error, and the opening of the door (of the front door 2b). If an interruption event such as (release) occurs, the execution of the musical composition is also interrupted along with the interruption of the pseudo bonus. Then, when such an interruption event is resolved, the execution of the music effect is restarted along with the resumption of the pseudo bonus, but in this case, the music effect is executed by any of the music effect data 1 to 3. Even in such a case, the music effect data 3 is selected, and the music effect corresponding to the music effect data 3 is controlled to be executed from the beginning.

Here, the music effect data 3 is a music pattern that is basically configured on the assumption that the music output is started in the middle of the pseudo bonus, and the introduction part is the shortest music pattern. Therefore, when the pseudo bonus is restarted after being interrupted, the music pattern output from the beginning gives the player the least sense of discomfort. On the other hand, the music effect data 1 and the music effect data 2 are music pattern basically configured assuming that the output of the music is started when the pseudo bonus is started (or immediately after that). Also, the intro part is a music pattern longer than the music effect data 3. Therefore, compared with the music effect data 3, when the pseudo bonus is restarted after being interrupted, the player feels a lot of discomfort as a music pattern output from the beginning.

Further, depending on which of the music effect data 1 to 3 the music effect is being executed, when the pseudo bonus is interrupted, the interrupted part of the music effect data is stored, and when the pseudo bonus is restarted, It is also possible to control so that the music effect is restarted from the interruption point, and even if the music effect is executed by any of the music effect data 1 to 3, it is restarted after the pseudo bonus is interrupted. It is also possible to control so that only the music loop part (common part) is executed from the beginning when this is done, but in the former case, the interruption point must be stored, and in the latter case, Must separately define music effect data such that only the music loop unit (common) is executed, and in either case, the control load and the amount of information will increase. Therefore, it can be said that the method in this detail is the most efficient.

(Invention 19 of the Detailed Example)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, a plurality of music performances (for example, the music loop portion) in which only the flow-out portion (for example, the intro portions A to C) is different and the common music (for example, the music loop portion) is output (for example, , Music productions corresponding to the music production data 1 to 3) can be executed, no matter which music production is executed, an interruption event (for example, power failure, error, door opening, etc.) has occurred. When resuming later, a specific music effect (for example, a music effect according to the music effect data 3) is restarted from the beginning. That is, the mode of restarting after the occurrence of the interruption event is the same. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the music performance is restarted after an interruption event occurs.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, the musical piece effect is used as an effect for notifying the extension of a specific state (for example, a pseudo bonus). Then, when restarting after the interruption event occurs, the music effect (for example, the music effect according to the music effect data 3) in which the extension of the specific state is informed in the middle is restarted from the beginning. There is. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the unpleasant sensation at the time of resuming the production, while enhancing the interest of the music production.

[State suggestion production of this detailed example]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 120, a state suggestion effect executable in the detailed example will be described. FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the state suggestion effect.

First, in this detailed example, a stop state notification unit 117 (not shown, which is provided inside the stop button 17L, which is composed of full-color LEDs, is stopped inside each of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. A state notification unit 117L, a stop state notification unit 117C inside the stop button 17C, and a stop state notification unit 117R inside the stop button 17R) are provided. The stop state notification unit 117 is basically used to notify whether or not the current state is a state in which a stop operation is possible. Although the display mode of the stop state notification unit 117 is controlled by the sub CPU 201, it may be controlled by the main CPU 101.

That is, when the rotation of each reel is started and the rotation speed becomes constant and the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are activated, it is "at the time of stop permission", and each reel is stopped by the stop operation. Next, the period until the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are activated becomes "other than when stop is permitted". The stop state notification unit 117 notifies the player whether or not the stop operation is possible by differentiating the display mode between "when stop is permitted" and "when stop is not permitted".

In addition, when each reel is spinning and all stop buttons are enabled,
The stop state notification units 117L, 117C, 117R all have a display mode of "when stop is permitted". Here, for example, when the stop operation of the stop button 17L is performed and the left reel 3L is stopped, the stop button 17L is stopped. Since it is no longer a valid stop button, the stop state notification units 117C and 117R are still in the display mode of "at the time of stop permission", but the stop state notification unit 117L is in the display mode of "except at the time of stop permission". In this way, the stop state notification units 117L, 117C, and 117R can individually change the display mode.

Here, in this detailed example, as described above, neither "F_2BB" nor "F_3BB" has been won, and the state has not been carried over (between non-flags), and "F_2BB" in the two bet state. Is won (2BB winning game), "F_3BB" is won in a 3-betting state (3BB winning game), "F_2BB" is carried over after winning (between 2BB flags), "BB01" Is displayed and is moved to the 2BB state (2BB is operating), "F_3BB" is won and then carried over (between 3BB flags), and "BB02" is displayed and the 3BB state is being transferred (3BB is operating). It is possible to be controlled to any one of the states (game state).

Therefore, in this detailed example, regarding which state of the above-described respective states is controlled, the function of informing the player of whether or not the stop operation is possible is maintained in the stop state notification unit 117. Is also configured so that suggestions can be made.

As shown in FIG. 120, the stop state notification unit 117 takes a display mode of a "green" color between "non-flags" during "non-flagging" and a "blue" color during "parking permission". Is displayed. In addition, in the 2BB winning game, a "green" color display mode is used for "other than stop permission" and a "white" color display mode is used for "stop permission". In addition, in the 3BB winning game, a "green" color display mode is used for "other than stop permission", and an "orange" color display mode is used for "stop permission". That is, the stopped state notification unit 117 can indicate the type of internal winning combination (more specifically, a bonus combination) or the type of symbol combination that is allowed to be displayed, depending on the display mode of “when stopping is permitted”. ..

In addition, the stop state notifying unit 117 takes a display mode of "red" color between "2BB flags" if "other than stop permission" and displays "BB01" when "stop permitted". If it is impossible, the display mode of "blue" is adopted, and if "BB01" can be displayed, the display mode of "white" is adopted. In addition, between the 3BB flags, if "other than stop permission", a "purple" color is displayed, and if "stop permitted" and "BB02" cannot be displayed, "blue" is displayed. If it is possible to display "BB02", the display mode of "orange" is adopted. That is, the stopped state notification unit 117 can indicate the type of internal winning combination (more specifically, a bonus combination) or the type of symbol combination that is allowed to be displayed, depending on the display mode of “when stopping is permitted”. At the same time, the current state (gaming state) can be suggested by the display mode of "other than stop permission".

Further, in the 2BB state, the stop state notification unit 117 takes a “yellow” color display mode for “other than stop permission” and a “blue” color display mode for “stop permitted”. Further, in the 3BB state, a “yellow” color is displayed if “other than stop permission” and a “blue” color is displayed if “stop permitted”. That is, the stop state notification unit 117 can indicate the current state (game state) by the display mode of "other than stop permitted".

Here, as described above, in this detailed example, the playability is changed depending on whether the game is played in the 3-bet state between the 2BB flags or the 3-bet state between the 3BB flags. Since it has become, the current state is between 2BB flags or between 3BB flags, or as a premise, it is better to shift to 2BB in a game that can shift to 2BB state, or not shift It is a great concern not only for the player but also for the amusement store side whether it is better, or whether it is better to transfer to 3BB in a game that can be transferred to the 3BB state or not. Therefore, it is possible to substantially select (change) the playability by making the suggestions as described above.

Note that the display mode of the stop state notification unit 117 described above is an example, and the display mode is not limited to this. That is, if the type of internal winning combination or the type of combination of symbols permitted to be displayed can be suggested by the display mode of "at the time of stop permission", another display mode can be adopted. Further, if the current state (game state) can be suggested by the display mode of "other than stop permission", another display mode can be adopted.

In addition, the above-mentioned various suggestions can be made by using a display unit (notifying unit) other than the stopped state notifying unit 117. For example, the bet lamp display unit (BL) and the reel side lamp display unit (SL) described above can be used, or the other effect devices described above can also be used.

Further, for example, the display mode of "other than stop permission" can indicate the type of internal winning combination or the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed, and the display mode of "stop permission". Thus, the current state (game state) can be suggested.

Further, the information notified using the stop state notification unit 117 is not limited to the above-mentioned information. For example, as the current state, an internal state other than the game state shown in FIG. 120 may be suggested as the game state. For example, each of the above-described modes (FIG. 105) can be suggested as a game state, or simply a non-advantageous section, a production section, or an increase section can be suggested. Of course, each internal state shown in this embodiment can also be suggested as a game state.

In addition, for example, as the type of internal winning combination, or the type of symbol combination that is allowed to be displayed, an internal winning combination other than the bonus combination, or a combination of symbols that can be displayed for the internal winning combination other than the bonus combination is suggested. It may be possible. In this case, for example, during the increasing section, information on the stop operation may be suggested.

(Invention 20 related to the detailed example)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, it is possible to suggest the information regarding the game playability by using the notifying means (for example, the stop state notifying unit 117) for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted. As a result, it is not necessary to provide an informing means for informing the information about the game property. Therefore, it is possible to show the information regarding the game playability with a general-purpose configuration.

In the gaming machine of this detailed example, a combination of special symbols of any type (for example, a combination of symbols relating to 2BB, “BB01” or 3BB, depending on the bet game value amount (2 or 3)) It is determined whether or not to permit the display of the symbol combination “BB02”). Further, even if the display of any combination of special symbols is already permitted (for example, between 2BB flags or between 3BB flags), it is bet whether or not the combination of the special symbols is displayed. It changes according to the amount of game value. Further, it is possible to change the game property according to the bet game value amount and which type of special symbol combination is allowed to be displayed. Then, using the notification means for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted, if there is a combination of special symbols that is permitted to be displayed in the game this time, in addition to that, It is also informed that the display of the combination of special symbols of the type is permitted. Therefore, even when the game is complicated, the information about the game can be appropriately notified.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, a gaming state and a display permitted pattern are notified using an informing means (for example, an inactive state informing section 117) for informing whether or not the stop operation can be accepted. The combination may be suggested. Thereby, the information desired by the player can be appropriately notified with a general-purpose configuration.

[Example of different control for stable state and rough wave state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, another example in which the stable state and the rough wave state described above can be controlled in the present detailed example will be described. FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining another control example of the stable state and the rough wave state.

In this detailed example, when a specific winning combination (for example, “F_Replay A”) is won, a combination of specific symbols (for example, “parallel rep”) is displayed (or displayed) in a three bet state between 2BB flags. In the three-bet state between the 3BB flags, the combination of specific symbols (for example, “parallel lip”) is not displayed (or becomes difficult to be displayed), and the combination of predetermined symbols (for example, “right upward lip”) ) Is displayed (or easily displayed).

With such a configuration, it is possible to set the 3-bet state itself between the 3BB flags to a stable state and the 3-bet state itself between the 2BB flags to a rough wave state. Alternatively, it is possible to control the stable state in response to the display of the combination of the predetermined symbols and to control the rough wave state in response to the display of the combination of the specific symbols.

However, the variation of which state is the stable state or the rough wave state is not limited to this. For example, various specifications shown in FIG. 121 can be adopted. In FIG. 121, the bet number (that is, the bet game value amount. “3 pieces” or “2 pieces”) and the type of bonus carried over (that is, the gaming state. Between non-flags (“none”), 2BB flag) The content of the stop control fluctuates as shown in the same figure depending on the interval ("2BB") or the interval between 3BB flags ("3BB"). In FIG. 121, the combination of the predetermined symbols is “stable roll”, the combination of the specific symbols is “rough roll”, and the rough roll can be displayed, while the stable roll cannot be displayed. Control or the condition where stop control is performed in which it is difficult to display stable hits while easy to display rough hits is called "A: Rough hit derivation", and stable hits can be displayed while rough hits are displayed. The state in which the stop control in which the eyes cannot be displayed, or the stop control in which the stable wave is easily displayed while the rough wave is difficult to be displayed is performed is referred to as “B: derivation of stable ball”.

It should be noted that the stop control of either "A: Rough wave outcome derivation" or "B: Stable outcome derivation" is performed not only when a specific combination (for example, "F_Replay A") is won, It may be a case where the winning combination is won. That is, in each state shown in FIG. 121 in which the betted game value amount and the game state are combined, for example, in a state where "A: derivation of rough wave number" is defined, "A: derivation of rough wave number" is relatively performed. It is sufficient that the stop control is performed easily, and the stop control of “B: Derivation of stable outcome” is relatively easy to be performed in a state where “B: Derivation of stable outcome” is defined.

As shown in FIG. 121, the first specification is, for example, a specification in which stop control is changed according to the bet number, regardless of the type of bonus carried over. This specification facilitates state switching.

As shown in FIG. 121, the second specification is, for example, when the game is continued in the 3-bet state from the initial state (between the non-flags), after the lottery is performed in the rough wave state for a while, and after the 3BB winning. It has a stable specification. Further, in the case of a game flow in which a bonus is won, the rough wave state is returned to again after the bonus state is ended, so that a sharp transition of the payout can be expected. On the other hand, in the case of a game flow in which no bonus is won, it is possible to control the stable state for a relatively long period of time, so that the gambling property can be moderate.

It should be noted that the third to seventh specifications are as shown in FIG. 121 and have their respective characteristics, but detailed description thereof is omitted here.

Here, the game flow for winning a bonus is to give a bonus to a bonus when it is possible to win the bonus in the flow of the game. For example, a player can win a payout or an advantageous game. When the bonus can be won, for example, when the bonus can be entered, it means that the bonus is generally won.

On the other hand, a game flow in which no bonus is won means that it is difficult to win a bonus in the flow of the game, or even if the bonus can be won, the bonus is not won. This means a game property in which it is common not to win a bonus, such as not being disadvantaged in lottery regarding an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus). In addition, here, "making it difficult to win a bonus" means that the small win or the replay win is preferentially drawn in, and the "miss" probability is set to zero or an extremely low probability. It means that the probability of winning is zero or extremely low.

Note that, in FIG. 121, in any of the first to seventh specifications, when the two-bet state is set, it is defined to be in the state of “B: stable outcome derivation” regardless of the game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be specified such that, for example, like the three-bet state, there may be a state of “A: rough wave appearance derivation” depending on the game state. Further, in this case, in the predetermined specifications, the specifications corresponding to the gaming state are the same in the three-bet state and the two-bet state, respectively, but in the specific specifications, the three-bet state and the two-bet state are the same. It is also possible to specify that at least a part of the specifications corresponding to the game state is different. That is, in the three bet state, one of the first to seventh specifications shown in FIG. 121 is defined, and in the two bet state, the specification different from the three bet state is specified. Any of the first to seventh specifications shown may be defined.

In addition, a game in which one bet is possible and a bonus combination (“F_1BB”) that can be won only in the one bet state is provided, and a state in which “F_1BB” is carried over is set between 1BB flags, It is described above according to the number (whether it is in the one bet state to the three bet state) and the type of the bonus carried over (whether it is between non-flags, between 1BB flag and between 3BB flag). You may make it change the state of stop control. In this case, similar to the relationship between the three-bet state and the two-bet state, in the one-bet state, it may be prescribed to be in the state of "B: stable outcome derivation" regardless of the gaming state, or at least. The same stop control as in the three bet state or the two bet state may be performed, or at least the specifications specified in the three bet state or the two bet state may be different from the first to the first shown in FIG. Any one of the seventh specifications may be defined. In any case, it becomes possible to further diversify the variations of the game state and the playability.

Further, as a method of creating a stable state and a rough wave state, a method other than the above-mentioned method can be used. For example, a lottery related to an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus lottery) is performed (or a winning probability in the lottery is relatively high), and a winning probability of a specific replay combination (for example, “F_Replay C”) is low. If the first RT state and the second RT state in which the winning probability of a specific replay combination is high are provided, and if the lottery related to the advantageous state is won in the first RT state, the benefit of the winning is large (for example, in the pseudo bonus continuation period Length, ceiling shortening lottery, and expected value such as winning probability of winning 1G consecutive lottery are high), and if the lottery related to the advantageous state is won in the second RT state, the benefit of the lottery is small (for example, continuation of pseudo bonus). Each period is created by setting the first RT state to a rough wave state and the second RT state to a stable state by making the expected period length, the probability of winning the ceiling shortening lottery, and the winning probability of winning 1G consecutive lottery low) You can also do it. In this case, in the initial state (RT0 state), when the "parallel lip" is displayed, the first RT state is controlled, and when the "right upward lip" is displayed, the second RT state is controlled. For example, the initial state may be returned when the setting is changed or the bonus ends.

Further, for example, when the winning operation is performed, when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, the first right stop), “upward right lip” is displayed, and the stop operation is performed in a mode other than the specific mode. If the player wins, the first parallel replay combination (for example, “F_replayD”) that causes “parallel rep” to be displayed, and if the winning is won, “right upward rep” regardless of the stop operation mode The second replay combination (for example, “F_replay A′”) that will be displayed, and the “parallel lip” that will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode when the winning is successful. And a replay combination (for example, “F_ReplayB”) of the first replay combination is possible, but a winning of the second replay combination and a third replay combination is not possible. (RT0 state), the winning of the third replay combination is possible, but the winning of the second replay combination and the third replay combination is not possible, and the winning of the second replay combination is possible. However, a second RT state in which the winning of the first replay combination and the third replay combination is not possible is provided, and in the initial state, when the winning of the first replay combination is achieved, the player stops in a specific mode. Either the rough wave state or the stable state may be selected depending on whether or not the operation is performed. In this case, since the third replay combination is won in the first RT state, the lottery related to the advantageous section is preferentially treated, whereas the third replay combination is not won in the second RT state, so the lottery related to the advantageous section is treated cold. R. In the first RT state, which is an advantageous section (production section), for example, the game medium is given a cold treatment by not being notified of an advantageous stop operation procedure regarding "push order bell B", while an advantageous section (production section) In the second RT state, the game medium can be given preferentially by, for example, being notified of an advantageous stop operation procedure regarding the “push order bell B”. Thereby, each state can be created by setting the first RT state to the rough wave state and the second RT state to the stable state. As described above, when the rough state and the stable state are created by using the RT state, different bonus combinations are won according to the bet number, or the bonus state is stopped depending on which of the bonus flags is in between. It is also possible to eliminate the need for different controls. Therefore, the number of playable games can be limited to "3".

[Another control example of stable state and rough wave state (Part 2)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, another example that can be controlled in each of the stable state and the rough wave state described above in this detailed example will be described. FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining another control example (part 2) of the stable state and the rough wave state.

Unlike the detailed example, in the separate control example (2), for example, when the set values are “1” to “5” (settings 1 to 5: set values other than the specific set values) and the set values By setting the winning probability of the bonus combination to be different from when "6" (setting 6: specific setting value), the payout state regarding the advantageous state is made different. Specifically, the winning probability of bonus 1 (for example, "F_2BB" in this detailed example) is set to "1/16384" in the case of settings 1 to 5, and is set to "1/20" in the case of setting 6. To do. In addition, the winning probability of bonus 2 (for example, “F_3BB” in this detailed example) is set to “1/20” in the case of settings 1 to 5, and is set to “1/16384” in the case of setting 6. Then, the carry-over information (information stored in the carry-over combination storing area) of the bonus combination carried over by winning is not erased (cleared) when the setting is changed.

In the control example (part 2) for each book, only the bonus 1 may be provided without providing the bonus 2. Further, the bonus 1 may be won only when the setting is 6. That is, in this separate control example (part 2), at least it is possible to win only with a specific set value (or, as described above, it is easy to win with a specific set value, and it is won with a set value other than the specific set value. It is sufficient if a specific special role (difficult) (bonus 1) is provided. Further, although the specific set value is described as the setting 6, the setting value other than the setting 6 may be set as the specific setting value.

As shown in FIG. 122, in this separate control example (No. 2), the settings are 1 to 5, and the state in which the bonus 1 is being carried over is the rough wave state (rough wave mode), and the settings are 1 to 5 and the bonus. The non-carried over state of 1 is set as a stable state (stable mode). Further, the state of setting 6 is set to the EX state (extra mode). In FIG. 122, “AT winning rate” indicates an expected value that can be shifted to the advantageous state (increase section), and “AT one shot property” means when it is once shifted to the advantageous state (increase section). Shows an expected value of a period during which the advantageous state can be continued (or can be extended).

Here, as described above, the advantageous section includes an increase section (increase state) in which the game value increases and a non-increase section (reduction section/non-increase state) in which the game value does not increase. Therefore, if the advantageous state (increase section) continues or is continuous, it means that after the transition to the increase section once, the increase section ends once and after a predetermined period of game in the non-increase section, the transition to the increase section again. Although, as a whole, a series of advantageous sections continues, in the meantime, it includes repeating mutual transition between the increasing section and the non-increasing section. That is, a non-increasing section between the increasing section and the increasing section (note that the effect section can be a decreasing period in which the game value decreases, or a maintenance period in which the game value is maintained) When the player is configured to continue the advantageous state in which the player is playing the game (here, the advantageous section) as a whole, the "AT one-shot property" is an average period during which at least a series of advantageous sections continues. Means the degree of shortness of. In addition, when the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section, as described above, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling to the effect section or the increased section, information on the current mode, and pseudo bonus). All the information about the duration, the information about whether or not the ceiling is shortened, the value of the 1G continuous stock counter, etc.) are all cleared (initialized). These pieces of information can be paraphrased as information regarding determination of shift to the advantageous section. Therefore, "AT one shot property" means at least the length of the average period from the start of the increasing state to the initialization of the information regarding the transition determination to the advantageous state due to the end of the advantageous state (here, the advantageous section). It can also be said to mean a degree.

That is, in the rough wave state (rough wave mode), the expected value of shifting to the advantageous state is low (it is difficult to shift), but the expected value of the period during which the advantageous state continues (or continues) once it shifts to the advantageous state It is set as high (easy to continue, extend, or camp), and the stable state (stable mode) has a high expected value to shift to the advantageous state (easy to shift), but even if it shifts to the advantageous state It is set as a low expected value (duration, extension, or difficulty in continuous operation) during a period in which the state continues (or continuous operation). Further, in the EX state (extra mode), although the expected value for shifting to the advantageous state is higher than that for the stable state (stable mode) (more likely to shift), the advantageous state continues even after shifting to the advantageous state ( Or, the expected value of the period of staying together is set to be lower (more difficult to continue, extend, or stay together). In the rough wave state (rough wave mode), at least the average period from the start of the increasing state to the initialization of the information regarding the transition determination to the advantageous state due to the end of the advantageous state (here, the advantageous section) is the longest. In the stable state (stable mode), at least the average period from the start of the increasing state to the initialization of the information about the transition to the advantageous state due to the end of the advantageous state (here, the advantageous section) is rough ( The EX state (extra mode) is shorter than the rough wave mode), and the EX state (extra mode) is at least from the start of the increasing state to the initialization of the information regarding the transition determination to the advantageous state due to the end of the advantageous state (here, the advantageous section). It can be said that the average period is the shortest.

The method of varying the degree of advantage in each of the rough wave state (rough wave mode), stable state (stable mode), and EX state (extra mode) is not limited to the above. As described above, the degree of advantage may be changed by changing the expected value (gradient value) of giving the game value per unit game in the advantageous state, or the bonus may be carried over while the bonus is carried over by one. For example, the stop control of the push order small winning combination may be changed depending on the state of the medium state and the bonus 2 carryover state, and the advantage degree may be changed accordingly. Further, the winning probability of each bonus and the amount of increase in the gaming value in the bonus may be set so as to have the relationship of the above-described advantage degree in each of the above-described states, so that the advantage degree may be changed. .. Further, the method of varying the degree of advantage described in the examples other than this example can also be appropriately adopted.

In addition, as a mode of the winning control of the bonus 1 when the bonus 1 is carried over, the control “make it difficult to win the bonus” is performed in any of the settings (A) 1 to 6 (B). ) In settings 1 to 5, "difficult to win a bonus" control is performed, and in setting 6, "difficult to win a bonus" control is not performed. In any of the settings 1 to 6, the bonus can be won by multiplying two pieces, but the bonus cannot be prized by multiplying three pieces. (D) Two bonus pieces 1 and setting 6 It is possible to adopt a specification such that the bonus is won only in, and in any of the settings 1 to 6, it is possible to win the bonus with a double win, but it is impossible to win the bonus with a triple win. .. In addition, in the cases of (C) and (D) above, even if it is set to 2 pieces, in the case of settings 1 to 5, the control “makes it difficult to win a bonus” is performed, and it is set to 2 pieces and set 6 In the case of, it is possible to configure so that the control of “making it difficult to win a bonus” is not performed.

In addition, as a mode of winning control of the bonus 2 when the bonus 2 is carried over, the “make bonus winning difficult” control is performed in any of the (A′) settings 1 to 6, ( B') In settings 1 to 5, "difficult to win a bonus" control is performed, and in setting 6, "difficult to win a bonus" control is not performed. In any of the settings 1 to 6, the bonus can be won only in the case of 3 pieces, but the bonus can be won in the case of 3 pieces, but the bonus cannot be made in the case of 2 pieces. It is a bonus to be won only by multiplying and setting 1 to 5, and in any of settings 1 to 6, it is possible to win the bonus with 3 wins, but it is impossible to win the bonus with 2 wins. Can be adopted. In addition, in the case of (C') and (D'), even if the number of coins is three, in the case of setting 1 to 5 (or setting 6), "difficult to win a bonus" is controlled In the case of setting three (3) cards and setting 6 (or settings 1 to 5), it is possible to configure so that the control “making bonus winning difficult” is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122, an example of state transition of each state (mode) will be described. First, as an initial state, it is set to 1 (other than setting 6) and is in a stable state in which bonuses are not carried over. At this time, if the setting is changed and the setting 6 is set, the setting is 6, and the state shifts to the EX state in which the bonus is not carried over. When the game is played in this state, the bonus 1 that is easy to win in the setting 6 (or wins only in the setting 6) is internally won. Note that the bonus 1 is a single winning, not a duplicate winning with other replay combinations or small winning combinations (the bonus 2 can also have the same configuration). In a game in which this bonus 1 is internally won (established G), a stop operation is performed so that the symbol combination related to bonus 1 is not stopped and displayed (avoid winning of bonus 1), setting 6 and bonus 1 The EX status is being carried over. When the setting is changed again and the setting 1 (other than the setting 6) is set, the setting 1 (other than the setting 6) and the bonus 1 carry-over result in a rough wave state.

Here, for example, in the case where the above (A) is adopted as the mode of the bonus winning control of the bonus 1 and the game is configured to be possible with only three coins, the setting 6 is set. , If the winning is avoided in the game in which the bonus 1 is internally won, basically, the carryover information of the bonus 1 is erased (cleared) by an initialization process other than the setting change (for example, a RAM clear process). Since the state of carrying over the bonus 1 continues, it is possible to set the rough wave state by setting the settings 1 to 5, and the setting 6 remains (the setting is changed once to the settings 1 to 5 and then to the setting 6). In this case, the EX state can be set.

Further, for example, in the case where the above (B) is adopted as the mode of winning control of the bonus 1 and the game is configured to be possible with only three coins, when the setting 6 is set, When the winning is avoided in the game in which the bonus 1 is internally won, basically the bonus is carried out until the carry-over information of the bonus 1 is erased (cleared) by an initialization process (for example, a RAM clear process) other than the setting change. Since the state of 1 carry-over continues, it is possible to set the rough wave state by setting the settings 1 to 5. On the other hand, if the setting is 6 as it is (including the case where the setting is once changed to the setting 1 to 5 and then the setting is changed to the setting 6), the winning of the bonus 1 can be avoided and the EX state can be continued. It is also possible to return the stable state by winning the bonus 1.

In addition, for example, when the above-mentioned (C) to (D) are adopted as the mode of the bonus winning control of the bonus 1, and the game is configured to be possible with two and three cards, three cards will be multiplied. When a game is played, it is possible to set the stable state by setting the settings 1 to 5, and it is possible to set the EX state by setting the setting 6. On the other hand, in the state where the setting 6 is set, if the winning is avoided in the game in which the bonus 1 is internally won by multiplying by 2, and the game is played by multiplying by 3, the initialization process other than the setting change is performed. Until the carry-over information of bonus 1 is erased (cleared) by (for example, RAM clear processing) or the like, basically the state of carrying over bonus 1 continues, so if setting 1 to 5 is set, the rough wave state is set. It becomes possible to set the EX state if the setting 6 is left as it is (including the case where the setting is once changed to the settings 1 to 5 and then changed to the setting 6). Further, if the game is played with two coins, it is possible to win the bonus 1 and return to a stable state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122, an example of the operation instruction according to the state transition of each state (mode) will be described. The operation instruction (screen) is, for example, an example of a screen displayed on the display device 11, and the operation instruction (lamp) is, for example, the above-described status indicator or the above-described stopped-state notification unit 117. It is an example of a display mode. Here, the operation instruction (screen) and the operation instruction (lamp) are mainly operation instructions to the clerk of the amusement store, and these operation instructions are in a predetermined state (for example, the setting key is turned on to confirm the setting). It should be displayed only in (possible state). However, if the operation instruction (lamp) is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize (for example, the lighting state changes only for a few seconds at the time of state transition, and then returns to the normal lighting state), the predetermined It may be displayed even in a state other than the above state.

It is suggested that the setting can be changed to the rough wave state (or EX state) by changing the setting to the setting 6 when the setting is 1 (other than the setting 6) and the bonus is not carried over in the stable state. .. Specifically, in the operation instruction (screen), the current setting is "1", the current mode is the "stable" mode, and when changing to the "rough wave mode", change to the setting 6. Please display.”, and the display mode of the operation instruction (lamp) is “green lighting”.

Next, when the setting is changed and the setting 6 is set, and the setting 6 is set and the EX state is that the bonus is not carried over, if the bonus 1 is won, the state can be changed to the rough wave state. It is suggested. Specifically, in the operation instruction (screen), the current setting is “6”, the current mode is the “EX” mode, and when changing to the “rough wave mode”, up to 1 bonus is won. Please play a few games." is displayed, and the operation instruction (lamp) is displayed in yellow.

Next, when the game is in the EX state and the bonus 1 is won (at least all reels are spinning), if the bonus 1 winning is avoided, the state is changed to the rough wave state. It is suggested that it is possible (it is possible to transit from the non-carried over bonus to the one carried over bonus 1). Specifically, in the operation instruction (screen), the current setting is “6”, the current mode is the “EX” mode, and “Bonus 1 is won. Bonus 1 (7-BAR -Please aim at the BAR on the left reel so that the (BAR) is not aligned.", and the display mode of the operation instruction (lamp) is "flashing yellow".

Next, when the game is in the EX state, the game in which the bonus 1 is won is finished (at least all reels are stopped), and the bonus 1 winning is avoided in the game (being carried over in bonus 1). When (and in the EX state and in the game after the next game in which the bonus 1 is being carried over), it is possible to change the state to the rough wave state by setting 1 to 5 (other than setting 6) by changing the setting. Is suggested. Specifically, in the operation instruction (screen), the current setting is "6", the current mode is "EX" mode, and "Bonus 1 carryover. When changing to rough wave mode , Please change the setting to 1 to 5.", and the display mode of the operation instruction (lamp) is "blinking yellow" (EX state, bonus 1 is being carried over in the game after the next game. , “Yellow lighting” or “blue lighting”).

Next, when the setting is changed and the setting 1 (other than the setting 6) is set, the setting 1 is set, and the bonus 1 is being carried over in the rough wave state, for example, as a mode of the bonus 1 winning control, the above (C) In the case of adopting (D) to (D), it is suggested that the state can be changed to the stable state by winning the bonus 1 by multiplying by 2. Specifically, in the operation instruction (screen), the current setting is "1", the current mode is "rough wave" mode, and "Bonus 1 carryover. When changing to stable mode Please aim for bonus 1 (7-BAR-BAR) in the two-player game." is displayed, and the display mode of the operation instruction (lamp) is "blue lighting".

Although illustration is omitted, it is the setting 1 (other than the setting 6), the bonus is not carried over, and the game in which the bonus 2 is won is started (at least any reel is spinning). When the bonus 2 prize is avoided, the state cannot be changed to the rough wave state (if the bonus 2 is carried over, the transition cannot be made during the bonus 1 carried over). .. Specifically, in the operation instruction (screen), the current setting is "1", the current mode is "stable" mode, and "bonus 2 was won. Bonus 2 (7-watermelon -Please aim at BAR.", and the display mode of the operation instruction (lamp) may be "flashing in green". Further, the setting 6 is set, and the same suggestion may be made even in the EX state where the bonus is not carried over.

Further, when the setting is 1 (other than the setting 6) and the bonus 2 is being carried over in the stable state, for example, when the above (B′) is adopted as the mode of the bonus 2 winning control, the setting is changed by changing the setting. If it is set to 6, it may be suggested that the state can be changed to the rough wave state (or EX state). Specifically, in the operation instruction (screen), the current setting is "1", the current mode is "stable" mode, and "Bonus 2 carryover. When changing to rough wave mode. , And change to the setting 6 and aim for the bonus 2 (7-watermelon-BAR)."

As described above, according to the gaming machine of this example, it is possible to set any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage of the player. , The game store side can not only select the degree of advantage (playability) of the player (from among the options for this set value), but also specify by setting a specific set value (for example, setting 6) It is possible to further select the degree of advantage (playability) of the player depending on whether or not the special role (for example, bonus 1) is carried over and which setting value is set in the state. .. Therefore, it becomes possible to select the game property with more options than the number of setting stages designed in advance.

In addition, according to the gaming machine of the present example, it is possible to give an operation instruction for selecting the degree of advantage (playability) of the player, so that the operator can obtain the degree of advantage of the player (gamability) regardless of their skill. ) Can be selected appropriately. Therefore, even when it is possible to select the game property with more options than the number of setting stages designed in advance, it is possible to prevent the operator from being confused. Note that the "operator" here is basically supposed to be a clerk of a game shop, but the player can select his or her own advantage degree (game property) within a certain range. When configured, it may include a player.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, when a predetermined setting value (for example, settings 1 to 5) is set, a state in which a specific special role is carried over is carried over to a specific special role. The average period from the start of the increase state (for example, the increase section) to the end of the advantageous state (for example, the advantage section) and initialization of the information regarding the transition determination to the advantageous state is greater than that of the non-state. It is possible to make the advantage degree of the player different by making it longer. As a result, the playability can be selected in a mode that is of greater interest to the player, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Modification of this detailed example]
Subsequently, a modified example of the detailed example will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a game flow of a modified example of the detailed example, and FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining an example of specifications using the modified example of the detailed example.

In this detailed example, after the end of the pseudo bonus (increase section) of the advantageous section, the game basically shifts to the normal game (effect section) of the advantageous section, and when the pseudo bonus can be extended, it is switched to each mode. If the pseudo bonus is not possible for consecutive games (for example, in the case of the end A/end B mode) under the condition, the normal game of the non-advantageous section is performed after the lapse of a predetermined period (32 games). It was supposed to be transferred (see FIG. 103 etc.). That is, it was configured to stay in the advantageous section for a certain period even after the end of the pseudo bonus.

On the other hand, in the modified example of this detailed example (this example), after the end of the pseudo bonus of the advantageous section (the third section which is the increased section), the game is basically shifted to the non-advantageous section of the normal game. That is, the advantageous section is not continued after the end of the pseudo bonus, but is shifted to the non-advantageous section. Further, in this example, when the normal game in the non-advantageous section shifts to the normal game in the advantageous section (when the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the normal game in the non-advantageous section), the pseudo bonus lottery is won with a high probability ( When it shifts to the first section of the advantageous section (reproduction section) which is relatively easy to shift to the pseudo bonus, and when the first section ends, the pseudo bonus lottery is won with a low probability (relative to the pseudo bonus). It is assumed that the second section of the advantageous section (effect section), which is in a state where it is difficult to shift to (1), is moved to. At the time of changing the setting, even if the player stays in the advantageous section before the setting is changed, the game is started from the normal game in the non-advantageous section. Therefore, it is easy to shift to the first section of the advantageous section even when the setting is changed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 123, an outline of the game flow of this example will be described. As shown in FIG. 123, in the non-advantageous section, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section (advantageous section winning), first, the section shifts to the first section of the advantageous section. As described above, the first section of the advantageous section is a gaming section with a high degree of expectation that it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus (the third section of the advantageous section). Further, in the first section of the advantageous section, the prescribed number of games has been exhausted without shifting to the pseudo bonus (for example, a game of 100G in FIG. 124 described later has been played), and the like from the first section to the second section. When the shift condition of is satisfied, the shift is made to the second section of the advantageous section. As described above, the second section of the advantageous section is a game section in which the degree of expectation at which it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus is low.

When it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus in the non-advantageous zone, the first zone of the advantageous zone, and the second zone of the advantageous zone (pseudo bonus winning), it shifts to the third zone (pseudo bonus) of the advantageous zone. .. As described above, the third section of the advantageous section is an increase section, information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and the expected value of the net increase in the number of games per game is “5” in the advantageous state of 30. The game continues. Therefore, the expected value of the net number of increase per pseudo bonus is “150”. When the ending condition of the pseudo bonus is satisfied (end of the pseudo bonus), the advantageous section itself is also terminated and the non-advantageous section is entered. In this example as well, it is possible to perform the above-mentioned normal limit processing (the number of games, the number of payouts, etc.), but when the pseudo bonus ends and the game shifts to the non-advantageous section, these are operated. Since various counters (see FIG. 114 etc.) are also reset (cleared), the possibility that the above-described normal limit processing basically operates is low. In other words, in this example, the player can play the game in the advantageous section (in particular, the increasing section) without worrying that the advantageous section is forcibly ended by the operation of the normal limit process. Has become.

In addition, in this example, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous zone in the non-advantageous zone, basically, it is assumed that the transition to the first zone of the advantageous zone is made, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this. There may be a case of shifting to two sections. For example, in the advantageous section transition lottery in the non-advantageous section, there may be a case of winning and shifting to the first section of the advantageous section and a case of winning and shifting to the second section of the advantageous section. Further, the distribution probabilities of the non-advantageous section after the end of the pseudo bonus and the non-advantageous section after the setting change may be different. Further, for example, in the advantageous zone transition lottery in the non-advantageous zone, when winning and shifting to the first zone of the advantageous zone, the game period in which the first zone continues is further determined by lottery (or a plurality of predetermined slots). (For example, a game period such as 10 games, 20 games, 50 games, 100 games, and 300 games). In this way, the player is diversifying his/her expectation when shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, and only for a predetermined period after the player finishes the pseudo bonus or after the setting is changed (for example, 100G in FIG. 124 described later). As a result of playing the game and stopping the game after the lapse of the period, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from decreasing.

Next, an example of specifications using this example will be described with reference to FIG. Note that, in FIG. 124, the “winning type when the number of games reaches” means, for example, that a game period (number of released games) in which it is determined that the pseudo bonus is to be transferred when the non-advantageous section transits to the advantageous section in advance. It shows the specification that the start condition of the pseudo bonus is satisfied when the determined game period is exhausted, and "every game lottery type" is predetermined for each game in the advantageous section. It shows the specification that the start condition of the pseudo bonus is satisfied when it is decided whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus with the given winning probability (release probability), and when it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus. .. In this example, the number of 777 games is set as the number of ceiling games in any type, and the start condition of the pseudo bonus is always satisfied when the playing period for the number of ceiling games is exhausted. Further, in this example, in the non-advantageous section, for example, when the winning combination is won, a pseudo bonus start condition that is not related to the number of released games or the release probability may be set. Further, such a start condition may be set even in the advantageous section.

When the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section (production section), the player stays in the condominium zone (first section of the advantageous section) for 1 to 100 G in the advantageous section (production section). In the “winning type when the number of games reaches” type, the distribution probability that any number of games during this period becomes the number of released games is, for example, 60%. Further, in the “every game lottery type”, the release probability during this period is, for example, 1/128. That is, the extended game zone is set as a game section with a high degree of expectation that it will be decided to shift to the pseudo bonus.

When the game in the condominium zone is exhausted without shifting to the pseudo bonus, the player stays in the low accuracy zone (second section of the advantageous section) during 101 to 500G in the advantageous section (production section). In the “winning type when the number of games reaches” type, the distribution probability that any number of games during this period becomes the number of released games is, for example, 10%. Further, in the “every game lottery type”, the cancellation probability during this period is, for example, 1/400. That is, the low-probability zone is set as a game section with a low degree of expectation that it will be decided to shift to the pseudo bonus.

When the game in the low-accuracy zone is exhausted without shifting to the pseudo bonus, the player stays in the chance zone during 501 to 600G in the advantageous section (production section). In the “winning type upon reaching the number of games”, the distribution probability that any number of games during this period becomes the number of released games is, for example, 20%. Further, in the “every game lottery type”, the cancellation probability during this period is, for example, 1/200. In other words, the chance zone in which the chance zone is decided to be transferred to the pseudo bonus is at least higher than the low certainty zone. By providing such a chance zone before the number of ceiling games is reached, it is possible to increase the player's expectation even before the number of ceiling games is reached. However, the low-accuracy zone can be continued until the number of ceiling games is reached without providing a chance zone.

When the game in the chance zone is exhausted without shifting to the pseudo bonus, the player stays in the low accuracy zone again during 601 to 777G in the advantageous section (production section). In the “winning type when the number of games reaches” type, the distribution probability that any number of games during this period becomes the number of released games is, for example, 10%. Further, in the “every game lottery type”, the cancellation probability during this period is, for example, 1/400. That is, the low-probability zone is set as a game section with a low degree of expectation that it will be decided to shift to the pseudo bonus. It should be noted that the ceiling game number is set by the 777Gth game being the release game number at the latest in the "number of games reached win type", and the "every game lottery type" has the 778Gth (may be 777G) number. The number of ceiling games is set by setting the release probability to 100% (1/1).

In this example, the pseudo bonus (the third section of the advantageous section which is the increase section) ends in 30 games, but the mode of the duration of the increase section is not limited to this. For example, as described in the detailed example and other examples, when a predetermined extension condition is satisfied in the increasing section (advantageous state), the increasing section (advantageous state) can be extended. It can also be configured to. Further, when a plurality of pseudo bonuses (for example, 30 games, 50 games, 100 games, etc.) having different durations are provided in advance (for example, pseudo bonus 1, pseudo bonus 2, pseudo bonus 3, etc.) and the pseudo bonus is won, The type may be determined. In this case, it is assumed that the type is determined in the order of pseudo bonus 1>pseudo bonus 2>pseudo bonus 3 in the condominium zone (that is, pseudo bonus 1 having a short duration is most easily determined). In the low-accuracy zone, the types are determined in the order of pseudo bonus 3>pseudo bonus 2>pseudo bonus 1 (that is, pseudo bonus 3 having a long duration is most easily determined), and in the chance zone, The types may be determined in the order of pseudo bonus 2>pseudo bonus 1>pseudo bonus 3. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation even in a game section where the degree of expectation is low.

However, even if it is possible to extend the pseudo bonus game period in this way, the extended period exceeds the period until the above-described normal limit processing (for example, the number of games) is activated. You shouldn't. Specifically, for example, a process such as the quasi-limit process (the number of games) described above (see FIG. 114, etc.) is performed, so that even if a predetermined extension condition is satisfied, the extension determination itself is suppressed. Alternatively, the extended period may be appropriately reduced and given. Further, the predetermined extension condition is changed before and after the pseudo bonus game period is continued for a certain period, and the predetermined extension condition is easily satisfied before the pseudo bonus game period is continued for a certain period. After the bonus game period is continued for a certain period, it may be difficult to satisfy the predetermined extension condition. Note that a method other than this can be adopted as the method of suppressing the extended period.

Thus, according to the gaming machine of the present example, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) and the specific state (for example, effect section) are managed as a series of advantageous sections, and when the management period reaches a predetermined period (for example, When the value of the advantageous section game number counter reaches a value at which the normal limit processing (the number of games) is executed, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly ended and the initial state (for example, non-advantageous section) Controlled by. Further, the initial state is also controlled when the advantageous state ends before the predetermined period. When the initial state is controlled, the management period is initialized. Then, the specific state includes a first specific state with a high degree of expectation of transition to the advantageous state (for example, the first section of the advantageous section) and a second specific state with a low degree of expectation of transition to the advantageous state (for example, of the advantageous section). The second specific section is included, but when the initial state shifts to the specific state, the first specific state is controlled. In other words, even when the initial state, which is inherently disadvantageous, is transitioned to, the expected state of transition to the advantageous state is high in the specific state (first specific state) transitioned from the initial state. The possibility that the section will be forcibly terminated is also reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and the like, while suppressing the gambling property from becoming excessively high, and thus it is possible to consider the emotion of the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, even when the game period in the advantageous state is extended, the extended period does not exceed the period in which a series of advantageous sections is forcibly ended. ing. That is, while allowing the game period of the advantageous section to be variable, it is possible to prevent the extra game period from being extended. Therefore, while maintaining the interest of the game, it is possible to appropriately suppress excessive gambling.

[Another example of playability (game specifications) (Part 7)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125 to FIG. 128, another example (No. 7) of the playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of a modification of the external structure of the pachi-slot 1 in this example, FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of a modification of the symbol arrangement configuration in this example, and FIG. 127 is this example. It is a figure which shows an example of the modification of an internal winning combination structure in FIG. 128, and FIG. 128 is a figure which explains notionally the flow of the game in this example.

First, in the pachi-slot 1 described with reference to FIG. 2, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided, and stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided so as to correspond to the respective reels. The pachi-slot 1 in the example is different in that, as shown in FIG. 125, four reels 3L, 3CL, 3CR, 3R are provided, and stop buttons 17L, 17CL, 17CR, 17R are provided corresponding to the respective reels. I am supposed to. That is, in this example, the number of columns in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed is increased. Since the other external structures are basically the same as those described with reference to FIG. 2, the description thereof is omitted here. Also, the number of columns to be increased may be two or more.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, an example of a modification of the symbol arrangement configuration in this example will be described. As described above, in this example, there are four columns in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed. Here, in this example, an RB (regular bonus) is provided as a bonus combination, and "BAR-BAR-BAR-BAR" is defined as a combination of the symbols. The RB is also referred to as a “first special accessory”. Note that FIG. 126 focuses on this point and mainly describes the symbol arrangement configuration of the “BAR” symbol, and therefore the description of the symbol arrangement of other symbols is omitted. Other symbols can be appropriately arranged in the blank symbol positions in FIG. 126.

"Appendix 5 Technical Standards for Body Machines (related to Article 6)" in "Rules for Approval of Game Machines and Certification of Models" states that "Type 1 special effects shall operate." The number of symbol combinations is 1/500 of the number of all symbol combinations in the gaming machine provided with the accessory continuous operating device, and the game in which the accessory continuous operating device is not provided. The machine must not exceed 3/500 of the number of all symbol combinations." That is, there is a restriction on arranging the combination of symbols related to the first special accessory. The "number of combinations of all symbols" means the number of symbols per reel multiplied by the number of reels. Therefore, assuming that the number of symbols per reel is "20" and three reels are provided, "the number of combinations of all symbols" is "20×20×20=8000" and four When a reel is provided, the “number of combinations of all symbols” is “20×20×20×20=16000”.

And when three reels are provided, "8000 x 1/500 = 16 ways" in the "gaming machine provided with the accessory continuous operation device" arranges the symbol combinations related to the first special accessory. In the “gaming machine not provided with the accessory continuous operation device”, “8000×3/500=48 ways” is the upper limit for arranging the symbol combination related to the first special accessory. Here, when one line (for example, the center line) is defined as an effective line, in the game in which the RB is won or carried over and the RB can be won, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless, when trying to win the RB (at a draw-in rate of 100%), for example, as shown in FIG. 126, it is necessary to provide four “BAR” symbols at equal intervals on each reel. In this case, The "number of symbol combinations in which the first-class special accessory is activated" is "4×4×4=64 ways", which exceeds the above-mentioned upper limit. That is, when three reels are provided, the RB pull-in rate cannot be 100%.

On the other hand, when four reels are provided, in the “gaming machine provided with the accessory continuous operation device”, “160000×1/500=320 ways” arranges the combination of symbols relating to the first special accessory. In the "gaming machine not provided with the accessory continuous operation device", "160000×3/500=960 ways" is the upper limit for arranging the symbol combination related to the first special accessory. Here, when one line (for example, the center line) is defined as an effective line, in the game in which the RB is won or carried over and the RB can win the game, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless of trying to win the RB (with a pull-in rate of 100%), for example, as shown in FIG. 126, it is necessary to provide four "BAR" symbols on each reel at equal intervals. In this case, Since the "number of symbol combinations in which the first-class special accessory is activated" is "4 x 4 x 4 x 4 = 256 ways", it does not exceed the above-mentioned upper limit. That is, when four reels are provided, the RB pull-in rate can be 100%.

By setting the number of effective lines to one as in this example, reel stop control for avoiding duplicate winnings, which is a problem when creating a reel arrangement and a symbol combination, which is required when there are a plurality of effective lines. You can save the trouble of considering. Here, "reel stop control for avoiding duplicate winning" means, for example, when stopping a symbol combination corresponding to a re-game combination that is won on one of the activated lines, it is not won on another activated line. Since it is not possible to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination and the bonus combination, in such a case, the symbol combination corresponding to the other combination is drawn while drawing the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination on the activated line. At the same time, it means that reel stop and reel combination control and reel stop control that are not stopped and displayed on other effective lines are required. That is, in a model having one effective line, such a study is not necessary, so that the design man-hours related to reel control can be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, as described above, in a model in which three reels are provided and one line is defined as an effective line, the RB pull-in rate cannot be 100%, but there are a plurality of effective lines (for example, a cross-up line). , Cross down line, "upper-middle-upper" small V line, and "lower-middle-lower" Oyama line consisting of 4 irregular lines), the left reel and the right reel are RB symbols Since it is only necessary to stop at the upper stage or the lower stage, if there are three BAR symbols on the left reel, four BAR symbols on the middle reel, and three BAR symbols on the right reel, the RB draw-in rate is 100%. be able to. In this case, "the number of combinations of symbols in which the first class special accessory will operate" is "3 x 4 x 3 = 36 ways", and the symbols of "8000 x 500/3 = 48 ways" or less Since the number of combinations is the number of combinations, it is possible to set the RB pull-in rate to 100% at least in the "gaming machine not provided with the accessory continuous actuating device" in conformity with the rules. Therefore, such a configuration may be adopted. However, as described above, there is a demerit that the design man-hours are large in the case of being configured with a plurality of lines, and it can be said that the structure having four reels and one line has an advantage that the design man-hours related to reel control can be reduced.

In this example, four reels are provided, for example, one line is defined as an effective line, a combination of symbols of RB is defined as "BAR-BAR-BAR-BAR", and a "BAR" symbol is shown in FIG. By arranging at equal intervals as described above, it is premised on the specification that the draw-in rate of the RB is 100% in the game in which the RB can win the prize. As long as the upper limit is not exceeded, the combination of symbols of RB does not necessarily have to be composed of only a single symbol, and which line is defined as an effective line can be appropriately modified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, an example of a modified example of the internal winning combination configuration in this example will be described. In this example, as the internal lottery combination, the above-mentioned “RB” which is a bonus combination, “Battle Order Bells 1 to 6” which is a small combination, and “REP” which is a replay combination are provided, and when none of them wins ( "Excludes the state in which the RB is carried over." Note that FIG. 127 shows the coefficient and the winning probability when three pieces are multiplied. The winning probability indicates up to the second decimal place of the “probability denominator (65536)/coefficient”, and strictly speaking, this reciprocal (1/value indicated by “winning probability”) is the winning probability.

Although not shown in FIG. 127, the “batting order bells 1 to 6” are the “pushing order small wins” already described, and each of the “batting order 1 to 6” is the correct answer. It is associated as a batting order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct batting order, eight game values are given, and when the stop operation is not performed in the correct batting order, one game value is given according to the timing of the stop operation. It is configured to be played or not to be given a game value (in this case, "bell spill"). In this example, since four stop buttons are provided, a maximum of 24 correct batting orders can be set. Therefore, for example, the “pushing order winning combination” of “batting order bells 1 to 24” is set. You may do it. The number of correct hitting orders can be appropriately modified.

Further, not only the batting order but also the symbols to be aimed at a predetermined reel may be configured. For example, it is not possible to target red 7, blue 7 and white 7 at the same time with the left reel by providing color pushers such as "red 7 bell bell" "blue 7 bell bell" "white 7 bell bell" As an arrangement like this, the specifications are such that the patterns and colors to be aimed at are navigated during AT. Also, only when the AT which is the batting order concept and the AT which is the color pressing concept are combined, and when a design which is the correct answer is pressed on a specific batting order and a specific reel (either one reel, two or more reels or all reels) The correct symbol combination (a symbol combination with a large number of payouts, an advantageous RT, a symbol combination that shifts to a bonus) may be arranged. However, when using the color push concept, there is a disadvantage that it is shunned by players who are not good at touching, so if you want to increase the number of alternatives, there are many stop operations per single game and it is troublesome. Even if it is a 4-reel machine, it can be said that it is a specification favored by a wide range of players if it is configured only by the batting order concept.

It should be noted that, as in the present example, a 4-reel machine can have a maximum of 24 selections, such as a batting order selection that cannot be realized by a 3-reel machine. When the batting order is set to 24 options, the symbol combination when the batting order is correct is only won at 1/24 in the normal time when batting order navigation does not occur, so the base value in the normal state (out The porosity) can be greatly reduced. In addition, since the difference in the payout rate between AT when the batting order navigation is occurring and normal time when the batting order navigation is not occurring is large, it is possible to realize a high net increase while lowering the base value in the normal state. By achieving a low base during normal operation, it is possible to balance the payout rate of the gaming machine as a whole, and to design a payout with a higher probability of winning an AT or bonus than a high base machine. There is a merit that you can achieve a certain feeling of payout.

Further, “RT” is “RT transition REP 1” which is “push order replay” in the case of RT1 described later (that is, when the stop operation is performed in the associated correct hit order, the winning REP 1 is won. If the stop operation is not performed in the associated correct hit order, RT1 is maintained by winning the maintenance rep), and in RT1 described later, a predetermined probability within the range of the set winning probability. The “RT transition rip 1” is configured to be won.

In addition, “RT” is “RT shift Lip 2” which is “push order replay” at RT2 described later (that is, when the stop operation is performed in the associated correct hit order, the winning Lip 2 is won. In RT2, which will be described later, a predetermined probability within the range of the set winning probability is included. The "RT transition lip 2" is configured to be won.

In addition, “RT” is “RT transition Lip 3” which is “push order replay” at RT3 described later (that is, when the stop operation is performed in the associated correct hit order, the winning Lip 3 is won. In RT3, which will be described later, a predetermined probability within the range of the set winning probability is included. The "RT transition rip 3" is configured to be won.

In addition, “RT” is “RT transition Lip 4” which is “push order replay” in RT4 described later (that is, when the stop operation is performed in the associated correct hit order, the maintenance Lip is won and RT4 is selected). Is maintained, and when the stop operation is not performed in the associated correct hit order, the lowering rip 3 is won and the process shifts to RT3). In RT3 described later, at a predetermined probability within the range of the set winning probability. "RT transition rip 4" is configured to win.

In the gaming state "RB in operation", all of "Batting Order Bells 1 to 6" are won (in this case, 8 gaming values are given regardless of batting order), and the winning probability is "1/12. "00" is set, and others are "missed". Since "RB in operation" ends, for example, when four times of winning or 12 games are played, basically, the game value does not increase (increase) when "RB in operation". Hard to do).

In the gaming states "RT0" and "RT1", "RB" and "REP" are overlapped and the winning is won (in this case, since the replay combination is preferentially stopped, "RB" is not won in the winning game). The winning probability is set to "1/65.54", and the total value of the winning probabilities of winning any of the "Batting Order Bells 1 to 6" is set to "1/2.00", which is the same as "RB". The probability of winning a “lip” is set to “1/7.30”, and the others are “miss” (“miss” probability is “1/2.88”).

In the gaming state “RT2”, “RB” and “REP” are overlapped and won (in this case, since the replay role is preferentially stopped, “RB” is not won in the winning game) The winning probability is “ "1/65.54" is set, and the total value of the winning probabilities of winning one of "Batting Order Bells 1 to 6" is set to "1/2.00" (without overlapping with "RB"). The probability of winning a “lip” is set to “1/2.22”, and the others are “miss” (“miss” probability is “1/30.01”).

In the game state “RT3”, “RB” and “REP” are overlapped and won (in this case, since the replay role is preferentially stopped, “RB” is not won in the winning game) The winning probability is “ "1/65.54" is set, and the total value of the winning probabilities of winning one of "Batting Order Bells 1 to 6" is set to "1/2.00" (without overlapping with "RB"). The probability of winning a “rip” is set to “1/2.11”, and the others are “miss” (the “miss” probability is “1/100.05”).

In the game state “RT4”, “RB” and “REP” are overlapped and won (in this case, since the replay role is preferentially stopped, “RB” is not won in the winning game) The winning probability is “ "1/65.54" is set, and the total value of the winning probabilities of winning one of "Batting Order Bells 1 to 6" is set to "1/2.00" (without overlapping with "RB"). The probability of winning a “rip” is set to “1/2.08”, and the others are “miss” (the “miss” probability is “1/300.62”).

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, an example of the flow of the game in this example will be described. First, when the operation of the RB is completed, the process proceeds to RT0. RT0 is a low RT state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is low. In addition, it is a gaming state with a high probability of "miss". If "bell spill" is displayed before winning the RB at RT0, the process proceeds to RT1. RT1 is a low RT state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is low. In addition, it is a gaming state with a high probability of "miss".

At "RT1", if "Raise Lip 1" is won before winning the RB, the process shifts to RT2. RT2 is a medium RT state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is medium. In addition, it is a gaming state in which the "miss" probability is medium.

In "RT2", when "Raise Lip 2" is won before winning the RB, the process proceeds to RT3. RT3 is a high RT state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is high. In addition, it is a game state in which the probability of “miss” is low. On the other hand, in RT2, when "Bell spill" is displayed and "Down Lip 1" is won before winning the RB, the process shifts to RT1.

In "RT3", if "Rip Lip 3" is won before winning the RB, the process proceeds to RT4. RT4 is a high RT state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is the highest. In addition, it is a gaming state in which the "miss" probability is the lowest. On the other hand, if "bell spilling" is displayed before winning the RB at RT3, the process proceeds to RT1. Also, if "Lower Lip 2" is won, the process moves to RT2.

If "bell spill" is displayed before winning the RB at RT4, the process proceeds to RT1. Also, if "Lower Lip 3" is won, the process moves to RT3.

In RT0 to RT4, when the RB is won (RB winning), since the replay combination that is duplicated in the game is won, the RB is carried over (RB carryover). Note that the RT state does not shift in RB winning. Also, during the RB carryover, even if "bell spill", "up lip", "down lip", etc. are displayed, the RT state does not shift. Therefore, while the RB is being carried over, the RT state when the RB is won is inherited, and the replay role is randomly selected with the winning probability of the RT state that is inherited until the RB wins. There is a probability that a "loss" will occur.

Here, in this example, the replay role or the small role is preferentially stopped over the RB. Therefore, if any replay role or the small role is won while the RB is carried over, if the RB wins the prize. Absent. On the other hand, in the present example, if a “loss” occurs during carryover of an RB, the RB will always win regardless of the stop operation performed by the player. That is, if the “miss” probability is high, it becomes difficult to continue the RB carryover, and if the “miss” probability is low, the RB carryover is likely to continue. Therefore, the continuation degree during RB carryover becomes higher in the order of RT0·RT1<RT2<RT3<RT4.

If the RB wins while the RB is carried over, the RB operates. Then, as described above, when the operation of the RB is completed, the process proceeds to RT0. In this example, the game state is changed in this way.

Then, in this example, the RB carryover is configured as described above, and the RB carryover is configured to be controlled to the AT state. That is, from the time when the RB is won until the RB wins, it is possible to inform the player of the advantageous stop operation. In the AT state, the correct batting order is notified when any of the "batting order bells 1 to 6" is won, and as a result, the game value is increased. However, the game period in the AT state depends on the degree of continuation of RB carryover. That is, if the RB is won at RT0 or RT1, the expected continuation value of the AT state game period is about 3 games, and if the RB is won at RT2, the expected continuation value of the AT state game period is about 30 games. When the RB is won at RT3, the expected continuation value of the AT state game period is about 100 games, and when the RB is won at RT4, the expected continuation value of the AT state game period is about 300 games. Therefore, the advantage degree of the AT state varies depending on which RT state the RB is in when it is won. In RT0 and RT1, since the continuation expectation value of the game period in the AT state is low, it is not necessary to shift to the AT state even if the RB is won.

From this point of view, the AT state transition condition may be configured as a condition different from the RB winning. For example, RT0 is set as a non-advantageous section, RT1 to RT4 are set as an advantageous section (production section), RB carryover is set as an advantageous section (first increasing section: first AT state (AT state described above)), and RT1 to RT4 are set. In the meantime, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section (the second increasing section: the second AT state) during a predetermined period when the RB is not carried over.

In RT0 to RT4, when the RB is won, the first increase section is shifted to, and when the operation of the RB is finished, the advantageous section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. Further, when the transition from RT0 to RT1 is made, the non-advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section (effect section) (at this time, the advantageous section transition lottery (for example, refer to FIG. 105(b)) is performed to perform a plurality of modes having different degrees of advantage. You may decide one of the modes). In RT1-RT4, which is the production section, the second increase section transfer lottery is performed according to a condition different from the RB winning, and when the lottery is won, the second increase section is moved to the second increase section for a predetermined period (for example, 30 games). Let In the second increase section, the correct batting order is notified when one of the "bat order bells 1 to 6" is won, and the correct batting order is notified when any of the "RT transition rep 1 to 4" is won. It As a result, it is possible not only to increase the game value, but also to transition or maintain the RT state to an advantageous one.

When the RB is won in the second increase section, the first increase section is moved to, and when the operation of the RB is finished, the advantageous section is changed to the non-advantageous section. On the other hand, when the game period of the second increase section ends without winning the RB, the process returns to the effect section. In the returned production section, the second increase section transfer lottery may be performed again unless the RB is won.

The effect section, the first increasing section, and the second increasing section may be managed as the series of advantageous sections described above. However, in this example, when the operation of the RB is completed, the advantageous section is shifted to the non-advantageous section, so that the number of games and the number of payouts in the series of advantageous sections are limited by each normal limit process (for example, 114, etc. (special limit processing or semi-limit processing may be performed) may be satisfied, but in terms of control, the advantageous section itself continues until the operation of the RB ends. In the subsequent advantageous zone, at least the information of the stop operation is not notified. Then, when the operation of the RB is completed (after the RB has won if the RB has not won), the non-advantageous section is entered. In this example, the advantageous section is shifted to the non-advantageous section when the operation of the RB is finished, but it may be shifted from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section when the RB wins.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present example, in the carry-over state of the special combination (for example, RB) (for example, during RB carry-over), the winning probability of the re-gaming combination when the special combination is won is inherited. The winning combination is determined. As a result, the probability of losing is different in the carry-over state of the special role. If the special combination is lost in the carry-over state, the combination of symbols relating to the special combination is always displayed. Further, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, AT state) during a period from when the special combination is won until the symbol combination related to the special combination is displayed. That is, it is possible to change the advantage degree of the advantageous state according to the winning probability of the re-game combination when the special combination is won. Therefore, even when the carry-over state of the special combination can be controlled to the advantageous state, the advantage degree of the advantageous state can be varied.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present example, in addition to the first advantageous state (for example, the first increase section) which starts when a special combination is won and ends when the combination of symbols related to the special combination is displayed, A second advantageous state (for example, a second increase section) is provided which starts under a condition different from that of winning a winning combination and ends under a condition different from that of displaying a combination of symbols related to a special winning combination. Good. Thereby, even if the special combination is not won, it can be expected to be controlled in an advantageous state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, it is desirable that the number of display columns of symbols is four or more. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the degree of freedom of the symbol arrangement is increased and the symbol arrangement does not feel uncomfortable without increasing the number of steps.

[Another example of playability (game specifications) (Part 8)]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 129 to 131, another example (No. 8) of the playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 129 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in this example, and FIGS. 130 and 131 are diagrams showing an example of the privilege granting state in this example and a variation example of the state display suggesting the state. Is.

First, with reference to FIG. 129, an example of the flow of the game in this example will be described. As described above, it is possible to control to various game states, but in this example, it is roughly classified into AT (may be ART) during which AT information informing of advantageous stop operation is notified to the player, It is assumed that the non-AT and non-AT are provided.

In the non-AT, when it is neither in the CZ (chance zone) state described later nor in the bonus (special game) state, the normal game state is set. In the non-AT normal game state, point lottery is performed based on a bonus grant state and an internal winning combination described later. Further, when a combination of symbols relating to a bonus combination is displayed in the non-AT normal game state, the non-AT bonus state is entered. Further, the bonus state can be configured as, for example, the above-mentioned “special bonus state”. Note that the bonus state can be configured as, for example, the above-described pseudo bonus (AT state).

In the non-AT bonus state, point lottery is performed based on a bonus-giving state and an internal winning combination described later. In the bonus state, the winning probability of the small winning combination increases (or the winning probability of the replay combination may increase), so it becomes easier to win a specific winning combination. It is configured as a preferential treatment state where there is a high possibility that the lottery will be preferentially treated. The bonus state ends when a predetermined end condition (a game value exceeding a preset game value number is given, or a game is played for a preset game period) is satisfied. To do. In addition, in the normal game state and the bonus state during non-AT, the points given according to the result of the point lottery are accumulated and stored. In addition, in the non-AT bonus state, the AT-winning lottery is performed on the basis of the internal winning combination or other preset conditions being satisfied (however, the AT-winning probability is lower than in the CZ state). If the AT-winning lottery is won in the non-AT bonus state, after the bonus state ends, the state shifts to the AT normal game state instead of the non-AT normal game state.

In the normal game state during non-AT (or after the bonus state during non-AT ends), when the accumulated and stored points reach the specified point (for example, 50P), the state shifts to the CZ state during non-AT. In this case, the accumulated and stored points are initialized (cleared). In the non-AT CZ state, the AT-winning lottery is performed on the basis of the internal winning combination or the satisfaction of a preset condition. If the AT-winning lottery is won in the non-AT CZ state, the game state shifts to the AT normal game state. Further, in the non-AT CZ state, the condition for ending the CZ state without winning the AT-winning lottery (for example, playing a game for a preset game period, winning the end lottery, etc.) is satisfied. In the case of, it shifts to the normal game state during non-AT.

In this example, the privilege given according to the result of the point lottery is described as a point for shifting to the CZ state, but this is merely one form of privilege giving, The privilege granted according to the result of the lottery is not limited to this. For example, whether or not to directly shift to the CZ state may be determined according to the result of the lottery, and one right can shift to the CZ state at least once. It may be determined whether or not to grant the right. Further, for example, it may be possible to directly determine whether or not to shift to AT according to the result of the lottery, and it is possible to shift to AT at least once with one right. It may be determined whether or not to grant the right to become. In addition, for example, the bonus state may be configured as a pseudo bonus, and whether or not to directly shift to the bonus state may be determined according to the result of the lottery, or one right at least once. May determine whether or not to grant the right to be able to shift to the bonus state. In addition, a privilege having added value such as performance may be provided instead of the privilege related to the payout. That is, any privilege may be given according to the result of the lottery.

Further, the point may be information about a numerical value managed by adding (subtracting) a predetermined counter, or information indicating which stage the current stage is by presetting a plurality of stages. Or a plurality of states may be set in advance and the information may indicate which state the current state is. That is, the point may be any information as long as the information is appropriately updated according to the result of the lottery.

In the AT, when it is neither in the CZ state nor in the bonus state, the normal game state is set. In the normal game state during AT, point lottery is performed based on a bonus grant state and an internal winning combination described later. Further, when a combination of symbols relating to a bonus combination is displayed in the normal game state during AT, the state shifts to the bonus state during AT. Note that the normal game state has the same basic configuration during non-AT and during AT, but during non-AT, the game value is not increased due to not being notified of the stop operation. In contrast to this, the AT is in a relatively advantageous state in which the game value is increased due to the notification of the stop operation information during AT. Further, the point probabilities of the point lottery may be made different between the non-AT normal game state and the AT normal game state.

In the bonus state during AT, point lottery is performed based on a bonus grant state and an internal winning combination described later. As in the non-AT state, the points given according to the result of the point lottery are cumulatively stored in the normal game state and the bonus state during the AT. The bonus state is basically the same between non-AT and AT, but in the non-AT bonus state, the internal winning combination or other preset conditions are satisfied. In contrast to the case where the AT addition lottery is performed, the AT extension lottery described later is not performed in the bonus state during AT. However, the AT extension lottery can be performed even in the bonus state during AT.

In the normal game state in AT (or after the bonus state in AT ends), when the accumulated and stored points reach the specified point (for example, 50P), the state shifts to the CZ state in AT. In this case, the accumulated and stored points are initialized (cleared). In the CZ state during AT, the AT extension lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination or the satisfaction of a preset condition. When the AT extension lottery is won in the CZ state during AT, the game period in the normal game state during AT is extended according to the winning result. In addition, in the CZ state during AT, the ending condition of the CZ state is won without winning the AT extension lottery (for example, the game is played for a preset game period, the ending lottery is won, etc.). In this case, the normal game state during AT is entered.

In the normal game state during AT, a game that is given in advance (for example, a period given as an initial period. 50 games as an example) or an extended game period (the management method is arbitrary as described later) When done, AT ends and shifts to the normal game state during non-AT. In addition, since the normal game state, the CZ state, and the bonus state during AT are managed as a series of advantageous sections, when the operating condition of the limit process described above is satisfied in the series of advantageous sections, the normal game during AT is performed. If the state and the CZ state, it shifts to the non-AT normal game state, and if it is the AT bonus state, shifts to the non-AT bonus state. In this case, the point lottery may not be performed in the shifted bonus state during non-AT.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this example, the player basically starts the game from the non-AT normal game state, accumulates points in the non-AT normal game state and bonus state, and accumulates the accumulated points. Aim to acquire AT in CZ state by consuming it and shifting to CZ state. When the non-AT is switched to the AT, the points are accumulated in the normal game state and the bonus state in the AT, the accumulated points are consumed to shift to the CZ state, and the AT is extended in the CZ state. .. Therefore, in the gaming machine of this example, the amount of point-providing probability is of great concern to the player.

Next, the privilege giving state in this example will be described. In this example, as an example of the privilege granted state, the point award probability is preferentially applied when the internal winning combination is a replay role (excluding a replay role as a rare role with a low winning probability, a push order replay or an unquestioned replay), When the internal winning combination is not the replay combination, the point awarding probability is not favored, and when the internal winning combination is the replay combination, the internal winning combination is the bell (the winning probability Except for a specific small role as a low rare role, the point awarding probability is favored when it is a pushing order or a non-questioning minor role, and the point awarding probability is not favored when the internal winning combination is not the bell. And, when the internal winning combination is the second winning state, which is set when the internal winning combination is Bell, and the internal winning combination is any combination, the point-probability is given preferentially and the internal winning combination is the rare winning combination. Points when the third granted state is set to No. and "Loss" that is not won in any combination (or in the case of "Other" in which any combination other than the above is an internal winning combination) And a fourth granting state that is set when the point granting probability is preferentially treated and the point granting probability is not preferentially when it is not the “miss” and when it is “missing”.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the display device 11, at least the above-described first grant in the non-AT and AT normal game states and bonus game states in which the point lottery is performed. A state display area (MP) is provided in which the first display to the fourth display for indicating the state to the fourth applied state are displayed. The point lottery described above may be performed even in the CZ state, and in this case, the state display area (MP) may be provided even in the non-AT and AT CZ states. That is, the state display area (MP) may be displayed regardless of the gaming state, at least in the state where the privilege can be given.

Here, in FIG. 130, in "correspondence between display in map and winning combination", the display (icon) corresponding to "replay" is the first display for suggesting the first addition state, and "bell" is displayed. The corresponding display (icon) is the second display for suggesting the second granted state, and the display (icon) corresponding to the "rare combination" is the third display for suggesting the third granted state. The display (icon) corresponding to "Loss/Other" is the fourth display for suggesting the fourth application state.

In this example, the privilege granting state for 5 games including the game is predetermined. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 130 and 131(a), the privilege granting state of the game (first game) is determined to be the first granting state, and the privilege granting state after one game (second game) is The second grant state is determined, the bonus grant state after the second game (third game) is determined to be the first grant state, and the bonus grant state after the third game (fourth game) is the fourth grant state. Has been determined, and the privilege granting state after four games (fifth game) has been determined to be the third granting state. To correspond to this, in the leftmost area of the status display area (MP), The display is displayed, the second display is displayed in the one right area, the first display is displayed in the one right area, the fourth display is displayed in the one right area, and the rightmost area is displayed. The third display is displayed in the area.

Further, in the state display area (MP) as shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, a state display icon at the left end (hereinafter abbreviated as “the relevant game state display icon”) indicating the privilege giving state of the game is displayed for the next game and thereafter. The partition line is designed so that it can be easily distinguished from the state display icon indicating the privilege giving state, and the display area of the game state display icon is partitioned. This makes it clear which display indicates the game state of the game that the player should pay attention to. The method of displaying the game state display icon so as to be easily distinguishable from other icons may be other than this. For example, the game state display icon may be displayed larger than other icons, or the game state display icon may be blinked. Further, in other effect devices, such as the decoration LED of the gaming machine is caused to emit light in a color corresponding to the game state display icon, or a voice indicating a state suggestion such as “If the replay is good! You may notify the privilege provision state of a game.

At this time, as in the example shown in FIG. 131(b), it is assumed that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game. In this case, since the privilege grant state in the game is the first grant state, the point grant probability is preferentially treated in the point lottery. Then, the bonus-giving state after one game to four games in the current game is advanced to be set as a bonus-giving state after the game to three games in the next game, and the replay role is an internal winning combination in the game. According to the determination, the privilege granting state after four games is set to the first granting state. Further, to correspond to this, the second display is displayed in the leftmost area of the status display area (MP), the first display is displayed in the area to the right of that, and the first display is displayed in the area to the right of it. Four displays are displayed, the third display is displayed in the area on the right of the four displays, and the first display is displayed in the rightmost area.

The specific game flow is as follows. From the end of the previous game, in the state where FIG. 131A is continuously displayed, the player sequentially performs the bet button operation, the start lever operation, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation. The rotation of all reels is stopped, and as a result of the game, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line. After that, an effect corresponding to the point-giving determination is performed.

For example, the game status display icon (first display corresponding to replay) displayed at the left end of the status display area (MP) emits light, and the added point number “+5 points” or the like is displayed. In other words, when a combination corresponding to the privilege granting state of the game is won and the point grant determination is made under the preferential condition, and when a winning combination that does not correspond to the privilege granting state of the game is won, the point grant determination is determined under the non-preferential condition. The content of the effect depending on the point-giving determination may be different from that in the case where is performed, and the player may easily understand whether the winning combination corresponding to the state can be won. For example, if points are awarded under preferential conditions, the additional points are displayed after the game status display icon emits light strongly, and in the case of non-preferred conditions, additional points are displayed after the game status display icon is darkened. To be done. By performing the point addition effect as described above, it is possible to give the player a sense of success that the winning combination can be drawn in a timely manner, and enhance the enjoyment of the game. Not only waiting for the winning of high-value and low-probability roles such as bonus and rare roles, but even if there is a high-probability winning combination such as the replay role and the Bell role, a large value will be added depending on the timing of establishment. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in this case, the winning line of the replay is blinked by the back lamp in accordance with the point addition effect, and the decoration LED is made to emit light of blue which is a color suggesting the replay. If the effect that suggests that there is a game is also performed, the game is more easily transmitted to the player.

Then, after the point addition effect is performed, the display mode of FIG. 131(a) is changed to the display mode of FIG. 131(b). That is, after the point addition effect, the game status display icon in the leftmost area of the status display area (MP) is hidden and the status display icons (FIG. 131(b)) arranged in the status display area (MP) are displayed. (2) to (5)) are moved to the left by one, and the icon of the first display in FIG. 131(6) is displayed in the rightmost area of the status display area (MP) based on the winning of the replay combination. It In this way, the privilege granting state is directly determined according to the winning combination that has been established, and it becomes clear visually, so that the player himself/herself actively participates in such a lottery state (lottery map). ) Can be given the feeling of creating. It should be noted that the timing of executing the point addition effect and the timing of changing the state display area (MP) are merely examples, and timings other than the above (for example, immediately after the start lever operation, after the first stop, at the third stop, and the operation invalidation freeze). If there is an effect, you may go during the freeze).

On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 131(c), it is assumed that the bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game. In this case, since the privilege granting state in the game is the first granting state, the point granting probability is not favored in the point lottery. Then, the bonus-giving state after one game to four games in the current game is advanced to be set as the bonus-giving state after the game to three games in the next game, and the bell is determined as an internal winning combination in the game. In response to this, the privilege granting state after four games is set to the second granting state. Further, to correspond to this, the second display is displayed in the leftmost area of the status display area (MP), the first display is displayed in the area to the right of that, and the first display is displayed in the area to the right of it. The four displays are displayed, the third display is displayed in the region on the right of one, and the second display is displayed in the region on the far right. The specific flow of the game is basically the same as the case of FIG. 131(b) described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

That is, in this example, the privilege granting state for the subsequent predetermined game (in this case, after four games) is determined according to the internal winning combination in the game. In addition, the determined privilege grant state is set when the game corresponding to a predetermined game is sequentially advanced and becomes the relevant game. Note that although the setting is being changed, in this case, since the privilege granting state is basically initialized, a combination of the privilege granting conditions for five games may be set in advance. A plurality of such combinations may be provided, one of the combinations may be randomly determined, and the privilege granting state of the determined combination may be set. However, the privilege granting state may not be set and the privilege granting state may be sequentially set as described above, but the former is more preferable from the viewpoint of making it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the setting has been changed. It is suitable. From such a viewpoint, the privilege granting state may be initialized even when the power is restored without changing the setting.

Further, such a determination mode of the privilege granting state is an example, and other determination modes can be adopted. For example, the privilege giving state in the next game may be determined according to the internal winning combination in the game. That is, the game in which the privilege granting state determined according to the internal winning combination in the game is set can be any game after the game. In this case, in the state display area (MP), only the suggestion display corresponding to the privilege granting state in the game may be displayed, or the suggestion display corresponding to the privilege granting state in the game and the subsequent benefit. A suggestion display corresponding to the privilege granting state in the game for which the granting state is determined may be displayed.

Further, for example, the period during which the same privilege granting state continues may be defined as 5 games, and the privilege granting condition may be determined every 5 games according to the internal winning combination at that time. In addition, for example, first, a transfer lottery (whether or not to decide) whether or not to shift the privilege granting state according to the internal winning combination is performed, and when it is determined to shift the privilege granting state, one of the privilege granting states May be determined, and the determined privilege grant state may be maintained until the next transfer lottery is performed. That is, the privilege granting state determined by one trigger can be continued for a plurality of games (game periods). In this case, in the state display area (MP), only the suggestion display corresponding to the privilege granting state in the period including the game may be displayed, or the suggestion display corresponding to the privilege granting state in the period including the game. The display and the suggestion display corresponding to the privilege granting state in the subsequent period may be displayed.

Further, in this example, basically, the suggestion display according to the determination result of the privilege granting state is performed in the state display area (MP), but the display mode in the state display area (MP) is not limited to this. Absent. For example, when the game is started, only a suggestion display (for example, (1) in FIG. 131(a)) corresponding to the privilege giving state of the game is displayed, and when the game is finished, the next game is displayed. Suggestion display corresponding to the privilege granting state (for example, (2) in FIGS. 131(b) and (c)) and suggestion display corresponding to the specific granting state newly determined this time (for example, FIG. 131(b)(c). (6)) in ()) is displayed, and a suggestion display corresponding to the privilege giving state of other games (for example, (2) to (5) in FIG. 131(a), FIG. 131(b) ( In the case of c), (3) to (5) may not be displayed. Further, a suggestion display that does not correspond to the privilege granting state (for example, a display such as “?” that makes it difficult to recognize which privilege granting state) may be displayed with a predetermined probability.

Further, although the method of giving preferential treatment to the point giving probability in this example, for example, a method of giving preferential treatment as follows can be adopted. For example, in the game in which the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination, if the first grant state is not set, "2" points are awarded with a probability of 1/3 and "1" points are awarded with a probability of 2/3. I shall. Here, in the first awarding state, "2" points are given with a probability of 2/3 and "1" points are given with a probability of 1/3. That is, it is possible to give preferential treatment to the point giving probability by giving preferential treatment to the given probability itself. Further, in the first awarding state, “4” points are given with a probability of 1/3 and “2” points are given with a probability of 2/3. That is, it is possible to give preferential treatment to the point giving probability by giving preferential treatment to the number of points given. Further, for example, in the game in which the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination, points are not awarded if the replay role is not in the first grant state, and it is predetermined or determined by lottery in the first grant state. It is also possible that at least "1" points or more are awarded.

When the replay combination includes a combination of symbols that is displayed depending on the batting order or the timing of the stop operation, such as “push order replay”, the “push order replay” is internally won. In the game determined as a role, if it is not in the first granted state, with a probability of 1/3 when a specific symbol combination is displayed in response to a stop operation being performed in the correct answer order or the correct answer timing. When "2" points are given, "1" points are given with a probability of 2/3, and a specific symbol combination is not displayed depending on the correct hit order or the correct answer timing when the stop operation is not performed. Can be given 1 point with a probability of 1/3 and no point with a probability of 2/3. That is, it is possible to change the point awarding probability according to the mode of the stop operation of the player (the type of the combination of the symbols relating to the replay combination displayed as a result). In this case, if a specific symbol combination is not displayed in response to the correct hit order or the correct answer timing, the point may not be given. Further, by the above-described preferential treatment method, in the case of the first grant state, it is possible to preferentially treat the point grant probability. Further, even in the first awarding state, the point awarding probability may not be preferentially given when the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed due to the fact that the stop operation is not performed in the correct answer order or the correct answer timing. That is, in the point lottery, whether or not to perform the point lottery or to give preferential treatment may be determined according to the combination of the winning symbols. The same applies to the case where the bell includes a combination of symbols that is displayed depending on the batting order or the timing of the stop operation, such as “push order small winning combination”.

In addition, for example, in a game in which Bell is determined as an internal winning combination, if the second grant state is not given, “2” points are awarded with a 1/2 probability and “1” points are awarded with a 1/2 probability. Shall be. Here, similarly to the above, in the second awarding state, “2” points are given with a probability of 2/3 and “1” points are given with a probability of 1/3. Alternatively, “4” points may be given with a 1/2 probability and “2” points may be given with a 1/2 probability. Further, for example, in a game in which Bell is determined as an internal winning combination, points are not awarded when the second grant state is not set May be awarded at least "1" points or more.

In addition, for example, in the case of the third grant state, it is assumed that “5” points are granted with a probability of 1/3 and “3” points are granted with a probability of 2/3 in common to all winning combinations. Here, when the rare winning combination is further determined as the internal winning combination in the third awarded state, “10” points may be awarded.

Further, for example, in a game in which a loss/other is determined as an internal winning combination, if the state is not the fourth awarded state, "1" points are awarded with a probability of 1/3 and points are not awarded with a probability of 2/3. And Here, similarly to the above, in the case of the fourth awarding state, it is possible to give "2" points with a probability of 2/3 and not give points with a probability of 1/3, Alternatively, “2” points may be given with a probability of 1/3 and “1” points may be given with a probability of 2/3. In addition, for example, in a game in which loss/others is determined as an internal winning combination, points are not awarded if the game is not in the fourth awarded state, and predetermined or determined by lottery in the fourth awarded state. It is also possible that at least "1" points or more are awarded.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present example, it is possible to determine any one of a plurality of states (for example, the first grant state to the fourth grant state) related to the grant of the privilege (for example, points). .. Further, it is possible to display a plurality of state suggestion displays (for example, first display to fourth display) according to the determined state. Then, the state suggestion display can be displayed for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period according to the determined state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in giving the privilege.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, it is possible to determine the state of the predetermined game in the second period according to the winning combination in the game. That is, according to the game result of the player himself, the advantage degree of the game is changed, and the advantage degree in the subsequent game is determined, so that the expectation of the player can be maintained even after the game. It can be maintained, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present example, for example, when the first winning combination (eg, replay winning combination) is won in the game, the state in the predetermined game during the second period becomes the first state (eg, first granting state). When the second winning combination (eg, bell) is won in the game state, the state in the predetermined game of the second period is set to the second state (eg, second grant state). As a result, since the winning combination in the game becomes a chance combination in the subsequent predetermined game, it is possible to easily understand the game property that the subsequent state is generated according to the game result of the player himself. The interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present example, when the notification is not controlled to the notification state (for example, during non-ART), when the given privilege has a predetermined result (for example, the specified point is reached), the notification is given. It is possible to determine whether or not to control the state, and when the notification state is controlled (for example, during AT), whether or not to extend the notification state when the granted privilege has a predetermined result. Can be decided. That is, regardless of which state the privilege granting is, the player's great concern is given. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player regarding the grant of the privilege.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this example, the following contrivances can be made in order to further enhance the interest of the player. For example, in a gaming state other than the bonus state (particularly, a normal gaming state), it is possible to shift between a plurality of RT states. Specifically, five types of RT states RT0 to RT4 are provided. In this example, as the internal winning combination in each RT state, the same one as in the other example (No. 7) of the game property (game specification) described above is provided. Further, RT3 is a finite RT having a fixed period, and the other RT states are infinite RT having no fixed period. The winning probability of the replay combination is the same (1/7.3) in any RT state. However, the winning probability of the replay combination may be changed between the RT states.

After the bonus state ends, the process moves to RT0. RT0 is in an RT state in which "RT transition rip 3" can be won. In this example, the “RT transition rip 3” is a rare role in which the lift rip 3 wins regardless of the mode of the stop operation. If the winning rep 3 is won at RT0, the process proceeds to RT3. Note that RT3 in this example will be described later. On the other hand, before winning the “RT shift lip 3”, if any of the “sequel bells 1 to 6” is won and the bell spill is displayed, the process shifts to RT1.

RT1 is in an RT state in which “RT transition rip 1” can be won. If the player wins the “RT shift rip 1” at RT1 and wins the raise rip 1, the process shifts to RT2. In addition, "RT transition rip 1" is not a rare role.

RT2 is in an RT state in which "RT transition rip 2" can be won. When the player wins “RT shift rip 2” at RT2 and wins the raise rip 2, shifts to RT0. In addition, "RT Transition Lip 2" is not a rare role. On the other hand, in RT2, when one of the "sequential order bells 1 to 6" is won and the spilled bell is displayed, the process proceeds to RT1. In addition, in the case of winning the “RT shift rip 2” at RT2 and winning the lower rip 1, a shift to RT1 is made.

RT3 is in an RT state in which "RT transition rip 3" can be won. Note that RT3 is a finite RT that ends when it continues for a predetermined period (for example, for 10 games), but the RT state does not change depending on the combination of displayed symbols, so "bell spill" is displayed. Even if it is played, the game period is not extended even if the game does not shift to RT1 and the winning rep 3 is won. In RT3, when the game is played for the predetermined period, the process proceeds to RT4.

The RT 4 is in an RT state in which “RT transition rep 3” and “RT transition rep 4” can be won. When the winning rip 3 is won at RT4, the process proceeds to RT3. In addition, in the "RT transition rip 4" in this example, the maintenance rep wins when the batting order is correct and the lowering rip 1 wins when the batting order is incorrect. Also, "RT Transition Lip 4" is not a rare role. At RT4, if one of the "sequential bells 1 to 6" is won and the spilled bell is displayed, the process proceeds to RT1. In addition, in the case of winning the “RT transfer rip 4” at RT4 and winning the lowering rip 1, the process moves to RT1.

Here, in the present example, when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game, the privilege granting state in the predetermined game thereafter is the third granting state. As described above, in the third awarding state, the point awarding probability is high regardless of the internal winning combination of the game. That is, RT0, RT3, and RT4 that can win "RT Transition Lip 3" as a rare role are compared to RT1 and RT2 that cannot win "RT Transition Lip 3" as a rare role. 3 It is possible to configure the state in which the given state is easily determined, and as a result, points are easily given (for example, the probability change state). Although RT3 is a finite RT, it does not fall down to RT1 unlike RT0 and RT4, and in that sense, it is in a state where points are most likely to be given.

The winning probabilities of “RT transition rip 3” in RT0, RT3, and RT4 may be common probabilities or different probabilities. For example, RT3 can be set to "1/7.3", and RT0 and RT4 can be set to "1/29.2". Further, although the probability is low (for example, “1/256”), it may be possible to win the “RT transition rep 3” in RT1 and RT2 as well. In addition, in RT0 and RT4, the winning probability of the rare role “RT Transition Lip 3” is increased, and in RT3, the winning probability of the replay role different from the rare role “RT Transition Lip 3” is increased. Good. That is, an RT state in which the first rare winning combination has a high winning probability and an RT state in which the second rare winning combination has a high winning probability may be provided. Further, in this case, the degree of advantage may be different between the privilege granting state set when the first rare combination is won and the privilege granting state set when the second rare combination is won. it can.

Further, by simply setting RT0, RT3, and RT4 to a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that of RT1 and RT2, the first grant state is easily determined, and the replay combination is determined in the first grant state. It may be configured in an easy state. Even in this case, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player. In this case, the winning probabilities of the replay combination in each of RT0, RT3, and RT4 may be common probabilities or different probabilities. For example, "3" can be set for RT3 and "1/4" for RT0 and RT4. Further, in this case, by setting the bonus state to a state in which the winning probability of the bell is higher than other gaming states, the second grant state is easily determined, and the bell is easily determined in the second grant state. Can be configured. Further, even in the bonus state, the RT state can be changed similarly. For example, when the bonus state is configured as the “special bonus state”, the winning probability of the replay combination is made different among any of the first gaming state, the second gaming state and the third gaming state (that is, the RT state is changed). By doing so, similarly to the above, it is possible to create a state in which the first grant state is easily determined in the bonus state and the replay combination is easily determined in the first grant state. It is also possible to create a state in which the second applied state is easily determined and the bell is easily determined in the second applied state.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present example, for example, a first state (for example, the first grant state) in which a privilege can be awarded when a first role (for example, a replay role) is won, and a second role (for example, , Bell) has a second state (for example, a second awarding state) in which a privilege can be given when the winning is achieved, and when the first start condition is satisfied (for example, when the winning lip 3 is won), Until the end condition of 1 is satisfied (for example, until a game of 10 games is played), the control can be performed in the first game state (for example, RT3) in which the winning probability of the first combination is increased, and the second start condition is satisfied. In this case (for example, when a bonus combination is won), the winning probability of the second combination increases until the second end condition is satisfied (for example, a game value exceeding a preset game value number is given). The second game state (for example, a bonus state) can be controlled. The state suggestion display is displayed regardless of the game state. That is, it is possible to create a plurality of states in which the ease with which a privilege is granted is different. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player regarding the grant of the privilege.

[Another example of playability (game specification) (9)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 132 and FIG. 133, another example (No. 9) of the playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 132 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in this example, and FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of a re-lottery mode based on the re-lottery right in this example.

First, with reference to FIG. 132, an example of the flow of the game in this example will be described. As described above, it is possible to control to various game states, but in this example, it is roughly classified into AT (may be ART) during which AT information informing of advantageous stop operation is notified to the player, It is assumed that the non-AT and non-AT are provided.

In the non-AT, when it is neither the mission state nor the CZ (chance zone) state described later, the normal game state is set. In the normal game state during non-AT, a predetermined number of periodic games (for example, 150 games) is subtracted and updated (or may be added and updated) by one for each game, and when the game period reaches the number of periodic games. Move to the mission state. Whether or not the number of periodic games has been reached may be managed based on whether or not the points given as described above have reached specified points, or the number of winnings of a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) or It may be managed by the number of executions of the specific effect.

In the non-AT normal game state, for example, when a rare combination (a combination having a relatively low winning probability) is won, and a predetermined normal combination (eg, replay combination) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times). When the above winnings are consecutively performed, the normal short-drawing lottery is performed. In the normal shortened lottery, it is determined whether or not to reduce the number of periodic games, and when the number of periodic games is determined to be reduced, the number of games actually reduced is determined, and the number of periodic games is reduced accordingly. It As a result, it becomes possible to shift to the mission state earlier than in the case where it is not shortened. Further, for example, when a rare combination (a combination having a relatively low winning probability) is won, a special shortened lottery is performed. In the special shortened lottery, it is determined whether or not to reduce the number of periodic games separately from the regular shortened lottery, and when it is decided to shorten the number of periodic games, the number of games that is actually shortened is determined. The number of cycle games is shortened. Note that the special shortened lottery may be performed even when a predetermined normal combination (for example, a replay combination) is successively won a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) or more. In addition, even when a normal winning combination other than the rare winning combination is won, the normal shortening lottery and the special shortening lottery may be performed with a low probability.

For example, when a specific rare combination is won, it is determined that the regular shortened lottery is won and the number of cycle games of "10 games" is shortened, and the special shortened lottery is also won and the cycle game of "20 games" is won. When it is determined that the number is shortened, the number of periodic games in the game is shortened by "30 games". The special shortened lottery may be added lottery performed only when the normal shortened lottery is won, or may be an independent lottery performed regardless of whether or not the normal shortened lottery is won. In addition, in the normal shortened lottery, not only the number of periodic games to be shortened but also whether or not the special shortened lottery is executed or the number of periodic games shortened by the special shortened lottery may be determined. That is, the result of the normal shortened lottery and the special shortened lottery may be obtained by one lottery.

Further, in the non-AT normal game state, for example, when the rare combination (the combination having a relatively low winning probability) is won, the AT-assigned lottery is performed. In this example, as a basic game characteristic during non-AT, it is determined that when the game of the number of periodic games is exhausted in the normal game state, the state shifts to the mission state, and the state shifts to the CZ state (mission success). If it is not decided to shift to the CZ state (mission failure), it returns to the normal game state, and it is decided to shift to AT in the CZ state (CZ success). When it is not decided to move to AT (CZ failure), it will return to the normal game state, but even in the non-AT normal game state, the expectation of AT shift In order to be able to hold him, the lottery with AT is performed. In this case, AT assignment (AT direct hit) is performed without passing through the mission state or CZ state. However, the AT transfer lottery in the non-AT normal game state has a lower AT transition probability than the AT transfer lottery in the CZ state so as not to impair the basic playability.

In addition, when the rare combination is won in the non-AT normal game state, first, the AT grant lottery is performed, and when the AT grant is determined, the AT state is shifted to and the normal shortened lottery or the special shortened lottery is performed. Otherwise, when the AT grant is not determined, the normal shortened lottery or the special shortened lottery may be performed. Further, the rare combination that is the target for the AT-added lottery and the rare combination that is the target for the normal shortened lottery and the special shortened lottery can be configured as different rare combinations.

As described above, when the game of the number of periodic games is exhausted in the non-AT normal game state, the non-AT mission state is entered. The mission state is configured, for example, as a game state of about 10 games, and the CZ giving lottery is performed. In the CZ-assigned lottery, whether or not to shift to the CZ state may be determined based on an internal winning combination in each game in the mission state, or when the mission state is started, the CZ state is determined in advance. It may be determined whether or not to shift to the state, and in the subsequent mission states, an effect according to the determination result is performed, and whether or not to shift to the CZ state in the final game may be notified. When the mission state is ended, whether or not to shift to the CZ state may be determined according to the game result in the mission state. Also in the mission state, as in the normal game state, when the rare combination is won, the AT-assigned lottery can be performed.

In this example, the success probability of shifting from the mission state to the CZ state (successful mission) is about 40% (two successful out of every five mission states). However, in the present example, when the special shortening lottery is won in the normal game state and the number of cycle games is shortened to reach the number of cycle games Is decided (that is, the success probability is 100%). For example, when it is determined that the special shortening lottery is won when the number of remaining periodic games is 50 in the normal game state and the number of periodic games is shortened by “40 games”, then 10 games are played. When transitioning to the mission state, the success probability remains 40% of the normal rate, but when the number of periodic games is 40 in the normal game state, the special shortened lottery is won and the number of periodic games is "40". If the game is decided to be shortened and the mission state is entered, the success probability fluctuates to 100%. That is, the special shortened lottery has not only the function of shortening the transition period to the mission state, but also the function of changing the advantage degree in the transitioned mission state. The above-described variation of the success probability is merely an example. For example, when the normal success probability is 40%, the success probability may be varied to 80%, or between 50% and 100%. It may be changed to the success probability determined by lottery. That is, any mode can be adopted as long as it changes the success probability to a more advantageous one.

Further, for example, when the mission state is not based on the result of the special shortened lottery, the duration of the mission state is about 10 games, but for example, the shift to the mission state is based on the result of the special shortened lottery. In this case, the degree of advantage in the mission state may be changed by setting the duration of the mission state to be longer than that. In this case, for example, in each game in the mission state, whether or not the CZ-assigned lottery moves to the CZ state is determined based on the internal winning combination, or when the mission state is ended If it is determined whether or not to shift to the CZ state according to the game result, the success probability can be substantially improved.

As described above, when it is decided to shift to the CZ state in the non-AT mission state, the shift to the non-AT CZ state is performed. The CZ state is configured as a game state of, for example, about 10 games, and AT-assigned lottery is performed. In addition, in the AT-winning lottery, in each game in the CZ state, whether to shift to the AT state may be determined based on the internal winning combination. It may be determined whether or not to shift to the state, and in the subsequent CZ state, an effect according to the determination result is performed, and whether or not to shift to the AT state in the final game may be notified. When the CZ state is ended, whether or not to shift to the AT state may be determined according to the game result in the CZ state.

Further, in the present example, in the non-AT, the game state is shifted step by step from the normal game state to the mission state to the CZ state. For example, the mission state is made to function as the CZ state, and in the mission state, It is also possible to perform the AT grant lottery in the CZ state instead of the CZ grant lottery. That is, when the number of periodic games is reached in the normal gaming state, the CZ state is shifted to the mission state, and in the state, when it is decided to shift to the AT state as a result of the AT lottery, the AT state is set. It is also possible to make a transition and to return to the normal gaming state when it is not decided to shift to the AT state. In this way, in this example, the gaming state that is not the advantageous state (AT state) can be composed of the normal state (normal gaming state) and the predetermined state (CZ state), or the normal state (normal gaming state), It can also be configured in a special state (mission state) and a predetermined state (CZ state). Further, these are merely examples, and it is possible to shift to a different state in the middle thereof, or, for example, the gaming state can be configured simply by the normal state (normal gaming state) and the advantageous state (AT state).

In any of the non-AT game states, if it is decided to shift to the AT state as a result of the AT-assigned lottery, first, it shifts to the initial section in AT. In the initial section, for example, the expected value of increase in game value per game is set to about 4, and the initial section is configured as a game state in which about 25 games continue. When the game period of the initial section is exhausted, when the AT directly hits the above-mentioned AT-non-AT to AT-AT, the second section in AT is entered. In other cases, the process moves to the first section in AT. In addition, in each game of the initial section, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the second section based on the internal winning combination. Alternatively, when the initial section is started, it is shifted to the second section. It may be determined whether or not, or when the initial section is finished, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the second section according to the game result in the initial section. In this case, when it is decided to move to the second section, the second section is moved to, and when it is not decided, the first section is moved to. That is, during the initial section, whether or not to set the second section after the end may be determined by, for example, lottery.

For example, in the first section during AT, basically, the information of the stop operation relating to the addition of the game value is not notified, and the preparation state is configured as a production section that continues for about 25 games and the game value of one game. The expected increase value is set to about 4, and the pseudo bonus state is configured as an increase section that continues for about 40 games. When shifting from the initial section to the first section, first, the preparation state of the first section is controlled. In the preparation state of the first section, the first section continuous lottery is performed based on, for example, whether it is determined that a specific batting order is notified when an internal winning combination or a specific replay combination is won.

In the preparation state of the 1st section, when the 1st section continuous lottery is won (for example, the batting order in which the combination of the symbols of “7” is complete is notified), it shifts to the pseudo bonus state of the 1st section. When the game in the pseudo bonus state of the first section is finished, the state is shifted to the preparation state of the first section again, and the first section continuation lottery is performed again in the preparation state of the changed first section. That is, the first section continuous lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not the first section is continued, and also a lottery for determining whether to shift to the pseudo bonus (looping the pseudo bonus). is there. In the preparation state of the first section, when the game period is exhausted without winning the first section continuous lottery, the state is returned to the pullback state during non-AT. The pullback state will be described later. Here, in the first section, at a predetermined time (for example, at the time of winning the lottery with AT, at the start of the initial section, during the initial section, at the end of the initial section, or at the start of the first section), the first section The winning probability of continuous lottery (that is, the continuation rate of the first section) is set, but this continuation rate is lower than the continuation rate of the second section (for example, the maximum probability is 70%, and the continuation rate is less than that). The rate may be set by lottery, or may be set uniformly at 50%). Therefore, from the viewpoint of this continuation rate, the second section is configured as a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first section.

In the pseudo bonus state of the first section, AT promotion lottery is performed. In the case of winning the AT promotion lottery, after the pseudo bonus state of the first section ends, the state shifts to the preparation state of the second section, and in the second section after the transition, at a predetermined time (for example, when winning the AT promotion lottery, At any time such as when the pseudo bonus of one section ends or when the second section starts), the winning probability of the second section continuous lottery (that is, the continuation rate of the second section) is more advantageous than the continuation rate of the first section (For example, the maximum probability is set to 90%, and the continuation rate below that (and at least the continuation rate that is more advantageous than the continuation rate of the first section before the transition) may be randomly set, or may be set uniformly. 80% may be set). In addition, when the AT promotion lottery is won in the pseudo bonus state of the first section, the pseudo bonus state of the second section may be set. Also, the AT promotion lottery may be performed even in the preparation state of the first section. In this case, when the AT promotion lottery is won, the state may be shifted to the preparation state for the second section or may be shifted to the pseudo bonus state for the second section.

In addition, in the AT promotion lottery, for example, in one pseudo bonus state, it is determined that the information on the stop operation is notified when a specific internal winning combination is won or when a specific internal winning combination is won. For example, the lottery result may be won when a special transition condition is satisfied, or a pseudo bonus state of a plurality of times (for example, four times) (in this case, for example, a pseudo bonus as a premise). (It is necessary to loop the state four times or more), the lottery result may be won when the special transition condition is satisfied in any of the pseudo bonus states. That is, it can be configured such that the transition to the second section can be expected regardless of whether or not the first section has continued, and the expectation of transition to the second section increases as the first section continues. It can also be configured to rise.

For example, the second section in the AT is basically not notified of the information on the stop operation relating to the addition of the game value, and is prepared as a production section that continues for about 25 games and the game value per game. The expected increase value is set to about 4, and the pseudo bonus state is configured as an increase section that continues for about 40 games. When shifting from the initial section to the second section, first, the preparation state of the second section is controlled. In the preparation state of the second section, the second section continuous lottery is performed, for example, based on whether it is determined that a specific batting order is notified when an internal winning combination or a specific replay combination is won.

In the preparation state of the second section, if the second section continuous lottery is won (for example, the batting order in which the combination of the symbols of “7” is aligned is notified), the second section is moved to the pseudo bonus state. When the game in the pseudo bonus state of the second section is finished, the state shifts to the second section preparation state again, and the second section continuous lottery is performed again in the transitioned second section preparation state. That is, the second section continuous lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not the second section continues, and also a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus (looping the pseudo bonus). is there. In the preparation state of the second section, when the game period is exhausted without winning the second section continuous lottery, the game state shifts to the non-AT normal game state. In this case, the non-AT pullback state may be set. In the second section, a predetermined time (for example, at the time of winning the lottery with AT, at the start of the initial section, during the initial section, at the end of the initial section, at the start of the second section, etc., transition from the first section. The time is as described above), and the winning probability of the second section continuous lottery (that is, the continuation rate of the second section) is set. Further, as described above, the continuation rate of the second section is set to be relatively higher than the continuation rate of the first section.

As described above, when the first section during AT ends, the state returns to the pullback state during non-AT. The pullback state is configured as a game state of, for example, about three games, and AT pullback lottery is performed. In the AT pull-back lottery, for example, when the winning combination is won in the pulling-back state, the winning combination is won, and when the game period is exhausted without winning the rare combination, the winning combination is non-winning. When the AT pullback lottery is won, the state shifts to the pseudo bonus state of the first section in AT (at that time, the continuation rate of the first section is determined again). On the other hand, if the player does not win the AT pull-back lottery, it shifts to the non-AT normal game state. In addition, when the AT pullback lottery is won, the state may be shifted to the preparation state of the first section during AT. Further, in the AT pull-back lottery, in each game in the pull-back state, it may be determined whether or not it is possible to return to the first section based on the internal winning combination, or when the pull-back state is started in advance. It is determined whether or not it is possible to return to the first section, and in the subsequent pullback state, an effect according to the determination result is performed, and whether or not to return to the first section is notified in the final game Alternatively, when the pullback state is ended, whether to be able to return to the first section may be determined according to the game result in the pullback state.

Next, an example of the re-lottery mode based on the re-lottery right in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 133. In this example, in any of the non-AT and AT game states, for example, when a rare combination (a combination with a relatively low winning probability) is won, and a predetermined normal combination (for example, a replay combination) is predetermined. When the winning is repeated a number of times (for example, 3 times) or more, the re-lottery right granting lottery is performed. Re-lottery right granted If the lottery is won, one re-lottery right is granted. In addition, when the re-lottery right granting lottery is won, a plurality of re-lottery rights may be given depending on the lottery result. Further, the conditions for performing the re-lottery right granting lottery can be performed even when conditions other than the above-mentioned conditions are satisfied. That is, in the present example, if the preset conditions for granting the re-lottery rights are satisfied, all those configured to be able to grant at least one re-lottery right can be adopted. Further, the information indicating the granted re-lottery right shall be held until the re-lottery is actually performed (otherwise, initialization conditions such as setting change are satisfied).

In this example, the re-lottery right is (1) in the non-AT normal game state, when the above-mentioned normal shortened lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, the lottery is re-executed (re-lottery). Be used). That is, in the normal game state during non-AT, if the re-draw lottery right is granted by the time the normal shortened lottery is performed, if the normal shortened lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, The lottery right is consumed and re-lottery is performed for the lottery. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned normal shortened lottery is performed and the lottery is won, the re-lottery right is carried over until the lottery to be re-lottered next is not won. In the re-lottery, the lottery may be performed with the same winning probability as the lottery probability in the already-executed normal shortened lottery, or with a higher winning probability than the lottery probability in the already-executed normal shortened lottery. The lottery may be carried out, or the lottery may be carried out with a winning probability lower than the winning probability in the already-executed normal shortened lottery. When the regular shortened lottery is won by the re-lottery, the number of periodic games is shortened by the determined number of games, as in the normal regular shortened lottery.

In this example, in the non-AT normal game state, the special lottery and AT-assigned lottery described above are not targets of re-lottery, but these are targets of re-lottery as in the case of normal shortened lottery. You can also In addition, in this way, when there are a plurality of lottery targets for re-lottery in the same game state, the target of re-lottery is determined according to the relative winning probability, the lottery frequency, the lottery order, the degree of advantage of the player, etc. The priority may be set for the lottery.

Further, in this example, the re-lottery right is (2) when the above-mentioned CZ-assigned lottery is performed in the mission state during non-AT, but the lottery is not won, the lottery is re-executed. It is used for lottery). That is, in the non-AT mission state, if the re-lottery right is granted by the time the CZ-assigned lottery is performed, if the CZ-assigned lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is performed. The right is consumed, and the lottery is re-lotted for the lottery. On the other hand, when the above-described CZ-assigned lottery is performed and the lottery is won, the re-lottery right is carried over until the lottery to be re-lottered next is not won. At the time of the re-lottery, the lottery may be performed with the same winning probability as the lottery probability in the already-executed CZ-assigned lottery, or with a lottery probability higher than the lottery probability in the already-executed CZ-assigned lottery. The lottery may be performed, or the lottery may be performed with a winning probability lower than the lottery probability in the already-executed CZ-assigned lottery. When the CZ-assigned lottery is won by the re-lottery, the state shifts to the CZ state as in the case of the normal CZ-assigned lottery. Further, the re-lottery right may function as a right to redo the mission state itself. Specifically, if the specified number of games is exhausted in the CZ-assigned lottery in the original mission state and the specified number of games has been exhausted, if the re-lottery right is granted, the mission state can be performed again from the first game. You may

In the present example, the re-lottery right is (3) when the above-mentioned AT-assigned lottery is performed in the non-AT CZ state, but the lottery is not won, the lottery is re-executed. It is used for lottery. That is, in the non-AT CZ state, if the re-lottery right is granted by the time the AT-assigned lottery is performed, if the AT-assigned lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is performed. The right is consumed, and the lottery is re-lotted for the lottery. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned AT-assigned lottery is performed and the lottery is won, the re-lottery right is carried over until the lottery to be re-lottered next is not won. At the time of re-lottery, the lottery may be performed with the same winning probability as the lottery probability in the AT granted lottery already performed, or with a lottery probability higher than the lottery probability in the already given AT granted lottery. The lottery may be performed, or the lottery may be performed with a winning probability lower than the probability of lottery in the AT-assigned lottery that has already been performed. When the lottery for AT grant is won by the re-lottery, as in the normal lottery for AT grant, the process shifts to the initial section during AT. In addition, for example, in the case where the transfer lottery to the second section is performed in the initial section during AT, such transfer lottery can also be the target of the re-lottery.

In addition, in the non-AT CZ state, the winning probability of the AT-assigned lottery may be changed during the state (that is, a plurality of situations with different AT-assigned expectation levels may be created). For example, specifications for performing an increase in the number of times of execution of AT-winning lottery (number of times of winning/decision) in the first to ninth games, and performing AT-winning lottery for the number of times in the final game, and an AT winning expectation of “10%”. , “20%”, “40%”, “80%”, “100%”, etc. are provided, and the AT winning expectation is increased in the 1st to 9th games, and the final game is set to the current stage. If the specification is such that the AT grant lottery is performed with the corresponding AT win expectation, it is possible to create a plurality of situations with different AT grant expectations.

Then, when the AT grant lottery in the initial CZ state is non-winning (CZ failure) and the re-lottery is performed, at least the AT grant expectation level is not lower than the situation before the failure. Good. For example, if the number of winning determinations in the initial CZ state increases from three to fail, the number of winning determinations in the re-lottery may be set to three. Alternatively, the number of times of winning determination may be re-lottered with the lower limit being three times, and the number of times of winning determination may be re-determined three times or more, and then the re-lottery may be performed. Further, for example, when the AT winning expectation in the initial CZ state rises to “40%” and then fails, the AT winning expectation at the time of re-lottery may be set to “40%”. Alternatively, the AT winning expectation degree may be re-lottered with “40%” as the lower limit, and the AT lottery expectation degree of “40%” or more may be re-determined, and then the re-lottery may be performed.

Further, the re-lottery right may function as a right to redo the CZ state itself. Specifically, when the specified number of games has been exhausted by the AT-winning lottery in the initial CZ state (for example, in the final game described above), the re-lottering right is given, The CZ state may be set again from the first game. In this case, for example, as in the above-mentioned example, when the winning determination number in the initial CZ state increases from three times and fails, the winning determination number starts from three times in the re-starting CZ state and 1 In the ninth game, the lottery for increasing the number of winning/decision determinations may be further performed, and then the AT-assigned lottery may be performed in the final game. Further, for example, when the AT winning expectation in the initial CZ state has risen to "40%" and fails, as in the above example, the AT winning expectation is "40%" in the redone CZ state. From the first game to the ninth game, the AT winning lottery may be further increased, and the AT-added lottery may be executed in the final game. If the CZ state is redone, the state in which the expectation of AT grant in the CZ state is high will return to a state in which the expectation of AT is relatively low (for example, in the above example, the number of winning determinations or the expected AT winning rate). However, if this is done, such a feeling of loss can be suppressed. In addition, since the re-lottery right allows re-lottery to be performed in a mode with a higher degree of expectation, the interest of the player can be further improved.

In the present example, the re-lottery right is (4) If the above-mentioned AT promotion lottery is performed in the first section of the AT, but the lottery is not won, the lottery is re-executed. It is used for lottery. In other words, in the first section during AT, if the re-lottery right is granted by the time the AT promotion lottery is performed, if the AT promotion lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is performed. The right is consumed, and the lottery is re-lotted for the lottery. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned AT promotion lottery is performed and the lottery is won, the re-lottery right is carried over until the lottery to be re-lottered next is not won. At the time of the re-lottery, the lottery may be performed with the same winning probability as the lottery probability in the AT promotion lottery that has already been performed, or with a lottery probability higher than the lottery probability in the AT promotion lottery that has already been performed. The lottery may be carried out, or the lottery may be carried out with a winning probability lower than the drawing probability in the AT promotion lottery that has already been carried out. When the AT promotion lottery is won by the re-lottery, as in the case of the normal AT promotion lottery, the second section in the AT is moved to.

In this example, in the first section during AT, the above-mentioned first section continuous lottery is not targeted for re-lottery, but it can be targeted for re-lottery as in the case of AT promotion lottery. .. Further, in the present example, the second section continuous lottery described above is not the target of re-lottery in the second section during AT, but this can also be the target of re-lottery.

Further, in this example, the re-lottery right is (5) in the pull-back state during non-AT, when the above-mentioned AT pull-back lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, the lottery is re-executed (re-run). It is used for lottery. That is, in the pull-back state during non-AT, if the re-draw lottery right is granted by the time the AT pull-back lottery is performed, if the AT pull-back lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is performed. The right is consumed, and the lottery is re-lotted for the lottery. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned AT pullback lottery is performed and the lottery is won, the re-lottery right is carried over until the lottery to be re-lottered next is not won. In the re-lottery, the lottery may be performed with the same winning probability as the lottery probability in the AT pull-back lottery already performed, or with a lottery probability higher than the lottery probability in the already-drawn pull-back promotion lottery. The lottery may be carried out, or the lottery may be carried out with a winning probability lower than the drawing probability in the AT pullback lottery that has already been carried out. When the AT pull-back lottery is won by the re-lottery, like the normal AT pull-back lottery, the process moves to the first section in AT. Further, the re-lottery right may function as a right to redo the pullback state itself. Specifically, if the AT pull-back lottery in the original pull-back state is non-winning and the specified number of games is exhausted, and if the re-lottery right is granted, the pull-back state can be restarted from the first game. You may

Note that the re-lottery in this example is a re-drawing of the lottery to the last, and, for example, when the re-lottery right is granted, the lottery result of the lottery targeted for re-lottery is not confirmed as winning. As described above, the lottery may be substantially determined by causing the lottery to be performed with a higher winning probability than the lottery probability in the already performed lottery.

The conditions for performing various lottery in this example (similarly in other examples) are not limited to those described above. That is, in playing a game, for example, the type of internal winning combination in one or a plurality of games, the procedure of the stop operation, the type of winning combination, or a combination thereof, in relation to the game result obtained by the player. The one or more conditions that can be set can be appropriately set as the execution conditions in each lottery.

Further, when the re-lottery right is granted, if the lottery to be re-lottered is non-win, the player may be allowed to select whether or not to perform the re-lottery. For example, when the normal shortened lottery is not won in the non-AT normal game state, when the number of remaining games of the number of periodic games is small, it is selected not to use the re-lottery right, and then the non-AT When the mission state or the CZ state is entered, if the re-lottery right is selected in the CZ-assigned lottery or the AT-assigned lottery, the probability of starting the AT state may be increased. In addition, for example, when it is not possible to win the AT promotion lottery in the first section of the AT, if the continuation rate set in the first section of the AT can be estimated to be high, the re-lottery right is used. If you choose not to do so, and then when the first section in AT ends and you are in a non-AT pullback state, you can choose to use the re-lottery right in AT pullback lottery, rather it is in AT In some cases, the game period can be extended. That is, it is possible to allow the player to select a time when the granted re-lottery right is used. In this case, for example, in a game in which re-lottery can be executed, re-lottery is not performed when a player plays a game with two cards, and re-lottery is performed when a game is played with three cards. If the player makes a right first stop, re-lottery is not performed, if the player makes a left first stop, re-lottery is performed, and so on. Whether or not to use the re-lottery right may be appropriately selectable in a manner linked to the game operation. Further, in this case, in the game in which the re-lottery can be executed, so that the player can appropriately select whether or not to perform the re-lottery, the mode of the game operation in which the re-lottery is performed and the re-lottery are not performed. The mode of the game operation (or at least one mode of the game operation) may be notified.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present example, it is possible to execute a plurality of different lottery types (for example, various types of lottery types shown in FIG. 132) which are advantageous to the player, and a specific right (for example, a re-lottery right). It is possible to give. Then, in the case where the specific right is granted, and if any of the lottery is executed and the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is executed for the lottery. That is, no matter which lottery is performed, if the specific right is given, the player can have a sense of expectation including re-lottery. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of different lotteries that are advantageous to the player, to keep the player's expectation regardless of which lottery is performed, and to improve the interest of the player.

Note that the lottery targeted for re-lottery includes, for example, a cycle period for shifting from a normal state (for example, a non-AT normal game state) to a predetermined state (for example, a non-AT mission state and a CZ state). It is possible to include a normal shortened lottery, which is a shortened lottery, and an AT-assigned lottery, which is a transition lottery for shifting from a predetermined state to an advantageous state (for example, during AT). That is, even when the state or the lottery target is different, the re-lottery based on the specific right can be executed. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be continued and the player's interest can be improved regardless of the game situation.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the present example, it is possible to execute a specific lottery (for example, AT-assigned lottery) for shifting from a predetermined state (for example, CZ state in non-AT) to an advantageous state (for example, AT). Yes, the specific lottery is a lottery targeted for re-lottery. Here, in the predetermined state, for example, a first situation in which the expectation of winning a specific lottery is low (for example, a situation in which the number of winning determinations is small or the AT expectation of winning is low) is specified more than in the first situation. There is a second situation where there is a high expectation of winning the lottery (for example, there are a lot of winning judgments or a situation where the AT expectation of winning is high), and the lottery is performed again when the predetermined state is the second situation. In this case, in the re-lottery, the situation in which the degree of expectation of winning the specific lottery is lower than that in the second situation is not set. That is, the degree of expectation in the predetermined state is inherited even in the re-lottery. As a result, in the re-lottery, the expectation of the lottery targeted by the lottery is maintained, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present example, the normal shortened lottery, which is a shortened lottery of the cycle period for shifting from the normal state (for example, the non-AT normal game state) to the special state (for example, the non-AT mission state) And the special shortened lottery can be executed, and the predetermined lottery (for example, CZ-applied lottery) for shifting from the special state to the predetermined state (for example, the CZ state in the non-AT) can be executed. Here, the normal shortened lottery and the predetermined lottery are lottery targeted for re-lottery. In addition, when a special state is entered depending on the lottery result of the special shortened lottery, the special state is always entered. As a result, it is possible to make various expectations of transition to a predetermined game state (for example, a predetermined state) by a plurality of different lotteries, and to further enhance the interest of the player. Further, even if the state or the lottery target is different, the re-lottery based on the specific right can be executed. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be continued and the player's interest can be improved regardless of the game situation.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the present example, in the normal state (for example, the normal gaming state in the non-AT or the CZ state), the AT-assigned lottery for shifting to the advantageous state (for example, AT) can be executed. At the same time, in a specific state (for example, a pullback state during non-AT) that shifts after the end of the advantageous state, the AT pullback lottery for shifting to the advantageous state again can be executed. Then, the AT-assigned lottery and the AT pull-back lottery are the lottery targeted for the re-lottery. As a result, it is possible to make various expectations of transition to a predetermined game state (for example, an advantageous state) by a plurality of different lotteries, and to further enhance the interest of the player.

The lottery targeted for re-lottery includes, for example, a transition lottery for shifting from a first advantageous state (for example, a first section in AT) to a second advantageous state (for example, a second section in AT). Can be configured to include the AT promotion lottery. That is, even when the state or the lottery target is different, the re-lottery based on the specific right can be executed. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be continued and the player's interest can be improved regardless of the game situation.

Further, even when re-lottery is executed, the lottery targeted may not be won. As a result, since the player plays the game with a feeling of tension both during the lottery and during the re-lottery, the interest in the re-lottery can be further improved.

[Another example of playability (game specifications) (10)]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 134 to 137, another example (No. 10) of the playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 134 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in this example, and FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of AT granting probability setting and privilege-granting lottery of an advantageous right in this example, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a privilege at the time of granting an advantageous right, and FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example of an effect at the time of giving an advantageous right according to the present example.

First, with reference to FIG. 134, an example of the flow of the game in this example will be described. As described above, it is possible to control to various game states, but in this example, it is roughly classified into AT (may be ART) during which AT information informing of advantageous stop operation is notified to the player, It is assumed that the non-AT and non-AT are provided.

During non-AT, it is basically in a normal game state. In the normal game state during non-AT, any one of a plurality of AT lottery tables (for example, table A to table C described later) provided at the time of AT end, setting change, or when other setting conditions are satisfied. The AT lottery table is set (grant probability setting). In the AT lottery table, the AT winning probability (provision probability) is defined every predetermined period (for example, every 40 games). Then, in the normal game state during non-AT, the AT grant lottery (initial period grant lottery) is performed based on the current game period and the AT winning probability defined in the set AT lottery table. When the AT lottery is performed, a precursory period is set according to whether or not a lottery is won, and after the precursory period has elapsed, if it is determined that the AT is to be imparted, the process proceeds to the initial section of the AT. Further, in the non-AT normal game state, the right grant lottery is performed when a specific grant condition is satisfied. In the right grant lottery, it is determined whether or not to grant the advantage right. The details will be described later.

The initial section during AT is composed of, for example, a first initial section in which the expected value of the game value per game is increased to about 6 cards, the first initial section lasting about 45 games, and the second initial section continuing about 30 games. To be done. Here, when transitioning from the non-AT normal game state to the AT initial section, if it is not decided to shift to the first section after the end of the initial section (it is decided to shift to the CZ state). If it is decided to move to the first section after the end of the initial section, it becomes the second initial section.

In the first initial section, for example, when a rare combination (a combination with a relatively low winning probability) is won, and a predetermined normal combination (for example, a replay combination) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) or more. The AT promotion lottery may be performed when the lottery is won, and may be shifted to the second initial section when the AT promotion lottery is won. In this case, the second initial section shifted from the first initial section may continue for about 30 games as described above (that is, the period is shortened when viewed from the first initial section). Similar to the initial section, about 45 games may be continued.

In addition, the AT initial section is set to have an expected value of increase in game value per game of about 6 without providing a distinction between the first initial section and the second initial section, for example, and continues for about 40 games uniformly. It can also be configured as a playing state. In this case, when it is not decided to shift to the first zone after the end of the initial zone when shifting from the normal game state in the non-AT to the initial zone in AT, for example, the above-mentioned AT promotion lottery A lottery similar to the above is performed, and when the lottery is won, the first section is moved to after the end of the initial section, and when the lottery is not won, the state is changed to the CZ state after the end of the initial section. That is, in the initial section, the transition lottery for determining which state to transition to after the end may be performed. In any case, when the game is played for a preset game period in the initial section, the initial section ends and the state after the end (for example, the first section or the CZ state) is decided. (End state setting).

If it is determined to shift to the non-AT CZ state after the end of the initial period in AT, the non-AT CZ state is shifted. The CZ state in the non-AT is a state in which although it is in the non-AT, it is determined whether or not to shift to the first section or the second section in the AT after the end of the initial section in the AT. A standby state in which the transition to these states is on standby, a preparation state in which transition to these states is prepared, or (a series of the initial section in AT and the first section or the second section in AT It is a gaming state that functions as an extension determination state in which it is determined whether or not to extend (continue) the AT state (when viewed as an AT section).

The non-AT CZ state continues, for example, for about 40 games, and although the information of the stop operation is not notified, it is configured as a gaming state in which it is determined whether or not to shift to the first section or the second section during AT. It In the non-AT CZ state, for example, when a predetermined normal combination (for example, a replay combination) is won, the first section-assigned lottery is performed. In the non-AT CZ state, when the first section grant lottery is won, the process shifts to the first section in AT (CZ success). That is, the AT state is extended. In addition, you may make it shift to the 1st section from the game next to the game which won the 1st section grant lottery in the CZ state in non-AT, or the specified number of games in the CZ state in non-AT (for example, , About 40 games) may be played, the result of the first section-granting lottery (or the second section-granting lottery to be described later) may be finally notified, and the next game may be started.

In the non-AT CZ state, for example, when the specified number of games are played without winning the first section granting lottery, or when winning the rare combination, the second section granting lottery is performed. .. In the non-AT CZ state, when the second section grant lottery is won, the second section in AT is transitioned (CZ failure/second section transition). That is, the AT state is extended. Further, in the non-AT CZ state, when the specified number of games are played without winning either the first section grant lottery or the second section grant lottery, the non-AT normal game state is entered. Shift (CZ failure, second segment non-shift).

If it is decided to shift to the first section in AT after the end of the initial section in AT, or if the first section-assigned lottery is won in the non-AT CZ state, Shift to the first section. For example, the first section in the AT is configured as a gaming state in which the expected value of increase in the gaming value per game is set to about 6 cards, and about 8 games continue per set. In the first section during AT, the first section continuous lottery is performed. In the first section continuous lottery, for example, when a specific normal combination (for example, a specific replay combination) is won and a specific symbol combination (for example, special symbol alignment) is displayed, or a freeze effect is performed. Is determined, and it is determined to continue the first section when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed during the freeze effect. That is, it is determined that the first section is continued (extended) to the next set when the first section continuous lottery is won.

In the first section in AT, the first section continuous lottery is continuously won, and, for example, when 30 sets of games have been played (continuation for a predetermined period), the process moves to the ED (ending) section in AT. The ED section in AT is configured as a gaming state (ending state) in which the expected value of increase in the gaming value per game is set to about 6, for example, and continues for about 40 games. In addition, in the first section during AT, if the game of the set is exhausted by the first section continuous lottery without shifting to the ED section (discontinued for a predetermined period), and the ED section during AT When a specified number of games (for example, about 40 games) have been played in, the AT state ends, and the game state shifts to the non-AT normal game state.

By the way, since the first section in AT is short with 8 games per set, if the player does not win the 1st section continuous lottery in 8 games, if the player immediately shifts to the non-AT normal game state, the increase section is short. There is a risk that the player will be dissatisfied with the fact that he is not finished and there is no chance of returning. Therefore, if the first section continuous lottery is not won in the eight games of the first section in AT, the drawing is returned to the withdrawal CZ state (not shown) for a predetermined period (for example, 20 games) thereafter. In the CZ state, the first-section continuous lottery may be continuously performed (or the first-section-assigned lottery may be performed). Then, when the first section continuous lottery is won in the pull-back CZ state (or the first section-applied lottery is won), the pull-back CZ state is ended in the game, and the first section in AT is shifted. At this time, the same effect (freeze effect, etc.) as in the case where the continuous lottery is won in the first section (or when the awarded lottery is won in the CZ state) may be performed to give a sense of unity. Alternatively, different effects may be performed to give a variety of effects. On the other hand, if the predetermined end condition (for example, the end of 20 games) is satisfied in the pull-back CZ state without winning the first section continuous lottery (or without winning the first section granting lottery), the non-AT It shifts to the normal game state. In addition, when the pullback CZ state is provided, the pullback CZ state is an advantageous section and is included in a series of advantageous sections. Therefore, when the pullback CZ state is ended, the advantageous section ends and it is not advantageous. It suffices to shift to the section and along with this, all AT-related parameters are initialized.

In the pull-back CZ state, the first section continuous lottery may be performed under the same conditions as the first section in the AT, or the first section continuous lottery may be performed under different conditions. Alternatively, the first section grant lottery may be performed under the same condition as the CZ state during non-AT, or the first section grant lottery may be performed under different conditions. When the first section in AT ends without winning the first section continuous lottery without providing a dedicated state as the pull-back CZ state, the state shifts again to the non-AT CZ state shown in FIG. It may be allowed to. In this case, since the same data can be used as the AT lottery data in both the continuation CZ and the initial hit CZ, the capacity of the main program can be reduced.

Further, the pull-back CZ state may be "non-AT", or "a state in which although AT is occurring, the frequency of navigation occurrence is suppressed more than during normal AT". The same applies to the CZ state described above. In the case of the latter state, if the net increase per game is suppressed at least as compared to during normal AT such as decrease in game value, maintenance of current state or slight increase, how often the navigation occurs It is also possible to set. In this example, the normal net AT is set to 6 high net additions per game, so if the net high net addition state is set to the middle of CZ, in order to entertain the player whether or not to continue during the CZ period due to the payout design. It becomes difficult to secure a sufficient game period. Therefore, during the CZ, it is desirable to suppress the frequency of occurrence of navigation and reduce the game value, maintain the current state or slightly increase it. However, when the pullback CZ state is set for a short period (for example, the pullback final challenge of about 1 to 3 games), the high net increase section equivalent to that during the normal AT may be used.

In the non-AT CZ state, when the second section-granting lottery is won, the process shifts to the second section in AT. In the second section of the AT, for example, the expected increase value of the game value per game is set to about 6, and the above-described normal limit process (payout number) is activated until the AT state ends (or It may be until the maximum value of the number of payouts reaches a preset predetermined value within 2400). In this case, at least the initial section in AT, the CZ state in non-AT, and the second section in AT are managed as a series of advantageous sections described above. In the second section of the AT, if the above-mentioned normal limit process (the number of payouts) is activated (or if the maximum value of the number of payouts reaches a preset predetermined value within 2400 sheets), the AT The state ends, and the game state shifts to the non-AT normal game state.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this example, the player basically starts the game from the non-AT normal game state, and wins the initial section grant lottery according to the set grant probability, and wins the AT. Aim to move to the initial section. Then, in the CZ state in the initial section in AT or in the non-AT thereafter, it is aimed to extend the AT state by shifting to the first section or the second section in AT. Therefore, in the gaming machine of this example, the level of the probability of grant, which is the degree of expectation of shifting from the non-AT state (the normal gaming state thereof) to the AT state (initial section), is of great concern to the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136, an example of setting the AT assignment probability in this example will be described. First, as shown in “an example of the in-table giving probability” in FIG. 136, in this example, as the giving probability, for example, “3%”, “10%”, “20%”, “33%”, “ It is assumed that “50%”, “75%”, “100%” and “100%+AT” are provided. Here, in the AT lottery table (for example, table A to table C shown in FIG. 135) in this example, one of the above-mentioned grant probabilities is set for every 40 games (predetermined period). To do.

Note that, in the initial section granting lottery in this example, each time a predetermined period of time elapses, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to shift to the initial section according to the granting probability corresponding to the predetermined period of time. The lottery may be performed to determine whether to shift to the initial section. In the former case, for example, when the table A is set, when the number of games after the setting is 41st game, there is a 3% probability of winning the initial section giving lottery, and a 97% probability of initial winning. The lottery will not be won in the section-assigned lottery (probability "3%"). In addition, when the number of games after the setting is the 81st game, there is a 20% chance of winning the initial section giving lottery, and a 80% chance of not winning the initial section giving lottery (the giving probability "20%. )). In addition, for example, when the table B is set, when the number of games after the setting is 41st game, there is a 20% chance of winning the initial section giving lottery, and a probability of 80% that the initial section is given. The lottery will be non-winning (probability "20%"). In addition, when the number of games after the setting is the 81st game, there is a 3% chance of winning the initial section giving lottery, and a 97% chance of not winning the initial section giving lottery (the giving probability "3% )).

On the other hand, in the latter case, for example, when the table A is set and the number of games after the setting is 41 to 80 games, the total expected value to be won in the initial section giving lottery during this period is 3% (provision probability “3%”), and when the number of games after the setting is 81 to 120 games, the total expected value of winning the initial section grant lottery during this period is 20% (grant. Probability "20%"). In addition, for example, when the table B is set and the number of games after the setting is 41 to 80 games, the total expected value of winning the initial section giving lottery in this period is 20% ( When the number of games after the setting is 81 to 120, the total expected value of winning the initial section grant lottery is 3% (grant probability “3%”). )). In any case, the above-mentioned grant probability (that is, the degree of expectation of AT grant) is "3%", "10%", "20%", as shown in "Example of grant probability in table" in FIG. “33%”, “50%”, “75%”, “100%” increase in that order. It should be noted that “100%+AT” indicates that it is determined in advance to shift to the first zone without shifting to the CZ state after the end of the initial zone. That is, although the grant probability of "100%" is definitely determined to shift to the initial section, the privilege of shifting to the CZ state in principle after the end of the initial section is granted, whereas the grant probability of "100%+AT". Is a privilege with a different degree of advantage in that the privilege to switch to the initial section is confirmed and the privilege to switch to the first section after the end of the initial section is given.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135 and FIG. 136, an example of the right grant lottery of the advantageous right and the example of the privilege at the time of granting the right will be described. As described above, in the present example, in the normal gaming state during non-AT, the right grant lottery for determining whether or not to grant the advantage right is performed. The lottery for granting rights is, for example, when a rare combination (a combination having a relatively low winning probability) is won, and when a predetermined normal combination (for example, a replay combination) is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) or more in succession. However, in this example, when 40 games (predetermined period) are set as one unit instead of or together with this, for example, three units (this number of units) Is random) The right grant lottery is always performed at least once within the 120 games (specific period) which is the game period of ().

In the example of the right granting lottery shown in FIG. 135, for example, for every predetermined time period, it is determined whether or not to perform the right granting lottery in the next predetermined time period. The details will be described below. First, in the example of the right granting lottery shown in FIG. 135, it is assumed that the table A is set as the AT lottery table.

When the number of games is 1 to 40, the period is managed as “first zone” because it is the first predetermined period of the specific period. At this time, whether or not to grant the lottery at any time in the "zone 1st time" (for example, at the start or end of the final game, or at the start or end of the first or midway game) Is decided. In this example, in the “first time zone”, it is decided that the right grant lottery will be performed in the next zone (next predetermined period). Therefore, in the next predetermined period in which the number of games is 41 to 80, at an arbitrary time (for example, midway after the precursor period has elapsed, at the start or end of the final game, or at the start of the first game, At the end, etc.), a lottery for granting rights will be conducted. It should be noted that in the right grant lottery, the advantageous right is awarded with a predetermined probability, but the advantage right may be granted, but in some cases, the advantage right may not be awarded. Further, when it is decided to perform the lottery for granting rights, the information indicating "the number of times" of the zone is initialized regardless of whether or not the advantageous right is finally granted. Therefore, in this case, the period in which the number of games is 41 to 80 is the first predetermined period of the specific period, and is managed as the "first zone".

It is not decided to perform the lottery on the right when the number of games is 41 to 80, and the lottery is performed on the second when the number of games is 81 to 120. If not decided, in the "third time zone" in which the number of games is 121 to 160, it is always decided to perform the lottery for granting rights. Therefore, in the next predetermined period in which the number of games is 161 to 200, the right grant lottery is performed at any time. Thus, in this example, the right grant lottery is always performed at least once within the specific period. Note that the right grant lottery may be performed “at a high probability” instead of “always”. Further, in this example, the specific period is configured to be a game period of three units when the predetermined period is one unit, but it may be configured to be the same game period as the predetermined period. However, a specific period (for example, 100 games) may be managed independently of the predetermined period. The setting of these periods can be appropriately modified and set according to the specifications.

Further, in the present example, in the target predetermined period, it is determined whether or not the right grant lottery is performed in the next predetermined period, but whether or not the right grant lottery is performed in the target predetermined period. It may be determined whether or not the right grant lottery is performed in a predetermined period after the next one. In addition, for example, when deciding whether or not to perform the lottery on the basis of the winning of the rare combination and the normal combination, for each of the “first zone”, the “second zone”, and the “third zone”, The winning probabilities may be different. In this case, the winning probability may increase as the zone progresses. In addition, in the case of lottery for grant of rights, the winning probabilities may be different for each of the “first zone”, the “second zone”, and the “third zone”. In this case, the winning probability may increase as the zone progresses. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation, even when the lottery for granting rights is not performed easily.

When the advantage right is granted as a result of the right grant lottery, for example, the following privilege is granted. In the example of the privilege at the time of granting the right shown in FIG. 136, when the privilege to be granted is granted, for example, if the grant probability set in the predetermined period is “20%”, the grant is more advantageous than that. The probability is changed to "50%". Further, for example, if the grant probability set in the predetermined period is "33%", it is changed to "75%" which is a more advantageous grant probability. For example, if the grant probability set in the predetermined period is "3%", it is changed to "20%", which is a more advantageous grant probability. That is, when a plurality of stages of grant probabilities are provided, the stage is increased when the advantage right is granted. It should be noted that in the present example, the granting probability is increased by two steps when the advantageous right is granted, but the increasing rate may be one step or three or more steps. Further, the step of increasing the number may be determined by lottery.

Further, when the grant probability is "100%", it can be increased to "100%+AT" for one step, but a predetermined privilege corresponding to the remaining one step may be granted. Good. In this case, for example, a predetermined privilege such as extension of the game period of the initial section, extension of the game section of the first section, easy continuation of the first section, and easy transition to the second section are given. can do. Further, when the grant probability is “100%+AT”, the level of the grant probability cannot be increased. Therefore, similar to the above, a predetermined privilege corresponding to two levels may be granted, for example, The advantage right may be held (stocked) until the next opportunity to use the advantage right arrives.

Further, the mode in which the privilege is given to the player by the advantage right is not limited to the above-described mode. For example, when the advantage right is given, the AT lottery table may be changed to a more advantageous table than the current table, so that the giving probability may be changed to a more advantageous one. Alternatively, the number of ceiling games (for example, the game period until the grant probability “100%” (or “100%+AT”) is set) is shortened so that the grant probability is changed to a more advantageous one. You may That is, as a result, any mode can be adopted as long as it is a mode in which the giving probability is changed to a more advantageous one. In addition, if the player is advantageous as a result of the grant of the advantage right, for example, the right to shift to the AT state is directly granted, the right to extend the AT state is directly granted, and various other types. It is also possible to grant the privilege of.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, an example of an effect example at the time of granting an advantageous right will be described. FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating the flow of the effect displayed on the display device 11, for example.

First, when it is determined as a result of the lottery for granting a right to give an advantage, a production is performed to suggest to the player that the right to give an advantage is granted (at the time of determining the right). In the example of FIG. 137, this is indicated by displaying, for example, “right GET!”. It should be noted that, when the display is made, the advantage right may be granted by constantly displaying, for example, a specific icon or the like, until an effect that suggests to the player that the advantage right is used is performed. It may be suggested by the player.

In the effect of the first aspect, a specific effect that is a continuous effect for notifying the lottery result of the initial section-assigned lottery is started following the effect when the right grant is determined or after the lapse of several games. In the specific effect, the precursor effect is first started. Then, an effect that suggests to the player that the advantageous right is used at a predetermined time during execution of the specific effect (for example, at the end of the omen effect) is performed. In one example of FIG. 137, such a fact is indicated by a display such as “Right is activated!”. That is, in the specific effect of the first aspect, it is suggested that the giving probability in the initial lot giving lottery this time was changed to an advantageous one during the execution of the specific effect. Then, in the final stage of the specific effect, the lottery result of the lottery in the initial section is notified. In an example of FIG. 137, for example, a display such as “WIN” indicates that the lottery result of the initial-section-assigned lottery is winning (AT is given). Then, when the specific effect ends, the game state shifts to the initial section during AT. In addition, when an effect that suggests to the player that the advantage right is used is performed, the effect mode after that is an effect mode with a higher degree of expectation for the player, as compared with the case where it is not performed. You can do this.

Further, in the effect of the second aspect, following the effect at the time of determining the right grant, or after a lapse of several games, an effect is first suggested to the player that the advantageous right is used. In one example of FIG. 137, such a fact is indicated by a display such as “Right is activated!”. Subsequently, a specific effect, which is a continuous effect for informing the lottery result of the initial section granting lottery, is started. In the specific effect, the precursor effect is first started. That is, in the specific effect of the second aspect, it is suggested that the giving probability in the initial lot giving lottery this time was changed to an advantageous one before the start of the specific effect. Then, in the final stage of the specific effect, the lottery result of the lottery in the initial section is notified. In an example of FIG. 137, for example, a display such as “WIN” indicates that the lottery result of the initial-section-assigned lottery is winning (AT is given). Then, when the specific effect ends, the game state shifts to the initial section during AT. In addition, when an effect that suggests to the player that the advantage right is used is performed, the effect mode after that is an effect mode with a higher degree of expectation for the player, as compared with the case where it is not performed. You can do this.

Further, in the effect of the third aspect, the effect at the time of determining the right grant is performed, but thereafter, the effect that suggests to the player that the advantageous right is used is not performed, and the specific effect is performed. That is, in the specific effect of the third aspect, it is not suggested that the giving probability in the present initial section giving lottery has been changed to an advantageous one. Even in this case, the lottery result of the lottery for the initial section is notified in the final stage of the specific effect. In an example of FIG. 137, for example, a display such as “WIN” indicates that the lottery result of the initial-section-assigned lottery is winning (AT is given). Then, when the specific effect ends, the game state shifts to the initial section during AT.

In the present example, when the advantage right is given, for example, any of the above-described effects of the first to third aspects can be executed. It should be noted that which of the first to third aspects the effect is to be performed may be randomly determined or may be determined according to a predetermined condition. For example, if the changed giving probability is less than “50%”, the effect of the first aspect is more likely to be performed than the effect of other aspects, and if the changed giving probability is “50%” or more, It is also possible to make it possible to estimate the expected degree of the application probability depending on which aspect of the effect is performed, such as making the effect of the second aspect easier than the effect of the other aspect. Further, for example, if the giving probability is “100%+AT”, the effect of the third aspect can be more easily performed than the effect of the other aspects. In this case, if the effect of the third aspect is performed, not only is it determined that the lottery result of the lottery for initial period grant is a win, and even after the transition to the first segment is confirmed after the end of the initial period. It may be possible to suggest.

Further, as described above, in the present example, when the advantage right is granted when the grant probability is “100%” or “100%+AT”, a predetermined privilege is further granted. However, in this case, the effect of the third aspect may be necessarily performed. With this, when the effect of the third aspect is performed, it is possible to indicate that it has been confirmed that the AT has been given and that the predetermined privilege has been given.

It is also possible to provide the predetermined privilege in response to the grant probability or separately from the grant probability, on condition that it is decided to perform the effect of the third aspect. For example, when it is determined that the AT is given when the giving probability is less than “50%” (or conversely, when it is “50%” or more), the effect of the third aspect A predetermined privilege is given when it is decided to perform, while a predetermined privilege is not given when it is decided to perform the effects of the first aspect and the second aspect. You can Further, if it is determined that the AT is granted regardless of which grant probability, and if it is determined that the effect of the third aspect is performed, the predetermined privilege is given. On the other hand, when it is decided to perform the effects of the first aspect and the second aspect, it is possible to prevent the predetermined privilege from being given. That is, when the effect of the third aspect is performed, a predetermined privilege can be given during AT. In this case, the predetermined privilege is not limited to the above-described one, and may be, for example, a performance privilege such as a story effect that is not normally displayed during AT. That is, the predetermined privilege may be any privilege as long as it can improve the interest of the player.

Further, as described above, in the present example, the normal game state in non-AT, the initial section in AT, the CZ state in non-AT, the first section in AT, the second section in AT, and in AT Although the gaming state of the ED section is provided, more specifically, the non-AT normal gaming state is a non-advantageous zone that is a non-advantageous section that shifts at the time of AT end or setting change, and non-advantageous. There is a normal gaming state, which is an advantageous section (production section) to which a transition lottery is performed with a high probability in a section and which is shifted when the transition lottery is won. In other words, the non-AT CZ state is an advantageous section (effect section), and the initial section in AT, the first section in AT, the second section in AT, and the ED section in AT are advantageous. It is a section (increase section). And a plurality of game states which are an advantageous section are managed as a series of advantageous sections.

Here, at the end of AT or at the time of changing the setting, first, the AT shifts to the normal game state which is the non-advantageous section, and when the AT shifts from the normal game state which is the non-advantageous section to the normal game state which is the advantageous section, either AT The lottery table is set (that is, the giving probability is set). The number of ceiling games is set in each AT lottery table. For example, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 135, in Tables A and B, the ceiling probability is set to “800 games” by setting the award probability in games 761 to 800 to “100%”. ing. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, in table C, the ceiling probability is set to “160 games” by setting the grant probability in the 121 to 160 games to “100%”. However, the method of setting the number of ceiling games is not limited to this. When the table A and the table B are set, the ceiling game number is directly set to "800 games", and when the table C is set, the ceiling game number is directly set to "160 games". (See FIG. 124, for example). In any case, the ceiling game number functions as an upper limit period during which the game continues in the normal game state, and if the midway grant probability is not taken into consideration, the upper limit is set when table A or table B is set. As a result of the longer period, the player is relatively disadvantageous, and when the table C is set, the upper limit period is shortened, which is relatively advantageous to the player.

In this example, when the AT lottery table is set so that the player is unlikely to continue in a relatively disadvantageous state, for example, the AT lottery table in which the upper limit period is set short like Table C is set. Is set with a probability of 50%, and an AT lottery table with a long upper limit period is set with a probability of 50% like Table A and Table C (these probabilities are examples. It can be any probability). That is, the short upper limit period is set with a relatively high probability. As a result, even if the AT state ends, the player can expect to shift to the AT state again in a relatively short period of time, so that the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

By the way, the setting of the AT lottery table is performed not only at the end of AT but also at the time of changing the setting (more specifically, when the normal gaming state which is the non-advantageous section shifts to the normal gaming state which is the advantageous section. , And may be set immediately when the AT ends or when the setting is changed, without providing these). At the end of AT, basically it is an opportunity to come according to the game operation of the player, but at the time of setting change, it is basically an opportunity to come according to the setting change operation of the clerk of the game shop. Therefore, whether or not the AT lottery table with the short upper limit period set when the AT ends is set is of great concern to the player, and whether the AT lottery table with the short upper limit period is set when the setting is changed. Whether or not it becomes a big concern of the amusement store side.

Here, in the present example, when the AT lottery table is set, if the AT lottery table is set with a short upper limit period, that fact can be suggested by execution of the specific notification. Specifically, when the AT lottery table is set, when the AT lottery table with the upper limit period set to be short is set, for example, the above-described state indicator or the above-mentioned stopped state notification unit 117 is set for a predetermined period ( For example, the specific notification can be executed by being in a specific display mode (for example, blinking) for about 5 seconds. The notifying means used is an example, and the information display 6, the LED 82, the back lamp (not shown), the display device 11, the sub display device 18, the speaker group 84, and the like can also be used.

If an AT lottery table with a short upper limit period is set at the end of AT, if the execution of the specific notification indicates to the player, the player's expectation is maintained, There is a merit that motivation can be improved. On the other hand, if the specific notification is not executed, it is also suggested that the AT lottery table with a long upper limit period has been set, and in this case, the player loses his willingness to play and immediately starts playing the game. There is also a demerit that the operation of the gaming machine may decrease as a result of stopping. However, in this example, since the awarding probability varies in various ways according to the specifications, the player's willingness to play can be maintained even in this way. Therefore, whether or not the specific notification is executed when the AT lottery table in which the upper limit period is set to be short is set upon completion of the AT may be appropriately set by comparing and weighing these. In addition, for example, when the player quits playing the game at the end of AT, the advantageous degree of the game machine thereafter becomes valuable information on the side of the game store as well. The target of the specific notification to be executed may include not only the player but also the clerk of the game store.

Further, when the AT lottery table is set when the setting is changed, when the AT lottery table having the short upper limit period is set, the specific notification is executed, and the AT lottery table having the longer upper limit period is set. If the specific notification is not executed when is set, there is an advantage that the sales and operation can be appropriately managed because the gaming shop side can grasp the degree of advantage of the changed gaming machine. On the other hand, there is a possibility that the player will be overly advantageous due to the setting change and suffer an unexpected disadvantage, and as a result hesitate to change the setting, as a result, it is not possible to perform sales and operation sharply by changing the setting. There is also the disadvantage that there is a danger. It should be noted that this may be solved by a clerk of the game shop performing a setting change operation a plurality of times. Therefore, whether or not the specific notification is executed when the AT lottery table in which the upper limit period is set to be short when the setting change is triggered may be appropriately set by comparing these. In addition, when the player has the opportunity to attend the setting change, for example, when the setting is changed to eliminate the error, it is valuable for the player as to how advantageous the game machine is after that. Since the information is provided, the target of the specific notification executed with the setting change may include not only the clerk of the game store but also the player. From such a point of view, the period during which the specific notification is continued may be set to be at least about 30 minutes after the opening of the game store, and valuable information may be provided to the player side.

The mode in which the specific notification is executed (or not executed) can be appropriately combined and adopted, but in the present example, for example, as the first mode, in both cases of AT termination and setting change, A mode in which the specific notification is executed when the AT lottery table in which the upper limit period is set to be short is set can be adopted. Further, for example, as a second mode, at the time of AT termination, no matter which AT lottery table is set, no specific notification is executed, and at the time of setting change, the AT lottery table with a short upper limit period is set. It is possible to adopt a mode in which the specific notification is executed when it is set. In any of the aspects, it is possible to provide the target person with valuable information regarding the privilege grant.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present example, when the predetermined determination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state (for 40 games, for example) in the normal state (for example, the normal gaming state during non-AT) ( For example, the giving probability of the AT state) is set, and whether or not the advantageous state is given is determined according to the set giving probability. Here, when a specific right (for example, an advantageous right) is given, it is possible to change the giving probability to a more advantageous one. That is, for example, even if the giving probability that is relatively unfavorable to the player is set, the giving probability may become advantageous when the specific right is given. There is. Therefore, regardless of the set state, it is possible to maintain the degree of expectation regarding awarding and improve the player's interest.

The grant probability is set every time a game is played for a predetermined period in the normal state, and when the specific right is granted, the grant probability may be set to increase stepwise. it can. Thereby, the degree of expectation of the player may further change depending on the situation in which the specific right has been granted, so that the interest of the player can be further improved.

Further, it can be configured such that the determination as to whether or not the specific right is granted is made at least once during the specific period of the normal state (for example, 120 games). As a result, it is possible to provide a player who cannot play a game for a long time with an expectation of granting a specific right, so that the player's interest can be further improved while the gambling property is moderate.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the present example, when the specific effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is determined is executed, it is suggested that the specific right is granted before the start of the specific effect. In some cases, it may be suggested that the specific right has been granted during execution of the specific effect. Therefore, the interest of the production can be improved in relation to the granting of the specific right.

In addition, when the specific effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is determined is executed, it may not be suggested that the specific right is further granted, and in this case, a predetermined privilege is given. Can be configured to. As a result, not only whether or not the specific right is granted but also the degree of advantage of the player varies depending on the content of the effect to be executed, so that the interest of the player can be further improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, an upper limit period (for example, the number of ceiling games) in which the game continues in the normal state is set according to the setting value being set, and the game period is set to the upper limit. When the time comes, an advantageous state is given. Then, when the set upper limit period is within a specific period (for example, 160 games), it is possible to execute a specific notification capable of suggesting that. Therefore, it is possible to provide valuable information regarding the privilege grant.

Note that the upper limit period is set even when the advantageous state ends, but in this case, the specific notification can be configured not to be executable. This makes it possible to more appropriately provide valuable information regarding awarding.

As above, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 124, other examples (Nos. 1 to 6) of the game playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described, and FIGS. Although other examples (No. 7 to No. 10) of the game playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment have been described with reference to, the essential points of the game playability (game specification) are described. The description is mainly given, and the points omitted in the description or simply described can be applied by appropriately supplementing the configurations described in the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and the modified examples. .. Further, it is possible to combine the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and part or all of the configurations described in the modified examples to form the present invention.

[Other modifications]
As described above, the method of managing the duration of the ART (advantageous section) is arbitrary. For example, the duration may be managed by the number of games, the duration may be managed by the number of sets, or the duration may be managed by the number of medals paid out during ART or the difference. Also, the duration may be managed by the number of times of notifications (number of times of navigation) that influence the payout of medals during ART, and the continuation may be performed by the continuation determination performed at any timing during ART. The period may be managed, or ART may be terminated when a specific symbol combination is displayed during ART.
In this case, the target of addition is appropriately adjusted according to the management method of the duration of the ART such as the number of games, the number of sets, the number of times of navigation, the number of differences, and the like.

Further, in the above-described pachi-slot 1, the operation of the notification (ART) function is performed under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub (sub-control board 72). ) Side control, the notification (ART) function may be operated.

Further, the set value may be only one step. At this time, the setting change process may be added or may be omitted. When the setting change process is left, only the same setting can be reset, so that the RAM is substantially cleared. Even when the setting value is only one level, a mode for lottery (first hit and/or addition, etc.) in an advantageous state (ART state, etc.) is provided, and the number of times a predetermined winning combination is won with a certain probability is counted. However, when the number of times reaches a specified value, by switching this mode, it is possible to cause undulation in the payout.

In this case, a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of a predetermined probability by a specified value becomes one payout wave. If the value is regulated to be switched at the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the set value is one stage, it can be compared with a plurality of gaming machines. For example, if the business hours of one day is 11 hours, then 11h=39600 sec. Therefore, if the minimum time required for one game is 4.1 seconds according to the rule, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1=about 9659 times. Since it is not realistic that no break (meal or toilet) is sandwiched, the number of games played per day is considered to be about 8,000. By setting the predetermined probability to 1/32 and the specified value to 256, 32×256=8192, so that the output wave can be switched in approximately one day.

Further, if the number of times the predetermined winning combination reaches the specified value, the mode that is advantageous to the player and the mode that is unfavorable to the player are alternately switched. Can contribute to the business of the store. Although the case where the setting value is set to one step has been described, the setting value is not limited to one step and can be diverted. More specifically, if it is adopted without changing the number of set values, it is possible to make the wave of payout balls more complicated without increasing the number of set values. Further, by reducing the number of set values, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the set values decrease and become monotonous.

If the number of set values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If the setting value of 6 steps can be changed to the setting value of 1 step, the data can be reduced to 1/6. Also, the development cost for designing the desired payout rate at each stage is 1/6. Furthermore, only the game machines that are compatible with the test are permitted to be used for sales, and thus the time required for the test can be shortened.

Further, in the above-described pachi-slot 1, when the advantageous section is forcibly ended by the limit processing described above, a canceling operation (for example, an operation to the reset switch 76, an operation to a door key (not shown)) is performed by the clerk of the game shop. It may have a stopping function of making the game inoperable until the end.

Further, in the above-described pachi-slot 1, when the advantageous section is forcibly ended by the limit processing described above, the credit is automatically settled (that is, all of the credited gaming value is automatically paid out). It may have an automatic settlement function. In addition, when the above-mentioned stopping function is ON and the automatic settlement function is also ON, the game may be disabled after the automatic settlement, or when the automatic settlement function is ON, it is stopped. Even if the function is not ON, the game may be disabled after being automatically settled.

However, the stopping function and the automatic settlement function described above may be executed even when the advantageous state (any one of the bonus state, the increased section, or the advantageous section (including the effect section) described above) ends. Good. In the case where the game-disabled state described above occurs in the advantageous section, the area in which information about the advantageous section is stored in the main control board 71 may be initialized in response to the game-disabled state. .. When the player is playing a game when the game becomes inoperable (stopped), the game ends up to that point, and then another player opens a favorable stand that causes the stop to occur. Assuming that, for example, if it is assumed that the next player can start the game from the increased section, the disadvantage on the game shop side may become too large. Further, for example, if the clerk has to perform an operation (for example, a setting change operation) for initializing the area in which the information about the advantageous section is stored before opening to the next player, the game store. There is a risk that the operational burden on the side will become too large. Therefore, if the area where the information regarding the advantageous section is automatically stored is initialized when the game is stopped, such a problem does not occur, so it is easy to operate the stop function at the game store. Become. Note that the processing for initializing the area in which the information regarding the advantageous section is stored in response to the game-disabled state is executed by diverting the initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section on the program. You can do it like this. By doing so, the processing load can be reduced and the program capacity can be saved.

It should be noted that the ON/OFF switching of the stopping function and the ON/OFF switching of the automatic settlement function described above can be performed using an existing switch without providing a dedicated switch, for example. For example, as an example, when the setting key type switch 54 is turned on, the stop function is switched on/off each time the stop button 17L is pressed, and the setting key type switch 54 is stopped when the setting key type switch 54 is turned off. The ON/OFF state of the function may be determined and this state may be stored. Further, for example, when the setting key type switch 54 is turned on, the automatic settlement function is switched on/off each time the stop button 17C is pressed, and the setting key type switch 54 is automatically turned off. The on/off state of the settlement function may be determined and this state may be stored. The ON/OFF state of the stopping function and the ON/OFF state of the automatic settlement function that have been set may not be cleared when the advantageous section ends due to execution of the limit process. Further, for example, since the stop button and the like are used for playing a game, the above-mentioned stopping function is switched on/off by an operation to an operating means that is not used for playing a game, and an automatic settlement function is used. It can also be configured so that ON/OFF switching is performed.

Further, the number of games and the number of payouts in the advantageous section in which the stop function is executed can be set by the game store side. In addition, the number of games and the number of payouts in the advantageous section where the automatic settlement function is executed can be set by the game store.

Further, when the stopping function is executed, it is possible to provide a function of notifying the player of that fact. For example, the fact that the advantageous section has ended due to the limit process, the fact that it has been stopped, the fact that it is necessary to call a clerk of the game shop, or that the prize exchange is urged, etc. are displayed on the display device 11, and the voice output from the speaker group 84. It can have a function to do. Further, when the automatic settlement function is executed, it is possible to provide the player with a function of notifying the fact. For example, the fact that the advantageous section has ended due to limit processing, the fact that the game can be continued by the game value that has been automatically settled, the fact that it is necessary to call the clerk of the game shop, or the prompt to exchange the prize, etc. A function of displaying on the display device 11 and outputting a sound from the speaker group 84 can be provided.

[Application to other game machines]
Further, in the present embodiment, the pachi-slot 1 is described as an example of the gaming machine, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment is applicable is not limited to this. For example, the features other than the pachislot-specific features such as the features related to the reel stop control based on the stop operation can be applied to the gaming machine called “pachinko”, and similar effects can be obtained. That is, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to any gaming machine capable of playing a game (playing a game control) in accordance with a game operation (operation) by a player.

[Other expandability of gaming machine according to the present embodiment]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the player inserts a medal into the medal (that is, an operation to insert a hand-held medal into the medal insertion slot 14 or a credited medal to the MAX bet button 15a or the 1 bet button 15b). When the game is started by the operation of inserting the game) and the medals are paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device 51 is driven to pay out the medals from the medal payout opening 24, or the credits are paid out. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the present invention is applied to all modes in which a player inserts a game medium required for a game, a game is performed based on the game medium, and a privilege is provided (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the result of the game. be able to. That is, not only the game medium is thrown in (played) by the physical action of the player and the game medium is paid out, but the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) itself has the game medium owned by the player. May be managed electromagnetically to enable games without medals. Further, the game medium managed by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) and managing the game medium. ..

In this case, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM), is a device provided in the game machine, and is a two-way communication with an external game medium handling device (not shown) through a predetermined interface. It is connected as much as possible and wins a role relating to the lending operation of the game medium (that is, the operation of providing the necessary game medium when the player performs the operation of inserting the game medium) or the payout of the game medium ( The payout operation of the game medium (that is, the operation of acquiring the necessary game medium for paying out the game medium to the player) when the combination is established), or the game medium used for the game It suffices if it is possible to perform the operation of recording electromagnetically. In addition, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also holds the number of game media held on the front of the pachi-slot 1 based on the management result of the number of game media, for example. A number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the owned game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media available to the player for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game media to an external game medium handling device, and In addition to the case where the player directly operates, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and when an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the game machine handling device and an external game media handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a mobile terminal, various lending operation means, various operation means such as return operation means, and a game medium handling device-side external connection terminal board It may be provided (all are not shown).

As the flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the above lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted valuable value from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game and repeats the above operation when a game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, thereby playing the game. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein when transmitting the number of game media. The player brings the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange the prize, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player on the game machine or the game medium handling device side is transmitted, and the game medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is ejected, but cash or a cash equivalent may be ejected, or it may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that a member recording medium of a game store can be inserted and stored in the member recording medium so that the game can be played again later.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, it is possible to execute a lock operation for locking the data communication of the game medium or the valuable value to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown). Good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that is only known to the player may be set, or the player may be stored by the image pickup means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

It should be noted that this game medium management device may be one that allows a game only without medals, as described above, or the game medium is loaded (hanged) by a physical player operation, It may be possible to play the game in both modes, that is, the mode in which the game is paid out, and the mode in which the game can be played without medals. In this case, the game medium management device may employ a method of directly controlling the selector 66 or the hopper device 51 described above, and these are controlled by the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71). Based on the transmission of the control result, the method of recording the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method and controlling the display so that the control can be performed is adopted. Can also

Further, in the above description, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachi-slot 1 has been described. It is also possible to manage the game media.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the selector 66, the hopper device 51, etc. inside the game machine, as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the game machine is provided. Not only can the cost and manufacturing cost of the game be reduced, but it is also possible to prevent the player from directly contacting the game medium, improving the game environment, reducing noise, and reducing the number of devices, resulting in a gaming machine. It also reduces power consumption. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity via the game medium or the game medium insertion port or payout port. That is, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

<Appendix (Summary of the Invention)>
[Game machines having first to fourth configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, when the advantageous state is not advantageous to the player (for example, ART state), the lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and when the advantageous state is set, the advantageous state is set to It is known that lottery can be performed to determine whether or not to continue (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-240017).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is little variation in determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state, and it is required to devise a device for further enhancing the interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in continuing a state advantageous to a player.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine having the following first configuration.

A plurality of symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of columns, and a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of activated lines are set,
On the basis of the player's start operation, a symbol changing means for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit for giving a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line (the winning by the main CPU 101) A check/medal payout process),
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won). )When,
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to continue the advantageous state,
The advantageous state continuation determination means,
In the advantageous state, a determination line determining means (for example, a main line, which can determine whether one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines is to be the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous state Determination of ally type by CPU 101),
In the advantageous state, when a combination of specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means, the continuation degree determination capable of varying the continuation degree to an advantageous degree for the player Means (for example, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101),
When the predetermined time period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state, based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A predetermined area of the symbol display means is made visible, and a symbol display area (for example, symbol display area 4) in which one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area,
On the basis of the player's start operation, a symbol changing means for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit for giving a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line (the winning by the main CPU 101) A check/medal payout process),
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won). )When,
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to continue the advantageous state,
The advantageous state continuation determination means,
Of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area, special line setting means capable of setting one or more special lines configured by connecting straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one symbol for each column When,
In the advantageous state, a determination line determination unit (for example, by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether one or more of the special lines among the special lines is to be the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous state. Determination of ally type)
In the advantageous state, when a combination of specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means, the continuation degree determination capable of varying the continuation degree to an advantageous degree for the player Means (for example, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101),
When the predetermined time period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state, based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means.

In the advantageous state, the continuation degree determining means changes the continuation degree to a degree unfavorable to the player when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means. It is possible that the gaming machine described above.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following second configuration.

A plurality of symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of columns, and a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of activated lines are set,
On the basis of the player's start operation, a symbol changing means for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line. A prize check/medal payout process by),
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won). )When,
In the advantageous state, when a specific advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state and the right acquisition state transition lottery is won in the right acquisition lottery state) A specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to a specific state advantageous for the player (for example, a right acquisition state) for a period of time;
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to continue the advantageous state,
The advantageous state continuation determination means,
In the advantageous state, a determination line determining means (for example, a main line, which can determine whether one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines is to be the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous state Determination of ally type by CPU 101),
In the advantageous state, when a combination of specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means, the continuation degree determination capable of varying the continuation degree to an advantageous degree for the player Means (for example, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101),
When the predetermined period of time elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means,
The specific state is a state in which it is possible to determine whether a specific right (for example, a permanent right or a limited right) is granted,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination line determining means determines the determination line based on the given specific right.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A predetermined area of the symbol display means is made visible, and a symbol display area (for example, symbol display area 4) in which one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area,
On the basis of the player's start operation, a symbol changing means for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit for giving a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line (the winning by the main CPU 101) A check/medal payout process),
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won). )When,
In the advantageous state, when a specific advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state and the right acquisition state transition lottery is won in the right acquisition lottery state) A specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to a specific state advantageous for the player (for example, a right acquisition state) for a period of time;
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to continue the advantageous state,
The advantageous state continuation determination means,
Of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area, special line setting means capable of setting one or more special lines configured by connecting straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one symbol for each column When,
In the advantageous state, a determination line determination unit (for example, by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether one or more of the special lines among the special lines is to be the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous state. Determination of ally type)
In the advantageous state, when a combination of specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means, the continuation degree determination capable of varying the continuation degree to an advantageous degree for the player Means (for example, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101),
When the predetermined period of time elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means,
The specific state is a state in which it is possible to determine whether a specific right (for example, a permanent right or a limited right) is granted,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination line determining means determines the determination line based on the given specific right.

The specific state is a state in which the number of the specific rights exceeding the upper limit number (for example, 2) that can be determined as the determination line by the determination line determination unit can be given,
The determination line determination means, when the specific rights of the upper limit number or more that can be determined as the determination line is granted, determines the determination line of the upper limit number by using the specific right of the upper limit number,
The continuation degree determining means, in the advantageous state, when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, if the specific right does not remain, the continuation degree is determined. To a degree unfavorable to the player, and if the specific right remains, it is possible to not change the continuation degree to a degree unfavorable to the player. ..

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following third configuration.

A plurality of symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of columns, and a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of activated lines are set,
On the basis of the player's start operation, a symbol changing means for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line. A prize check/medal payout process by),
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won). )When,
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to continue the advantageous state,
The advantageous state continuation determination means,
In the advantageous state, a determination line determining means (for example, a main line, which can determine whether one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines is to be the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous state Determination of ally type by CPU 101),
In the advantageous state, when a combination of specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means, the continuation degree determination capable of varying the continuation degree to an advantageous degree for the player Means (for example, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101),
When the predetermined period of time elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means,
When a special advantageous condition is established (for example, when the permanent right acquisition lottery is won), a special right granting means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can decide to grant the special right (for example, the permanent right) is further provided. Prepare,
The determination line determining means,
When the special right has been granted by the special right granting means, any of the plurality of valid lines is necessarily determined as the determination line,
When the special right is not granted by the special right granting means, when determining the determination line, one or a plurality of the effective lines of the plurality of the effective lines is referred to as the determination line. A gaming machine characterized by being able to decide whether or not to play.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A predetermined area of the symbol display means is made visible, and a symbol display area (for example, symbol display area 4) in which one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area,
On the basis of the player's start operation, a symbol changing means for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit for giving a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line (the winning by the main CPU 101) A check/medal payout process),
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won). )When,
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to continue the advantageous state,
The advantageous state continuation determination means,
Of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area, special line setting means capable of setting one or more special lines configured by connecting straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one symbol for each column When,
In the advantageous state, a determination line determination unit (for example, by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether one or more of the special lines among the special lines is to be the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous state. Determination of ally type)
In the advantageous state, when a combination of specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means, the continuation degree determination capable of varying the continuation degree to an advantageous degree for the player Means (for example, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101),
When the predetermined period of time elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means,
When a special advantageous condition is established (for example, when the permanent right acquisition lottery is won), a special right granting means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can decide to grant the special right (for example, the permanent right) is further provided. Prepare,
The determination line determining means,
When the special right has been granted by the special right granting means, any of the plurality of special lines is definitely determined as the determination line,
When the special right is not granted by the special right granting means, when determining the determination line, one or more of the special lines among the plurality of special lines is referred to as the determination line. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be decided whether or not to do it.

In the advantageous state, the continuation degree determining means changes the continuation degree to a degree unfavorable to the player when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means. It is possible that the gaming machine described above.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourth configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
On the basis of the player's start operation, a symbol changing means for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit. A prize check/medal payout process by),
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won). )When,
In the advantageous state, advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state,
Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined advantageous condition, it is possible to change the game state in the advantageous state to the first game state (for example, RT2 state), and a special symbol combination in the advantageous state ( For example, when RT3 transition) is displayed, a gaming state transition control means (for example, RT check by the main CPU 101) capable of shifting the gaming state in the advantageous state to a second gaming state (for example, RT3 state). Processing) and
The advantageous state continuation determination means,
When a combination of specific symbols is displayed in the advantageous state, a continuation degree determining means capable of varying the degree of continuation of the advantageous state to a degree advantageous to the player (for example, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101) ) Is included,
A probability that the internal winning combination determination means determines a specific internal winning combination in which the combination of the specific symbols can be displayed is higher in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. ..

The continuation degree determining means is capable of varying the continuation degree to a disadvantageous degree to the player when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the advantageous state,
The internal winning combination determination means can determine a predetermined internal winning combination in which the combination of the predetermined symbols can be displayed in the first gaming state, and can determine the predetermined internal winning combination in the second gaming state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it does not.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state of the advantageous section), one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether the line is an effective line) is related to the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous state. It is possible to decide whether or not to use the judgment line, and in the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determined judgment line (for example, "Replay" or "bell" symbol alignment), the degree of continuation of the advantageous state Can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player, and it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the determined degree of continuation.

As a result, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state can be changed according to the determination result of the determination line, so that the interest in continuing the advantageous state for the player can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, in the advantageous state, when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols of “shot bullets”) is displayed on the determined determination line, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state Can be changed to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, it is possible to increase the tension in the advantageous state, the game in the advantageous state is not monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest in continuing the advantageous state for the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the determination result regarding the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous state varies depending on whether or not the right is granted in the specific state (for example, the right acquisition state). ing. That is, it is possible to determine the determination line based on the right granted in the specific state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the right of the upper limit number or more of the determination lines is given in the specific state, first, the upper limit number of the determination lines is determined by using the right of the upper limit number. Then, in the advantageous state, when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols of "bulleted lip") is displayed on the determined determination line, if the granted right does not remain, the advantageous state It is possible to change the degree of continuation of the above to a degree unfavorable to the player, and if the granted right remains, to change the degree of continuation of the advantageous state to a degree unfavorable to the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a plurality of determination lines are always determined when a special right (for example, a permanent right) is granted, and a determination line is determined when the special right is not granted. When determining, one or a plurality of lines are determined as the determination line.

As a result, the role of each gaming state in the advantageous state can be diversified, and the degree of continuation of the advantageous state can be varied in various ways, so that the interest in continuing the advantageous state for the player can be improved. be able to.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to change the gaming state in the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state of the advantageous section) to the first gaming state (for example, the RT2 state), and a special symbol. When a combination (for example, "RT3 transition eye") is displayed, it is possible to change the gaming state in the advantageous state to the second gaming state (for example, RT3 state), and the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. A specific internal winning combination (for example, “F_middle rep 1” and “F_middle rep”) in which a specific combination of symbols (for example, a combination of “middle rip” symbols) that fluctuates to a degree advantageous to the player can be displayed 2)) has a higher probability in the RT3 state than in the RT2 state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the first gaming state, a predetermined symbol combination that changes the degree of continuation of the advantageous state to an advantageous degree for the player (for example, a combination of the symbols of "hit replies") It is possible to determine a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, “F_bulleted lip”) that can be displayed. In the second gaming state, the predetermined internal winning combination cannot be determined.

As a result, in the advantageous state, the degree of the advantage of the player is further changed depending on which game state, so that the game in the advantageous state can be made more diversified and further advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest in maintaining the state.

[Gaming machine with fifth configuration]
In the conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined internal winning combination in which the degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation is won, the game control circuit is notified of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player. In the state, informing information that enables notification of the stop operation procedure is transmitted to the effect control circuit, and in the normal state in which the advantageous stop operation procedure for the player is not notified, the stop operation is performed. It is known that notification information that disables notification of the procedure can be transmitted to the effect control circuit (for example, see JP-A-2016-144568).

However, in the gaming machine shown above, for example, a plurality of internal winning combinations such as a predetermined internal winning combination having different combinations of symbols displayed even if the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is the same. In the case where it is included, there is a problem that the effect of notifying the procedure of the stop operation can be performed, but the effect related to the combination of the displayed symbols cannot be performed.

Here, it is conceivable that the game control circuit transmits the type of the internal winning combination in detail to the effect control circuit, but in this case, there is a problem that the control load of the game control circuit increases. Become.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform more appropriate effects without increasing the control load.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine having the following fifth configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
On the basis of the player's start operation, a symbol changing means for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit. Prize check/medal payout processing by
A gaming machine provided with a performance executing means (for example, a display device 11 controlled by the sub CPU 201) for executing a performance,
An information transmitting unit (for example, a communication data transmitting process by the main CPU 101) capable of transmitting predetermined information (for example, a winning combination number) regarding the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit to the effect executing unit; ,
When a predetermined advantageous condition is established (for example, when the lottery is won in the ART), it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified for a predetermined period. A state control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
The internal winning combination determination means,
A combination of specific symbols is displayed on the first line (for example, the top line) of the symbol display means when the stopping operation is performed in the first stop operation procedure (for example, "bat order 1"). A first internal winning combination (for example, "F_upper left bell 1")
When a stop operation is performed in the procedure of the first stop operation, a second internal winning combination in which the specific symbol combination is displayed on the second line (for example, the center line) of the symbol display means. A role (for example, "F_Middle stage left bell 1"),
A third combination in which the specific symbol combination is displayed on the first line in the symbol display means when the stopping operation is performed in the second stopping operation procedure (for example, “batting order 3”) An internal winning combination (for example, "F_upper middle bell 1"),
A fourth internal winning combination (for example, “the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the second line of the symbol display means when the stopping operation is performed in the procedure of the second stopping operation” F_Middle-stage middle bell 1”) can be determined as an internal winning combination,
The information transmitting means,
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determination means determines the first internal winning combination or the third internal winning combination, first information as the predetermined information (for example, “23 as a winning combination number”). ))
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determination means determines the second internal winning combination or the fourth internal winning combination, the second information as the predetermined information (for example, “24 as the winning combination number”). ))
A game machine characterized in that the effect executing means can execute different effects depending on when the first information is transmitted and when the second information is transmitted.

In the advantageous state, it is possible to determine whether one or a plurality of lines among the plurality of lines including the first line and the second line are set as the determination line regarding the variation in the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. A determination line determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 determines the ally type),
In the advantageous state, when a combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means, the continuation degree capable of varying the continuation degree to an advantageous degree for the player. Determining means (for example, determining the enemy status by the main CPU 101),
Advantageous state continuation determination means (for example, continuous lottery by the main CPU 101) that determines whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means when the predetermined period elapses. And the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, when the stop operation is performed at "bat order 1", "F_upper left bell 1" in which the combination of symbols "bell" is displayed on the top line, and "bat order" When the stop operation is performed at "1", the combination of the "Bell" symbol is displayed on the center line, and when the stop operation is performed at "F_Middle left bell 1" and "Batting order 3", the top is displayed. When the stop operation is performed with "F_upper bell 1" where the combination of symbols "Bell" is displayed on the line and when the batting order is "3", the combination of symbols "Bell" is displayed on the center line It is possible to determine "F_middle tier bell 1" as at least an internal winning combination, and in the advantageous state, for example, when "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_upper middle bell 1" is determined, the winning When "23" is transmitted as a winning combination number and "F_middle-stage left bell 1" or "F_middle-stage middle bell 1" is determined, "24" is transmitted as a winning combination number. Then, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute different effects depending on the transmitted winning combination number.

Thereby, for example, in the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state of the advantageous section), in the case where the game has such a playability that the degree of advantage of the player varies depending on the line on which the symbol is displayed, Since effects related to the combination can be performed, more appropriate effects can be performed without increasing the control load.

[Amusement machine with sixth configuration]
In a conventional gaming machine, during a specific game state that is advantageous to a player, a story production story that is executed according to the number of transitions to a special game state that is advantageous to the player is advanced, that is, it is advantageous to the player. It is known that the effect contents can be changed according to the period in which the state continues (for example, see JP-A-2016-187467).

Here, in the gaming machine as shown above, for example, when a state advantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period, it is possible to perform a special effect (for example, ending effect) that cannot be normally seen. ..

By the way, such a special effect is executed, for example, as giving an additional privilege to the player, but a device for further increasing the player's motivation for playing and improving the interest of the effect is provided. It seems that there is room to do.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's motivation for a game and enhance the enjoyment of production.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following sixth configuration.

A gaming machine (for example, a pachi-slot 1) that variably displays a symbol based on a player's start operation, and stops and displays a symbol based on a player's stop operation,
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, advantageous zone) advantageous to the player when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won).
And a performance executing means (for example, the display device 11) for executing a performance,
The effect execution means,
When the period controlled by the advantageous state control unit to the advantageous state becomes a special period (for example, the game period of the advantageous section is “1200” times or more), special effect (for example, ending effect in ending 2 state) ) Is possible,
When the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied and when the predetermined execution condition is satisfied (for example, when it is determined to shift to the ending 1 state), a part of the special effect is executed. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a special effect (for example, an ending effect in the ending 1 state).

In the advantageous state, advantageous state continuation determination means (for example, continuous lottery by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state,
Normal ending means for ending the advantageous state when it is not determined by the advantageous state continuation determining means to continue the advantageous state,
Even when the advantageous state continuation determination unit determines to continue the advantageous state, the period during which the advantageous state control unit controls the advantageous state exceeds the special period (for example, a specific period). And a specific ending means for ending the advantageous state when the regulation monitoring period becomes “1500” times),
The effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect from the time when the period controlled by the advantageous state control means to the advantageous state becomes the special period to the specific period. The gaming machine described above.

The effect execution means, until the period during which the advantageous state control means is controlled to the advantageous state becomes the specific period, every time the advantageous state continuation determining means determines to continue the advantageous state, The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests a guideline of a period during which the advantageous state control means controls the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the period controlled in the advantageous state becomes the special period (for example, when the ending 2 state is set), the special effect can be executed, and When it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state and a predetermined execution condition is satisfied (for example, when it is determined to shift to the ending 1 state), a part of the special effect is executed. It is possible to execute special effects.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the special effect, which is a part of the special effect that can be normally executed at the end of the game in the advantageous state for the player, satisfies the predetermined execution condition. In this case, the game can be executed in the early stage of the game in a state advantageous to the player. As a result, the player comes to play the game while wanting to see all the special effects, so that the player's motivation for the game can be increased and the interest of the effect can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, from the time when the period controlled to the advantageous state becomes the special period to the period when the period controlled to the advantageous state becomes the specific period, until the advantageous state ends , Special effects can be executed. As a result, even if the acquisition of the game medium is restricted, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, until the period in which the advantageous state is controlled becomes a special period, each time it is decided to continue the advantageous state, a guideline of the period in which the advantageous state is controlled is obtained. It is possible to execute suggestive production that suggests. This makes it possible for the player to generally understand the time when the execution of the special effect is started, the time when the advantageous state is ended, etc. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with appropriate information while enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

[Game machines having seventh to twelfth configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, a continuous effect for notifying whether or not a special winning combination (for example, a bonus winning combination) that allows a player to shift to a more advantageous condition (for example, a bonus winning combination) is determined as an internal winning combination. It is known that the above can be performed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-79697).

However, whether or not the special combination is decided as the internal winning combination can be guessed not only by the effect contents of the continuous effect but also by the combination of the symbols displayed, etc., so it shifts to an advantageous state. It is considered that there is room for further devising the notification regarding whether or not to do it, the transition state of the advantageous state itself, and the like.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in transition of a state advantageous to a player.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following seventh configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
On the basis of the player's start operation, a symbol changing means for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit. A prize check/medal payout process by),
When a specific winning combination (for example, a “chance eye”) is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to control the player in a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous zone) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period of time, and a predetermined advantage. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery is won in the ART lottery), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous period control means) that can be controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous zone) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU 101),
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition eye") is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to the first normal game state (for example, RT3 state). , If a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, a normal game state transition control unit (for example, a game state transition control unit that can change the game state to a second normal game state (for example, RT5 state)) Main CPU 101),
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of shifting the game state to a special game state (for example, bonus state) A state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
And a performance executing means (for example, the display device 11) for executing a performance,
The internal winning combination determination means,
While it is possible to determine a plurality of predetermined winning combinations (for example, small pressing order winning combinations) in which the degree of advantage of the player changes according to the procedure of the stop operation, the specific winning combination, and the special winning combination, as internal winning combinations, When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to carry over the winning of the special combination until the combination of the special symbols is displayed,
If the winning of the special combination has not been carried over, it is possible to determine the specific combination and the special combination at the same time as an internal winning combination,
The effect execution means,
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal game state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to inform the player of the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous. In the case of being in the first advantageous state and the second normal game state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, the stop advantageous to the player is executed. A gaming machine characterized by executing an effect capable of notifying an operation procedure.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eighth configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
On the basis of the player's start operation, a symbol changing means for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit. A prize check/medal payout process by),
When a specific winning combination (for example, a “chance eye”) is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to control the player in a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous zone) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period of time, and a predetermined advantage. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery is won in the ART lottery), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous period control means) that can be controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous zone) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU 101),
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition eye") is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to the first normal game state (for example, RT3 state). , If a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, a normal game state transition control unit (for example, a game state transition control unit that can change the game state to a second normal game state (for example, RT5 state)) Main CPU 101),
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of shifting the game state to a special game state (for example, bonus state) A state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
And a performance executing means (for example, the display device 11) for executing a performance,
The specific combination, the combination of the specific symbol is displayed when the stop operation is a specific mode, the combination of the specific symbol is not displayed when the stop operation is not the specific mode Internal The winning role,
The internal winning combination determination means,
While it is possible to determine a plurality of predetermined winning combinations (for example, small pressing order winning combinations) in which the degree of advantage of the player changes according to the procedure of the stop operation, the specific winning combination, and the special winning combination, as internal winning combinations, When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to carry over the winning of the special combination until the combination of the special symbols is displayed,
If the winning of the special combination has not been carried over, it is possible to determine the specific combination and the special combination at the same time as an internal winning combination,
The effect execution means,
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal game state, if any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, the player is given a game until the first advantageous state ends. It is possible to execute an effect capable of informing the advantageous procedure of the stop operation, and in the case of the first advantageous state and the second normal gaming state, any one of the plurality of predetermined combinations is determined as an internal winning combination. When it is done, until the first advantageous state ends, it is possible to execute an effect that can inform the player of the procedure of the stop operation, which is advantageous.
When the first advantageous state is not the gaming state of the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state, and one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, a predetermined A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect that can inform the player of the procedure of the stop operation, which is advantageous to the player, only once (for example, once).

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following ninth configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
On the basis of the player's start operation, a symbol changing means for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit. A prize check/medal payout process by),
When a specific winning combination (for example, a “chance eye”) is determined as an internal winning combination, a first advantageous state advantageous to the player for a predetermined period (for example, 9 games) (for example, a high-probability 2 of a normal advantageous section). State) and a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when winning the lottery ART), a second advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. ) Controllable advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition eye") is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to the first normal game state (for example, RT3 state). , If a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, a normal game state transition control unit (for example, a game state transition control unit that can change the game state to a second normal game state (for example, RT5 state)) Main CPU 101),
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of shifting the game state to a special game state (for example, bonus state) A state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
And a performance executing means (for example, the display device 11) for executing a performance,
The internal winning combination determination means,
While it is possible to determine a plurality of predetermined winning combinations (for example, small pressing order winning combinations) in which the degree of advantage of the player changes according to the procedure of the stop operation, the specific winning combination, and the special winning combination, as internal winning combinations, When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to carry over the winning of the special combination until the combination of the special symbols is displayed,
If the winning of the special combination has not been carried over, it is possible to determine the specific combination and the special combination at the same time as an internal winning combination,
The effect execution means,
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal game state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to inform the player of the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous. In the case of the first advantageous state and the second normal game state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, It is possible to execute an effect that can notify the procedure of the stop operation,
The advantageous state control means, when the special game state is over,
When the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the second advantageous state is controlled,
When the predetermined advantageous condition is not established, the game is characterized by controlling to a third advantageous state (for example, high-precision 4 state of the normal advantageous section) for a specific period (for example, 32 games). Machine.

It is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) for varying the degree of advantage of the player,
The special winning combination includes a first special winning combination having a different winning probability between the plurality of setting values, and a second special winning combination having a same winning probability between the plurality of setting values,
The predetermined advantageous condition is
In the case where any one of the first special combination and the second special combination is determined as an internal winning combination when the first advantageous state or the third advantageous state is one of the advantageous states, Is also determined,
When neither the first advantageous state nor the third advantageous state is an advantageous state, it is not determined whether or not to be established when the first special combination is determined as an internal winning combination. The gaming machine described above.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following tenth configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
On the basis of the player's start operation, a symbol changing means for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit. A prize check/medal payout process by),
When a specific winning combination (for example, a “chance eye”) is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to control the player in a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous zone) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period of time, and a predetermined advantage. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery is won in the ART lottery), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous period control means) that can be controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous zone) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU 101),
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition eye") is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to the first normal game state (for example, RT3 state). , If a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, a normal game state transition control unit (for example, a game state transition control unit that can change the game state to a second normal game state (for example, RT5 state)) Main CPU 101),
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of shifting the game state to a special game state (for example, bonus state) A state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
And a performance executing means (for example, the display device 11) for executing a performance,
The internal winning combination determination means,
While it is possible to determine a plurality of predetermined winning combinations (for example, small pressing order winning combinations) in which the degree of advantage of the player changes according to the procedure of the stop operation, the specific winning combination, and the special winning combination, as internal winning combinations, When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to carry over the winning of the special combination until the combination of the special symbols is displayed,
If the winning of the special combination has not been carried over, it is possible to determine the specific combination and the special combination at the same time as an internal winning combination,
The advantageous state control means can determine whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state,
The effect execution means,
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal game state and the second normal game state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, the game is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute an effect that can notify the procedure of the stop operation,
When the special game state is controlled in the second advantageous state, and when any one of the plurality of predetermined combinations is determined as an internal winning combination in the special game state, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player It is possible to execute the production that can inform
When the special game state is controlled in the first advantageous state, and when any one of the plurality of predetermined combinations is determined as an internal winning combination in the special game state, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player A game machine characterized by not being able to execute an effect capable of informing.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, when the specific winning combination (for example, “chance eye”) is determined as the internal winning combination, the gaming machine can be controlled to the first advantageous state (for example, the normal advantageous zone) and the predetermined winning combination can be performed. When the advantageous condition is established (for example, when the lottery is won in the ART lottery), it is possible to control in the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous zone), and a specific symbol combination (for example, “RT3 transition eye”) is displayed. In the case of being played, it is possible to change the game state to the first normal game state (for example, RT3 state), and when the special combination (for example, bonus combination) is determined as the internal winning combination, the game state Can be changed to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state). In addition, it is possible to simultaneously determine a specific winning combination and a special winning combination as an internal winning combination. Then, in the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal game state and the second normal game state, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is informed regarding the predetermined combination (for example, the small pushing order combination). It has become so.

As a result, in the first advantageous state, the possibility that the number of game media to be provided is increased more than that in the normal state, and the expectation of whether or not the game state is changed to the special game state is increased. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition of the state that is advantageous to.

Further, according to the gaming machine configured as described above, the specific winning combination is displayed in a specific combination when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, at an appropriate timing), and is not performed in the specific mode. In the case of an internal winning combination in which a specific combination of symbols is not displayed, and in the first advantageous state and the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the player with respect to the predetermined combination until the first advantageous state ends. When the procedure of the advantageous stop operation is notified, and the first advantageous state is not the first normal state and the second normal game state, the player is given a predetermined combination only for a predetermined number of times (for example, once). An advantageous stop operation procedure is notified.

Thereby, when the specific winning combination is won, whether the special winning combination is also determined as an internal winning combination at the same time, and whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed, the advantageous degree and content of the first advantageous state are changed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player regarding the transition to a more advantageous state.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, when the special gaming state (for example, the bonus state) is finished, if the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the state is shifted to the second advantageous state, and the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied. If not, the game is shifted to the third advantageous state (for example, the high-precision 4 state of the normal advantageous section) for a specific period (for example, 32 games).

Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, when the gaming state is one of the first advantageous state and the third advantageous state, the second special combination (eg, “F_BB3+F_watermelon”) having the same winning probability among a plurality of setting values. 2” and an internal winning combination including a bonus combination other than “F_BB4+F_watermelon 2”) and a first special winning combination (eg, “F_BB3+F_watermelon 2” and “F_BB4+F_watermelon 2”) having different winning probabilities among a plurality of setting values. It is determined whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state regardless of which case is won, but when the game state is neither the first advantageous state nor the third advantageous state, the first special role is given. When the winning is won, it is not decided whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state.

As a result, the transition of the subsequent game state (advantageous state) can be made more diverse depending on the game state when the special combination is won and the type thereof, and therefore the interest regarding the transition of the state more advantageous to the player Can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state of the first advantageous state in which it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state, it is possible to inform the player of an advantageous stop operation procedure for a predetermined winning combination. Although it is possible to inform the player of the advantageous stop operation procedure for the predetermined combination even when the special game state (for example, the bonus state) is controlled in the second advantageous state, the special game state is set in the first advantageous state. When controlled, it is not possible to inform the player of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the predetermined winning combination.

As a result, it is possible to provide the first advantageous state, which is a game section, in which the degree of expectation of shifting to the second advantageous state is increased and the possibility that the number of game media to be provided is also increased. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition of the game, and even when such a game section is provided, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessive, and to increase the player's ambition. It is also possible to suppress excessive fanning.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eleventh configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
On the basis of the player's start operation, a symbol changing means for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit. A prize check/medal payout process by),
When a specific winning combination (for example, a "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, an advantageous state control capable of controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player for a predetermined period (for example, two highly accurate states of a normal advantageous section) Means (for example, the main CPU 101),
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition eye") is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to the first normal game state (for example, RT3 state). , If a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, a normal game state transition control unit (for example, a game state transition control unit that can change the game state to a second normal game state (for example, RT5 state)) Main CPU 101),
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of shifting the game state to a special game state (for example, bonus state) A state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
And a performance executing means (for example, the display device 11) for executing a performance,
The internal winning combination determination means,
While it is possible to determine a plurality of predetermined winning combinations (for example, small pressing order winning combinations) in which the degree of advantage of the player changes according to the procedure of the stop operation, the specific winning combination, and the special winning combination, as internal winning combinations, When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to carry over the winning of the special combination until the combination of the special symbols is displayed,
If the winning of the special combination has not been carried over, it is possible to determine the specific combination and the special combination at the same time as an internal winning combination,
The effect execution means,
In the advantageous state and in the first normal game state, if any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to inform the player of the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous. And then
In the advantageous state and in the second normal game state, if any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, the player can be notified of the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous. And then
The normal game state transition control means, when the specific combination is not determined as an internal winning combination at the same time as the special combination, and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, a specific period (for example, 8 Between games), the game state is changed to the first normal game state,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined period is set to a period longer than the specific period (for example, 9 games).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the specific winning combination (for example, the "chance eye") is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to control to the advantageous state (for example, the two highly accurate states of the normal advantageous section). When a combination of specific symbols (for example, "RT3 transition eye") is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to the first normal game state (for example, RT3 state), and a special character (for example, When the bonus combination) is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to change the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state). In addition, it is possible to simultaneously determine a specific winning combination and a special winning combination as an internal winning combination. Then, in the advantageous state and in the first normal game state and the second normal game state, it is possible to inform the player of the advantageous stop operation procedure for the predetermined combination (for example, the small pushing order combination). The period during which the advantageous state can be continued (for example, between 9 games) is set to be longer than the period during which the first normal gaming state can be continued (for example, 8 games).

This makes it possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation regardless of whether or not the particular game state (first normal game state) ends, which is of interest for the player in transition to a state. It is possible to improve.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a twelfth configuration as described below.

Advantageous state control means capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, bonus state) advantageous to the player when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when a bonus hand is won),
Display means capable of displaying an image (for example, the display device 11),
A gaming machine provided with a detection unit (for example, a touch sensor 19) capable of detecting a player's operation,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific image for informing whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied,
The specific image includes a first specific image (for example, an image partially different from the base image) displayed when the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, and a specific image when the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied. A second specific image to be displayed (for example, the same image as the base image),
The first specific image and the second specific image are images that are different in a specific portion and are common in other portions than the specific portion,
When the detection means detects that the player has performed an operation of designating the specific portion when the first specific image is displayed, the fact that the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied is notified. A game machine characterized in that a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") to be displayed is displayed on the display means.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the second specific image is an image which is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in an original work used as a motif of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, it is notified whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition (for example, winning of a bonus combination) that enables control to an advantageous condition for advantageous to a player (for example, a bonus state) is established. Therefore, the first specific image (for example, an image partially different from the base image) is displayed when the predetermined advantageous condition is established, and the second specific image is displayed when the predetermined advantageous condition is not established. An image (for example, the same image as the base image) can be displayed, and when the first specific image is displayed, the player performs an operation of designating a part different from the second specific image. In this case, it is possible to display a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") that notifies that a predetermined advantageous condition is established.

With this, it is possible to inform whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied by the new effect mode in which the predetermined operation of the player is also involved, so that the interest for the transition to the advantageous state for the player is improved. Can be planned.

Further, according to the gaming machine configured as described above, the second specific image is an image that is the same as or similar to the predetermined image in the original work used as the motif of the gaming machine. As a result, a player who is attached to the original work can easily recognize whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition is established, and thus, it is possible to increase the motivation for the game and further increase the interest in the production.

[Game machine with 13th configuration]
In a conventional gaming machine, a game control device monitors the time (a time counted by an on-edge timer) that a specific operation means (for example, a stop button) is pressed, and the time is sent to the effect control circuit side. Therefore, it is known that the effect contents can be changed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-233278).

However, in recent game machines that require a variety of effects, it is necessary to mount many effects, and therefore it is required to devise a method for reducing the control load of effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of reducing the control load related to the effect even when the effect is changed depending on the operation mode of a specific operation means. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine having the following thirteenth configuration.

An operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, a stop button),
Operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch) capable of detecting the operation of the operating means,
And a production control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) for controlling the production,
The effect control means,
When the operation detecting unit detects an operation of the operating unit (for example, on-edge), the time measurement is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the time measurement, the first effect (for example, "Direction 1") is generated,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, control is performed to generate a second effect (for example, "effect 2"),
A game machine characterized in that, if the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the time counting, the control for generating the first effect is not performed.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation detecting means detects that the operation of the operating means is completed (for example, when an off edge is detected).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the operation (for example, on-edge) of the specific operation means is detected, the time counting is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the time counting, The control for executing the first effect (for example, "effect 1") is performed, and the control for executing the second effect (for example, "effect 2") is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an off edge is detected). If the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of timing, it is possible not to perform the control for executing the first effect.

Accordingly, even when the effect is changed according to the operation mode of the specific operation means, it is possible to reduce the control load related to the effect.

[Gaming machine with fourteenth configuration]
It is known that a conventional gaming machine is capable of performing an effect such as notifying an internal winning combination by a light emitting mode of a specific operating means (for example, a stop button) (for example, JP 2010-82034 A). (See the official gazette).

However, it is considered that there is room for further improvement in such an effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest in production and the enjoyment in games.

To achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine having the following fourteenth configuration.

State control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for generating an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Prior to the occurrence of the advantageous state, a pre-determination unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to grant a right to allow the occurrence of the advantageous state (for example, a winning of a bonus combination),
A game machine provided with a performance executing means (for example, a game value display unit (VL)) capable of executing a predetermined performance,
When the pre-determination unit determines that the right to permit the occurrence of the advantageous state is given, the production execution unit gives a specific notification production (for example, “number of sheets ahead”). Display effect") can be executed, and a predetermined value (eg, end of winning combination as a planned acquisition number) related to a game value that can be acquired in the advantageous state generated based on the right granted by the determination in the specific notification effect. A gaming machine characterized by displaying a value of a number counter).

When the effect executing means displays the predetermined value in the specific notification effect, the display of the predetermined value is continued at least until the subsequent occurrence of the advantageous state, and when the game value is acquired in the advantageous state, The gaming machine described above, characterized in that the display of the predetermined value is updated based on the value of the acquired gaming value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when it is determined that the right to allow the generation of the advantageous state (for example, the bonus state) is given (for example, the bonus combination is won), the decision is made. It is possible to execute a specific notification effect to be notified (for example, “number-first display effect”), and in this specific notification effect, a predetermined value related to a game value that can be acquired in an advantageous state that is generated based on the right that is decided to be granted It is possible to display the value (for example, the value of the combination end number counter as the expected acquisition number).

As a result, since it is possible to perform an effect that specifically notifies the value of the right (winning content) obtained by the player, it is possible to increase the interest in the effect and the interest in the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the predetermined value is displayed in the specific notification effect, the display of the predetermined value is continued at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and when the game value is obtained in the advantageous state, The display of the predetermined value is updated based on the acquired value of the game value.

With this, a series of effects for notifying the value can be appropriately performed before and after the occurrence of the advantageous state, so that interest in the effects can be further enhanced.

[Game machines having 15th to 18th configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, when the player is not in an advantageous state (for example, ART state), which is a game period (advantageous section) advantageous to the player, lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and in the advantageous state. In some cases, it is known that lottery can be performed to determine whether or not to continue the advantageous state (see, for example, JP 2010-240017 A).

According to such a gaming machine, the game period that is an advantageous section also changes depending on the setting conditions such as the transition probability of the advantageous state and the continuity probability. Therefore, such a setting condition is an event that influences the interest of the game. Has become.

By the way, in such a gaming machine, in order to keep the amount of game value given within a predetermined payout rate within a predetermined period, the amount of game value given per unit game in the advantageous state (the amount of increase in game value is The slope value shown) is designed to be a constant value.

Therefore, when the amount of game value given per unit game in the advantageous state is set to a relatively high value, if the above setting conditions are also set to be advantageous to the player, There is a problem that the gambling property of is too high.

On the other hand, in order to suppress the gambling of the game, set the amount of game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a relatively low value, and make the above setting conditions disadvantageous to the player. It may be set, but in this case, there is a problem that the interest of the game is significantly reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can maintain the interest of a game while maintaining an appropriate gambling property.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fifteenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of symbols based on a start operation of a player and stops the variable display of symbols based on a stop operation of the player to perform a game,
Advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, advantageous zone) in which information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified,
First expected value control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a first expected value (for example, expected value α),
Second expected value control means capable of controlling the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the second expected value (for example, expected value β) smaller than the first expected value (for example, And a main CPU 101),
The advantageous state control means,
Advantageous state start determining means capable of determining whether to start the advantageous state when the advantageous state is not present,
When the advantageous state, it is possible to determine whether to continue the advantageous state, advantageous state continuation determining means, including,
The first expected value control means controls the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to be the first expected value for at least a predetermined period after the advantageous state is started,
In the second expected value control means, an expected value of a game value per unit game in the advantageous state including the predetermined period for at least a specific period after the advantageous state is continued becomes the second expected value. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled as follows.

The gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous state continuation determining means does not decide to continue the advantageous state for the specific period at least after the advantageous state is continued.

When the advantageous state continuation determining means determines to continue the advantageous state, the advantageous state started based on the advantageous state start determining means having decided to start the advantageous state has ended. After a lapse of a predetermined waiting period from the above, the gaming machine is characterized by continuing the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, it becomes possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high for a predetermined period after the advantageous state is started, and a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. Allows a game to be played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while maintaining the moderate gambling property.

It should be noted that, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, it may not be decided to continue the advantageous state for a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. By doing so, the payout rate can be managed more appropriately.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, even when it is decided to continue the advantageous state during the advantageous state, the advantageous state is once ended and the advantageous state is continued after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed. (Restart) may be performed. In this way, not only the payout rate can be managed more appropriately, but also the interest of the game can be improved regarding whether or not the advantageous state continues.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following sixteenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of symbols based on a start operation of a player and stops the variable display of symbols based on a stop operation of the player to perform a game,
Advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, advantageous zone) in which information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified,
Predetermination means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can determine whether or not to permit the display of a combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state,
Specific notification execution means (for example, display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification for notifying that the combination of the special symbols is allowed to be displayed by the pre-determination means,
The advantageous state control means,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started,
When a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated,
It is possible to end the advantageous state when a combination of the special symbols is displayed before the predetermined end condition is satisfied,
The specific notification execution means, in the advantageous state, if the combination of the special symbol is allowed to be displayed by the pre-determination means, the combination of the special symbol can be displayed in the game. In this case, the gaming machine is characterized in that the specific notification can be executed.

First expected value control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a first expected value (for example, expected value α),
Second expected value control means capable of controlling the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, expected value β) lower than the first expected value (for example, A main CPU 101),
In the first expected value control means, the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until the specific variation condition is satisfied. Control as
The second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value until the advantageous state is ended after the specific variation condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled so that

The predetermined ending condition is established based on that the game is played for a predetermined period after the advantageous state is started, or that the game value provided since the advantageous state is started becomes a predetermined amount. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, the advantageous state ends when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied or when a special game state is entered before the predetermined ending condition is satisfied. Then, in the advantageous state, when it is possible to shift to the special game state, a specific notification indicating that effect is executed. Therefore, the player can continue the advantageous state by avoiding the transition to the special game state if it is within the range of the prescribed predetermined ending condition. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while maintaining the moderate gambling property.

In the gaming machine with the above configuration, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state to the establishment of the specific variation condition. During the period from the satisfaction of the variable condition of 1 to the end of the advantageous state, it may be possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. In this way, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied, for example, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, or the special game. It is possible to shift to the state, end the advantageous state, and try to have the opportunity to play the game again in the state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. The interest of can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the predetermined termination condition may be terminated when a certain privilege is given to the player (or when it is assumed that the privilege is given). With this configuration, it is possible to more appropriately manage the payout rate with a simple configuration.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following seventeenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of symbols based on a start operation of a player and stops the variable display of symbols based on a stop operation of the player to perform a game,
Advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, advantageous zone) in which information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified,
First expected value control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a first expected value (for example, expected value α),
Second expected value control means capable of controlling the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, expected value β) lower than the first expected value (for example, And a main CPU 101),
The advantageous state control means,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started,
When a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated,
Before the predetermined ending condition is satisfied, it is possible to end the advantageous state when a combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state is displayed.
In the first expected value control means, the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until the specific variation condition is satisfied. Control as
The second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value until the advantageous state is ended after the specific variation condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled so that

Predetermination means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of the special symbols to be displayed,
A specific notification execution unit (for example, the display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification to notify that the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the pre-determination unit,
The specific notification execution means,
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the pre-determination means from the start of the advantageous state to the establishment of the specific variation condition, The specific notification can be executed when the specific variation condition is satisfied,
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the pre-determination means during the period from the satisfaction of the specific variation condition to the end of the advantageous state, The gaming machine, wherein the specific notification can be executed when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the pre-determination means.

The first expected value control means sets the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player in the advantageous state is notified as the first probability, so that the expected value of the gaming value per unit game in the advantageous state is given. Is controlled to be the first expected value,
The second expected value control means sets the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player in the advantageous state is notified to be the second probability lower than the first probability, so that the unit game in the advantageous state. A gaming machine, characterized in that the expected value of per game value is controlled to be the second expected value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state to the establishment of the specific variation condition. From the time the variable condition is satisfied until the advantageous state is ended, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special game state as a trigger even before the predetermined ending condition is satisfied. That is, for example, when playing a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while maintaining the moderate gambling property.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, if a special game state can be entered, a specific notification to that effect is issued. It may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game when the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the expected value-added game value in the advantageous state may be adjusted according to the probability of being notified of the information regarding the stop operation of the player in the advantageous state. With this configuration, it is possible to more appropriately manage the payout rate with a simple configuration.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eighteenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of symbols based on a start operation of a player and stops the variable display of symbols based on a stop operation of the player to perform a game,
Advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, advantageous zone) in which information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified,
First expected value control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a first expected value (for example, expected value α),
Second expected value control means capable of controlling the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, expected value β) lower than the first expected value (for example, And a main CPU 101),
The advantageous state control means,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started,
When a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated,
Before the predetermined ending condition is satisfied, it is possible to end the advantageous state when a combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state is displayed.
In the first expected value control means, the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until the specific variation condition is satisfied. Control as
The second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value until the advantageous state is ended after the specific variation condition is satisfied. Control so that
When the advantageous state is ended in response to the combination of the special symbols being displayed, a special privilege granting means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of granting a special privilege not related to granting a game value is further provided. A gaming machine characterized by.

Predetermination means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of the special symbols to be displayed,
A specific notification execution unit (for example, the display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification to notify that the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the pre-determination unit,
The specific notification execution means,
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the pre-determination means from the start of the advantageous state to the establishment of the specific variation condition, The specific notification can be executed when the specific variation condition is satisfied,
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the pre-determination means during the period from the satisfaction of the specific variation condition to the end of the advantageous state, The gaming machine, wherein the specific notification can be executed when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the pre-determination means.

The first expected value control means sets the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player in the advantageous state is notified as the first probability, so that the expected value of the gaming value per unit game in the advantageous state is given. Is controlled to be the first expected value,
The second expected value control means sets the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player in the advantageous state is notified to be the second probability lower than the first probability, so that the unit game in the advantageous state. A gaming machine, characterized in that the expected value of per game value is controlled to be the second expected value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state to the establishment of the specific variation condition. From the time the variable condition is satisfied until the advantageous state is ended, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special game state as a trigger even before the predetermined ending condition is satisfied. Furthermore, when the advantageous state ends with the transition to the special game state, it is possible to give a special privilege that is not related to the giving of a game value. That is, for example, when playing a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Further, in the case of shifting to the special game state and ending the advantageous state, a special privilege which is not given when the predetermined ending condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended, is given to the player. It is also possible to give an incentive to end the task early. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while maintaining the moderate gambling property.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, if a special game state can be entered, a specific notification to that effect is issued. It may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game when the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the expected value-added game value in the advantageous state may be adjusted according to the probability of being notified of the information regarding the stop operation of the player in the advantageous state. With this configuration, it is possible to more appropriately manage the payout rate with a simple configuration.

[Game machine with nineteenth configuration]
It is known that a conventional gaming machine is set such that it can be shifted to an advantageous state (for example, an ART state) advantageous to a player every predetermined number of games (that is, every predetermined cycle). (See, for example, JP 2010-167197A).

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the expectation of the transition to the advantageous state every predetermined period, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the period until the state transitions to the advantageous state is constant and there is little change in game performance.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and by making it possible to change the period until it becomes a state in which it is possible to shift to an advantageous state, it is possible to make game play rich in variation. An object is to provide a game machine.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with the following configuration 19th.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A first special combination (for example, BB1 in another example (2) of game property), a second special combination (for example, BB2 in another example (2) of game property), and a predetermined combination (for example, game property) An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including another example (part 2 of pressing order) in another example.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping variable display of symbols,
When the variable display of symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege providing unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that can provide a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and a game including Machine,
When a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to BB1 in another example (2) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, a first special game state (for example, other game property) (BB1 state in the example (2)) is started, and the first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the first special game state when the first special end condition is satisfied When,
A second special game state (for example, other game property) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols relating to BB2 in another example (2) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means. BB2 state in the example (part 2)) is started, and the second special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the second special game state when the second special end condition is satisfied When,
And a notifying unit (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying operation information regarding the stop operation of the player,
When the first special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit. Is allowed to continue the first special permission state (for example, BB1 permission state in another example (2) of game nature),
When the second special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit. The second special permission state (for example, the BB2 permission state in another example (2) of game nature) is allowed to continue,
The internal winning combination determination means,
In the first special permission state, it is not possible to determine the second special combination as an internal winning combination,
In the second special permission state, it is not possible to determine the first special combination as an internal winning combination,
In the normal game state that is neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state (for example, a general game state (CZ state) in another example (2) of playability), the first special role or The second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination,
The first special end condition is met when a prescribed number (for example, over 285) of game values are given in the first special game state,
In the first special game state, when the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game values are given. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, the predetermined number of game values are not given,
At least a period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is not notified by the notification means in the first special game state functions as a decrease period in which the game value decreases,
The second special game state functions as an increasing period in which the game value increases,
When the specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the first special game state can be set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified by the notification unit. A gaming machine characterized by that.

A game machine characterized in that a period during which the notification information is notified by the notification means in the first special game state functions as the increase period.

In the first special game state, the first specific game when a combination of first specific symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to RB1 in another example (2) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means. A first specific game state in which control is possible to start a state (for example, RB1 state in another example (2) of game nature) and end the first specific game state when a first specific end condition is satisfied. Control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
In the second special game state, the second specific game when a combination of second specific symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to RB2 in another example (2) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means. A second specific game state in which control is possible to start a state (for example, RB2 state in another example (2) of game nature) and end the second specific game state when the second specific end condition is satisfied. A control unit (for example, the main CPU 101),
The internal winning combination determination means,
In the first special game state, it is possible to determine a first specific winning combination (for example, RB1 in another example (2) of game play) as an internal winning combination,
In the second special game state, it is possible to determine a second specific winning combination (for example, RB2 in another example (2) of game play) as an internal winning combination,
When the first specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the first special game state, the first specific symbol is displayed on the symbol displaying module until a combination of the first specific symbols is displayed on the symbol displaying module. The first specific permission state (for example, the RB1 permission state in another example (2) of game nature) in which the combination of is permitted to be displayed is continued,
When the second specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the second special game state, the second specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit until a combination of the second specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit. The second specific permission state (for example, the RB2 permission state in another example (2) of game nature) in which the combination of is permitted to be displayed is continued,
In the first special gaming state, a period in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is not notified by the notification means functions as the decrease period regardless of whether or not it is the first specific permission state,
In the second special game state, a period of the second specific permission state functions as the increase period, the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, in the normal game state, if the second special combination is won before the first special combination is won, the second special game state is entered, and the second special game state is the game value. Function as an increasing period. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, when the first special winning combination is won before the second special winning combination is won, the first special gaming state is transitioned to, and operation information related to the stop operation is not notified in the first special gaming state. , The first special game state functions as a reduction period during which the game value decreases.

Therefore, in the normal game state, the player can continue an advantageous game period by repeating the shift to the second special game state without shifting to the first special game state, but the first special game state. When the game state is entered, the player cannot continue the advantageous game period unless the first special game state is ended and the normal game state is entered.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, when the specific notification condition is satisfied, in the first special gaming state, operation information regarding a stop operation in which a predetermined number of game values are awarded when a predetermined winning combination is won is provided. Be notified. Since the first special game state ends when a prescribed number of game values are given, the end timing of the first special game state can be advanced by notifying such information. That is, it is possible to change the period until the normal game state in which the second special game state can be entered is changed depending on whether or not the operation information regarding the stop operation is notified in the first special game state. Therefore, by making it possible to change the period until the state shifts to the advantageous state, it is possible to make the game rich in variety.

In the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the period in which the operation information regarding the stop operation is notified in the first special game state may also function as the increase period. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even during the period until the state shifts to the advantageous state.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the first special game state, it is possible to further shift to the first specific permission state, and in the second special game state, it is possible to further shift to the second specific permission state, and the first special game state. Then, regardless of whether it is in the first specific permission state, the period in which the operation information regarding the stop operation is not notified is made to function as the reduction period, and in the second special game state, the period in the second specific permission state is increased. You may make it function as. By doing so, the playability can be further varied and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[A game machine having 20th to 22nd configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined advantageous condition is established, it shifts to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, while when a predetermined disadvantageous condition is established, it has a certain state in which it shifts to a disadvantageous state that is disadvantageous to the player. It is known that the advantageous state for the player can be continued by repeating the transition from the predetermined state to the advantageous state without shifting to (see, for example, JP 2010-167197 A). ).

However, in such a gaming machine, when the state shifts from the predetermined state to the disadvantageous state, the state does not become advantageous to the player until the state shifts to the predetermined state again. There was a problem that it would end up.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a game motivation and interest.

To achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can provide a twentieth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
Internal winning from a plurality of combinations including a special combination (for example, BB in another example (3) of game play) and a specific combination (for example, small push order combination in another example (3) of game play) An internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining a combination,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping variable display of symbols,
When the variable display of symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege providing unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that can provide a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and a game including Machine,
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state (for example, RT0 state in another example (3) of gaming nature), a special gaming state (for example, BB state in other example (3) of gaming nature) and a specific gaming state ( For example, having another example of playability (RT1 state in Part 3),
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols relating to BB in another example (3) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special game state is started, and the special end condition is satisfied. Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state,
The specific game state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, a bell-shaped eye in another example (3) of playability) is displayed on the symbol display means, and when a specific end condition is satisfied, Specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the specific game state,
And a notifying unit (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying operation information regarding the stop operation of the player,
When the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a special permission that allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit. Continue the state (for example, the BB permission state in another example (3) of game play),
The specific game state control means, in the normal game state which is not the special permission state, when the combination of the specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, start the specific game state,
The specific ending condition is met when a prescribed number of games (for example, 500 games) are played,
The stop control means,
In the specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is not possible to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means,
If the specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means when a stop operation is performed in a specific aspect, and in the specific aspect. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbol on the symbol display means,
When the specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the privilege granting means makes it possible to grant a specific number of game values when a stop operation is performed in the specific winning combination, and the special winning combination is stopped in the specific winning combination. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to give the specified number of game values,
When the specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the normal game state and the specific game state may be set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the notification information is notified by the notification unit. A gaming machine characterized by being possible.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least the period in which the operation information related to the specific mode is notified by the notification means in the specific game state functions as an increase period in which the game value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special combination is won, a special permission state is entered, and in the normal gaming state, it is possible to display a combination of special symbols and shift to a special gaming state, If it is a specific game state, it is not possible to display a combination of special symbols and shift to the special game state until the specific game state ends. Further, the specific game state, based on the combination of specific symbols is displayed without a stop operation in a specific mode when a specific winning combination is won in a normal game state that is not the special permission state. Then, when the specific notification condition is satisfied, during the specific period in the normal game state and the specific game state, operation information regarding a specific aspect is notified when a specific winning combination is won, and if a stop operation is performed according to the notification, A combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, in the normal gaming state, when a specific period during which operation information regarding a specific aspect is notified is given, the shift to the special gaming state is performed without shifting to the specific gaming state. It is possible not only to repeat the game (that is, to continue the game period advantageous to the player), but also to increase the game value given when the specific combination is won. Also, in the specific game state, when it becomes a specific period in which operation information regarding a specific mode is notified, it is not possible to shift to the special game state unless the specific game state ends, but when a specific winning combination is won. The game value given to the player will increase. In addition, even in a case where the normal game state is not in a specific period in which operation information related to a specific mode is notified, it may be possible to repeat the transition to the special game state without shifting to the specific game state. ..

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether the game is in the normal game state or the specific game state, whether or not it is the specific period during which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal game state, or the specific game state is specified. It is possible to variably change the degree of advantage of the player depending on whether or not it is a specific period in which the operation information regarding the mode is notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game motivation and interest.

In the gaming machine configured as described above, at least the period in which the operation information related to the specific mode is notified in the specific game state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the game value increases. By doing so, the game value may increase even in the specific game state, so that the interest of the game can be maintained even during the specific game state in which the special game state is not entered.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a twenty-first gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
Special combination (for example, BB in another example of playability (4)), special combination (for example, MB in another example of playability (4)) and specific combination (for example, other example of playability ( Internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including the pressing order small combination in 4).
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping variable display of symbols,
When the variable display of symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege providing unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that can provide a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and a game including Machine,
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state (for example, RT0 state in another example of gaming property (4)), a special gaming state, a special gaming state (for example, BB state in another example of gaming property (4)), Having a first specific game state (for example, RT1 state in another example of playability (4)) and a second specific game state (for example, RT2 state in other example of playability (fourth)),
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to BB in another example (4) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special game state is started, and the special ending condition is satisfied. Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state,
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols relating to MB in another example (4) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special game state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case,
When the first specific game state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, a bell-shaped eye in another example (4) of game nature) is displayed on the symbol display means, and a specific end condition is satisfied First specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the first specific game state,
A second specific game capable of controlling to start the second specific game state when the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination and to end the second specific game state when the special game state is started. A state control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
And a notifying unit (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying operation information regarding the stop operation of the player,
When the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a special permission that allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit. The state (for example, the BB permission state in another example (4) of game play) is continued,
When the special winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a special permission that allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol displaying unit until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol displaying unit. Continue the state (for example, MB permission state in another example of playability (4)),
The internal winning combination determination means,
In the special permission state, it is not possible to determine the special winning combination as an internal winning combination,
In the special permission state, it is not possible to determine the special winning combination as an internal winning combination,
In the normal game state and the first specific game state, which is neither the special permission state nor the special permission state, the special combination or the special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination,
The first specific game state control means, in the special permission state and the normal game state is not the special permission state, when the combination of the specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the first specific game state, Let it start,
The stop control means,
In the second specific game state, which is the special permission state, without making it difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means,
In the first specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means,
If the specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means when a stop operation is performed in a specific aspect, and in the specific aspect. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbol on the symbol display means,
When the specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the privilege granting means makes it possible to grant a specific number of game values when a stop operation is performed in the specific winning combination, and the special winning combination is stopped in the specific winning combination. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to give the specified number of game values,
When the specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the normal game state and the first specific game state is set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the notification information notifies the operation information related to the specific mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least a period in which the operation information related to the specific mode is notified by the notification means in the first specific game state functions as an increase period in which a game value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, when a special winning is won, it becomes a special permission state and shifts to the second specific game state, and it is difficult to display a combination of special symbols and shift to the special game state. On the other hand, if you win the special combination, you will be in a special permission state, but the game state will not shift, and if it is the first specific game state, the combination of special symbols will be displayed until the first specific game state ends. Therefore, it is difficult to shift to the special game state, and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Further, in the first specific game state, when the special combination is won in the special permission state and the normal game state which is not the special permission state, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed without performing the stop operation in the specific mode. Based on the transition. Then, when the specific notification condition is satisfied, during the specific period in the normal game state and the first specific game state, operation information regarding a specific mode is notified when a specific winning combination is won, and a stop operation is performed according to the notification. For example, a combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, in the normal game state, when a specific combination is won, a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a special combination or a special combination is won before the first specific game state is entered. If the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permitted state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game in the normal game state again via the special game state.

Under such a game property, in the normal game state, when a specific period during which operation information related to a specific mode is notified is given, the special game state (or the special game state) is entered without shifting to the first specific game state. It is possible not only to repeat the shift (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also to increase the game value given when the specific combination is won. Further, in the first specific game state, when the specific period during which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified is given, for example, in the case of the special permission state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state via the special game state. Although difficult, the game value given when a specific combination is won is increased. In addition, even in the normal game state, even if it is not a specific period in which operation information related to a specific mode is notified, a transition to the special game state (or a special game state) without transition to the first specific game state May be repeated.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, whether the game is in the normal game state or the first specific game state, in what order the special combination, the special combination, or the specific combination is won in the normal game state, the first specific game. In a state, a special combination or a special combination is won in an order, whether or not it is a specific period in which operation information related to a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or a specific mode in the first specific gaming state It is possible to variably change the degree of advantage of the player according to whether or not it is a specific period in which the operation information is notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game motivation and interest.

In the gaming machine configured as described above, at least the period in which the operation information related to the specific mode is notified in the first specific game state may function as an increase period in which the game value increases. By doing so, the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, so that the interest of the game is maintained even during the specific game state in which it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a twenty-second gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
Special combination (for example, BB in another example of playability (4)), special combination (for example, MB in another example of playability (4)) and specific combination (for example, other example of playability ( Internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including the pressing order small combination in 4).
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping variable display of symbols,
When the variable display of symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege providing unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that can provide a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and a game including Machine,
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state (for example, RT0 state in another example of gaming property (4)), a special gaming state, a special gaming state (for example, BB state in another example of gaming property (4)), Having a first specific game state (for example, RT1 state in another example of playability (4)) and a second specific game state (for example, RT2 state in other example of playability (fourth)),
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to BB in another example (4) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special game state is started, and the special ending condition is satisfied. Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state,
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols relating to MB in another example (4) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special game state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case,
When the first specific game state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, a bell-shaped eye in another example (4) of game nature) is displayed on the symbol display means, and a specific end condition is satisfied First specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the first specific game state,
A second specific game capable of controlling to start the second specific game state when the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination and to end the second specific game state when the special game state is started. A state control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
And a notifying unit (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying operation information regarding the stop operation of the player,
When the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a special permission that allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit. The state (for example, the BB permission state in another example (4) of game play) is continued,
When the special winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a special permission that allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol displaying unit until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol displaying unit. Continue the state (for example, MB permission state in another example of playability (4)),
The internal winning combination determination means,
In the special permission state, it is not possible to determine the special winning combination as an internal winning combination,
In the special permission state, it is not possible to determine the special winning combination as an internal winning combination,
In the normal game state and the first specific game state, which is neither the special permission state nor the special permission state, the special combination or the special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination,
The first specific game state control means, in the special permission state and the normal game state is not the special permission state, when the combination of the specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the first specific game state, Let it start,
The specific ending condition is satisfied when a specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) are played, and is not satisfied when the special game state is started,
The stop control means,
In the second specific game state, which is the special permission state, without making it difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means,
In the first specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means,
If the specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means when a stop operation is performed in a specific aspect, and in the specific aspect. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbol on the symbol display means,
When the specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the privilege granting means makes it possible to grant a specific number of game values when a stop operation is performed in the specific winning combination, and the special winning combination is stopped in the specific winning combination. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to give the specified number of game values,
When the specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the normal game state and the first specific game state is set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the notification information notifies the operation information related to the specific mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least a period in which the operation information related to the specific mode is notified by the notification means in the first specific game state functions as an increase period in which a game value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, when a special winning is won, it becomes a special permission state and shifts to the second specific game state, and it is difficult to display a combination of special symbols and shift to the special game state. On the other hand, if the special combination is won, the special permission state is entered, but the game state does not shift, and if the first specific game state, a prescribed number of games are played and the first specific game state ends. Until it is difficult to display the combination of special symbols and shift to the special game state, and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Further, in the first specific game state, when the special combination is won in the special permission state and the normal game state which is not the special permission state, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed without performing the stop operation in the specific mode. Based on the transition. Then, when the specific notification condition is satisfied, during the specific period in the normal game state and the first specific game state, operation information regarding a specific mode is notified when a specific winning combination is won, and a stop operation is performed according to the notification. For example, a combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, in the normal game state, when a specific combination is won, a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a special combination or a special combination is won before the first specific game state is entered. If the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permitted state is achieved, it becomes difficult to play the game in the normal game state again until the specified number of games have been played.

Under such a game property, in the normal game state, when a specific period during which operation information related to a specific mode is notified is given, the special game state (or the special game state) is entered without shifting to the first specific game state. It is possible not only to repeat the shift (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also to increase the game value given when the specific combination is won. Further, in the first specific game state, when the specific period during which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified is given, for example, in the case of the special permission state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state via the special game state. Although difficult, the game value given when a specific combination is won is increased. In addition, even in the normal game state, even if it is not a specific period in which operation information related to a specific mode is notified, a transition to the special game state (or a special game state) without transition to the first specific game state May be repeated.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, whether the game is in the normal game state or the first specific game state, in what order the special combination, the special combination, or the specific combination is won in the normal game state, the first specific game. In a state, a special combination or a special combination is won in an order, whether or not it is a specific period in which operation information related to a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or a specific mode in the first specific gaming state It is possible to variably change the degree of advantage of the player according to whether or not it is a specific period in which the operation information is notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game motivation and interest.

In the gaming machine configured as described above, at least the period in which the operation information related to the specific mode is notified in the first specific game state may function as an increase period in which the game value increases. By doing so, the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, so that the interest of the game is maintained even during the specific game state in which it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made

[Game Machines of 23rd and 24th Configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state (eg, ART state) advantageous to a player when a specific condition is satisfied while a special combination (eg, bonus role) is being carried over. There are known ones (see, for example, JP-A-2015-73810).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, the amount of game value given per unit game in the advantageous state (gradient value indicating the amount of increase in game value) is designed to be a constant value. Therefore, there is a problem that the change in game playability is poor.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and by making it possible to change the inclination value indicating the increase amount of the game value in the advantageous state, it is possible to make the game property rich in change. An object is to provide a game machine that can be used.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 23rd gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A first special combination (for example, BB1 in another example of playability (5)), a second special combination (for example, BB3 in another example of playability (5)), a first predetermined combination (for example, game) Of the small push order wins 1, 3, 5 in other examples of sex (No. 5) and the second predetermined winning role (for example, the small push orders 2, 4, 6 in other examples of game play (No. 5)) An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations including
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping variable display of symbols,
When the variable display of symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege providing unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that can provide a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and a game including Machine,
When a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to BB1 in another example (5) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, a first special game state (for example, other game property) The first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB1 state in the example (5)
A second special game state (for example, other game property) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to BB3 in another example (5) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means. Second special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB3 state in the example (No. 5),
An advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling in an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous zone) in which information regarding a stop operation of the player is notified,
When the first special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit. The first special permission state (for example, between BB1 flags in another example (5) of game nature) in which is permitted is continued,
When the second special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit. The second special permission state (for example, between BB3 flags in another example (5) of game nature) in which is permitted is continued,
The internal winning combination determination means overlaps each of the first special winning combination and the second special winning combination with another internal winning combination when neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is present. Can be decided as an internal winning combination without
The stop control means,
In a game in which the first special winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and in a game in which no other internal winning combination is determined in the first special permission state, when the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, It is possible to display the combination of the first special symbol on the symbol display means,
In the game in which the second special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and in the game in which no other internal winning combination is determined in the second special permission state, when the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, It is possible to display a combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means,
In the first special permission state, when the first predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game values are displayed on the symbol display means regardless of the order of stop operations by the player. Display the combination of predetermined symbols to be given,
In the first special permission state, when the second predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of the predetermined symbols is not displayed on the symbol display means regardless of the order of the stop operation by the player,
In the second special permission state, when the first predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the symbol display means when the order of the stop operation of the player is appropriate. On the other hand, when the order of the stop operation by the player is not appropriate, the symbol display means does not display the combination of the predetermined symbols,
In the second special permission state, if the second predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and if the order of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the pattern display means. On the other hand, when the order of the stop operation by the player is not appropriate, the symbol display means does not display the combination of the predetermined symbols,
The advantageous state control means can set at least a specific period in the second special permission state to the advantageous state when a specific advantageous condition is satisfied,
In the advantageous state, when any one of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the player's stop operation for displaying the combination of the predetermined symbols on the symbol display means. A gaming machine characterized by being informed of the order.

The internal winning combination determination means,
The first special winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination with a first probability (for example, 1/100),
The second special combination is determined as an internal winning combination with a second probability (for example, 1/450) lower than the first probability,
The probability that no other internal winning combination is determined in the first special permission state (for example, 1/4000) is more than the probability that no other internal winning combination is determined in the second special permission state (for example, 1/65536). A gaming machine characterized by high price.

The timing of the stop operation of the player capable of displaying the combination of the first special symbols on the symbol display means is the timing of the player capable of displaying the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means. A game machine characterized by not overlapping the timing of the stop operation.

In the game in which the first special combination or the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to inform that either the first special combination or the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination. However, a predetermined notification execution means (for example, the display device 11) capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, bonus winning notification) that does not allow the type to be notified,
In the first special permission state, it is possible to notify that the combination of the first special symbols is permitted to be displayed on the symbol display means, and in the second special permission state, the symbol display means Further, a specific notification executing means (for example, the display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification (for example, bonus type notification) that can notify that the combination of the second special symbols is permitted to be displayed. A game machine characterized by having it.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first special winning combination or the second special winning combination is won, another internal winning combination is determined in the game concerned or in the first special permission state or the second special permission state after winning. Unless the game is not played (so-called, lost), the combination of the first special symbol or the combination of the second special symbol cannot be displayed. Further, in the first special permission state, when the first predetermined winning combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the pushing order, and when the second predetermined winning combination is won, the predetermined number of gaming values is obtained regardless of the pushing order. Not granted. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given if the pushing order is correct and a predetermined number of games are given if the pushing order is incorrect. No value is given. Then, at least during the specific period of the second special permission state, it is possible to control to an advantageous state in which the information of the stop operation of the player is notified.

That is, if the first special combination is won and the combination of the first special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the first special permission state is finished. The profits do not fluctuate due to this, and the player can receive a certain amount of profits, but the profits do not increase dramatically, so even if it becomes advantageous, it shows the amount of increase in the game value. The slope value will be relatively low. On the other hand, if the second special combination is won, and the combination of the second special symbols is not displayed in the game, then the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the second special permission state ends. As a result, profits fluctuate, and the player may suffer a disadvantage more than in the first special permission state, but when the advantageous state is reached, the profit is dramatically increased. The slope value indicating the increase in value is relatively high. Therefore, by making it possible to change the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value during the advantageous state, it is possible to make the game play rich in variety.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the winning probability of the first special combination is made higher than the winning probability of the second special combination, and the probability that the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state is the second. In the special permission state, the combination of the second special symbols may be set higher than the displayable probability. That is, the first special permission state may be set to a state in which it is easier to transition than the second special permission state and to be finished, and the second special permission state may be set to a state in which transition is less likely to occur and termination is more difficult than in the first special permission state. In this way, the enjoyment of the game can be maintained while the gambling property is moderate.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, the combination of the first special symbol relating to the first special combination and the second special symbol relating to the second special symbol cannot be aimed at simultaneously when the player makes a detent. You may comprise so that it may be arrange|positioned at intervals. By doing so, the playability can be further varied and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, when the first special combination or the second special combination is won, the fact that the one is won is notified, but the type is not notified, and the first special permission state and The type may be notified in the second special permission state. By doing so, it is possible to notify the information desired by the player while further enhancing the playability.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a twenty-fourth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A first special combination (for example, BB1 in another example of playability (6)), a second special combination (for example, BB2 in another example of playability (6)), and a specific combination (for example, playability) An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including “F_REP B” in another example (6).
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping variable display of symbols,
When the variable display of symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege providing unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that can provide a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and a game including Machine,
When a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to BB1 in another example of game property (6)) is displayed on the symbol display means, a first special game state (for example, other game property) The first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB1 state in the example (6)
A second special game state (for example, other game property) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to BB2 in another example (6) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means. Second special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB2 state in the example (6)
An advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling in an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous zone) in which information regarding a stop operation of the player is notified,
When the first special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit. The first special permission state (for example, between the BB1 flags in another example (6) of game nature) that is permitted is continued,
When the second special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit. The second special permission state (for example, between the BB2 flags in another example (6) of game nature) in which is permitted is continued,
The internal winning combination determination means,
In a case where neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is set and the game value bet is the first amount (for example, 3), the first special combination is internally won. When the bet game value is the second amount (for example, 2 cards), it is not possible to determine the first special combination as an internal winning combination,
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state, and the bet game value is the second amount, it is possible to determine the second special combination as an internal winning combination. When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination,
The stop control means,
When the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, in the case of the first special permission state, a combination of specific symbols on the symbol display means (for example, chance of another example (6) of game nature) ) Is not possible, and in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means,
The advantageous state control means,
When the game value bet is the first amount, at least when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, the advantage It is possible to decide whether to add a state,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to decide whether or not to give the advantageous state.

The stop control means,
When the game value bet is the first amount, in the case of the first special permission state, it is possible to display the combination of the first special symbol on the symbol display means, the second In the special permission state, it is not possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means,
When the game value bet is the second amount, in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means, the first In the special permission state, it is not possible to display the combination of the first special symbol on the symbol display means, a gaming machine.

The internal winning combination determination means further includes a first predetermined combination (for example, the pushing order bell A in another example of playability (6)) and a second predetermined combination (for example, another example of playability (6)). It is possible to decide the push order bell B) as an internal winning combination,
The stop control means,
When the first predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and if the mode of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, one of the predetermined symbol combinations to which a predetermined number of game values are given is displayed on the symbol display means. If the mode of the player's stop operation is not appropriate, the symbol display means does not display the combination of the predetermined symbols,
When the second predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the bet game value is the first amount and the first special permission state is set, regardless of the mode of the stop operation of the player. Instead, the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, the bet game value is the first amount and the second special permission state, and the bet game value is the second. If the mode of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed, while if the mode of the stop operation of the player is not appropriate, the symbol display means Without displaying the combination of predetermined symbols,
In the advantageous state, a game machine characterized in that information indicating a mode of a stop operation of a player for displaying a combination of the predetermined symbols on the symbol display means is notified.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, when the bet game value is the first amount, the first special combination can be won, while the second special combination cannot be won. When the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be won, but the first special combination cannot be won. When the winning combination is won, the combination of specific symbols cannot be displayed in the first special permission state, and the combination of specific symbols can be displayed in the second special permission state. Then, when the bet game value is the first amount, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, whether or not the advantageous state is given When the bet gaming value is the second amount, it is not possible to decide whether or not to give the advantageous state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the bet game value is the first amount, the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed, while the combination of the second special symbols cannot be displayed. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount, the combination of the second special symbols may be displayed, while the combination of the first special symbols may not be displayed.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, as a state in which the game is played, for example, a state in which the game value is bet with a first amount of game value being bet, and a second special permission state. And a state in which a first amount of game value is bet and a game is performed, a state in which a first amount of game value is bet and a game is performed, and a second special permission It is possible to create a plurality of states such as a state in which the second amount of game value is bet and the game is played.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, a state in which the game is played by betting the first amount of the game value in the second special permission state is defined as a state in which the giving of the advantageous state is favored, A state in which a game value of 2 is bet and a game is played is a state in which an advantageous state is not given. That is, regarding the provision of the advantageous state, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player depending on which amount of game value is bet, which special combination is won, and the like. Therefore, by making it possible to change the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value during the advantageous state, it is possible to make the game play rich in variety.

In the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, when the first predetermined winning combination is won, regardless of which state it is, for example, if the correct pushing order is given, a predetermined number of gaming values are given and the pushing order is improper. If the answer is correct, a predetermined number of game values will not be given, and if the second predetermined combination is won, it will be in a state where the first amount of game value is bet and the game is performed with the first amount of game value being bet. Then, for example, while a predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the pressing order, in other states, the same control as the first predetermined winning combination may be performed. In this way, the state in which the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played in the first special permission state can be set to the state where the giving of the game value is preferentially given in the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, the game play can be made more varied.

[Amusement machines with 25th to 27th configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to store a winning history for a predetermined number of games, and when a winning history satisfies a predetermined condition, a predetermined privilege (for example, notification right) can be granted. There are known ones (see, for example, JP 2012-205882 A).

However, in such a gaming machine, since the condition for giving a predetermined privilege is predetermined, for example, when the current winning history cannot meet the predetermined condition, the player does not There was a problem that I could not hold my expectations and the interest in the game was diminished.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the player in terms of granting a privilege.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a twenty-fifth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A winning combination determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a first combination (for example, replay combination) and a second combination (for example, bell),
Based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of symbols is provided. A gaming machine,
A first state (e.g., a first awarding state) in which a privilege (e.g., points) can be awarded when the first winning combination is won, and a second state in which the award can be awarded when the second winning combination is won. (For example, a second imparting state), and a state determining unit capable of determining any one of a plurality of states,
A state display unit (for example, a state display area (MP)) capable of displaying a state suggestion display including a first display indicating the first state and a second display indicating the second state. ,
The state display means displays the state suggestion display according to the determination result by the state determination means for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period. Amusement machine.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the state determining means determines a state in a predetermined game in the second period according to a winning combination in the game.

The state determining means determines the state in the predetermined game of the second period to the first state when the first combination is won in the game, and when the second combination is won in the game, The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the state in a predetermined game of the second period is determined to be the second state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to determine any one of a plurality of states (for example, the first granting state to the fourth granting state) relating to the grant of the privilege (for example, points). Further, it is possible to display a plurality of state suggestion displays (for example, first display to fourth display) according to the determined state. Then, the state suggestion display can be displayed for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period according to the determined state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in giving the privilege.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to determine the state of the predetermined game in the second period according to the winning combination in the game. That is, according to the game result of the player himself/herself, the advantage degree of the game changes and the advantage degree in the subsequent game is determined. As a result, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, when the first combination is won in the game, the state in the predetermined game in the second period becomes the first state, and when the second combination is won in the game state. Is configured so that the state in the predetermined game in the second period becomes the second state. As a result, since the winning combination in the game becomes a chance combination in the subsequent predetermined game, it is possible to easily understand the game property that the subsequent state is generated according to the game result of the player himself. The interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 26th gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A winning combination determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a first combination (for example, replay combination) and a second combination (for example, bell),
Based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of symbols is provided. A gaming machine,
A first state (e.g., a first awarding state) in which a privilege (e.g., points) can be awarded when the first winning combination is won, and a second state in which the award can be awarded when the second winning combination is won. (For example, a second imparting state), and a state determining unit capable of determining any one of a plurality of states,
A state display means (for example, a state display area (MP)) capable of displaying a state suggestion display including a first display suggesting the first state and a second display suggesting the second state;
When the first start condition is satisfied (for example, when the winning rep 3 is won), until the first end condition is satisfied (for example, until 10 games are played), the winning probability of the first combination is A first game state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs RT check processing) that can be controlled to an increasing first game state (for example, RT3),
When the second start condition is satisfied (for example, when a bonus combination is won), until the second end condition is satisfied (for example, until a game value exceeding a preset game value number is given). And a second game state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a BB check process) capable of controlling a second game state (for example, a bonus state) in which the winning probability of the second combination is increased,
The state display means displays the state suggestion display according to the determination result by the state determination means for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period regardless of the game state. A gaming machine characterized by being.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the state determining means determines a state in a predetermined game in the second period according to a winning combination in the game.

The state determining means determines the state in the predetermined game of the second period to the first state when the first combination is won in the game, and when the second combination is won in the game, The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the state in a predetermined game of the second period is determined to be the second state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to determine any one of a plurality of states (for example, the first granting state to the fourth granting state) relating to the grant of the privilege (for example, points). Further, it is possible to display a plurality of state suggestion displays (for example, first display to fourth display) according to the determined state. Then, the state suggestion display can be displayed for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period according to the determined state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in giving the privilege.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, for example, a first state (for example, a first granted state) in which a privilege can be awarded when a first combination (for example, a replay combination) is won, and a second combination (for example, a combination) , Bell) has a second state (for example, a second awarding state) in which a privilege can be given when the winning is achieved, and when the first start condition is satisfied (for example, when the winning lip 3 is won), Until the end condition of 1 is satisfied (for example, until a game of 10 games is played), the control can be performed in the first game state (for example, RT3) in which the winning probability of the first combination is increased, and the second start condition is satisfied. In this case (for example, when a bonus combination is won), the winning probability of the second combination increases until the second end condition is satisfied (for example, a game value exceeding a preset game value number is given). The second game state (for example, a bonus state) can be controlled. The state suggestion display is displayed regardless of the game state. That is, it is possible to create a plurality of states in which the ease with which a privilege is granted is different. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player regarding the grant of the privilege.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to determine the state of the predetermined game in the second period according to the winning combination in the game. That is, according to the game result of the player himself/herself, the advantage degree of the game changes and the advantage degree in the subsequent game is determined. As a result, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, when the first combination is won in the game, the state in the predetermined game in the second period becomes the first state, and when the second combination is won in the game state. Is configured so that the state in the predetermined game in the second period becomes the second state. As a result, since the winning combination in the game becomes a chance combination in the subsequent predetermined game, it is possible to easily understand the game property that the subsequent state is generated according to the game result of the player himself. The interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a twenty-seventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A winning combination determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a first combination (for example, replay combination) and a second combination (for example, bell),
Based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of symbols is provided. A gaming machine,
A first state (e.g., a first awarding state) in which a privilege (e.g., points) can be awarded when the first winning combination is won, and a second state in which the award can be awarded when the second winning combination is won. (For example, a second imparting state), and a state determining unit capable of determining any one of a plurality of states,
A state display means (for example, a state display area (MP)) capable of displaying a state suggestion display including a first display suggesting the first state and a second display suggesting the second state;
When a specific start condition is satisfied (for example, when an AT-winning lottery is won), a notification state control unit (for example, AT) that controls the player to a notification state (for example, AT) in which information of the stop operation can be notified for a specific period. , A main CPU 101),
The state display means displays the state suggestion display according to the determination result by the state determination means for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period,
When not controlled to the notification state, the specific start condition is set when the privilege granted in the first state and the second state has a predetermined result (for example, when a specified point is reached). It is possible to decide whether to establish it,
When controlled to the notification state, it is possible to determine whether to extend the specific period when the privilege granted in the first state and the second state has the predetermined result. A gaming machine characterized by.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the state determining means determines a state in a predetermined game in the second period according to a winning combination in the game.

The state determining means determines the state in the predetermined game of the second period to the first state when the first combination is won in the game, and when the second combination is won in the game, The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the state in a predetermined game of the second period is determined to be the second state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to determine any one of a plurality of states (for example, the first granting state to the fourth granting state) relating to the grant of the privilege (for example, points). Further, it is possible to display a plurality of state suggestion displays (for example, first display to fourth display) according to the determined state. Then, the state suggestion display can be displayed for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period according to the determined state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in giving the privilege.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the informed state is not controlled (for example, during non-ART), when the granted privilege has a predetermined result (for example, a specified point is reached). It is possible to decide whether or not to control to the notification state, and when the notification state is controlled (for example, during AT), the notification state is extended when the granted privilege has a predetermined result. It is possible to decide whether or not. That is, regardless of which state the privilege granting is, the player's great concern is given. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player regarding the grant of the privilege.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to determine the state of the predetermined game in the second period according to the winning combination in the game. That is, according to the game result of the player himself/herself, the advantage degree of the game changes and the advantage degree in the subsequent game is determined. As a result, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, when the first combination is won in the game, the state in the predetermined game in the second period becomes the first state, and when the second combination is won in the game state. Is configured so that the state in the predetermined game in the second period becomes the second state. As a result, since the winning combination in the game becomes a chance combination in the subsequent predetermined game, it is possible to easily understand the game property that the subsequent state is generated according to the game result of the player himself. The interest of the game can be further improved.

[Amusement machines with 28th to 30th configurations]
It is known that, in a conventional gaming machine, a plurality of lottery items having different execution conditions can be executed, and if any one of the lottery items is won, it is possible to give an advantageous privilege (eg, notification right) to the player. (For example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-200498).

However, in such a gaming machine, if the lottery is won, the interest of the game is increased, but if the lottery is not won, the interest of the game is not increased and the game becomes monotonous. There was a problem that it lacked fun.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to execute a plurality of different lottery that is advantageous to the player, and the expectation of the player is maintained regardless of which lottery is performed. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the player.

To achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can provide a twenty-eighth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A winning combination determination means capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process),
Based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of symbols is provided. A gaming machine,
A lottery means capable of executing a plurality of different lottery which is advantageous to the player (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of performing various lottery shown in FIG. 132),
A specific right granting unit (eg, a main CPU 101 capable of granting a re-lottery right) capable of granting a specific right when a specific grant condition is satisfied;
In the case where the specific right is granted, and if any lottery is executed by the lottery means and the lottery is not won, a re-lottery means for executing re-lottery on the lottery (for example, re-lottery A main CPU 101) capable of performing re-lottery according to a right, and a gaming machine.

A normal state (for example, a non-AT normal game state), a predetermined state (for example, a non-AT mission state and a CZ state), and an advantageous state (for example, AT),
It is possible to shift from the normal state to the predetermined state in accordance with the fact that a game of a cycle period has been played (for example, 150 games have been played as the number of cycle games),
From the predetermined state to the advantageous state, it is possible to shift in accordance with the fact that a specific transition condition is satisfied in the predetermined state (for example, winning the AT granted lottery),
The lottery means,
In the normal state, it is possible to execute a first lottery (for example, a normal shortened lottery) capable of shortening the cycle period,
In the predetermined state, it is possible to execute a second lottery (for example, an AT-attached lottery) capable of satisfying the specific transition condition,
At least the first lottery and the second lottery are lottery that is a target of re-lottery by the re-lottery means.

Even when the re-lottery is executed by the re-lottery means, the lottery targeted for re-lottery may not be won in some cases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different lotteries (for example, various lottery shown in FIG. 132) which is advantageous to the player, and to grant a specific right (for example, re-lottery right). Is possible. Then, in the case where the specific right is granted, and if any of the lottery is executed and the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is executed for the lottery. That is, no matter which lottery is performed, if the specific right is given, the player can have a sense of expectation including re-lottery. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of different lotteries that are advantageous to the player, to keep the player's expectation regardless of which lottery is performed, and to improve the interest of the player.

Note that the lottery targeted for re-lottery includes a first lottery (for example, a normal shortened lottery that is a shortened lottery of a cycle period for shifting from a normal state to a predetermined state), and a second lottery (for example, a predetermined lottery. It is possible to include an AT-assigned lottery, which is a transition lottery for shifting from the state to the advantageous state. That is, even when the state or the lottery target is different, the re-lottery based on the specific right can be executed. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be continued and the player's interest can be improved regardless of the game situation.

Further, even when re-lottery is executed, the lottery targeted may not be won. As a result, since the player plays the game with a feeling of tension both during the lottery and during the re-lottery, the interest in the re-lottery can be further improved.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 29th gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A winning combination determination means capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process),
Based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of symbols is provided. A gaming machine,
A lottery means capable of executing a plurality of different lottery which is advantageous to the player (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of performing various lottery shown in FIG. 132),
A specific right granting unit (eg, a main CPU 101 capable of granting a re-lottery right) capable of granting a specific right when a specific grant condition is satisfied;
In the case where the specific right is granted, and if any lottery is executed by the lottery means and the lottery is not won, a re-lottery means for executing re-lottery on the lottery (for example, re-lottery A main CPU 101) capable of performing re-lottery according to the right,
A normal state (for example, a non-AT normal game state), a predetermined state (for example, a non-AT CZ state), and an advantageous state (for example, AT),
From the predetermined state to the advantageous state, it is possible to shift in accordance with the fact that a specific transition condition is satisfied in the predetermined state (for example, winning the AT granted lottery),
The lottery means,
In the predetermined state, it is possible to execute a specific lottery (for example, AT-assigned lottery) capable of satisfying the specific transition condition,
The specific lottery is a lottery subject to re-lottery by the re-lottery means,
In the predetermined state, there is a first situation in which the specific transition condition is less likely to be satisfied, and a second situation in which the specific transition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first situation.
When re-lottery is performed based on the specific right when the specific transition condition is not satisfied from the second situation, the situation in which the specific transition condition is less likely to be established than in the second situation is A gaming machine characterized by being a random lottery.

Further having a special state (eg, a non-AT mission state),
It is possible to shift from the normal state to the special state according to the fact that a game for a cycle period has been played (for example, 150 games have been played as the number of cycle games),
It is possible to shift from the special state to the predetermined state in accordance with the fact that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the special state (for example, winning of the lottery for giving CZ).
The lottery means,
In the normal state, it is possible to execute a normal shortened lottery capable of shortening the cycle period,
In the normal state, in addition to the normal shortened lottery, it is possible to execute a special shortened lottery capable of shortening the cycle period,
In the special state, it is possible to execute a predetermined lottery (for example, a CZ-assigned lottery) capable of satisfying the predetermined transition condition,
The cycle period is shortened according to the lottery result by the special shortened lottery, and when the predetermined state is transitioned to, the predetermined transition condition is always satisfied in the predetermined state,
At least the normal shortened lottery and the predetermined lottery are lottery targeted for re-lottery by the re-lottery means. The above-mentioned gaming machine.

Even when the re-lottery is executed by the re-lottery means, the lottery targeted for re-lottery may not be won in some cases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different lotteries (for example, various lottery shown in FIG. 132) which is advantageous to the player, and to grant a specific right (for example, re-lottery right). Is possible. Then, in the case where the specific right is granted, and if any of the lottery is executed and the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is executed for the lottery. That is, no matter which lottery is performed, if the specific right is given, the player can have a sense of expectation including re-lottery. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of different lotteries that are advantageous to the player, to keep the player's expectation regardless of which lottery is performed, and to improve the interest of the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, it is possible to execute a specific lottery (for example, AT-assigned lottery) for shifting from a predetermined state to an advantageous state, and the specific lottery is a lottery targeted for re-lottery. There is. Here, in the predetermined state, for example, there are a first situation in which the expectation to win a specific lottery is low, and a second situation in which the expectation to win a specific lottery is higher than the first situation, and the predetermined state When the re-lottery is performed in the second situation, the re-lottery does not have a lower expectation of winning the specific lottery than the second situation. That is, the degree of expectation in the predetermined state is inherited even in the re-lottery. As a result, in the re-lottery, the expectation of the lottery targeted by the lottery is maintained, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to execute the normal shortened lottery and the special shortened lottery, which are the lottery for shortening the cycle period for shifting from the normal state to the special state, and shift from the special state to the predetermined state. It is possible to execute a predetermined lottery for this purpose (for example, a CZ imparting lottery). Here, the normal shortened lottery and the predetermined lottery are lottery targeted for re-lottery. In addition, when a special state is entered depending on the lottery result of the special shortened lottery, the special state is always entered. As a result, it is possible to make various expectations of transition to a predetermined game state (for example, a predetermined state) by a plurality of different lotteries, and to further enhance the interest of the player. Further, even if the state or the lottery target is different, the re-lottery based on the specific right can be executed. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be continued and the player's interest can be improved regardless of the game situation.

Further, even when re-lottery is executed, the lottery targeted may not be won. As a result, since the player plays the game with a feeling of tension both during the lottery and during the re-lottery, the interest in the re-lottery can be further improved.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a thirtieth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A winning combination determination means capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process),
Based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of symbols is provided. A gaming machine,
A lottery means capable of executing a plurality of different lottery which is advantageous to the player (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of performing various lottery shown in FIG. 132),
A specific right granting unit (eg, a main CPU 101 capable of granting a re-lottery right) capable of granting a specific right when a specific grant condition is satisfied;
In the case where the specific right is granted, and if any lottery is executed by the lottery means and the lottery is not won, a re-lottery means for executing re-lottery on the lottery (for example, re-lottery A main CPU 101) capable of performing re-lottery according to the right,
It has a normal state (for example, a normal game state or a CZ state during non-AT), an advantageous state (for example, during AT), and a specific state (for example, a pullback state during non-AT),
From the normal state to the advantageous state, it is possible to transition in accordance with the fact that a specific transition condition is established in the normal state (for example, winning the AT assigned lottery),
It is possible to shift from the advantageous state to the specific state according to the end of the game period in the advantageous state,
It is possible to shift from the specific state to the normal state in accordance with the end of the game period in the specific state without satisfying a predetermined transition condition in the specific state (for example, without winning the AT pullback lottery). And
It is possible to shift from the specific state to the advantageous state in response to the predetermined transition condition being satisfied in the specific state before the game period in the specific state ends,
The lottery means,
In the normal state, it is possible to execute a first lottery capable of satisfying the specific transition condition (for example, an AT-assigned lottery),
In the specific state, it is possible to execute a second lottery capable of satisfying the predetermined transition condition (for example, AT pullback lottery),
At least the first lottery and the second lottery are lottery targeted for re-lottery by the re-lottery means.

The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, a first section in AT) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, a second section in AT),
It is possible to shift from the first advantageous state to the second advantageous state in accordance with the fact that a special transition condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state (for example, winning the AT promotion lottery).
The lottery means is capable of executing a third lottery (for example, AT promotion lottery) capable of establishing the special transition condition in the first advantageous state,
Further, the above-mentioned gaming machine is characterized in that the third lottery is a lottery targeted for re-lottery by the re-lottery means.

Even when the re-lottery is executed by the re-lottery means, the lottery targeted for re-lottery may not be won in some cases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different lotteries (for example, various lottery shown in FIG. 132) which is advantageous to the player, and to grant a specific right (for example, re-lottery right). Is possible. Then, in the case where the specific right is granted, and if any of the lottery is executed and the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is executed for the lottery. That is, no matter which lottery is performed, if the specific right is given, the player can have a sense of expectation including re-lottery. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of different lotteries that are advantageous to the player, to keep the player's expectation regardless of which lottery is performed, and to improve the interest of the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal state, the first lottery for shifting to the advantageous state (for example, AT-assigned lottery) can be executed, and in the specific state in which transition is made after the end of the advantageous state. The second lottery for shifting to the advantageous state again (for example, AT pullback lottery) can be executed. Then, the first lottery and the second lottery are lottery targeted for re-lottery. As a result, it is possible to make various expectations of transition to a predetermined game state (for example, an advantageous state) by a plurality of different lotteries, and to further enhance the interest of the player.

The lottery targeted for re-lottery may be configured to include a third lottery (for example, an AT promotion lottery that is a transition lottery for shifting from the first advantageous state to the second advantageous state). it can. That is, even when the state or the lottery target is different, the re-lottery based on the specific right can be executed. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be continued and the player's interest can be improved regardless of the game situation.

Further, even when re-lottery is executed, the lottery targeted may not be won. As a result, since the player plays the game with a feeling of tension both during the lottery and during the re-lottery, the interest in the re-lottery can be further improved.

[Game machines having the 31st to 33rd configurations]
A conventional gaming machine that has multiple modes, executes lottery with a winning probability according to the set mode, and is able to give a privilege (for example, a notification right) that is advantageous to the player if the lottery is won. Is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-200498).

However, in such a gaming machine, for example, when a mode that is unfavorable to the player is set, it is necessary to play the game while the expectation degree regarding the privilege grant is low, and the interest of the player is deteriorated. There was a problem that there is.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining the degree of expectation related to privilege granting and improving the player's interest regardless of the set state. With the goal.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 31st gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A winning combination determination means capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process),
Based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of symbols is provided. A gaming machine,
When a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, a probability of giving an advantageous state (for example, AT state) in a predetermined period (for example, 40 games) of a normal state (for example, non-AT normal game state) is set and set. Advantageous state imparting means capable of determining whether or not to impart the advantageous state according to the imparted probability (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of performing initial section imparting lottery),
A specific right granting unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of performing a lottery for granting rights) capable of determining whether or not to grant a specific right (for example, an advantageous right) when a specific grant condition is satisfied; Equipped with
When the specific right is granted, the gaming probability can be changed to a more advantageous one.

The predetermined determination condition can be established every time the game is played for the predetermined period in the normal state,
The grant probability is at least a first probability (eg, grant probability “3%”), a second probability higher than the first probability (eg, grant probability “20%”), and the second probability. And a third probability higher than the probability of (for example, the giving probability “50%”),
When the first probability is set when the grant probability is set, and the specific right is granted, the grant probability may be changed to the second probability. If the second probability is set and the specific right is granted, the grant probability can be changed to the third probability. The gaming machine described above.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the specific grant condition can be satisfied at least once during a specific period of the normal state (for example, 120 games).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the predetermined determination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state grant probability for a predetermined period of the normal state (for example, for 40 games) is set, and the advantageous state is set according to the set grant probability. Is determined. Here, when a specific right (for example, an advantageous right) is given, it is possible to change the giving probability to a more advantageous one. That is, for example, even if the giving probability that is relatively unfavorable to the player is set, the giving probability may become advantageous when the specific right is given. There is. Therefore, regardless of the set state, it is possible to maintain the degree of expectation regarding awarding and improve the player's interest.

The grant probability is set every time a game is played for a predetermined period in the normal state, and when the specific right is granted, the grant probability may be set to increase stepwise. it can. Thereby, the degree of expectation of the player may further change depending on the situation in which the specific right has been granted, so that the interest of the player can be further improved.

Further, it can be configured such that the determination as to whether or not the specific right is granted is made at least once during the specific period of the normal state (for example, 120 games). As a result, it is possible to provide a player who cannot play a game for a long time with an expectation of granting a specific right, so that the player's interest can be further improved while the gambling property is moderate.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 32nd gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A winning combination determination means capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process),
Based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of symbols is provided. A gaming machine,
When a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, a probability of giving an advantageous state (for example, AT state) in a predetermined period (for example, 40 games) of a normal state (for example, non-AT normal game state) is set and set. Advantageous state imparting means capable of determining whether or not to impart the advantageous state according to the imparted probability (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of performing initial section imparting lottery),
A specific right granting unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of performing a lottery for granting rights) capable of determining whether or not to grant a specific right (for example, an advantageous right) when a specific grant condition is satisfied; Equipped with
When the specific right is granted, it is possible to change the grant probability to a more advantageous one,
Further provided is a specific effect execution means (for example, the display device 11) capable of executing a specific effect for informing whether or not it is determined to give the advantageous state.
When the specific right is granted, the specific effect execution means is the specific effect in the first mode in which it is suggested that the specific right is granted before the start of the specific effect, and the specific effect. A game machine characterized by being capable of executing the specific effect in the second mode in which it is suggested that the specific right is granted during execution of.

When the specific right is granted, the specific effect execution means can execute the specific effect in a third aspect in which it is not suggested that the specific right is granted.
In the case where it has been decided to give the advantageous state, and the specific effect in the third aspect is executed by the specific effect execution means, it is possible to give a predetermined privilege in the advantageous state. The gaming machine described above, further comprising a privilege granting means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of granting a predetermined privilege).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the predetermined determination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state grant probability for a predetermined period of the normal state (for example, for 40 games) is set, and the advantageous state is set according to the set grant probability. Is determined. Here, when a specific right (for example, an advantageous right) is given, it is possible to change the giving probability to a more advantageous one. That is, for example, even if the giving probability that is relatively unfavorable to the player is set, the giving probability may become advantageous when the specific right is given. There is. Therefore, regardless of the set state, it is possible to maintain the degree of expectation regarding awarding and improve the player's interest.

Further, according to the gaming machine configured as described above, when the specific effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is determined is executed, it is suggested that the specific right has been granted before the start of the specific effect. In some cases, it may be suggested that the specific right has been granted during execution of the specific effect. Therefore, the interest of the production can be improved in relation to the granting of the specific right.

In addition, when the specific effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is determined is executed, it may not be suggested that the specific right is further granted, and in this case, a predetermined privilege is given. Can be configured to. As a result, not only whether or not the specific right is granted but also the degree of advantage of the player varies depending on the content of the effect to be executed, so that the interest of the player can be further improved.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 33rd gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A winning combination determination means capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process),
Based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of symbols is provided. A gaming machine,
When a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, a probability of giving an advantageous state (for example, AT state) in a predetermined period (for example, 40 games) of a normal state (for example, non-AT normal game state) is set and set. Advantageous state imparting means capable of determining whether or not to impart the advantageous state according to the imparted probability (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of performing initial section imparting lottery),
A specific right granting unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of performing a lottery for granting rights) capable of determining whether or not to grant a specific right (for example, an advantageous right) when a specific grant condition is satisfied;
A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, the settings 1 to 6) for varying the degree of advantage of the player (for example, the main CPU 101 for performing setting change confirmation processing). ,
When the specific right is granted, it is possible to change the grant probability to a more advantageous one,
The advantageous state giving means sets an upper limit period (for example, the number of ceiling games) in which the game continues in the normal state at least in response to the setting value being newly set by the setting means, and the normal state is set. When the game period in becomes the set upper limit period, it is possible to decide to give the advantageous state,
When the set upper limit period is within a specific period (for example, 160 games), a specific notification executing unit (for example, a status display device) capable of executing a specific notification capable of suggesting that is further provided. Characteristic gaming machine.

The advantageous state giving means sets the upper limit period even when the advantageous state ends,
The game according to the above, wherein the specific notification executing means does not enable execution of the specific notification when the upper limit period set in response to the end of the advantageous state is within the specific period. Machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the predetermined determination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state grant probability for a predetermined period of the normal state (for example, for 40 games) is set, and the advantageous state is set according to the set grant probability. Is determined. Here, when a specific right (for example, an advantageous right) is given, it is possible to change the giving probability to a more advantageous one. That is, for example, even if the giving probability that is relatively unfavorable to the player is set, the giving probability may become advantageous when the specific right is given. There is. Therefore, regardless of the set state, it is possible to maintain the degree of expectation regarding awarding and improve the player's interest.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the upper limit period (for example, the number of ceiling games) in which the game continues in the normal state is set in accordance with the setting value being set, and the upper limit of the game period is set. When the time comes, an advantageous state is given. Then, when the set upper limit period is within a specific period (for example, 160 games), it is possible to execute a specific notification capable of suggesting that. Therefore, it is possible to provide valuable information regarding the privilege grant.

Note that the upper limit period is set even when the advantageous state ends, but in this case, the specific notification can be configured not to be executable. This makes it possible to more appropriately provide valuable information regarding awarding.

[Game Machine of Invention 1 According to One Detailed Example]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined advantageous condition is established, it shifts to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, while when a predetermined disadvantageous condition is established, it has a certain state in which it shifts to a disadvantageous state that is disadvantageous to the player. It is known that the advantageous state for the player can be continued by repeating the transition from the predetermined state to the advantageous state without shifting to (see, for example, JP 2010-167197 A). ).

According to such a gaming machine, for example, the predetermined state and the advantageous state function as a series of advantageous sections (a game period that is advantageous to the player), and the interest of the game depends on the continuation degree of such a series of advantageous sections. Is fluctuating.

By the way, in recent years, in such a gaming machine, in order to prevent the gambling performance of the game from becoming excessively high, when the duration of a series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined upper limit (limit), a series of It has been proposed to install a function (limit function) for forcibly ending the advantageous section.

However, in such a gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-167197, when such a limit function is mounted, the predetermined state is also included in a series of advantageous sections, and thus the game in the predetermined state is performed. If the period becomes long, the duration of a series of advantageous sections will be exhausted in a state where the degree of advantage is lower than that in the above advantageous state, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and enables a player to play a game in a state with a high degree of advantage as much as possible even when the duration of a series of advantageous sections is limited. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest in a game.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), and a specific state that determines that the advantageous state will be controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the advantageous state ends (for example, Heaven mode), a predetermined state in which it is not determined that the advantageous state will be controlled to the advantageous state again within the predetermined period after the advantageous state ends (for example, an end mode), the advantageous state, the specific state, and the A game machine provided with an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) different from the predetermined state and a state control means (for example, a pseudo bonus shift lottery, a mode shift lottery, and a main CPU 101 for performing limit processing) for controlling transition between the states. And
The state control means, at least in the advantageous state and the specific state, transitions to the initial state when a specific limit condition (for example, an operating condition of limit processing) is satisfied,
When it is decided by the state control means to be controlled to the specific state after the end of the advantageous state, period shortening means capable of deciding whether to shorten the predetermined period (for example, ceiling shortening lottery is performed. A game machine having a main CPU 101).

Whether to grant the right to continue the advantageous state (for example, 1G continuous stock) regardless of whether or not the state control unit determines to control to the specific state after the end of the advantageous state. Further comprising a right granting means capable of deciding whether or not (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs 1G consecutive lottery),
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the state control means controls the advantageous state again when the right is granted by the right granting means when the advantageous state ends.

The advantageous state, the specific state and the predetermined state are controllable as a series of advantageous sections,
The specific restriction condition is that the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter reaches a value at which the normal limit processing (the number of games) is executed). ), or when the game value amount provided in the series of advantageous intervals reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous interval payout number counter reaches a value at which normal limit processing (payout amount) is executed) ), the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, if it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled again within the predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, the period may be further shortened. Even when the duration of the section is limited, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game by allowing the player to play the game in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, even if it is not determined that the advantageous state will be controlled again within the predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, the advantageous state is restarted by the grant of the right. In some cases, the player's expectations can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, since the continuation of the advantageous period of the series is limited by the continued gaming period or the given game value amount, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high. However, the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

[Game Machine of Invention 2 According to One Detailed Example]
It is known that, in a conventional gaming machine, a so-called freeze effect can be executed, and when the freeze effect is executed, it is possible to give more notification right than when the freeze effect is not executed ( See, for example, JP 2010-57735 A).

According to such a gaming machine, since the duration of the advantageous section (for example, AT) in which the notification is advantageous for the player can be determined by the notification right, whether such a freeze effect is executed or not is determined. This is a matter of great interest to the player.

By the way, in recent years, in such a gaming machine, in order to prevent the gambling performance of the game from becoming excessively high, when the duration of the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit (limit), the advantageous section is forced. It has been proposed to install a function (limit function) for terminating automatically.

However, when such a limit function is installed in the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-57735, for example, the limit function is exerted after the freeze effect is executed many times, and an advantageous section is obtained. When the game ends, there is a problem that the player feels lost and the interest in the game is deteriorated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest in a game while suppressing an excessive increase in gambling of the game. The purpose is to do.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) advantageous for the player,
Control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of setting any one of a plurality of different control information (for example, modes) for varying the degree of expectation of giving the advantageous state,
Normal state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a normal state (for example, production section) according to the control information set by the control information setting means,
The advantageous state and the normal state are set as a series of advantageous sections, and when a specific restriction condition (for example, operating condition of limit processing) is satisfied in the series of advantageous sections, the initial state (for example, non-advantageous section) is controlled. A gaming machine provided with possible initial state control means (for example, main CPU 101),
When the control information setting means sets specific control information having a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, heaven C mode), it is possible to decide to execute a special effect (for example, a special freeze effect). An effect determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) is provided,
The special effect determination means can determine to execute the special effect when the specific control information is first set in the series of advantageous sections, and in the same series of advantageous sections, A game machine characterized in that it is not possible to decide to execute the special effect even when the specific control information is set to.

Advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) advantageous for the player,
Control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of setting any one of a plurality of different control information (for example, modes) for varying the degree of expectation of giving the advantageous state,
Normal state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a normal state (for example, production section) according to the control information set by the control information setting means,
The advantageous state and the normal state are set as a series of advantageous sections, and when a specific restriction condition (for example, operating condition of limit processing) is satisfied in the series of advantageous sections, the initial state (for example, non-advantageous section) is controlled. A gaming machine provided with possible initial state control means (for example, main CPU 101),
When the control information setting means sets specific control information having a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, heaven C mode), it is possible to decide to execute a special effect (for example, a special freeze effect). An effect determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) is provided,
The control information setting means can set the specific control information with a winning of a specific winning combination (for example, a “determined winning combination”) as a trigger, and the specific control information with the trigger other than the winning of the specific winning combination. Is configurable,
The special effect determination means, in the series of advantageous intervals, it is possible to determine to execute the special effect when the specific control information is first set with the winning of the specific combination as a trigger, and the same as above. In a series of advantageous sections, it is not possible to decide to execute the special effect even if the specific control information is set after the winning of the specific combination.
The gaming machine characterized in that the winning of the specific combination is an opportunity to determine that the advantageous state is controlled.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, the duration of the series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period. Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even when the control information having a high degree of advantage for the player is set a plurality of times, the special effect is controlled so as not to be performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the game from being excessively increased and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the duration of the series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period. Further, in a series of advantageous sections, it may be determined that the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state by the winning of a specific winning combination, and control information having a high degree of advantage for the player may be set. Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if such a case occurs a plurality of times, the special effect is controlled so as not to be performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the game from being excessively increased and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

[A gaming machine of inventions 3 to 6 according to a detailed example]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a special condition (for example, a bonus combination) is carried over and a specific condition is satisfied, the game machine shifts to an advantageous state (for example, ART state) advantageous to the player, and the advantageous state. It is known that the game value can be increased (see, for example, JP-A-2015-73810).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game, a device is made to further diversify the manner of giving an advantageous state. However, since the control load and the amount of information relating to the provision of the advantageous state increase as such a device is devised, it is required to devise a device in consideration of this point as well.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information relating to the provision of the advantageous state. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process),
In accordance with the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means capable of stopping variable display of symbols (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege granting unit that can grant a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit (for example, a main prize check/medal payout process is performed). CPU 101),
A gaming machine provided with an advantageous state control means (for example, a main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a stop operation of a player is notified,
It is possible to determine secondary information (for example, an advantageous zone winning sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and two according to the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means. Secondary information determining means capable of determining the next information (for example, sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone),
An advantageous state assignment determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs pseudo bonus transfer lottery) capable of determining whether or not to impart the advantageous state according to the secondary information determined by the secondary information determination means. A game machine characterized by having it.

A first special game state that can be controlled to start a first special game state (for example, 3BB state) when a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 3BB) is displayed on the symbol display means Control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
A second special game state that can be controlled to start a second special game state (for example, 2BB state) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. A control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
When the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit, the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit. The first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags) where the combination is permitted to be displayed is continued,
When the second special symbol (for example, “F — 2BB”) is determined as the internal winning symbol, the symbol displaying unit displays the second special symbol until the symbol displaying unit displays the combination of the second special symbols. The second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) in which the combination is permitted to be displayed is continued,
The internal winning combination determination means,
In a case where neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is set and the game value bet is the first amount (for example, 3), the first special combination is internally won. When the bet game value is the second amount (for example, 2 cards), it is not possible to determine the first special combination as an internal winning combination,
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state, and the bet game value is the second amount, it is possible to determine the second special combination as an internal winning combination. When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination,
When the specific winning combination (for example, "F_Replay A") is determined as an internal winning combination, the stop control means, in the first special permission state, a combination of predetermined symbols on the symbol displaying means (for example, , "Upward-right lip") is displayed, and in the second special permission state, it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") on the symbol display means,
The secondary information determining means, when a combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, and when a combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, different secondary information (for example, The "playing lip 1" or "passing lip 2") can be determined, and the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to give an expectation of giving the advantageous state not only when the internal winning combination is determined but also when the combination of symbols is displayed. Amusement can be diversified.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and information corresponding to the combination of the displayed symbols are both managed as common secondary information, which is advantageous. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the state assignment.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, it is possible to change the determination content regarding the granting of the advantageous state, even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is in effect. It is possible to further diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information relating to the provision of the advantageous state.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process),
In accordance with the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means capable of stopping variable display of symbols (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege granting unit that can grant a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit (for example, a main prize check/medal payout process is performed). CPU 101),
A gaming machine provided with an advantageous state control means (for example, a main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a stop operation of a player is notified,
A first special game state that can be controlled to start a first special game state (for example, 3BB state) when a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 3BB) is displayed on the symbol display means Control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
A second special game state that can be controlled to start a second special game state (for example, 2BB state) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. A control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
When the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit, the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit. The first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags) where the combination is permitted to be displayed is continued,
When the second special symbol (for example, “F — 2BB”) is determined as the internal winning symbol, the symbol displaying unit displays the second special symbol until the symbol displaying unit displays the combination of the second special symbols. The second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) in which the combination is permitted to be displayed is continued,
The internal winning combination determination means,
In a case where neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is set and the game value bet is the first amount (for example, 3), the first special combination is internally won. When the bet game value is the second amount (for example, 2 cards), it is not possible to determine the first special combination as an internal winning combination,
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state, and the bet game value is the second amount, it is possible to determine the second special combination as an internal winning combination. When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination,
When the specific winning combination (for example, "F_Replay A") is determined as an internal winning combination, the stop control means, in the first special permission state, a combination of predetermined symbols on the symbol displaying means (for example, , "Upward-right lip") is displayed, and in the second special permission state, it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") on the symbol display means,
The advantageous state control means, at least when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, whether or not to give the advantageous state is determined. Be determined,
The privilege granting means, when the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, and when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, gives the same privilege (for example, replay). A gaming machine characterized by being able to be given.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, it is possible to change the determination content regarding the granting of the advantageous state, even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is set, which is advantageous. It is possible to further diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information relating to the addition of the state. In addition, in the game in which the specific role is decided, the same privilege is given regardless of which special permission state is set, so even if the playability is changed, the player is directly disadvantaged. It can be prevented from being covered.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process),
In accordance with the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means capable of stopping variable display of symbols (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege granting unit that can grant a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit (for example, a main prize check/medal payout process is performed). CPU 101),
A gaming machine provided with an advantageous state control means (for example, a main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a stop operation of a player is notified,
A first special game state that can be controlled to start a first special game state (for example, 3BB state) when a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 3BB) is displayed on the symbol display means Control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
A second special game state that can be controlled to start a second special game state (for example, 2BB state) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. A control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
When the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit, the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit. The first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags) where the combination is permitted to be displayed is continued,
When the second special symbol (for example, “F — 2BB”) is determined as the internal winning symbol, the symbol displaying unit displays the second special symbol until the symbol displaying unit displays the combination of the second special symbols. The second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) in which the combination is permitted to be displayed is continued,
The internal winning combination determination means,
In a case where neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is set and the game value bet is the first amount (for example, 3), the first special combination is internally won. When the bet game value is the second amount (for example, 2 cards), it is not possible to determine the first special combination as an internal winning combination,
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state, and the bet game value is the second amount, it is possible to determine the second special combination as an internal winning combination. When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination,
When the specific combination (for example, “F_replay A”) is determined as the internal winning combination and the second special permission state is set, the stop control unit is configured to perform the stop operation in a specific mode. It is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, “parallel lip”) on the symbol display means, and display the combination of specific symbols on the symbol display means when the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode. Without making it possible,
The advantageous state control means, when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, determines whether or not to impart the advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized by being capable.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process),
In accordance with the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means capable of stopping variable display of symbols (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege granting unit that can grant a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit (for example, a main prize check/medal payout process is performed). CPU 101),
A gaming machine provided with an advantageous state control means (for example, a main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a stop operation of a player is notified,
A first special game state that can be controlled to start a first special game state (for example, 3BB state) when a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 3BB) is displayed on the symbol display means Control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
A second special game state that can be controlled to start a second special game state (for example, 2BB state) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. A control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
When the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit, the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit. The first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags) where the combination is permitted to be displayed is continued,
When the second special symbol (for example, “F — 2BB”) is determined as the internal winning symbol, the symbol displaying unit displays the second special symbol until the symbol displaying unit displays the combination of the second special symbols. The second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) in which the combination is permitted to be displayed is continued,
The internal winning combination determination means,
In a case where neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is set and the game value bet is the first amount (for example, 3), the first special combination is internally won. When the bet game value is the second amount (for example, 2 cards), it is not possible to determine the first special combination as an internal winning combination,
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state, and the bet game value is the second amount, it is possible to determine the second special combination as an internal winning combination. When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination,
When the specific combination (for example, “F_replay A”) is determined as the internal winning combination and the second special permission state is set, the stop control unit is configured to perform the stop operation in a specific mode. It is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, “parallel lip”) on the symbol display means, and display the combination of specific symbols on the symbol display means when the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode. Without making it possible,
The advantageous state control means, when the specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol displaying means, and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol displaying means. A gaming machine, which makes it possible to change the degree of advantage with respect to the provision of the advantageous state when there is no such situation.

The stop control means, when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, in the case of the first special permission state, a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, “right upward lip”) on the symbol display means. In the case of the second special permission state, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and the stop operation is performed in the specific mode. The game machine according to the above, characterized in that the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the symbol display means when not played.

According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the determination content regarding the granting of the advantageous state even when the same specific combination is determined according to which special permission state and the mode of the stop operation of the player Since it is possible to change, it is possible to further diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information relating to the provision of the advantageous state.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process),
In accordance with the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means capable of stopping variable display of symbols (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege granting unit that can grant a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit (for example, a main prize check/medal payout process is performed). CPU 101),
A gaming machine provided with an advantageous state control means (for example, a main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a stop operation of a player is notified,
A first special game state that can be controlled to start a first special game state (for example, 3BB state) when a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 3BB) is displayed on the symbol display means Control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
A second special game state that can be controlled to start a second special game state (for example, 2BB state) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. A control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
When the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit, the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit. The first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags) where the combination is permitted to be displayed is continued,
When the second special symbol (for example, “F — 2BB”) is determined as the internal winning symbol, the symbol displaying unit displays the second special symbol until the symbol displaying unit displays the combination of the second special symbols. The second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) in which the combination is permitted to be displayed is continued,
The internal winning combination determination means,
In a case where neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is set and the game value bet is the first amount (for example, 3), the first special combination is internally won. When the bet game value is the second amount (for example, 2 cards), it is not possible to determine the first special combination as an internal winning combination,
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state, and the bet game value is the second amount, it is possible to determine the second special combination as an internal winning combination. When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination,
When the specific winning combination (for example, "F_Replay A") is determined as an internal winning combination, the stop control means, in the first special permission state, a combination of predetermined symbols on the symbol displaying means (for example, , "Upward-right lip") is displayed, and in the second special permission state, it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") on the symbol display means,
The advantageous state control means,
When the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, control is performed in the first grant state (for example, "stable state"),
When the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, it is controlled to the second grant state (for example, "rough wave state"),
The controlled granting state is continued until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied (for example, until the pseudo bonus transfer is determined),
A gaming machine capable of determining whether or not to grant the advantageous state according to a controlled granting state.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the predetermined ending condition is satisfied when it is determined to give the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, the stop display mode can be different even when the same specific combination is determined depending on which special permission state is set, and thereby the advantageous state. Since it is possible to change the imparted state of, it is possible to diversify the game nature while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding the impartation of the advantageous state.

[Game Machines of Inventions 7 to 12 according to one detailed example]
In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to set a normal section and an advantageous section as a state in which a game is played, the effect state is set to the AT state (advantageous state) in the advantageous section, and the AT state is set at the end of the advantageous section. In this case, it is known that it is possible to forcibly end the AT state by the initialization process even if a predetermined termination condition for the AT state is not satisfied (for example, JP-A-2017-185099). (See the official gazette).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, although it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high, since the advantageous state suddenly ends in the middle, the player feels distrust or loss, There is a problem that the interest of the game may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which the player's emotions are taken into consideration while suppressing excessive gambling. To do.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), a specific state (for example, a production section) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections,
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter reaches a value at which the normal limit process (the number of games) is executed), the advantageous state and the In any of the specific states, a first restricting unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a normal limit process (the number of games)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state,
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, when the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which special limit processing (game number) is executed) In the case of the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, second restriction means (for example, special limit processing (number of games) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling to the initial state is performed. A main CPU 101), and a gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the specific period is set shorter than the predetermined period according to a period in which the advantageous state can be continued (for example, "55 games").

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), a specific state (for example, a production section) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections,
When the game value amount provided in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter reaches a value at which normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), In any of the advantageous state and the specific state, a first regulation unit that ends the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (payout number)) ,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous intervals becomes a specific amount smaller than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes a value at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed. If it is in the advantageous state, the second restriction means (for example, special limit processing (dispensing) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling to the initial state when shifting to the specific state. A main CPU 101) that performs a number), and a gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the specific amount is set to be smaller than the predetermined amount according to the awardable game value amount of the advantageous state (for example, "275 pieces").

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a predetermined period or a game given in the series of advantageous sections. When the amount of value reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly ended, but when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period, or this series of advantages When the game value amount given in the section becomes the specific amount smaller than the predetermined amount, and in the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, a series of advantageous sections are ended.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a series of advantageous sections are not forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections are kept within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing excessive gambling, so it is possible to consider the emotion of the player. I am trying.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the continuous period in the advantageous state or the assignable game value amount, so that the player's feeling is taken into consideration. It is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely restricted.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), a specific state (for example, a production section) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections,
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter reaches a value at which the normal limit process (the number of games) is executed), the advantageous state and the In any of the specific states, a first restricting unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a normal limit process (the number of games)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state,
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, when the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which special limit processing (game number) is executed) When the advantageous state is not the advantageous state, the advantageous state is shifted to the advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to the specific state, the series of advantageous sections is terminated and the initial state is controlled. A game machine comprising: two regulating means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a special limit process (number of games)).

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the specific period is set shorter than the predetermined period according to a period in which the advantageous state can be continued (for example, "55 games").

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), a specific state (for example, a production section) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections,
When the game value amount provided in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter reaches a value at which normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), In any of the advantageous state and the specific state, a first regulation unit that ends the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (payout number)) ,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous intervals becomes a specific amount smaller than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes a value at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed). In the case of not being in the advantageous state, the state is shifted to the advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to the specific state, the series of advantageous sections is finished and the initial state A game machine comprising: a second restricting unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a special limit process (the number of payouts)) that is controlled to.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the specific amount is set to be smaller than the predetermined amount according to the awardable game value amount of the advantageous state (for example, "275 pieces").

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a predetermined period or a game given in the series of advantageous sections. When the amount of value reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly ended, but when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period, or this series of advantages When the game value amount given in the section becomes a specific amount smaller than a predetermined amount, when it is not in an advantageous state, it shifts to an advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to a specific state , A series of advantageous sections are ended.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a series of advantageous sections are not forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections are kept within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it. In addition, when a series of advantageous sections is ended in this way, if it is not in an advantageous state, it is made to transition to an advantageous state and then finished. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing excessive gambling, so it is possible to consider the emotion of the player. I am trying.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the continuous period in the advantageous state or the assignable game value amount, so that the player's feeling is taken into consideration. It is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely restricted.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), a specific state (for example, a production section) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections,
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter reaches a value at which the normal limit process (the number of games) is executed), the advantageous state and the In any of the specific states, a first restricting unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a normal limit process (the number of games)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state,
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, when the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which special limit processing (game number) is executed) In the case of the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, second restriction means (for example, special limit processing (number of games) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling to the initial state is performed. Main CPU 101),
A right granting means (eg, 1G consecutive lottery main CPU 101) capable of granting a right (eg, 1G consecutive stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (eg, “55 games”). )When,
Depending on the number of rights granted by the rights granting means, a special period shorter than the specific period can be set, and when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes the set special period (for example, When the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which the quasi-limit process (the number of games) is executed), it is possible to prevent the right granting means from granting the right in the subsequent series of advantageous intervals. A gaming machine comprising: a restricting unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a semi-limit process (the number of games)).

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), a specific state (for example, a production section) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections,
When the game value amount provided in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter reaches a value at which normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), In any of the advantageous state and the specific state, a first regulation unit that ends the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (payout number)) ,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous intervals becomes a specific amount smaller than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes a value at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed. If it is in the advantageous state, the second restriction means (for example, special limit processing (game) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling to the initial state when shifting to the specific state). Number) main CPU 101),
A right granting means (eg, 1G consecutive lottery main CPU 101) capable of granting a right (eg, 1G consecutive stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (eg, “55 games”). )When,
A special amount smaller than the specific amount can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and the game value amount granted in the series of advantageous intervals becomes the set special amount. At this time (for example, when the value of the control payout number counter reaches a value at which the quasi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the right is granted by the right granting means in the subsequent series of advantageous intervals. A gaming machine comprising: a third restricting means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a semi-limit process (the number of payouts)).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a predetermined period or a game given in the series of advantageous sections. When the amount of value reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly ended, but when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period, or this series of advantages When the game value amount given in the section becomes the specific amount smaller than the predetermined amount, and in the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, a series of advantageous sections are ended.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a series of advantageous sections are not forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections are kept within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing excessive gambling, so it is possible to consider the emotion of the player. I am trying.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted right, but the game period in the series of advantageous sections is shorter than the specific period, and it depends on the number of granted rights. When the set special period is reached, or when the game value amount granted in the series of advantageous intervals is less than the specific amount and reaches the special amount set according to the number of granted rights, the following Granting of rights is suppressed in a series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, the right is given to the player so that the player cannot consume it, and as a result, the series of advantageous intervals is forcibly ended in such a state, resulting in the player feeling distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the player's emotions while suppressing an excessive increase in gambling.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), a specific state (for example, a production section) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections,
When the game value amount provided in the series of advantageous sections becomes the first amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed). In any state of the advantageous state and the specific state, the first restricting unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the normal limit process (the number of payouts)) that ends the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state. )When,
When the game value amount provided in the series of advantageous intervals becomes the second amount smaller than the first amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is subjected to special limit processing (payout number)). If it is in the advantageous state, the second regulation means (for example, a special regulation means) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state when shifting to the specific state. A main CPU 101) that performs limit processing (number of games),
A right granting means (eg, 1G consecutive lottery main CPU 101) capable of granting a right (eg, 1G consecutive stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (eg, “55 games”). )When,
It is possible to set a third amount smaller than the second amount according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and the game value amount granted in the series of advantageous intervals is set to the first amount. When the amount becomes 3 (for example, when the value of the control payout number counter reaches a value at which the quasi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the right is granted by the right granting means in the subsequent series of advantageous intervals. Third restricting means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a semi-limit process (the number of payouts)) that suppresses the provision of
First counting means for counting the first amount (for example, an advantageous section payout number counter),
A second counting unit (for example, a control payout number counter) for counting the second amount and the third amount,
When a specific winning combination (for example, "press order bell A") is won, when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, correct answer pressing order), a predetermined amount (for example, 8 cards) of game value is given. , It is configured such that the predetermined amount of game value is not provided unless a stop operation is performed in the specific mode,
The second counting means, when winning the specific winning combination, counts as if the predetermined amount of game value was given regardless of whether or not a stop operation was performed in the specific mode. A gaming machine to do.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and when the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes the first amount, the series of advantageous sections. Is forcibly ended, but when the game value amount given in this series of advantageous intervals becomes the second amount, which is smaller than the first amount, if it is in the advantageous state, it becomes a specific state. At the time of transition, a series of advantageous zones are ended.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a series of advantageous sections are not forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections are kept within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing excessive gambling, so it is possible to consider the emotion of the player. I am trying.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted right, but the game value amount provided in the series of advantageous sections is less than the second amount and is provided. When the amount reaches the third amount set according to the number of rights, the granting of rights is suppressed in the subsequent advantageous intervals. As a result, for example, the right is given to the player so that the player cannot consume it, and as a result, the series of advantageous intervals is forcibly ended in such a state, resulting in the player feeling distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the player's emotions while suppressing an excessive increase in gambling.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when at least the second amount and the third amount are counted, they should be originally given due to, for example, a player's operation error or ignoring an instruction. Even if there is a difference between the game value amount that was present and the game value amount that was actually given, counting based on the game value amount that was originally supposed to be given without considering this difference Is to be done. As a result, a series of advantageous intervals may be unnecessarily extended by such a player's action, and inequity may occur between the player who has performed such an action and the player who has not performed such action. Since it is possible to prevent the player from losing, it is possible to consider the emotion of the player while suppressing the gambling property from becoming excessively high.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), a specific state (for example, a production section) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections,
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter reaches a value at which the normal limit process (the number of games) is executed), the advantageous state and the In any of the specific states, a first restricting unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a normal limit process (the number of games)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state,
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, when the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which special limit processing (game number) is executed) In the case of the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, second restriction means (for example, special limit processing (number of games) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling to the initial state is performed. Main CPU 101),
A right granting means (eg, 1G consecutive lottery main CPU 101) capable of granting a right (eg, 1G consecutive stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (eg, “55 games”). )When,
Depending on the number of rights granted by the rights granting means, a special period shorter than the specific period can be set, and when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes the set special period (for example, When the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which the quasi-limit process (the number of games) is executed), it is possible to prevent the right granting means from granting the right in the subsequent series of advantageous intervals. A restricting unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a semi-limit process (the number of games)),
When there is a winning in the specific state, there is a definite role (for example, "definite cherry") that the transition to the advantageous state is definite.
When the winning combination is won, a combination of special symbols (for example, “confirmed cherry lip”) can be displayed if a stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, other than the right first stop), When the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, the right first stop), the combination of the special symbols is not displayed, and the combination of the predetermined symbols (for example, “middle lip”) is Is configured to be displayed,
The combination of the predetermined symbols is a combination of symbols that can be displayed even when a winning combination other than the fixed winning combination is won,
When the third restricting means restricts the grant of the right by the right granting means, when the winning combination is won, a special notifying means (for example, a display device) for notifying the specific mode as the procedure of the stop operation. 11. A gaming machine further comprising a sub CPU 201) for displaying a special notification on 11.

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), a specific state (for example, a production section) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections,
When the game value amount provided in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter reaches a value at which normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), In any of the advantageous state and the specific state, a first regulation unit that ends the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (payout number)) ,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous intervals becomes a specific amount smaller than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes a value at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed. If it is in the advantageous state, the second restriction means (for example, special limit processing (game) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling to the initial state when shifting to the specific state). Number) main CPU 101),
A right granting means (eg, 1G consecutive lottery main CPU 101) capable of granting a right (eg, 1G consecutive stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (eg, “55 games”). )When,
A special amount smaller than the specific amount can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and the game value amount granted in the series of advantageous intervals becomes the set special amount. At this time (for example, when the value of the control payout number counter reaches a value at which the quasi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the right is granted by the right granting means in the subsequent series of advantageous intervals. And a third restricting means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a semi-limit process (the number of payouts)),
When there is a winning in the specific state, there is a definite role (for example, "definite cherry") that the transition to the advantageous state is definite.
When the winning combination is won, a combination of special symbols (for example, “confirmed cherry lip”) can be displayed if a stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, other than the right first stop), When the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, the right first stop), the combination of the special symbols is not displayed, and the combination of the predetermined symbols (for example, “middle lip”) is Is configured to be displayed,
The combination of the predetermined symbols is a combination of symbols that can be displayed even when a winning combination other than the fixed winning combination is won,
When the third restricting means restricts the grant of the right by the right granting means, when the winning combination is won, a special notifying means (for example, a display device) for notifying the specific mode as the procedure of the stop operation. 11. A gaming machine further comprising a sub CPU 201) for displaying a special notification on 11.

When the grant of the right by the right granting unit is not suppressed by the third restricting unit, when the winning combination is won, the advantageous state is started from the next game,
The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that, when granting a right by the right granting means is suppressed by the third restricting means, when the winning combination is won, the advantageous state is started from the current game. ..

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a predetermined period or a game given in the series of advantageous sections. When the amount of value reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly ended, but when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period, or this series of advantages When the game value amount given in the section becomes the specific amount smaller than the predetermined amount, and in the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, a series of advantageous sections are ended.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a series of advantageous sections are not forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections are kept within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing excessive gambling, so it is possible to consider the emotion of the player. I am trying.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted right, but the game period in the series of advantageous sections is shorter than the specific period, and it depends on the number of granted rights. When the set special period is reached, or when the game value amount granted in the series of advantageous intervals is less than the specific amount and reaches the special amount set according to the number of granted rights, the following Granting of rights is suppressed in a series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, the right is given to the player so that the player cannot consume it, and as a result, the series of advantageous intervals is forcibly ended in such a state, resulting in the player feeling distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the player's emotions while suppressing an excessive increase in gambling.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, when the winning combination of the fixed combination is confirmed in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the combination of the special symbols by which the winning combination of the confirmed combination can be clearly recognized. A special notification for not displaying is displayed. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from having an emotion such that the winning of the final winning combination is useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger for the start of the advantageous state in the state where the grant of rights is suppressed, the game can be prevented from becoming excessively gambling while the game is being played. It is possible to consider the emotion of the person.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, when the special notification is performed, the advantageous state that originally should have been started from the next game is started from the current game. This allows the player to perform a stop operation according to the special notification in a natural manner, and thus prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable even if such special notification is performed. it can.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), a specific state (for example, a production section) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections,
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter reaches a value at which the normal limit process (the number of games) is executed), the advantageous state and the In any of the specific states, a first restricting unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a normal limit process (the number of games)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state,
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, when the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which special limit processing (game number) is executed) In the case of the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, second restriction means (for example, special limit processing (number of games) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling to the initial state is performed. Main CPU 101),
A right granting means (eg, 1G consecutive lottery main CPU 101) capable of granting a right (eg, 1G consecutive stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (eg, “55 games”). )When,
Depending on the number of rights granted by the rights granting means, a special period shorter than the specific period can be set, and when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes the set special period (for example, When the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which the quasi-limit process (the number of games) is executed), it is possible to prevent the right granting means from granting the right in the subsequent series of advantageous intervals. A restricting unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a semi-limit process (the number of games)),
When there is a winning in the specific state, there is a definite role (for example, "definite cherry") that the transition to the advantageous state is definite.
When the winning combination is won, a combination of special symbols (for example, “confirmed cherry lip”) can be displayed if a stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, other than the right first stop), When the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, the right first stop), the combination of the special symbols is not displayed, and the combination of the predetermined symbols (for example, “middle lip”) is Is configured to be displayed,
The combination of the predetermined symbols is a combination of symbols that can be displayed even when a winning combination other than the fixed winning combination is won,
When the third restricting unit restricts the grant of the right by the right granting unit, when the winning combination is won, a special notifying unit (for example, a display device) that notifies the specific mode as a procedure of the stop operation. 11, a sub CPU 201) for displaying a special notification,
When the combination of the special symbols is displayed when the grant of the right by the right granting unit is not suppressed by the third restricting unit, it is possible to perform a special notification (for example, the power of the special winning sound). And, when the grant of the right by the right granting unit is suppressed by the third restricting unit, the special notification unit that does not allow the special notification when the combination of the special symbols is displayed ( For example, the gaming machine further including a sub CPU 201) for outputting a special winning sound from the speaker group 84.

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), a specific state (for example, a production section) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections,
When the game value amount provided in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter reaches a value at which normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), In any of the advantageous state and the specific state, a first regulation unit that ends the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (payout number)) ,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous intervals becomes a specific amount smaller than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes a value at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed. If it is in the advantageous state, the second restriction means (for example, special limit processing (game) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling to the initial state when shifting to the specific state). Number) main CPU 101),
A right granting means (eg, 1G consecutive lottery main CPU 101) capable of granting a right (eg, 1G consecutive stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (eg, “55 games”). )When,
A special amount smaller than the specific amount can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and the game value amount granted in the series of advantageous intervals becomes the set special amount. At this time (for example, when the value of the control payout number counter reaches a value at which the quasi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the right is granted by the right granting means in the subsequent series of advantageous intervals. And a third restricting means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a semi-limit process (the number of payouts)),
When there is a winning in the specific state, there is a definite role (for example, "definite cherry") that the transition to the advantageous state is definite.
When the winning combination is won, a combination of special symbols (for example, “confirmed cherry lip”) can be displayed if a stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, other than the right first stop), When the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, the right first stop), the combination of the special symbols is not displayed, and the combination of the predetermined symbols (for example, “middle lip”) is Is configured to be displayed,
The combination of the predetermined symbols is a combination of symbols that can be displayed even when a winning combination other than the fixed winning combination is won,
When the third restricting unit restricts the grant of the right by the right granting unit, when the winning combination is won, a special notifying unit (for example, a display device) that notifies the specific mode as a procedure of the stop operation. 11, a sub CPU 201) for displaying a special notification,
When the combination of the special symbols is displayed when the grant of the right by the right granting unit is not suppressed by the third restricting unit, it is possible to perform a special notification (for example, the power of the special winning sound). And, when the grant of the right by the right granting unit is suppressed by the third restricting unit, the special notification unit that does not allow the special notification when the combination of the special symbols is displayed ( For example, the gaming machine further including a sub CPU 201) for outputting a special winning sound from the speaker group 84.

The special notification means, when the winning combination is won, in the case where the specific mode has not been notified by the special notification means, when the combination of the special symbols is displayed, the special notification means If the special mode is notified by the special notification means, and the special notification is not displayed when the combination of the special symbols is displayed, the gaming machine described above. ..

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a predetermined period or a game given in the series of advantageous sections. When the amount of value reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly ended, but when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period, or this series of advantages When the game value amount given in the section becomes the specific amount smaller than the predetermined amount, and in the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, a series of advantageous sections are ended.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a series of advantageous sections are not forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections are kept within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing excessive gambling, so it is possible to consider the emotion of the player. I am trying.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted right, but the game period in the series of advantageous sections is shorter than the specific period, and it depends on the number of granted rights. When the set special period is reached, or when the game value amount granted in the series of advantageous intervals is less than the specific amount and reaches the special amount set according to the number of granted rights, the following Granting of rights is suppressed in a series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, the right is given to the player so that the player cannot consume it, and as a result, the series of advantageous intervals is forcibly ended in such a state, resulting in the player feeling distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the player's emotions while suppressing an excessive increase in gambling.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, when the winning combination of the fixed combination is confirmed in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the combination of the special symbols by which the winning combination of the confirmed combination can be clearly recognized. A special notification for not displaying is displayed. Also, in the state where the grant of the right is not suppressed, it is possible to give a special notification when the winning combination is won and the combination of the special symbols is displayed, while the grant of the right is suppressed. Then, when a winning combination is won and a combination of special symbols is displayed, it is not possible to give a special notification. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from having an emotion such that the winning of the final winning combination is useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger for the start of the advantageous state in the state where the grant of rights is suppressed, the game can be prevented from becoming excessively gambling while the game is being played. It is possible to consider the emotion of the person.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether or not to give a special notification depending on whether or not a winning combination is won, whether or not a combination of special symbols is displayed, and whether or not a special notification is given. I'm trying to decide. This makes it possible to more appropriately manage the situation in which the special notification is performed.

[Game Machine of Invention 13 According to One Detailed Example]
In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to set a normal section and an advantageous section as a state in which a game is played, the effect state is set to the AT state (advantageous state) in the advantageous section, and the AT state is set at the end of the advantageous section. In this case, it is known that it is possible to forcibly end the AT state by the initialization process even if a predetermined termination condition for the AT state is not satisfied (for example, JP-A-2017-185099). (See the official gazette).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, although it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high, since the advantageous state suddenly ends in the middle, the player feels distrust or loss, There is a problem that the interest of the game may be reduced.

In such a gaming machine, for example, a game can be played only when a game value of a first amount (for example, three cards) is bet, or not only the first amount but also the second amount. Various specifications can be adopted for the specification of the game value amount to be bet, such as a game that can be played even if a game value of 2 pieces is bet. In general, it is more advantageous for the player when more game value is bet. Therefore, for example, the advantage degree of the advantageous state is set on the assumption that the first amount of game value is bet. That is, in such a case, betting a first amount of game value to play a game is an intended game method, but it is necessary to play a game with such a game method. It is considered necessary to devise a way to encourage the player.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and while suppressing the gambling property from becoming excessively high, feelings for a player who plays a game by the intended game method are It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which is devised in consideration and can encourage a player who does not play a game by the intended game method to play the game by the intended game method.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), a specific state (for example, a production section) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. It has an initial state (for example, non-advantageous section), and it is possible to control the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections, and the bet gaming value is a first amount (for example, 3 pieces). A gaming machine that is capable of playing a game in any of the cases of and a second amount (for example, two cards) smaller than the first amount,
In both cases where the bet game value is the first amount and the second amount, when the game period in the series of advantageous intervals reaches a predetermined period (for example, the advantageous period When the value of the game number counter reaches a value at which the normal limit process (the number of games) is executed), the series of advantageous sections is terminated in either of the advantageous state and the specific state. A first restricting means for controlling the initial state (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing normal limit processing (number of games)),
When the bet game value is the first amount, when the game period in the series of advantageous intervals becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is a special limit process). (When (the number of games) reaches a value to be executed), and in the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, the series of advantageous sections are ended and the initial state is controlled. A game machine comprising: two restricting means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a special limit process (the number of games)).

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), a specific state (for example, a production section) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. It has an initial state (for example, non-advantageous section), and it is possible to control the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections, and the bet gaming value is a first amount (for example, 3 pieces). A gaming machine that is capable of playing a game in any of the cases of and a second amount (for example, two cards) smaller than the first amount,
In both cases where the bet game value is the first amount and the second amount, when the game value amount given in the series of advantageous intervals reaches a predetermined amount ( For example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit process (the number of payouts) is executed), in any state of the advantageous state and the specific state, the series of advantageous sections And a first restricting unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a normal limit process (the number of payouts)) that controls the initial state by
When the bet game value is the first amount, when the game value amount given in the series of advantageous intervals becomes a specific amount smaller than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the payout counter for control Becomes a value at which the special limit process (the number of payouts) is executed), in the case of the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, the series of advantageous sections are terminated and the initial state is set. A game machine comprising: a second restricting unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a special limit process (the number of games)) that is controlled to.

At least in the series of advantageous sections, the player is more likely to be bet with the second amount of game value than bet with the first amount of game value for betting. The gaming machine described above, which is disadvantageous to the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and regardless of which amount of game value is bet and the game is played, When the game period reaches a predetermined period, or when the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount, the series of advantageous sections is forcibly ended. Further, when a game is played by betting a first amount of game value, when the game period in this series of advantageous intervals becomes a specific period shorter than a predetermined period, or in this series of advantageous intervals. When the given game value amount becomes a specific amount smaller than a predetermined amount and is in an advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, a series of advantageous sections are ended. When the game value of 2 is bet and the game is played, such control is not performed.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a game is played by betting the first amount of gaming value, a series of advantageous sections is not forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state. It is possible to end a series of advantageous sections within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the termination of the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing excessive gambling, so it is possible to consider the emotion of the player. I am trying. On the other hand, when a game is played by betting a second amount of game value, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state. Since it is possible to make the player realize that the game has not been performed by the provided game method, the player can be encouraged to perform the game by the intended game method.

In addition, in a series of advantageous intervals, it is more disadvantageous to the player when the second amount of game value is bet and the game is performed than when the first amount of game value is bet and the game is performed. Therefore, by enabling such a warning, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in an advantageous state, and to play the game in a game method that the player does not intend. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being deteriorated due to.

[Game Machines of Inventions 14 to 17 according to a Detailed Example]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined advantageous condition is established, it shifts to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, while when a predetermined disadvantageous condition is established, it has a certain state in which it shifts to a disadvantageous state that is disadvantageous to the player. It is known that the advantageous state for the player can be continued by repeating the transition from the predetermined state to the advantageous state without shifting to (see, for example, JP 2010-167197 A). ).

According to such a gaming machine, for example, the predetermined state and the advantageous state function as a series of advantageous sections (a game period that is advantageous to the player), and the interest of the game depends on the continuation degree of such a series of advantageous sections. Is fluctuating.

By the way, in such a gaming machine, by changing the probability of transition to the advantageous state in the predetermined state, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

However, for example, when the transition probability to the advantageous state is high, the player's motivation and interest in the game are improved, while when the transition probability to the advantageous state is low, the player's game is There was a problem that motivation and interest decreased.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining a game motivation and interest even when the transition probability to an advantageous state varies. And

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), and a specific state that determines that the advantageous state will be controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the advantageous state ends (for example, Heaven mode), a first predetermined state (for example, end mode) in which it is not determined that the advantageous state will be controlled again within the predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, and after the advantageous state ends A state control means for controlling a transition between a second predetermined state (for example, a heaven preparation mode) that is more advantageous than the first predetermined state but is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state again within the predetermined period ( For example, a gaming machine equipped with a main CPU 101) that performs a pseudo bonus transfer lottery and a mode transfer lottery,
When the advantageous state ends, the state control means can control the state to any one of the specific state, the first predetermined state, and the second predetermined state,
When the advantageous state is started, notification according to a predetermined mode (for example, turning on the advantageous zone lamp) is started,
At least within the predetermined period, the notification according to the predetermined mode is continued,
When the predetermined period has elapsed, the notification according to the predetermined mode is ended when the control is performed in the first predetermined state, and the notification according to the predetermined mode is performed when the control is performed in the second predetermined state. A gaming machine provided with a state notifying means capable of continuing (for example, an advantageous zone lamp).

The state control means, when the advantageous state is controlled from the second predetermined state to end the advantageous state, is higher than when the advantageous state is controlled from the first predetermined state to the advantageous state. The gaming machine described above, wherein the gaming machine can be controlled to the specific state with a probability.

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), and a first predetermined state (for example, end A mode) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state again after the advantageous state ends is a predetermined probability, State control means for transition control between a second predetermined state (for example, heaven preparation mode) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state again after the advantageous state ends is a specific probability higher than the predetermined probability. A gaming machine provided with (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a pseudo bonus shift lottery and a mode shift lottery),
The state control means is capable of controlling to one of the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state when the advantageous state ends.
When the advantageous state is started, notification according to a predetermined mode (for example, turning on the advantageous zone lamp) is started,
At least the notification according to the predetermined mode is continued within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends,
When the predetermined period has elapsed, the notification according to the predetermined mode is ended when the control is performed in the first predetermined state, and the notification according to the predetermined mode is performed when the control is performed in the second predetermined state. A gaming machine provided with a state notifying means capable of continuing (for example, an advantageous zone lamp).

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, when the advantageous state ends, a specific state in which it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled to the advantageous state again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, and a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends A first predetermined state in which it is not certain that the advantageous state will be controlled again to the advantageous state, and it is not certain that the advantageous state will be controlled to the advantageous state again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, but it is more advantageous than the first predetermined state. It is possible to control to any one of the second predetermined states.

Then, from the start of the advantageous state to the same notification in any state during the predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, when the predetermined period has elapsed, the first predetermined state If so, the notification is ended, and if the second predetermined state, the notification may be continued. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state changes, it is possible to maintain the game motivation and interest.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, if the notification continues after the end of the advantageous state even after the lapse of a predetermined period, if the advantageous state is started next, transition to the specific state after the end Therefore, even if the special state is not transitioned to after the advantageous state ends, it is possible to keep the motivation and interest of the game and play the game.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the advantageous state ends, the first predetermined state in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state again is the predetermined probability, and the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state again is higher than the predetermined probability The state is controllable to any one of the second predetermined states that are probabilities, and is the same in any state from the start of the advantageous state to the predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state. It may be configured such that when the notification is performed and the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the notification may be terminated in the first predetermined state and may continue in the second predetermined state. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state changes, it is possible to maintain the game motivation and interest.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) advantageous for the player,
Control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of setting any one of a plurality of different control information (for example, modes) for varying the degree of expectation of giving the advantageous state,
A normal-state control unit (for example, a main CPU 101) capable of controlling a normal state (for example, a production section) according to the control information set by the control information setting unit,
In the normal state, the first effect means (for example, the bet lamp display section (BL) that can execute the first effect (for example, the bet lamp change effect) with a different probability according to the control information set by the control information setting means. ))When,
A second effect means (for example, a reel side lamp display unit (for example, a reel side lamp display section (that is, a reel side lamp effect) that can execute a second effect (for example, a reel side lamp effect) in an effect mode that differs according to the number of times the first effect is performed by the first effect means. SL)), and a gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the second effect is an effect performed in a non-gaming state.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, in the normal state, the first effect is performed with different probabilities according to the degree of expectation of giving the advantageous state, and further, the second effect is performed in different effect modes according to the number of times the first effect is executed. Is possible. That is, for example, even if the game is not played from the beginning in the normal state, it may be possible to infer the degree of expectation of the advantageous state by using the execution frequency of the first effect and the effect mode of the second effect as a clue. Has become. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state changes, it is possible to maintain the game motivation and interest.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the second effect is performed in the non-gaming state, so the effect mode of the second effect can be an effective index for the player who is about to play the game. As a result, the motivation for the game can be increased and the operation of the game machine can be improved.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) advantageous for the player,
Control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of setting any one of a plurality of different control information (for example, modes) for varying the degree of expectation of giving the advantageous state,
A normal-state control unit (for example, a main CPU 101) capable of controlling a normal state (for example, a production section) according to the control information set by the control information setting unit,
In the normal state, a specific effect means (for example, a bet lamp display unit (BL)) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a bet lamp change effect) with a different probability according to the control information set by the control information setting means. Equipped with
The specific effect means is a bet number display means for displaying the bet number of the game value,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific effect is executed by setting a display mode of the bet number display means to a display mode different from a normal display mode.

The bet number display means has a plurality of display areas (for example, “BL1” to “BL3”) corresponding to the bet number of the game value, and when the replay is activated, the display contents of the plurality of display areas are displayed. It is possible to perform bet production that changes sequentially,
When the specific effect is executed, when the display contents of the plurality of display areas are sequentially changed in the bet effect, each is set to a display mode different from the normal display mode. Machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal state, it is possible to perform the specific effect with different probabilities depending on the degree of expectation of giving the advantageous state. That is, there are cases in which it is possible to estimate the expected degree of provision of an advantageous state by using the execution frequency of the specific effect as a clue. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state changes, it is possible to maintain the game motivation and interest. Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the specific effect is performed by changing the display mode of the bet number display. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect device or the like for performing the specific effect, and the specific effect can be performed in the natural flow of the game. As a result, with a general-purpose configuration, it is possible to perform an effect that enhances the game motivation and interest.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a pseudo bet effect is performed at the time of the operation of the replay, but the specific effect is also performed in a manner in accordance with the flow of such bet effect. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that enhances the game motivation and interest in a manner that is more comfortable.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) advantageous for the player,
Control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of setting any one of a plurality of different control information (for example, modes) for varying the degree of expectation of giving the advantageous state,
A normal-state control unit (for example, a main CPU 101) capable of controlling a normal state (for example, a production section) according to the control information set by the control information setting unit,
In the normal state, a specific effect means (for example, a bet lamp display unit (BL)) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a bet lamp change effect) with a different probability according to the control information set by the control information setting means. Equipped with
The specific effect means is a bet number display means for displaying the bet number of the game value,
The bet number display means has a plurality of display areas (for example, “BL1” to “BL3”) corresponding to the bet number of the game value, and when the replay is activated, the display contents of the plurality of display areas are displayed. It is possible to perform bet production that changes sequentially,
When the specific effect is executed, when sequentially changing the display contents of the plurality of display areas in the bet effect, each of them has a display mode different from the normal display mode,
Even if the specific effect is executed, if an error occurs, the display contents of the plurality of display areas are not changed sequentially, and the final display content in the bet effect is different from usual. A gaming machine characterized by displaying as a display mode.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, in the normal state, it is possible to perform the specific effect with different probabilities depending on the degree of expectation of giving the advantageous state. That is, there are cases where it is possible to infer the degree of expectation of giving an advantageous state, using the execution frequency of the specific effect as a clue. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state changes, it is possible to maintain the game motivation and interest. Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the specific effect is performed by changing the display mode of the bet number display. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect device or the like for performing the specific effect, and the specific effect can be performed in the natural flow of the game. As a result, with a general-purpose configuration, it is possible to perform an effect that enhances the game motivation and interest.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a pseudo bet effect is performed at the time of the operation of the replay, but the specific effect is also performed in a manner in accordance with the flow of such bet effect. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that enhances the game motivation and interest in a manner that is more comfortable. Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, when the specific effect is performed while an error is occurring, the final display content is only displayed without following the flow of the bet effect. With this, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect and prevent the player from making a difference in the obtained information even when an error occurs.

[A gaming machine of invention 18 according to a detailed example]
In a conventional gaming machine, as a re-play combination, for example, a combination of a first re-play combination that wins by displaying a combination of symbols composed of replay designs and a design composed of small-competition designs is displayed. It is known that the second re-gaming combination is performed (for example, see JP-A-2014-124467).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, when a replay combination is won, it is possible to make a bet effect as in a normal bet operation.

However, in the gaming machine as disclosed in JP-A-2014-124467, when such a bet effect is performed, a winning combination different from the re-playing combination, such as the above-mentioned second re-playing combination, is won. When a stop display mode that can be recognized by the player is displayed as described above, the player can easily recognize that the winning of the re-gaming combination is like the first re-gaming combination described above. If a bet effect similar to the case where the possible stop display mode is displayed is performed, there is a problem that the player may be confused.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing the player from being confused even when the player has a plurality of stop display modes of the re-playing combination. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Re-game operation means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of operating the re-game in response to the stop display mode of the re-game combination being displayed,
A game machine provided with bet effect means (for example, a bet lamp display unit (BL)) capable of performing a bet effect when the re-game is operated,
The stop display mode of the re-play combination includes a first stop display mode (for example, a normal re-play display mode) that makes it easy for the player to recognize that the re-play combination is a prize, and a re-play combination. Is a second stop display mode (for example, a special re-play display mode) that allows the player to recognize that the winning combination is a different winning combination, and the player is allowed to recognize which winning combination the winning combination is. And a third stop display mode (for example, special replay display mode) that makes it difficult to include,
The bet effect means can perform a bet effect having different effect modes at least when the first stop display mode is displayed and when the third stop display mode is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

The bet effect means is different when the first stop display mode is displayed, when the second stop display mode is displayed, and when the third stop display mode is displayed. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible to perform a betting effect in an effect mode.

When a specific re-game combination (for example, “F_confirmed cherry”) is won, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined procedure (for example, the right first stop), the first stop display mode is displayed. The second stop display mode when the stop operation is performed at a procedure different from the predetermined procedure (for example, other than the right first stop) and at a specific timing (for example, a timing at which the pressed position is ◯). Is displayed, and a stop operation is performed at a procedure different from the predetermined procedure (for example, other than the first right stop) and at a timing different from the specific timing (for example, a timing of pressing position x). Is capable of displaying the third stop display mode, the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize the winning combination of the re-play combination and the first stop display mode that facilitates the recognition of the winning combination. Between the third stop display mode that makes it difficult to perform, or the first stop display mode that makes it easier for the player to recognize that the winning of the re-gaming combination is made, and the re-gaming combination being different. Between the second stop display mode in which it is possible for the player to recognize it as a prize and the third stop display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize which winning combination the prize is It is possible to change the production mode of the bet production. This can prevent the player from being confused even when there are a plurality of stop display modes of the re-play combination.

Further, according to the gaming machine configured as described above, when a specific re-play combination is won, all of the first stop display mode, the second stop display mode, and the third stop display mode may be displayed. However, for example, it is possible to change the playability by a difference in the stop display mode, but even in such a case, it is possible to make an appropriate bet effect. Further, the playability can be suggested by the bet production.

[A game machine of invention 19 according to a detailed example]
A conventional gaming machine that has a plurality of music patterns with different composition contents, and that enables a music according to one selected music pattern to be output during a specific state (for example, a special game state) Is known (see, for example, JP-A-2015-142693).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, when an event such as a power failure or an error occurs during the specific state, the output of the music is interrupted. Then, when the event that has occurred is eliminated, the music output can be restarted from the position where it was interrupted, or it can be restarted from the beginning.

However, it is not uncommon for the player to feel uncomfortable in any of the restart modes. Therefore, in the music production, when the interruption event occurs and is restarted, further improvement is required.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and a game machine capable of preventing a player from feeling uncomfortable when resuming after an interruption event occurs in music production. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A music output means (for example, a speaker group 84) capable of outputting a music in a specific state (for example, a pseudo bonus), and a music pattern capable of selecting a music pattern output by the music output means from a plurality of music patterns A gaming machine comprising a selection means (for example, a sub CPU 201),
The plurality of music patterns include at least a first music pattern (for example, music performance data 1 shown in (a) of FIG. 119) composed of a first unique part (for example, intro part A) and a common part. , And a second music pattern (for example, music effect data 3 shown in (c) of FIG. 119) including a second unique portion (for example, intro portion C) and the common portion,
The music output means,
When the first music pattern is selected, it is possible to repeatedly output the music of the common part after outputting the music of the first unique part,
When the second music pattern is selected, it is possible to repeatedly output the music of the common part after outputting the music of the second unique part,
After one of the music patterns is selected by the music pattern selection means at a specific timing in the specific state, an interruption event (for example, power failure, error, door opening, etc.) occurs during the specific state, and When the output of the music by the music output means is interrupted, regardless of which music pattern was selected, when the output of the music by the music output means is resumed, the music of the second music pattern is A gaming machine characterized by outputting from the beginning.

The plurality of music patterns are for notifying that extension of the specific state has been determined,
The first music pattern is a pattern in which the music output is started when the specific state is started,
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the second music pattern is a pattern in which output of music is started in the middle of the specific state.

According to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, when only a part of the outflow is different and a plurality of musical performances in which a common musical composition is output can be executed, no matter which musical performance is being executed, it is interrupted. When resuming after the occurrence of an event, a specific musical performance is restarted from the beginning. That is, the mode of restarting after the occurrence of the interruption event is the same. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the music production is restarted after an interruption event occurs.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, the music effect is used as an effect for notifying the extension of the specific state. When the interruption event occurs and is restarted, the musical effect, which is always informed of the extension of the specific state, is restarted from the beginning. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the unpleasant sensation at the time of resuming the production, while enhancing the interest of the music production.

[A gaming machine of invention 20 according to a detailed example]
In the conventional gaming machine, if the bet gaming value is the first amount, it is possible to determine that the predetermined symbol combination is allowed to be displayed, while the specific symbol combination is displayed. If the bet game value is the second amount, it is possible to determine that a specific symbol combination is permitted to be displayed, while the predetermined value is determined. It is known that it is possible to change the playability according to the amount of the game value bet by not allowing the combination of symbols to be displayed. , Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-230776).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, while it is possible to change the game characteristic, it is necessary to accurately grasp the information regarding the game characteristic such as the current state and the type of symbol combination permitted to be displayed. Becomes difficult, and the difficulty level of the game becomes high. Therefore, it is desirable to present such information to the player as much as possible.

However, for example, while a gaming machine equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device can display such information, a gaming machine without a display device cannot display such information. There are cases. Moreover, if such information is displayed on a gaming machine equipped with a display device, there are cases where the display region of the display device limits the area that can be used for presentation.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of displaying information regarding game playability with a general-purpose configuration.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A plurality of symbols can be variably displayed in a plurality of columns, and is a gaming machine that plays a game by stopping the variable display of symbols in accordance with a stop operation of the player,
Stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) capable of accepting the stop operation of the player,
In the stop operation means, a first state in which it is possible to accept a stop operation of a player (for example, “when stop is permitted”) and a second state in which it is not possible to accept a stop operation of a player (for example, A stop state notification unit (for example, stop state notification units 117L, 117C, 117R) capable of displaying which state of “other than stop permission”),
The game machine characterized in that the stop state informing means is capable of suggesting information regarding game playability by the display mode of the first state and the display mode of the second state.

A display determination unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process and a reel stop control process) capable of determining a combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed according to the bet game value amount,
Depending on the amount of game value bet and the determination result by the display determining means, the game characteristic varying means capable of varying the game characteristic (for example, 3 bet state between 2BB flags and 3 bet between 3BB flags). The state, and the main CPU101) capable of changing the game play,
The display determination means,
When the bet game value amount is the first amount (for example, three cards), it is determined to allow the display of the first special symbol combination (for example, “BB02” which is the symbol combination relating to 3BB). Enable and
Even in the state where the display of the combination of the first special symbols is permitted (for example, between 3BB flags), the betted game value amount is the second amount (for example, two cards) in the game. 1 It is not possible to decide to allow the display of a combination of special symbols,
When the bet game value amount is the second amount, it is possible to decide to allow the display of the second special symbol combination (for example, "BB01" which is the symbol combination related to 2BB),
Even in a state in which the display of the combination of the second special symbols is permitted (for example, between 2BB flags), in the game in which the bet game value amount is the first amount, the combination of the second special symbols To allow the display of
At least when the game value varying means is a state in which the display of the combination of the first special symbols is permitted and the bet game value amount is the first amount, and the second special symbol When the display of the combination is permitted and the bet game value amount is the first amount, it is possible to change the playability.
The stop state notification means,
If the combination of the first special symbol or the combination of the second special symbol can be displayed in the current game by the display mode of the first state, it can be suggested to that effect,
According to the display mode of the second state, when the display of the combination of the first special symbol is permitted or the display of the combination of the second special symbol is permitted, it can be suggested to that effect. The gaming machine described above.

A plurality of symbols can be variably displayed in a plurality of columns, and is a gaming machine that plays a game by stopping the variable display of symbols in accordance with a stop operation of the player,
Stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) capable of accepting the stop operation of the player,
In the stop operation means, a first state in which it is possible to accept a stop operation of the player (for example, "at the time of stop permission") and a second state in which it is not possible to accept a stop operation of the player (for example, Stop state notifying means (for example, stop state notifying sections 117L, 117C, 117R) capable of displaying which state of “other than stop permission”),
Display determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs internal lottery processing and reel stop control processing) that can determine the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed according to the game state (for example, the game state shown in FIG. 120),
Equipped with
The stop state notification means,
It is possible to suggest the determination result by the display determination means by the display mode of the first state,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming state can be suggested by the display mode of the second state.

According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, since the information about game playability can be suggested by using the notification means for notifying whether the stop operation can be accepted, the information about game playability is notified. It is not necessary to provide the notification means of. Therefore, it is possible to show the information regarding the game playability with a general-purpose configuration.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, it is determined whether or not the display of the combination of the special symbols of any kind is permitted according to the betting game value amount. Further, even if the display of any combination of special symbols is already permitted, whether or not the combination of the special symbols is displayed varies depending on the bet game value amount. Has become. Further, it is possible to change the game property according to the bet game value amount and which type of special symbol combination is allowed to be displayed. Then, using the notification means for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted, if there is a combination of special symbols that is permitted to be displayed in the game this time, in addition to that, It is also informed that the display of the combination of special symbols of the type is permitted. Therefore, even when the game is complicated, the information about the game can be appropriately notified.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, it may be possible to suggest the combination of the game state and the symbols permitted to be displayed, by using the notifying means for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted. Thereby, the information desired by the player can be appropriately notified with a general-purpose configuration.

[Game Machine of Invention 21 According to One Detailed Example]
In the conventional gaming machine, it is known that the payout rate is set to one of the six setting steps and the lottery can be performed based on the set value (for example, (See JP 2004-24557 A).

However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the gaming shop side can select the advantageous degree (playability) of the player only within the range of six stages, and the range of operation is limited. ..

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of selecting a game property with a greater number of options than the number of preset setting steps.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A plurality of symbols can be variably displayed in a plurality of columns, and a gaming machine (for example, a pachi-slot 1) that plays a game by stopping the variable display of the symbols according to a stop operation of the player,
A setting value determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a setting change confirmation process) capable of determining any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages.
And a combination lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning combination on the condition according to the setting value determined by the setting value determining means,
The role lottery means,
When the first setting value (for example, setting 6) is determined by the setting value determining means, a specific special role (for example, bonus 1) can be determined with a predetermined probability,
When the second setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 5) is determined by the setting value determining means, the specific special role cannot be determined, or the specific special role is more than the predetermined probability. Determined with a low probability,
The specific special role is a carry-over-possible combination, and even if a new setting value is determined by the setting value determination means while the specific special role is being carried over, Configured to be maintained,
When the second setting value is determined by the setting value determining means, the degree of advantage is made different between a state in which the specific special role is carried over and a state in which the specific special role is not carried over. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible.

When the second setting value is determined by the setting value determination means in a state where the specific special role has not been carried over, an operation instruction for transitioning to a state in which the specific special role is carried over. The gaming machine described above, further comprising operation instruction means (for example, a display device 11 that displays an operation instruction (screen)) that enables the operation instruction.

Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, advantageous zone) advantageous to the player, and when the advantageous state ends, information regarding transition determination to the advantageous state is initialized. The advantageous state includes an increasing state (for example, an increasing section) in which the game value increases and a non-increasing state (for example, an effect section) in which the game value does not increase, including an initialization unit (for example, the main CPU 101). In the case where the second setting value is determined by the setting value determining means, the state in which the specific special role is carried over is at least as much as the state in which the specific special role is not carried over. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein an average period from the start of the increasing state to the end of the advantageous state until the initialization by the initialization means is long.

According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player, so that the game store side Not only can select the degree of advantage (playability) of the player (from among the options for this set value), but also set a specific set value (for example, setting 6) and set a specific special character ( For example, depending on whether or not the bonus 1) is carried over, and which setting value is set in the state, it is possible to further select the degree of advantage (playability) of the player. Therefore, it becomes possible to select the game property with more options than the number of setting stages designed in advance.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, it is possible to give an operation instruction for selecting a degree of advantage (playability) of the player, so that the operator can obtain the degree of advantage of the player (gamability) regardless of the skill. ) Can be selected appropriately. Therefore, even when it is possible to select the game property with more options than the number of setting stages designed in advance, it is possible to prevent the operator from being confused.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a predetermined set value (for example, settings 1 to 5) is set, a state in which a specific special role is carried over is carried over to a specific special role. The average period from the start of the increase state (for example, the increase section) to the end of the advantageous state (for example, the advantage section) and initialization of the information regarding the transition determination to the advantageous state is greater than that of the non-state. It is possible to make the advantage degree of the player different by making it longer. As a result, the playability can be selected in a mode that is of greater interest to the player, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Game Machine of Invention 22 According to One Detailed Example]
In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to set a normal section and an advantageous section as a state in which a game is played, the effect state is set to the AT state (advantageous state) in the advantageous section, and the AT state is set at the end of the advantageous section. In this case, it is known that it is possible to forcibly end the AT state by the initialization process even if a predetermined termination condition for the AT state is not satisfied (for example, JP-A-2017-185099). (See the official gazette).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high, but since the advantageous state suddenly ends in the middle, the player feels discomfort, etc. There is a problem in that it may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which the player's emotions are taken into consideration while suppressing excessive gambling. To do.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A plurality of symbols can be variably displayed in a plurality of columns, and a gaming machine (for example, a pachi-slot 1) that plays a game by stopping the variable display of the symbols according to a stop operation of the player,
An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo bonus), a specific state (for example, a production section) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. An initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section), and a state control unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs transition control between the states,
The specific state is a first specific state with a high degree of expectation of transition to the advantageous state (for example, the first section of the advantageous section) and a second specific state with a low degree of expectation of transition to the advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section). The second section of), and,
The state control means,
In the specific state, when the transition condition to the advantageous state is satisfied (for example, when the pseudo bonus is won), control to the advantageous state,
The advantageous state and the specific state are set as a series of advantageous sections, the game period in the series of advantageous sections is managed, and when the management period reaches a predetermined period (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter is normally limited ( When the number of games) becomes a value to be executed), the initial state is controlled regardless of which of the advantageous state and the specific state,
When the advantageous state ends before the management period reaches the predetermined period, the initial state is controlled,
When controlling to the initial state, the management period is initialized,
In the initial state, when the transition condition to the specific state is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous zone is won), the gaming machine is controlled to the first specific state.

The state control means is capable of extending the game period of the advantageous state when the extension condition is satisfied in the advantageous state,
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein when the game period in the advantageous state is extended, the game period in the advantageous state can be extended so as not to exceed the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are managed as a series of advantageous sections, and when the management period reaches a predetermined period, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly ended and controlled to the initial state. It Further, the initial state is also controlled when the advantageous state ends before the predetermined period. When the initial state is controlled, the management period is initialized. The specific state includes a first specific state with a high degree of expectation of transition to the advantageous state and a second specific state with a low degree of expectation of transition to the advantageous state, but in the case of transition from the initial state to the specific state. The first specific state is controlled. In other words, even when the initial state, which is inherently disadvantageous, is transitioned to, the expected state of transition to the advantageous state is high in the specific state (first specific state) transitioned from the initial state. The possibility that the section will be forcibly terminated is also reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and the like, while suppressing the gambling property from becoming excessively high, and thus it is possible to consider the emotion of the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, even when the gaming period in the advantageous state is extended, the extended period does not exceed the period in which a series of advantageous sections is forcibly ended. ing. That is, while allowing the game period of the advantageous section to be variable, it is possible to prevent the extra game period from being extended. Therefore, while maintaining the interest of the game, it is possible to appropriately suppress excessive gambling.

[Game Machine of Invention 23 According to One Detailed Example]
In the conventional gaming machine, it is known that the carry-over state of the special combination is set to a high RT state in which the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is high, and it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, AT state) in the high RT state. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-202330).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, in the carry-over state of the special combination, the RT state does not transit even when, for example, a combination of specific symbols is displayed. For this reason, a single RT state is maintained in the advantageous state, and there is a problem that change in the advantage degree of the advantageous state is poor.

The present invention is made in view of such a point, and even when it is possible to control the carry-over state of the special role to the advantageous state, the advantage degree of the advantageous state is rich in change. An object is to provide a gaming machine capable of playing.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3CL, 3CR, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process),
In accordance with the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means capable of stopping variable display of symbols (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing),
When a special combination (for example, RB) is determined as an internal winning combination, a carry-over means for controlling the carry-over state of the special combination (for example, during RB carry-over) until a combination of symbols related to the special combination is displayed ( For example, the main CPU 101) which stores the carryover information in the carryover combination storing area,
At least a first specific state (for example, RT2) and a second specific state (for example, RT3) in which the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is different, and when not in the carry-over state, between the respective states according to the combination of the symbols displayed. A specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that transits the RT state) for performing the transition control of
When a specific start condition is satisfied, advantageous state control means (for example, AT state) that controls to an advantageous state (for example, an AT state) in which information of a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified until a specific end condition is satisfied. And a main CPU 101),
The internal winning combination determination means,
When the carry-over state is set in the first specific state, the internal winning combination is determined according to the winning probability of the re-game combination in the first specific state in the carry-over state,
When it becomes the carryover state in the second specific state, the internal winning combination is determined according to the winning probability of the re-game combination in the second specific state in the carryover state,
The probability of losing is different when the carryover state is set in the first specific state and when the carryover state is set in the second specific state,
The combination of symbols relating to the special combination is configured to be displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation of the player when the loss occurs in the carryover state,
The specific start condition can be satisfied when the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination,
The specific ending condition can be satisfied when a combination of symbols related to the special combination is displayed.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3CL, 3CR, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process),
In accordance with the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means capable of stopping variable display of symbols (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing),
When a special combination (for example, RB) is determined as an internal winning combination, a carry-over means for controlling the carry-over state of the special combination (for example, during RB carry-over) until a combination of symbols related to the special combination is displayed ( For example, the main CPU 101) which stores the carryover information in the carryover combination storing area,
At least a first specific state (for example, RT2) and a second specific state (for example, RT3) in which the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is different, and when not in the carry-over state, between the respective states according to the combination of the symbols displayed. A specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that transits the RT state) for performing the transition control of
There is at least a first advantageous state (for example, a first increase section) and a second advantageous state (for example, a second increase section) as an advantageous state (for example, an AT state) in which information of a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified. Then, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first advantageous state is controlled until the first end condition is satisfied, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the second end condition is satisfied. An advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for controlling the second advantageous state until
The internal winning combination determination means,
When the carry-over state is set in the first specific state, the internal winning combination is determined according to the winning probability of the re-game combination in the first specific state in the carry-over state,
When it becomes the carryover state in the second specific state, the internal winning combination is determined according to the winning probability of the re-game combination in the second specific state in the carryover state,
The probability of losing is different when the carryover state is set in the first specific state and when the carryover state is set in the second specific state,
The combination of symbols related to the special combination is configured to be displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation of the player when the loss occurs in the carryover state,
The first start condition can be satisfied when the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination,
The first ending condition can be satisfied when a combination of symbols related to the special combination is displayed,
The first start condition and the second start condition are different conditions,
A game machine characterized in that the first end condition and the second end condition are different conditions.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the symbol display means is configured to variably display the plurality of symbols in four or more columns.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the carry-over state of the special combination, the winning probability of the re-gaming combination when the special combination is won is inherited and the internal winning combination is determined. As a result, the probability of losing is different in the carry-over state of the special role. If the special combination is lost in the carry-over state, the combination of symbols relating to the special combination is always displayed. In addition, it is possible to control in an advantageous state during the period from when the special combination is won until the combination of symbols related to the special combination is displayed. That is, it is possible to change the advantage degree of the advantageous state according to the winning probability of the re-game combination when the special combination is won. Therefore, even when the carry-over state of the special combination can be controlled to the advantageous state, the advantage degree of the advantageous state can be varied.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, in addition to the first advantageous state that starts when a special combination is won and ends when a combination of symbols related to the special combination is displayed, that the special combination is won. May be provided with a second advantageous state that starts under different conditions and ends under conditions different from the display of the symbol combination related to the special combination. Thereby, even if the special combination is not won, it can be expected to be controlled in an advantageous state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, it is desirable that the symbol display row is four rows or more. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the degree of freedom of the symbol arrangement is increased and the symbol arrangement does not feel uncomfortable without increasing the number of steps.

1... Pachi-slot, 3L, 3C, 3R... Reel, 4... Reel display window, 6... Information display, 11... Display device, 17L, 17C, 17R... Stop button, 18... Sub display device, 71... Main control board, 72... Sub control board, 90... Main control circuit, 91... Microprocessor, 101... Main CPU, 102... Main ROM, 103... Main RAM, 107... Arithmetic circuit, 114... First serial communication circuit, 115... Second serial Communication circuit, 200... Sub control circuit, 201... Sub CPU 201, 301... First interface board, 302... Second interface board

Claims (3)

A symbol display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A winning combination determination means capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a first combination and a second combination,
Based on the winning combination and the player's stop operation determined by the winning combination determining means, a stop control means capable of stopping variable display of symbols, and a gaming machine,
Any one of a plurality of states including a first state in which a privilege can be awarded when the first combination is won and a second state in which the privilege can be awarded when a second combination is won. A state determining means capable of determining
A state display means capable of displaying a state suggestion display including a first display suggesting the first state and a second display suggesting the second state;
If a specific start condition is satisfied, a notification period control means for controlling to a notification period in which information of the stop operation can be notified to the player for a specific period, and
The state display means displays the state suggestion display according to the determination result by the state determination means for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period,
When not controlled to the notification state, it is possible to determine whether or not the specific start condition is satisfied when the privilege granted in the first state and the second state has a predetermined result. ,
When controlled to the notification state, it is possible to determine whether to extend the specific period when the privilege granted in the first state and the second state has the predetermined result. A gaming machine characterized by. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the state determining means determines a state in a predetermined game in the second period according to a winning combination in the game. The state determining means,
If the first combination is won in the game, the state in the predetermined game in the second period is determined to be the first state,
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein when the second winning combination is won in the game, the state in the predetermined game of the second period is determined to be the second state.

Images